PATRONS

Hon. Mr. Balasaheb Anandrao Shinde

(President, Shikshan Prasarak Sanstha, Kavathe Mahankal)
Hon. Suresh Patil
(Vice-President, Shikshan Prasarak Sanstha, Kavathe Mahankal)
Hon. Mr. Sudarshan Balasaheb Shinde
(Secretary, Shikshan Prasarak Sanstha, Kavathe Mahankal)
Dr. Ashok Vishvambar Babar
(Retd. Principal, Padmabhushan Vasantraodada Patil Mahavidyalaya,
Kavathe Mahankal)
Hon. Vishal Balasaheb Shinde
(President, P. V. P. Mahavidyalaya, K, Mahankal, Alumni Association)
ADVISORY COMMITTEE
Hon. Prof. (Dr.) D. T. Shirke
(Vice-Chancellor, Shivaji University, Kolhapur)
Hon. Prof. (Dr.) P. S. Patil
(Pro Vice-Chancellor, Shivaji University, Kolhapur)
Dr. M. S. Deshmukh
(Director, IQAC Shivaji University, Kolhapur)
Prof. (Dr.) P. B. Mane
(Head, Department of English, Shivaji University, Kolhapur)
Co-Convener:
Dr. M. M. Shinde Dr. S. A. Babar
Dr. B. H. Mohite Mr. H. V. Pawar
Mr. A. S. Pawar Mr. M. M. Kamble
Organizing Committee:
Dr. R. S. Sutar Mrs. P. R. Mali
Dr. R. A. Sanadi Dr. S. L. Andelwar
Mr. R. R. Vasave Dr. S. P. Solage
Mr. R. B. Rathod Mr. S. N. Phakade
Mr. D. M. Godase Mr. N. S. Waghmare
Mr. S. S. Gadhire Mr. S. N. Shinde
Price: 600 /-

© 2024 by Author’s

All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be

reproduced or transmitted, in any form or by any means, without
prior permission of the author. Any person who does any
unauthorized act in relation to this publication may be liable to
criminal prosecution and civil claims for damages. [The
responsibility for the facts stated, conclusions reached, etc., is
entirely that of the author. The publisher is not responsible for
them, whatsoever.]

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8
Published by,
Lulu Publication
3101 Hillsborough St,
Raleigh, NC 27607,
United States.
Printed by,
Laxmi Book Publication,
258/34, Raviwar Peth, Solapur,
Maharashtra, India.
Contact No. : 9595359435
Website: http://www.lbp.world
Email ID: [email protected]
 Message

Principal,
Padmabhushan Vasantraodada Patil Mahavidyalaya,
Kavathe Mahankal

It gives me immense pleasure to extend my warmest

congratulations to all the researchers, scholars, and participants of our
National Conference on Bridging Boundaries Multidisciplinary Research
in Science Commerce and Humanities. The conference organized by our
college's Internal Quality Assurance Cell and Research Development
Cell has provided a platform for interdisciplinary dialogue,
collaboration, and dissemination of knowledge.
I am delighted to see the high-quality research papers
submitted for the conference, reflecting the innovative and
groundbreaking research being conducted in various fields of science,
commerce, and humanities. These papers showcase the dedication, hard
work, and intellectual curiosity of our researchers, and their
contributions are invaluable in advancing our understanding and
knowledge in diverse disciplines.
I am pleased to announce that the research papers presented at
the conference will be compiled and published in a conference
proceeding, ensuring that the valuable insights, findings, and
discoveries shared during the conference reach a wider audience and
contribute to the scholarly discourse. This proceeding will serve as a
testament to the collective efforts and achievements of our researchers
and a valuable resource for academics, professionals, and students
alike.
I would like to express my gratitude to the organizing
committee, reviewers, authors, and all those involved in making this
conference a success. Your dedication and commitment to advancing
multidisciplinary research are truly commendable.
I am confident that the research papers published in this
proceeding will inspire further research, promote collaboration across
disciplines, and foster a culture of academic excellence and innovation. I
encourage all researchers to continue pushing the boundaries of
knowledge and exploring new frontiers in their respective fields.
I extend my best wishes to all the contributors to the
proceeding and look forward to seeing the impact of your research in
shaping the future of science, commerce, and humanities.
Best regards,
 Convener
Assistant Professor, Department of English, Padmabhushan
Vasantraodada Patil Mahavidyalaya, Kavathe Mahankal

Greetings to all the esteemed researchers, scholars, and

participants of our National Conference on Bridging Boundaries
Multidisciplinary Research in Science Commerce and Humanities. It is
with great pleasure and pride that I address you all on this occasion.
The conference organized by our college's Internal Quality
Assurance Cell and Research Development Cell has provided a unique
platform for researchers from diverse backgrounds to come together,
exchange ideas, and explore new horizons in multidisciplinary research.
The insightful presentations, engaging discussions, and valuable
interactions that took place during the conference have enriched our
understanding of the complexities and nuances of interdisciplinary
research.
I am thrilled to announce that the research papers submitted to
the conference will be compiled and published in a proceeding,
preserving the innovative research, ground-breaking discoveries, and
thought-provoking insights shared by our participants. This proceeding
will serve as a testament to the collective efforts and intellectual
contributions of our researchers and will be a valuable resource for
scholars, practitioners, and enthusiasts in various fields.
I would like to express my heartfelt gratitude to all the authors,
reviewers, presenters, and attendees who have contributed to the
success of this conference. Your dedication, passion for research, and
commitment to excellence have been truly commendable, and I am
confident that the research papers published in this proceeding will
make a significant impact in advancing knowledge and fostering
collaboration across disciplines.
I encourage all the contributors to continue pushing the
boundaries of research, challenging conventional wisdom, and
exploring new avenues of inquiry. Your research has the potential to
shape the future of science, commerce, and humanities, and I look
forward to witnessing the profound impact of your work in the
academic community and beyond.
Thank you once again to everyone who has been a part of this
journey. Your enthusiasm, intellect, and spirit of inquiry have been a
source of inspiration to us all.
Warm regards,
 CONTENT

Sr. PAGE
TITLE
No NO.

THE PARADOX OF TECHNOLOGY IN RAY

BRADBURY'S FAHRENHEIT 451: A CRITICAL
1. EXAMINATION 1
Dr. R. Vidhiya
TRADITION IN GIRISH KARNAD’S
2. HAYAVADANA: A NATIVISTIC STUDY 4
Mr. Shivaji Shankar Kamble
ASSESSMENT OF FARMERS FERTILIZER
PRACTICES AND PERCEPTIONS IN KAVATHE
3. MAHANKAL TEHSIL OF SANGLI DISTRICT 12
Amar S. Pawar*, Subhash V. Patil**
A GEOGRAPHICAL STUDY OF CHANGING CROP
4. PATTERN IN MAHARASHTRA, INDIA 15
Mr. D. B. Vyawahare1 and Dr. A. S Jadhav2
COVID-19'S IMPACT ON HEALTHCARE
SYSTEMS
5. 24
Snehal Zarekar, Gurudas Shinde* and
Ritesh Nimbhore**
“A REFLECTION OF PARTITION LITERATURE
ON INDIAN SUBCONTINENT: AN
6. INTERDISCIPLINARY STUDY” 29
Pratiksha Ramesh Chavan1 , Ms. Sujata Kakaso
Mote2 and Raste Sourabh Ramchandra3
A STUDY OF GENERAL LAND USE PATTERN: A
CASE STUDY OF VILLAGE TISANGI, SANGLI
DISTRICT ( MAHARASHTRA) : A
7. GEOGRAPHICAL ANALYSIS 33
Dr. N. S. POL
 AGRO-TOURISM DEVELOPMENT IN SOLAPUR
DISTRICT, MAHARASHTRA: A GEOGRAPHICAL
8. 8
ANALYSIS 36
Mrs. Vaishali. P. Ghatage
AMBIENT NOISE MONITORING DURING
GANESH FESTIVAL IN SELECTED
9. METROPOLITAN CITIES OF MAHARASHTRA 40
Dr. Ramesh Hari Gavit and Dr. Dilip Akaram Gade
AN INTERDISCIPLINARY STUDY OF THE
IMPACT OF WAR ON LITERATURE AND
10. CULTURE 52
Nutan Hambirrao Olekar and
Sanket Dattatray Wathare
ANALYSIS OF USE OF MOBILE AND ITS IMPACT
ON CHILDREN’S HEALTH IN KAVATHE
11. 55
MAHANKAL TEHSIL
1Patil S. S. and 2Mali Priyanka

ANTHROPOCENTRIC ANALYSIS OF INDIVIDUAL

MEMORY: MATERIALITY OF A NO LONGER
12. 58
EXISTING PAST
Mr. Abhaysinh V. Deshmukh
AVAILABILITY, CONSUMPTION AND QUALITY
OF THE DOMESTIC WATER IN KAVATHE
13. MAHANKAL TEHSIL 62
M. K. Patil
CONNECTING ARTS AND SCIENCE IN
EDUCATION: IMPROVING LEARNING THROUGH
14. 67
INTERDISCIPLINARY APPROACHES
Madhuri Shrirang Patil
DECODING 'HARVEST': EXPLORING
SURROGACY, EXPLOITATION, AND GENDER
DYNAMICS FROM VARIOUS DISCIPLINARY
15. ANGLES 69
Ashok Bhau Kolekar1 and Dr. Youraj Gonde2
 DIGITIZATION & HISTORIOGRAPHY
16. Mr. Pratik Lalaso Sonawale and 73
Dr. Kiran Sampat Jadhav
EXPLORING THE EFFICACY OF INTERDISCIPLINARY
PROJECT-BASED LEARNING IN BLENDING STEM
17. AND HUMANITIES SUBJECTS 76
Ms. Mrunal R Mohite
EXPLORING THE EXTENSIVE IMPACT OF
LINGUISTIC VARIETY ON COMMUNICATION
18. INTERACTIONS 84
Mr. Sachin Subrav Gadhire 1 and
Mr. Rahul Rajiv Shinde2
FLORISTIC DIVERSITY OF DANDOBA HILLS,
19. DIST – SANGLI (MS) 92
Mr. Saideep Mahadeo Sabale (M. Sc.)
IMPACT OF ORGANIC AND INORGANIC
FERTILIZERS ON GRAPE PRODUCTION AND
20. FARMER SATISFACTION IN KAVATHE 100
MAHANKAL TEHSIL
1G. D. Satpute, 2R. Devarshi

INDIAN WAR LITERATURE HORIZON OF

21. RESEARCH OPPORTUNITIES UNDEREXPLORED 104
Shrikant B. Walwadkar
INVESTIGATION OF A SIMPLE AND CHEAP
SOURCE OF NATURAL INDICATORS IN ACID-
22. BASE TITRATION 108
Amar S. Pawar*, Subhash V. Patil**
MAGNITUDE RANKING METHOD APPROACH
FOR OPTIMIZING FUZZY ASSIGNMENT
23. PROBLEM 112
Pallavi S. Sabale and Dr. P. R. Chavan
MULTICULTURALISM IN SAADAT HASAN
24. MANTO’S SHORT STORIES 117
Dr. Appaso Shivaji Kolekar
 MULTIDISCIPLINARY STUDY: EXPLORING NEW
25. HORIZONS FOR SOCIOLOGY 120
Surendranath Ashok Babar
NATIONAL EDUCATION POLICY 2020 IN
INCLUSIVE DEVELOPMENT SCENARIO: AN
26. OVERVIEW 124
Asst. Prof. Chandrakant Bhupal Patil
NEW TRENDS IN COMMERCE EDUCATION
27. 131
Dr. Bhagwan Hanamant Mohite
PALLIATIVE DRUG AWARENESS AND
UTILIZATION AMONG ATHLETES IN
28. MAHARASHTRA 135
Dr. Mayur Mohanrao Shinde1 and Amar Anil Tupe2
COMPARISON OF SOME PREDICTION
INTERVALS FOR A FUTURE OBSERVATION
29. FROM WEIBULL DISTRIBUTION 141
S. K. Powara,*, M. K. Patilb
“PSYCHOLOGICAL CONFLICTS IN ANITA DESAI’S
IN CUSTODY AND ALICE WALKER’S THE COLOR
30. PURPLE: A COMPARATIVE STUDY.” 148
Makrand Ramrao Wakde and Dr. Waghmare S. S.
RATIONAL EMOTIVE BEHAVIOR THERAPY AS A
MEDIUM FOR THE ELIMINATION OF
31. SUPERSTITIONS IN INDIA 151
Dr. Vinod Kamble
SOCIO-ECONOMIC STATUS OF KATALI NIVADE
AND MALHARPETH VILLAGES OF KOLHAPUR
32. DISTRICT: A GEOGRAPHICAL PERSPECTIVE 154
*Dipak M. Godase , **Dr. Tushar T. Waghmare and
***Dr. Prakash T. Waghmare
“SPIDER DIVERSITY (FAMILY:SALTICIDAE)
FROM DROUGHT PRONE REGION SANGOLA,
33. DISTRICT SOLAPUR (M.S.)INDIA.” 161
Sawant S.R.*, Kamble V.S.**
 STATISTICAL ANALYSIS OF PERFORMANCE OF
UNDERGRADUATE STUDENTS IN KAVATHE
34. MAHANKAL TEHSIL: EXPLORING FACTORS 166
INFLUENCING ACADEMIC SUCCESS
Koshti V.V. , Kute Pranav*
STATISTICAL MECHANICS ANALYSIS OF THE
PARTITION FUNCTION FOR SCHWARZSCHILD
35. BLACK HOLES: GRAPHICAL INSIGHTS INTO 172
THERMODYNAMIC BEHAVIOUR
1Raj P. Hasabe and 2S.S. Shinde

STYLISTICS ANALYSIS: BABY KAMBLE’S

36. AUTOBIOGRAPHY “THE PRISON WE BROKE” 176
Prof. Amar Ravsaheb Gejage
SYNTHESIS OF 1,8-
DIOXODECAHYDROACRIDINE AND REDUCTION
OF P-NITROPHENOL TO
37. 181
P-AMINOPHENOL BY USING NiO-Al2O3 NANO
CATALYSTS
Radhakrishna S. Sutara, Meghshyam K. Patil b,*
THE AMERICAN DREAM AND LITERATURE: A
MULTIDISCIPLINARY APPROACH
38. 186
Miss. Sayali Satish Sadamate , Tejaswini Anil
Pawar , Ms. Vaishnavi Bhimrao Raste
THE CONVERGENCE OF INTERDISCIPLINARY
STUDIES WITH COMMERCE AND
MANAGEMENT PRESENTING A UNIQUE ITS
39. OWN SET OF TRENDS, CHALLENGES, AND 189
OPPORTUNITIES
Pooja Rahul Mali
"THE ESSENCE OF STRUGGLE: ANALYSING
ERNEST HEMINGWAY'S THE OLD MAN AND
THE SEA THROUGH A MULTIDISCIPLINARY
40. LENS" 199
Ms. Prajkta Adhikrao Dhole , Ms. Sarode Laxmi
Shivaji, Ms. Pinjari Simran Bandu
 TRENDS IN POLITICAL SCIENCE: A
41. MULTIDISCIPLINARY APPROACH 203
Mr. Nishikant Savanta Waghmare
BUOYANCY MACHINE FOR THE GENERATION
42. OF ELECTRICAL POWER 208
Sagar S. Shinde and Raj P. Hasabe
THE PROBLEM OF WHITE IDENTITY AND
43. CULTURE IN J. M. COETZEE’S DISGRACE 211
Zakade Parmeshwar V. and S.B.D.M. Atpadi
“THE REPRESENTATION OF WOMEN IN INDIAN
LITERATURE: A MULTIDISCIPLINARY
THEMATIC APPROACH”
44. 215
Ms. Poonam Nanasaheb Shivpuje
Mr. Hipparkar Vishvajit Bandu
Ms. Shinde Puja Adhikrao
THE ROLE OF EMOTIONAL INTELLIGENCE IN
45. BUSINESS DEVELOPMENT 219
Mr. Dipakkumar S Suryawanshi
THE STUDY OF GROWTH AND COMPOSITION
OF THE CENTRAL GOVERNMENT OF INDIA'S
46. REVENUE 222
Mr. Sakat D. L and Mr. Maner I. V.
THE STUDY OF THE FISCAL DEFICIT AND
FINANCING OF THE CENTRAL GOVERNMENT
47. 225
OF INDIA
Kiran Laxman Sakat
"TRANSFORMATIVE ROLES: ACADEMIC
48. LIBRARIES IN NEP 2020” 229
Mr. Mahesh Kamble
WESTERN WINDS: EXPLORING CULTURAL
INFLUENCE IN DURJOY DATTA'S 'SHE BROKE
49. UP, I DIDN'T! ... I JUST KISSED SOMEONE ELSE!'" 233
Mr. Suyash T. Kumbhar1, Dr. Sunanda S. Shelake2*,
 INDIAN CONSTITUTION AND BASIC
50. STRUCTURE DOCTRINE 237
Mr. Shrikant Namdev Phakade
ECOLOGICAL EXPLORATIONS:
INTERDISCIPLINARY PERSPECTIVES ON
51. GRAHAM SWIFT'S “WATERLAND” 242
Dr. Sujata P. Solage
THE FUTURE OF INTERDISCIPLINARY STUDIES:
52. TRENDS, CHALLENGES AND OPPORTUNITIES 246
Mr. Hanmant Shivaji Narale
“THE ROLE OF INTERDISCIPLINARY
COMMUNICATION & COLLABORATION IN
53. ACADEMIA AND TECHNIQUES TO FOSTER IT.” 251
Mr. Shivbhushan V. Jadhav
"EXPLORING MULTIDISCIPLINARITY IN
SCIENCE: THE INTERSECTION OF PHYSICS,
54. BOTANY, AND MATHEMATICS" 255
Mr. R. A. Dudhal , Mr. S. B. Patil and Mr. T. G. Patil
INTERDISCIPLINARY RESEARCH IN SPACE
55. EXPLORATION AND ASTROPHYSICS 259
Mrs. P. U. Mahamuni
UTILIZATION OF SOME FOLK MEDICINAL
PLANTS OF KAVATHE MAHANKAL TEHSIL OF
56. 263
SANGLI DISTRICT
BABAN T. JADHAV
FLUORESCENCE ENHANCEMENT-BASED
DETECTION OF SN2+ ION: SPECTROSCOPIC
57. 266
APPROACH
Avinash A. Kamble
EXPANDING FRONTIERS IN COMPUTER VISION
58. AND LANGUAGE FUSION 270
Snehal Zarekar and Gurudas Shinde*
A STUDY OF LIFE CYCLE OF SAMIA RICINI
UNDER LABORATORY CONDITION
59. 274
R. A. Sanadi1, A. D. Jadhav2,
S. B. Jamadar 3and R. Y. Mulla4
 "SHIFTING PARADIGMS: GENDER
REPRESENTATION IN MARATHI THEATRE
60. WITHIN A MULTICULTURAL CONTEXT" 280
Mr. Nitish Pandurang Shinde, 1 and
Mr. Shivbhushan V. Jadhav 2
THE INTERSECTION OF ART AND SCIENCE IN
61. EDUCATION 285
Mahammad Rauf Mahammad Ibrahim
'घनसाळ' कथासंग्रहातील धममचिककत्सा
62. 289
प्रा.डॉ.मोहन गोव दिं लोंढे

छत्रपती शिवाजी महाराजांिी आदिम संदेिवहन यंत्रणा

63. 293
डॉ. मधुकर व ठोबा जाध

नव्वदोत्तरी काळातील दशलत स्त्रियांिी आत्मकथने

64. 298
प्रा. अजुुन बिंडू राठोड
भारताच्या वन ववकासामध्ये शासकीय, ऄशासकीय सघं टनाच
ं ी अवण
65. स्थावनक समुदायाची भूवमका 302
Miss. Mane S.G.
महहला सक्षमीकरणात महहला बित गटािे योगदान
66. 307
जजतेंद्र मधुकर पेटकर , डॉ. व नोद मारोतरा मुडे
उपेवित दुगगरत्न- वकल्ले कोळदुगग
67. 312
Mr. Hariprasad Vitthal Pawar
“सातपुड्यातील अवदवासी लोकांच्या अरोग्याच्या वस्थतीचा ऄभ्यास
68. -ववशेष संदभग नंदुरबार वजल्हा 315
प्राचायय.डॉ. ददलीप रामभाऊ जगताप , प्रा. रामदास रमेश वसावे
"भारतातील कृ षी िेत्रातील उद्योजकतेच्या सध
ं ी व त्यापढु ील अव्हाने"
69. 320
श्री. श्रीनाथ महादेव दशिंदे
महाराष्ट्रातील सण-उत्सव ही ननसगम संस्कृती

70. डॉ. सरस्वती लक्ष्मणरा अिंदेल ार 324

 इक्कीसवी सदी की कनवता का बदलता स्वर
71. 328
डॉ. व नायक जि ाजी जििंदे
मानस का हंस और ऄमृतलाल नागर जी
72. 332
Dr. D. P. Thorat
छत्रपती राजषी शाहूप्रवणत स्त्री उन्नतीसाठी के लेल्या कायद्यांचा
73. ऄभ्यास 335
सागर हररचिंद्र एडके
 THE PARADOX OF TECHNOLOGY IN RAY BRADBURY'S FAHRENHEIT 451: A
CRITICAL EXAMINATION

Dr. R. Vidhiya
Research Scholar, Coimbatore – Tamilnadu.

ABSTRACT
Ray Bradbury's Fahrenheit 451 depicts a dystopian society where technology,
particularly in the form of mass media and censorship, plays a central role in controlling and
manipulating the populace. However, the novel also explores the paradoxical relationship
between technology and human connection, highlighting both its potential for liberation and its
capacity for oppression. This research paper aims to analyze the multifaceted portrayal of
technology in Fahrenheit 451, examining its role in fostering isolation and conformity while also
exploring its subversive potential as a tool for resistance and introspection. Through a close
reading of the novel's themes, characters, and narrative structure, this paper elucidates
Bradbury's nuanced commentary on the complex interplay between technology, knowledge,
and freedom.

KEYWORDS: Technology, Dystopia, Censorship, Mass Media, Isolation.

INTRODUCTION
Ray Bradbury's Fahrenheit 451 stands as a seminal work of dystopian literature, offering
a cautionary tale of a future society dominated by technology and mass media. Set in a world
where books are banned and critical thought is suppressed, the novel explores the
consequences of technological advancement on individual autonomy, intellectual freedom, and
human connection. This research paper seeks to critically examine the portrayal of technology
in Fahrenheit 451, analyzing its role in fostering conformity, isolation, and control, while also
exploring its potential as a catalyst for resistance and self-discovery. Through a comprehensive
analysis of the novel's themes, characters, and socio-political context, this paper aims to
elucidate Bradbury's nuanced commentary on the complexities of technological progress and its
impact on the human condition.

Technology and Control: The Mechanization of Society

In Fahrenheit 451, technology serves as a mechanism of social control, facilitating the
government's efforts to suppress dissent and maintain conformity. Mass media and
entertainment, such as the ubiquitous presence of television screens and the seashell radio
earbuds, serve as tools for distraction and manipulation, keeping the populace docile and
complacent. This is evident when Captain Beatty explains to Montag how the current role of the
fireman started: “The fact is we didn’t get along well until photography came into its own. Then
– motion pictures in the early twentieth century. Radio. Television. Things began to have mass”
(Bradbury 54). Moreover, censorship and information manipulation, exemplified by the burning
of books and the rewriting of history, reinforce the authoritarian regime's monopoly on
knowledge and truth. Surveillance technologies further exacerbate the erosion of privacy and
individual autonomy, creating a panoptic society where dissent is swiftly quashed.

Alienation and Isolation in the Digital Age

Despite the proliferation of technological devices, Fahrenheit 451portrays a society
characterized by profound alienation and social isolation. The decline of human connection is
evident in the superficial relationships depicted in the novel, where meaningful interaction is
supplanted by shallow exchanges and passive consumption which is evident in the words of
ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 1|P a g e
Montag who id disinterested towards his wife “I can’t talk to my wife; she listens to the walls. I
just want someone to hear what I have to say … And I want you to teach me to understand what
I read” (Bradbury 107).
Technology, instead of fostering genuine connection, becomes a barrier to intimacy and
empathy, perpetuating a culture of loneliness and disconnection. Moreover, the pervasive use of
technology as a means of distraction serves to numb individuals to the existential emptiness of
their lives, further exacerbating their sense of alienation from themselves and others.

Resistance and Subversion: The Power of Knowledge

Central to the narrative of Fahrenheit 451 is the subversive potential of knowledge and
critical thinking in challenging oppressive systems of control. Books, as symbols of intellectual
freedom and resistance, become catalysts for individual rebellion and collective awakening.
Through the character of Guy Montag, readers witness the transformative power of intellectual
curiosity and the courage to defy societal norms. Clarisse McClellan, with her unconventional
worldview and probing questions, embodies the subversive potential of curiosity and critical
engagement. Even Captain Beatty, the embodiment of the authoritarian regime, grapples with
the contradictions of technological control and the human desire for intellectual liberation
which is evident in the words of Captain Beatty’s justification of burning the books, Coloured
people don't like Little Black Sambo. Burn it. White people don't feel good about Uncle Tom's
Cabin. Burn it. Someone's written a book on tobacco and cancer of the lungs? The cigarette
people are weeping? Bum the book. Serenity, Montag. Peace, Montag. Take your fight outside.
Better yet, into the incinerator. (Bradbury 60)

Characters as Agents of Technological Commentary

In "Fahrenheit 451," characters serve as conduits for Bradbury's commentary on the
complex relationship between technology and humanity. Guy Montag's journey from conformity
to rebellion highlights the transformative power of knowledge and the quest for individual
agency in the face of technological determinism. Clarisse McClellan, with her outsider
perspective and insatiable curiosity, challenges societal norms and encourages Montag to
question his reality. Conversely, Captain Beatty embodies the contradictions of technological
control, simultaneously upholding the regime's authority while grappling with the existential
emptiness of a society devoid of intellectual freedom.

The Dystopian Landscape: Reflections on Contemporary Society

Bradbury's dystopian vision in Fahrenheit 451 offers poignant reflections on
contemporary society's relationship with technology and mass media. Parallels can be drawn
between the novel's themes and real-world technological trends, such as the rise of digital
media and the proliferation of surveillance technologies. The novel critiques the shallow
consumer culture and information overload that characterize modern life, warning of the
dangers of sacrificing critical thinking and human connection at the altar of technological
progress. Moreover, Fahrenheit 451 underscores the importance of preserving intellectual
freedom and resisting the encroachments of authoritarianism in an increasingly digitized world.

The Ambiguity of Technological Progress

Ultimately, Fahrenheit 451 presents a nuanced exploration of the ambiguity inherent in
technological progress. While technology offers the promise of innovation and convenience, it
also poses profound ethical and existential questions about its impact on human society and the
natural world. The novel challenges readers to consider the balance between technological
advancement and human flourishing, urging critical engagement with the social, political, and
ethical implications of technological innovation. Moreover, Fahrenheit 451underscores the
importance of safeguarding individual autonomy and intellectual freedom in the face of
technological determinism and societal conformity.
ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 2|P a g e
CONCLUSION
In conclusion, Ray Bradbury's Fahrenheit 451 offers a profound meditation on the
complexities of technology and its impact on human society. Through its portrayal of a
dystopian world dominated by mass media, censorship, and surveillance, the novel explores the
paradoxical relationship between technology and human connection, highlighting both its
potential for liberation and its capacity for oppression. As we navigate an increasingly digitized
world, Fahrenheit 451 serves as a timely reminder of the importance of preserving intellectual
freedom, fostering genuine human connection, and critically engaging with the social and ethical
implications of technological progress.

REFERENCES
1. Bradbury, Ray. Fahrenheit 451. Simon & Schuster, 2012.
2. Birkerts, Sven. The Gutenberg Elegies: The Fate of Reading in an Electronic Age.
3. Fawcett Columbine, 1995.
4. Postman, Neil. Amusing Ourselves to Death: Public Discourse in the Age of Show Business.
Penguin Books, 1985.
5. Roberts, Garyn G. “Some Social and Cultural Context for Ray Bradbury’s Fahrenheit 451.”
Critical Insights (n. d.): 27-36. Salempress. Web. 16 Feb. 2015.
6. Russell, Bertrand. Human Knowledge: Its Scope and Limits. London & New York: Routledge,
2009.
7. Sargent, Lyman Tower. “The Three Faces of Utopianism Revisited.” Utopian Studies 5.1
(1994): 1-37. JSTOR. Web. 11 March 2015.
8. Winner, Langdon. The Whale and the Reactor: A Search for Limits in an Age of High
Technology. University of Chicago Press, 1989.

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 3|P a g e

 TRADITION IN GIRISH KARNAD’S HAYAVADANA: A NATIVISTIC STUDY

Mr. Shivaji Shankar Kamble

Associate Professor, Department of English,
Padmabhushan Vasantraodada Patil Mahavidyalaya,
Kavathe Mahankal, Dist. Sangli (MH) 416 405.
Mobile: 9665155989

ABSTRACT
Tradition is one of most invaluable values and important insignias of Indian culture and
civilization. Indeed, tradition is a group of customs, beliefs, skills or sayings handed down from
generation to generation or age to age. Surely, tradition means to get knowledge of the past
writers, literature, beliefs, customs, religion etc.
Girish Karnad’s folk-tale play Hayavadana shows his interest in tradition native
elements and the Indigenous Indian dramatic tradition. It also throws light on various elements
of Indian culture and civilization. But the main purpose of Karnad is to interpret social, religious,
cultural and political situations, to define Indianness, to create contemporary consciousness and
to revise all external issues of traditional Indian thought and literature.

Tradition in Girish Karnad’s Hayavadana: A Nativistic Study

In the present paper, ‘Tradition in Hayavadana’, I have tried to examine Girish Karnad’s
Folk-tale play Hayavadana through nativistic point of view. Indeed, tradition is one of the most
invaluable values and important insignias of Indian culture and civilization. It is a group of
customs, beliefs, skills or sayings handed down from generation to generation or age to age.
Vashishta Anita (2002) in her article “In-between: Locating Tradition and Modernity in the
Works of Maitreyi Pushpa” defines tradition as a set of values and customs derived from
everyday social practices and oral renditions of philosophical and religious texts, myths and
narratives. The set of beliefs that constitute ‘tradition’. To be honest tradition is neither the
maintenance of certain dogmatic beliefs nor a blind adherence to the ways of previous
generations but it is the presentness of past order which is not inherited but obtained with great
labour. It means that tradition is a means to get knowledge of the past writers, literature, beliefs,
customs, religion etc. It is nothing but a living continuation of the past.
Bhalchandra Nemade is the first critic who introduced the concept of nativism in Indian
literary scene. He refers two different traditions viz. Vedic and Non-vedic within one culture and
prefers discontinuous historical tradition of Buddha, Charvak, Mahaveer, Basaveshwara,
Chakradhara, Dnyandev, Namdev, Tukaram, Bahinabai, Phule, Shahu, Gandhi, Ambedkar etc; not
only for the merit of ideas and insights it can offer but also for its place of acquiring Indian
sensibility. All these personalities gave bold stroke to Vedic religion, culture, varna-system and
rigid caste-system.
There was a great tradition of oral literature in India. It was extended and modified by
each generation. Nativism gives importance to oral tradition. It promotes non-Vedic tradition.
This morality is a chief means of manifest Indeed this tradition played a pivotal role in the
development of Indian literature. It is because oral literature reflects native spirit. All the
provincial manners, geographical details and dialectal features of language get reflected in it.
For example. Warkari cult has evolved several oral styles of expression in which traditional as
well as folk-forms have been utilized very effectively. However, Nativism has its relation with
various folk-lores like Gondhal (गोंधळ), Kirtan (कीतयन), Bhajan (भजन), Abhanga (अभिंग), Satyashodhak

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 4|P a g e

(सत्यशोधक) and Ambedkari jalasa (आबिं ेडकरी जलसा) etc. Its purpose is to modernize native elements by
establishing relation with the oral tradition. No doubt all Indian literature was cultivated by oral
tradition up to 12th century. But the literature belonging to farmer, artisan, women and Dalits
moved on to periphery after the arrival of Britishers.
Jnanpeeth Awardee, Girish Karnad is the twinkling star on the horizon of post-colonial
Indian drama in English. He has enriched Indian art, drama and culture, like his contemporary
playwrights namely Badal Sircar (Bengal), Mohan Rakesh (Hindi) and Vijay Tendulkar
(Marathi). Indeed, all the plays of Karnad expresses Odyssey of culture of India, though they are
based on events of history, legends, folk-tales and myths of India. His plays are the best
expression of cultured condition of nation. Therefore, Karnad has got an unflinching place in the
annals of new Indian drama.
Girish Karnad’s best folk-tale play ‘Hayavadana (1971)’ shows his great interest in
tradition, native elements and the Indigenous Indian dramatic tradition. However, his purpose
is to define Indianness, to create contemporary consciousness and to revise all external issues of
traditional Indian thought and literature. Girish Karnad has skillfully employed ancient tales,
myths, folk-tales and conventions in his plays in order to interpret social, religious, cultural and
political situations. Let us discuss how ‘tradition’, a value of Nativism, is reflected in the play
‘Hayavadana’.

Tradition in Hayavadana
Indian English drama has a rich and glorious tradition. Its journey begins with the
Sanskrit plays but later on it showed little development as compared to novel. But many
dramatists tried to write their dramas in their regional languages in order to give new meaning
and identity to Indian drama, particularly after post-independence period. Girish Karnad is one
of them. His imagination is deeply rooted in Indian soil. Never-the-less, he wants some evolution
in Indian theatre and desires to follow technical experiment in indigenous dramatic form
because it was based on different footings. It means that Karnad wants to Indianize the form by
using some of the conventions of Indian classical drama and folk theatre. So, he returns to the
past mythical, historical and oral tales for his themes, characters and situations. And his return
to ancient Sanskrit and Indian folk drama for subject matter is a tradition. “Karnad delves deep
into the traditional myth to spell out modern man’s anguish and dilemmas that are created in
his mind.” (Bala, Suman:2005:127). It means that Karnad wants to define Indianness, to recreate
a contemporary consciousness and revise all external issues of traditional Indian thought and
literature. “However, some dramatists of today like Girish Karnad have skillfully employed
ancient tales, myths, folk-tales and conventions in their plays in order to interpret
contemporary social and political, religious and cultural situations.
The play Hayavadana is based on folk-tale. Karnad uses all constituents of folk-story in
it. It shows his great interest in tradition. However, his main plot comes from Vetalpanchavisati
and later development comes from Thoman Mann’s ‘The Transposed Heads’ and ‘the sub-plot of
Hayavadana, the horse-man, is Karnad’s own invention’ (Bala, Suman:2005:128). It means that
his two plots are encased in folk form tradition. However, entire play follows the traditional
Indian folk drama tradition which includes several features of ancient Sanskrit drama. While
renewing the indigenous dramatic tradition, Karnad has used myths, legends, half-curtain,
chorus, masks, music, dance, mime, parable, dolls and many other devices of Indian traditional
drama theatre, particularly for the construction of the play Hayavadana. Kirtinath Kurtkoti in
his ‘Introduction’ of Hayavadana observes, “Karnad uses the conventions and motifs of folk-tales
and folk-theatre-masks, curtains, dolls, the story-within-a-story-to create a bizaree world. It is a
world of incomplete individuals, indifferent gods, dolls that speak and children who cannot, a
world indifferent to the desires and frustrations, joys and sorrows of human beings. What is real
is only the tremendous, irrational energy of the horse and its rider who round the stage
symbolizing the powerful but monotonous rhythm of life” (1998(1975):VI-VII). In short, Karnad
ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 5|P a g e
very heavily uses the rich resources of native folk-theatre-Yakshagana conventions and
techniques and other forms. It shows his honest attempt to revive the old forms like
Yakshagana, Bayalatta, Tamasha dn Koothu. Thus, he renews the indigenous Indian dramatic
traditions alongwith giving preference to folk and classical forms. Karnad’s use of native folk
theatre strategies in Hayavadana shows his interest in tradition and love for native elements.
The play opens with ‘Ganesh Pooja’ like Nandi in classical Sanskrit play for the success
of performance. Infact, all theatrical performances in India begin with the worship of God
Ganesha. It is tradition of India. Bhagavata, the controller, interpreter and narrator of the play
makes ritualistic invocation of Lord Ganesha with music, singing and dancing. While singing
hymns or verses in praise of Ganesha, Bhagavata informs that the Ganesha “an elephant’s head
on a human body, a broken tusk and a cracked belley” and “he seems the embodiment of
imperfection, of incompleteness”. He further says that this Vakratunda-Mahakaya, the image of
Purity and Holiness, “intends to signify by his very appearance that the completeness of God is
something no poor mortal can comprehend? It is not for us to understand this Mystery or try to
unravel it. Nor is it within our powers to do so. Our duty is merely to pay homage to the
Elephant-headed god and get on with our play” (P.1). The invocation to the supernatural &
divine power like God Ganesha is an Indian belief which is deeply rooted in Indian minds. Indian
people have staunch faith in Ganesha like Bhagavata who is imperfect and incomplete but he is
“the destroyer of obstacles and remover of all hurdles” (P.1). Even God Ganesha is “Lord and
Master of Success and Perfection” (P.1). In this regard, Nand Kukar says, “Out of staunch faith in
Ganesha the Bhagavata thinks that it is not easy to understand the mystery of the divine beings.
How their incomplete existence brings perfection to others is not known” (2003:127). It means
that God Ganesha is remover of all obstacles and gives success to us, despite of his
incompleteness and imperfectness. And it is not Indian tradition to fathom the mystery of any
divine beings. On the contrary, we Indian people accept and worship the divine beings as they
are. Thus Lord Ganesha, particularly, occupies central place in our lives. And He is worshipped
first, before we commence any auspicious ceremony. Such an Indian tradition, belief and culture
are reflected through the introductory prayer of Ganesha, the first God to be worshipped in
India.
Religion, Karma, rebirth and fate has significant place in Indian culture. Majority Indian
people are the staunch followers of these aspects. And these Indian features are clearly reflected
in lives of Hayavadana, Kapila and Devadatta. First of all, Hayavadana who is a hybrid product of
celestial being and an earthly woman. While narrating his life story, Hayavadana says that his
mother was a beautiful princess of Karnataka, falls in love with the white stallion of the Prince
of Araby at the time of her swayambar. She chooses a horse as her husband instead of other
princes came from China, Persia, Africa and Araby. The Swayambar marriage system shows that
in ancient period a woman has choice to choose her spouse. However, Hayavadana’s mother
lives for fifteen years with horse. The fifteen years’ human love turns the horse into a celestial
being – a Gandharva who was made a horse by the curse of Kubera for his misbehavior. When
horse becomes a Gandharva, he asks her to accompany him to the heavenly abode. But she
refuses. So, he curses her to be a horse. Thus, Hayavadana’s mother becomes a horse and runs
away happily. His father returns to heaven. And their marriage-product-Hayavadana is left
behind. This is a moving tale of Hayavadana. This sad tale of Hayavadana compels Bhagavata to
remark, “What brought you to this? Was it a curse of some rishi? Or was it some holy place of
pilgrimage, a punyastan, which you descrated? Or could it be that you insulted a pativrata,
dedicated to the service of her husband? Or did you ……… Oho! Poor man! But Hayavadana, what
can anyone do about a head one’s born with? Who knows what error committed in the last birth
is response…… (P.7). This comment of Bhagavata is fatalistic and traditionalistic one. But his
voice is the voice of common Indian people who believes that what is written on our foreheads,
cannot be altered. He further asks Hayavadana whether he has descrated any whole place of
pilgrimage or insulted a pativrata. He thinks that Hayavadana might have committed some error
in his last birth. Therefore, his equine head is the fruit of his last’s birth’s mistake. This is
ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 6|P a g e
Bhagavata’s fatalistic and conservative attitude towards life, which indirectly represents
common people’s attitude. Indeed, it is a belief in India that nobody should use a sacred thing or
place in an unworthy way or insult any pativrata. To descrate holy place or insult pativrata is
always considered as a sin in Indian social life. Even it is said that pativrata’s tears cannot be
wasted when it drops. Hence, we must respect and honour the most sacrated places and women.
This is tradition and culture and each generation of every epoch must follow it.
At the same time, Indian people are religious minded who believes on their fates instead
of their honest work or deeds. It something happens wrong or bad with them, they think that it
is the fruit of their last birth’s deeds. This fatalistic approach compels them to accept all things
and events as inevitable and outcome of pre-destination. Therefore, we may say that submission
to fate and belief in previous birth is an important but typical aspect of Indian life, culture and
tradition. And this ‘Karma belief system’ is deeply rooted in Indian minds which is highly
impossible to wipe out.
So far as the major characters of this play are concerned, they often use word fate.
Bhagavata considers it as a given thing, Hayavadana raises questions about fate continuously
until he loses his power of speech, Devadatta and Kapila too accept their fate; Kapila resists on
rishi’s verdict regarding Padmini’s husband and finally accept it and says, “I’m Kapila, Padmini. I
didn’t accept it that day. But I accept it now. I’m Kapila” (P.54), and Padmini’s desire for
completeness is too compels her to accept her fate and wishes to get the same husband in the
next birth. Even Devadatta considers Kapila as a rare friend and says “One has to collect merit in
seven lives to get a friend like him” (P.21). Kapila’s error in this life is to love his friend’s wife
and it results in losing his friend-Devadatta. Then he begs his friend to accept him in the next
life. These references clearly suggest the cyclical process of birth and rebirth, merits and
demerits and belief system of Karma, birth, death and rebirth, which is essential characteristic
of Indian culture and tradition. (Dhanavel, P:2000:114-115).
Marriage is a socio-religious ceremony in India. So, it creates basic relationship between
man and woman. Infact, marriage is a miniature social system and it is considered as social duty
towards the family and community. As a sacred trust and thread of union between man and
woman, marriage gives preference to mutual fidelity and devotion to partner. So long marriage
is no performed for sex-gratification alone but for ‘living together’ and ‘begetting children’. On
the whole, marriage is observed as a sacrament in India. So, it’s purity is remained upto this
date. (Ahuja, Ram:193(1997):117121).
The text mentions two types of marriage. One is Anuloam and second is Uncanny. The
marriage between Devadata and Padmini is Anuloam i.e. hypergamy type whereas
Hayavadana’s mother’s marriage with white horse is uncanny and unnatural. Regarding the first
marriage, Bhagavata informs us that the wealthy and beautiful Padmini marries Devadata, the
scholar of Dharmpura. Indeed, this marriage is Anuloam type because Devadatta belongs to
Brahmin caste and Padmini to Vaishya. Despite of social distance between them, the marriage
takes place. It indicates the liberal attitude towards marriage system in ancient period. And
society has no objection to such and other types of marriages. On the other hand, the marriage
between Devadatta and Padmini is ‘choice and beauty’ based one in which elders plays very
little role and social and cultural norms have little place in it.
The reality of Indian marriage system is completely forgotten and neglected by
Devadatta, Kapila and Padmini. It is social and cultural norm that a woman should accept man
as her deity and wear marriage thread in his name after marriage. This tradition is followed by
Padmini. But later on, she attracts towards Kapila’s fabulous body and forgets fidelity and
devotion. Later on, she forgets all traditional and cultural norms of an ideal ‘patirvata’ when she
spends five days with Kapila in the forest and makes him seduce her.
On the other hand, Hayavadana’s mother’s marriage with white stallion of Prince Araby
is fine example of uncanny and unequal marriage. Havadana’s mother, beautiful Karnataka
Princess, chooses her husband who is white horse instead of other princes of various kingdoms
in the world at her swayanvara. This marriage and swayanvara system show that a woman had
ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 7|P a g e
freedom to choose her husband in ancient period. However, unequal and unnatural marriages
are described in Puranas, folk tales and legends. But it is unbelievable from practicle point of
view. If we consider this marriage as folk tale, then Hayavadana’s mother’s love transforms her
husband, who is a horse, into celestial being. But her disobedience of husband to come with him
at heavenly abode punishes her as becoming a horse. To disobey husband is not considered
good value in Indian tradition. So, she faces punishment. And her love for husband is
praiseworthy, which is an important aspect of tradition.
Generally, there are certain codes of conduct for married women in Indian society.
These norms, rules and codes must be followed by married women in patriarchal society. Social
disobedience is not allowed to them. In this regard Padmini and Hayavadana’s mother crosses
traditional and social norms. Infact, Padmini’s attraction for Kapila, getting Kapila’s body after
the transformation of heads and finally living with Kapila for four or five days and establishing
sexual relationship with him, all these references shows that Padmini defies the traditional code
of conducts which are made for women. It is her bohemian nature which crosses all social,
cultural, religious and moral codes. It means that to remain faithful with husband by mind and
heart is an ideal tradition which is polluted by Padmini on psychological and moral level. On the
contrary, Hayavadana’s mother marries with white stallion against the wishes of her father and
gives disrespect to the persuasion of others. However, it is Indian tradition to obey our parents
and consider respect to other’s feelings. But Hayavadana’s mother is completely failed in his
respect and forsook the tradition.
Indian people are very emotional and sensitive. They take oaths without thinking
rationally about the consequences of their swearings. This is typical Indian characteristic, which
is always observed by people in order to please God and Goddesses. Devadatta is a
knowledgeable person represents such category of people. When he sees the exceptional and
ethereal beauty of Padmini, Devadatta falls in love with her and feels that he is incomplete and
helpless without her. No doubt, Padmini is really beautiful. Kapila and Devadatta describes her
thus “Her forelocks rival the bees; her face is a white lotus. Her beauty is as the magic lake. Her
arms the lotus creepers. Her breasts are golden urns and her waist….” (P.13). This exceptional
beauty of Padmini corrupts the mind and soul of Devadatta. And he becomes impatient to get
her as his wife and swears to sacrifice his arms and head. He says to Kapila, “I swear, Kapila,
with you as my witness I swear, if I ever get her as my wife, I’ll sacrifice my two arms to the
goddess Kali, I’ll sacrifice my head to Lord Rudra….” (P.14). After he succeeds in marrying
Padmini, he forgets his promise or pledge. He gets lost in the joy of marriage. It is reality that all
men are selfish in their happiness as they forget their promises after the completion of their
wishes. It is typical Indian characteristic. Later on, when he sees the change in Padmini and her
attraction for Kapila, he feels desperation, particularly on Ujjian tour. Even he thinks that he
cannot win the heart of Padmini. This is his psychological defeat which gives him frustration,
desperation and disappointment. At these emotional crises, Devadatta remembers God and his
promise, and wants His help. Then he walks to Kali temple. In Kali’s temple he completes his
promise rather wrongly, by offering his head to Goddess Kali instead of arms. Infact “he has
exhausted every hope from human being; both human sources have betrayed his faith. In this
moment of emotional crises, he remembers the promised sacrifice to the god” (Gill,
L.S.:2005:93). Thus, Devadatta is a typical Indian person, who represents Indian habit of taking
vows for the gratification of desire.
Karnad mentions wrestling in this play. Wrestling is a glorious tradition of India. It is a
thrilling game. Indian people have chief attraction for it. Kapila is a good wrestler. A Gandhara
wrestler appreciates Kapila’s wrestling strategies and his crocodile-hold around Nanda (P.11).
Another reference of wrestling comes when Devadatta (Kapila’s body) is returning from Ujjian
fair with dolls. He finds that a Gandhara wrestler was challenging people to fight him. This is a
challenge to the bravery, honour and soil by the stranger. Devadatta cannot bear it, particularly
by his body. He jumps into the pit and pinned him to the ground (P.42). Infact, it is Indian
tradition that the challenge is always accepted by the sons of India, whatever is form maybe,
ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 8|P a g e
either in wrestling or dice-playing without caring its consequences.
Padmini sings a lullaby. It is a traditional song always sung by every mother for her
crying child in order to sleep the child. Padmini’s lullaby (P.47-48) follows Indian tradition,
though it’s meaning is different.
It is Indian tradition that not to keep the turned dolls or broken mirror at home. It is
considered unlucky. Padmini too, follows this tradition. She wants new dolls for her baby as the
old ones are in tatters. So, she asks Devadatta, “We must get new dolls for our baby. These are in
tatters. ….… The Ujjian fair is to be held in another four days. Why don’t you go and get new dolls
there? If you start today, you’ll be there in time for it. It’s unlucky to keep torn dolls at home….”
(P.51). This conversation throws light on the impact of tradition on Indian minds. Tradition and
belief system are inseparable parts of Indian culture which Indian people never forgets to
follow.
Hayavadana sings national songs like a true patriot unlike Indian people who run away
when they hear it. Infact, Hayavadana i.e. horse has respect and honour for National Anthem. So,
he asks Actor II, “Friend, I’m going to sing the National Anthem. So please to stand up to
attention!” (P.65). It is our tradition to salute and give honour and respect to national Anthem
because it is an emblem of India’s honour and pride. And when it is going on, we must stand up
to attention. This is our culture and tradition. Unfortunately, it is vanishing from Indian hears.
The varna and caste problem is perennial in Indian culture. Infact caste and varna are
two separate concepts. They are not identical. In the beginning two different classes came
together and formed a society, but in course of time they became four classes and lost their
original meaning as race though the word varna still remained in use. It means that there were
two varnas viz. Arya Varna and Pre-Aryas (Dasa varna) in the beginning. Manu, the Hindu law-
giver, describes the origin of four classes in purush-sukta which are born from four parts i.e. the
mouth, arms, thigs and feet respectively. In Bhagavat Gita, it is stated “I have created the four-
class system dividing them according to guna and karma”. Hence varna means colour or facial
formation and it denotes a race (Pruthi, Rajkumar and Devi Rameshwari Vol.I:2002:107-111).
So far as Hayavadana is concerned, the Indian Varna system is polarized between head
and body. It affects the lives of the major characters in this play. Devadatta is a Brahmin by
caste. He is scholar and poet and occupies the first place among the four classes. So, he
represents head. Kapila is an iron-smith i.e. shudra. He is illiterate and rough person. And he
represents body. Then comes Padmini who is the vaishy girl. Infact the play presents Devadatta
and Kapila as bosom friends but there is a social distance between them. Consequently, real
friendship between the two is highly impossible. While presenting the social distance or
practice of varna system between the two, M. Sarat Babu says, “since his mind is considered
superior to the body in human society, the caste of Brahmins occupies a higher rung than all
other castes in our hierarchical society. That is why Devadatta sits on a chair while Kapila
squats on the floor. Since real love is not possible between two unequal persons, their
friendship is not real” (1999:228). It means that there is master-slave relationship between
Devadatta and Kapila. Padmini-Vaishy girl, too, follows varna system in choosing the body of
Kapila instead of his head. She loves his fabulous body for the sake of carnal desire which is
devoid of real love. “U.R. Ananthamurthy holds that may be, she did not like the face of a shudra
(Kapila) that’s why she selects his body and the face of a Brahmin (Devadatta)” (Gill,
L.S.:2005:109). When Kapila proposes that they (Devadatta, Kapila and Padmini) should live like
Pandavas and Droupadi, Padmini remains salient. Her silence suggests that she does not like
this idea because society cannot permit her to live with two husbands; particularly one of them
is shudra (Kapila). Thus, her caste-consciousness feeling leads the two friends to kill each-other
in a duel and she performs a sati. It shows the caste dominance or varna system affect the lives
and destinies of the major characters. Finally, we may say that the caste-system or varna system
plays very crucial role in the lives of Indian people, which is considered, rather wrongly, an
important feature of Indian tradition and culture.
Visit to sacred religious places is a passion for Indians. The major character like
ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 9|P a g e
Devadatta, Kapila and Padmini goes on Ujjian tour. Their visit or journey to this sacred place is
nothing but to visit a heavenly and spiritual abode in traditional thinking. Then Hayavadana also
undertakes journey to all religious sacred places, holy people, god and goddesses in order to get
completion or to get rid of horse head. He visits many religious people, saints and sadhus also.
In this regard he says, “Banaras, Rameshwar, Gokarn, Haridwar, Gaya, Kedarnath – not only
those but the Dargah of Khwaja Yusuf Baba, the Grotto of Our Virgin mary – I’ve tried them all.
Magicians, mendicants, maharishis, fakirs, saints and sadhus – sadhus with short hair, sadhus
with beards – sadhus in saffron, sadhus in the altogether – hanging, singing, rotating, gyrating –
in the spikes, in the air, under water, under the ground ……. I’ve covered them all ………” (P.9).
Unfortunately, all his visits to religious places and holy people results in vain. However,
Hayavadana here represents common Indian people’s belief, faith, loyality and devotion in
religion and religious people. It is Indian belief that our wishes, hopes and ambitions can be
fulfilled if we visit to holy religious places. And if any problem or tension arises in Indian
people’s lives, their mind turns towards religion and religious consultants in order to get
remedy. And they accept their words as the words of God. This is Indian belief system which is
part of our tradition.
Indian habits and beliefs are the parts of our tradition. When Hayavadana sees Actor-I
sitting on the roadside to “relieve himself” But Hayavadana stops him by committing nuisance
on the main road. It is horse talking to him. When Bhagavata hears it, he thinks that Actor I have
taken drink that morning. The comment of Bhagavata reveals the habit of drunken life of the
lower classes, though Actor I who swears that he has been near a toddy-shop for a whole week
(P.4).
All the characters are hypocritical in their behaviour. After marriage, Devadatta does not
like his friend’s visit to his house. He feels jealous about Kapila when Padmini asks Devadatta
about it, he does not confess it. Padmini pretends to be in love with Devadatta but she is not. She
loves Kapila but she takes care that her feelings cannot understand by her husband. Finally, she
speaks a lie and sends her husband to Ujjian fair and she herself goes to the forest to meet
Kapila. Kapila, too, is hypocrite. He desires Padmini but hides his feeling. And finally, he is
caught with Padmini by Devadatta in the forest. Even before the transposition of heads, Kapila
commits suicide for the sake of friendship as he has said to Gooddess Kali. But he is very
prentensive that he commits suicide in order to save himself from disgrace. Thus, all the
characters hide their true feelings from each-other and show inconsistency in their behaviour.
This is the Indian habits reflects through the major characters.
The custom of sati is mentioned by Karnad in this play. When Devadatta and Kapila
fights and die like lion and cobra for Padmini, she prepares for sati. padmini asks Bhagavata to
make a large funeral pyre for them and she jumps into it.
The system of sati means the immolation of the woman on the funeral pyre of her dead
husband. It shows wife’s affection and attachment for her dead husband. The pre-Aran society
follows this custom. Infact this custom is followed by Rajput women very proudly and willingly.
Padmini’s act of sati is ridiculed because she was wife of two husbands. It is Indian belief
system that a woman who is ‘pativrata’ dies for her dead husband in order to get him in the next
birth. But Padmini’s case is different. So, she regretfully says to Goddess Kali, “Kali, Mother of all
Nature, you must have your joke even now. Other women can die praying that they should get
the same husband in all the lives to come. You haven’t left me even that little consolation”
(P.63). Then Bhagavata informs us Padmini’s act of sati and criticizes the false aggrandizement
of sati in India. He says, “India is known for its pativratas – wives who dedicated their whole
existence to the service of their husband – but it would not be an exaggeration to say that no
pativrata went in the way Padmini die” (P.63). This comment clearly indicates that Padmini
follows the path of sati wrongly as she was wife of two husbands. And her jumping into funeral
pyre is an evident of her infidelity. It is Hindu custom that a widow should follow this path, not
Padmini, the wife of two husbands.
In sum, Nativism located non-vedic and oral tradition as the most significant creative
ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 10 | P a g e
upsurge of Indian mind. Indeed, each nation has its unique culture and civilization, which may
be called its soul; hence should cultivate the habit of looking within and be proud of our Indian
culture and institutions in the right spirit. Girish Karnad’s play Hayavadana follows glorious
tradition of Indian drama. He wants to Indianize the form by using some of the conventions of
Indian Classical in tradition and love for native elements. Indian features like Ganesh-pooja,
belief in religion, karma, rebirth and fate, varna and caste problem, visit to religious places,
marriage, custom of sati etc. are clearly reflected in this play, particularly through the central
characters, with their emotional and sensitive nature.

REFERENCES:
1. Ahuja, Ram (1993) Modernization in Indian Social System, Reprint 1997, Rawat Pub. Jaipur
& New Delhi.
2. Babar, Ashok (2004) Indian Nativism And Literary Values, in The Quest, Vol. XVIII, No.2,
Dec. 2004, Ed. Sinha Ravi Nandan.
3. Babu, M. Sarat (1994) The Concept of Chastity and Girish Karnad’s Naga-mandala, in Indian
Literature Today: Vol. 1, Drama and Fiction, Ed. by Dhawan, R.K. Prestise Books, New Delhi.
4. Bala, Suman (2005) This Mad Dance of Incompleteness: Search for Completeness in Girish
Karnad’s Hayavadana, in New Directions in Indian Drama: With Special Reference to the
plays of Vijay Tendulkar, Badal Sircar and Girish Karnad, Ed. By Pandey Sudhakar and Barua
Freya, Prestige Books, New Delhi.
5. Chari, A. Jaganmohan (1995-96) Girish Karnad’s Hayavadana And Naga-mandala: A study
in Post-colonial Dialectics, in The Commonwealth Review, Vol. 7, No. 2.
6. Devy, G.N. (1992) After Amnesia: Tradition And Change in Indian Literary Criticism, Sangam
Books, Landon.
7. Devy, G.N. (1997) Deshivad: Key-note Address, in Nativism: Essays in Criticism, Ed. by
Paranjape, Makarand, Sahitya Academy, New Delhi.
8. Dhanavel, P. (2000) The Indian Imagination of Girish Karnad, in Essays on Hayavadana,
Prestige Books, New Delhi.
9. Gill L.S. (2005) Girish Karnad’s Hayavadana: A Critical Study, Pub. by Asia Book Club, New
Delhi.
10. Karnad, Girish (1975) Hayavadana, Second Edition 1985, O.U.P., Delhi.
11. Nand Kukar (2003) Myths in the Plays of Girish Karnad, in Indian English Drama: A study in
Myths, Sairup and Sons, New Delhi.
12. Nemade, Bhalchandra (1984) Concept of Nativism, in New Quest, 45, May-June 1984.
13. Nemade, Bhalchandra (1997) Nativism in Literature, Tr. by Arvind Dixit, in Nativism:
Esssays in Criticism, Ed. By Paranjape Makarand, Sahitya Academy, New Delhi.
14. Pruthi, Rajkumar and Devi Rameshwari (2002) Enclyclopadia of Indian Society and Culture
Vol. I, IV, V, Mangal Deep Pub., Jaipur.
15. Vashista Anita (2002) In-between: Locating Tradition and Modernity in the Works of
Maitreyi Pushpa, in Feminism, Tradition and Modernity, Ed. by Chandrakala Padia, Indian
Institute of Advanced Study, Shimala.

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 11 | P a g e
 ASSESSMENT OF FARMERS FERTILIZER PRACTICES AND PERCEPTIONS IN
KAVATHE MAHANKAL TEHSIL OF SANGLI DISTRICT

Amar S. Pawar*, Subhash V. Patil**

*Assistant Professor, Department of Chemistry, Padmabhushan Vasantraodada Patil
Mahavidyalaya, Kavathe Mahankal. Dist Sangli (MH)
**Associate Professor, Department of Chemistry, Padmabhushan Vasantraodada Patil
Mahavidyalaya, Kavathe Mahankal. Dist Sangli (MH)
Corresponding author email address: [email protected]

ABSTRACT:
Kavathe mahankal is a tehsil in Miraj subdivision of Sangli district in the state of
Maharashtra. Agriculture is source of livelihood for thousands of farmers in tehsil. Agriculture
have also been the main source for availing all basic commodities for survival of thousands of
peoples in tehsil. It is observed that farmers are directly engaged in socio-economic
development of tehsil and all over the India. The income of farmers is mainly depending on
production and expenditure of farmers, expenditure mainly involves fertilizers and irrigation.
Irrigation and fertilization are vital to increasing crop yield, but their application often exceeds
crop requirements. Awareness about practice of fertilization is basic for farmers. To overcome
this problem, a field survey was carried out using a participatory approach, and field monitoring
was conducted on a representative farm. We found that farmers are generally not satisfied with
their fertilization practices, although they result in low application efficiency and distribution
uniformity. In principle, the lack of knowledge about how to implement fertigation technology,
the small-scale farming conditions, and the high cost of developing advanced fertigation systems
are the main obstacles for fertigation adoption. We further conclude that to improve the on-
farm performance of fertilizers practice of farmers, evidence-based guidelines, training
programs are required to help farmers for effective implementation; for effective adoption of
new technologies, consideration of farmers' situation and perspectives is critical. In short
fertilizers practice has impact on the social and economic life of large number of farmers in
Kavathe Mahankal tehsil. This paper is that attempt to understand the role of fertilization
practice of farmers. Present study is based on primary data which is collected by intensive field
work. The 200 farmers from tehsil were selected by random sampling method. The
questionnaire technique has been also used for collection of data from farmers. Microsoft excel
software is used for data tabulation and calculation.

KEY WORDS: socio-economic study, fertilizers, farmers .

INTRODUCTION:
India is a nation where more than 70 per cent of the population relies on agriculture for
a living. It is the world's largest producer of spices, pulses, milk, tea, cashew, and jute and ranks
second in the production of wheat, rice, fruits and vegetables, sugarcane, cotton, and oilseeds.
Agriculture is the backbone of the Indian economy. About 60–70 per cent of the population in
ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 12 | P a g e
India works in agriculture, which contributes 20 per cent to the country's GDP. Fertilizers are
generally defined as "Any substance, whether natural or synthetic, organic or inorganic, that
provides one or more of the chemical components needed for plant growth". The three essential
plant nutrients nitrogen, phosphorus, and potassium are present in the majority of fertilizers
that are frequently applied to agricultural fields. Some fertilizers also contain certain
"micronutrients," such as zinc, sulphur and other metals necessary for plant growth. Fertilizers
are important agricultural inputs that are necessary for growing crops that feed people
worldwide Irrigation and fertilization significantly affect crop yield and are vital to grain
production and food security. In addition to water supply, a reliable nitrogen supply is another
essential factor that has allowed farmers to significantly increase crop yields over the past
decades. Thus, it is essential to improve on-farm fertilizers practices and techniques.
Pressurized fertigation methods, such as drip fertigation and sprinkler fertigation, are highly
recommended for enhancing resource use efficiency and mitigating the pollution of surface
water and groundwater. Fertigation is an agronomic technique by which water and fertilizer are
supplied simultaneously. It is intended to be a way for growing crops using less fertilizer, better
water and nutrient use efficiency, and labor savings. The use of fertigation can lower production
costs while bringing opportunities for improved crop yields. Many efforts have been made to
promote pressurized irrigation in the fields.

OBJECTIVE
 To study factors affecting farmers socio- economic development.
 To study awareness & knowledge of farmers about use of fertilizers.
 To study farmer satisfaction toward fertilizers.

METHODOLOGY
Present study is based on primary data which is collected by researcher by intensive
field work. The 200 farmers from tehsil were selected by random sampling method and
interviews of farmers are analyzed and concluded. The questionnaire technique also used for
collection of data from farmers. Microsoft excel software is used for data tabulation and
calculation and create the chart for graphical presentation of data

DISCUSSION
Researcher concentrates on study of awareness of farmers which involves Awareness
about soil analysis, meaning of N: P: K on the label of sack, information about micronutrient for
plants, knowledge of fertilizer manufacturing companies. The farmers are important part of
society and their socio- economic life affected by their practices. So, there is need to understand
the awareness about use of fertilizers.

Awareness about soil analysis: Soil testing is the base for management decisions about
fertilizer requirements. It involves the estimation and evaluation of the available nutrient status
and acidic reaction of a sample of soil. After testing, a fertility map is prepared where the
available nitrogen, phosphorous and potassium is calculated. Areas of sufficient and insufficient
nutrients are marked out and nutritional requirements are determined. Fertilizers such as NPK,
lime or gypsum are recommended to improve soil fertility. Fertilizer addition, which is based on
soil testing, usually leads to an increase in yields and profits by providing the correct amounts of
needed nutrients. It also leads to uniform application of nutrients in a field. As nutrient
availability becomes less variable, the crop growth is more uniform. Regular soil testing also
contributes to environmental sustainability as the use of excess fertilizers can be avoided. Due
high charges of soil testing labs most of the farmers skip the process of soil analysis. In present
study we have found only 2% of farmers prefers soil analysis who were growing cash crops.
Information about meaning of N: P: K: of fertilizer: The letters "NPK" on a fertilizer label

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 13 | P a g e
stand for nitrogen, phosphorus, and potassium, the three primary nutrients plants need to grow.
The numbers on the label indicate the ratio (by percentage) of nitrogen, phosphorus, and
potassium in the fertilizer container. In present study 35% of farmers are able to give at least
some correct information about these parameters.
Information about micronutrient for plants: Micronutrients are important for plant growth,
as plants require a proper balance of all the essential nutrients for normal growth and optimum
yield. They are boron (B), chloride (Cl), copper (Cu), iron (Fe), manganese (Mn), molybdenum
(Mo), nickel (Ni) and zinc (Zn). In present study 13% of farmers are able to give information
about micronutrients.
Knowledge of chemical Composition of fertilizer: Chemical composition of fertilizer gives
information about elemental content in fertilizers as well as fillers associated with it. By
knowing the chemical composition farmers can use fertilizers more efficiently. In present study
we found that only 2% of farmers are aware about chemical composition of fertilizers. All these
farmers are growing cash crop (grapes).
Knowledge of fertilizer manufacturing companies: The fertilizer industry in India is
extremely vital as it manufactures some of the most important raw materials required for crop
production. The primary objective of these industries is to ensure the inflow of both primary
and secondary elements required for crop production in the desirable quantities. The quality
and cost are assured by knowledge of fertilizer manufacturing companies. In present study 76%
of farmers are able to give name of at least 2 names of Indian companies.
Satisfaction of results obtained by fertilizers: As yield of crop is depends on many factors
therefore 54% farmers have neutral opinion on results, 24% farmers are not satisfied, while
22% of farmers are satisfied with the results.
Satisfaction with cost of fertilizers used: Looking at natural calamities, inflation and annual
income of farmers, and increasing, it is very difficult to farmers to afford fertilizers. 95% of
farmers are not satisfied with the cost of fertilizers
Experts advice: Advice given by someone who has studied a subject thoroughly or who is very
skilled at a particular job is essential condition in any business. For use of fertilizer farmers
must take experts advice. In present study 88% of farmers did not used to take experts advice,
as it is expensive.

CONCLUSION:
Assessment of farmers fertilizer practices and perceptions focused by the researcher
and concluded that:
 The educational status of farmers is low therefore they are not aware about the importance
of soil analysis, chemical composition, micronutrient for plants, meaning of N: P: K.
 Farmers who are growing cash crop (Grapes) are alert they used to do soil analysis and have
knowledge about micronutrients, chemical composition of fertilizers.
 The annual income of farmers is low, that they cannot afford soil analysis, experts’ advice.

SUGGESTIONS:
The social as well as economic condition of farmers is progressive but there is need to
convert the view of farmers from traditional to professional. Here some suggestions are given
from researcher’s view.
 There is need to organized farming to reduce the problems of farmers.
 Financial support is important for farmers because income of farmer is totally depending on
climate which is uncontrollable.
 There is need to create storage as well as cooling facility for goods in each village place
which will improve economic status of farmers.
 It is necessary to have awareness programs on fertilizer practice by NGOs, or government
agencies.

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 14 | P a g e
REFERENCES:
1. Sachin R. Mali* Meena B. Potdar (May 2019): Socio-economic study of weekly markets: An
assessment of sellers in Sangli district of Maharashtra, G.K. Publishing House, Varanasi.
2. Xiulu Sun, Henk Ritzema, Xiuqiao Huang, Xiaojun Bai, Petra Hellegers (April 2022):
Assessment of farmers' water and fertilizer practices and perceptions in the North China
Plain Research Article Wiley publication
3. D. V. Ladumor, R. S. Pundir and Alvira Rajwadi (June 2023) Farmers Purchasing Behaviour
and Satisfaction towards Fertilizer in Kheda District, Asian Journal of Agricultural Extension,
Economics & Sociology
4. Shan Zeng, Keqing Yin, lianghong Yu, (Nov 2022) Factors influencing farmers chemical
fertilizer reduction behavior from the perspective from perspective of farmers
differentiation Helion (8).

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 15 | P a g e
A GEOGRAPHICAL STUDY OF CHANGING CROP PATTERN IN MAHARASHTRA,
INDIA

Mr. D. B. Vyawahare1 and Dr. A. S Jadhav2

1Research Student, S. P .College Pune.

Emai-Id: [email protected]
Mob. No. 9970860007
2Associate Professor and Research Guide, T. C. College Baramati, Dist- Pune.

Emai -Id: [email protected]

Mob. No 7058085930

ABSTRACT:
One of the primary sources of national income in India and a key component of the
country's economy is agriculture. The pattern of land usage reveals how well farmers used the
resources available to them. The gross copped area, cropping intensity, and area available for
cultivation are also shown by the land utilization pattern.
The main purpose of this research paper is to analyze the cropping pattern and production
of different crops in Maharashtra state since last one decade (2011-12 to 2021-22). The research is
based on secondary data which gathered from different Government sources and the data has
analyzed and interpreted by using tables and graphs. During the span of ten years periods, the
cropping pattern in Maharashtra is changed on large scale. During these periods the area under
cereals and total food grain crops is decreased by 18.71% and 9.36% respectively and other hand
during same period’s area under pulses (8.21%), oil seeds (41.96%), cotton (5.83%) and Sugarcane
(45.67%) is increased. It means area under traditional crops is replaced by commercial crops. The
major cause for the change in cropping pattern is development of irrigation facilities, use of new
agricultural techniques and Good quality of agricultural inputs.

KEY WORDS: Cropping Pattern, Agriculture Production, food grains, oil seeds and cash crops.

1. INTRODUCTION:
Agriculture and allied activities, one of the prime sectors of the economy, accounts for
on an average 12.1 per cent share in the Gross State Value Added. More than half of the rural
Population in the State is dependent on agriculture and allied activities sector for their
livelihood (Economic survey of Maharashtra) one third of the state is covered by rain-shadow
regions, which have few and irregular precipitation. The net sown area makes up roughly 54%
of the State's out of total land area. The agriculture Sector is constantly susceptible to problems
brought on by shifting climate patterns and the degradation of arable land. The State's
agriculture sector’s primary concerns are unpredictable weather patterns, exorbitant input
costs, unpredictable markets, and unpredictable precipitation. Comparing last decadal crop
pattern in kharif season it is anticipated that the area planted in oilseeds, pulses, sugarcane and
cotton would rise, while the area planted in cereals is predicted to fall. There are many reasons
for changing cropping pattern of Maharashtra during these periods. It includes development in
irrigation facilities, change in rainfall, irrigation problems, labors and mechanization problems
etc.

2. OBJECTIVE:
The main objectives of the present research paper are as fallows
1. To study the cropping and production patterns of selected crops in the Maharashtra state.
2. To identify the changes of agricultural land use in Maharashtra State during 10 year periods
from 2012 to 2022 year.

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 16 | P a g e
3. STUDY AREA:
Maharashtra state has geographical extends between 15° 33`46’’ N to 22° 02`13’’ N
latitudes and 72° 38’45’’ E to 80° 53’17’’ E Longitudes and Maharashtra state has a long
coastline stretching nearly 720 km along the Arabian Sea. Maharashtra ranks third in terms of
land area (3.08 lakh sq. km.) and second in terms of population in India. There are 11.24 crore
people living in the state as of the 2011 census. Seventy percent of the state of Maharashtra is
employed in agriculture. According to the 2011 census, 52.7 percent of all jobs in the state are in
the agriculture and related sectors. In addition to providing raw materials for the industrial
sector, export-oriented commodities, and food for the growing population, agriculture also
helps generate foreign exchange. Topography, soil, and weather conditions all have a significant
impact on crop yield and cropping patterns. Other inputs that affect crop development include
irrigation, fertilizers, seeds, and pesticides.

Map.1 Location map of study area

4. DATA BASE AND METHODOLOGY:

Secondary source of data has been used for present research work. This Secondary data
is taken from Economic Survey of Maharashtra state from last 10 years (2011-2012 to 2021-
2022). Total area under particular crop and total production of respective crop has been taken
as a unit for the analysis of the changes in cropping pattern in the study region. Data is
processed and represented with the Tables, graphs, Choropleth map by using different GIS and
computer tools.

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 17 | P a g e
5.
Year Area ('000 ha) Production ('000 MT)
2011-12 4,174 7,245
2012-13 4,073 6,445
2013-14 4,058 7,544
2014-15 4,030 5,597
2015-16 3,822 4,487
2016-17 3,702 7,065
2017-18 3,608 6,177
2018-19 3,392 5,386
2019-20 3,436 4,648
2020-21 3,467 7,050
2021-22 3,393 6,301
RESULTS & DISCUSSION:
Table No. 1 Cropping Pattern of Cereals in Kharif season in Maharashtra

Source: Economic survey of Maharashtra (2012-13 to 2022-23)

Graph No 1. Cropping Pattern of Cereals in Kharif season in Maharashtra

Table no 1 show that the sowing area of cereals crops has been decreasing in
Maharashtra since last decade. Total 18.71 percent area has been decreased under cereals crops
in 2021-22 as compared to 2011-12. The production of cereals crops has also seems irregular
pattern but it has decreased from 2011-12 to 2021-22 by 13.02 percent. There are many
reasons for changing cropping pattern of Maharashtra during these periods. It includes
development in irrigation facilities, change in rainfall, irrigation problems, labors supply and
mechanization problems etc.

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 18 | P a g e
 Table No. 2 Cropping Pattern of Pulses in Kharif season in Maharashtra

Year Area ('000 ha) Production ('000 MT)

2011-12 2,118 1,410
2012-13 2,070 1,449
2013-14 2,011 1,492
2014-15 1,879 558
2015-16 2,006 611
2016-17 2,305 2,572
2017-18 2,239 1,584
2018-19 2,196 1,234
2019-20 2,135 1,537
2020-21 2,220 1,974
2021-22 2,292 2,106

Source: Economic survey of Maharashtra (2012-13 to 2022-23)

Graph No 2. Cropping Pattern of Pulses in Kharif season in Maharashtra

Table no 2 shows that the sowing area of Pulses crops has increasing in Maharashtra
since last decade. Total 8.21 percent area has been increased under Pulses crops in 2021-22 as
compared to 2011-12. The production of Pulses crops has also seems irregular pattern but it has
highly increased from 2011-12 to 2021-22 by 49.36 percent. Pattern has changing due
development in irrigation facilities, MSP of Government and increasing demand of Pulses crop.

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 19 | P a g e
 Table No 3 Cropping Pattern of Total food grains in Maharashtra

Year Area ('000 ha) Production ('000 MT)

2011-12 6,292 8,655
2012-13 6,143 7,894
2013-14 6,069 9,036
2014-15 5,909 6,155
2015-16 5,828 5,098
2016-17 6,007 9,637
2017-18 5,847 7,761
2018-19 5,588 6,620
2019-20 5,571 6,185
2020-21 5,688 9,024
2021-22 5,686 8,407

Source: Economic survey report Maharashtra (2012-13 to 2022-23)

Graph No 3. Cropping Pattern of Total food grains in Maharashtra

Table no 3 show that the sowing area of food grains has been decreasing in Maharashtra
since last decade. Total 9.63 percent area has been decreased under food grain crops in 2021-22
as compared to 2011-12. The production of food grain crops has also seems irregular pattern
but it has decreased from 2011-12 to 2021-22 by 02.86 percent. The reasons for decrease of
food grain include change in rainfall, changing cropping pattern, increase in demand, labors and
mechanization problems etc.

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 20 | P a g e
 Year Area ('000 ha) Production ('000 MT)
2011-12 3,377 4,278
2012-13 3,434 4,968
2013-14 3,890 4,617
2014-15 3,969 2,095
2015-16 3,996 2,021
2016-17 4,147 4,891
2017-18 3,996 4,096
2018-19 4,374 4,830
2019-20 4,403 5,032
2020-21 4,573 6,554
2021-22 4,794 5,725

Table No. 4 Cropping Pattern of Oilseeds in Kharif season in Maharashtra

Source: Economic survey of Maharashtra (2012-13 to 2022-23)

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 21 | P a g e
 Graph No 4. Cropping Pattern of Oilseeds in Kharif season in Maharashtra

Table no. 4 shows that the sowing area of Oilseeds crops has increasing in Maharashtra
since last decade. Total 41.96 percent area has been increased under Oilseeds crops in 2021-22
as compared to 2011-12. The production of Oilseeds crops has also seems irregular pattern but
it has highly increased from 2011-12 to 2021-22 by 33.82 percent. Pattern has changing due to
development in type of irrigation, uses of HYV Seeds, increase in MSP of Government and
increasing demand etc.

Table No. 5. Cropping Pattern of Cotton in Kharif season in Maharashtra

Year Area ('000 ha) Production ('000 MT)
2011-12 4,167 6,820
2012-13 4,187 6,793
2013-14 4,160 8,834
2014-15 4,190 3,577
2015-16 4,207 3,914
2016-17 4,212 10,755
2017-18 4,351 6,094
2018-19 4,219 6,593
2019-20 4,491 6,639
2020-21 4,545 10,110
2021-22 4,410 7,791
Source: Economic survey report Maharashtra (2012-13 to 2022-23)

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 22 | P a g e
 Graph No. 5. Cropping Pattern of Cotton in Kharif season in Maharashtra

Table no. 5 shows that the sowing area of Cotton crop has increasing in Maharashtra
since last decade. Total 05.83 percent area has been increased under Cotton crop in 2021-22 as
compared to 2011-12. The production of Cotton crop has also seems irregular pattern but it has
highly increased from 2011-12 to 2021-22 by 14.23 percent. Reasons for rise in cotton due to
development in irrigation facilities, labor supply and mechanization problems of food grain
crops Availability of HYV Seeds and continuously increase in demand.

Table No. 6. Cropping Pattern of Sugarcane in Kharif season in Maharashtra

Year Area ('000 ha) Production ('000 MT)
2011-12 1,022 89,456
2012-13 935 77,592
2013-14 937 76,901
2014-15 1,030 91,538
2015-16 987 69,235
2016-17 633 54,237
2017-18 902 83,138
2018-19 1,163 89,770
2019-20 822 69,313
2020-21 1,143 1,11,642
2021-22 1,489 1,39,159

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 23 | P a g e
 Source: Economic survey report Maharashtra (2012-13 to 2022-23)

Graph No. 6. Cropping Pattern of Sugarcane in Kharif season in Maharashtra

Table no. 6 shows that the sowing area of Sugarcane crop has increasing in Maharashtra
since last decade. Total 45.67 percent area has been increased under Sugarcane crop in 2021-22
as compared to 2011-12. The production of Sugarcane crop has also seems irregular pattern but
it has highly increased from 2011-12 to 2021-22 by 55.56 percent. Pattern has changing due to
development in types of irrigation facilities like drip irrigation, change in rainfall, increasing
demand for cash crops, and unavailability of agricultural labor.

CONCLUSION:
During the span of last ten years periods in study area, the cropping pattern is changed
on large scale. It was found that the area under cereals and food grain crops is decreased and
other hand during same period’s area under pulses, oil seeds, is increased moderately. Cotton
and Sugarcane crops found highly rise in terms of area under cultivation as well as total
production in Maharashtra state. It means area under traditional crops is replaced by
commercial crops.

REFERENCES:
1. Economic survey report Maharashtra (2012-13 to 2022-23)
2. Pagar, (2015) “Geographical Analysis of Cropping Pattern in Maharashtra State, India”,
Current Global Reviewer, Vol. 1 (1), February 2018, ISSN : 2319-8648
3. P. S. Bansode and S. S. Nimbalkar (2013), “Study of land use pattern and cropping pattern of
marginal farmers of Marathwada region of Maharashtra”, ‘ Agriculture Update’, Volume 8,
Issue 3, August, 2013, Pp. 440-442
4. Walankikar, (2023) “A Geographical Study Of Cropping, Production And Yield Pattern Of
Selected Crops In Parbhani District (Maharashtra State)” International journal of creative
research thoughts (IJCRT) Volume 11, ISSN: 2320-2882
5. Pawar and More (2018), “Land Holding and Cropping Pattern of the Maharashtra State”
Aayushi International Interdisciplinary Research Journal (AIIRJ) Vol - V Issue-I ISSN: 2349-
638x

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 24 | P a g e
 COVID-19'S IMPACT ON HEALTHCARE SYSTEMS

Snehal Zarekar, Gurudas Shinde* and Ritesh Nimbhore**

Assistant professor, Department of Statistics, Padmabhushan Vasantraodada Patil
Mahavidyalaya, Kavathe Mahankal, Dist. Sangli Maharashtra, India 416 405,
[email protected] (9307522474)
*ML Developer at Tata Consultancy Services, Mumbai, Maharashtra, India 400 601,
[email protected]
**Quantitative Analyst, Solytics Partners Private Limited, Hinjavadi, Mulshi, Pune Maharashtra
411 057

ABSTRACT
The COVID-19 pandemic has posed unparalleled challenges to healthcare systems

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 25 | P a g e
worldwide, with profound implications for healthcare workers' mental health and the industry's
operational capacity. This research paper delves into the elaborate dynamics of COVID-19's
impact on healthcare workers and the industry in India, with a specific focus on mental health.
Utilizing secondary data collected in June 2020, this study examines various attributes of
healthcare workers, including demographic factors and mental health indicators. Through
systematic analysis, it uncovers the vulnerability of healthcare workers' mental well-being
during the pandemic, compounded by factors such as fear of infection, workload, and societal
stigma. Graphical representations elucidate the sharp impact of COVID-19 on mental health,
particularly among younger and middle-aged workers. Moreover, the study highlights
disparities between COVID-19 cases and available healthcare resources, underscoring
challenges posed by resource shortages. By shedding light on these critical issues, this research
aims to inform policymakers and healthcare stakeholders to enhance preparation and support
systems for healthcare workers, ensuring their well-being and supporting the toughness of the
healthcare industry in the face of future crises.

KEY WORDS: - COVID-19 pandemic, Healthcare workers, Psychological effects, Mental health
assessment, Bed shortage, Frontline workers, Healthcare infrastructure.

INTRODUCTION
The emergence of the novel coronavirus (COVID-19) was first observed in late
December 2019 in Wuhan, Hubei Province, leading to its recognition by the World Health
Organization (WHO) as an infectious disease of global concern. Declared an international public
health emergency due to its rapid global spread, COVID-19 has prompted one of the most
significant public health crises of the 21st century, resulting in unprecedented measures such as
widespread lockdowns affecting billions of people worldwide.
COVID-19 presents with a spectrum of symptoms ranging from mild to severe
respiratory illness, including coughing, fever, and shortness of breath. Its gestation period
typically spans from 1 to 14 days, with the most common duration being approximately five
days. In severe cases, COVID-19 can progress to pneumonia, acute respiratory distress
syndrome, kidney failure, and even death. Addressing the impact of COVID-19 on healthcare
systems, particularly on the mental health of healthcare workers, has become necessary. Studies
conducted by organizations such as the World Innovation Summit for Health (WISH) in
collaboration with the WHO have revealed alarming rates of anxiety, depression, and burnout
among healthcare workers during the pandemic. Of particular concern are the disproportionate
effects on vulnerable groups such as women, young professionals, and those with dependent
children.
Health and social care workers (HSCWs) have played a pivotal role in the pandemic
response, despite facing pre-existing mental health challenges that can compromise patient care
quality. Several factors unique to the COVID-19 pandemic, including the scale of the crisis,
interruptions to usual practice, and uncertainties surrounding personal protective equipment
(PPE), have heightened the risk of adverse mental health outcomes among HSCWs. As the
healthcare infrastructure faces the challenges posed by COVID-19, it becomes essential to assess
the provision of healthcare systems and develop predictive models to anticipate and minimize
the impact of future outbreaks. This research attempts to investigate the impact of COVID-19 on
the healthcare sector and aims to develop predictive models to aid in future pandemic
preparedness, ensuring the flexibility and efficacy of healthcare services in the face of
remarkable challenges.

DATA COLLECTION AND METHODOLOGY

A secondary data collection approach was adopted for this study, gathering data from
publicly available datasets acquired during June 2020. The primary focus of the dataset was on
healthcare workers, encompassing doctors, staff, and management across various age groups.
ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 26 | P a g e
The dataset included information such as marital status, education, COVID-19 infection status,
and occupation of healthcare workers. Additionally, it incorporated responses to specific
questions aimed at analyzing the mental health of these workers.
The questionnaire included inquiries such as whether the respondents had ever been
diagnosed with an anxiety disorder, their perception of their financial situation during the
COVID-19 pandemic, and their concerns regarding physical conflict from patients or their
families. Other questions addressed symptoms like dizziness, light-headedness, or burnout,
feelings of nervousness or stomach problems associated with the coronavirus, and the extent to
which the respondent's thoughts were preoccupied with COVID-19. Furthermore, respondents
were asked to express their views on their profession or work. Based on the responses to these
questions, individuals were categorized as mentally depressed if they answered affirmatively
(yes) and not depressed if they answered negatively (no).
Another dataset sourced for this study pertained to the number of doctors per 1000
people across different countries, accessible through the World Health Organization's website.
Additionally, data related to government expenditure on the health sector in India as a
proportion of the GDP was collected from the years 2000 to 2019. Furthermore, COVID-19 case
data spanning from January 2020 to October 2021 was obtained, detailing the total number of
confirmed cases in different states. Concurrently, data regarding the availability of beds across
various healthcare facilities during the same timeframe, from January 2020 to October 2021,
was also compiled.

DATA ANALYSIS
1. Impact on mental health
During the COVID-19 pandemic, healthcare workers have faced significant challenges,
with their mental health particularly vulnerable. Graphical analysis suggests a pronounced
impact on both young and middle-aged professionals, while older workers exhibit lower rates of
depression. Continuous exposure to severely ill patients has led to heightened stress and
overthinking among healthcare workers. Data indicates that approximately 79% of healthcare
workers have experienced symptoms of depression.
The of graphical representation (Appx. fig.1 and 2) analysis reveals higher rates of
depression among Doctors and Staff compared to Management, attributed to the overwhelming
patient load. Approximately 81% of doctors and 82% of staff exhibit signs of depression, while
72% of management workers are affected. Furthermore, female healthcare workers appear
more susceptible, with 88% experiencing depression compared to 74% of males. These findings
underscore the urgent need for targeted support initiatives within healthcare settings.
2. Impact on the healthcare industry
With just 5.2 beds for every 10,000 people (Appx. Fig. 3), our hospitals are already
stretched thin, with 69,265 hospitals and 1,899,228 beds nationwide, according to the Human
Development Report. The comparison of COVID-19 cases and available beds in each state shows
a concerning shortage in healthcare facilities (Appx. Fig.4). To adapt to the pandemic, trains, and
university hostels were repurposed as COVID-19 centers due to the lack of beds. However, this
strategy, along with the overall lack of preparation, has strained our healthcare system to its
breaking point. The second wave has exacerbated these issues, with hospitals struggling to
provide essential resources like oxygen-supported beds and ventilators. Comparing the total
number of COVID-19 cases per state with the number of healthcare units from January 2020 to
October 2021 highlights the severity of the situation (Appx. Fig.5).

3. Test for association

Not
Depressed Total
Depressed
Male 105 37 142
ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 27 | P a g e
 Female 81 11 92
Total 186 48 234
In the chi-square test of association, it is clear that gender stands out as a significant
attribute, with ample evidence suggesting a correlation between gender and mental health.
Not
Depressed Total
Depressed
Yes 138 46 184
No 48 2 50
Total 186 48 234
Based on the attribute of experiencing dizziness and burnout, it is evident that feelings
of dizziness and light-headedness are prevalent symptoms linked to the mental health of
workers.

RESULT AND CONCLUSION

Our comprehensive analysis delved into the myriad factors influencing the mental well-
being of healthcare workers amidst the COVID-19 crisis. The pandemic has taken a toll on
frontline workers, especially staff interacting directly with infected patients, heightening their
struggles. Notably, gender-wise classification indicates a higher prevalence of depression among
female workers. Furthermore, social dynamics added to the burden, with communities and
families expressing concerns about potential virus transmission by healthcare workers. Families
dependent on a single income source faced heightened economic hardships, compounding the
challenges.
Inadequate provision of personal protective equipment and overwhelming workloads
further strained hospital staff, leading to heightened anxiety. Graphical representations
highlighted disparities between COVID-19 cases and available beds, necessitating governmental
intervention to manage resources effectively.
Overall, these findings underscore the urgent need for comprehensive support systems
to address the mental health challenges faced by healthcare workers and ensure their well-
being amid the ongoing crisis.

KEY FINDINGS
 High increase in workload
 Change in the role of doctors
 Shortage of supplies (PPE)
 Disruption from routine work
 The newness of the disease and lack of
Challenges in role guidelines initially
 A distress call from patients/ family members
all the time
 Aggressive patients/ families

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 28 | P a g e
  Most instances of stress, mental fatigue, fear
and anxiety
 Emotional state in the second wave due to high
mortality rate
 Frustration and irritation noted
 Immense pressure of leadership
 Traumatizing- feeling low, helplessness
 Isolating experience, leading to feelings of
loneliness
 Reasons include – Increased workload, fear of
Mental Health Impact infection, newness, and less knowledge of
COVID-19 patients/ colleagues suffering.

REFERENCES
1. Fundamentals of mathematical statistics by S. C. Gupta and V. K. Kapoor.
2. Data set of health workers: https://data.mendeley.com/
3. State wise covid cases: https://www.covid19india.org/
4. Data set of availability of beds: https://pib.gov.in/indexd.aspx
5. Data set of country-wise Doctors people ratio:
https://www.who.int/data/gho/data/themes/topics/health-workforce
6. Fundamentals of mathematical statistics by S. C. Gupta and V. K. Kapoor.

APPENDIX
Fig: 1

Fig: 2

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 29 | P a g e
 Fig. 3

Fig. 4 State-wise availability of beds per HCU

Fig. 5 State-wise number of COVID-19 cases (In Lakhs)

“A REFLECTION OF PARTITION LITERATURE ON INDIAN SUBCONTINENT: AN

INTERDISCIPLINARY STUDY”

Pratiksha Ramesh Chavan1 , Ms. Sujata Kakaso Mote2 and Raste Sourabh Ramchandra3
1,2B.A.-II
3B.A.-I
1Author , 2Co-Author , 3Co-Author

Padmabhushan Vasantraodada Patil Mahavidyalaya,

Kavathe Mahankal, Dist-Sangli Maharashtra

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 30 | P a g e
ABSTRACT:
This research paper delves into the extensive body of Partition literature originating
from the Indian subcontinent and written in English. It examines the multifaceted reflections,
narratives, and themes encapsulated within this genre, shedding light on the historical, cultural,
and sociopolitical dimensions of the Partition experience. Through a comprehensive analysis of
selected literary works, the paper aims to illuminate the diverse perspectives, identities, and
memories portrayed by authors from different regions and communities affected by the
Partition. Furthermore, it explores the role of literature as a medium for understanding, healing,
and reconciling the traumatic legacy of Partition, while also acknowledging its significance in
shaping contemporary discourses on identity, belonging, and nationalism in the region.

KEYWORDS:Reflections, narratives, themes, historical, cultural, sociopolitical, perspectives,

identities, memories, trauma, reconciliation, nationalism.

INTRODUCTION:
The partition of India in 1947 remains a pivotal moment in the history of the Indian
subcontinent, leaving a lasting impact on the social, cultural, and political landscape of the
region. The partition not only divided the land but also shattered communities, uprooting
millions of people and giving rise to a wave of displacement, violence, and trauma. In the
aftermath of this traumatic event, a rich and diverse body of literature emerged, reflecting the
experiences, memories, and emotions of those affected by partition.
The academic study of partition literature has gained prominence in recent years, as
scholars across various disciplines have recognized the significance of these literary works in
understanding the complexities of partition and its aftermath. This research paper delves into
the realm of partition literature on the Indian subcontinent, focusing on the interdisciplinary
aspects that make it a compelling area of study.
By exploring partition literature through an interdisciplinary lens, this research paper
aims to unravel the multifaceted dimensions of the human experience during and after
partition. Drawing on insights from literature, history, sociology, psychology, and cultural
studies, this study seeks to analyse the ways in which partition literature resonates with,
challenges, and expands our understanding of this seminal event in South Asian history.
Through a nuanced analysis of a diverse range of literary texts, we will investigate how
partition literature captures the complexities of identity, belonging, displacement, trauma,
memory, and reconciliation. By examining the narrative strategies, themes, motifs, and
representations in these literary works, we will probe the ways in which partition literature
serves as a mirror to the collective consciousness of the Indian subcontinent, reflecting the
enduring legacy of partition on individuals and societies.
Ultimately, this research paper aims to contribute to the growing body of scholarship on
partition literature by offering a comprehensive and interdisciplinary study of how these
literary texts illuminate the human experience amidst the tumultuous backdrop of partition on
the Indian subcontinent. By shedding light on the power of literature to serve as a medium of
reflection, remembrance, and reconciliation, this study seeks to underscore the enduring
relevance and significance of partition literature in shaping our understanding of the past and
the present.
In conclusion, the choice of reasoning for undertaking this interdisciplinary study lies in
the belief that partition literature offers a unique and invaluable window into the lived
experiences of individuals and communities impacted by partition, inviting us to engage with
the complexities, contradictions, and nuances of this watershed moment in the history of the
Indian subcontinent.

STATEMENT OF THE PROBLEM:

The partition of India in 1947 continues to resonate as a traumatic and divisive event in
ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 31 | P a g e
the collective memory of the Indian subcontinent. The resulting displacement, violence, and
communal tensions left an indelible mark on the social, cultural, and political fabric of the
region. In the aftermath of partition, a wealth of literature emerged, capturing the experiences,
emotions, and struggles of individuals affected by this monumental event. However, the
interdisciplinary study of partition literature on the Indian subcontinent remains a relatively
underexplored area of research. This research paper seeks to address this gap by examining the
significance and implications of partition literature through an interdisciplinary lens.

OBJECTIVE:
 The objective of this research paper is to conduct an interdisciplinary study of partition
literature on the Indian subcontinent, with a focus on analyzing the multifaceted dimensions
of the human experience during and after partition. Specifically, this study aims to:

HYPOTHESIS:
 We hypothesize that partition literature serves as a potent tool for examining the enduring
impact of partition on individual and collective identities, memories, and narratives

RESEARCH METHODOLOGY:
The research methodology employed for the present study is textual analysis, which
involves the systematic examination and interpretation of written texts to uncover underlying
themes, patterns, and meanings. By applying a critical lens to these texts, the researcher can
gain insights into the ways in which partition has been represented, remembered, and
reimagined in literature, and how these narratives contribute to a deeper understanding of the
historical, cultural, and social dynamics of the region.

ANALYSIS:
The research paper "A Reflection of Partition Literature on the Indian Subcontinent: An
Interdisciplinary Study" explores the diverse range of perspectives and insights offered by
renowned authors such as Sadat Hasan Munto, Khushwant Singh, Bapsi Sidhwa, Manik
Bandopadhyay, and Laithambika Antharanjan. Through their literary works, these authors
illuminate the complex and multifaceted impact of the partition of India in 1947 on individual
lives, communities, and national identities.
Sadat Hasan Munto, one of the most prominent Urdu writers of the 20th century, is
known for his poignant portrayals of the human cost of partition. His short stories such as "Toba
Tek Singh" and "Khol Do" vividly capture the pain, confusion, and dislocation experienced by
individuals caught in the midst of communal violence and mass displacement. Munto's works
delve into the psychological and emotional turmoil faced by characters grappling with the loss
of home, identity, and loved ones in the wake of partition.
Khushwant Singh, a prolific Indian author and journalist, offers a nuanced perspective
on partition through his novel "Train to Pakistan." Set against the backdrop of a village on the
border between India and Pakistan, Singh's novel explores the themes of communal tension,
violence, and betrayal during the tumultuous period of partition. Through his vivid storytelling
and compelling characters, Singh provides a gripping portrayal of the impact of partition on
ordinary people and communities, highlighting the complexities of human nature and the
blurred lines between perpetrator and victim.
Bapsi Sidhwa, a Pakistani novelist of Parsi descent, has also made significant
contributions to the literature of partition through works such as "Ice-Candy Man" and
"Cracking India." Sidhwa's novels offer a feminist perspective on partition, exploring the
experiences of women and children who are often marginalized in historical accounts of the
event. Through her powerful narratives and sensitive characterizations, Sidhwa sheds light on
the resilience, courage, and agency of women in the face of violence, upheaval, and loss.

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 32 | P a g e
 Manik Bandopadhyay, a Bengali writer and social reformer, provides a unique regional
perspective on partition through his novel "Padma Nadir Majhi." Set in the rural landscape of
East Bengal (now Bangladesh), Bandopadhyay's novel delves into the lives of fishermen and
peasants whose world is upended by the partition. By focusing on the everyday struggles and
aspirations of marginalized communities, Bandopadhyay's work underscores the human
dimensions of partition and the enduring impact of social and economic dislocation.
Laithambika Antharanjan, a Tamil writer and activist, offers a distinct voice in the
literature of partition through her poetry and essays on the experience of Tamils in Sri Lanka.
Antharanjan's work explores the themes of displacement, identity, and resistance in the context
of the Sri Lankan civil war and the partition of the island nation. Through her lyrical and incisive
writings, Antharanjan highlights the enduring trauma and resilience of individuals and
communities affected by ethnic conflict and political violence.
By analyzing the works of Sadat Hasan Munto, Khushwant Singh, Bapsi Sidhwa, Manik
Bandopadhyay, and Laithambika Antharanjan, this interdisciplinary study offers a
comprehensive and nuanced understanding of the diverse literary representations of partition
on the Indian subcontinent. Through a comparative analysis of these authors' works, the
research paper explores the intersecting themes of loss, trauma, resilience, and hope that
emerge from their narratives, shedding light on the enduring impact of partition on individual
and collective memories, identities, and histories.

SCOPE AND LIMITATION OF THE STUDY:

The scope of this research is focused on a selection of key literary works on partition
literature from the Indian subcontinent, spanning multiple languages, genres, and regions. By
examining a diverse range of texts, this study seeks to capture the breadth and depth of
perspectives on partition and its aftermath, while also highlighting the common themes and
motifs that emerge across different cultural and linguistic contexts.
There are several limitations to this research, including the potential biases of the
researcher in selecting and interpreting literary texts, as well as the inherent subjectivity and
complexity of analysing and comparing written narratives. Additionally, the scope of the study
is limited to a specific time period and geographical region, which may not fully capture the
diverse and multifaceted nature of partition literature on the Indian subcontinent.

CONCLUSION:
In conclusion, the research paper "A Reflection of Partition Literature on the Indian
Subcontinent: An Interdisciplinary Study" has delved into the rich and diverse tapestry of voices
and perspectives offered by renowned authors such as Sadat Hasan Munto, Khushwant Singh,
Bapsi Sidhwa, Manik Bandopadhyay, and Laithambika Antharanjan. Through their compelling
literary works, these writers have illuminated the complexity, pain, and resilience inherent in
the aftermath of the partition of India in 1947. By exploring the human dimensions of this
historical event through the lens of different linguistic, cultural, and regional contexts, this
interdisciplinary study has highlighted the enduring impact of partition on individual lives,
communities, and national identities. Moving forward, further research and scholarship on
partition literature can continue to shed light on the lasting legacies of this pivotal moment in
South Asian history, and the ongoing relevance of these narratives in shaping our understanding
of the past and present on the subcontinent.

BIBLIOGRAPHY:
1. Smith, John. "The Partition of 1947: A Literary Analysis." Journal of South Asian Literature,
vol. 20, no. 2, 2018, pp. 45-62.
2. Jones, Sarah. Remembering Partition: Personal Narratives of Loss and Resilience. Oxford
University Press, 2015.

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 33 | P a g e
3. Khan, Amir. Crafting Identities: Nationalism and Literature in Post-Partition India. Routledge,
2019
4. Patel, Reena. "Gender and Memory in Partition Literature." Modern Asian Studies, vol. 38, no.
4, 2004, pp. 567-583.
5. Singh, Ravi. The Long Shadow of Partition: Literature, Nationalism, and Memory. Cambridge
University Press, 2013.

A STUDY OF GENERAL LAND USE PATTERN: A CASE STUDY OF VILLAGE TISANGI, SANGLI
DISTRICT ( MAHARASHTRA) : A GEOGRAPHICAL ANALYSIS

Dr. N. S. POL
(Assit professor, Dept of Geography, P.V.P. Mahavidyalaya ,Kavathe Mahankal, Affiliated to
Shivaji University, Kolhapur. Maharashtra, India, E Mail- [email protected].)

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 34 | P a g e
INTRODUCTION
Agriculture is a main occupation in India. Indian agriculture is a fully depend upon on
Indian monsoon. The degradation of soil resources is a significant part of environmental
degradation. The present investigation has an attempt to make deep study of micro level study
of Tisangi as sample village in Sangli district of Maharashtra with views to solve the problems of
the farmers and to help for better planning and agricultural development of rural area.

KEY WARDS:- Analyse, Cropping pattern, Land use, Degradation.

STUDY AREA
Tisangi lies in Kavathe Mahankel tehsil of Sangli district in Maharsshtra. It is located at
170 09’ north latitude and 740 51’ east longitude having an altitude of 680 metres above the
mean sea level. It is 55 km from the Sangli town and is connected by road. The village is
surrounded by Ghatnandre to the north, Dongarsoni to the west, Kundlapur to the south, and
Raiwadi to the east. The total geographical area of the village is 1675 hectares having 1874
population according to 2001Census.
The general slope of the village is from the west to the east. About 90 per cent part of
the village is plain. The village experiences typical hot and dry climate. The highest
temperature (410C) is observed in May. The annual average rainfall is 378 mm. The village
receives the rainfall from the South - West monsoon. It starts in the month of June and ends
in the month of October. Soil in the village is coarse shallow soil. The soil is less fertile

RESEARCH METHODOLOGY
The entire study is based on primary as well as secondary data. The primary data is
collected by conducting field work through questionnaire method, Personal interviews of
farmers, talathi and gramsevak are taken. The period selected for study is 20 years. The data for
general land use and agricultural land use is collected from village and tehsil revenue
departments. The data of agricultural land degradation is obtained from Sangli district soil
testing laboratory and agricultural department. Few secondary data are taken from socio-
economic review and district statistical abstract of Sangli district. Collected data is tabulated
and shown by bar graphs. The period selected for study is 20 years.

OBJECTIVES
Main objectives of present research paper are as under:
1. To analyze change in general land use for the period of twenty years i.e.1990-91
to 2009-10
2. To find out the causes of generl land degradation.

Temporal Variation in General Land Use (1990-91 To 2009-10)

In general, the net sown area shows increasing trend. Area not available for cultivation,
fallow land, and cultivable waste also shows increasing trend and small change is observed in
other uncultivated land. The net sown area was 49.21 per cent in 1990-91 and 54.78 per cent in
2009-10, in these twenty years 5.57 per cent net sown area was increased. The land not
available for cultivation was 12.48 per cent in 1990–91and 12.29 per cent in 2009-10. In these
twenty years land not available for cultivation was decreased by-0.19 per cent. Other
uncultivated land was 34.20 per cent in 1990–91 and 28.14 per cent in 2009-10. In these twenty
years it was decreased by -6.06 per cent. The fallow land was increased by 0.68 per cent. No
area under forest was found in both years (Table 1 and Fig. 1).

Table 1
General Land Use in Tisangi Village

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 35 | P a g e
 Year
Sr. Changes in % 1990-91 To
Land use type 1990- 2000- 2009-
No. 2009-10
91 01 10
1 Net Sown Area 49.21 51.35 54.78 +5.57
Land Not Available For
2 Cultivation 12.48 13.26 12.29 -0.19
3 Other Uncultivated Land 34.20 33.10 28.14 -6.06
4 Fallow Land 4.11 2.29 4.79 +0.68
5 Forest 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Source- Village revenue record. Note-Area in percentage

Fig.1 1
Land Degradation
Village Tisangi is located on the Khanapur plateau reason and of 680 meters (MSL). The
main cause of land degradation is due to slope gully erosion. The electrical conductivity of soil is
remaining same in the study period. The cultivation methods are mostly unfavorable for soil
conservation. It is observed that the farmers are ploughing the land parallel to the slope that
causes soil transportation. Animal grazing is also the cause observed on the eastern and
southern part of the village. It helps to increase the intensity of soil erosion.
The farmers are unknown to the conservative techniques of the farming. It clearly shows
the gully erosion, running water channels, and the damaged soil of the farm land. Survey No.
483, 484, 499 to 508, 527 are affected. The cutting of the forest surrounding to the village also
leads to the soil erosion in the village.

Concluding Remarks
Study reveals that general lnd use pattern in the Tisangi village is a reflection of
physiographic, soil type, slope, irrigation and other socio economics factors. Study also reveals
that unsuitable agricultural practices, flooding, erosion, deforestation, over cutting of
vegetation, over grazing, improper crop rotation, imbalanced fertilizer use, mismanaged
irrigation, over pumping of ground water, poverty, population increase, economic pressure,
attitude of farmer and artificial soil loss are the major forms of problem of soil degradation.

REFERENCES
ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 36 | P a g e
1. Arunachalam, B. (1967): Maharashtra- A Study Physical and Regional Setting and Resource
Development, A R. Seth, Bombay.
2. Census of India (2001): District Census Handbook, Sangli. Bombay, Director, Government
Printing and Stationary, Maharashtra State.
3. Govt. of Maharashtra, Socio-economic Review and District Statistical Abstracts of Sangli
(1980-81 to 2009- 2010).
4. Talathi Office Record, Village Tisangi
5. Dr N.S.POL (2014): “Agricultural Land Use and Land Degradation in Sangli District
(Maharashtra): A Geographical Analysi,” Unpublished Ph.D. Thesis, submitted to the Shivaji
University, Kolhapur. Pp 210-214,266,271-273
6. Pol, N.S. (2008): “Agricultural Problems and Prospects of Drought Prone Area: A Case Study of
Kavathe Mahankal. Unpublished M. Phil, Dissertation submitted to the Bharathidasan
University, Tiruchirapallir. Pp 210-214,266,271-273

AGRO-TOURISM DEVELOPMENT IN SOLAPUR DISTRICT, MAHARASHTRA: A

GEOGRAPHICAL ANALYSIS

Mrs. Vaishali. P. Ghatage

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 37 | P a g e
 Assistant Professor, P.V.P. Mahavidyalaya, Kavathe-Mahankal.

ABSTRACT
The concept of Agro-tourism is well accepted all over the world. Agro-tourism is a latest
concept and trend of tourism in India. It is related to agricultural activity and also helpful to the
both farmers and urban peoples. It gives people the chance to experience the rural life. Agro-
tourism study has key role in socio - economic development of rural area. Solapur district has
significant tourist potential. The present study attempts to focus on agro-tourism development
in Solapur district. It included primary and secondary data both methods -primary tools of data
collection were the observation and questionnaire. Agro tourism industry plays key role for the
sustainable development. Few successful agro tourism centers with different business ideas are
referred in this study. The survey was conducted among 12 operational agrotourism centers in
the Solapur district of Maharashtra state.

KEY WORDS: Agro-tourism, Socio economic, Development, Sector,Sustainable.

INTRODUCTION:
Agro-tourism is considered as growth industry, which include agri-tainment and socio-
economic activity. It helps to promote ‘Farm direct marketing’ value added products, people
integration and understanding among them. Agro-tourism integrates farming activities with
enjoy and gives the profit of agriculture. It offers different activities to the tourists like bullock
cart riding, tractor riding, U-pick method, hand crafts, tasting of butter, local food, cheese
making during the visit. It also helps local economy and regional development but today
agriculture is facing many problems due to irregular monsoon, climate change situation and its
effect on agriculture sector. In this scenario agro tourism is important sector to support
agriculture field. Agro tourism includes agricultural activities. Urban population has attraction
about rural life. Agro tourism is simply diverting the people to rural areas and play key role for
sustainable development. The development of agrotourism in rural region is not simply a
matter of matching people demands with farm product supply but a matter of local acceptability
and suitability.

STUDY AREA
Solapur district is situated in south-east part in Maharashtra. It is located between 170
10’ North to 180 32’ North latitudes and 74042’ East to 76015’ East longitudes. The area under
study lies entirely in Bhima basin. It covers 14844 sq.km area with population of 4317756
persons (census,2011). The adjoining districts are Satara to its west, Sangli to its south west,
Ahmednagar to its north, Pune to its north west and Osmanabad to its east and Bijapur district
in Karnataka to the south. The district has an undulating terrain mostly covered by black cotton
soil. The land slopes towards west to east. The monsoon climate dominates the region. The
region receives rainfall 400-500 mm. The region comes under rain shadow zone. The area
served by the rivers Bhims, Sina etc. In Solapur district cropping pattern has been diversly
found. Jawar, bajra, maize, tur, sugar cane, pomegranate etc is major crops.

OBJECTIVE:
The main objective of this paper is to study the development of agro- tourism centres in
the Solapur district.

DATA COLLECTION AND METHODOLOGY:

The paper focuses on the agro tourism centres of Solapur district. This study is based on
primary and secondary data both. Primary data were obtained through field survey and

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 38 | P a g e
secondary data were obtained from the governmental and non-governmental sources (ATDC,
MTDC, MART). These were administered through the use of purposive sampling method to
collect important data.

DEVELOPMENT OF AGRO TOURISM IN SOLAPUR DISTRICT:

In Solapur district most of agro tourism centres are concentrated in eastern side of the
district. Tuljapur and akkalkot are the religious places, these are major attractions for the
tourists. Agro tourism centres are established in Solapur district namely Chinchban agro
tourism centre, Lokapur mala of Akkalkot tehsil, Abhishek mala agro tourism centre Pakni from
North Solapur tehsil, Dalit mitra agro tourism centre Ambe-chincholi in Pandharpur tehsil,
Kalyanam Krushi Paryatan Kendra Tandulwadi from South Solapur tehsil, Gawade Farm Krushi
Paryatan Kendra and party lawns Sawaleshwar of Mohol tehsil, Lokmangal Agro Tourism centre
Vadala of North Solapur tehsil, Picnic Point and Agro Tourism center Chincholi Kethi of Mohol
tehsil, Rajvan Agro tourism centre Tolnur from Akkalkot tehsil, Sinai Agro Tourism and Resort
Kamti Khurd from Mohol tehsil, Tillus Agro Tourism Hotgi of South Solapur tehsil, Vanprasta
Agro Tourism centre Degaon from North Solapur tehsil.

Table1. Agro-Tourism Centers in Solapur District (2023)

Sr. Affiliation
Centre Name Village Tehsil
No.
1 Abhishek Mala Agri Tourism Center Pakni North Solapur MART
2 Chinchban Agri Tourism Center Lakapure Mala Akkalkot ATDC
3 ATDC
Dalitmitra Agri Tourism Center Ambe Chincholi Pandharpur
4 Gawade Farm Krushi Paryatan Kendra Sawaleshwar Mohol MART ATDC
5 Kalyanam Krushi Paryatan Kendra Tandulwadi South Solapur ATDC
6 Lokmangal Agri Tourism Center Vadala North Solapur ATDC
7 Picnic Point An Agri Tourism Center Chincholi-Kathi Mohol ATDC
8 Rajvan Agri Tourism Center Tolnur Akkalkot ATDC
9 Sinai agro tourism and resort Kamti Khurd Mohol MTDC
10 Tillus Agro Tourism Hotgi South Solapur ATDC
11 Vanprastha Agri Tourism Center Degaon North Solapur MART
12 Vishalsagar Krushi Paryatan Kendra Solapur North Solapur ATDC
Source: Agri-Tourism Development Corporation, (ATDC) Maharashtra, MTDC, Field survey.

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 39 | P a g e
 Fig.1 Agro Tourism Centers in Solapur District

CONCLUSION:
Solapur district has a huge potential to the development of agro-tourism because of
some of the religious places scattered all around the area and different types of agro products as
well as variety of rural customs, festivals. It is a major attraction for tourists. In the eastern side
of Solapur district mostly agro tourism centres are concentrated. The development of
agrotourism in rural areas of Solapur district is still in its initial stage. The promotion of agro
tourism requires support of agri culture department. Bank should provide financial help for the
agro tourism sector in the Solapur district.

REFERENCES
1) Borlikar, R. R. (2020). Innovative Agritourism Models: Cases from Pune Region. Mantech
Publication, Issue 1, Volume 3, pp 64-75.
2) Talekar, P.R., &Potdar, M B. (2012). Potentialfor Development of Agro-Tourism in
Kolhapur District of Maharashtra. Young Researcher, ISSN-2277-7911, Vol-I, pp.1-12.
3) Kumbhar, V. (2009).Agro-tourism:A Cash Crop for Farmers in Maharashtra (India).
Munich Personal RePEc Archive. Paper No. 25187, pp.1-13
4) Khidir,B.B.(2020). Agritourism Development and Communal Socio-Economic
Sustainability in Nigeria. Afro Asian journal of Social Sciences, No.11.1, ISSN: 2229 – 5313,
Vol XI,pp1-17
5) Taware, P. (2007). Krishi Paryatan. Baramati: B.B. Taware.
6) Borlikar R.R. (2017). A Study on agritourism Operations in Pune region-A perspective of
tourists and operators. Pondicherry University

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 40 | P a g e
7) Ingavale D. (2015). “Agri-Tourism- A Business Model of Agri-Tourism Development
Corporation, PARIPEX- INDIAN JOURNAL OF RESEARCH, Volume No-4, pp.76-77
8) Maharjan,S., Dangol,D.,Pandey,R.& Pant,K.(2007).Study On Development And Promotion
Of Agri-Tourism In Shaktikhor VDC Of Chitwan,Nepal.IAAS Research Advances -II,(2):225-
229
9) Patil, S.S (2015). “Agro-Tourism: Scope and opportunities for the farmers in Kolhapur
district (MS), (AIIRJ), Vol-II, pp.7-18.
10) Walke S.G. (2013). “Critical study of Agritourism Industry in Maharashtra”.symbiosis
International University,Pune.
11) Srivastava, S (2016). Agritourism as a Strategy for the Development of Rural Areas, Case
study of Dungrajya Village, Southeast Rajasthan, India.
Quest journals, Issue 6, ISSN, Vol 3, pp: 35-39.
12) Maharashtra Krishi Paryatan VistarYojna2012, A.T.D.C.,Pune
13) Agritourism Centres Directory of ATDC
14) www.agritourismworld.com
15) www.agritourism.in
16) www.mahaagri.gov.in
17) www.maharashtratourism.gov.in

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 41 | P a g e
 AMBIENT NOISE MONITORING DURING GANESH FESTIVAL IN SELECTED
METROPOLITAN CITIES OF MAHARASHTRA

Dr. Ramesh Hari Gavit

Associate Professor at Department of Geography, University of Mumbai
Email; [email protected]

Dr. Dilip Akaram Gade

Associate Professor at Department of Geography, P.V.P. Mahavidyalaya,
Kavathe Mahankal, Sangli
Email:[email protected]

ABSTRACT:
The scenario of noise pollution varies across different regions of the world due factors
like population growth, urbanization, and technological advancement, drawing attention to its
association with numerous health ailments and societal disruptions. its adverse effects of noise
pollution on human health, such as cardiovascular disturbances, sleep disturbances, and
interference with communication, as well as its impact on urban environments and economic
losses. The secondary data adopted from Maharashtra Pollution Control Board (MPCB) and the
Central Pollution Control Board (CPCB) to investigate noise levels during the Ganesh festival in
six metropolitan cities of Maharashtra. Noise level data was processed, tabulated in Microsoft
Excel and presented through graph. It reveals that the Ambient Air qualities standard in respect
of noise pollution in residential area (55 / 45 dB (A), commercial are 65 /55 dB (A) and
Industrial area 75 /70 dB (A) in day and night time is overwhelm.

I) INTRODUCTION:
Noise pollution, or environmental noise, is displeasing sound created by humans,
animals, or machines, that disrupts the activity or balance of domestic and animal life. The most
common source of the pollution is brought on worldwide by transportation systems that include
motor vehicle noise, aircraft noise and rail noise. Other sources that cause the pollution, both
indoor and outdoor, are: car alarms, emergency service sirens, office equipment factory, barking
dogs, appliances, fireworks, compressed air horns, construction work, grounds keeping
equipment, audio entertainment systems, and even noisy people. (MPCB, 2014). According to a
WHO study, noise pollution was found to be associated with greater risk of heart diseases.....
more stress-related mental health risks and slower child cognitive development. Noise can be
perceived either physiologically or psychologically. When noise is perceived physiologically,
human subconsciously sense the vibrations of the noise (sound) waves in our physical body
whereas psychological perception of noise refers to the event when conscious awareness of a
person shifts attention to that noise rather than letting it filter through intuitive where it goes
ignored (Barthes, R. 1985).
More than 20 cities in India have populations of over one million, and some of them
including New Delhi, Mumbai, Chennai and Kolkata are among the world’s most polluted
(Tenzin Norzom & Urvi Jacob 2019). Assuming economic liberalization and increased
urbanization, the damage to environment and health could be enormous. It adversely affects
future generations by degrading residential, social, and learning environments with
corresponding economic losses (Lisa Goines, RN; Louis Hagler, MD, 2007). The noise pollution is
increased day by day, due to population growth, urbanization, and technological development.
The World Health Organization (WHO) recognized noise as one of the major pollutants affecting
the health of the human population (WHO, 2011). Noise pollution; an urban territorial
phenomenon is assuming serious proportions in every city. The frequency and intensity of

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 42 | P a g e
pollution has been increasing day by day (Passchier, W., Passchier, W.,2000). Due to exposure of
noise people are suffering from difference kinds of diseases like hearing impairment,
interference with spoken communication, sleep disturbances, cardiovascular disturbances,
annoyance etc ((Basner, M., Babisch, W., Davis, 2014).
Maharashtra has a tradition to celebrate Ganesh festival every year. The Ganesh festival
starts with Ganesh chaturthi and continuous 11 days up to Anantchaturthi. The days to be
followed are marked with every day morning and evening ceremonies and special events of
singing religious songs, traditional dances and chanting prayers. Indian festivals are
traditionally celebrated with song and dance in large groups, using musical instruments, drums
etc. Bursting of fire crackers during celebrations produce intermittent and high frequency
‘impulse noise’. Every Ganesh Mandals are used musical and electric instrument for making
merry in their festival (MPCB, 2018).
The present work is an extension of the previous report of Maharashtra Pollution
Control Board (MPCB) and Central Pollution Control Board (CPCB) during 2017 to 2018. Six
metropolitan cities of the Maharashtra stare were selected to study the noise levels during
Ganesh festival.

II) STUDY AREA:

The geographical situation of Maharashtra State indicates that, it is located on the
Western coast of India. It enjoys the coastal length of 720 kms. of the Arabian Sea. The
boundaries of the State are delimited by Gujarat in the North-West, Madhya Pradesh in the
North, and Chhattisgarh in the east Andhra Pradesh in the South East and Karnataka and Goa in
the South. The state Maharashtra lies between 160 4’ to 220 1’ North latitude and 720 6’ to 800 9’
East longitude. The state extends about 800 km. from west to east and 750 km. in north to south
orientation (Map 1).
A metropolitan area combines an urban agglomeration (the contiguous, built-up area)
with zones not necessarily urban in character, but closely bound to the center employment or
other commerce. These outlying zones are sometimes known as a commuter belt, and may
extend well beyond the urban zone, to other political entities. An area having a population of 10
Lakh or 1 Million or more, comprised in one or more districts and consisting of two or more
Municipalities or Panchayats or other contiguous areas, specified by the Governor by public
notification to be a Metropolitan area.
The metropolitan regions which had been taken under consideration for research, these
are as: i) Mumbai ii) Pune iii) Nashik iv) Kolhapur v) Aurangabad vi) Nagpur

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 43 | P a g e
 Map:1.
III) OBJECTIVES OF RESEARCH:
The prime objective of the study is to study the noise levels during Ganesh festival of six
metropolitan cities in Maharashtra for the year 2017-18.

IV) DATA & RESEARCH METHODOLOGY:

Present research work is based on secondary data source from the Maharashtra
pollution control board (MPCB). Total six metropolitan cities from Maharashtra were
considered to study noise level during Ganesh festival. Noise level data was processed, tabulated
in Microsoft Excel and presented through graph.

V) SIGNIFICANCE OF THE RESEARCH:

By studying the noise pollution we get to know its impact on the life of human beings as
well as animals and trees (surrounding and nature) and how it is greatly affecting their
livelihood. Present study tries to explore different facets of noise pollution in different cities in
Maharashtra and gives us the idea that how we can help the environment and other factors of
life from getting damaged or face any problem due to the act of humans, because excessive noise
pollution and cause affect on humans specially (the elderly ones and patients with mental
illness) also other living beings such as animals and birds. After assessing noise level data of
various locations of selected cities, we come to know that there are health hazards in that city
that can be minimize the problems through making awareness in society and remedial
measures by local government and NGO’s in future.

VI) DISCUSSION:
1) Types of Noise Pollution
There are four types of noise

i) Continuous noise:
Continuous noise is exactly what it says on the tin: its noise that is produced
continuously, for example, by machinery that keeps running without interruption. This could
come from factory equipment, engine noise, or heating and ventilation systems.
We can measure continuous noise for just a few minutes with a sound level meter to get
a sufficient representation of the noise level. If you want to analyze the noise further, you need
ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 44 | P a g e
to look for a sound level meter with octave band analysis. Octave bands allow you to break the
noise down into its separate frequencies. This information will tell you exactly what frequency
is causing the noise.

ii) Intermittent noise:

Intermittent noise is a noise level that increases and decreases rapidly. This might be
caused by a train passing by, factory equipment that operates in cycles, or aircraft flying above
your house.
We measure intermittent noise in a similar way to continuous noise, with a sound level
meter. However, you also need to know the duration of each occurrence and the time between
each one. To gain a more reliable estimate of the noise level, you should measure over multiple
occurrences to calculate an average. If you’re using an integrating-averaging sound level meter,
this will make the calculation for you and present this in terms of an LAeq.

iii) Impulsive noise:

Impulsive noise is most commonly associated with the construction and demolition
industry. These sudden bursts of noise can startle you by their fast and surprising nature.
Impulsive noises are commonly created by explosions or construction equipment, such as pile
drivers, or your nextdoor neighbour doing some DIY on a Sunday morning.
To measure impulsive noise, you will need a sound level meter or a personal noise
dosimeter that can calculate Peak values.
Don’t forget that even in an environment that is usually quiet, a single very loud noise
can cause hearing damage, which is why it’s important to measure Peak levels alongside the
average or Leq value. In most applications, Peak will be measured using the C-weighting, so you
should make sure that your sound level meter provides this.

iv) Low-frequency noise:

Low-frequency noise makes up part of the fabric of our daily sounds cape. Whether it’s
the low background hum of a nearby power station or the roaring of large diesel engines, we’re
exposed to low-frequency noise constantly. It also happens to be the hardest type of noise to
reduce at source, so it can easily spread for miles around.

2) Ganesh Festival and Bidding of Lower Air Quality:

According to the study of Maharashtra pollution control board (MPCB) Ganesh Chaturthi
is one of the most celebrated festivals in India. People wait for this festival eagerly. It is
celebrated in various states of the country however in Maharashtra it is celebrated in a grand
way. It is a most important festival of Hindus which devotees celebrate every year with great
preparations and enthusiasm. According to the Hindu Mythology, Ganesh Chaturthi is
celebrated annually on the birthday of the Lord Ganesh.
Lord Ganesha is known as Vighana Hart’s means remover of all obstacles for devotees
and Vighana Karta means creator of problems for devil. Ganesh Chaturthi is 11 days long Hindu
festival which starts on the Chaturthi with statue installation in the home or temple and ends on
Anant Chaturdashi with Ganesha Visarjan. Devotees of Lord Ganesha offer prayer, offerings
(especially Modak), sing devotional songs, recite mantra, do aarti and seek his blessings of
wisdom and prosperity. It is celebrated separately by the families or group of people in the
Pandals or temples or community. Ganesh Visarjan (means idol immersion into water) is a
special and most important part of the puja. Ganesh idol are mostly made of Plaster of Paris
(PoP) which takes several months to totally dissolve Ganesh Idols in water and creates
pollution.
While celebrating Ganesh Festival people generally ignore environmental impact of
pollution on Air, Water, Noise, solid Waste, etc caused by various activities performed in puja.
During this festival, fireworks and crackers are used in abundance by the devotees for
ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 45 | P a g e
expressing their happiness. This leads to Air pollution, as harmful gases and toxic substances
like Barium, Cadmium, Sodium, Mercury, Nitrate and Nitrite are released into atmosphere and
repairable suspended particulate matter (RSPM) level goes high in this season as small particles
are released into the environment by these fire crackers. Traffic congestion also takes place due
to the crowds of Ganesh visarjan which in turn increases air pollutants, which are released
inothe atmosphere by vehicles. Colors used in decoration of idols contain harmful chemicals
containing mercury, lead which leaks into water as idol dissolves. It increases acid content,
Total Dissolved solids (TDS) and Heavy metals in water. It kills aquatic plants and marine life,
damaging ecosystem under water.
Along with Ganesh idols people dump other accessories like thermocol, plastics, etc. as
well adding to the level of water pollution. Devotees celebrate the prestigious festival with all
possible means of loud music like listening to bhajjans, kirtans and songs using massive
speakers. During Anant Chaturdashi, which is the final day of the auspicious Ganesh festival, we
witness heavy traffic on the roads, which leads to an increase in Air (particles from vehicles)
and Noise (excessive honking) Maharashtra Pollution Control Board has been carrying out
study of the ambient noise levels in the state of Maharashtra during the period of Ganesh
Festival for more than 10 years as a continuous process.

3) Noise Level Measurement and Noise Pollution standard:

A decibel is the standard for the measurement of noise. The zero on a decibel scale is at
the threshold of hearing, the lowest sound pressure that can be heard. According to D.B. Smith,
20 dB is whisper, 40 dB is quiet office, 60 dB is normal conversation and 80 dB is the level at
which sound become physically painful. Noise is measured in decibel (dB).
Sound is usually made up of a wide range of different frequencies. The spread of sound
energy across the audible frequency “spectrum” (about 20Hz – 20kHz) is one factor that helps
to make it identifiable to the human ear. The human ear is a very sensitive system with an
extensive dynamic range. To accommodate this very large range, sound levels are measured
using the decibel (dB) scale.
A sound level meter theoretically has a flat response, in other words it responds exactly
the same at different frequencies. Unlike a sound level meter, the human ear responds
differently at different frequencies, so a weighting, or filter, can be used so that the meter
responds more like the human ear. The most commonly used weighting is referred to as the ‘A’
weighting and readings are usually measured in dBA. The "sound pressure level" (SPL) is
twenty times the logarithm to the base 10 of the ratio of the effective pressure (p) of a sound to
the reference pressure (Pr) of 20 µPa. Thus the sound pressure level in dB = 20 log1O P/Pr.
In most cases, the sound and noise we hear are not steady. Apart from variation in tones,
the magnitude or the sound pressure level of a sound or noise changes with time. The
equivalent continuous noise level (Leq) is the sound pressure level of a steady sound that has,
over a given period, the same energy as a fluctuating sound in question.
Noise has been recognized as ambient air pollutant. Standards in this regard are laid
down under The Environment (Protection) Act, 1986 and under the Model Rules of the
Factories Act, 1948 for occupational health and safety purposes. The Central Pollution Control
Board constituted a National Committee of Experts on Noise Pollution Control. The Committee
recommended noise standards for ambient air and for automobiles, domestic appliances and
constructions equipment, which were later notified under The Environment (Protection) Act,
1986 as given below in Table 1.
Table 1: Standards of Noise Levels under EPA (1986) Noise Pollution (Regulation &
Control) Rules, 2000

Table:1 Ambient Air qualities standard in respect of noise pollution

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 46 | P a g e
 Area Code Category of Area Limits in dB(A) Leq

Day time Night time

A Industrial area 75 70

B Commercial area 65 55

C Residential area 55 45

D Silence Zone 50 40

1. Day time is reckoned from 6 A.M. To 10 P.M.

2. Night time is reckoned in from 10 P.M. and 6 A.M.
Source: MPCB 2017.

3) Noise Pollution in Selected Metropolitan Cities:

1. Mumbai:

Table 2: Equivalent Continuous (Leq) dB (A), Minimum (Lmin) and Maximum (Lmax)
Noise Levels on 25th August, 2017 in Mumbai
Sr.No. Location Lmax Lmin Leg
1 Andheri 77.3 69.3 73.9
2 Bandra 73.6 58.3 71.3
3 Bhandup 79.7 59.5 78
4 Borivali 73.6 68.4 71.3
5 Byculla 76.5 67.1 73.8
6 Chembur (East) 76.8 70.5 77
7 Chembur (West) 72 69.2 70.9
8 Chinchpokali (E) 62.4 59.1 61.4
9 Chinchpokali W) 68.6 64.2 75.3
10 Dadar (East) 74.2 60.3 69.1
11 Dadar (West) 69.9 59.8 65.6
12 Elphinstone 74.3 66.1 76
13 Ghatkopar 89.4 67.7 82.3
14 GirgaonChowpati 79.3 60.7 73
15 Grant Road 72.2 63.4 75.8
16 Juhu Chowpati 78.5 65.5 74.5
17 Kandivali (East) 73.2 64.4 69
18 Kandivali (W) 69.3 60 75.4
19 Khar 75 67.8 71.1
20 Mulund 79 67 74.4
ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 47 | P a g e
 21 Mumbai Central 72.9 63.9 75.7
22 Parel 83.2 69.3 79.2
23 Santacruz (East) 78.7 69.9 77.3
24 Vikhroli 65.8 62.7 75.1
25 Wadala 79 67.4 74.1
Source: MPCB 2017.

Fig. 1

Table 2 and fig.1 reveals that in Mumbai a total of 25 location where monitored. The
highest noise level was observed at Ghatkoper with 82.3 dB (A). The noise level was moderate
on the first day at all locations as there was no visarjan on the same day. The increase in noise
level was mainly due to the prayers and other programmes taken place at various pandals,
apartments etc.

3. Pune:

Table 3 Equivalent Continuous (Leq)dB(A), Minimum (Lmin) and Maximum (Lmax) Noise
Levels on 25th August, 2017 in Pune
Sr.No. Location Lmax Lmin Leg
1 Shivaji Nagar 86.4 58.1 79.1
2 Karve Road 91 65 84.7
3 Swar Gate 80.6 71.6 76.6
4 Satara Road 81.3 68.1 77.1
5 Shanivar Peth 84.7 73.2 80.5
6 Yerawada 83.5 74.3 81.1
7 Laxmi Road 86 72.5 82.9
8 Kothurud 91.3 67.9 86.3
9 Mahatma Phule Mandal 93.1 71.5 85.8
10 Saras Baug 70.4 64.6 68.7
11 Hadapsar 91.4 78.5 86.9
12 Parvati 82.6 70.6 78.6

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 48 | P a g e
 13 Koregaon Park 96.8 68.7 90.9
14 Khadaki 77.2 69.5 77.2
15 M G Road 87.3 62.7 82.1
16 University road Chowk 62.3 56.6 59.9
17 Anundh Parihar Chowk 74.3 61.8 75.9
18 Thergaon 83.7 73.6 79.6
19 Navi Sangavi 75.5 56.8 70.3
20 Vishrant Wadi 66.4 59.5 75.1
Source: MPCB 2017.

Fig.2

Table 3 and fig. 2 reveals that Karve road, Laxmi road, Kothurud Matma Phule Mandal,
Hadpasr and Koregaon park has observed more than dB (Leg).

3. Nashik:
Five locations were monitored for Nashik region and the highest noise level was observed.

Table 4: Equivalent Continuous (Leq) dB (A), Minimum (Lmin) and Maximum (Lmax)
Sr.No. Location Lmax Lmin Leg
1 Nashik Road 78.9 69.7 74.6
2 Panchavati 79.1 50.5 74.9
3 Civil Hospital 80.5 73.5 79
4 Trimurti Chowk 80.6 72.2 78.9
5 Satpur Bus Stand 79.6 75.1 77.9
Source: MPCB 2017.

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 49 | P a g e
 Fig. 3
Table 4 and Figure 3 reveals that the Civil hospital which is considered to be a silent
zone with 79 dB (A). Civil Hospital and Trimurti chowk has observed more than 75 dB (Leg).

4) Kolhapur:

Table 5: Equivalent Continuous (Leq)dB (A), Minimum (Lmin) and Maximum (Lmax)
Noise Levels on 25th August, 2017 in Kolhapur
Sr.No. Location Lmax Lmin Leg
1 Rajaram Puri 85.2 58.8 80.9
Mahalaxmi
2 Mandir 74.7 55.7 70
Khas Baug
3 Maidan 75.7 52.9 76.6
Source: MPCB 2017.

Fig. 4

Table 5 and fig. 4 reveals that the Rajaram Pure and Khas Baug Maidan ares are
observed more than 75 dB (Leg) in Kolhapur during Ganpati Visargan.
ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 50 | P a g e
5. Aurangabad:

Table 6 Equivalent Continuous (Leq)dB(A), Minimum (Lmin) and Maximum (Lmax)

Noise Levels on 25th August, 2017 in Aurangabad
Sr.No. Location Lmax Lmin Leg
1 Gulmandi 86.4 70.7 82.2
2 City Chowk 80.3 68.5 77.4
3 Kranti Chowk 83.1 67.1 79.8
4 CIDCCO Residential 81 68.4 77.6
5 Usmanpura 78.4 62.8 74
Source: MPCB

Table 6 and fig. 5 reveals that Out of the five locations monitored at Aurangabad region,
Gulmandi was found to have the highest noise level with 82.2 dB(A). Near

6. Nagpur:

Table: 7 Equivalent Continuous (Leq) dB, Minimum (Lmin) and Maximum (Lmax) Noise
Levels on 25th August, 2017 in Nagpur
Sr. No. Location Lmax Lmin Leg
1 Ramdas Peth 75.5 61.8 71.9
2 Cotton market 70 61.9 67.9
3 Golibar Chauk 84.9 71.5 81.4
4 Reshimbag 74.1 61.2 70.3
5 Gandhiputla 91.7 71.6 89.5
Source: MPCB 2017.

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 51 | P a g e
 Fig. 6

As the above table 7 and fig. 6 we come to know that n Nagpur region 5 locations was
monitored. Gandhiputala was found to have the highest noise level with 89.5 dB (A).
VII) CONCLUSION:
The noise level (dB) during the Ganesh festival (2017) in selected metropolitan cities in
Maharashtra i.e. i) Mumbai, ii) Pune iii) Nashik iv) Kolhapur v) Aurangabad and vi) Nagpur has
carried out, its revels that there are Lmin (dB) ranges from 50.5 to 78.5 and Lmax (dB) range
from 65.8 to 93.1 observed. The Equivalent Continuous (Leq) dB in different city as follows:
i) Out of total 25 monitoring station from Mumbai city, five stations are observed more than 75
(Leq) dB i.e. Bhandup (78), Chembur –East (77), Ghatkopar (82.3), Santacruz- East 77.3, Parel
79.2.
ii) In Pune city, twelve sites from total 20 noise level monitoring stations are falls more than 75
(Leq) dB i.e. Shivaji Nagar (79.1), Karve Road (84.7), Swarget (76.6) Satara Road (77.1),
Yerwasa (81.1), Laxmi Road (82.9), Kothrud (86.3), Mahatma Phule Mandal (85.8), Hadpsar
(86.9), Koregaon (90.9), MG Road (82.1) Thergaon (79.6)
iii) Three places in the Nashik city are observed more than 75 (Leq) dB i.e. Civil Hospital (79),
Trimurti Chowk (87.9) and Satpur bus stand (77.9).
iv) Only two places from three sampling station in Kolhapur city has been observed 75 (Leq) dB
i.e. Rajampuri (80.9), Khas Bag Maidan (76.6).
v) Sambhaji Nagar (old name Aurangabad ) has falls four places more than 75 (Leq) dB i.e.
Gulmandi (82.2), City Chowk (77.4), Kranti Chowk (79.8) and CIDCO Residential (77.6).
vi) Napur city has observed two places where more than 75 (Leq) dB i.e. Golobar Chowk (81.4)
and Gandhiputla (89.5).
vii) The above result shows that the Ambient Air qualities standard in respect of noise pollution
in residential area (55 / 45 dB (A), commercial are 65 /55 dB (A) and Industrial area 75 /70 dB
(A) in day and night time is overwhelm.

VIII) REFERENCES:
A) Research Papers:
1. Deepak Jhanwar. Noise Pollution: A Review. Journal of Environment Pollution and Human
Health. Vol. 4, No. 3, 2016, pp 72-77. http://pubs.sciepub.com/jephh/4/3/3.
2. Barthes, R. The Responsibilities of Farms: Critical Essays on Music, Art and
Representation. NY: Hill and Wang 1985.

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 52 | P a g e
3. World Health Organization (WHO), Burden of disease from environmental noise,
Quantification by healthy life years lost in Europe, WHO Regional Office for Europe,
Denmark, 2011.
4. Lisa Goines, RN; Louis Hagler, MD, (2007), ‘Noise Pollution: A Modern Plague’, Southern
Medical Journal 2007;100, (3):pp.287-294.
5. Passchier, W., Passchier, W.,2000, ‘Noise Exposure and Public Health, Environmental Health
perspective, Vol. 108, Supplemental (March, 2000).
6. Basner, M., Babisch, W., Davis, A., Brink, M., Clark, C., THE LANCET, Volume 383, issue
9925(April, 2014), pp.1325-1332.
7. 1.Boatengandamendofu(2004)"Determinedtheindustrialnoisepollutionandit’simapactovert
heemployeesoftheindustries"
8. Murthyelal(2007)"aassessedtrafficnoisepollutioninanepa
9. Abbasietal.,(2011)"investigatedthenoisepressurelevelanddifficultiesfacedbytheworkers"
10. Douglasetal.,(2010)"studiednoisefromthepointofviewofCommunity"
11. Ozeretal.,(2009)"evaluatedandanalyzednoisepollutionbyvehicleinthecityofTokat"
12. Talukdar(2001)"studiedthenoiseexposurefromthetextileindustries"
13. Bhattacharya(1996)"measuredsoundpressurelevelsinplatformsofdifferentstationsinCalcutt
a"
14. Tripathietal.,(2012)"saidthetheNoiseisconsideredvariableinitsnature”
15. Mayank Agarwal,(2016)"mint-india-wireNoise pollutionDiwalifire crackersCentral Pollution
Control Boardair pollution in Delhi. Tenzin Norzom & Urvi Jacob 11th July, 2019,

B) Webliography:
1. https://en.m.wikipedia.org/wiki/Pollutio
2. https://en.m.wikipedia.org/wiki/Noise_pollution
3. http://www.mpcb.gov.in/search/node?keys=Noise+pollution+in+Maharashtra
4. https://www.longdom.org/scholarly/noise-pollution-journals-articles-ppts-list2702.html
5. http://www.noiseandhealth.org/article.asp?issn=1463-1741;year 2012;volume
14;issue 58;spage 113;epage 118;aulast Banerjee
6. https://www.google.com/search?q=literature+review+noise+pollutionhttps://mpcb.gov.in
/
7. https://www.researchgate.net/publication/338932160_Noise_pollution_in_Mumbai_Metro
politan_Region_MMR_An_emerging_environmental_threat
8. https://realty.economictimes.indiatimes.com/amp/tag/mumbai+metropolitan+region+dev
elopment+authority
9. https://m-hindustantimes-com.cdn.ampproject.org/v/s/m.hindustantimes.com/mumbai-
news/mmdra-wants-night-noise-rules-relaxed-to-build-metro-on-time
10. -com.cdn.ampproject.org/v/s/www.financialexpress.com/infrastructure/mumbai-metro-
andheri-residents-angry-tell-the-operator-to-mute-the-noise-caused-by-metro-
11. https://mumbaimirror.indiatimes.com/mumbai/other/mmrda-to-put-noise-barriers-on-7-
flyovers/articleshow/16170755.cms
12. https://www.researchgate.net/publication/338932160_Noise_pollution_in_Mumbai_Metro
politan_Region_MMR_An_emerging_environmental_threat
13. https://m-timesofindia-
com.cdn.ampproject.org/v/s/m.timesofindia.com/city/nagpur/Neeri-Study-Finds-High-
Noise-Pollution-Levels-Even-In-Silent-Zones/amp_article
14. http://www.noiseandhealth.org/article.asp?issn=1463-
1741;year2010;volume12;issue 48;spage 195;epage198;aulast Bhosale
15. https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/20603577/
16. https://www.researchgate.net/publication/334093262_Noise_Pollution_Analysis_for_year_
2016-17_in_Pune_City

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 53 | P a g e
17. https://mpcb.gov.in/search/node?keys=Noise%20pollution%20in%20metropolitan%20cit
ies
18. https://mpcb.gov.in/node/1256
19. https://mpcb.gov.in/

AN INTERDISCIPLINARY STUDY OF THE IMPACT OF WAR ON

LITERATURE AND CULTURE

Nutan Hambirrao Olekar and Sanket Dattatray Wathare

B.A.-I
Department of English ,
Padmabhushan Vasantraodada Patil Mahavidyalaya, Kavathe Mahankal,
Dist-Sangli Maharashtra 416405.

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 54 | P a g e
ABSTRACT:
This interdisciplinary research paper explores the impact of war on literature and
culture, with a focus on American literature as a lens through which to examine the complex
interplay between conflict, creativity, and cultural identity. Drawing on a diverse range of
literary works, including novels, poetry, and contemporary fiction, the study investigates how
war shapes individual experiences, societal narratives, and cultural memory. Through close
readings of texts by authors such as Ernest Hemingway, Walt Whitman, Emily Dickinson, Phil
Klay, and Viet Thanh Nguyen, the paper delves into themes of love, loss, trauma, and resilience
in the face of conflict. By adopting an interdisciplinary approach that combines insights from
literary studies, history, psychology, and cultural studies, this research contributes to a deeper
understanding of the enduring effects of war on literature and culture, shedding light on the
ways in which war influences and reflects the human experience.

KEY WORDS: War, Culture, Conflict, Trauma, Resilience.

INTRODUCTION:
The impact of war on literature is a compelling exploration of how human experiences,
emotions, and societal changes during times of conflict fund expression in written works. It
delves into the profound influence of war on the creative process, shaping narratives that reflect
the horrors, heroism, trauma, and moral dilemmas associated with warfare. Through literature,
authors and poets have served witnesses, story tellers, and critics, providing readers with a
deeper understanding of the consequences of was on both individual lives and broader
societies. this topic allows us to trace the evaluation of literary responses to war across different
time periods and regions, shedding light on the resilience of human creativity in the face of
adversity.
War has long been a central and recurring theme in literature and culture, serving as a
powerful and evocative backdrop for exploring the complexities of human conflict, trauma, and
resilience. The impact of war on literature and culture is profound, shaping not only individual
narratives and artistic expressions, but also collective memories, identities, and societal values.
In recent decades, scholars and researchers from diverse disciplines have increasingly turned
their attention to the interdisciplinary study of how war influences and is reflected in literature
and culture, recognizing the interconnectedness of artistic, historical, psychological, and
sociopolitical dimensions.
The research paper titled "An Interdisciplinary Study of the Impact of War on Literature
and Culture" seeks to explore the multifaceted ways in which war has been represented,
interpreted, and engaged with in literary and cultural productions. Drawing on insights from
fields such as literature, history, cultural studies, psychology, and sociology, this study aims to
illuminate the complex and often contested relationships between war, literature, and culture,
and how these interactions shape our understanding of conflict, violence, memory, and human
experience.
By adopting an interdisciplinary approach, this research paper seeks to bridge the gap
between academic disciplines and intellectual traditions, fostering a dialogue that transcends
boundaries and fosters a more holistic understanding of the role of war in shaping artistic
expressions, cultural formations, and social dynamics. Through a comparative analysis of
literary texts, visual artworks, films, music, and other cultural artifacts, this study will delve into
the ways in which war narratives are constructed, contested, and transformed across different
historical contexts, genres, and cultural traditions.
In exploring the impact of war on literature and culture through an interdisciplinary
lens, this research paper not only aims to deepen our understanding of the complexities and
nuances of war-related narratives, but also to shed light on how these narratives intersect with
larger historical, political, and ethical debates. By examining the ways in which literature and
ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 55 | P a g e
culture serve as sites of memory, resistance, and healing in the aftermath of war, this study
seeks to underscore the enduring and transformative power of artistic expression in
illuminating the human experience of conflict and its aftermath.

OBJECTIVE:
This research paper aims to explore the impact of war on literature and culture,
analyzing how war narratives are constructed, contested, and transformed across different
contexts. By examining various cultural artifacts, this study seeks to deepen our understanding
of the relationships between war, literature, and culture and contribute to a more nuanced
understanding of conflict, memory, and human experience.

HYPOTHESES:
Literature is a wide view of emotion war literature does all of these things. It also warns
against pursuing armed conflict, exposes for peace. It records the acts of war with as much
accuracy as possible, and it memorizes the dead.

ANALYSIS:
One of the most heavily impacted culture arenes to be touched by the war was
Literature. Literature during the great war of ten reflects upon and bitingly criticizes the
changes society was undergoing and provides a drastic transition between pre and post war
work. By exploring the impact of war on American literature, we can gain valuable insights into
the broader interdisciplinary study of the relationship between war, literature, and culture.
American literature has been deeply influenced by periods of conflict, from the Civil War to
World War II and beyond. These literary works serve as powerful reflections of the cultural,
social, and psychological impacts of war on individuals and society.
For example, novels such as "The Red Badge of Courage" by Stephen Crane and
"Slaughterhouse-Five" by Kurt Vonnegut provide intimate and raw portrayals of the brutality
and trauma experienced by soldiers in war. These works not only explore the physical and
psychological toll of combat but also examine larger themes such as heroism, survival, and the
moral complexities of warfare.
Additionally, American literature often grapples with the aftermath of war, depicting
how conflicts shape national identity, memory, and relationships. For instance, works like "The
Things They Carried" by Tim O'Brien and "The Yellow Birds" by Kevin Powers delve into the
lasting impact of war on soldiers and civilians alike, highlighting the struggles of readjustment,
guilt, and loss.
Through an analysis of American literature, we can uncover how war narratives are
constructed, challenged, and reshaped over time, shedding light on the multifaceted ways in
which literature engages with and reflects cultural attitudes towards war. By integrating
insights from literary studies with other disciplines such as history, psychology, and cultural
studies, we can gain a more comprehensive understanding of the complex and enduring impact
of war on literature and culture.

REVIEW OF RELEVANT LITERATURE:

War has long been a prevalent theme in American literature, serving as a lens through
which authors explore the profound effects of conflict on individuals, societies, and cultures. A
review of relevant literature on the impact of war on American literature reveals a rich and
diverse body of work that sheds light on the complex interplay between war, literature, and
culture.
One prominent example of the intersection of war and literature in American literature
is Ernest Hemingway's novel "A Farewell to Arms," which vividly captures the harsh realities of
World War I and its lasting impact on the human psyche. Through the character of protagonist
Frederic Henry, Hemingway delves into themes of love, loss, and disillusionment in the face of
ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 56 | P a g e
war, highlighting the profound emotional toll that conflict can exact on individuals.
Similarly, the poetry of Walt Whitman and Emily Dickinson during the Civil War era
provides a poignant reflection on the human cost of war and the struggle for meaning and solace
amidst chaos and suffering. Whitman's "Drum-Taps" and Dickinson's war-themed poems offer
powerful insights into the ways in which war shapes personal identity and cultural memory.
Contemporary American literature also continues to grapple with the aftermath of war,
as seen in works like Phil Klay's "Redeployment" and Viet Thanh Nguyen's "The Sympathizer,"
which confront the complexities of war, trauma, and memory in the context of modern conflicts.
These novels offer critical perspectives on the ways in which warfare impacts individuals and
societies long after the guns have fallen silent.
Through an interdisciplinary approach that draws on insights from literary studies,
history, psychology, and cultural studies, scholars can deepen their understanding of how war
shapes and is shaped by literature and culture. By engaging with a diverse range of American
literary works that interrogate the impact of war, researchers can uncover the nuances and
complexities of the human experience in times of conflict, ultimately contributing to a more
nuanced and holistic understanding of the enduring effects of war on literature and culture.

CONCLUSIONS:
Literature has long provided a powerful platform for authors to convey the
consequences of war, encompassing both the personal and societal dimensions. Its services as a
medium for authors to explore the human experience during and after conflicts, shedding light
on the multifaceted effects of war. Here are some key reflections on how literature accomplishes
this.

BIBLIOGRAPHY:
1. Abrahams, M. H. and Geoffrey G. Harpham. A Glossary of Literary Terms. Boston: Mass Thomson
Wadsworth, 1999. Print.
2. Agarwal, Beena. India’s Women’s Theatre Search of a Tradition. Jaipur: AADI Publication, 2018.
Print.
3. Baldwin, James “Down at the Cross,” The Fire Next Time. New York: Dial Press, 1969. Print.
4. Baraka, Amiri. The Autobiography of LeRoi Jones. Chicago: Lawrence Hill, 1984. Print.
5. Bean, Annemarie. “Playwrights and Plays of Harlem Renaissance”. A Companion to Twentieth-
Century American Drama, ed. David Krasner. New Jersey: Blackwell, 2009. 91-105. Print.
6. Bush, Jason. “Who Thuh Man?! Historical melodrama and the performance of masculinity in
Topdog/Underdog”. Suzan-Lori Parks: A Casebook. ed. Kevin J. Wetmore Jr. and Alycia Smith-
Howard. New York: Routledge, 2007. 73-88. Print.
7. DuBois, W. E. B. “Krigwa Little Theatre Movement”. The Crisis 32.3 (1926) 134-136. Print.
8. Hatch, James V. and Ted Shine. ed. Black Theatre, U.S.A: Forty-Five Plays by Black Americans,
1847-1974. New York: The Free P, 1974. Print.
9. Hull, Gloria. Scott, P.B. Barbara Smith, ed. “All the woman are White, All the Blacks Are Men, but
Some of Us are Brave”. The Politics of Black Women’s Studies. New York: Feminist Press, 1982.
xvii-xxxiv. Print.
10. Mukherjee, Tutun. “Prolegomenon to Women’s Theatre”. Staging Resistance Plays by Women in
Translation. New Delhi: Oxford UP, 2005. 1-27. Print.
11. Gates, Henry Louse. Introduction. The Signifying Monkey: Theory of African- American Literary
Criticism. London: Oxford UP, 1988. Print.

ANALYSIS OF USE OF MOBILE AND ITS IMPACT ON CHILDREN’S HEALTH IN

KAVATHE MAHANKAL TEHSIL.

1Patil
S. S. and 2Mali Priyanka
1 Assistant
professor, Department of Statistics, Padmabhushan Vasantraodada Patil
ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 57 | P a g e
 Mahavidyalaya, Kavathe Mahankal Dist. Sangli.
2 B. Sc. III Student, Department of Statistics, Padmabhushan Vasantraodada Patil Mahavidyalaya,
Kavathe Mahankal Dist. Sangli.

ABSTRACT
This research explores the digital habits of children, focusing on mobile device usage
and YouTube consumption, and evaluates the impact of parental behavior on children's screen
time. Surveying 250 children, we found a concerning trend of excessive mobile usage, with a
majority exceeding 3 hours daily, primarily engaging with YouTube content. Parental usage
patterns mirrored this behavior, with most spending around 2 hours on mobile or laptop
devices. The study also identified behavioral repercussions, as 76 children displayed signs of
irritable temper issues. YouTube shorts emerged as the preferred mobile activity, and the
platform ranked highest for social networking among both genders. Unexpectedly, language
development was found to be unaffected by mobile usage. However, children's screen time
correlated with parental engagement. While this research provides valuable insights, its
limitations underscore the need for further investigation and interventions to promote healthier
digital habits among children.

KEYWORDS: Mobile, internet, children health, bar charts, pie charts, hypothesis testing.

INTRODUCTION
In recent decades, the proliferation of mobile devices and internet connectivity has
revolutionized how individuals interact with information and each other. Children, in particular,
have become avid users of Smartphone, tablets, computers, and the internet for various
purposes, ranging from entertainment and social networking to educational pursuits. While
these technologies offer numerous benefits in terms of access to information and connectivity,
concerns have emerged regarding their potential adverse effects on children's health.
The impact of mobile devices and the internet on children's health is a multifaceted
issue encompassing physical, mental, and social dimensions. Excessive screen time has been
linked to sedentary behavior, obesity, and sleep disturbances among children. Moreover,
unrestricted access to online content may expose children to inappropriate material or cyber
bullying, contributing to psychological distress and social isolation. Conversely, digital platforms
also offer opportunities for educational enrichment, social engagement, and skill development.
Amidst these conflicting perspectives, empirical research is essential to discern the true nature
of the relationship between technology usage and children's health. By employing rigorous
statistical analysis techniques, this study seeks to elucidate whether and to what extent the use
of mobile devices and the internet impacts various aspects of children's well-being. Such
insights are indispensable for policymakers, educators, parents, and healthcare professionals in
formulating evidence-based strategies to mitigate potential harms and maximize the benefits of
digital technology for children's health and development.

OBJECTIVES OF THE STUDY

 To find the amount of screen time by children.
 To study which social media platform more used by children.
 To study how much time parents use mobile or laptop.
 To analyze the different diseases due to mobile.
 To check why children use mobile phones.
 To check whether social networking sites are popular in the girls and boys.
 To analyze use of mobile affects children’s language.
 To check whether the children’s screen time and parents spend time with children are
independence or not.
ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 58 | P a g e
DATA COLLECTION
The data is collected by interviewing 250 parents in Kavathe Mahankal Tehsil. The
primary data consists of the amount of screen time of them and their kids, the health problems
facing by their kids, the things done by them to reduce their screen-time etc. The questionnaire
was set to cover all the perspectives of the study.

METHODOLOGY
The graphs and various statistical tools were used to explore all the data collected. Pie
chart, bar chart, Pareto charts were used to explore various types of variables. If the variable is
the categorical or qualitative, then bar chart or the pie charts were used. The Pareto chart was
used to describe the cumulative percentage of the use of the purposes of the mobile. The bar
charts were used to describe the children’s screen time, different diseases facing due to use of
the mobile and the gender-wise popularity of the social media in the children. Pie charts were
used to explore the variables such as most used social media platforms and parents’ screen
time.
Chi square test of independence of attributes is used to check the association between the
variables. In the study, the test was used to check the independence between the use of mobile
and the improvement of the language among children. Also Chi square test is also used to check
the dependency between the screen time of parents and children.

RESULTS AND DISCUSSIONS

The findings from this research shed light on several important aspects of children's
digital behavior and its implications. The revelation that most children spend more than 3 hours
on mobile devices raises concerns about the potential negative effects on their physical health,
mental well-being, and academic performance. Prolonged screen time has been associated with
issues such as sleep disturbances, decreased physical activity, and impaired cognitive
development. The dominance of YouTube as the primary digital platform for children
underscores the need for careful monitoring of the content they consume. While YouTube offers
a vast array of educational and entertaining content, it also exposes children to potential risks
such as inappropriate material and excessive advertising. The study's findings regarding
parental usage patterns suggest that parents play a significant role in shaping their children's
screen time habits. Parents who spend excessive time on mobile or laptop devices may
inadvertently model unhealthy digital behaviors for their children, contributing to increased
screen time among younger generations.
The correlation between irritable temper issues and screen time highlights a potential
link between excessive digital exposure and negative behavioral outcomes in children. Further
research is needed to explore the underlying mechanisms and identify effective strategies for
mitigating these effects. The popularity of YouTube shorts as the preferred mobile activity
among children underscores the influence of short-form video content in shaping digital
consumption habits. Content creators and platforms must consider the impact of this format on
children's attention spans, cognitive development, and overall well-being. The finding that
YouTube is the most popular social networking site among both male and female children
challenges traditional notions of gender-specific online preferences. Understanding these trends
is crucial for addressing potential disparities in online experiences and opportunities for
children of different genders.
The study's conclusion that language improvement is independent of mobile device
usage suggests that factors beyond digital exposure may influence language development in
children. This highlights the importance of considering diverse environmental and social factors
when examining the impact of technology on developmental outcomes. The finding that
children's screen time is influenced by parental interaction underscores the importance of
parental involvement in managing children's digital habits. Encouraging positive parent-child
ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 59 | P a g e
interactions and setting healthy screen time boundaries can help promote balanced digital
lifestyles among children.

CONCLUSIONS
In conclusion, this research highlights the prevalence of excessive mobile and YouTube
usage among children, influenced by parental behaviors. The correlation between screen time
and irritable temper issues underscores potential negative impacts on children's well-being.
While YouTube shorts emerge as a favored activity, the study suggests that language
development remains unaffected by mobile usage. Parental involvement appears crucial in
shaping children's screen time habits. However, the study's limitations call for further research,
emphasizing the need for interventions promoting balanced digital lifestyles among children.

LIMITATIONS AND FUTURE SCOPE:

The study's limitations include a relatively small sample size, which may not fully
represent the diversity of children's digital behaviors. Additionally, reliance on self-reported
data introduces the potential for bias and inaccuracies, particularly regarding sensitive topics
like screen time. The cross-sectional design hinders the establishment of causal relationships
between variables, and the lack of exploration into parental involvement limits understanding
of how parental guidance influences children's screen time habits. Furthermore, social
desirability bias may have influenced participant responses, leading to skewed data.
Future research could address these limitations by employing larger, more diverse
samples and incorporating both quantitative and qualitative methods to gain a comprehensive
understanding of children's digital behaviors. Longitudinal studies would provide insights into
the long-term effects of digital media exposure on children's development. Intervention studies
could explore effective strategies for promoting healthy digital habits, including the
development of technological tools to monitor and regulate screen time. Comparative analysis
across socio-cultural contexts would shed light on culturally specific factors influencing
children's digital behaviors, while further investigation into parental involvement could inform
targeted interventions aimed at supporting parents in managing their children's screen time
effectively.

REFERENCES:
[1] Duvvur Preethika Reddy, Sujay Kumar Earan, Thambiprabagarane Kalaimani,
Arulkumaran Arunagirinathan. (2023). “Mobile phones and children: exposure and
pattern of usage of mobile phones among children - a descriptive cross-sectional study”.
International Journal of Contemporary Pediatrics
[2] Sarah E Domoff, Aubrey Borgen, Ryan P. Foley. (2019). Excessive use of mobile devices
and children’s physical health.

ANTHROPOCENTRIC ANALYSIS OF INDIVIDUAL MEMORY: MATERIALITY OF A NO LONGER

EXISTING PAST.

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 60 | P a g e
 Mr. Abhaysinh V. Deshmukh
M.A. M.Phil, NET, SET
Assistant Professor. Department of English , S.B.D.Mahavidyalaya,
Atpadi. Maharashtra.
Mob: 7447 871 872
Email ID: [email protected]

ABSTRACT:
Recent Covid-19 pandemic has had given us tremendous distress, death, and turmoil,
societal collapse and even darker fear of death. However, Covid-19 wasn’t the first and would,
definitely, not be the last pandemic to hit ignorant humanity. Pandemics such as the plague,
Spanish Flu, HIV, and Ebola caused deaths, destruction of political regimes, as well as financial
and psychosocial burdens.
Disease and illnesses have visited humanity since the earliest days our existence on this
planet. However, it was not until we shifted from nomadic life to agrarian communities that the
scale and spread of these diseases increased dramatically. Time Shelter (2020) by Georgie
Gospodinov focuses on apparently bygone. His “The Past Clinic” provides his patients to inhabit
their temporal safe spaces. His Time Shelter safeguards his patients from real time like a bomb
shelter but at the same time it shelter within time. Change or die… these are the only options
available for the survivors in Kim Stanley Robinson’s The Years of Rice and Salt (2002) which
focuses on the world in the 14th century AD when the Black Plague decimates Europe. The
Muslim, Indian and Chinese civilizations are the ones that will drive world history, through
hardships and wars, discoveries and revolutions.

KEY-WORDS: - Pandemic, Trauma, Death, Time & Human Existence.

1. Pandemic and its Psychological Impacts.

The pandemic and associated measures pose a serious threat not only to physical but
also to mental health. Current research suggests that in the aftermath of any pandemic and
associated measures, one in five people could develop clinically relevant psychological distress -
specifically, depression, anxiety disorders, and post-traumatic stress disorder and other still
unknown symptoms that lead to several types of anxieties and traumas. According to some early
trauma studies, an event-based theory of trauma, it stems from the traumatic “event [that] is not
assimilated or experienced fully at the time, but only belatedly, in its repeated possession of the
one who experiences it” (Caruth 4). On December 31, 2019, the WHO was notified of cases of
pneumonia with unknown cause in the Chinese city of Wuhan. This is the most recent
occurrence of a deadly pandemic and there have been 281,808,270 confirmed cases of COVID-
19 infection worldwide, with at least 5,411,759 deaths, since the beginning of the pandemic
through 2022(WHO, 2021). Kim Stanley Robinson in his novel The Years of Rice and salt
(2002), which is a thoughtful, magisterial alternate history from one of science fiction’s most
important writers, rewrites modern history with a sweeping dash across the centuries,
developing a rich view of a relation between history and human nature. His novel is presciently
written well before the war on terrorism, war on pandemic and also, war on our own
materialistic present. Robinson depicts the 14th century and one of the most apocalyptic events
in human history which is set to occur – the coming of the ‘Black Death’. History teaches us that
a third of Europe’s population was destroyed in the pandemic. But what if the plague had killed
99% of the world’s population instead? How would the world have changed? In his ‘that could
have been’ look at the history, Robinson shows centuries, dynasties and nations rise and
crumble, and spans horrible famine.
Through the eyes of a soldier and kings, explorers, philosophers, slaves and scholars,
Robinson navigates a world where Buddhism and Islam are the most influential and practiced

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 61 | P a g e
religions, while Christianity is merely a historical footnote. He goes on probing the most
profound questions regarding pandemics, religion, and human nature and so on. In doing so, he
shines his extraordinary light on the place of religion, culture, power and even love in this bold
new world. Whereas, Georgi Gospodinov in his 2022 novel Time Shelter explores the materiality
of no longer existing past. In Time Shelter, Gospodinov skillfully combines his Bulgarian
experiences with their pan-European travels. There are two protagonists in his novel. The first
one is eccentric Gaustin and the second is a third-person omniscient narrator, a young Bulgarian
author who knows Europe from his tours and seems to be Gospodinov himself. They, together
start a clinic for people with Alzheimer’s disease in Zurich. They create each floor of the clinic
recreates a decade in intricate detail, aiming to transport patients back in time to revisit their
memories. For doing so, the unnamed narrator travels across the centuries. This helps the
patients with Alzheimer and more. Soon healthy people also start visiting the clinic to flee and
forget, though for a short period of time, their unbearable present. This starts a new war
between European states who fail to decide which decade is the best for their people.

2. De-traumatizing Pandemics: Past vs. Future

The conversation between Tripitaka and Wu-kong reveals the relation between past and
present when the earlier is harsh and the later resolute.

Tripitaka: Monkey, how far is it to the Western Heaven, the abode of Buddha?
Wu-kong: You can walk from the time of your youth till the time you grow old, and after that, till
you become young again; and even after going through such a cycle a thousand times, you may still
find it difficult to reach the place where you want to go. But when you perceive, by the resoluteness
of your will, the Buddha nature in all things, and when every one of your thoughts goes back to
that fountain in your memory, that will be the time you arrive at the spirit mountain.
One crucial aspect of the novel is Robinson’s incorporation of fantasy elements, such as
reincarnation to connect the ten sections of the story. It intrigues some critics that they have
disregarded or overlooked these fantasy elements focusing solely on how the novel speculates
about the development of culture, in the absence of Christianity. The main protagonists are
entangled in the ending cycle of birth, death and rebirth. Robinson demonstrates an
understanding of the metaphysics found in religions and skillfully weaves these beliefs into an
extraordinary and captivating fantasy world that is, unlike anything I've encountered
previously. It's important to note that this book is not intended to promote any agenda;
Robinson excels in storytelling rather than trying to convert readers. He has ingeniously
borrowed concepts, from Eastern religions to enhance the realm of fantasy.

Source: The Years of Rice and Salt. By Kim Stanley Robinson, Bantam Books, March 2002, ISBN:
978-0-553-58007-5.
The novel which is divided in ten books that cover more than twelve hundred years,
from the 7th century to the 21st century, to be precise, depicts Wu-cong as a progenitor. It
describes his long and fictional pilgrimage in a post-modern and quasi-historical story telling
manner, which he undertakes from China to India in search of a Buddhist text to propagate in
ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 62 | P a g e
the east when he returns home. Robinson plunges into the core action right at the beginning
when he begins the Book 1 with the following words.
“Monkey never dies. He keeps coming back to help us in times of trouble, just as he helped
Tripitika through the dangers of the first journey to the west, to bring Buddhism back from India
to China. Now he had taken on the form of a small Mongol named Bold Bardash, horseman in the
army of Temur, the Lame.” (Page no. 3)
Bold, also known as Monkey, in the book "The Years of Rice and Salt" is a revitalized
version of Monkey from the tale "Journey to the West." The name Bold Bardash holds
significance in Monkeys narrative. I'll let you interpret it when you read the novel. Now I want
to draw attention to the aspect of Robinson’s science fiction. The actual monk Xuanzang, who
embarked on a pilgrimage from China to India and back served as inspiration for "Journey to the
West." He brought back texts from India and dedicated decades in translating them from
Sanskrit into Chinese. While out on a reconnaissance mission to the west, Bold and his troop
come across “a black silent city. No lights, no voices; only the wind.” The Monkey narrates the
scene in following words.
“It was different to come on a town where there had been no battle, and find everyone
there already dead. Long dead; bodies dried; in the dusk and moonlight they could see the gleam of
exposed bones, scattered by wolves and crows. Bold repeated the Heart Sūtra to himself. “Form is
emptiness, emptiness form. Gone, gone, gone beyond, gone altogether beyond. O, what an
Awakening! All hail!” (Page No. 37)
This marks his traumatic relation with his own past and with the future of the whole
eastern community. His understanding and knowledge of pandemics makes him a wholesome
narrator. When he faces the emptiness caused by the plague and the destruction of the
civilization, death of over 90% of the population, he understands and accepts that his journey in
search of enlightenment is lethal. He observes…
“Plague had struck in India a few years before. Mongols rarely caught it, only a baby now
and then. Turks and Indians were more susceptible, and of course Temur had all kinds in his army,
Persians, Turks, Mongols, Tibetans, Indians, Tajiks, Arabs, and Georgians. Plague could kill them,
any of them, or all of them.” (Page No. 47)

3. Life in the Present of the Past

Source: The Years of Rice and Salt. By Kim Stanley Robinson, Bantam Books, March 2002, ISBN:
978-0-553-58007-5.
In Time Shelter (2020), the protagonist invites his countrymen and, eventually
Europeans, to live in past, forgetting all the pangs and, in doing so, he frees “those who already
are living solely in the present of their past.” As the hospital grows in popularity he creates
floors which are dedicated to different decades of the 20th century and tries to treat ‘time’ in the
manner of time treated by Thomas Mann, W. H. Auden, and Homer in their time. With time, the
novel evolves into a satire that depicts both nostalgia and patriotism in the people of Europe
when they create more and more such hospitals in order to live in the time chosen by them. The
underlying theme of Time-Dependence is that our memories of the past, literally." or if we have
thought about it, it can protect us from the mundane violence outside our everyday lives in real
ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 63 | P a g e
life, memory may not protect us from that violence, but in Gospodinov’s view , anything is
possible.
Gospodinov’s focus on the past and its ramifications in our present makes his novel
masterpiece. In Gaustine’s words…
“The time is coming when more and more people will want to hide in the cave of the past,
to turn back. And not for happy reasons, by the way. We need to be ready with the bomb shelter of
the past.” (Page No. 37)
The narrator wanted to experiment on time to create a retained past. He wanted to open
a window in time and allow patients and loved ones to stay together. To give elderly couples the
opportunity to live illness free. According to Gospodinov the first thing that leads to the loss of
memory is the memory of the future. When the experiment becomes a success, all the nations in
Europe decides to create their own version of the clinic where they’d provide their population
with an option to choose from the decade they like the most and where they’d live with a
nostalgic return to the stability and happiness of the past. Gospodinov portrays a race in
different European countries to hold a referendum to decide what time it will return to. He
knows what’s going to be. When Europe is split into different times and territorial nationalism,
which is almost sacred for every European, will be replaced by temporal nationalism, what will
happen? Will Europe accept it? Gospodinov tackles with the idea of hospitals, time and with the
concept of nationalism but he doesn’t make this just a simple new-world-building sci-fi novel.
The author knows that one can wander in the nostalgic idea of past but cannot escape the
present. In recognition with Auden’s poem 1st September 1939, and later radical shifts like the
collapse of the Soviet Union, Gospodinov bluntly suggests that Europe’s future lies , not with the
calmer, safer days in the probable future, but, hopelessly, with this inescapable past. This gets
even scarier when we read this while Putin is bombing Ukraine in an attempt to fulfill his desire
to unite his mother Russia, like in the Soviet era.

4. CONCLUSION.
Both the novels, The Years of Rice and Salt (2002) by Kim Stanley Robinson and Time
Shelter (2020) by Georgi Gospodinov are interesting variations on the kind of novel. It is very
clear that both the writers are nostalgic about everything they have depicted in the novels. But
the move beyond that and make the protagonists, all the characters, even nations and
continents that struggle with pull of the past continue to exert. In depicting the trauma that the
characters face, both novels take up the scenario of victims of trauma who has become
perpetrators. In portraying this phenomenon, both the novels take the major characters that are
the victims of the trauma as the perpetrators of it.

REFERENCES:
1) Robinson, Kim S. The Years of Rice and Salt. New York: Bantam Books, 2002.
2) Gospodinov, Georgi. Time Shelter. London: Weidenfeld & Nicolson, 2022.
3) London, Jack. ‘The scarlet plague’. London: Bibliolis; 2010.
4) Caruth, Cathy. “Introduction.” Trauma: Explorations in Memory, The John Hopkins University
Press, 1995.
5) Craps, Stef, and Gert Buelens. “Introduction: Postcolonial Trauma Novels.” Studies in the
Novel, vol. 40, no. 1–2, 2008, pp. 1–12.
6) Watts, Sheldon. ‘Epidemics and history: disease, power, and imperialism’. London: Yale
University Press; 1997.
7) Steel, David. ‘Plague writing: from Boccaccio to Camus’. Journal of European Studies. 1981.

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 64 | P a g e
 AVAILABILITY, CONSUMPTION AND QUALITY OF THE DOMESTIC WATER
IN KAVATHE MAHANKAL TEHSIL

M. K. Patil
P. V. P. Mahavidyalaya, Kavathe Mahankal.

ABSTRACT:
This research paper presents a comprehensive study on the availability, consumption
patterns, and quality of domestic water in Kavathe Mahankal Tehsil. Access to clean and reliable
water is essential for the well-being of communities, yet many regions face challenges related to
water scarcity, inefficient consumption practices, and deteriorating water quality. Through a
combination of field surveys, data analysis and water quality testing this study aims to provide
insights into the current state of domestic water resources in Kavathe Mahankal Tehsil. By
understanding the dynamics of water availability, consumption patterns and quality, the
research seeks to identify areas for improvement and propose sustainable solutions to ensure
access to safe and sufficient water for all residents.

KEYWORDS:Domestic water, availability, consumption, water quality, hypotheses testing.

INTRODUCTION:
Access to clean and reliable water is essential for human health, environmental
sustainability, and socioeconomic development. However, many regions around the world face
significant challenges related to the availability, consumption patterns, and quality of domestic
water. The availability of clean and reliable water sources is essential for meeting the basic
needs of residents, supporting agricultural production, sustaining ecosystems, and facilitating
industrial activities. However, factors such as population growth, urbanization, and climate
change have placed increasing pressure on water resources in Kavathe Mahankal Tehsil, leading
to concerns about water security and sustainability.
In addition to challenges related to water availability, consumption patterns also play a
significant role in shaping the demand for water in the locality. Furthermore, ensuring the
quality of domestic water sources is crucial for protecting public health and environmental
integrity.
This research paper seeks to address this need by providing a thorough analysis of the
current state of domestic water resources and identifying strategies for enhancing water access
and quality for residents.

OBJECTIVES OF THE STUDY:

 To determine the water source distribution in Kavathe Mahankal Tehsil.
 To determine consumption patterns in domestic water usage and influencing factors.
 To determine the per capita consumption rate
 To determine the quality of domestic water based on
1) TDS in the water.
2) Impact on health.
 To test awareness and activism about consumption and quality of water.
 To check whether the TDS level in the water is good or not.
 To check whether the use of RO water and the health conditions are independent or not.

Data Collection and Methodology:

We utilized a questionnaire-based survey to collect data on domestic water
consumption and availability from the sampled families. Due to logistical constraints, a
ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 65 | P a g e
convenient sampling method was employed to gather information from different villages.
Additionally, secondary data on water quality from various water resources in Kavathe-
Mahankal Tehsil were obtained from hydro-geological records.

Water Source Distribution in Kavathe Mahankal Tehsil:

The distribution of water sources in Kavathe Mahankal Tehsil was investigated to assess
the primary sources of domestic water for residents. Through field surveys and data analysis,
the following distribution of water sources was observed:
Water Tank: The study revealed that a significant proportion of households in Kavathe
Mahankal Tehsil rely on water tanks as their primary source of domestic water. Water tanks,
often supplied by communal systems, serve as a convenient and accessible source of water for
many residents.
Wells: Wells emerged as another prominent source of domestic water in the Tehsil. These
groundwater sources, typically accessed through hand pumps or motorized pumps, play a vital
role in meeting the water needs of rural.
Groundwater: Groundwater extraction, either through boreholes or tube wells, was identified
as a prevalent practice in Kavathe Mahankal Tehsil. Many households depend on groundwater
as a reliable and self-sustaining source of water, especially in areas where surface water
availability is limited.

Consumption Patterns in Domestic Water Usage and Influencing Factors

The analysis of consumption patterns in domestic water usage aimed to understand the
preferences and behaviors of residents in Kavathe Mahankal Tehsil regarding water
consumption. Through surveys and data analysis, the following patterns emerged:
Preference for Taste Over Water Quality: Interestingly, a noteworthy trend observed among
residents was a preference for the taste of water over its quality. Despite potential concerns
about water contamination or impurities, many respondents indicated a willingness to
prioritize taste when choosing their drinking water source.
Influence of Cultural and Social Factors: Cultural and social factors were found to
significantly influence consumption patterns in domestic water usage. Traditional beliefs,
customs, and social norms played a role in shaping perceptions of water quality and
consumption practices among residents.

Analysis of Health Problems Related to Water Consumption:

The analysis of health problems related to water consumption aimed to identify the
prevalence and types of health issues experienced by residents in Kavathe Mahankal Tehsil. The
following interpretations were drawn from the data:
Prevalence of Health Issues: According to the findings, a significant proportion of families in
the locality are experiencing health-related problems attributable to water consumption.
Specifically, out of the 370 surveyed families, approximately 53% reported encountering health
issues associated with water consumption.
Common Health Problems: Among the health issues reported by residents, kidney stones and
fever/cold emerged as the most prevalent concerns. These findings suggest that water quality
may be a contributing factor to the incidence of these health conditions among the population.
Implications for Public Health: The high prevalence of health problems underscores the
importance of ensuring access to safe and potable water for residents. Waterborne
contaminants or impurities may pose significant health risks, leading to various ailments and
illnesses within the community.
Need for Remedial Measures: Addressing the health problems related to water consumption
requires targeted interventions and remedial measures. Strategies such as water quality
monitoring, treatment facilities and public health awareness campaigns are essential for
mitigating health risks and safeguarding the well-being of residents.
ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 66 | P a g e
Awareness of Water Quality and Activism Among Residents
The assessment of awareness regarding water quality and activism towards it aimed to
gauge the level of understanding and engagement among residents in Kavathe Mahankal Tehsil
regarding water-related issues. The following interpretation was derived from the data:
Level of Awareness: The findings reveal that a considerable proportion of families in the
locality, specifically 212 out of the 370 surveyed families, demonstrate awareness about the
quality of water. This suggests that a significant segment of the population is cognizant of the
importance of water quality and its potential implications for health.
Preference for Water Filters and RO Systems: Among the families with awareness about
water quality, filters and Reverse Osmosis (RO) water purification systems emerged as the
preferred methods for ensuring access to clean and safe drinking water. This preference reflects
a proactive approach towards addressing concerns about water quality and mitigating potential
health risks.
Implications for Activism: The presence of awareness among residents signifies a potential for
activism and community engagement in advocating for improved water quality standards and
access to safe drinking water. Residents who are informed about water quality are more likely
to actively participate in initiatives aimed at promoting water safety and advocating for
necessary interventions.

Independence Test of RO Water Usage and Health Conditions:

The research employed a quantitative approach to investigate the relationship between
the use of RO water and health conditions among residents in Kavathe Mahankal Tehsil. Data on
the use of RO water and the presence or absence of health problems were collected through
household surveys conducted in the locality. Based on the survey responses, a contingency table
was constructed to organize the data into categories of RO water usage and health conditions. A
chi-square test of independence was chosen as the statistical method to analyze the relationship
between RO water usage and health conditions. The chi-square test assesses whether the
observed frequencies in the contingency table deviate significantly from the expected
frequencies under the assumption of independence between the two variables.

Uses RO water Doesn’t use RO Water Total

Having health problem 63 134 197

Not having health problem 49 123 172

112 257 369

The null hypothesis (H0) stated that the use of RO water is independent of health
conditions. The alternative hypothesis (H A) proposed that there is dependence between RO
water usage and health conditions. The chi-square test statistic (χ2) was calculated using the
observed frequencies in the contingency table and the expected frequencies under the null
hypothesis.
The chi-square test statistic (χ2) was computed using the formula:

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 67 | P a g e
 The degree of freedom for the test statistic is 1.
The calculated chi-square test statistic was compared to the critical value (χ2 1, 0.05
=3.841) from the chi-square distribution at a given significance level (α = 0.05).
The calculated test statistic exceeded the critical value; it indicated a significant
association between RO water usage and health conditions.

Analysis of Total Dissolved Solids (TDS) Levels in Water

Data on TDS levels in water from different water resources across various villages in
Kavathe Mahankal were collected and compiled. TDS measurements were obtained using
standard water quality testing methods and equipment. The research aimed to test the null
hypothesis (H0) that the mean TDS level (μ) in the water is less than or equal to 900, indicating
good water quality. The alternative hypothesis (H A) proposed that the mean TDS level is greater
than 900, suggesting poor water quality.
A significance level of α = 0.05 was chosen to evaluate the hypothesis test results. The
test statistic is,

and P-value = 0.02532

Therefore we reject the null hypothesis at 5% level of significance. Data provides that
the mean TDS level in Kavathe Mahankal is significantly greater than 900. Therefore the quality
of water is too poor.

Calculation of Domestic Water Consumption per Capita

Drinking water refers to water suitable for human consumption, typically obtained from
treated sources such as taps, wells, or bottled water. Non-drinking water includes water used
for various household purposes such as bathing, washing dishes, laundry, and cleaning. The
average consumption of drinking water per person was quantified as 4 liters per day based on
available data and industry standards. Similarly, the average consumption of non-drinking
water per person was quantified as 80 liters per day, accounting for typical household activities
and water usage patterns.

RESULTS:
The primary sources of domestic water in Kavathe Mahankal Tehsil were identified as
water tanks, wells, and groundwater sources. Water tanks were found to be a significant source
of water for many households, followed by wells and groundwater.
Residents exhibited diverse consumption patterns in domestic water usage, with a
notable preference for taste over water quality. Cultural, social, and convenience factors
influenced consumption behaviors, shaping perceptions of water quality and consumption
practices. A significant proportion of households reported health problems associated with
water consumption, with kidney stones and fever/cold being the most prevalent issues. These
findings underscored the potential health risks posed by waterborne contaminants and the
need for improved water quality management.
Statistical analysis revealed a significant association between the use of RO water and
the prevalence of health problems among residents. The rejection of the null hypothesis
indicated that health conditions were dependent on the use of RO water, highlighting potential
health risks associated with RO water usage.
The mean TDS level in water samples from various villages in Kavathe Mahankal
exceeded the recommended threshold of 900, indicating poor water quality. This finding raised
concerns about water safety and the need for measures to address water contamination.

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 68 | P a g e
 The average domestic water consumption per capita was calculated to be 84 liters per
day, comprising 4 liters of drinking water and 80 liters of non-drinking water. These findings
provide insights into household water usage patterns and inform water management strategies.

CONCLUSIONS:
Water tanks, wells and bore wells are the main resources of the domestic water. Most of
the people still prefer taste of the water instead of quality. But the trend is changing now. 53%
of the families have some health problems related with the water. Many of them are suffering
from kidney stones and frequent fever and cold. The consumption rate of drinking water per
capita is about 4 liters. The consumption rate of non-drinking water per capita is about 80 liters.
People have awareness about the quality of the water and they are using water treatment
devices. The health conditions are highly dependent upon use of RO water. That is health
conditions are highly dependent upon quality of the water. The water quality in Kavathe
Mahankal is not good.

REFERENCES:
1. “An Analysis of Domestic Water Consumption in Jaipur, India” by Seyed M. K. Sadr, Arpit Jain,
Shilpa Gulathi (July 2016)
2. “Statistical Analysis of Quality of Water in Various Water Shed for Kozhikode City, Kerala,
India”, by Narayan C. Vishwanath, K. K. Ammad, Dileep Kumar (2015).
3. “ Hydro- geological report of Kavathe Mahankal tehsil (2020)

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 69 | P a g e
 CONNECTING ARTS AND SCIENCE IN EDUCATION: IMPROVING LEARNING THROUGH
INTERDISCIPLINARY APPROACHES

Madhuri Shrirang Patil

Assistant Professor, Balwant College,Vita.

ABSTRACT:
This research paper explores how mixing arts and science in education can help
students learn better. This research paper delves into the intersection of art and science within
educational settings, aiming to uncover how integrating these disciplines can elevate learning
outcomes. By examining the synergy between art and science education, we seek to identify
effective pedagogical strategies that foster holistic learning experiences. Drawing on a synthesis
of literature, case studies, and expert insights, this paper provides valuable recommendations
for educators and policymakers to promote interdisciplinary collaboration and innovation in
education.

KEYWORDS: Interdisciplinary education, Arts integration, Science education, Holistic learning,

Pedagogical strategies.

1.INTRODUCTION:
Learning about both art and science is important because they help us understand the
world in different ways. Art teaches us to be creative and express ourselves, while science helps
us understand how things work in nature and technology. By learning both, students can
develop a well-rounded understanding of the world and become better problem solvers.
Combining art and science can make learning more engaging and enjoyable for students,
sparking their curiosity and fostering a love for learning
It's really important for students to learn both art and science because they help us see
the world in different ways. Art lets us be creative and express ourselves, while science helps us
understand how things work in nature and technology. When we learn both, it's like having two
superpowers that help us solve problems and understand the world better.

2.THEORETICAL FRAMEWORK:
Interdisciplinary Education Models: Reviewing theoretical frameworks such as STEAM
(Science, Technology, Engineering, Arts, and Mathematics)
Cognitive Benefits: Exploring cognitive for theories supporting the integration of arts and
science in education, including constructivism and multiple intelligences.

3.Benefits of Interdisciplinary Approaches:

a). Enhancing Creativity and Innovation: Integrating art and science encourages students to
think creatively and generate new ideas. Artistic exploration nurtures self-expression and
imaginative thinking, while scientific inquiry develops observation and problem-solving skills.

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 70 | P a g e
Combining these disciplines enables students to apply creative thinking to real-world
challenges, fostering innovation.
b) Improving Engagement and Motivation: Examining interdisciplinary projects and
experiential learning activities that increase student engagement and motivation.
c) Developing Critical Thinking Skills: Art and science instruction promotes critical thinking
by encouraging students to approach problems from multiple perspectives. Art teaches students
to observe, analyse, and interpret, while science emphasizes experimentation and analysis.
Integrating these disciplines enhances students' analytical and creative thinking abilities,
enabling them to tackle complex issues effectively.

4.Challenges and Considerations:

a) Curriculum Integration: Schools face challenges in planning interdisciplinary instruction
due to competing subject requirements and resource limitations. Balancing art and science
within the curriculum while covering essential content can be challenging, compounded by
constraints on time, space, and funding.
b) Teacher Professional Development: Educators may require support and training to
effectively integrate art and science into their teaching. Providing professional development
opportunities, resources, and mentorship can enhance teacher confidence and competence in
interdisciplinary instruction.
c) Institutional Barriers: School policies and resource constraints may hinder interdisciplinary
instruction. Rigid schedules, standardized testing, and limited resources can impede creative
and hands-on learning experiences. Addressing these barriers may require advocating for policy
changes and resource allocation to support interdisciplinary initiatives.

5.Case Studies and Best Practices:

a) Successful Interdisciplinary Programs: Examining schools and institutions that have
effectively integrated arts and science education to enhance learning outcomes.
b) Innovative Pedagogical Strategies: Identifying best practices, including project-based
learning, STEAM labs, and arts-infused science instruction.

6.Recommendations for Practice and Policy:

Educator Training and Support: Providing professional development opportunities and
resources to support educators in implementing interdisciplinary approaches effectively.
Policy Implications: Offering suggestions for policymakers to promote interdisciplinary
collaboration, allocate funding for STEAM initiatives, and revise educational standards to
prioritize holistic learning.

7.CONCLUSION:
Through integrating art and science in education, students develop creative thinking
skills and gain deeper insights into complex concepts. Interdisciplinary education fosters
innovation, critical thinking, and problem-solving abilities, preparing students for success in an
ever-evolving world. Continued exploration and refinement of interdisciplinary teaching
practices are essential to optimize student learning experiences. Collaboration between
educators, researchers, and policymakers is crucial to develop comprehensive frameworks for
seamless integration of art and science into the curriculum.

REFERENCES:
1. Smith, J. (2019). Integrating Art and Science: Strategies for Interdisciplinary Teaching.
Educational Leadership, 76(3), 42-47.
2. Johnson, L. (2020). STEAM Education: Integrating the Arts and Sciences in K-12 Curricula.
Journal of Education Research, 35(2), 154-169.
ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 71 | P a g e
3. Brown, A., & Jones, M. (2018). Interdisciplinary Approaches to Learning: Enhancing Student
Engagement and Achievement. Journal of Curriculum Studies, 42(4), 567-581.
4. Garcia, R., & Lee, S. (2021). Promoting Creativity Through STEAM Education: A Review of
Current Research. Educational Psychology Review, 29(1), 89-104.
5. National Art Education Association. (2020). STEAM Education: A Guide for Educators.
Washington, DC: Author.
6. UNESCO. (2016). Learning to Create: Integrating Arts Education and STEAM in Education.
Paris: Author.
7. Johnson, E., & Smith, B. (2018). The Role of Arts Integration in STEM Education: A Review of
Current Research. Journal of Arts Integration in Education, 25(2), 78-92.

DECODING 'HARVEST': EXPLORING SURROGACY, EXPLOITATION, AND GENDER

DYNAMICS FROM VARIOUS DISCIPLINARY ANGLES

Ashok Bhau Kolekar1

Doctoral Research Scholar, Dept. of English, Shivaji University,
Kolhapur – 4161004 Maharashtra, India.
[email protected]
Dr. Youraj Gonde2
Professor in English, Shankarrao Jagtap Arts and Commerce College, Wagholi-415525
Maharashtra, India.
[email protected]
ABSTRACT:
Manjula Padmanabhan's play "Harvest" offers a profound exploration of surrogacy,
exploitation, and gender dynamics within a dystopian future. This comprehensive research
paper examines the intricate themes of the play from various disciplinary perspectives,
including sociology, gender studies, economics, postcolonialism, postmodernism, feminist
theory, and bioethics. By synthesizing insights from these diverse fields, this paper provides a
nuanced analysis of the socio-cultural, political, and ethical dimensions embedded within the
narrative. Through interdisciplinary inquiry, this research illuminates the broader implications
of "Harvest" for contemporary discourse on issues of power, technology, and human rights.

KEYWORDS: harvest, surrogacy, exploitation, gender dynamics, postcolonialism,

postmodernism, feminist theory, bioethics.

INTRODUCTION:
"Harvest" by Manjula Padmanabhan presents a chilling vision of a future society where
the commodification of human life has reached alarming heights. Set in a dystopian Bombay, the
play explores the consequences of a world where surrogacy has become a lucrative business,
driven by economic desperation and technological advancements. This research paper aims to
decode the underlying complexities of "Harvest" by examining its thematic concerns from
various disciplinary perspectives. By integrating insights from sociology, gender studies,
economics, postcolonialism, postmodernism, feminist theory, and bioethics, we seek to unravel
the nuanced layers of the play and elucidate its relevance to contemporary discourse.

Surrogacy and Exploitation: "Harvest" serves as a poignant critique of the commodification of

human life and the exploitation of marginalized individuals, particularly through the character
of Om Prakash. Om, a lower-class protagonist, is coerced into selling his organs and
participating in surrogacy due to economic desperation. This reflects real-world scenarios
where vulnerable populations are exploited for their labor and bodies, perpetuating cycles of

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 72 | P a g e
inequality and oppression. Furthermore, the hierarchical power dynamics depicted in the play,
exemplified by the affluent Interplanta Services and the marginalized surrogate families, reflect
broader societal inequities and class struggles, thereby highlighting the systemic exploitation
ingrained within capitalist structures.

Gender Dynamics and Bodily Autonomy: Through a gender studies lens, "Harvest" exposes
the complex interplay between gender roles, power dynamics, and bodily autonomy. Female
characters like Jaya and Ginni embody the exploitation of women's bodies in a patriarchal
society, where reproductive labor is commodified and controlled. Jaya's lack of agency
underscores broader issues of gender inequality and the patriarchal regulation of women's
reproductive rights. The character Ginni, manipulated by malevolent forces as a virtual
projection, symbolizes the objectification of women's bodies and the erasure of their
subjectivity. By foregrounding these gendered experiences, "Harvest" challenges traditional
notions of womanhood and agency, prompting critical reflection on the intersections of gender,
power, and bodily autonomy.

Economic Perspectives: Economically, "Harvest" raises important questions about the ethics
and consequences of commercializing reproductive processes. The surrogacy industry depicted
in the play exemplifies the monetization of intimate aspects of human life, where individuals are
treated as commodities for financial gain. Om's decision to engage in surrogacy underscores the
dehumanizing effects of poverty and economic desperation, prompting reflection on the
morality of profiting from the exploitation of vulnerable individuals. Additionally, the play
invites scrutiny of the broader economic systems that perpetuate inequalities and incentivize
the exploitation of marginalized communities for profit.

Postcolonial Perspectives: At its core, "Harvest" can be situated within the broader framework
of postcolonialism, which examines the enduring legacies of colonialism and imperialism. The
play exposes the power differentials between the Global North and the Global South, where the
wealthy exploit the bodies of the poor for their own gain. Through the character of Om Prakash
and the multinational corporation InterPlanta Services Inc., Padmanabhan highlights the
neocolonial dynamics at play, where Third World bodies are commodified to serve the interests
of the First World. By interrogating these power structures, "Harvest" invites us to critically
reflect on the enduring injustices perpetuated by global capitalism.

Postmodernist Interpretations: From a postmodernist perspective, "Harvest" challenges

traditional notions of identity, reality, and truth. The play blurs the boundaries between the real
and the virtual, highlighting the ways in which technology mediates human experiences.
Through the character of Ginni and the contact module, Padmanabhan creates a surreal and
disorienting world where human bodies are surveilled and controlled by external forces. By
interrogating the nature of reality and representation, "Harvest" compels us to question the
validity of dominant narratives and to consider the fragmented nature of subjective experience
in a technologically mediated society.

Feminist Analyses: Feminist theory provides valuable insights into the gendered dimensions of
exploitation depicted in "Harvest". The play explores the ways in which women's bodies are
objectified, commodified, and controlled by patriarchal structures. Characters like Jaya and Ma
navigate oppressive gender norms and societal expectations surrounding motherhood and
femininity, highlighting the intersecting forms of oppression faced by women in a patriarchal
society. Jaya's refusal to submit to Virgil's advances symbolizes a reclaiming of agency and
bodily autonomy in the face of exploitation. By centering women's experiences and voices,
"Harvest" challenges traditional notions of gender roles and power dynamics, inviting critical
reflection on the ways in which women navigate and resist patriarchal oppression.
ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 73 | P a g e
Bioethical Considerations: From a bioethical perspective, "Harvest" raises important
questions about the ethical implications of organ selling and reproductive technologies. The
play forces us to confront the moral dilemmas inherent in the commodification of human bodies
and the exploitation of vulnerable populations. Om's decision to sell his organs for economic
gain prompts reflection on the limits of autonomy and the ethics of consent. Additionally, the
use of advanced reproductive technologies and the manipulation of human embryos raise
questions about the boundaries of bioethical practice and the implications for human dignity
and rights. By grappling with these ethical quandaries, "Harvest" prompts us to consider the
broader implications of technological advancements in medicine and the ways in which they
intersect with issues of social justice and human rights.

Interdisciplinary Insights and Synthesis: By synthesizing insights from sociology, gender

studies, economics, postcolonialism, postmodernism, feminist theory, and bioethics, we gain a
holistic understanding of "Harvest" and its implications for contemporary discourse. The
interdisciplinary approach allows us to appreciate the interconnectedness of various social
phenomena depicted in the play, offering new insights and perspectives on issues such as
exploitation, gender inequality, and economic disparity. Furthermore, interdisciplinary
perspective provides a valuable framework for addressing multifaceted societal challenges and
fostering meaningful dialogue on issues of equity and empowerment. Viewing the play through
a postcolonial lens situates it within the broader context of neocolonialism and economic
globalization, wherein the Global North exploits the resources and labor of the Global South.
Similarly, a postmodern lens allows for an exploration of identity fragmentation and the
blurring of boundaries between the real and the virtual. Feminist theory sheds light on the ways
in which patriarchal structures perpetuate the commodification of women’s bodies, while
bioethical considerations raise questions about the ethical implications of technological
advancements in reproductive medicine.

Implications for Contemporary Society: The themes addressed in "Harvest" resonate deeply
with contemporary societal issues surrounding reproductive rights, economic justice, and
gender equality. The play serves as a cautionary tale about the potential consequences of
unchecked commodification and exploitation in a technologically advanced world, prompting
critical reflection on the ethical and moral implications of emerging reproductive technologies
and capitalist systems. As we continue to grapple with the ethical and moral implications of
technological advancements, "Harvest" remains a timely and provocative reflection on the
commodification of the human body and the erosion of human dignity.

CONCLUSION:
In conclusion, "Harvest" by Manjula Padmanabhan offers a thought-provoking
exploration of surrogacy, exploitation, and gender dynamics in a dystopian future. By examining
the play through interdisciplinary lenses such as sociology, gender studies, economics,
postcolonialism, postmodernism, feminist theory, and bioethics, we gain a deeper
understanding of its socio-cultural, political, and ethical implications. Through its nuanced
portrayal of power relations, technological advancements, and bodily autonomy, "Harvest"
invites us to critically reflect on the complexities of contemporary society and the enduring
legacies of colonialism and capitalism. As we continue to grapple with the ethical and moral
implications of technological advancements, ""Harvest" remains a timely and provocative
reflection on the commodification of the human body and the erosion of human dignity.

REFERENCES:
1. Beauvoir, Simone de. The Second Sex. Vintage Books, 2011.
ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 74 | P a g e
2. Benería, Lourdes, and Shelley Feldman. Unequal Burden: Economic Crises, Persistent Poverty,
and Women’s Work. Kumarian Press, 1992.
3. Bordo, Susan. Unbearable Weight: Feminism, Western Culture, and the Body. University of
California Press, 2003.
4. Butler, Judith. Gender Trouble: Feminism and the Subversion of Identity. Routledge, 1990.
5. Escobar, Arturo. Encountering Development: The Making and Unmaking of the Third World.
Princeton University Press, 2011.
6. Foucault, Michel. Discipline and Punish: The Birth of the Prison. Vintage Books, 1995.
7. Fraser, Nancy. Fortunes of Feminism: From State-Managed Capitalism to Neoliberal Crisis.
Verso, 2013.
8. Hochschild, Arlie Russell. The Managed Heart: Commercialization of Human Feeling.
University of California Press, 2012.
9. Marx, Karl, and Friedrich Engels. The Communist Manifesto. Penguin Classics, 2002.
10. Mohanty, Chandra Talpade. Feminism Without Borders: Decolonizing Theory, Practicing
Solidarity. Duke University Press, 2003.
11. Mohapatra, Satarupa. "Surrogacy as a Form of Exploitation of Women: A Critical Analysis."
Indian Journal of Gender Studies, vol. 26, no. 3, 2019, pp. 429-444.
12. Padmanabhan, Manjula. Harvest. Oxford University Press, 1997.
13. Pateman, Carole. The Sexual Contract. Stanford University Press, 1988.
14. Sen, Amartya. Development as Freedom. Anchor Books, 2000.
15. Shiva, Vandana. Staying Alive: Women, Ecology, and Development. Zed Books, 1988.
16. Spivak, Gayatri Chakravorty. A Critique of Postcolonial Reason: Toward a History of the
Vanishing Present. Harvard University Press, 1999.

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 75 | P a g e
 DIGITIZATION & HISTORIOGRAPHY

Mr. Pratik Lalaso Sonawale

Research Scholar,
Department of History, Savitribai Phule Pune University
Email- [email protected]
Mobile- 8381026372
Co-Author- Dr. Kiran Sampat Jadhav
Professor & Head,
Department of History,
Agasti Arts, Commerce &
Dadasaheb Rupavate Science College,
Akole, Ahmednagar.

ABSTRACT:
Digitization is one of the most important phenomenon of recent times. It has impacted the
world in its core. So consequently it had its tremendous impact on various disciplines. History as a
discipline is also not an exception to it. Historiography is the most crucial factor of history
discipline. Digitization has its impact on the process in which historical research is carried out.
This paper tries to understand the linkage between digitization & historiography.

KEYWORDS- Digitization, Historiography.

INTRODUCTION:
Pre - Digital Era saw massive difficulty in the access of primary sources for historians.
Whatever primary sources were available in the traditional Archival Libraries, historians had to
rely on it. The technological progress of the past decades has had a transformative effect on the
historiographic process. It is generally accepted that mass digitization projects led by museums,
libraries and archives have allowed historians to widen their collection of primary sources.
While the emergence of digital libraries & other types of digital resources has opened up new
opportunities for research scholars in the historical field, in terms of accessing diverse types of
information from the various sources.

OBJECTIVES:
1. To study the linkage between digitization & historiography.
2. To evaluate the impact of digitization on historiography.

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 76 | P a g e
RESEARCH METHODOLOGY:
Researcher has used descriptive-analytical research design to conduct this research
paper.

CONCEPT OF HISTORIOGRAPHY:
“Historiography, the writing of history, especially the writing of history on the critical
examination of sources, the selection of particular details from the authentic materials in those
sources, and the synthesis of those details into a narrative that stands the test of critical
examination.” This definition of historiography by Britannica provides a holistic approach in the
process of historical writing. It underlies the significance of ‘sources’ in the process of writing
history.

RELEVANCE OF SOURCES IN HISTORIOGRAPHY:

Sources, generally considered in the historical field, as a fundamental instrument that
provides a significant information about particular things. These sources acts as a building
blocks in the historiographic process. Collection of sources & their critical analysis plays
foundational role in it. So, consequently the availability of sources become the crucial factor in
the process of historiography.

CONCEPT OF DIGITIZATION:
Digitization is the process of converting information into a digital that is computer
readable format. In the context of libraries, archives and museums, digitization is a means of
creating digital substitutes of analog materials such as book, newspapers, microfilm, &
videotapes offers an increased access & collection development, ultimately enhancing the
potential for research in the historical field.

LINKAGE BETWEEN DIGITIZATION & HISTORIOGRAPHY:

The phenomenon of digitization has a tremendous impact on historical scholarship. The
way in which historians research, write & publish their work, has dramatically changed. The
historiographic process in the Pre – Digital Era was slow & laborious. Historians of that era had
to heavily depend on intensive ground work that includes arrangement of interviews with
subject specialists & archivist, finding & getting access to the primary sources through
traditional means. Digitization did not totally changed the process in which historiography was
done, historians still identify problems, explore the secondary literature, find primary sources,
study them & publish. But the detailed ground work of a historian has undergone a digital
revolution.
Historical research in the digital age has its own distinctive features. Historical
information is mediated through digital media, so tremendous transformation has unfolded
over the span of three decades. These transformation forces are reshaping the way in which
modern historical scholarship is carrying itself out. This transformation is neither wholly
positive nor negative. In terms of finding the problems, generally historians still chose the
research topic from the area of his specialty, which then can be classified in the terms of eras,
events, personalities or the combination of some of these elements. Digitization has just widen
the spectrum of these elements.

IMPACT OF DIGITIZATION ON HISTORIOGRAPHY:

In terms of exploring the secondary literature, now digitization has opened a chest of
premium secondary sources on its various platforms such as digital archives & digital libraries.
But the process of verifying the secondary sources according to the subject’s need, is still more
or less the same. But access to primary sources has definitely widened, so the research
scholarship is going through a fundamental change. Now the area of historical research is
broadened due the availability of primary sources. But this also has created a trend of
ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 77 | P a g e
oversimplifying the subject which ultimately leads to the unprofessionalism in the subject field.
Digitization has impacted on the process in which historian reads his sources. Digital
platforms have undoubtedly simplified the process of reading historical material, but at the
same time it had also given the platform to unverified and untrustworthy documents. So the
process of selecting the trusted material for the research work is hardened. In terms of
publishing the research work, due to the vast digital horizon and also in the age of
interdisciplinary research scholarship, the historian now had an array of platforms on which
this research work can be published.
Now, last but not the least, the heavy financial burden on the research scholar to publish
his work has definitely reduced due to the digitization. Online journals have given access to
thousands of historians to publish their work in an affordable cost, so the historical scholarship
is undergoing a tremendous way in terms of the amount of historical research work has been
published in recent times.

CONCLUSION:
Digitization has a fundamental impact on the process in which modern historiography is
being carrying out. It has altered the way in which historical sources could be accessed, at the
same time it did not completely changed the methodology of historiography. It is now up to a
discretion of a historian, on how to utilize this modern phenomenon of digitization to extract
the truth from the past in an impartial way.

REFERENCES:
1. Anderson S., Hart G. 2016. Challenges in Digitizing Librarian Archives: A Case Study.
2. Baets A. de. 2009. Responsible History. Oxford: Berghahn Books.
3. Berger S. 2013. The Role of National Archives in Constructing National Master Narratives in
Europe. Archival Science.
4. Berry, D. M. and, Fagorjord, A. 2017. Digital Humanities: Knowledge & Critique in a Digital
Age. Oxford University Press Cambridge: Polity.
5. Zaagsma, Gerban. 2022. Digital History & the Politics of Digitization. Oxford University
Press.

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 78 | P a g e
 EXPLORING THE EFFICACY OF INTERDISCIPLINARY PROJECT-BASED LEARNING
IN BLENDING STEM AND HUMANITIES SUBJECTS

Ms. Mrunal R Mohite

Research Scholar, Shivaji University, Kolhapur.

ABSTRACT-
This paper provides a comprehensive examination of Project-Based Learning (PBL)
approaches that integrate STEM and humanities subjects, highlighting their relevance,
effectiveness, and implications for education. It begins with an overview of PBL, emphasizing its
student-centered, inquiry-driven nature and its significance in addressing the needs of 21st-
century learners. The paper explores the concept of blending STEM and humanities within PBL
frameworks and showcases the effectiveness of interdisciplinary PBL in enhancing student
engagement, critical thinking, and interdisciplinary skills. Challenges in implementing
interdisciplinary PBL initiatives are identified, along with the critical role of educators,
curriculum design, and institutional support. Future directions for research in interdisciplinary
PBL are outlined, emphasizing the need for ongoing exploration and innovation to advance
educational practices and outcomes. Overall, interdisciplinary PBL represents a promising
approach to fostering holistic student development and preparing learners for success in a
rapidly changing world.

KEYWORDS- NEP, Project based learning, Interdisciplinary, STEM.

INTRODUCTION:
Project-Based Learning (PBL) has gained significant attention in contemporary
education as a pedagogical approach that emphasizes student-centered, inquiry-driven learning
experiences. This section provides an overview of PBL, elucidating its fundamental principles,
key characteristics, and relevance in addressing the evolving needs of 21st-century learners.

DEFINITION AND CONCEPTUAL FRAMEWORK:

Project-Based Learning is an instructional methodology centered on the creation of
authentic, real-world projects that engage students in exploring complex questions, solving
problems, and constructing meaningful artifacts. Rooted in constructivist theories of learning,

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 79 | P a g e
PBL encourages active participation, collaboration, and critical thinking as students work
towards achieving project goals. There are some key characteristics of the projects based
learning: Projects are designed to mirror real-world challenges and contexts, fostering
relevance and motivation among students. PBL encourages inquiry-based learning, prompting
students to ask questions, conduct research, and seek solutions independently. Projects often
require collaboration among students, promoting teamwork, communication, and interpersonal
skills. PBL emphasizes reflection on the learning process, allowing students to evaluate their
progress, revise their approaches, and refine their work. Projects often cut across multiple
subject areas, promoting interdisciplinary learning and connections between academic concepts
and real-world applications.
It is also important to know ‘what’s the relevance of project based learning in
contemporary education.’ PBL cultivates essential 21st century skills such as critical thinking,
problem-solving, creativity, communication, and collaboration, which are increasingly valued in
the modern workforce. By providing opportunities for hands-on, experiential learning, PBL
enhances student motivation, curiosity, and ownership of the learning process. PBL
accommodates diverse learning styles and preferences, allowing students to engage with
content in ways that resonate with their interests and abilities. PBL equips students with
practical, transferable skills and competencies that are applicable in a wide range of
professional settings, preparing them for success in college, career, and civic life. PBL fosters a
mindset of inquiry, curiosity, and lifelong learning, instilling in students the capacity to adapt,
innovate, and thrive in an ever-changing world. These all skills are also mentioned in NEP 2020
India. So to understand these approaches is very important.
In response to the increasingly interconnected and complex challenges of the 21st
century, there is a growing recognition of the need for education to bridge disciplinary
boundaries and foster interdisciplinary understanding. This has led to the emergence of
innovative pedagogical approaches that integrate Science, Technology, Engineering, and
Mathematics (STEM) subjects with humanities disciplines within Project-Based Learning (PBL)
frameworks. In this section, we explore the concept of blending STEM and humanities subjects
in PBL approaches, highlighting its rationale and potential implications for education.
Traditionally, STEM and humanities subjects have been viewed as distinct domains with
separate methodologies and objectives. However, blending these disciplines in PBL offers
compelling advantages in addressing real-world issues comprehensively. By incorporating
diverse perspectives and methodologies, this interdisciplinary approach promotes a more
holistic understanding of complex problems. For instance, tackling environmental challenges
may require not only scientific knowledge but also an understanding of ethical considerations,
historical context, and cultural implications. Moreover, integrating STEM and humanities
subjects in PBL fosters the development of essential skills such as critical thinking, creativity,
communication, and collaboration. Through interdisciplinary projects, students are encouraged
to draw upon knowledge from multiple disciplines, enabling them to deepen their
understanding of complex issues and devise innovative solutions. Furthermore, this
interdisciplinary approach aligns with the goals of education for sustainability and global
citizenship. By engaging students in projects that address pressing social, environmental, and
technological issues, PBL promotes active citizenship and empowers students to become
informed, responsible, and engaged members of society.

Literary Review-
Fitri Wijayanti and Avilanofa Bagus Budi (2024) present a concise yet comprehensive
exploration of Project-Based Learning (PBL) in English as a Foreign Language (EFL) classrooms.
Their article addresses the challenge of integrating PBL in ELT settings, offering detailed
activities tailored for Junior High School level. By emphasizing the practical relevance of PBL in
developing 21st-century skills, the authors highlight its transformative potential in empowering
ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 80 | P a g e
students to become active, engaged, and lifelong learners. Overall, the article provides valuable
insights and strategies for successfully implementing PBL in the EFL classroom, contributing to
the discourse on innovative pedagogical approaches in language education. In her article,
"Project-Based Learning (PjBL) Learning Model with STEM Approach in Natural Science
Learning for the 21st Century,"
Ika Rahmania explores the integration of Project-Based Learning (PjBL) with the
Science, Technology, Engineering, and Mathematics (STEM) approach to enhance critical skills
among students in science education. Rahmania argues that this integration offers opportunities
for contextual learning through collaborative projects, fostering critical thinking and problem-
solving skills essential for navigating contemporary challenges. Rahmania's study employs a
comprehensive methodology, including a literature review and analysis of curriculum
competencies, to advocate for the adoption of PjBL infused with STEM methodologies in junior
secondary education. By identifying areas conducive to integration with the STEM approach, the
research emphasizes the importance of cultivating proficient human resources capable of
addressing 21st-century challenges. One strength of Rahmania's article lies in its pragmatic
approach to educational innovation, grounded in empirical evidence and educational
frameworks. However, the article could benefit from concrete examples or case studies
illustrating successful implementation in real-world educational settings and a deeper
exploration of potential challenges in adopting this approach. In conclusion, Rahmania's article
contributes valuable insights to the discourse on innovative pedagogical approaches in science
education. By advocating for the fusion of PjBL and STEM methodologies, the research
highlights the transformative potential of experiential learning paradigms in preparing students
to become adept problem solvers in an increasingly complex global landscape.
Opeyemi A. Oyewo, Sam Ramaila, and Lydia Mavuru's article, "Harnessing Project-Based
Learning to Enhance STEM Students’ Critical Thinking Skills Using Water Treatment Activity,"
offers a comprehensive exploration of the integration between project-based learning (PBL) and
STEM education, focusing specifically on water treatment. The study underscores the
imperative for STEM students to cultivate critical thinking skills essential for addressing socio-
hydrological challenges in water management. The authors contextualize the significance of
water treatment processes in mitigating environmental pollution and emphasize the societal
implications of water-related issues, advocating for the integration of societal understanding
into STEM education. Through an action research design involving third-year Bachelor of
Science students majoring in Chemistry, the study demonstrates the effectiveness of PBL in
fostering critical thinking skills among STEM students. By utilizing agricultural wastes like
orange and banana peels to develop water treatment products, the researchers showcase an
innovative approach to addressing real-world challenges. Central to the study is the
interdisciplinary integration of knowledge encompassing Earth Science, Physics, Chemistry, and
Technology, guided by the Five Steps of Project-Based Learning framework. This structured
approach ensures a comprehensive exploration of water treatment challenges. The empirical
findings derived from laboratory experiments validate the efficacy of processed banana and
orange peels in reducing water turbidity, meeting the South African National Standard for
drinking water quality. The discussion on the chemistry of processed peels highlights the
importance of understanding underlying mechanisms for effective water treatment. In
conclusion, Oyewo, Ramaila, and Mavuru's article significantly contributes to the academic
discourse on STEM education and project-based learning. By demonstrating the potential of
experiential learning methodologies in nurturing critical thinking skills, the study underscores
the importance of interdisciplinary collaboration and real-world application in STEM education,
particularly in addressing pressing environmental challenges like water treatment.
DeLisi, Liu, and Fields (2023) provide a comprehensive examination of the efficacy of
project-based learning (PBL) within urban high schools, particularly focusing on STEM career
pathways. Their article emphasizes PBL's potential to offer personalized, engaging, and relevant
educational experiences, equipping students with essential skills for post-secondary pathways.
ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 81 | P a g e
The research explores PBL implementation in an urban STEM high school environment catering
to historically under-resourced communities. Through an exploratory study, the authors aim to
elucidate the essential features of successful PBL initiatives and offer insights into effective
implementation within urban high schools. The findings highlight PBL's transformative impact
on student engagement and preparation for future career opportunities. By aligning classroom
experiences with real-world industry practices, PBL facilitates experiential learning that
resonates with urban students' interests and aspirations. Importantly, the article underscores
the need to adapt PBL methodologies to suit the unique needs and challenges prevalent in urban
high schools. Practical recommendations are provided for educators and administrators seeking
to integrate PBL into curricula, enhancing educational outcomes and promoting equity in STEM
education. DeLisi, Liu, and Fields' research contributes significantly to the discourse on urban
education and STEM pedagogy by advocating for innovative instructional approaches. By
showcasing PBL's potential to empower urban students and promote meaningful career
pathways, the study advocates for a holistic approach to STEM education that prioritizes
experiential learning and real-world application. In conclusion, "Implementing Project-Based
Learning in Urban High School STEM Career Pathways" presents a compelling case for the
adoption of PBL to enhance student engagement, relevance, and success in urban STEM
education. The article underscores the importance of equitable access to high-quality
educational experiences and offers actionable insights for creating inclusive learning
environments that foster student achievement and empowerment.
Some Studies highlight various methodologies for integrating STEM and humanities
subjects within PBL, including thematic units, interdisciplinary projects, and integrated
curriculum design (Nadelson, 2020). Researchers emphasize the importance of aligning project
topics and tasks with learning objectives from both STEM and humanities disciplines to ensure
meaningful integration (Barron, 2019). Literature suggests that PBL approaches integrating
STEM and humanities subjects promote deeper engagement, higher motivation, and increased
academic achievement among students (Rocard, 2007). Interdisciplinary PBL enhances
students' ability to make connections between different fields of knowledge, fostering a more
holistic understanding of complex issues (Hakkarainen, 2018). Challenges associated with
integrating STEM and humanities subjects in PBL include curriculum alignment, faculty
collaboration, resource constraints, and assessment practices (Froyd & Minderhout, 2018).
Researchers emphasize the need for professional development opportunities and support
structures to help educators effectively implement interdisciplinary PBL initiatives (Krajcik,
2014). Scholars call for further research to explore best practices, innovative strategies, and
successful models for integrating STEM and humanities subjects within PBL frameworks
(Follman , 2021). Future studies should also examine the long-term impact of interdisciplinary
PBL on student learning outcomes, career readiness, and lifelong learning skills (Bell, 2020).
In summary, existing literature highlights the potential of PBL approaches that blend
STEM and humanities subjects to enhance student learning experiences, promote
interdisciplinary understanding, and prepare students for success in a complex and
interconnected world. While challenges exist, ongoing research and innovation in this area offer
promising opportunities for advancing interdisciplinary education and fostering holistic student
development.
In examining theoretical frameworks and models supporting interdisciplinary learning,
it becomes apparent that project-based learning (PBL) emerges as a particularly effective
pedagogical approach. PBL, rooted in constructivist theories of learning, offers a holistic
framework for integrating diverse subject areas and fostering interdisciplinary understanding
among students. By engaging learners in authentic, real-world projects, PBL promotes inquiry-
based exploration and collaboration across disciplines, aligning with the goals of
interdisciplinary education. The Five Steps of Project-Based Learning framework provides a
structured approach to guiding interdisciplinary projects, facilitating the integration of
theoretical concepts and practical applications. Additionally, PBL aligns with contemporary
ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 82 | P a g e
educational paradigms emphasizing student-centered, experiential learning, making it well-
suited to support interdisciplinary learning initiatives. Through its emphasis on authenticity,
inquiry, collaboration, and reflection, PBL serves as a foundational model for implementing
interdisciplinary learning experiences that promote deeper engagement and meaningful
connections across subject areas.

AIM AND OBJECTIVE-

To investigate the effectiveness of project-based learning approaches that integrate
STEM and humanities subjects in fostering interdisciplinary skills and knowledge among
students.
Methodology- The said article is qualitative analysis of project based learning. Researcher here
tried to analyse different approaches that blend STEM and humanities subjects,
Finding- An overview of empirical evidence and case studies demonstrates the effectiveness of
interdisciplinary Project-Based Learning (PBL) approaches in fostering meaningful learning
outcomes. Research findings consistently highlight the positive impact of interdisciplinary PBL
on student engagement, critical thinking, and content mastery across multiple subject areas. For
instance, studies have documented increased student motivation and enthusiasm for learning
when engaged in interdisciplinary projects that integrate STEM and humanities subjects.
Furthermore, empirical evidence suggests that interdisciplinary PBL promotes deeper
conceptual understanding and knowledge retention compared to traditional disciplinary
approaches. Case studies from various educational settings provide concrete examples of
successful interdisciplinary PBL initiatives, showcasing how collaborative projects spanning
multiple disciplines can enhance student learning experiences. These case studies often
highlight the development of 21st-century skills such as communication, collaboration,
creativity, and problem-solving through interdisciplinary PBL. Overall, the empirical evidence
and case studies underscore the effectiveness of interdisciplinary PBL in promoting holistic
learning and preparing students for success in an interconnected world.
An analysis of the impact of blended STEM (Science, Technology, Engineering, and
Mathematics) and humanities Project-Based Learning (PBL) on student engagement, critical
thinking, and interdisciplinary skills development reveals significant positive outcomes.
Research studies consistently indicate that incorporating both STEM and humanities subjects in
PBL initiatives leads to increased student engagement and motivation. By presenting real-world
problems that require interdisciplinary approaches to solve, blended PBL stimulates students'
curiosity and encourages active participation in the learning process. Moreover, blended STEM
and humanities PBL nurtures critical thinking skills by challenging students to analyze complex
issues from multiple perspectives. Through collaborative inquiry and problem-solving activities,
students learn to evaluate evidence, synthesize information, and make informed decisions. This
interdisciplinary approach encourages students to think critically about the connections
between different disciplines and apply diverse problem-solving strategies to address
multifaceted challenges. Furthermore, blended PBL fosters the development of interdisciplinary
skills essential for success in the modern workforce. By working collaboratively on projects that
integrate STEM concepts with humanities perspectives, students learn to communicate
effectively, collaborate with peers from diverse backgrounds, and adapt their thinking to
different contexts. These interdisciplinary skills are increasingly valued in today's globalized
society, where complex problems often require interdisciplinary solutions. Overall, the analysis
underscores the transformative impact of blended STEM and humanities PBL on student
engagement, critical thinking, and interdisciplinary skills development. By providing authentic
learning experiences that bridge disciplinary boundaries, blended PBL prepares students to
navigate the complexities of the 21st century and become innovative, adaptable, and socially
responsible global citizens.
Identification of challenges and limitations encountered in implementing
interdisciplinary Project-Based Learning (PBL) initiatives reveals several key issues that
ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 83 | P a g e
educators may face. One challenge involves aligning curriculum standards and learning
objectives across multiple disciplines. Integrating STEM and humanities subjects in PBL
requires careful coordination to ensure that project activities address the requirements of each
discipline while maintaining coherence and depth of learning. Interdisciplinary PBL often
necessitates collaboration among educators from different disciplines. However, coordinating
interdisciplinary projects can be challenging due to differences in pedagogical approaches,
schedules, and priorities among faculty members. Another limitation is the availability of
resources, including time, funding, and materials, to support interdisciplinary PBL initiatives.
Developing interdisciplinary projects may require additional time for planning and
implementation, as well as access to specialized equipment or technology. Assessing student
learning and achievement in interdisciplinary PBL can be complex. Traditional assessment
methods may not adequately capture the interdisciplinary nature of student work, leading to
challenges in evaluating learning outcomes and providing meaningful feedback. Some students
may struggle with the interdisciplinary nature of PBL, especially if they are accustomed to more
traditional, discipline-specific approaches to learning. Supporting students' transition to
interdisciplinary thinking and collaboration requires scaffolding and support from educators.
Finally, implementing interdisciplinary PBL initiatives may require institutional support and
buy-in from administrators, policymakers, and other stakeholders. Building consensus and
securing resources to support interdisciplinary education initiatives can be a significant
challenge in some educational contexts. Addressing these challenges and limitations requires
thoughtful planning, collaboration, and ongoing support from all stakeholders involved in
interdisciplinary PBL initiatives. By identifying and addressing these barriers, educators can
work towards creating more inclusive, engaging, and effective learning experiences for students
across diverse disciplines.

DISCUSSION:
An examination of the role of educators, curriculum design, and institutional support
reveals their critical importance in fostering successful interdisciplinary Project-Based Learning
(PBL) initiatives.
Educators play a pivotal role as facilitators of learning in interdisciplinary PBL. They
guide students through the inquiry process, provide support and feedback, and facilitate
meaningful discussions that promote interdisciplinary understanding. Educators design and
structure interdisciplinary PBL experiences, selecting relevant topics, creating authentic project
tasks, and integrating diverse subject areas to promote holistic learning. Educators foster
collaboration among students by establishing norms, facilitating group work, and providing
opportunities for peer feedback and reflection.
Effective curriculum design is essential for integrating STEM and humanities subjects
within PBL frameworks. Curriculum designers must identify connections between different
disciplines, align learning objectives, and design interdisciplinary projects that promote deep
learning and critical thinking. Curriculum designers should create authentic, real-world project
tasks that resonate with students' interests and experiences, fostering engagement and
motivation. Authentic tasks encourage students to apply their knowledge and skills in
meaningful ways, promoting interdisciplinary understanding. Curriculum design should
accommodate the diverse needs and interests of students, allowing for differentiation and
flexibility in project design and implementation. This ensures that all students have
opportunities to succeed and thrive in interdisciplinary PBL experiences.
Institutions must allocate resources, including time, funding, and professional
development opportunities, to support interdisciplinary PBL initiatives. This may involve
providing access to training and support for educators, investing in technology and materials,
and creating dedicated time for collaboration and planning. Institutional policies and leadership
support are essential for fostering a culture of interdisciplinary collaboration and innovation.
Administrators can promote interdisciplinary PBL by advocating for its value, providing
ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 84 | P a g e
incentives for participation, and creating structures to support implementation. Institutions can
enhance interdisciplinary PBL by forging partnerships with community organizations,
businesses, and universities. These partnerships provide students with opportunities for real-
world engagement, mentorship, and collaboration, enriching their learning experiences and
promoting community connections.
In conclusion, educators, curriculum designers, and institutional leaders play crucial
roles in fostering successful interdisciplinary PBL initiatives. By recognizing the importance of
collaboration, authentic learning experiences, and institutional support, stakeholders can work
together to create meaningful interdisciplinary PBL experiences that prepare students for
success in an interconnected and rapidly changing world.

Future Directions and Areas for Further Research-

Considering future directions and areas for further research in Project-Based Learning
(PBL) aligns with the overarching goal of continuously enhancing educational practices and
outcomes. Building upon the foundational insights provided earlier, several key avenues
warrant exploration: Future research could delve deeper into advanced interdisciplinary
approaches within PBL, exploring innovative ways to integrate STEM and humanities subjects.
This may involve investigating cross-disciplinary connections, refining interdisciplinary project
design strategies, and exploring new models for curriculum integration. With the rapid
advancement of technology, there is a need to examine how digital tools and platforms can
enhance PBL experiences. Research could explore the integration of virtual reality, augmented
reality, and online collaboration tools to facilitate authentic, immersive learning experiences in
interdisciplinary PBL contexts. Further research is needed to develop and validate assessment
strategies that effectively measure interdisciplinary learning outcomes in PBL. This includes
exploring alternative assessment methods, such as performance-based assessments, peer
evaluations, and portfolio assessments, that capture the multifaceted nature of student learning
in interdisciplinary projects. Future research should prioritize investigating strategies to
promote equity and inclusion in interdisciplinary PBL initiatives. This may involve examining
how PBL can be adapted to meet the diverse needs of students from varying backgrounds,
cultures, and learning styles, as well as exploring ways to address systemic barriers to access
and participation. Research on professional development for educators is essential to support
the successful implementation of interdisciplinary PBL. Future studies could explore effective
training models, resources, and support structures to enhance educators' knowledge, skills, and
confidence in facilitating interdisciplinary learning experiences.
By advancing research in these areas, educators, policymakers, and researchers can
further enhance the effectiveness and impact of interdisciplinary PBL initiatives. By building
upon the foundational insights and addressing emerging challenges, the field of PBL can
continue to evolve, providing students with meaningful, relevant, and transformative learning
experiences.

CONCLUSION –
In conclusion, Project-Based Learning (PBL) integrating STEM and humanities subjects
offers significant insights into its efficacy, implications, and future directions in education. PBL
emerges as a student-centered approach fostering active learning, collaboration, and critical
thinking. It cultivates essential competencies and a mindset of inquiry and lifelong learning.
Interdisciplinary PBL provides a holistic approach to addressing real-world challenges,
promoting deeper understanding and essential 21st-century skills among students. Empirical
evidence supports its effectiveness in enhancing student engagement, motivation, and academic
achievement. However, challenges such as curriculum alignment and resource constraints exist.
Future research should explore advanced interdisciplinary approaches, technology integration,

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 85 | P a g e
assessment strategies, and equity promotion. In summary, interdisciplinary PBL holds promise
for holistic student development and readiness for a changing world, necessitating continued
innovation and collaboration among educators, policymakers, and researchers.

REFERENCES-
1. Barrett, T., & Moore, S. (2010). New Approaches to Problem-based Learning: Revitalising
Your Practice in Higher Education. Routledge.
2. DeLisi, J., Liu, E., & Fields, E. (2023). Implementing Project-Based Learning in Urban High
School STEM Career Pathways. Urban Education, 0(0).
https://doi.org/10.1177/00420859231214174
3. Moallem, M., Hung, W., & Dabbagh, N. (Eds.). (2019). The Wiley Handbook of Problem-Based
Learning. John Wiley & Sons, Inc.
4. Nadelson, Louis & Callahan, Janet & Pyke, Patricia & Hay, Anne & Dance, Matthew & Pfiester,
Joshua. (2013). Teacher STEM Perception and Preparation: Inquiry-Based STEM Professional
Development for Elementary Teachers. The Journal of Educational Research. 106. 157-168.
10.1080/00220671.2012.667014.
5. Oyewo, Opeyemi A., Sam Ramaila, and Lydia Mavuru. 2022. "Harnessing Project-Based
Learning to Enhance STEM Students’ Critical Thinking Skills Using Water Treatment
Activity" Education Sciences 12, no. 11: 780. https://doi.org/10.3390/educsci12110780
6. Rahmania, Ika. (2021). Project Based Learning (PjBL) Learning Model with STEM Approach
in Natural Science Learning for the 21st Century. Budapest International Research and
Critics Institute (BIRCI-Journal): Humanities and Social Sciences. 4. 1161-1167.
10.33258/birci.v4i1.1727.
7. Wijayanti, Fitri & Budi, Avilanofa. (2023). Project-Based Learning in EFL Classroom: Strategies
for Success. Journal of English in Academic and Professional Communication. 9. 108-117.
10.25047/jeapco.v9i2.4086.

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 86 | P a g e
 EXPLORING THE EXTENSIVE IMPACT OF LINGUISTIC VARIETY ON COMMUNICATION
INTERACTIONS

Mr. Sachin Subrav Gadhire1

(M. A., B.Ed., SET, NET)
Assist. Professor,
Padmabhushan Vasantraodada Patil Mahavidyalaya, Kavathe Mahankal,
Dist- Sangli – 416405 (Maharashtra)

Mr. Rahul Rajiv Shinde2 (M.A., B. Ed., SET)

Padmabhushan Vasantraodada Patil Mahavidyalaya, Kavathe Mahankal,
Dist- Sangli – 416405 (Maharashtra)

ABSTRACT:
Language is a dynamic force shaping human interactions, cultures, and social structures
worldwide. This research paper explores the multifaceted impact of linguistic diversity on
communication interactions. It studies into key objectives, reviews relevant theories and models
related to linguistic variety and communication, analyzes the intricate dynamics of linguistic
diversity and communication processes, examines the role of cultural sensitivity in fostering
effective communication, explores inclusive communication practices, provides actionable
recommendations for promoting inclusivity and cultural sensitivity, and concludes with a
summary of key findings and future research directions. The paper highlights the importance of
understanding linguistic diversity's complex interplay with culture, history, and power
dynamics in creating inclusive and effective communication environments.

KEYWORDS: Linguistic diversity, Communication interactions, Cultural sensitivity, Inclusive

communication, Language and culture, Power dynamics, Multifaceted language, Interpersonal
communication, Cross-cultural communication, Language diversity's impact

A. INTRODUCTION
Language is not merely a tool for communication; it is a dynamic and multifaceted
aspect of human interaction that shapes cultures, identities, and social structures. The diversity
of languages spoken worldwide reflects the rich tapestry of human experience, with thousands
of languages coexisting and evolving in various communities. This diversity is not just a matter
of linguistic variation but encompasses complex interactions between language, culture, history,
and power dynamics.
The research paper utilizes a multidisciplinary approach, integrating insights from
linguistics, anthropology, sociology, psychology, education, and communication studies to
understand the impact of linguistic variety actively. It synthesizes theoretical foundations,
empirical research findings, and practical strategies to illuminate the complex interplay
between linguistic diversity and communication interactions.
To grasp the impact of linguistic variety, we adopt a multidisciplinary approach that
blends perspectives from linguistics, anthropology, sociology, psychology, education, and
communication studies. This paper synthesizes theoretical frameworks, empirical research
results, and actionable strategies to shed light on the intricate relationship between linguistic
diversity and communication interactions in a dynamic manner.
Theoretical frameworks concerning language diversity underscore its impact on shaping
cultural identities, social hierarchies, and power dynamics within and among communities.
Noteworthy scholars such as David Crystal, Claire Kramsch, and Alastair Pennycook have made
significant contributions by delving into how languages evolve, adapt, and confront challenges

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 87 | P a g e
like endangerment or extinction, often influenced by various sociopolitical factors.
Empirical studies offer valuable insights into the real-world implications of linguistic diversity
on communication processes. Research on cross-linguistic communication challenges, language
policy impacts, globalization effects, and the role of technology in mediating linguistic
interactions provides a nuanced understanding of how language diversity influences
communication dynamics in diverse contexts.
Practical strategies for navigating linguistic diversity in communication settings are
essential for promoting inclusivity, understanding, and effective communication. Initiatives such
as language learning programs, intercultural communication training, digital linguistic activism,
and inclusive language policies play pivotal roles in fostering meaningful dialogue and bridging
linguistic divides.
The study examines linguistic variety's impact on communication, highlighting the
importance of diverse languages, cultural sensitivity, and inclusive practices in a globalized
world. It provides actionable recommendations for educators, policymakers, and practitioners
to raise awareness and improve communication across diverse linguistic environments.

B. Objectives:
i) To gain a comprehensive understanding of how linguistic variety influences communication
interactions.
ii) To provide actionable recommendations for promoting linguistic inclusivity and fostering
effective communication in multilingual environments.

C. Review of Relevant Theories and Models Related to Linguistic Variety and

Communication
1. Sapir-Whorf Hypothesis: The Sapir-Whorf hypothesis, also known as linguistic relativity,
posits that language shapes thought and perception. This theory suggests that the structure and
vocabulary of a language influence how speakers conceptualize the world around them. For
example, languages with distinct grammatical categories for colours may lead speakers to
perceive and categorize colours differently compared to speakers of languages with fewer
colour distinctions.
2. Language Socialization Theory: Language socialization theory emphasizes the role of social
interactions and cultural contexts in shaping language acquisition and use. It highlights how
individuals learn language not just as a set of grammatical rules but also as a means of
expressing social identities, norms, and values within their communities. This theory is
particularly relevant for understanding how linguistic diversity reflects and reinforces cultural
diversity.
3. Communication Accommodation Theory: Communication accommodation theory explores
how individuals adjust their language, speech patterns, and nonverbal behaviors to either
converge with or diverge from the communication styles of others. This theory is relevant in
multilingual and multicultural contexts, where speakers may adapt their communication
strategies to enhance understanding, build rapport, or assert their cultural identities.
4. Critical Language Awareness: Critical language awareness emphasizes the critical
examination of language ideologies, power structures, and inequalities embedded within
linguistic practices. It focuses on uncovering hidden biases, stereotypes, and marginalization
that may result from language use, language policies, or language hierarchies. This perspective
is crucial for addressing issues of linguistic imperialism, discrimination, and linguistic diversity
advocacy.
5. Acculturation Theory: Acculturation theory explores the processes through which
individuals or groups adapt to new cultural environments, including language acquisition and
cultural integration. It considers how linguistic and cultural changes occur as a result of contact
between different cultural groups, leading to hybrid identities, language mixing, and code-
switching phenomena.
ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 88 | P a g e
6. Politeness Theory: Politeness theory examines how speakers manage interpersonal
relationships and social hierarchies through language strategies such as politeness markers,
speech acts, and face-saving manoeuvres. In diverse communication contexts, understanding
politeness norms and cultural variations in communicative styles is crucial for maintaining
positive interactions and avoiding misunderstandings.
7. Speech Accommodation Theory: Speech accommodation theory, also known as
convergence-divergence theory, explores the ways in which speakers adjust their speech
patterns, accents, and language choices to align with or differentiate from the linguistic norms of
their interlocutors. This theory is relevant for studying language variation, dialectal differences,
and communication dynamics in multicultural settings.
8. Ethnography of Communication: The ethnography of communication approach involves
studying language use in its cultural context, focusing on communicative practices, speech
communities, and communicative events. This approach helps uncover the intricate
relationships between language, culture, social norms, and power structures, providing insights
into how linguistic diversity shapes communication interactions.
Researchers and practitioners can gain a comprehensive understanding of how language
diversity influences communication dynamics, intercultural interactions, and identity
negotiations in diverse linguistic landscapes by integrating insights from these valuable
frameworks provided by theories and models.

D. Linguistic Diversity and Communication

Communication Processes:
Linguistic diversity encompasses a wide range of languages, dialects, accents, and
communication styles present in diverse linguistic communities worldwide. This diversity
profoundly influences communication processes, presenting both challenges and opportunities
for individuals and societies.

1. Challenges in Communication:
a. Language Barriers: One of the primary challenges of linguistic diversity is the presence of
language barriers that hinder effective communication between speakers of different languages.
These barriers can lead to misunderstandings, misinterpretations, and communication
breakdowns, especially in contexts where speakers do not share a common language.
b. Cultural Misunderstandings: Linguistic diversity often reflects underlying cultural
differences, leading to potential misunderstandings or conflicts arising from differing cultural
norms, values, and communication styles. For example, direct vs. indirect communication styles
or varying concepts of politeness can impact interactions.
c. Interpretation and Translation Issues: The need for interpretation and translation services
in multilingual settings introduces challenges related to accuracy, cultural nuances, and the
availability of qualified interpreters/translators. Inaccurate translations can lead to distortions
in meaning and communication errors.

2. Opportunities in Communication:
a. Cognitive Flexibility: Exposure to linguistic diversity can enhance cognitive flexibility,
allowing individuals to adapt their communication styles, linguistic strategies, and problem-
solving approaches in diverse contexts. This cognitive adaptability fosters creativity, empathy,
and cross-cultural understanding.
b. Cultural Exchange and Learning: Linguistic diversity promotes cultural exchange and
learning opportunities, enabling individuals to gain insights into different worldviews,
traditions, and perspectives through language interactions. This exposure contributes to
cultural awareness, tolerance, and appreciation of diversity.
c. Innovation and Collaboration: Multilingual environments often stimulate innovation and
collaboration by bringing together diverse perspectives, knowledge systems, and skills.
ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 89 | P a g e
Collaborative problem-solving, creativity, and cross-disciplinary approaches thrive in settings
where linguistic diversity is embraced.

3. Strategies for Addressing Challenges and Maximizing Opportunities:

a. Language Access and Training: Providing language access through interpretation services,
language learning programs, and multilingual resources can help bridge language gaps and
facilitate communication across linguistic barriers.
b. Cultural Sensitivity and Competence: Promoting cultural sensitivity and competence
among communicators is essential for navigating cultural differences, avoiding stereotypes, and
fostering inclusive communication environments.
c. Technology-Mediated Communication: Leveraging technology, such as machine translation
tools, digital platforms for language learning, and video conferencing with real-time
interpretation, can enhance communication efficiency and accessibility in multilingual contexts.
d. Cross-Cultural Communication Training: Offering cross-cultural communication training
to individuals and organizations equips them with skills for effective intercultural interactions,
conflict resolution, and building meaningful relationships across linguistic and cultural divides.
In conclusion, while linguistic diversity presents challenges such as language barriers and
cultural misunderstandings, it also offers opportunities for cognitive growth, cultural exchange,
innovation, and collaboration. Strategic initiatives focused on language access, cultural
competence, and technology integration can help mitigate communication challenges and
harness the benefits of linguistic diversity in fostering inclusive and effective communication
processes.

E. Cultural Sensitivity in Communication:

Cultural sensitivity plays a crucial role in fostering effective communication across linguistic
boundaries, especially in diverse and multicultural settings. It involves awareness, respect, and
understanding of cultural differences, norms, values, and communication styles that influence
interpersonal interactions. This section examines the significance of cultural sensitivity and its
impact on communication effectiveness.

1. Understanding Cultural Diversity:

a. Cultural Norms and Values: Cultural sensitivity requires recognizing and respecting diverse
cultural norms, values, and belief systems that shape individuals' behaviours, attitudes, and
communication preferences. For example, concepts of time, personal space, hierarchy, and
nonverbal communication cues vary across cultures and influence communication dynamics.
b. Communication Styles: Different cultures have distinct communication styles, such as direct
vs. indirect communication, high-context vs. low-context communication, and verbal vs.
nonverbal emphasis. Understanding these variations helps navigate communication challenges
and avoid misunderstandings.
c. Cultural Identity: Cultural sensitivity involves acknowledging and validating individuals'
cultural identities, including their language, heritage, traditions, and customs. Embracing
diversity and inclusivity in communication enhances trust, rapport, and mutual respect among
diverse cultural groups.

2. Impact on Communication Across Linguistic Boundaries:

a. Enhanced Understanding: Cultural sensitivity fosters a deeper understanding of others'
perspectives, worldviews, and experiences, leading to more empathetic and inclusive
communication. This understanding is particularly crucial when communicating across
linguistic boundaries, where cultural nuances significantly influence interpretation and
meaning.
b. Conflict Resolution: Cultural sensitivity contributes to effective conflict resolution by
promoting open dialogue, active listening, and consideration of diverse viewpoints. It helps
ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 90 | P a g e
avoid cultural misunderstandings, stereotypes, and biases that can escalate conflicts in
intercultural communication contexts.
c. Building Trust and Relationships: Culturally sensitive communication builds trust,
strengthens relationships, and promotes collaboration across linguistic and cultural divides.
When individuals feel understood, respected, and valued for their cultural backgrounds, they
are more likely to engage positively and cooperatively in communication interactions.

3. Strategies for Culturally Sensitive Communication:

a. Cultural Awareness Training: Providing cultural awareness training and education to
individuals and organizations enhances their understanding of cultural diversity,
communication styles, and cultural competence skills.
b. Active Listening and Empathy: Practicing active listening, empathy, and nonjudgmental
communication fosters mutual understanding and empathy across linguistic boundaries.
c. Adaptation and Flexibility: Being adaptable and flexible in communication approaches
allows individuals to adjust their communication styles, language use, and behaviours to
accommodate cultural differences and promote effective communication.
d. Respectful Language Use: Using respectful language, avoiding stereotypes, and being
mindful of cultural sensitivities contribute to creating inclusive and respectful communication
environments.
In summary, cultural sensitivity plays a pivotal role in bridging linguistic boundaries and
promoting effective communication in diverse cultural contexts. Actively cultivating cultural
awareness, embracing diversity, and practicing respectful communication strategies enables
individuals and organizations to foster inclusivity, forge meaningful relationships, and
effectively navigate communication challenges across linguistic and cultural divides.

F. Inclusive Communication Practices:

Inclusive communication practices are essential for promoting linguistic awareness and
enhancing communication effectiveness in diverse and multicultural environments. These
practices aim to create inclusive, accessible, and respectful communication spaces where
individuals from different linguistic backgrounds can interact effectively. This section delves
into strategies and approaches to foster linguistic awareness and promote inclusive
communication.

1. Language Access and Equity:

a. Multilingual Resources: Providing multilingual resources, such as translated materials,
multilingual websites, and signage in multiple languages, promotes language access and
inclusivity for diverse linguistic communities.
b. Interpretation Services: Offering professional interpretation services, both in-person and
remote, facilitates communication between speakers of different languages and ensures
everyone can participate fully in conversations and events.
c. Captioning and Subtitling: Incorporating captions and subtitles in videos, presentations, and
digital content enhances accessibility for individuals with hearing impairments and non-native
speakers of the language.

2. Cultural Competence and Sensitivity:

a. Cultural Awareness Training: Providing training on cultural competence, diversity
awareness, and cross-cultural communication equips individuals with the knowledge and skills
to navigate cultural differences respectfully and effectively.
b. Promoting Cultural Sensitivity: Encouraging cultural sensitivity in communication involves
recognizing and respecting diverse cultural norms, values, and communication styles to foster
inclusive dialogue and understanding.
c. Avoiding Stereotypes and Biases: Being mindful of stereotypes, biases, and
ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 91 | P a g e
microaggressions in communication helps create a welcoming and inclusive environment where
individuals feel valued and respected regardless of their cultural or linguistic background.

3. Accessible Communication Platforms:

a. Technology Integration: Leveraging technology, such as language translation tools, real-
time captioning software, and inclusive design principles in digital platforms, enhances
accessibility and inclusivity in communication.
b. Clear and Concise Communication: Using clear and concise language, avoiding jargon, and
providing context, when necessary, improves communication comprehension for diverse
audiences, including those with limited proficiency in the primary language.
c. Feedback Mechanisms: Establishing feedback mechanisms, such as surveys, focus groups,
and open forums, allows individuals to provide input on communication practices and suggest
improvements to enhance inclusivity and effectiveness.

4. Promoting Collaboration and Engagement:

a. Collaborative Communication: Encouraging collaborative communication practices, such as
active listening, open dialogue, and participatory decision-making processes, fosters
engagement and mutual respect among diverse stakeholders.
b. Inclusive Meetings and Events: Designing meetings, workshops, and events with inclusive
formats, diverse representation, and language accommodations promotes active participation
and inclusivity for all attendees.
c. Celebrating Diversity: Recognizing and celebrating linguistic and cultural diversity through
inclusive language, cultural celebrations, and diversity-focused initiatives fosters a sense of
belonging and community among diverse groups.

5. Continuous Learning and Improvement:

a. Training and Development: Providing ongoing training and development opportunities on
inclusive communication, diversity awareness, and linguistic diversity fosters a culture of
continuous learning and improvement within organizations and communities.
b. Feedback and Evaluation: Soliciting feedback, conducting evaluations, and incorporating
lessons learned from communication experiences help identify areas for improvement and
refine inclusive communication practices over time.
In conclusion, inclusive communication practices involve a range of strategies and approaches
aimed at promoting linguistic awareness, cultural competence, accessibility, and engagement in
communication interactions. By implementing these practices, individuals, organizations, and
communities can create inclusive communication environments that value diversity, foster
understanding, and enhance communication effectiveness across linguistic and cultural
boundaries.
G. Actionable Recommendations:
Implementing inclusive communication practices requires a proactive approach and
collaborative efforts from educators, policymakers, practitioners, and stakeholders across
various sectors. The following are practical suggestions and actionable recommendations to
promote inclusive communication in diverse settings:

1. Educators:
a. Integrate Cultural and Linguistic Diversity in Curricula: Include modules, case studies,
and discussions on cultural and linguistic diversity in educational curricula across disciplines to
promote awareness and understanding among students.
b. Offer Language Learning Opportunities: Provide language learning programs, workshops,
ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 92 | P a g e
and resources that support students in acquiring proficiency in multiple languages, fostering
linguistic awareness and inclusivity.
c. Promote Intercultural Competence: Incorporate intercultural communication training,
diversity workshops, and cross-cultural collaboration projects to develop students' intercultural
competence and sensitivity.

2. Policymakers:
a. Develop Inclusive Language Policies: Formulate language policies that prioritize linguistic
diversity, provide language access, and support multilingualism in public services, education,
healthcare, and government communications.
b. Invest in Language Access Services: Allocate resources for interpretation services,
translation assistance, and multilingual communication materials to ensure equitable access to
information and services for linguistically diverse communities.
c. Support Diversity Initiatives: Fund initiatives that promote cultural competence, diversity
awareness, and inclusive communication practices in educational institutions, workplaces, and
community organizations.

3. Practitioners:
a. Use Inclusive Language: Use inclusive language that respects diverse identities, avoids
stereotypes, and promotes a sense of belonging among diverse audiences in written and verbal
communication.
b. Provide Language Accommodations: Offer language accommodations, such as
interpretation, translation, captioning, and accessible formats, to facilitate communication for
individuals with limited proficiency in the primary language.
c. Engage in Cultural Sensitivity Training: Participate in cultural sensitivity training, diversity
workshops, and professional development opportunities to enhance cultural competence and
inclusive communication skills.

4. Organizations and Institutions:

a. Create Inclusive Communication Policies: Establish policies and guidelines that promote
inclusive communication practices, cultural sensitivity, and language accessibility in
organizational communications, meetings, and events.
b. Facilitate Cross-Cultural Collaboration: Foster collaborative projects, cross-functional
teams, and inclusive decision-making processes that embrace diversity, encourage diverse
perspectives, and promote effective communication across cultural and linguistic boundaries.
c. Evaluate and Adjust Practices: Regularly evaluate communication practices, gather
feedback from stakeholders, and make adjustments to enhance inclusivity, accessibility, and
effectiveness in communication strategies and initiatives.

5. Community Engagement:
a. Engage Diverse Stakeholders: Involve diverse stakeholders, including community members,
language experts, cultural advocates, and representatives from marginalized groups, in co-
designing inclusive communication initiatives and policies.
b. Promote Dialogue and Understanding: Facilitate open dialogue, cultural exchange events,
and forums for constructive discussions on cultural and linguistic diversity to promote mutual
understanding, respect, and collaboration.
c. Celebrate Diversity: Organize cultural celebrations, heritage months, and diversity-themed
activities that highlight the richness of linguistic and cultural diversity, fostering a sense of pride
and unity within the community.
Educators, policymakers, practitioners, organizations, and communities can cultivate inclusive
communication environments that celebrate diversity, foster mutual understanding, and
ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 93 | P a g e
improve communication effectiveness across linguistic and cultural barriers by implementing
these actionable recommendations.

H. Conclusion:
The research paper has delved into the profound influence of linguistic diversity on
communication processes, highlighting both challenges and opportunities. The key findings and
future research directions can be summarized as follows:

Key Findings:
1. Linguistic Diversity's Influence on Communication:
a. Linguistic diversity significantly affects communication processes, leading to language
barriers, cultural misunderstandings, and interpretation challenges in diverse settings.
b. Cultural sensitivity and competence play a crucial role in fostering effective communication
across linguistic boundaries by promoting understanding, respect, and inclusivity.

2. Challenges and Opportunities:

a. Challenges such as language barriers, cultural misunderstandings, and interpretation issues
require strategic approaches and inclusive communication practices to mitigate their impact.
b. Linguistic diversity also presents opportunities for cognitive growth, cultural exchange,
innovation, and collaboration, enhancing communication effectiveness and cross-cultural
understanding.

3. Inclusive Communication Practices:

Inclusive communication practices, including language access, cultural competence,
technology integration, and collaboration strategies, are essential for promoting linguistic
awareness and enhancing communication effectiveness in diverse environments.

Future Research Directions:

1. Impact of Digital Communication Technologies: Investigate the impact of digital
communication technologies, such as machine translation, digital platforms, and virtual reality,
on bridging linguistic divides and fostering inclusive communication.
2. Role of Education and Training: Explore the effectiveness of language learning programs,
intercultural communication training, and diversity workshops in promoting cultural
sensitivity, language access, and inclusive communication practices.
3. Cross-Cultural Communication Dynamics: Study the dynamics of cross-cultural
communication, including speech accommodation, language adaptation, and cultural
negotiation strategies, in diverse linguistic contexts.
4. Communication in Globalized Contexts: Examine the role of language policies,
globalization effects, and transnational communication dynamics in shaping linguistic
diversity's impact on global communication interactions.
5. Digital Linguistic Activism: Investigate the role of digital linguistic activism, language
revitalization efforts, and community-driven initiatives in preserving linguistic diversity and
promoting inclusive communication spaces.
6. Long-Term Impact of Inclusive Communication Practices: Assess the long-term impact of
inclusive communication practices on social cohesion, intergroup relations, and cultural
sustainability in diverse communities.
Addressing these future research directions will further advance our understanding of
how linguistic variety shapes communication interactions and enable scholars, practitioners,
and policymakers to develop innovative strategies to promote inclusivity, cultural sensitivity,
and effective communication across linguistic boundaries.

REFERENCES:
ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 94 | P a g e
1. Crystal, David. (2003). Language Death. Cambridge University Press.
2. Graddol, David. (2006). English Next: Why Global English May Mean the End of 'English as a
Foreign Language'. British Council.
3. Kramsch, Claire. (2013). Language and Culture. Oxford University Press.
4. Pennycook, Alastair. (2007). Global Englishes and Transcultural Flows. Routledge.
5. Spolsky, Bernard. (2004). Language Policy. Cambridge University Press.

FLORISTIC DIVERSITY OF DANDOBA HILLS, DIST – SANGLI (MS)

Mr. Saideep Mahadeo Sabale (M. Sc.)

P.V.P. Mahavidyalaya, Kavathe Mahankal, 416405.

ABSTRACT
The present paper focused on the floristic diversity of Dandoba Hills from Sangli district
of Maharashtra State. The present area selected for study because it has been given little
attention of its vegetation. The whole work conducted during the year of 2022-2023. The
vegetation was arid and dry deciduous type. The work presented 264 species belong to 78
families. Among these families Fabaceae, Caesalpiniaceae and Poaceae are the most dominant
family. Most plant species are endemic and some are introduced. The data was original and first
time explored.

KEY WORDS –Floristic, Diversity, Dandoba,

INTRODUCTION
Floristic study plays an important role in the distribution & economic development
within a particular area. Plant communities play a vital role in sustainable management by
maintaining the environment. Floristic study and diversity assessments are necessary to
understand the present diversity status and conserve the biodiversity. It is necessary for
fundamental research like species diversity or species distribution.
In recent years the floristic studies acquire great importance because there is a need of
assess the plant wealth of different countries in the world. Therefore, many floristic studies
have been conducted by researchers in India and all over the world. The present study area
Dandoba Hills from Sangli district is selected for study because it has been given little attention
of its vegetation. The Dandoba Hills belong to arid region of Western Maharashtra. In this area
the arid to semiarid and dry deciduous vegetation are present. The vegetation area is hilly with
slope and plateaus. The present data in this work are original and first hand.

MATERIAL AND METHOD

Study Area – Dandoba Hills is located on the boundaries of Tehsil Miraj and Tehsil
Kavathe Mahankal, having moderate rainfall of average 450mm. The area belongs to arid region
and climate is hot. Maximum temperature reaches upto 40 0C to 420C in summer, while
minimum goes down upto 200C. Dandoba Hills spread over about 1150 hectares in the limits of
five-gram panchayat.
Analysis – The detailed survey that involved multiple visits to different sites of area
which are selected for study during January 2022 to December 2023. The data were collected
through interviews and discussions among the local peoples are made to observe and collect the
plant species. On visit we captured the photographs of plant in flowering and fruiting condition
on digital camera. The identification of genus and species is a most important part of the all over
work. The identification was done by using standard floras i.e. Flora of The Presidency of

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 95 | P a g e
Bombay (T. Cook, 1903) and Flora of Maharashtra State (Singh & Karthikyan, 2000) published
by Botanical Survey of India (BSI).

RESULT AND DISCUSSION

The investigation was carried out to explore the floristic diversity in Dandoba Hills. In
this study there are some important herbs, shrub and trees are observed. In the present study a
total 264 species belonging to 213 genera and 78 families were identified from selected area.
Out of 264 plants the genus like Cassia and Acacia are dominant. Of these dicotyledons
represented by 226 species and 180 genera under 67 families whereas monocotyledons
represent 38 species and 33 genera under 11 families.
Here it is clearly seen that dicotyledons are dominant over monocotyledons. Here above
85.60 % species are dicotyledons and remaining 14.40 % species are monocotyledons. In
dicotyledons, Fabaceae family was dominated which represents 21 species in 17 genera. In
monocotyledons the Poaceae family was dominated which represents 21 species in 17 genera.
In this work during observation, we have seen some rare species in this area like Sida acuta
Wattakaka volubilis, Hemidesmus indicus, Vallisneria spiralis etc.

CONCLUSION
The present work revealed that 264 species belonging to 78 families in which most of
the species are endemic and some species are introduced and some are RET listed. In this work
we have seen that the vegetation was affected by local activities like cutting, grazing and other
human activities. There is need of conserve the plant species to preventing loss of ecological
balance in this area. There is urgent need for whole area under conservation and protection by
Government as well as to aware peoples about the floristic diversity. It is hoped that the present
work will be helpful to future generation for collection, identification and floristic study. The
work will also contribute to make the Flora of Sangli District.

Table – Floristic Diversity of Dandoba Hills

Sr. Botanical Name Vernacular Name Family
No.

1 Clematis heynei L. Ranjai Ranunculaceae

2 Annona reticulate L. Ramphal Annonaceae

3 Annona squamosal L. Sitaphal Annonaceae

4 Artabotrys hexapetalus Bhandari Hirava Chapha Annonaceae

5 Polyalthia longifolia Sonn. Khota Ashok Annonacea

6 Coccculus hirsutus(L.) Diels Jaljamni Menispermaceae

7 Tinospora cordifolia (Thunb.) Miers Gulvel Menispermaceae

8 Argemone Mexicana L. Pivala Dhotara Papaveraceae

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 96 | P a g e
 9 Cleome felina L. Gulabi Tilwan Cleomaceae

10 Cleome gynandra L. Pandhari Tilwan Cleomaceae

11 Cleome simplicifolia Camb Gavati Tilwan Cleomaceae

12 Cleome viscosa L. Pivali Tilwan Cleomaceae

13 Cadaba fruticosa L. Kalitaka Capparaceae

14 Capparis decidua Foressk. Nepati Capparaceae

15 Capparis divaricate Lam. Pachunda Capparaceae

16 Capparis grandis L. Pachara Capparaceae

17 Capparis sepiaria L. Kanthara Capparaceae

18 Capparis zeylanica L. Wagati Capparaceae

19 Polygala arvensis Wild Mekhali Polygalaceae

20 Polycarpaea corymbosa Lam. Koyap Caryophyllaceae

21 Portulaca olercea L. Ghol Portulacaceae

22 Portulaca quadrifida L. Ranghol Portulacaceae

23 Bergia ammannioides Roxb. Elatinaceae

24 Abutilon indicum (L.) Sweet Mudra Malvaceae

25 Abutilon pannosum Schlecht. Karindi Malvaceae

26 Hibiscus lobatus O. Kuntze Malvaceae

27 Malachra capitata L. Ran Ambadi Malvaceae

28 Marva parviflora L. Gobi-sag Malvaceae

29 Malvastrum coromandelianum L. Malvaceae

30 Sida acuta Burm. Chinkana Malvaceae

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 97 | P a g e
 31 Sida cordifolia L. Bala Malvaceae

32 Sida rhombifolia L. Atibala Malvaceae

33 Sida spinosa L. Malvaceae

34 Thespesia populnea (L.) Sol. Gulbhendi Malvaceae

35 Urena lobata L. Malvaceae

36 Bombax cieba L. Malvaceae

37 Corchorus olitorius L. Banpat Tiliaceae

38 Grewia asiatica L. Phalsa Tiliaceae

39 Grewia hirsute Vahl. Kirmid Tiliaceae

40 Triumfetta rhomboidea Jacq. Thinjira Tiliaceae

41 Linum mysorense Benth. Undri Linaceae

42 Tribulus terrestris L. Gokharu Zygophyllaceae

43 Biophytum sensitivum DC. Lajari Oxalidaceae

44 Oxalis corniculata L. Ambushi Oxilidaceae

45 Impatiens balsamina L. Terda Balsaminaceae

46 Aegle marmelos (L.) Corr Bael Rutaceae

47 Limonia acidissima L. Kavath Rutaceae

48 Murraya koenigii Spreng. Kadhi Patta Rutaceae

49 Ailanthus excels Roxb. Maharukh Simaroubaceae

50 Balanites aegyptica L. Hinganbet Balanitaceae

51 Baswellia serrate Roxb. Salphali Burseraceae

52 Azadirachta indica Juss Neem Meliaceae

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 98 | P a g e
 53 Melia azadarach L. Limbara Meliaceae

54 Maytenus senegalensis Excell. Celastraceae

55 Ziziphus jujuba (L.) Lam. Bor Rhamnaceae

56 Ziziphus nummilaria Wight & Arn Gangra Rhamnaceae

57 Ziziphus xylopyrus Wight & Arn Ghatbor Rhamnaceae

58 Cardiospermum halicacabum L. Kapalphodi Sapindaceae

59 Dadonaea angustifolia L. Bandukicha pala Sapindaceae

60 Buchanania cochinchinesis Almeida Charoli Anacardiaceae

61 Mangifera indica L. Amba Anacardiaceae

62 Rhus sinuata Thumb. Amani Anacardiaceae

63 Semicarpus anacardium L. Bibba Anacardiaceae

64 Moringa oleifera Lam. Shevaga Moringaceae

65 Abrus precatorius L. Gunj Fabaceae

66 Aeschynomene indica L. Fabaceae

67 Alysicarpus bupleurifolius L. Fabaceae

68 Alysicarpus gamblei Schindi Fabaceae

69 Alysicarpus longifolius Wight & Arn Shevara Fabaceae

70 Butea monosperma Taub. Palas Fabaceae

71 Clitoria ternatea L. Gokarn Fabaceae

72 Crotolaria juncea L. Tag Fabaceae

73 Crotolaria nana Burm. Khulkhula Fabaceae

74 Heylandia latebrosa DC. Godhadi Fabaceae

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 99 | P a g e
 75 Cyllen corylifolium L. Bavachi Fabaceae

76 Dalbergia sissoo Roxb. Shisav Fabaceae

77 Erytrina suberosa Roxb. Ran Pangara Fabaceae

78 Gliricidia sepium Jacq. Undirmari Fabaceae

79 Indigofera cordifolia Roth Bechka Fabaceae

80 Indigofera linifolia Retz. Pandharphali Fabaceae

81 Pongamia pinnata (L.) Pierre Karanji Fabaceae

82 Tephrosia purpurea (L.) Pers Unhali Fabaceae

83 Vigna trilobata Verd. Moogi Fabaceae

84 Bauhinia recemosa Lam. Aapta Caesalpiniaceae

85 Caesalpinia bonduc Roxb. Gajaga Caesalpiniaceae

86 Caesalpinia decapetala (Roth) Alst. Chilar Caesalpiniaceae

87 Caesalpinia pulcherrima (L.) Sw. Sankasur Caesalpiniaceae

88 Cassia auriculata L. Tarwad Caesalpiniaceae

89 Cassia fistula L. Bahava Caesalpiniaceae

90 Cassia occidentalis L. Rantakala Caesalpiniaceae

91 Cassia siamea Lam. Kashid Caesalpiniaceae

92 Cassia sophera L. Takala Caesalpiniaceae

93 Delonix regia (Hook.) Raf. Gulmohar Caesalpiniaceae

94 Parkinsonia culeate L. Vilayti Babhul Caesalpiniaceae

95 Tamarindus indica L. Chinch Caesalpiniaceaes

96 Acacia catechu Willd Khair Mimosaceae

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 100 | P a g e

 97 Acacia concinna DC. Shikekai Mimosaceae

98 Acacia fornesiana Willd. Dev Babhul Mimosaceae

99 Acacia leucophloea (Roxb.) Willd. Hivar Mimosaceae

100 Acacia polyacantha Willd Sonkhair Mimosaceae

101 Acacia torta (Roxb.) Crab. Babhali Chilar Mimosaceae

102 Albizia lebbeck Willd Shirish Mimosaceae

103 Dichrostachys cinerea Wight & Arn Durangi Mimosaceae

104 Leucaena latisiliqua (L.) Gills. Subabhul Mimosaceae

105 Mimosa pudica L. Lajalu Mimosaceae

106 Samanea saman (Jacq.) Merr. Parjanyavriksha Mimosaceae

107 Terminalia tomentosa Roth. Ain Cmbretaceae

108 Anogeissus latifolia Guill. Dhavada Cmbretaceae

109 Syzygium cumini (L.) Skeels Jambhul Myrtaceae

110 Ammania baccifera L. Dadmari Lythraceae

111 Woodfordia fruticosa(L.) Kurz. Dhayati Lythraceae

112 Lawsonia inermis L. Mehandi Lythraceae

113 Ludwigia octovalvis (Jacq.) Raven Panlavang Onagraceae

114 Coccinea grandis L. Tondali Cucurbitaceae

115 Citrullus colocynthis L. Kadu Indrayan Cucurbitaceae

116 Diplocyclos palmatus (L.) Jeffery Shivlingi Cucurbitaceae

117 Cereus peruvianus Mill. Tindhari Nivdung Cactaceae

118 Opuntia elatior Mill. Nivdung Cactaceae

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 101 | P a g e

119 Trianthema portulacastrum L. Pandhari Vasu Aizoaceae

120 Trianthema triquetra Willd. Aizoaceae

121 Molluga pentaphylla L. Zarsi Molluginaceae

122 Centella asiatica L. Brahmi Apiaceae

123 Canthium coromandelicum Alst. Kara Rubiaceae

124 Randia dumetorum (Retz.) Lam. Gelphal Rubiaceae

125 Morinda citrifolia L. Bartondi Rubiaceae

126 Spermacoce articularis L. F. Madanghanti Rubiaceae

127 Ageratum conyzoides L. Sahdevi Asteraceae

128 Bidens biternata Merr & Scherif Chikta Asteraceae

129 Echinops echinatus Roxb. Kate chendu Asteraceae

130 Eclipta prostrate L. Maka Asteraceae

131 Emilia sonchifolia (L.) DC. Sadamandei Asteraceae

132 Glossocardia boswellia DC. Khadakshepu Asteraceae

133 Grangea maderaspatana Poir. Machipatra Asteraceae

134 Lagascea mollis Cav. Tharvad Asteraceae

135 Launaea procumbens Cass. Pathar Asteraceae

136 Parthenium hysterophorusL. Gajar gavat Asteraceae

137 Senecio bombayensis Balokr Sonaki Asteraceae

138 Sonchus asper (L.) Hill Mhatari Asteraceae

139 Tridax procumbens L. Dagadipala Asteraceae

140 Vernonia cinerea (L.) Less. Sahaderi Asteraceae

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 102 | P a g e

141 Plumbago zeylanica L. Chitrak Plumbaginaceae

142 Anagallis arvensis L. Jokmari Primulaceae

143 Diospyros melanoxylon Roxb. Tembhurni Ebenaceae

144 Jasminum auriculatum Vahl. Jai Oleaceae

145 Carrisa carandas L. Karvand Apocynaceae

146 Cascabella thevetia Lippold. Pivali Kanher Apocynaceae

147 Catharanthus pusillis (Murr.) G. Don Tiloni Apocynaceae

148 Nerium indicum Mill. Kanher Apocynaceae

149 Vallaris solanacea (Roth.) O. Ktze Apocynaceae

150 Wrightia tinctoria R. Br. Kalakuda Apocynaceae

151 Asclepias curassavica L. Haladi kunku Asclepiadaceae

152 Calotropis gigangtea (L.) Dryand Aak Asclepiadaceae

153 Calotropis procera W. T. Aiton Rui Asclepiadaceae

154 Pergularia daemia (Forssk) Chiov. Utarni Asclepiadaceae

155 Sarcostemma viminale (L.) Br. Somvel Asclepiadaceae

156 Wattakaka volubilis (L.F.) Stapt. Hirnadodi Asclepiadaceae

157 Cryptolepis buchanani R. Br. Kavali Asclepiadaceae

158 Cryptostegia grandiflora R. Br. Vakundi Asclepiadaceae

159 Hemidesmus indicus (L.) Sch. Anantmul Asclepiadaceae

160 Canscora diffusa (Vabl.) R. Br. Kilwar Gentianaceae

161 Coldenia procumbens L. Tripkshi Boraginaceae

162 Cordia dichotoma Forest. Bhokar Boraginaceae

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 103 | P a g e

163 Argyreia cuneata (Willd) Ker-Gawl. Mahalungi Convolvulaceae

164 Argyreia nervosa (Burm.f.) Bojer Samudrashok Convolvulaceae

165 Convolvulus arvensis L. Chandvel Convolvulaceae

166 Evolvulus alsinoides(Linn.) Linn. Vishnukant Convolvulaceae

167 Ipomoea carnea Jacq. Besharam Convolvulaceae

168 Merremia gangetica (L.) Cuford. Undirkani Convolvulaceae

169 Cuscuta reflexa Roxb. Amarvel Convolvulaceae

170 Datura innoxia Mill. Dhotara Solanaceae

171 Datura metal L. Kala dhotara Solanaceae

172 Physalis minima L. Papati Solanaceae

173 Withania somnifera (L.) Dunal. Ashwagandha Solanaceae

174 Bacopa monnieri (L.) Penn. Neer-Brahmi Plantaginacea

175 Parasopubia delphinifolia (L.) H. Dudhali Orobanchaceae

176 Orobanchae cernua Loefl. Orobanchaceae

177 Dolichandrone falcata Seem. Medshingi Bignoniaceae

178 Jacaranda acutifolia Humb. & Bonpl. Nilmohar Bignoniaceae

179 Millingtonia hortensis L. f. Akashneem Bignoniaceae

180 Tecoma stans (L.) H. B & K. Phutani Bignoniaceae

181 Sesamum laciniatum Klein ex Willd. Peerel Pedaliaceae

182 Sesamum mulayanum Nair Raan Teel Pedaliaceae

183 Martynia annua L. Winchavi Martyniaceae

184 Andrographis paniculata (Burm.f.) Nees Kadechirayat Acanthaceae

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 104 | P a g e

185 Hygrophila auriculata Schumach. Koshinda Acanthaceae

186 Justicia adhatoda L. Adulsa Acanthaceae

187 Lepidagathis cristataWilld Bhuigend Acanthaceae

188 Volkameria inermis L. Koynel Verbenaceae

189 Clerodendrum phlomidis L.f. Bhauri Verbenaceae

190 Clerodendrum serratum (L.) Moon bharangi Verbenaceae

191 Gmelina arborea Roxb. Shivan Verbenaceae

192 Lantana camara L. Ghaneri Verbenaceae

193 Phyla nodiflora (L.) Greene Mundi Verbenaceae

194 Tectona grandis L.f. Saag Verbenaceae

195 Vitex negundo L. Nirgudi Verbenaceae

196 Hyptis suaveolens (L.) Poit. Darptulas Lamiaceae

197 Lavandula bipinnata (Roth.) O.Ktze Ghodegui Lamiaceae

198 Leucas aspera (Willd) Link. Shankroba Lamiaceae

199 Ocimum americanum L. Rantulasi Lamiaceae

200 Ocimum basilicum L. Sabja Lamiaceae

201 Ocimum tenuiflorum L. Tulasi Lamiaceae

202 Boerhavia erecta L. Punarnava Nyctaginaceae

203 Achyranthus aspera L. Aghada Amaranthaceae

204 Alternanthera sessiles (L.) R. Br. Reshim kata Amaranthaceae

205 Alternanthera pungens Kunth Khaki kata Amaranthaceae

206 Amaranthus roxburghianus Nevski Tandulja Amaranthaceae

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 105 | P a g e

207 Amaranthus spinosus L. Katemath Amaranthaceae

208 Celosia argentea L. Kurdu Amaranthaceae

209 Digera muricata (L.) Mart. Kunjir Amaranthaceae

210 Persicaria glabra (Willd) Gomez. Sheral Polygonaceae

211 Aristolochia bracteolata Lam. Kidmar Aristolochiaceae

212 Santalum album L. Chandan Santalaceae

213 Emblica officinalis Gaerth. Awala Euphorbiaceae

214 Euphorbia geniculata Orteg. Mothi dudhani Euphorbiaceae

215 Euphorbia hirta L. Dudhani Euphorbiaceae

216 Euphorbia tirucalli L. Sher Euphorbiaceae

217 Jatropha curcas L. Mogali Erand Euphorbiaceae

218 Phyllanthus niruri L. Bhuiawala Euphorbiaceae

219 Phyllanthus reticulatus Poir. Kanguni Euphorbiaceae

220 Flueggea leucopyrus L. Pandharphali Euphorbiaceae

221 Tragia plukenetii L. Churchri Euphorbiaceae

222 Ficus benghalensis L. Vad Moraceae

223 Ficus recemosa L. Umber Moraceae

224 Ficus religiosa L. Pimpal Moraceae

225 Morus alba L. Tuti Moraceae

226 Casuarina equisetifolia L. Suru Casuarinaceae

227 Ottelia alismoides (L.) Pers. Olek Hydrocharitaceae

228 Vallisneria spiralis L. Seval Hydrocharitaceae

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 106 | P a g e

229 Hydrilla verticillata (L.f.) Royle Shakharisheval Hydrocharitaceae

230 Canna indica L. Kardal Cannaceae

231 Curculigo orchioides Gaerth. Kalimusali Hypoxidaceae

232 Agave americana L. Kektad Agavaceae

233 Aloe vera (L.) Burm.f. Korphad Liliaceae

234 Asparagus racemosus Willd. Shatavari Liliaceae

235 Drimia polyantha Ans. & Ragh. Rankanda Liliaceae

236 Iphigenia indica (L.) A. Gray. Bhuichakra Liliaceae

237 Eichhornia crassipes (Mart.) Solms Pontederiaceae

238 Commelina benghalensis L. Kena Commelinaceae

239 Commelina forskaolii Vahl. Kanpet Commelinaceae

240 Phoenix sylvestris (L.) Roxb. Shindi Arecaceae

241 Typha angustifolia L. Paankanis Typhaceae

242 Cyperus castaneus Willd. Cyperaceae

243 Cyperus rotundus L. Nagarmotha Cyperaceae

244 Andropogon pumilus Roxb. Tambadgota Poaceae

245 Apluda mutica L. Tambat Poaceae

246 Aristida adscensionis L. Kusaligavat Poaceae

247 Bambusa vulgaris Schrad. Bamboo Poaceae

248 Brachiaria eruciformis (J.E. Sm) Griseb Shimpi Poaceae

249 Brachiaria reptans (L.) Gard Chimanchara Poaceae

250 Chloris barbata Sw. Gondvel Poaceae

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 107 | P a g e

251 Chrysopogon fulvus (Spreng) Chiov Vaghnakhi Poaceae

252 Cynodon dactylon (L.) Pers. Durva Poaceae

253 Dichanthium annulatum (Forssk) Stapf Janjva Poaceae

254 Dichanthium pertusum (L.) W. D. Clayton Palva Poaceae

255 Dinebra retroflexa (Vabl.) Panz. Meshkathi Poaceae

256 Heteropogon contortus (L.) P. Beauv. Kusal Poaceae

257 Lophopogon tridentatus (Roxb.) Hack. Poaceae

258 Phragmites vallatoria Veldk. Boru Poaceae

259 Rhynchelytrum repens (Willd.) Hubb. Poaceae

260 Setaria intermedia (Roth.) R. & S. Chikta Poaceae

261 Setaria pumila (Poir.) R. & S. Poaceae

262 Setaria verticillata (L.) P. Beauv. Poaceae

263 Themeda quadrivalvis (L.) O. Ktze. Bhati Poaceae

264 Tripogon jacquemontii Stapf Poaceae

REFERENCES
1) Aher S. K. (2015); Biodiversity of weed species in crop fields of Parner Tahsil from
Ahmednagar district (MS), India. Indian Journal of Plant Sciences. Vol. 4 (4), pp. 112-120.
2) Auti B. K., Pingale S. D. and Aher R. K. (2004); Survey of weeds from Shrirampur Tahsil,
Ahmednagar District (MS). Advances in Plant Sciences, Vol. 17(2), 395-401.
3) Baban T. Jadhav and Saideep M. Sabale (2021); Medicinal plants of Tehsil Kavathe
Mahankal, Dist – Sangli (MS). Research Journey, Special Issue - 265, 73-79.
4) Bhagat R. B., Shimpale V. B. and Deshmukh R. B. (2008); Flora of Baramati, Bhagat R. B.
Publication, Baramati, Pune.
5) Billore K. V. and Hemadri K. (1969); Observations on the flora of Harishchandragarh,
Sahyadri range, Maharashtra State. Bulletin of Botanical Survey of India. Vol. 11 (3-4), 335-
346.
6) Cooke T. (1901-1908); The Flora of the Presidency Bombay, 2 vols: Repr. Edition, 1958, B. S.
I. Calcutta.
7) Devi L. S. and Yadava P. S.(2006); Floristic diversity assessment and vegetation analysis of
tropical semievergreen forest of Manipur, North East India, International Society of Tropical
Ecology, Vol. 47(1), 89-98.

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 108 | P a g e

8) Ganorkar Ravindra P. and Kshirsagar Ayodhya D. (2013); Floristic study of Shirur Region
Pune, Maharashtra, India. International Research Journal of Biological Sciences. Vol. 2(5),
78-82.
9) Hahi Mujawar (2012); Ethnobotany of Mallikarjun hills of Walwa from Sangli District
(Maharashtra). Life Sciences Leaflets. Vol. 10, 73-83.
10) Jain S. K. and R. R. Rao (1967); A handbook of field and herbarium methods, Today and
Tomorrow Printers and Publishers, New Delhi.
11) Krishnamurthy Y. L., Prakasha H. M., Nanda A., Krishnappa M. and Suresh H. S. (2010);
Vegetation structure and floristic composition of a tropical dry deciduous forest in Bhadra
Wildlife Sanctuary, Karnataka, India. Tropical Ecology, Vol. 51(2), 235-246.
12) Naik V. N. (1998); Flora of Marathwada. Vol. 1, Amrut Prakashan, Aurangabad, India.
13) Nair N. C. and Daniel P., (1986); The floristic diversity of the Western Ghats and its
conservation, a review, Proc. Indian Acad. Sci. (Animal Sc./Pl. Sci.) Suppl., 127-163.
14) Patil D. A. and Tayade S. K. (2012); Floristic studies in Khandesh region (Maharashtra:
India). Life Sciences Leaflets, Vol. 10, 30-38.
15) S. K. Aher (2015); Floristic diversity assessment of Parner Tahsil, Maharashtra (India).
Indian Journal of Applied& Pure Biology. Vol. 30(2), 123-130.
16) Sagar R., Raghubanshi A. S. and Singh J. S. (2003); Tree species composition, dispersion and
diversity along a disturbance gradient in a dry tropical forest region of India. Forest Ecology
and Management. Vol. 186, 61-71
17) Singh N. P., P. Lakshminarasimhan, S. Kartikeyan and P. V. Prasanna (2001); Flora of
Maharashtra State (Dicotyledons Vol. 2), Botanical Survey of India, Calcutta, India.
18) Vediya S. D. and Kharadi H. S. (2011); Floristic diversity of Isari zone, Meghraj range forest
District Sabarkantha, Gujrat, India. International Journal of Pharmacology & Life Science.
Vol. 2(9), 1033- 1034.
19) Waman M. B., Wagh B. D. and Dandwate S. C. (2013); Floristic composition of Marutiban
Sacred Grove of Kalsubai-Harishchandragarh Wildlife Sanctuary, Flora and Fauna, Vol.
19(1), 63-65.
20) Yadav S. R. and Sardesai M. M. (2002); Flora of Kolhapur District. Shivaji University,
Kolhapur.

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 109 | P a g e

 IMPACT OF ORGANIC AND INORGANIC FERTILIZERS ON GRAPE PRODUCTION AND
FARMER SATISFACTION IN KAVATHE MAHANKAL TEHSIL

1G.
D. Satpute, 2R. Devarshi
1Assistant Professor 2. Student
Assistant Professor, Department of Statistics, Padmabhushan Vasantraodada Patil
Mahavidyalaya, Kavathe Mahankal, Dist. Sangli Maharashtra, India.
[email protected] 9975736168

ABSTRACT:
This study investigates the effects of organic and inorganic fertilizers on grape
production and farmer pleasure in Kavathe Mahankal Tehsil. Utilizing a mixed-strategies
approach, statistics from grape farmers had been analyzed to compare fertilizer utilization,
grape manufacturing, and farmer pleasure ranges. Results highlight the importance of each
styles of fertilizers in grape manufacturing, emphasizing the need of balanced fertilizer for most
efficient yields(1). The study reveals the impartial have an effect on of soil type and grape
variety on manufacturing effects, (2) with found disparities among 2022 and 2023 harvests.
Additionally, it identifies the profitability of the Supersonaka grape variety and establishes a
high quality correlation among fertilizer costs and grape income. However, notwithstanding
those advantageous findings, farmer dissatisfaction with grape quotes underscores existing
marketplace challenges. Furthermore, the studies explores broader topics together with the
environmental effect of fertilizer use, adoption rates of sustainable practices, and socio-financial
implications for rural livelihoods. By A considering these interconnected elements, the have a
look at pursuits to provide complete insights into grape manufacturing complexities in the
vicinity. Ultimately, the findings intention to tell evidence-primarily based guidelines and
interventions to sell sustainable agricultural improvement and enhance the properly-being of
grape farmers in Kavathe Mahankal Tehsil.

KEYWORDS: Grape production, Fertilizer impact, farmer satisfaction, Supersonaka grape,

market improvements, sustainable agriculture.

INTRODUCTION:
This observe delves into the tricky dynamics of grape production and farmer pride in
Kavathe Mahankal Tehsil with the aid of investigating the effects of natural and inorganic
fertilizers. Through a complete exam of fertilizer usage patterns, soil type and grape range
independence, production variances between 2021 and 2022, farmer satisfaction stages with
grape costs, identification of excessive-profits grape sorts primarily based on fertilizer utility,
and correlation among fertilizer charges and grape earnings, this research objectives to provide
precious insights into optimizing agricultural practices and improving farmer livelihoods. By
elucidating those multifaceted relationships, we will make a contribution to the improvement of
sustainable agricultural techniques tailored to the particular situations of the vicinity, in the end
fostering monetary prosperity and environmental resilience in grape farming communities. The
utilization of organic and inorganic fertilizers represents a critical aspect of grape cultivation,
impacting soil fertility and crop productivity. By discerning the effects of these fertilizers on
grape production, we can determine the most effective strategies for maximizing yields while
minimizing environmental degradation. Furthermore, comparing fertilizer usage among
farmers allows us to identify prevailing agricultural practices and potential areas for
improvement. Understanding the relationship between soil type and grape variety
independence is essential for optimizing cultivation practices and ensuring crop resilience to
varying environmental conditions. Analyzing production variances between consecutive years
provides insights into the influence of external factors such as climate variability and

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 110 | P a g e

management practices on grape yields, enabling farmers to make informed decisions to mitigate
risks and enhance productivity. Additionally, assessing farmer satisfaction levels with grape
rates offers valuable feedback on market dynamics and the economic viability of grape farming,
informing policy interventions aimed at promoting fair market practices and improving farmer
livelihoods. Identifying high-income grape varieties based on fertilizer application enables
targeted recommendations to farmers, enhancing profitability and sustainability in grape
cultivation. Finally, studying the correlation between fertilizer expenses and grape income
provides insights into the economic implications of fertilizer investment, guiding farmers in
optimizing resource allocation for maximum returns. Overall, this research aims to contribute to
the advancement of grape farming practices and farmer well-being in Kavathe Mahankal Tehsil,
ultimately fostering sustainable agricultural development in the region.

METHODOLOGY AND DATA COLLECTION

The methodology adopted in this study involved a multifaceted approach to investigate
the impact of organic and inorganic fertilizers on grape production and farmer satisfaction in
Kavathe Mahankal Tehsil. Primary data collection was conducted in agricultural villages within
the Tehsil, with a total sample size of 275 respondents. Graphical representations were
employed to illustrate the distribution of grape varieties and the application of fertilizers,
providing a visual overview of farming practices in the region. Chi-square tests were utilized to
assess the independence between soil type and grape variety, while t-tests were conducted to
analyze production variances between 2022 and 2023. Additionally, a proportion test was
employed to compare the usage of organic and inorganic fertilizers among farmers. This
comprehensive methodology integrated graphical analysis with rigorous statistical tests to
provide insights into optimizing agricultural practices and promoting sustainable grape farming
in the region.

OBJECTIVES
The objectives of this study encompass a comprehensive exploration into various
aspects of grape production and farming practices. Firstly, the investigation aims to delve into
the impacts of organic and inorganic fertilizers on grape yield, seeking to discern any
discernible differences in production outcomes resultant from different fertilization methods.
Secondly, it seeks to conduct a comparative analysis of the utilization of organic versus
inorganic fertilizers among grape farmers, aiming to highlight prevailing trends and preferences
within the industry. Furthermore, the study endeavors to scrutinize the relationship between
soil types and grape varieties in cultivation, elucidating whether certain combinations yield
superior results. Additionally, it endeavors to analyze production disparities between the years
2022 and 2023, shedding light on any fluctuations or trends that may have emerged over time.
Moreover, the research endeavors to gauge the levels of farmer contentment with grape prices,
providing insights into satisfaction levels within the grape farming community. Furthermore, it
aims to pinpoint grape varieties with heightened income potential based on fertilizer
application strategies, aiming to offer practical guidance for optimizing profitability. Lastly, the
study seeks to explore the correlation between fertilizer expenditures and income derived from
grape farming, thereby elucidating the financial dynamics underlying grape production
practices. Through these multifaceted objectives, the study aims to contribute valuable insights
to the field of grape farming and cultivation practices.

RESULT
The results of this study are presented as follows:
Effect of Organic and Inorganic Fertilizers on Grape Production: analysis the independence
between soil type and variety of grapes for that we use chi-square test the calculate value is
22.85 and table value is 21.03, hence we reject null hypothesis and conclude that the soil type
and variety of grapes are dependent to each other. and Analysis revealed that both organic and
ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 111 | P a g e
inorganic fertilizers significantly influenced grape production. However, the extent of their
impact varied depending on factors such as soil type, grape variety, and application practices.
Comparison of Organic and Inorganic Fertilizer Usage: The study found notable differences
in the usage patterns of organic and inorganic fertilizers among grape farmers.(1) While some
farmers predominantly relied on organic fertilizers, others favored inorganic options, indicating
diverse approaches to soil management in grape cultivation. And both of the fertilizers play
important role in production of grapes as most of the farmers use both organic and inorganic
fertilizer.
Independence between Soil Type and Grape Variety: Statistical analysis using Chi-square
tests demonstrated a significant association between soil type and grape variety, highlighting
the interdependence of these factors in grape cultivation practices (2). This suggests that soil
characteristics play a crucial role in determining the suitability of grape varieties for optimal
growth and yield.
Production Variances between 2022 and 2023: Examination of production data revealed
noticeable variances between the two years, we found that production in 2022 is greater than
2023. Due to some factors, the major factor is climate change. attributable to factors such as
climatic fluctuations, pest outbreaks, and agronomic practices. These findings underscore the
importance of resilience and adaptive strategies in mitigating production risks in grape farming.
Farmer Satisfaction Levels with Grape Rates: Most of the farmers are not satisfied with the
rates of grapes and only 30% farmers are satisfied. Survey results indicated varying levels of
farmer satisfaction with grape rates, with a significant proportion expressing dissatisfaction.
Factors contributing to dissatisfaction include market fluctuations, price volatility, and
inadequate returns on investment.
Identification of High-Income Grape Varieties: in this study we found that the supersonaka
variety is gives more income than other varieties of grapes. Analysis of income data in relation
to fertilizer application practices identified specific grape varieties associated with higher
income potential. This highlights the economic significance of variety selection and fertilizer
management in maximizing profitability in grape farming.
Correlation between Fertilizer Expenses and Grape Income: From this Statistical analysis
revealed a positive correlation between expenses incurred on fertilizers and income generated
from grape farming. This suggests that strategic investment in fertilizers can contribute to
increased grape yields and profitability, underscoring the importance of efficient resource
allocation in agricultural management.
Overall, these results provide valuable insights into the complex dynamics of grape
production, fertilizer usage, and farmer satisfaction in Kavathe Mahankal Tehsil. By elucidating
these relationships, this research contributes to a deeper understanding of the factors
influencing grape farming outcomes and informs evidence-based strategies for enhancing
agricultural productivity and farmer livelihoods in the region.

DISCUSSION:
The results of this study shed light on several key aspects of grape farming in the region.
Firstly, the widespread use of both organic and inorganic fertilizers underscores the importance
of soil fertility management in grape cultivation. However, further research is needed to
determine optimal fertilizer application rates and timing to maximize grape yields while
minimizing environmental impacts. Additionally, the independence between soil type and grape
variety challenges conventional wisdom and suggests that farmers have flexibility in grape
variety selection regardless of soil characteristics. The decline in grape production in 2022
compared to 2023 highlights the vulnerability of grape farming to external factors such as
weather variability and pest pressures. To mitigate production risks, farmers may need to adopt
climate-resilient farming practices and diversify their risk management strategies. Furthermore,
the identification of Supersonaka as the grape variety associated with higher income generation
underscores the importance of variety selection in maximizing profitability for farmers.
ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 112 | P a g e
However, market demand and consumer preferences should also be considered in variety
selection decisions. The positive correlation between fertilizer expenses and grape income
suggests that strategic investment in fertilizers can contribute to higher grape yields and
income for farmers. Sustainable fertilizer management practices, such as precision agriculture
and nutrient management planning, could help optimize fertilizer use efficiency and enhance
economic returns while minimizing environmental risks. Additionally, addressing issues related
to market access, price volatility, and market transparency is crucial for improving farmer
satisfaction and promoting equity in the grape industry.

CONCLUSION:
In this research provides valuable insights into the complexities of grape production,
fertilizer management, farmer satisfaction, and economic outcomes in Kavathe Mahankal Tehsil.
By integrating these findings with existing knowledge and literature, this study contributes to a
deeper understanding of the challenges and opportunities facing grape farmers in the region.
Moving forward, policymakers, extension agents, and agricultural stakeholders should
collaborate to develop evidence-based strategies aimed at enhancing agricultural sustainability,
improving market access, and promoting farmer livelihoods in the region. Further research is
warranted to explore the long-term impacts of climate change, technological innovations, and
policy interventions on grape farming practices and outcomes in Kavathe Mahankal Tehsil.

REFERENCES
1. Armachius james, andekelile mwamahonje a review on the influence of fertilizers
application on grape yield and quality in the tropics
2. Yogesh mahajan, bharat patil, a geographical analysis of organic fertilizers application in
shirpur tehsil of Maharashtra india.

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 113 | P a g e

 INDIAN WAR LITERATURE
HORIZON OF RESEARCH OPPORTUNITIES UNDEREXPLORED

Shrikant B. Walwadkar

ABSTRACT:
Indian mythology and history are full of wars fought at various periods to win over evil.
All the wars are described as righteous wars. This diverse and tumultuous history of conflicts in
India provides a rich tapestry for literary exploration. However, the realm of war literature in
the country remains underexplored and lacks the depth and width of participation compared to
the participation seen in other literary domains, and genres.
This paper highlights the critical need for increased participation in academic and
literary engagement with Indian war literature to foster a deeper understanding of the socio-
political, cultural, and human dimensions of warfare in the Indian context. Through a
comprehensive review of existing literature and an analysis of the gaps in scholarship and
literary representation, this paper identifies the opportunities and challenges for enthusiasts
and willing participants in this field and proposes strategies to overcome these challenges. It
argues for the importance of integrating diverse narratives, including those of soldiers, their
relatives (Read parents, close relations, spouses, and children) civilians, and the diaspora, to
construct a more inclusive and nuanced understanding of war and its impact. Since the study of
war involves various disciplines of study, the paper also discusses the potential of
interdisciplinary approaches, combining history, literary criticism, and cultural studies, to
enrich the understanding and appreciation of war literature in India. By appealing and
advocating for increased participation and research in this genre, the study aims to contribute
to the broader discourse on war and peace, memory and identity, and the power of literature to
heal and bridge divides.

KEYWORDS: Indian War Literature, Literary exploration, Socio-Political impact, psychological

factors, Cultural studies, Narrative diversity, Research scope.

1. INTRODUCTION.
The historical and cultural context of warfare in India is characterized by a rich collage
of conflicts spanning thousands of years. It involves diverse cultures, religions, and political
entities. To facilitate an understanding of Indian warfare it is divided into various periods as
below:

1. Ancient Period. Indian Warfare in this period is depicted in epics like Ramayana, and
Mahabharat, where battles were fought between kingdoms often with divine intervention.
These epics not only narrate the wars but also explore the ethical dilemmas and moral
complexities of wari.
2. Classical Period. This period relates to the dynasties and empires such as the Guptas,
Mauryas, and Cholas engaged in warfare to expand their territories and consolidate power.
Military strategies, tactics, and innovations were developed during this time, contributing to
the rich heritage of Indiaii.
3. Medieval Period. This period witnessed invasions and conquests by foreign powers like the
Mughals and later European colonial powers like the British East India Company. These

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 114 | P a g e

 conflicts profoundly impacted Indian society, its culture, and governance, affecting socio-
political changes significantlyiii.
4. Colonial Rule: The arrival of European merchants and mercantile companies during the end
of the medieval period resulted in the colonization of India by European powers,
particularly the British, resulting in major upheavals and resistance movements. The first
known rebellion of 1857 marked a significant turning point in the struggle against colonial
rule and inspired nationalist emotionsiv.
5. Independence Struggle: The 20th century saw India’s struggle for independence from
British colonial rule led by leaders like Gandhi, Nehru, Subhash Chandra Bose, Bhagat Singh,
Rajguru, Tilak, etc. This struggle was fought on two prominent thought processes namely
radicals and moderates. Radicals preferred armed rebellion against British rule Indian
National Army led by Subhash Chandra Bose, and mutiny in combat forces like the Navy and
Air Force are a few examples of struggle by radicals. In contrast, the moderates preferred
non-violent resistance, civil disobedience movements are a few examples of efforts of
moderates to gain freedom. These efforts finally culminated in India’s independence in
1947v .
6. Post Independence Wars. Post-1947, India has been involved in one war with China in 1962
and four wars with Pakistan in 1947, 1965, 1971, and 1999. Operation Pavan about IPKF
Operations in Sri Lanka was a unique operation undertaken by Indian armed forces in a
foreign country Sri Lanka to mediate between the two sides Sri Lankan Tamils and the Sri
Lankan government involved in civil war and bring peace in the country. Additionally, the
country’s armed forces are also involved in internal conflicts such as insurgencies and
communal violence. These wars and internal conflicts have left a lasting impact on Indian
society and continue to shape contemporary geopolitical dynamics. The Indian Armed
Forces have also been involved in the UN’s peacekeeping missions in various disturbed
parts of the world as and when requisitioned vi.

War Literature can be defined as a literary work that explores and depicts the
experiences, effects, and consequences of armed conflict on individuals and societies (nations).
It includes a wide range of genres, including novels, poetry, memoirs, diaries, letters, essays,
fiction, documentaries, biographies, autobiographies, and nonfiction. These are written by those
who have directly experienced war or by observers and commentators.
War literature often serves as a mirror reflecting the values, beliefs, and norms of the
societies from which it emerges. It also underlines different perceptions of different societies
regarding war, honour, heroism, sacrifice, and patriotism. The portrayal of characters, events,
and moral dilemmas, war literature reveals the complexities of societal attitudes towards
violence, power, and authority.
Since going to war is a political decision for a country, War literature is deeply entangled
with political narratives, as it often engages with the causes, justifications, and consequences of
wars and conflicts. The independent literary works quite often challenge official narratives,
question propaganda, and jingoism, and expose realities of war. By offering alternate
perspectives and dissenting voices, war literature contributes to a more nuanced understanding
of the political dimensions of warfare. It questions the holier-than-thou approach of the
governmental narrative.
War literature, at its core, humanizes the war experience by capturing the individual
stories, emotions, and struggles of those directly affected by conflict. War literature through
effective use of its important features like vivid imagery, profound language, and realistic and
intimate portrayal of characters, conveys the psychological, emotional, and existential
dimensions of war. It confronts readers with the harsh realities of violence, loss, trauma, and
resilience, and cultivates empathy and compassion for those who have endured the horrors of
war.
However, it is ironic that despite having a wide scope for research in war literature, in
ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 115 | P a g e
India there is minuscule interest shown by the literary students. Purpose of this paper is to fill
this wide gap and acquaint and encourage the new generation of researchers to explore this
genre fully and contribute efficiently to the wide ocean of literary research.

2. Historical Perspective: To understand the enviously rich tapestry of Indian war literature
across all the previously mentioned periods from ancient epics to contemporary works, Indian
literature has been profoundly influenced by the wars and conflicts that have shaped the
nation’s history. These conflicts have left an indelible mark on Indian society, culture, and
literature. Indian literature depicts war through epic poems, ballads, plays, novels, and short
stories. In addition to chronicling historical events, it also reflects societal values, political
ideologies, and human experiences.
Ancient epics like Ramayana and Mahabharata with their epic battles between gods,
demons, and mortals, laid the foundation for warfare depiction in Indian literature. These epics
narrate not only the warfare but also delve into moral dilemmas, ethical codes, and the
consequences of war.
The medieval period saw the rise of dynasties and empires engaged in territorial
conquests and struggles for power. Literary works of this period like Rajtarangini by Kalhana,
reflect the martial ethos of the time, glorifying the valour of kings and warriors. Medieval period
war literature includes the wars undertaken by the great king Shivaji Maharaj against Mughal
kings to establish swaraj (self-rule).
With colonial rule, there was a change in the pattern of warfare, and weaponry, and
India found itself at loggerheads with different cultures. Colonial rule brought about a new wave
of conflicts and resistance movements, that made inroads in literature. The sepoy mutiny of
1857, the Indian Rebellion, inspired nationalist sentiments and sparked a wave of patriotic
literature advocating independence from British rule.
Post-independence Indian war literature is mainly from the veteran combatants
who participated in those wars and their memoirs. The evolution of war narratives in Indian
literature can be traced from the grandeur and heroism of ancient epics to the gritty realism and
psychological depth of contemporary works. Some writers like Mulk Raj Anand, Khushwant
Singh, and Mahashweta Devi, have explored the human cost of war, the veteran combatant
writers like Brigadier John P. Dalvi in his nonfiction “Himalayan Blunder” or Veteran Lt Gen
Sardeshpande in his “Assignment Jaffna”, or the then Chief of Army Staff Veteran General V P
Mallik in his nonfiction “Kargil: from Surprise to Victory” have addressed various issues of
higher direction of war, Political, Bureaucratic involvement in decision making and
modernisation of armed forces etc in addition to the describing the war. The exploration of
historical wars and conflicts in India and its evolutionary presence, reporting in Indian war
literature offers valuable insights into the nation’s cultural heritage, collective memory, and
literary traditions. Tracing this evolution of war narratives from epics to contemporary works,
scholars can gain a deeper understanding of the enduring significance of Indian war literature in
Indian society.
Throughout its history, warfare in India has been influenced by cultural, religious, and
philosophical beliefs, shaping its literature, art, and collective memory. The legacy of these wars
and conflicts continues to resonate in Indian society, highlighting the enduring significance of
war narratives in Indian culture and literature. A specialty of Indian warfare can be described as
wars in self-defence and in the interest of humanity and can be proudly stated as fair wars.

3. Themes and Motifs: One can observe while studying Indian war literature across various
genres of literature that there are recurring themes and motifs depicted across a diverse range
of genres like heroism, valour, sacrifice, patriotism, trauma and loss, moral and ethical
dilemmas, the morality of war and hope and resilience, etc. Ancient epics like Mahabharata and
Ramayana, describe heroism, valour, the victory of good over evil, and moral and ethical values
for the society. The same is also described through folk songs, ballads, novels, fiction poems, and
ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 116 | P a g e
songs, war is also humanized from memoirs and diaries, letters of the soldiers, and their
families.

4.Representation and Diversity: It is observed that the post-independence major contribution

to Indian war literature is from the veteran combatants who had participated in the
conflict/war during their service period. He tries to bring out the details in a more objective way
to chronicle the war to learn lessons and to avoid the repetition of such mistakes in the future.
This also becomes an outlet for justifying their decisions and actions which from the clarity of
hindsight prove to be wrong. One can find out difference in the expression when the outcome of
war is different. It is necessary to study the maximum resources, if not all, available in a
particular war/conflict to conclude without any bias. It is commonly said that Truth is the first
casualty of war. Individuals, Governments, and media will try to create a particular narrative to
suit their interests however a research student needs to research to come to a concrete
conclusion about it. Various perspectives contribute to a more comprehensive understanding of
war experiences in India.
5. Depiction of War in Other Media and Research Opportunities: In addition to the war
literature, war is effectively depicted in films. Though the films are more of a fictional
presentation, it is an effective and accessible medium to represent Wars. Under the directorial
creativity angle, the Indian War movies have been depicting Indian culture and social norms
effectively. This depiction also offers opportunities to research the Indian war literature in text
and films across different media of communication. One can also use a comparative study of
Indian war literature with international war literature to identify unique characteristics and
commonalities. One can also explore cross-cultural influences and exchanges in the portrayal of
war.
One also can undertake interdisciplinary approaches to study Indian war literature
including historical analysis, literary criticism, cultural studies, psychology, Trauma, medicine,
and sociology. Researchers can also research interdisciplinary perspectives. This will be an
important perspective that can enrich the interpretation.

6. Challenges and Opportunities: The Indian war literature offers an ocean of opportunities
for aspiring research students, but it is not immune from challenges. Challenges faced in
researching and studying Indian War literatureinvolve access to authentic archival materials,
linguistic diversity, and socio-political sensitivities. There will also be challenges in terms of the
availability of the right people to discuss potential research opportunities and avenues for
future exploration in the field. session of potential research opportunities and avenues for
future exploration in the field. The researchers will agree with me these are just a few of the
possibilities of research and the ingenuity of individuals will provide much more opportunities
in this genre to enrich Indian Literature in general and Indian War literature as a genre in
particular.

7. CONCLUSION:
From the above deliberations it can be concluded that the exploration of Indian war
literature across various periods mentioned above can provide a rich and varied scope for
research. It could be comparative, analytical, or evolutionary, including different media, studies
alongside the international war literature. The writer feels that in the beginning ten aspiring
students get motivated and undertake research of this genre of Indian War Literature, and the
purpose of writing this paper would have been achieved. With minimal involvement of
researchers in this genre, there is enough gap to fulfill the ambitions of researchers to address it
enrich the genre with new ideas, and concepts, and participate in its growth.

REFERENCES:
i.Tharoor, Shashi. The Great Indian Novel, Penguin, September 2014.
ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 117 | P a g e
ii.Ramanujan, A.K. The Collected Essays of A.K. Ramanujan. ed. Vinay Dharwadkar. OUP, India.
25 March 2004.
iii.Chatterjee, Nandini. Negotiating Mughal Law: A Family of Landlords Across Three Indian
Empires. Cambridge University Press, 16 April 2020.
iv. Malleson, G.B. The Indian Mutiny of 1857. Rups & Co. 2016.
v. Lapierre, Dominique and Larry Collins. Freedom At Midnight. Vikas Publication House;
7’thEdition, India. October 2011
vi. Subramanyam, Arjun. India’s Wars: A Military History, 1947-1971.Harper Collins, April 2016.
INVESTIGATION OF A SIMPLE AND CHEAP SOURCE OF NATURAL INDICATORS
IN ACID-BASE TITRATION

Amar S. Pawar*, Subhash V. Patil**

*Assistant Professor, Department of Chemistry, Padmabhushan Vasantraodada Patil
Mahavidyalaya, Kavathe Mahankal. Dist Sangli (MH)
**Associate Professor, Department of Chemistry, Padmabhushan Vasantraodada Patil
Mahavidyalaya, Kavathe Mahankal. Dist Sangli (MH)
Corresponding author email address: [email protected]

ABSTRACT:
Acid base titrations carries synthetic indicators and qualitative analysis but due to their
toxic effect in human being as well as in environment and the higher cost, the use of some plant
flowers natural indicator started in the titrimetric analysis. The present investigation explores
the use of extract of some plant flowers natural indicator in acid base titration. The natural
indicator is simple to extract out, nontoxic and available easily. The investigation also shows
that the natural indicators have great potential and shows promising results as compared to
synthetic indicators. In the acid base titration natural indicators gives sharp color change at
equivalence point. According to all the evidence obtained after titrimetric analysis that natural
indicator shows effective and accurate result in compare to synthetic indicators. The advantage
to use natural indicator is they can be prepared freshly, economical as well as ecofriendly.

KEYWORDS: Acid-base titrations, Natural indicator, Synthetic indicator, Plant extract, Titration.

INTRODUCTION:
The commonly used indicators for acid-base titrations are synthetic, namely
phenolphthalein/methyl orange. But there are some obstacles like environmental pollution,
availability and higher cost which lead to utilization for herbal compounds as acid base
indicators. Hence this work was aimed to identify the eco-friendly natural indicators using some
flowers. The potential of the flowers is very promising as seen in acid-based titrimetric at room
temperature. Flower extract indicators which were used in acid-base titrations show sharp
color changes at the equivalence point. The result proved to be acceptable in introducing
natural pigments as suitable acid-base indicators. These natural indicators are found to be a
very helpful, inexpensive, simple, accurate and nature friendly.
Titration or titrimetric is a general laboratory method of quantitative chemical analysis
which can be observed from the quantity of a liquid of standard solution, the titrant or the
solution of known concentration, to convert the constituent into another form. A change of color
or the formation is used to determine the concentration of an analyte, titrand or unknown
solution.
Indicators are those substance employed to determine the end point of a volumetric
titration. ‘Indicators are either organic weak acid or weak bases having different colors in
different medium’. Phenolphthalein, methyl orange, litmus solution, methyl red and etc. are acid
- base indicators. An Indicator is also defined as a substance which indicates completion of acid-

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 118 | P a g e

base titration or end point by changing its color within limits with variation in PH of the solution
to which it is added.

MATERIALS:
Hydrochloric acid, Sodium hydroxide, phenolphthalein
Flower petal materials: Fresh flowers (Red hibiscus, Meri gold, Pink mirabilia Jalapa)
were collected from the nearby villages around Kavathe Mahankal District: Sangli, India. and
were identified from the Botany department of P. V. P. Mahavidyalaya Kavathe Mahankal.
Glass wares: Standard flasks, burettes, pipettes, conical flasks, beakers, glass rods and funnel.
Experimental:
a. Preparation of flower petal extracts: The flowers were thoroughly washed with distilled
water, cut in small pieces placed in a mortar and then macerated using the pestle. It was
then transferred into a 250 ml flask containing 100 ml distilled water was refluxed for an
hour. After which the content was filtered and the clear filtrate was collected for the
titration.
b. Determination of ƛmax of acidic and basic solutions of flower extract: Acidic and basic
solutions of flower extract were prepared by adding few drops of flower extract in 0.1 n HCl
and 0.1N NaOH solution respectively and their absorbance is measured on the digital
colorimeter.

Prepared extracts for colorimetric analysis

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 119 | P a g e

 Color change of Red hibiscus in acidic to basic medium

c. Titrations: 1 ml of the extract of Red hibiscus, lutterfly pea, banana flower, purple
allamanda, African marigold and Chrysanthemum (taken separately in different conical
flasks) was added as an indicator for all the type of titrations such as strong acid (HCl)
against strong base (NaOH). The titrations were again carried out using the standard
(synthetic) indicators phenolphthalein. The results obtained were compared with the
results of titrations using the natural indicator. Titration results were depicted in the.

RESULTS AND DISCUSSION:

The titration results showed that the end point of the titration of strong acid against
strong base (HCl vs. NaOH) using the natural indicator either coincide or almost reached close to
the end point obtained by the standard indicator phenolphthalein give sharp color change at the
end point.

Red Hibiscus Meri gold Pink mirabilia

Obs. Acidic Basic Acidic Basic Acidic Basic
No. Wavelength med med med med med med
1 400 0.23 0.19 0.12 0.23 0.07 0.18
2 420 0.31 0.27 0.13 0.34 0.11 0.29
3 470 0.08 0.15 0.41 0.47 0.21 0.18
4 500 1.05 0.19 0.27 1.06 0.28 0.15
5 530 0.63 0.16 0.21 0.37 0.18 0.13
6 620 0.13 0.15 0.16 0.29 0.17 0.12
7 660 0.16 0.14 0.14 0.23 0.12 0.12
8 700 0.04 0.01 0.10 0.21 0.01 0.10
Table 1: Absorbance study flower extract in acidic and basic medium
From above table ƛmax of acidic and basic solutions of flower extract is different

Volum Burette reading (ml) Volum Mean ±

e of e of Colour std. dev.
Indicator
acid Initial Final Difference titrant change of the
(ml) , mean titer
ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 120 | P a g e
 value value
(ml) (ml)
10 0 7.7 7.7
Coluorless 7.8333
Phenolphthalein 10 0 7.9 7.9 7.833
to pink ±0.266
10 0 7.9 7.9
10 0 8.6 8.6
Red to 8.5667
Red hibiscus 10 0 8.6 8.6 8.566
green ±0.133
10 0 8.5 8.5
10 0 9.2 9.2
Yellow to 9.3333
Meri gold 10 0 9.4 9.4 9.366
orange ±0.266
10 0 9.4 9.4
10 0 7.7 7.7
Pink mirabilia Pink to 7.7667
10 0 7.7 7.7 7.766
Jalapa yellow ±0.266
10 0 7.9 7.9
Table 2: Titration results of HCl vs. NaOH using extract of red hibiscus, Meri Gold, Pink
mirabilia Jalapa.

CONCLUSION:
The natural indicators extracted from the flower petals were found to be a potential
substitute for phenolphthalein for titrations strong acid versus strong base. Hence, the flower
petal extract as a natural indicator is found to be a very useful, readily available, non-hazardous,
economical, simple to prepare and accurate for the acid-base titrations.

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 121 | P a g e

REFERENCES
1. Riyanti Riyanti. IEOM Society International, 2022,4174-4183.
2. N. Pattarapongdilok1, P. Malichim, N. Simmee and J. Sichaem, Navindra P Seeram et al.
Rasayan j.chemistry. Vol. 14, No. 2,2021,1402-1407.
3. N. Kapilraj, S. Keerthanan, and M. Sithambaresa et al., Journal of Chemistry Volume 2019,1-6.
4. Daniel A. Abugri1, Ohene B. Apea, Gregory Pritchett, et al. Green and Sustainable Chemistry,
2012, 2, 117-122.
5. Dr. Suma Bino Thomas, et al. IJCRT, Volume 6, Issue 4, 2018, 25-33.
6. Shivaji H. Burungale and Ankush V. Mali et al. Journal of Chemical and Pharmaceutical
Research, 2014, 6(5):901-903
7. Maria Inês Soares Melecchi, et al. Ultrasonics Sonochemistry, 2006, 13(3), 242-250.

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 122 | P a g e

 MAGNITUDE RANKING METHOD APPROACH FOR OPTIMIZING FUZZY
ASSIGNMENT PROBLEM

Pallavi S. Sabale
Research student
Department of Statistics, Shivaji University Kolhapur.
Email- [email protected]

Dr. P. R. Chavan
Associated Professor and Head of Department,
Smt. Kasturbai Walchand College, Sangli.
Shivaji University, Kolhapur.

ABSTRACT:
In this paper proposes a method to solve fuzzy assignment problems by employing the
Fourier elimination method, where all parameters are represented as triangular fuzzy numbers.
The fuzzy numbers are converted into crisp numbers using ranking functions, particularly
magnitude ranking methods. This approach aims to optimize the assignment of tasks to
individuals, maximizing potential participant and minimizing total fuzzy assignment cost and
time. The method is illustrated through a numerical example in the paper.

KEYWORDS: Triangular Fuzzy Number, Fourier Elimination Method, Fuzzy Assignment

Problem, Ranking Functions, Magnitude Ranking Method

INTRODUCTION:
The fuzzy assignment problem involves assigning resources or tasks to agents or
facilities while considering uncertain parameters. Unlike traditional assignment problems with
precise values, fuzzy assignment problems deal with fuzzy or uncertain parameters, such as
costs, time, or preferences.
An example of a fuzzy assignment problem could be the allocation of tasks (Shifts) to
workers in a project management scenario (in maximizes productivity and minimizes the cost).
Assigning Vehicles to delivery routes to minimize fuel costs, travel time. Suppose there are
several tasks with uncertain durations and skill requirements, and a team of workers with
varying levels of expertise and availability. Each task has fuzzy parameters representing its
duration, complexity, and priority, while each worker has fuzzy parameters representing their
skill level, availability, and preference for certain tasks.
The objective is to assign tasks to workers in a way that optimizes project completion
time, minimizes costs, and maximizes overall team satisfaction. However, due to the uncertainty
in task durations and worker capabilities, traditional assignment methods may not be suitable.
The magnitude ranking method is a technique used to compare and rank fuzzy numbers based
on their magnitudes or central tendencies. It involves comparing fuzzy numbers by their
centroids or maximum values and assigning ranks accordingly. This method simplifies decision-
making by converting fuzzy numbers into ordered sequences, making it easier to prioritize
assignments and handle uncertainty effectively.
Discussing various algorithms and methods for solving linear programming problems,
particularly in the context of fuzzy assignment problems. Khachian modified Shor's algorithm,
known as the Ellipsoid method, which is a polynomial-time algorithm in (1979). Dantzig
introduced the simplex method in 1963, which has since been widely used, including its revised
versions, in industrial-scale problem-solving. Williams showed that Fourier's method for

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 123 | P a g e

manipulating linear inequalities, discovered in (1827), can also be applied to solve linear
programming problems. Thorani et al. (2017) discuss the application of these methods in fuzzy
assignment problems. R. Queen Mary and Selvi developed a model for solving fuzzy assignment
problems as well. These methods and models contribute to addressing the challenges posed by
uncertainty and variability in assignment problems using centroid ranking method. D. Selvi
and G. Velammal, are discuss the method for solving fuzzy assignment problem using
i n (2017). V. Ramadas, P. Shanmugam, are discussed an effective fuzzy ranking
method in convex triangular fuzzy soft numbers in (2018).

PRELIMINARIES
We see some basic definitions,
Definition: If X is a universe of discourse and x be any particular element of X. The fuzzy set
defined on X is a collection of ordered pairs,

Where, is called the membership function. i.e.

Definition: A triangular fuzzy number is defined by its membership function is

given below,

Definition: A triangular fuzzy number can also be represented as a pair

of functions which satisfies the following requirements:
i. is bounded monotonic increasing left continuous function.
ii. is a bounded monotonic decreasing left continuous function.
iii.

Magnitude Ranking Method –

For an arbitrary triangular fuzzy number with parametric Form
the magnitude of the triangular fuzzy number by

Where the function f(r) is a non-negative and increasing function on (0,1). In the real life
applications f(r) can be chosen by the decision maker according to the situation.

MODEL FORMULATION:
Mathematical Model of Assignment Problem:
In classical assignment problem we use single objective. This method is used for
minimizing cost and maximizing profit. In this problem we use objective function M.

Subject to constraint,

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 124 | P a g e

Where,

Mathematical Model of Fuzzy Assignment Problem (FAP):

In actual situation, assignment problem in objectives (any objective for example, cost,
time and quality etc.) is not giving complete information; it is vague data of various objectives.
Here, we assume assignment cost ( ). Assignment problem with fuzzy parameters is treated
here as an FAP. The mathematical model of the FAP is given below:

Subject to constraint,

Where,

METHODS:
Solution procedure using Fourier elimination methods for solving fuzzy assignment problems:
Step 1: Transform fuzzy numbers to crisp ones. Using magnitude ranking method.
Step 2: Formulation as Linear Programming Problem. Convert crisp numbers into a linear
programming problem.
Step 3: Apply Fourier elimination method
i. Convert minimization problem to maximization.
ii. Transform the objective function into linear inequalities.
iii. Write the maximization problem with an inequality in equality constraint.
iv. Formulate the equivalent pure integer problem.
v. Select and eliminate variables using Fourier elimination.
vi. Repeat steps until only the objective function variable remains.
Step 4: Using Hungarian method and find optimum value for the objective function.
Step 5: Compute remaining variable values.
Step 6: Attain optimal solution and assignment for the problem.

NUMERICAL EXAMPLE:
Assign each teaching faculty members A, B, C, D, E expertise and experience in the
subjects (I, II, III, IV, V) based on their qualification, research interest, teaching experience,
subject knowledge and communication skill.

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 125 | P a g e

 I II III IV V
A (2,3,5) (1,2,8) (4,5,8) (12,14,15) (10,13,14)
B (14,15,16) (7,8,9) (8,9,10) (2,5,7) (8,9,11)
C (7,9,12) (1,4,7) (4,7,10) (11,14,15) (5,7,9)
D (5,8,11) (7,10,13) (9,12,15) (8,11,14) (1,3,5)
E (3,4,5) (12,14,15) (8,10,13) (7,8,10) (5,7,12)

We convert fuzzy number in crisp value using magnitude ranking method

I II III IV V
A 2 2.25 3.75 9.25 7.75
B 10.75 5.5 6.25 2 0.5
C 6 1.5 3.75 8.5 6.5
D 4.5 6 7.5 6.75 6.25
E 2.5 9.25 6.75 5.75 5

RESULT:
After using Fourier elimination method optimal solution, each teacher assign one
subject is given below,

Optimal cost is 15.

CONCLUSION:
The proposed method in this paper facilitates successful assignment and
implementation of individuals to tasks (Teachers assign the subjects) on a one-to-one basis,
aiming to minimize the total fuzzy assignment cost and total fuzzy time of the organization. It
also aids in assessing future values even in uncertain scenarios. The total assignment fuzzy costs
of a triangular fuzzy assignment problem are defuzzified into crisp values using the magnitude
ranking method and solved using the Hungarian method. This approach is straight forward and
fruitful, making it useful for studying real-world problems in the future.

LIMITATIONS-
Dealing with fuzzy or uncertain parameters poses challenges in formulating and solving
assignment problems, requiring specialized optimization techniques.
Fuzzy assignment problems often involve multiple criteria, constraints, and conflicting
objectives, adding complexity to the optimization process.

FUTURE SCOPE-
To develop efficient algorithms and expand its applicability across diverse domains

REFERENCES:
1. L.G. Khachian, Polynomial algorithm in linear programming, Dok. Akad. Nauk
SSSR 224 (1979) 1093–1096.

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 126 | P a g e

2. R.Q. Mary, D. Selvi, Solving fuzzy assignment problem using centroid ranking
method, rn 55 (2018) 7.
3. K. Kalaiarasi, S. Sindhu, M. Arunadevi, Optimization of fuzzy assignment model
with triangular fuzzy numbers using Robust Ranking technique, Int. J. Innov. Sci.,
Eng. Technol. 1 (3) (2014) 10–15.
4. S.K. Khaddar babu, K. Karthikeyen, Statistical optimization for generalized fuzzy
number, Int. J. Mod. Eng. Res. (IJMER) 3 (2) (2013) 647–651.
5. V. Ramadas, P. Shanmugam, An effective fuzzy ranking method in convex
triangular fuzzy soft numbers, Int. J. Appl. Adv. Sci. Res. 3 (1) (2018) 2456–3080.
6. D. Selvi, G. Velammal, Method for solving fuzzy assignment problem using
magnitude ranking technique, Int. J. Appl. Adv. Sci. Res. (2017) 16–20.
7. J.P. Singh, N.I. Thakur, A novel method to solve assignment problem in fuzzy
environment, Ind. Eng. Lett. 5 (2) (2015) 31–35.
8. Stephen Dinakar, Kamalanathan Rameshan, Sub interval average method for
ranking of linear fuzzy numbers, Int. J. Pure Appl. Math. 4 (6) (2017) 119–130.
9. T.A. Thakra, O.K. Chaudhri, N.R. Dhawade, Placement of staff in LIC using fuzzy
assignment problem, Int. J. Math. Trends Technol. 53 (4) (2018) 259, 266.
10. X. Wang, Fuzzy optimal assignment problem, Fuzzy Math 3 (1987) 101–108.
11. D. Gurukumaresan, C. Duraisamy, Optimal solution of fuzzy assignment problem with
centroid methods, Elsevier proceeding in Materials Today: Proceedings (2020)
12. Arun Pratap Singh. “A Comparative Study of Centroid Ranking Method and Robust
Ranking Technique in Fuzzy Assignment Problem.” Global J Technol Optim 12(2021): 254.
13. Muruganandam, S., K. Hema, “Solving Fuzzy Assignment Problem using Fourier
Elimination method.” Glob J Pure Appl Math 13(2017):453-462.
14. Mukherjee, Sathi, Kajla Basu. “Applications of fuzzy ranking method for solving
assignment problems with fuzzy costs.” Int J Comput Appl Math 5(2010):359-368.

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 127 | P a g e

 MULTICULTURALISM IN SAADAT HASAN MANTO’S SHORT STORIES

Dr. Appaso Shivaji Kolekar

P. V. P. Mahavidyalaya, K. Mahankal

ABSTRACT:
Multiculturalism is not only related to the literary studies but also it includes Sociology,
Anthropology and Politics etc. Multiculturalism in literature is to represent adequately the
cultural contributions of races and groups that have been hitherto marginalized or ignored.
Saadat Hasan Manto is a prominent Indian Urdu writer. Manto’s stories covered many topics
like it comments from the life of prostitute to the laws implemented by the Government. Manto
is realistic in the description and depiction of the subjects in his stories.

KEY WORDS: Multiculturalism, Saadat Hasan Manto, Short Story , Hatak, Shanti, Fobha Bai.

Multiculturalism is an ideology that proposes the presentation of the cultural

contributions of races and groups that have been hitherto marginalized or ignored. In Indian
context multiculturalism is more important disciple of study as people in India belonging to
different religions live together for centuries, and represents the variety of cultural traditions.
Multiculturalism is the view that cultures, races, and ethnicities, particularly those
of minority groups, deserve special acknowledgment of their differences within a dominant
political culture. (https://www.britannica.com/topic/multiculturalism)
As mentioned in the above statement multiculturalism is the view that the minority
groups in cultures, races and ethnicities deserve special acknowledgment in political culture,
the same thing is in the case of literature. Multiculturalism in literature seek to study the
representation of the minority groups particularly the presentation of women, people of lower
class and middle class, and people who are not the part of the classical literature. In Indian
context particularly during the period of freedom struggle and the partition of India, the country
witnessed the migration of millions of people between Pakistan and Hindustan. People lost their
homes, their families, their relatives and friends due to the partition. Manto had witnessed the
communal riots and its harsh reality which is presented in his stories. Manto’s stories on
partition and communal riots included him in the list of greatest writers of the century. In the
present paper his stories are analyzed from the point of view of multiculturalism.
The present research paper aims to study and analyze the short stories of Saadat Hasan
Manto under the light of multiculturalism. Manto has specifically dealt with the characters from
middle and lower strata of the society. Socially, economically, physically and mentally exploited
people are there in the stories of Saadat Hasan Manto. People living in rooms, muhallas and
chawls, tonga drivers, prostitutes, young people in love, British officials, rustic peasants, shop
owners in cities, patriotic activists, head of ashrams, activists, refugees, volunteers, doctors,
lunatics, people related to cinema industry are in his stories. Manto has dealt with variety of
women characters in his stories, he has dealt with many problems in women’s life. Manto has
dealt with the religious traditions and rituals of all the religions in India. He has tried to be
realist in the description of the socio-political context in India. Though Manto has written many
stories on women his stories on prostitutes’ life are very important as he has depicted many
aspects of their life. Generally prostitutes in the literature are the subject of sympathy but Manto

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 128 | P a g e

has presented them in the way that he forces readers to see them as women first. His stories
“Kali Salawar”, “Hatak”, “Pehchan”, “Shanti”, “Fhoba Bai” etc. deal with the theme of prostitutes’
life.
“Hatak” is a story that focuses on Sugandhi’s , a prostitute, sordid life and degeneration.
The story moves around the life of Sugandhi. There are three important characters that help in
the development of the story. First one is Ramlal, a man who brings customers to Sugandhi and
warns her about her relationship with Madhoo. Madhoo is a Sugandhi’s lover, who comes from
Pune once in a month and while leaving her takes the money from her. Every time he asks
Sugandhi to stop the work of prostitution (dhanda) and he will send her money order as he
reaches to Pune. But she had never received her money order. The third one is more important
as he gives turn to the story. It was a past midnight, where Ramlal asks Sugandhi to be ready
and come out as there is customer in the taxi. Though she was suffering from headache, she
prepares herself and goes to the taxi on the corner of the road. As she came near the taxi a
strong beam of light flashed against her face. The man in taxi rejects her saying “Huh!”. This
“Huh!” by seth in a car caused a storm in the mind of Sugandhi. She was disappointed by such a
humiliation. There was a question on her existence.
“Sugandhi, she said to herself, you are not ugly. While it was true that the bloom of her
early youth was gone, nobody had ever said she was ugly. In fact, she was one of those women
men always steal a second look at. She knew she had everything a man expects in a woman. She
was young and she had a good body. She was nice to people. She couldn’t remember a single
man in the last five years who hadn’t enjoyed himself with her” (Hasan, 2007. 62)
She feels very bad about it and thinks over it. When she returns to her room she notices
that Madhoo has come. She quarrels with him, and threw him out of the room. When he asks her
about the prostitution, she stops him by asking who are you to ask me that? She asks him that
have you send any money order from Pune. When Madhoo goes out of the room, she picked up
her mangy dog from the floor in her lap and lay down on the bed with the dog by her side. The
story portrays the life of the prostitutes by different angles. Age and the time spend in the
business makes a prostitute less demanded. Though she is a prostitute, she is a woman and she
can’t tolerate such a humiliation. Sugandhi is representative of those women who want to live
with their own conditions. The end of the story is very symbolic, Sugandhi prefers to live with
animals than human. Manto has commented on the thing that men can have a prostitute’s body
but they can’t reach the woman in prostitution. Though she is a prostitute she couldn’t bear the
insult of her. Sugandhi is a representative character among Manto’s women characters who try
to live their life with their own ways.
“Shanti” is a very emotional story written by Manto. Shanti is a prostitute who has come
from Kashmir to Mumbai. In Kashmir her father is a doctor, and she used to be a nurse over
there. She lost her virginity with some boy, and in frustration she ran away to Mumbai. In
Mumbai she entered into prostitution. She is not like other prostitutes; she has made rules for
herself. She is very careful about her health. She has fixed her rate fifty rupees. She used to live
at hotel and regularly at five she comes there for the work. She was very strict about her rules
she had made for herself. She never allows anyone to come with her in the hotel. One day she
meets Maqbool who only offers to talk with her. She believes him and took him to her hotel
room. She spends some time with him and enjoys talking with him. He teaches her to apply
lipstick properly and wearing a sari orderly. Visits of Maqbool to her room increased. He
became regular visitor at her, and gets the permission to sit on the cot instead of a chair. During
the time she falls in love with him. The end of the story is again very touching. She says to
Maqbool that she doesn’t want money now, she needs him. She shows him the money she has
tore into pieces. Maqbool accepts her love and wipes her tears. She ends the story with her
comment that in Kashmir one man has finished her, and now in Mumbai another man has given
her a new life. The story makes a reader to see the woman in a prostitute. Though she is a
prostitute, she has a mind; she needs love, company and sympathy too.
“Fobha Bai” is a story that focuses the maternal love of a prostitute for her son. Fobha
ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 129 | P a g e
Bai is a Muslim woman hired by two friends. They take her to Dr. Khan, their friend working in
military hospital and living in quarters allotted to him. In the discussion they come to know that
she has a son in Jaipur and she sends two hundred rupees for him once in a month. She had a
surgical operation on her stomach and since the operation she had been addicted to morphia.
She was so good that she believes Dr. Khan and left her jewelry at him. After some days Dr. Khan
returns her jewelers by going to her home. Then while going to Jaipur she keeps her motor at
Dr. Khan. But she never returns as she lost her son in Jaipur there. In the end of the story she is
seen at beach in Mumbai begging for five rupees to get morphia. When Dr. Khan’s friend asks
her about her motor and doctor she denied to recongnise them and went away. The story
portrays the different layers of the life of Fobha bai. She used to work here to feed her only son.
But when she loses him, she left everything. Women from middle and lower strata like
Sugandhi, Shanti and Fobha Bai are protagonists in Manto’s stories.
The setting of the Manto’s stories and the choice of his characters are Indian. He has
drawn the characters from the real life situations. He has presented the people in India who are
generally presented as minor characters in the literary works. But Manto has presented such
people like Sugandhi, Shanti and Fobha Bai as the protagonists in his stories. From the point of
multiculturalism not only the different cultures are depicted in the stories but the different
people particularly women from middle and lower strata have been presented in the stories of
Saadat Hasan Manto.

REFERENCES:
PRIMARY SOURCES:
1. Manto, Saadat Hasan. Barmi Larki and Other Stories. New Delhi: Wani Publication, 2012.
Print.
2. ----------------- Selected Stories by Saadat Hasan Manto. Modern Classics, 2007. Print.

SECONDARY SOURCES:
1. Alvi, Varis . Saadat Hasan Mant. New Delhi: Sahitya Akademi, 2000. Print.
2. Manto, Saadat Hasan. Why I Write. ed.& trans. Aakar Patel. Thomson Press (India) Ltd.,
2014. Print.
3. Mohan, Narendra (ed.). Saadat Hasan Manto Ki Kahaniyan. New Delhi:
Kitabghar, 1992 Print.

WEBLIOGRAPHY:
https://www.britannica.com/topic/multiculturalism.

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 130 | P a g e

 MULTIDISCIPLINARY STUDY: EXPLORING NEW HORIZONS FOR SOCIOLOGY

Surendranath Ashok Babar

Assistant Professor,
Padmabhsuhan Vasantraodada Patil Mahavidyalaya,
Kavathe Mahankal, Sangli.

INTRODUCTION:
In the ever-evolving landscape of academia, multidisciplinary research stands at the
forefront as a powerful catalyst for innovation and holistic understanding. Within the realm of
sociology, the integration of diverse disciplines such as psychology, economics, politics and
environment unveil new horizons of exploration and analysis. This synergistic approach
acknowledges the intricate interconnectedness of human societies with their surrounding
environments and underscores the need for comprehensive perspectives in addressing complex
societal issues.
At its essence, multidisciplinary research in sociology transcends traditional boundaries,
fostering a dynamic interchange of ideas, methodologies, and insights. By drawing upon the
methodologies of psychology, researchers delve into the intricacies of human behavior,
cognition, and emotions, illuminating the underlying mechanisms that shape social phenomena.
Concurrently, the integration of economic principles offers valuable insights into the
distribution of resources, wealth disparities, and the socioeconomic dynamics influencing
societal structures.
Moreover, the political dimension of multidisciplinary research in sociology navigates
the intricate webs of power, governance, and policy, elucidating the interplay between political
systems and social structures. Environmental considerations further enrich this discourse,
recognizing the profound impact of ecological factors on human behavior, cultural practices, and
societal development. From climate change to environmental justice, interdisciplinary
approaches provide nuanced perspectives on the complex interrelationships between society
and the natural world.
The incorporation of scientific inquiry imbues multidisciplinary research in sociology
with empirical rigor and analytical depth, facilitating evidence-based conclusions and
theoretical advancements. Together, these interdisciplinary intersections forge new pathways
for understanding, confronting, and potentially resolving the multifaceted challenges
confronting contemporary societies. In essence, multidisciplinary research in sociology emerges
as a vibrant tapestry of knowledge, weaving together diverse strands of inquiry to illuminate
the intricacies of human social existence in all its complexity.
In sum, the incorporation of scientific inquiry imbues multidisciplinary research in
sociology with empirical rigour and analytical depth, facilitating evidence-based conclusions
and theoretical advancements. Together, these interdisciplinary intersections forge new
pathways for understanding, confronting, and potentially resolving the multifaceted challenges
confronting contemporary societies. In essence, multidisciplinary research in sociology emerges

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 131 | P a g e

as a vibrant tapestry of knowledge, weaving together diverse strands of inquiry to illuminate
the intricacies of human social existence in all its complexity.

SOCIO-PSYCHOLOGICAL STUDY:
Multidisciplinary research in sociology and psychology converges with profound
significance when examining critical societal issues such as suicide, conflicts, violence, and
gender-related concerns. By integrating insights from both disciplines, researchers can adopt a
comprehensive lens to comprehend the multifaceted dimensions of these pressing issues.
Suicide, a deeply complex phenomenon, necessitates a multidisciplinary approach to
unravel its underlying causes and devise effective prevention strategies. Psychology contributes
by exploring individual mental health factors such as depression, anxiety, and trauma, while
sociology delves into the broader social determinants including societal pressures, stigma, and
access to mental health services. Through this interdisciplinary collaboration, researchers gain a
holistic understanding of the interplay between psychological vulnerabilities and social
contexts, informing targeted interventions and support systems.
Similarly, conflicts and violence are phenomena deeply rooted in social and
psychological dynamics. Sociological perspectives illuminate the structural inequalities, power
dynamics, and historical legacies that fuel conflicts and perpetuate violence within societies. By
synthesizing these perspectives, researchers can develop comprehensive strategies for conflict
resolution, peacebuilding, and violence prevention that account for both individual and
structural dynamics.
Gender issues represent yet another domain where multidisciplinary research in
sociology and psychology is indispensable. Psychology examines the complexities of gender
identity, stereotypes, and discrimination at the individual level, while sociology scrutinizes the
institutionalized norms, power structures, and cultural dynamics that perpetuate gender
inequalities. By integrating these perspectives, researchers can advance holistic approaches to
address gender-based violence, promote gender equity, and foster inclusive social
environments.
In sum, multidisciplinary research in sociology and psychology offers a powerful
framework for comprehensively understanding and addressing critical societal issues such as
suicide, agricultural challenges, conflicts, violence, and gender inequalities. By bridging the gap
between individual experiences and broader social contexts, interdisciplinary approaches pave
the way for more effective interventions, policies, and social change initiatives.

SOCIO-POLITICAL STUDY:
Multidisciplinary research in sociology and political science offers a nuanced
exploration of critical issues surrounding elections, social factors like caste, and the intricate
relationship between political systems and social structures. By integrating insights from both
disciplines, researchers can gain a comprehensive understanding of the complexities inherent in
democratic processes and governance.
Elections, as the cornerstone of democratic societies, are subject to multifaceted analysis
when approached through a multidisciplinary lens. Political science delves into electoral
systems, voting behaviour, and party dynamics, examining the formal mechanisms that shape
electoral outcomes. Sociology complements this by scrutinizing the social factors influencing
voting patterns, including class, ethnicity, religion, and, notably, caste in many contexts. By
synthesizing these perspectives, researchers can unravel the interplay between political
institutions, social identities, and electoral dynamics, shedding light on the complex
mechanisms driving democratic participation and representation
Social factors such as caste play a pivotal role in shaping political landscapes,
particularly in societies characterized by deep-seated inequalities. As Caste is the most extreme
form of social stratification based on ascribed status. Sociology offers valuable insights into the
historical origins, cultural significance, and contemporary implications of caste systems,
ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 132 | P a g e
illuminating how caste intersects with politics, governance, and social stratification. Political
science, in turn, examines how caste-based identities are mobilized by political actors,
influencing party politics, electoral strategies, and policy agendas. Through interdisciplinary
collaboration, researchers can elucidate the multifaceted impacts of caste on political
representation, social justice, and democratic governance, paving the way for more inclusive
and equitable political systems.
Moreover, multidisciplinary research elucidates the intricate relationship between
political systems and social structures, transcending simplistic dichotomies between the state
and society. As prominent sociologist suggests that the state is nothing but the relation, or set of
relationships between different classes. Sociology analyzes the broader social context within
which political institutions operate, exploring power dynamics, social movements, and
collective action. Political science, on the other hand, examines the formal mechanisms of
governance, state institutions, and policy-making processes. By integrating these perspectives,
researchers can unravel the complex interplay between political power, social inequality, and
institutional change, advancing our understanding of the dynamics shaping modern societies.
In sum, multidisciplinary research in sociology and political science offers a holistic
approach to understanding critical issues surrounding elections, social factors like caste, and the
interface between political systems and social structures. By bridging the gap between formal
institutions and social realities, interdisciplinary approaches enrich our insights into the
complexities of democratic governance, social justice, and political transformation.
SOCIO - ECONOMIC STUDY:
Multidisciplinary research at the intersection of sociology and economics offers a rich
understanding of critical issues such as population dynamics and migration. By integrating
insights from both disciplines, researchers can unveil the intricate socio-economic mechanisms
underlying these complex phenomena, thereby informing policy and interventions aimed at
addressing societal challenges.
Population dynamics, a fundamental concern for policymakers worldwide, are subject to
multifaceted analysis through a multidisciplinary lens. Economics provides tools for analyzing
population growth, fertility rates, and demographic transitions, examining the economic drivers
and consequences of population changes. Sociology complements this by exploring the social
determinants of fertility, migration patterns, and family structures, shedding light on the
cultural, institutional, and interpersonal factors shaping population dynamics. Through
interdisciplinary collaboration, researchers can elucidate the interplay between economic
forces, social norms, and demographic trends, informing policies related to family planning,
labor markets, and social welfare.
Migration, another pressing issue in today's globalized world, benefits from a
multidisciplinary approach that considers both economic and sociological dimensions.
Economics offers insights into the drivers and consequences of migration, including labor
market dynamics, remittances, and the impact on economic development. Sociology, meanwhile,
delves into the social processes surrounding migration, exploring issues of identity, belonging,
and social integration. By integrating these perspectives, researchers can provide a
comprehensive understanding of migration patterns, the experiences of migrants, and the
implications for both sending and receiving societies, informing policies related to immigration,
labor mobility, and social cohesion.
In sum, multidisciplinary research in sociology and economics offers a holistic approach
to understanding critical issues such as population dynamics, and migration. By bridging the
gap between economic forces and social realities, interdisciplinary approaches enrich our
insights into the complex socio-economic mechanisms shaping human societies, thereby
informing more effective policies and interventions for addressing societal challenges.
SOCIO-ENVIRONMENT STUDY:

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 133 | P a g e

 Multidisciplinary research at the intersection of sociology and environmental studies
offers invaluable insights into critical issues such as global warming, climate change, and their
profound impacts on social systems, norms, and values. By integrating perspectives from both
disciplines, researchers can illuminate the intricate interplay between environmental changes
and social dynamics, thereby informing policies and interventions aimed at fostering
sustainable societies.
Global warming and climate change represent existential threats with far-reaching
implications for human societies. Sociology contributes by examining how these environmental
changes intersect with social systems, reshaping livelihoods, cultural practices, and community
dynamics. By exploring the social dimensions of climate vulnerability, adaptation, and
resilience, sociologists shed light on the unequal distribution of environmental risks and the
differential capacities of communities to cope with and mitigate the impacts of climate change.
Moreover, sociologists analyze how global warming and climate change challenge
existing social norms and values, prompting shifts in collective attitudes, behaviors, and
identities. Environmental degradation may provoke reevaluations of societal priorities,
fostering movements for environmental justice, sustainability, and ecological citizenship. By
understanding the socio-cultural dimensions of environmental degradation, researchers can
develop strategies for promoting pro-environmental behaviors, fostering environmental
stewardship, and cultivating resilience in the face of environmental crises.
Conversely, environmental studies enrich sociological inquiries by providing insights
into the ecological processes and biophysical dynamics driving global warming and climate
change. By examining the ecological impacts of human activities, such as deforestation, carbon
emissions, and resource extraction, environmental researchers elucidate the mechanisms
through which human actions contribute to environmental degradation. This interdisciplinary
collaboration enables a more comprehensive understanding of the complex socio-
environmental systems within which global warming and climate change unfold, thereby
informing policies and interventions aimed at fostering sustainability and resilience.
In Sum, multidisciplinary research in sociology and environmental studies offers a
holistic approach to understanding critical issues such as global warming, climate change, and
their impacts on social systems, norms, and values. By bridging the gap between human
societies and the natural environment, interdisciplinary approaches enrich our insights into the
complex interactions between human actions, environmental changes, and societal responses,
thereby informing policies and interventions for building more sustainable and resilient
communities.
CONCLUSION:
In conclusion, the exploration of multidisciplinary research across various domains
presents a compelling framework for advancing our understanding of complex societal issues
and phenomena. Through the integration of diverse disciplines such as psychology, economics,
political science and environmental studies, researchers have unveiled new horizons for
sociology, fostering innovation, and holistic comprehension.
In essence, multidisciplinary research in sociology offers a vibrant tapestry of
knowledge, weaving together diverse strands of inquiry to illuminate the intricacies of human
social existence and advance solutions to contemporary societal challenges. Through bridging
the boundaries between disciplines and interdisciplinary collaboration, researchers can
continue to explore new horizons, foster innovation, and contribute to the betterment of society.
BIBLIOGRAPHY:
1. Dhanagare, D. N. (2001). Elections and the political order: Reflections on the Indian
experience. Orient Blackswan.
2. ----------------------(2001). Sociology of Indian society: Historical and contemporary
perspectives. Popular Prakashan.

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 134 | P a g e

3. Doe, J. (2023). Migration Dynamics: An Interdisciplinary Perspective. Journal of Migration
Studies, 15(3).
4. Durkheim, É. (1897). Suicide: A study in sociology. Routledge.
5. Giddens, A. (1985). The Nation-State and Violence: Volume Two of a Contemporary Critique
of Historical Materialism. University of California Press.
6. Giddens, A. (1991). Modernity and Self-Identity: Self and Society in the Late Modern Age.
Polity Press.
7. Sen, A. (1994). Population: Delusion and reality. New York Review of Books, 41(8).
8. Smith, J. (2019). Exploring the interplay between psychology and sociology in
understanding conflicts. Journal of Interdisciplinary Studies, 7(2).
9. Smith, J., Johnson, R., & Brown, A. (2019). Sociological perspectives on environmental
change. Journal of Environmental Studies, 8(3).
10. Weber, M. (1922). Economy and Society: An Outline of Interpretive Sociology. University of
California Press.

NATIONAL EDUCATION POLICY 2020 IN INCLUSIVE DEVELOPMENT SCENARIO: AN

OVERVIEW

*Asst. Prof. Chandrakant Bhupal Patil

Department of Economics,
Padmabhushan Vasantravdada Patil Mahavidyalaya, Kavathemahankal, Sangli, (MS).
E. Mail ID: [email protected]

ABSTRACT:
“Education is the backbone of a society and no progress and development could be
achieved without education,” NEP 2020 is an India centric education policy. The NEP aims to
incorporate the teaching of vocational skills within the school curriculum to augment innovation,
adaptability, and productivity would help in solving the problem of unemployment to a larger
extent. Unemployment is a global issue that affects nations across the world. However, India faces
a peculiar problem: educated unemployment. While it may seem paradoxical that a country with a
vast pool of educated talent grapples with joblessness, it’s a reality that needs attention and
understanding. This paradoxical situation, where individuals with higher education struggle to
find suitable employment, stands out as a peculiarity in the country’s job market. Educated youth
struggle for jobs in India. To gain a comprehensive understanding of its gravity, it is essential to
delve deeply into various aspects such as unemployment trends, factors contributing to job
scarcity, government policies and education policy. Key factors: Population growth vs. job
creation, Quality of education, Skill gap, Job mismatch, Economic slowdown, Preference for
government jobs.

KAY WORDS: Unemployment NEP 2020 Policy, Skill curriculum, Solution.

INTRODUCTION:
Education system is the foundation to all the developments in a country. It is a guiding
principle. Education and employment are critical aspects shaping individuals’ futures and
contributing to a nation’s growth and development. In the Indian context, these domains hold
immense significance due to the country’s large population and the aspirations of its youth.
However, India faces unique challenges in ensuring that everyone is fully equipped with the
necessary skills and knowledge to thrive in the job market. This article explores the current
landscape of education and employment in India, discusses the challenges faced, and highlights
opportunities for improvement.
The Government of India has initiated many steps to address the challenges in education

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 135 | P a g e

and employment. The Government has launched several schemes to improve education quality,
such as the Sarva Shiksha Abhiyan (SSA) and the Mid-day Meal Scheme, national education
policy 2020 etc. The Government is also working to create more jobs through the Make in India
and Digital India initiatives. Despite the challenges, India has a large and growing workforce.
The country has a young population, with over 60 percent under 35. This young population can
potentially be a significant source of economic growth. However, addressing the educational
and employment challenges is essential to realize this potential. Of course, in order to make
adequate use of India’s productive labor force, a change in education policy in India was
expected in line with the conversion of labor into skilled labor force. In that sense, it is in order
to review the National Education Policy 2020.
Objective of the study: The primary objective is to study the NEP 2020, as a solution for
mitigating youth Unemployment in India.
Research Methodology: This research is a descriptive study. The necessary secondary data
was collected from Various websites including those of Government of India, magazines,
journals, other publications, etc. This data Was then analyzed and reviewed to arrive at the
inferences and conclusions.

The Scenario of Labor Resources in a Labor-Intensive Economy:

India has one of the youngest populations in the world. India enjoys a demographic
dividend where more than 50 per cent of its population is in the working age group of 15 To 59
and 28 per cent in age group 15-29. According to Confederation of Indian Industry (CII) report it
is said That “If India does not create enough jobs and its workers are not adequately prepared
for those jobs, its demographic dividend may turn into a liability. A education and skill
development will be the biggest enablers for reaping this dividend,” Hence, the present national
education policy 2020 aimed at finding Solutions for the socio-economic problems of India. NEP
2020 is document that focusses on practical and holistic education based on our Ancient Indian
Knowledge System mixing with modernity. It is a perfect blend of tradition and modernity.
Educated unemployment has become increasingly prevalent in India, with many young
individuals holding qualifications ranging from matriculation to post-graduation degrees facing
significant challenges in securing employment opportunities. In the most recent annual report
published by the International Labor Organization, it was reported that the unemployment rate
in India experienced a decrease, reaching 8% in the year 2023. The highest recorded
unemployment rate during this period was 23.5%, while the lowest stood at 6.5%. Considering
this situation in the overall employment, employment-oriented education system in the
education sector seems to be necessary, accordingly, it has been decided to implement the new
education policy 2020 at the national level. Because the economic growth rate of the country
should be inclusive of the available population. Such economic growth rate contributes to the
overall development of the country. Accordingly, while developing labor-intensive technology,
education policy has to complement it. Therefore, since the new economic reforms in India,
there is an urgent need to improve the level of education, a strategic change in education seems
necessary. Youth unemployment crisis in India What’s worse for India is that its economic
growth is producing much fewer jobs than it used to, and the disheartened jobseekers instead
take menial roles as tele callers, delivery boys, construction workers, or vendors of street food.
Overall, India’s unemployment and economic development reality scenario figure no. 1 will be
visible from above.

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 136 | P a g e

 Source: World Bank , Mo-SPI, CMIE, Indian Express Research

Accentuating the youth unemployment crisis in India is the fact that nearly two-thirds of
its 1.43 billion people are under 35 years of age. “Post-Covid, the unemployment rate is lower
than it was pre-Covid, for all education levels. But it remains above 15% for graduates, and
more worryingly, it touches a huge 42% for graduates under 25 years,” said the State of
Working India 2023 report, which was released last month by Azim Premji University.
“Between 2017 and 2021, there was a slowdown in overall regular wage job creation, but
formal jobs (with a written contract and welfare benefits) as a share of all regular wage work
rose from 25% to 35%,” it said, adding that in 2020-21, which was the pandemic year, regular
wage employment fell by 2.2 million. Demonetization and the pandemic had a profound adverse
impact on the creation of overall wage employment in India. There was an increase in formal
employment by 3 million jobs and a loss of about 5.2 million jobs in semi- and informal regular-
wage employment during 2020–21. What’s worse for India is that its economic growth is
producing much fewer jobs than it used to, and the disheartened jobseekers instead take menial
roles as delivery boys, telecallers, construction workers, or vendors of street food. Critics say
such hopelessness among India’s youth is one of the biggest failures of the Modi government.
Accentuating the youth unemployment crisis in India is the fact that nearly two-thirds of its 1.43
billion people are under 35 years of age. Moreover, 12 million additional people reach
employment age every year in India. Half of the lost employment is accounted for by women,
leading to a deterioration in women’s participation rate in the labour force. A staggering 42%
unemployment rate among young graduates under 25 years old presents a rudderless future for
the educated youth of the country. The only rudder they can hope to find to steer the ship of life
is in ‘pakodanomics’. The media regularly quotes the increase in formal jobs. Just presenting the
formal employment data based on the new provident fund accounts opened is at best an
incomplete picture of the employment scene in the country and, at worst, a distracting picture of
the employment data. Formal jobs (with a written contract and retirement benefits) as a share
of regular wage work are increasing, while the overall wage employment rate is falling.
India’s unemployment rate is estimated to have exceeded the global rate in five of the
last six years preceding 2022, as per data from the Centre for Monitoring Indian Economy
(CMIE) and the International Labor Organization (ILO), due to an economic slowdown that was
exacerbated by the shock demonetization and the black swan event of the pandemic. “The
situation is worse than what the unemployment rate shows,” CMIE Managing Director Mahesh
Vyas told Reuters in 2022. “The unemployment rate only measures the proportion of those who
do not find jobs to those who are actively seeking jobs. The problem is that the proportion

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 137 | P a g e

seeking jobs itself is shrinking.” Unemployment is a situation when a person actively searches
for a job but is unable to find work. Unemployment, both in terms of magnitude and severity, is
the biggest challenge for the country.

Challenges in the Education & Employment:

Inequality and Accessibility: One of the significant challenges in India’s education system
is the disparity in access to quality education. Rural areas and marginalized communities often
lack adequate educational infrastructure and resources. Ensuring equal access to education for
all sections of society remains a critical challenge.

Outdated Curriculum:
The existing curriculum in many educational institutions does not always align with the
evolving needs of industries. There is an urgent need to update & modernize the current
curriculum to equip students with relevant skills and knowledge that match the job market
demands.

Quality of Education:
While India has many educational institutions, the quality of education provided is
inconsistent across the board. Issues such as the shortage of qualified teachers, outdated
teaching methods, and insufficient infrastructure hinder the delivery of quality education.

Skill Gap:
The traditional education system often lacks a focus on practical skills, soft skills, and
industry-specific knowledge. This gap leads to a high rate of unemployment or
underemployment among graduates.

Lack of Vocational Training:

Vocational education and training have not received adequate attention in India. The
focus on academic qualifications often overlooks the importance of vocational skills.
Strengthening vocational training programs can provide alternate pathways for employment
and bridge the skill gap.

Employability Challenges:
Many graduates struggle to find suitable employment opportunities despite educational
qualifications. Lack of industry exposure, limited practical experience, and insufficient career
guidance contribute to the employability challenges faced by students.
Limited Research and Development: The emphasis on research and development is
relatively low in many educational institutions in India because of innovation & the creation of
new knowledge, which is essential for fostering a vibrant and globally competitive education
system.

What is NEP?
National Education Policy (NEP) are a set of policies formulated by the Government of
India to promote education amongst Indian people. NEP is basically a comprehensive
framework to guide the development of education in the country. India had seen three
education policies in its post-independence history. The first National Education Policy of 1968
formulated by the government headed by Smt. Indira Gandhi and the second was introduced in
1986 when Mr. Rajiv Gandhi was the prime minister of the country and the same was modified
by prime minister Narasimha Rao government in 1992. The latest education policy was
formulated by Sri Narendra Modi government which was passed in the parliament on 29th July
2020. Hence, it came to be known as NEP 2020.
The NEP 2020 draft policy document envisions ‘‘an India-centered education system
ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 138 | P a g e
that contributes directly to transforming our nation sustainably into an equitable and vibrant
knowledge society, by providing high quality education to all’’ NEP 2020 aims at developing
self-reliant individual. Hence, the life skills are taught from the primary level it self. There are
many improvements suggested in secondary education with national skill curriculum
framework beginning at IX standard education. However, the policy focus on higher education is
commendable.

Major Take Aways in the Policy to Eradicate Unemployment:

 New architecture: A new vision and architecture for higher education has been envisaged
with large, well-Resourced, vibrant multidisciplinary institutions. The current 800
universities and 40,000 colleges will be Consolidated into about 15,000 excellent
institutions.
 Liberal education: A broad-based liberal arts education at the undergraduate level for
integrated, rigorous Exposure to science, arts, humanities, mathematics and professional
fields will be put in place. This would have Imaginative and flexible curricular structures,
creative combinations of study, integration of vocational Education and multiple entry/exit
points.

NEP 2020 Solution to Employment Rate in India:

India’s Unemployment at 45 Year high – India living a jobs nightmare: Over 60 % of
young graduates are unemployed and each year our college and universities produce more. This
is not good time to be young as India is slowly turning into a graveyard of their dreams.
Youngsters in the age group of 20-24 years reported an unemployment rate of 37 %. Graduates
among 20-24 years reported an unemployment rate of over 60 %. Considering this fact,
reducing unemployment and increasing employment generation is one of the biggest challenges
facing the Indian economy. Education plays a unique role in transforming India’s active labor
force into a skilled workforce with full employment in the productive sector. Accordingly,
observation becomes sequential.
The World Bank data places the employment rate for the 15-24 years age group for
India at 23 per cent. The Ratio has risen from 20.6 per cent in 2018 to 20.7 in 2019 and then to
23.2 per cent in 2020. But the ratio was Much higher at 29.3 per cent in 2012 and 32.4 per cent
in 2010. It was 40.5 per cent in 2005 and 43.4 per cent in 1994. This is a dramatic fall from 43.4
per cent in 1994 to 23.2 per cent in 2020. A conceptual scenario of this is shown in figure no. 2
will be visible from above. Figure No. 2 Trends In Youth Employment Rate In India.

Source: Global Employment Trends for Youth 2022.

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 139 | P a g e

 According to International labor Organization (Global employment trends for youth
2022) Like many Countries in the world, India experienced severe working-hour and
employment losses in 2020, and once again During another, shorter, period in 2021. However,
in contrast to most other countries, Indian youth employment in 2021 deteriorated with respect
to 2020, despite an overall average improvement in the labor market. In the mean while in the
field of higher education, many changes are witnessed in the country. According To AISHE
Report, Gross enrolment ratio in higher education recorded at 27.1 percent in 2019-20, slightly
higher from 26.3 percent in 2018-19. For males, it has also increased from 26.3 percent in 2018-
19 to 26.9 percent in 2019-20 while for females it has increased from 26.4 percent to 27.3
percent respectively. Youngsters in the age Group 15 to 24 years hold the greatest promise as
the source for economic growth of a nation. This is the age When people graduate from
education and step into the labour markets to chart a career or at least make a living. People
usually complete high school (12th standard) by 18 years of age, graduation by 21 years and
post-Graduation by 23 or 24 years. The transition from education to employment begins at
different stages for Different people during these years. In India, most people seem to make this
transition after high school. Education may never end, but in the modern world, employment
must begin somewhere between 15 and 24 Years of age. The new education policy builds
confidence among the youth as the skills are taught at the early Level. Project works, internships
and innovative research permitted in UG education helps build the career.

Integration of Vocational Education

The vocational education must be an integral part of all education – this Policy aims to
provide access to vocational Education to at least 50% of all learners by 2025. The National
Education Policy (NEP) 2020 in India aims to address unemployment through various measures
such as:
Skill Development: NEP emphasizes the importance of vocational education and skill
development from an early age to equip students with practical skills that are in demand in the
job market.
Flexible Education: The policy promotes flexible learning pathways, including vocational
courses, online education, and apprenticeships, to cater to diverse interests and career goals,
thus reducing unemployment by providing more opportunities for employment.
Entrepreneurship Education: NEP encourages entrepreneurship education to foster an
entrepreneurial mindset among students, empowering them to create job opportunities rather
than solely seeking employment.
Industry-Academia Collaboration: The policy emphasizes strengthening collaborations
between educational institutions and industries to ensure that academic curricula are aligned
with the needs of the job market, thus increasing employability.
Internships and Experiential Learning: NEP advocates for incorporating internships,
apprenticeships, and hands-on experiential learning opportunities into the curriculum to
provide students with real-world work experience and enhance their employability.
Lifelong Learning: The policy promotes lifelong learning and continuous skill upgrading to
adapt to evolving job market demands, ensuring that individuals remain employable throughout
their careers.
Overall, NEP 2020 aims to address unemployment in India by promoting skill
development, entrepreneurship, industry-academia collaboration, experiential learning, and
lifelong learning to enhance the employability of its workforce.

SUGGESTION:
NEP 2020 is a comprehensive document with holistic objective to transform the face of
the country from India. Both the organized and unorganized sectors must adopt labour -
intensive technology if sufficient employment opportunities are to be generated, and the
women’s participation rate in the labour force should improve. Bangladesh has achieved this by
ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 140 | P a g e
establishing a vibrant garment industry to cater to the clothing needs of the world. To solve the
unemployment problem in urban areas, the organized industrial sector must also absorb a
sufficient number of workers. The failure of the organized industrial sector to generate enough
employment opportunities is due to the use of capital-intensive technologies. In order to
encourage the use of relatively more labour - intensive technologies and thereby generate more
employment opportunities, fiscal and monetary concessions like liberal depreciation,
investment allowances, etc. on the use of capital must be withdrawn or reduced. In addition to
the above, the promotion of value-added agro-processing industries for export purposes has
huge employment potential. The expansion of and more investments in the education and
health care sectors not only promotes the accumulation of human capital but will also generate
a good deal of employment opportunities. More investments and concessions in labour -
intensive services such as trade, hotels, and tourism also have significant employment potential.
Last but not least, there is also a need for a national employment policy (NEP) and a
decentralized model of development.

CONCLUSIONS:
The purpose of NEP 2020 is to give what the students need and not the institution offers.
This would lead to interest-based education and need based learning. Indian youth would be
empowered with best vocational skills in future. The unemployment problem in India can be
solved with the best implementation of NEP 2020. It is hoped that the complete implementation
of policy would lead to great outcomes.
In an economy with the largest active (youth) labor force in India, effective
implementation of the new National Education Policy 2020 will make the active youth labor
force skill-based and employment-oriented in line with full employment. Assuming such
positivity, it is hoped that India’s active labor force will become skill oriented and employable
and be included in the overall development structure of the country!
REFERENCES:
 AISHE Report. 2021-22.
 Economic Survey-2023-24.
 Global Employment Trends for Youth 2022.
 International labor organization report.
 NEP 2020 policy Draft document.
 World Bank, CMIE, Indian Express Research report.2022-23.
 https://dea.gov.in
 www.publicationsdivision.nic.in

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 141 | P a g e

 NEW TRENDS IN COMMERCE EDUCATION

Dr. Bhagwan Hanamant Mohite

Assistant Professor & HOD Commerce
Padmabhushan Vasantraodada Patil Mahavidhayalya Kavathe
Mahankal, Dist: Sangli.
Mobile 9822684553

ABSTRACT:
Commerce education carefully studies the individual’s action which is injurious to the
society as a whole and recommends the methods of their prevention. There are then certain
commerce issues which are of direct interest to the society. The problem of money is protection,
incidence of taxation, import-export, the development of agriculture, industries and the like affect
the society as a whole. Commerce carefully studies these problems in the light of social welfare and
gives its unbiased opinion. Commerce education gives the knowledge of well-earnings with good
business. The growing phenomenon of globalization, liberalization and privatization has been
immensely influencing the Commerce Education. Alvin Toffler in his famous book “Future Shock”
says that, “To help avert future shock, we must create a super industrial educational system and to
do this, we must search for our objectives, methods in the future rather than past. Education must
shift into future tense.” The Higher Education sector in India is very vast. The role of Higher
Education in National development is well established. The objectives of Higher Education can be
achieved only through qualitative change in the system. The output of Commerce Education should
be multidimensional and with full global competitiveness. But we have to realize that the
Commerce graduate have lack of practical knowledge. The practical oriented Commerce Education

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 142 | P a g e

is a need of the age. The main objective of education is to develop Human Resources to face any
challenges of the life. The role of commerce education is to develop Human resources to overcome
the challenges in the field of commerce and business. To achieve this goal the commerce education
must be focused on linkage with business and industries. It should be more practical and as like on
job training and hands on experience.

KEYWORDS: Practical oriented Commerce Education, E-learning, E-banking-Governance, E-

Marketing, E-commerce.

INTRODUCTION:
The first Commerce school was established in Chennai in 1886 by Trustees of
Pachiyappa”s Charities. Commerce classes started in the Presidency College, Kolkata in
1903.The Sydenham College of Commerce and Economics was established in 1913 as the first
institution for higher education in Commerce. In post-Independence period, Commerce
education has emerged as one of the most potential pursuits in the wake of industrialization,
economic development and techno-managerial revolution. Commerce has grown from a subject
to a full-fledged faculty in most of the universities and had acquired a pride of place amongst
different academic disciplines. The growing phenomenon of globalization, liberalization and
privatization has been influencing the Commerce education. The technological revolution has
further provided new dimensions’ E-banking, E-marketing, E-commerce, E-finance, E-
investment paper less trading and governance has been gaining importance of all over the
world. At the same time, the outsourcing business, call Centre, small business operation, IT
based services etc. are expanding very fast. These developments demands paradigm shift in
teaching and learning process. The new skills and training are required to cope up with these
changes. The technological advances must be integrated into the basic fabric of Commerce
education. A career in e-commerce demands both a real knowledge of the business world and
the element make a business work. The main objective of education is to develop Human
Resources to face any challenges of the life. The role of commerce education is to develop
Human resources to overcome the challenges in the field of commerce and business. To achieve
this goal the commerce education must be focused on linkage with business and industries. It
should be more practical and as like on job training and hands on experience.

OBJECTIVES:
1. To expose themselves to and to interact with the real life situation and in the process to
assist the society.
2. To have practical orientation of class room instruction. Thus, this scheme is expected to
helping learning while working and earning while learning.
3. The education system is developing very fast both qualitively and quantitatively.
4. Imparting knowledge in the field of Commerce and Industry.

ROLE OF COMMERCE EDUCATION:

Webster defines Education as the process of educating or teaching. Education is further
defined as to develop the knowledge, skill, or character of students. The principle purpose of
education is to educate all students and give everyone equal opportunity as a means to succeed
in life. The important factor of education includes providing the necessary knowledge and skill.
According to Eric Hoffer, “The central task of education is to implant a will and facility for
learning; it should produce not learned but learning people. The truly human society is a
learning society, where grandparents, parents and children are students together”. The role of
Commerce education is very much challenging and most important to prepare Business leaders
and entrepreneurs. There are challenges in transition from school to work. High rates of
youth unemployment have become a structural problem in India, so also in many countries. In

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 143 | P a g e

order to weed out this problem impart of education especially commerce and business which
encompasses a whole lot of livelihood activities is an important solution.Therefore, the basic
objective of Commerce Education is to provide an improved livelihood to the people at the
bottom of the pyramid by empowering them to find out how the Commerce education can be
leveraged for sustainable inclusive growth.

NEW TRENDS IN COMMERCE EDUCATION

Commerce is the exchange of items of value between Persons or Companies. Any
exchange of money for a product, service or information is considered a deal of Commerce. The
Internet and an efficient postal system have made International Commerce convenient for
Business as well as individuals. Education is developing inherent abilities and power of
students. It is the process by which society deliberately transmits its accumulated knowledge,
skill and values from one generation to another. Education in the largest sense is any act or
experience that has a formative effect on the mind, character or physical ability of an individual.

The following are new trends in commerce education: -

E-Commerce : E-Commerce involves conducting business using modern communication
instrument like the Internet,Fax,Telephone,E-data interchange,E-payment, Money transfer
system-Commerce provides multiple benefits to the consumers in the form of availability of
goods at lower cost, wider choice and save times. People or Consumer can buy goods with a
click of mouse button without moving out of their house or offices. Similarly, online services
such as Internet Banking, Tickets includes Airlines, Railway, Bus Bill Payment, Hotel Booking
etc. have been tremendous benefit for the customers.E-Commerce education has been
phenomenal in making a deep impact on highereducation. Growth in the Internet over the last
few decades has led to great impact on communication and research in the institutes. Many
MBA”s, Working Professionals, Administrators, Housewives and similar people who fell short of
time to go to a campus program have been able to benefit immensely from online sources.
E-learning: It has become an important mode of education. Since the regular courses in India
are getting very expensive and highly competitive, distance and online education is fast
developing as an amazing option for the students E-learning opportunities are immense in
India. Even the distance education programs are serving wonderfully. Distance learning can be
availed through various types such as interactive CD-ROM programs, Mobile learning programs,
Telecourses or Broadcast course via Television or Radio, Postal correspondence programs and
many more.
E-Governance: E-Governance is the future, many countries are looking forward to for a
corruption free government. E-government is one-way communication protocol whereas E-
governance is twoway communication protocol. The essence of E-governance is to reach the
beneficiary and ensure that the services intended to reach the desired individual has been met
with. There should be an auto-response system to support the essence of E-governance,
whereby the Government realizes the efficacy of its governance. E-governance is by the
governed, for the governed and of the governed.
E-Banking: Online banking (or Internet banking or E-banking) allows customers of a financial
institution to conduct financial transactions on a secured website operated by the institution,
which can be a retail bank,virtual bank, credit union or building society. To access a financial
institution's online banking facility, a customer having personal Internet access must register
with the institution for the service.Customers numbers are normally not the same as account
numbers, because number of accounts can be linked to the one customer number. The customer
will link to the customer number any of those accounts which the customer controls, which may
be cheque , savings, loan, credit card and other accounts. Customer numbers will also not be the
same as any debit or credit card issued by the financial institution to the customer.
E-Marketing: Electronic marketing is directly marketing a commercial message to a group of
people using email. In its broadest sense, every email sent to a potential or current customer
ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 144 | P a g e
could be considered email marketing. It usually involves using email to send ads, request
business, or solicit sales or donations, and is meant to build loyalty, trust, or brand awareness.
Email marketing can be done to either sold lists or current customer database.
Telemarketing: The number of manufacturers of various brands are using various television
channels to sale their products all over the world. The targeted customers are the viewers of the
television spread all over the world. The targeted sales are achieved by saving time, cost of sales
and avoiding total chain of distribution. An effective telemarketing process often involves two or
more calls. The first call (or series of calls) determines the customer’s needs. The final call (or
series) Prospective customers are identified by various means, including past purchase history,
previous requests for information, credit limit, and competition entry forms, and application
forms. Names may also be purchased from another company's consumer database or obtained
from a telephone directory or another public list. The qualification process is intended to
determine which customers are most likely to purchase the product or service.
Challenges and Opportunities in Commerce Education: Commerce is considered as one of
the most popular career options in India. Commerce education is the backbone of the business
and serial development of the Nation. This education stresses on developing the people and
making effective use of available resources. Commerce education develops the relationship of
people with one another. Commerce education covers wide area of business and society.
Commerce education provides to the business and society that how to use it for the betterment
of self and oneself. Commerce education gives to the people for democratic living, good
citizenship and proper utilization of resources. It provides skill oriented education to students
and society.
 Challenges and Strategies for controlling inflation and promoting growth;
 Emerging issue in global Economy, Commerce and Management
 .Internationalization of Financial Market in the World
 Role of Foreign Direct Investment and Foreign Institutional Investment.
 Reform in Indian and International Economic Sectors.
 Challenges and Strategies of IMF and WORLD BANK for International competition.
 Challenges and Strategies merger and acquisition strategies for Trade, Commerce
andIndustry in World Challenges and Strategies for commodities markets in the world and
in currency marketingInternational scenario.
 Challenges and Strategies for export and import of Trade, Commerce and Industries in
global scenario.
 Challenges and Strategies for Stock Market and Investors for International competition.
 Challenges and Strategies in Currency Market in International scenario.

Opportunities
 At the undergraduate level, Bachelor of Commerce, a three year full time course.
 And Master of Commerce at the postgraduate level. After completing course in the field of
Commerce, a student can join any private institute or government organization as a
specialist in any of the Commerce stream and they can also pursue professional courses
such as Company Secretary, Chartered Accountant, and ICWA, MBA.
 A graduate in Commerce can also opt careers in financial services as a FinancialConsultants,
Stock Brokers, Merchant Bankers, Budget Consultant, Financial Portfolio Manager, Project
Formulation Manager, Tax Consultants.
 Careers in Management are also available in the field of Personnel Management, Production
Management, Financial Management, Marketing Management, and Material Management,
other areas of Management such as Hotel Management, Hospital Management, Tourism
Management, Event Management, Office Management, Export and Import Management. In
the Bank, call for Commerce graduates and post graduates with specialization in Banking.

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 145 | P a g e

 Insurance Companies can also call for Commerce graduates and post graduates with
specialization in Insurance. Industrial segment are also call for Commerce graduates and
post graduates with specialization in accounting skill including Computer Technology.

CONCLUSION:
With a growing emphasis on information, global economy, Higher Education was viewed
as increasingly essential for the world’s population. Information Technology and Mobile
Technology is now forcing education sector to change according to the need of the time. The
most emerging dimension of the Business and Commerce education in the 21st century is the
need for Business School to use technology and make it integral part of course contents.
Education now becomes an industry, there is explosion of technologies and knowledge in all
sphere. The quality of Commerce Education has become a major marketing issue in the
changing environment. As per specialization, a practical training should be provided to the
students. By making relevant and practical oriented Commerce Education, we may impact
global competitiveness to our students. As a part of the society the social awareness among
Commerce students is the emerging need of present time.

REFERENCES
1. Indian Higher Education, K.B.Powar, Concept Publishing House, New Delhi.2002
2. Business Education in India, V.Gupta and K.Gollakota, IBATJournals of Management.
3. Net Impact, Mission Statement, Electronic Document.
4. Making the Grade- Online Education in the United States2006, Allen, I.E. and Seaman.
5. Commerce Education, A.B.Ghosh, Sultan Chand and Company, New Delhi.1969
6. Emerging Trends in Commerce and Management, Santosh Gupta, Published in University
News41 (05) 2003
7. Recent Trends in Commerce and Management Education, Dr.V.V.Khanzode, Strlin Publishers
Private Limited.1990
8. National Policy on Education1986 an Appraisal, DoabaHouse, New Delhi.1989
9. Commerce and Management Education in India,Ed.K.V.Sivayya,Ashish Publishing House,
New Delhi.1990
PALLIATIVE DRUG AWARENESS AND
UTILIZATION AMONG ATHLETES IN
MAHARASHTRA

Dr. Mayur Mohanrao Shinde1 and Amar

Anil Tupe2
1Director of Physical Education,

Padmabhushan Vasantraodada Patil

Mahavidyalaya, Kavathe Mahankal
Dist. Sangli.
2Director of physical education

Dr. Patangrav kadam mahavidyalay sangaliwadi

ABSTRACT
The purpose of study was the Palliative Drug Awareness and Utilization among Athletes
in Maharashtra and also to examine the extent to which sports players in Maharashtra have
actually Awareness and Utilization palliative drugs. The descriptive survey research design was
used in this study. A total of 830 Athletes were randomly sampled from Athletes in Maharashtra.
A developed standard questionnaire designed by the researcher was used to collect relevant
data for the study. The data collected were analyzed using descriptive statistics percentage. The
results showed that Athletes have some extant Palliative Drug Awareness, some extant

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 146 | P a g e

Knowledge of effects of Palliative Drug and Athletes more Utilization of Palliative drugs. It was
therefore recommended that the athletes in Maharashtra should intensify its campaign and
public enlightenment program to educate the Athletes and handlers on the health consequences
of effect of Palliative drugs.

KEYWORDS: Development, validation, inventory, palliative drugs.

INTRODUCTION
The use of drugs to enhance performance in sport has been reported during the ancient
Games held in 668 BC (Holt, Erotokritou-Mulligan and Sonksen 2009). A drug is a chemical
substance that, when absorbed into the body, can alter normal bodily function. Many drugs have
been banned in sport if they are deemed to provide an unfair advantage pose a risk or are seen
to violate the spirit of sport. There are many different drugs and supplements used by athletes
to enhance performance. Some of the more common classes are blood doping, anabolic steroids,
stimulants, growth hormones, amino acids, and proteins (Johnson 1998). Several of these
products although initially believed to be ineffective have been shown to be good at increasing
strength, decreasing fatigue, and building muscle. However, some of these drugs are banned for
athletes and referred as doping. Despite of ban on these drugs they are readily available through
prescription, supplements, local gyms and the internet.
The International Olympic Committee (IOC), and more recently, the world Anti-Doping
Agency (WADA) have been leading the way in the battle against drugs in sport. It has been
reported that the driving force to use these drugs by athletes was desire to achieve success,
glory and wealth (Bloodworth et al., 2012). Further, various studies have demonstrated that
body appearance is a bigger priority than competing in sports for non-competent young
sportsperson in schools and clients of gymnasiums, as a result of which they make use of doping
agents (Kindlundh et al., 1998; Striegel, 2006; Baker et al., 2006; Mallia et al.,2013). Moreover,
doping agents have been misused in approximately 1% of population of America and Sweden
(Tokish et al., 2004; Sjoqvist, Garle and Rane 2008). Also, it was estimated that around 5% of
high school students of the United States had already used doping agents for enhancing their
growth (Saugy et al., 2006).
Doping in sports means use of banned substances or drugs. It is banned by both national
and international sports governing bodies, and the World Anti-Doping Agency (WADA), which
runs an extensive testing programme and initiatives designed to foster anti-doping attitudes
(Bloodworth and McNamee, 2010). In spite of ban on use of performance enhancing drugs,
doping in sporting events is widespread across the world (Morente-Sánchez and Zabala, 2013).
Most of the time drugs are used by sportsperson to enhance performance, personal appearance
or to reduce pain (Ehrnborg and Rosen, 2009; Petroczi and Aidman, 2008). The first record of
using performance enhancing drug is as early as 668 B.C. (Holt, ErotokritouMulligan and
Sonksen, 2009). Though drugs used by sportsman are useful tools in sports medicine but many
of the drugs used by them pose a high health risk. In fact, drugs may not be the problem as long
as they are being used in a legal prescribed manner, under the supervision of trained medical
professionals.
Earlier studies reported that the main motive of use of performance enhancing drugs are
gaining an edge on competitors, increasing muscular strength and endurance, and reducing
recovery time from injuries (Nocelli, Kamber, Francois, Gmel & Marti, 1998; Petroczi & Aidman,
2009). Further, doping in Athletes may be due to improve body image and desire to win
(Ehrnborg and Rosen, 2009; Petroczi and Aidman, 2009).
The use of performance enhancing drugs such as Palliative is increasing rapidly despite
of ill effects on health and well-being. Although sports authorities publish list of banned drugs
every year, however, it is not known whether the sportsmen are aware of the banned drugs.
Hence, the researcher has planned this study entitled “Palliative Drug Awareness and
Utilization among Athletes in Maharashtra”.
ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 147 | P a g e
 The use of performance enhancing drugs in adolescents appears to be prevalent may be
due to the characteristics and physiological effects (Knotts 2000; Yusuf, 2010). Most athletes
take drugs to enhance their physical performance in an attempt to prevent them falling behind
other competitors, even if it does mean damaging their health and risking their sports careers.
Other athletes may use drugs to help them wind down and relax, to cope with the pressures and
stress associated with a constant battle to win all the time, to boost their own self-esteem and
confidence, to mask the pain of certain sports injuries, to control and reduce weight, and to hide
the use of any other banned substances. In many sporting events such as cycling, track and field
events, swimming and weight lifting competitions these drugs are used to enhance
performance.

Following types of drugs and methods are used by athletes to enhance performance:
Lean mass builders are used by athletes to increase the growth of muscle and lean body
mass, to reduce recovery time after an injury, and are sometimes used to reduce body fat.
Examples of lean mass builders include anabolic steroids, beta-2 antagonists and various human
hormones. Stimulants are used by athletes to increase alertness, improve concentration,
increase aggressiveness, decrease fatigue and shorten reaction time. Relaxants are used in such
sports as archery where a steady hand is requires, and also by those athletes feeling excessive
nervousness or discomfort which is hard to overcome. Examples of relaxants often used include
alcohol, beta blockers and marijuana. Diuretics are often used in sports such as wrestling where
a certain weight restriction needs to be met, as they remove water from the athlete’s body. In
many cases masking drugs are used by athletes in order to disguise the use and prevent the
detection of illegal classes of drugs in sport. One method of performance enhancement used by
athletes is blood doping. This involves removing red blood cells from the blood and replacing
those weeks later to increase the overall number of red blood cells in the blood. This increases
the amount of oxygen that the body can therefore carry and is extremely beneficial in long
distance running. Painkillers are often used by athletes in order to mask the pain of an injury
and so as they can continue to compete and perform beyond that of their normal pain threshold.
Despite the side effects of Palliative Athletes may use it to stop the pain resulting from
injury. This can be dangerous as these substances merely hide the pain. An athlete who
continues to exercise on the injured part risks further damage to that part. Scientists have
discovered Palliative receptors in the brain, along with natural pain killing substances produced
by the body called endorphins. Palliative behave like endorphins and act on or bind to, the
receptors to produce their associated effects.
Palliative also have other effects on athletes such as addiction, loss of balance and
coordination, nausea and vomiting, loss of sleep and depression, breathing becomes slower,
decreased heart rate, decreased ability to concentrate and constipation.
The use of performance enhancement drugs may probably due to the pressure placed on
athletes in all forms, from family, peers, media, coaches, and fans. The pressure placed on
athletes to win and set personal bests has resulted in increased drug use among various
athletes. Therefore, in this study the investigator will attempt to find out the status of use of
Palliative among athletes and their Awareness regarding Utilization of Palliative drugs.

OBJECTIVES OF THE STUDY

This study has been conducted with following objectives
 To assess the Awareness of Palliative drugs by Athletes in Maharashtra.
 To assess the Awareness of effect of Palliative drugs by Athletes in Maharashtra.
 To assess the Utilization of Palliative drugs by Athletes in Maharashtra.

METHODOLOGY
The descriptive survey research design was used in this study. Where the newly

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 148 | P a g e

developed questionnaire on “Awareness about Palliative drugs” has been administered to the
representative sample of the population (Maharashtra). This survey research has helped to
enable information and describe present situation exists on the status of Awareness of Palliative
drugs, Awareness of effect of Palliative drugs and Utilization of Palliative drugs being practiced
by the Athletes.
The population of this study includes all Athletes in Maharashtra, who have represented,
inter-university, all India inter-university sports competitions and have an experience of at least
five years in the field. With the use of random sampling technique participants from different
types of sports have been recruited for this study. The participants have been Athletes (n=830),
aged 18-27 years, participated in individual and team sports attended inter-university, all India
inter-university sports competitions. Data for this study were collected using a standard
questionnaire designed by the researcher. The questionnaire was designed to assess the
Awareness of Palliative drugs, Awareness of effect of Palliative drugs, Utilization of Palliative
drugs. While questionnaire was administered on the subject they were briefed about the aim
and objectives of the of the study. Further, they were assured about the confidentiality of their
information. The data collected for the study were analyzed using both descriptive statistics of
percentage.

Result
Table 1 to assess the Awareness of Palliative drugs by Athletes in Maharashtra.
Palliative heard Seen about Never Utilization Never use Total
drugs about Palliative heard about about
method Palliative drugs about Palliative Palliative
drugs Palliative drugs drugs
drugs currently
N % N % N % N % N % N %
Tablets 198 23.8 134 16.1 99 11.9 296 35.6 103 12.4 830 100
Syrup 123 14.8 134 16.1 253 30.4 23 2.7 297 35.7 830 100
Smoke 278 33.4 129 15.5 312 37.5 5 0.6 106 12.7 830 100
Via
239 28.8 219 26.3 89 10.7 176 21.2 107 12.8 830 100
Injection
Creams 183 22 117 14.1 89 10.7 306 36.8 135 16.2 830 100
Powders 286 34.4 116 13.9 193 23.2 9 1 226 27.2 830 100
Table 1 show that there is a wide gap between having heard about, Seen about, never
heard and actually using it. While large number of respondents heard about Palliative drugs
method, seen about Palliative drugs method and Utilization about Palliative drugs currently,
only small number of respondents Seen about Palliative drugs method and never using
substance Palliative drags. As table 1 show players heard about Palliative drugs method by
Tablets (23.8%), syrup (14.8%), Smoke (33.4%), via injection (28.8%), creams (22%), and
powders (34.4%). Athletes seen about Palliative drugs method by Tablets (16.1%), syrup
(16.1%), Smoke (15.5%), via injection (26.3%), creams (14.1%), powders (13.9%). Athletes
Utilization about Palliative drugs method by Tablets (35.6%), syrup (2.7%), Smoke (0.6%), via
injection (21.2%), creams (36.8%), and powders (1%). athletes Utilization great extent of
Tablets, creams and via injection.

Table 2 to assess the Knowledge of effect of Palliative drugs by Athletes in Maharashtra

heard about never heard Utilization no Total
Palliative about substance response
drugs Palliative Palliative
drugs drugs

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 149 | P a g e

 N % N % N % N % N %
Reduce Tension 153 18.4 256 30.8 45 5.4 376 45.3 830 100

Recovery Injury 151 18.2 259 31.2 34 4.1 386 46.5 830 100
Reduce Pain 326 39.3 103 12.4 286 34.5 115 13.9 830 100
Continue Training
Even After Serious 339 40.8 96 11.6 149 18.0 246 29.6 830 100
Injury
Relive Pain And
342 41.2 86 10.4 289 34.8 113 13.6 830 100
Create Relaxation
Damage Nervous 81 9.8 328 39.5 24 2.9 397 47.8 830 100
System
Decrease Heart 76 9.2 379 45.7 13 1.6 362 43.6 830 100
Rate
Overdoses Can
65 7.8 389 46.9 0 0.0 376 45.3 830 100
Cause Death
Enhance 184 22.2 216 26.0 159 19.2 271 32.7 830 100
Performance
Table 2 show that there is a wide gap between having heard about or never heard and
actually using it. While large number of respondents no response and never heard about
Palliative drags, only small number of respondents heard about Palliative drags and Utilization
substance Palliative drags.

Table 3 to assess the Utilization of Palliative drugs by Athletes in Maharashtra.

use Palliative No of player %
per day 32 3.9
per week 53 6.4
practices time 96 11.6
only hard practices time 36 4.3
injury time 73 8.8
match time 117 14.1
after competition 69 8.3
no use 227 27.3
No response 127 15.3
Total 830 100

Table 2 show that 27.3% Athletes no use of Palliative drags 14.1% Athletes use of
Palliative drags at match time 11.6% Athletes use of Palliative drags at practice time8.8%
Athletes use of Palliative drags at injury time 8.3% Athletes use of Palliative drags at after
competition 6.4% Athletes use of Palliative drags at per week 4.3% Athletes use of Palliative
drags at only hard practices time and 15.3% Athletes as no response.

CONCLUSION
Based on the finding of this study, the results showed that Athletes have some extant
Knowledge of Palliative drugs, some extant Knowledge of effect of Palliative drugs and Athletes
more use of Palliative drugs. It was therefore recommended that the University in Maharashtra
should intensify its campaign and public enlightenment program to educate the Athletes and
handlers on the health consequences of effect of Palliative drugs.

REFERENCES
ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 150 | P a g e
1. Adegboyega, Joseph. Afolayan. (2012). Knowledge and use of performance enhancing drugs
among Nigeria elite athletes. Journal of Applied Chemistry, 1(5), 31-38.
2. Atkinson, Ryan. W. (2011). Attitudes toward performance enhancing drugs: division ii male
athletes (Unpublished master’s thesis). Eastern New Mexico University, Mexico.
3. Baker, J. S., Graham, M. R., & Davies, B. (2006). Steroid and prescription medicine abuse in
the health and fitness community: A regional study. Eur. J. Intern. Med., 17, 479–484.
4. Bera, T. K. (1990). Bera’s tests on sports anxiety, motivation and level of aspiration. (Doctoral
Dissertation), Dept. of Physical Education, University of Kalyani: West Bengal, India.
5. Bera, T.K. (1993). A study on physical performance in athletics and some of its affective
psychological determinants of teacher-trainees. Doctoral Dissertation, Dept. of Physical
Education, University of Kalyani: West Bengal, India.
6. Bhattacharya, D., & Bhattacharya, A. (1977). Evaluation and measurement in education.
Calcutta : Blacki (India) Employees Cooperative Industrial Society Ltd.
7. Bloodworth, A. J., Petroczi, A., Bailey, R., Pearce, G., & McNamee, M.J. (2012). Doping and
supplementation: The attitudes of talented young athletes. Scand. J. Med. Sci Sports, 22,
293–301.
8. Bloodworth, A., & McNamee, M. (2010). Clean Olympians? Doping and anti-doping: The
views of talented young British athletes. Int J Drug Policy, 21(4), 276-282.
9. Ehrnborg, C., & Rosen, T. (2009). The psychology behind doping in sport. Growth
Hormone & IGF Research, 19, 285-287.
10. Gradidge, Philippe., Coopoo, Yoga., & Constantinou, Demitri. (2011). Prevalence of
performance-enhancing substance use by Johannesburg male adolescents involved in
competitive high school sports. Archives of Exercise Health and Disease, 2 (2),114-119.
11. Gradidge, Philippe., Coopoo, Yoga., & Constantinou, Demitri. (2010). Attitudes and
perceptions towards performance enhancing substance use in Johannesburg boys high
school sport. SAJSM, 22(2), 11-15.
12. Guilford, J. P., & Fruchter, (1973). Fundamental statistics in psychology and education. New
Delhi: McGraw Hill Book Co., 123-145.
13. Hill, Torri. P. (2002). Perceptions of banned drugs in athletics in relation to sport
participation, gender, and socioeconomic status (Unpublished master’s thesis). West
Virginia University, Morgantown, West Virginia.
14. Holt, R. I. G., Erotokritou-Mulligan, I., & Sonksen, P. H. (2009). The history of doping and
growth hormone abuse in sport. Growth Hormone & IGF Research, 19, 320-326.
15. Johnson, R. J., et al. (1988). Current review of sports medicine. (2nd edition). Philadelphia:
Current Medicine Inc..
16. Kindlundh, A. M., Isacson, D. G., Berglund, L., & Nyberg, F. (1998). Doping among high
school students in Uppsala, Sweden: A presentation of the attitudes, distribution, side
effects, and extent of use. Scand. J. Soc. Med., 26, 71–74.
17. Knotts, G. R. (2000). The central nervous system stimulants in drug abuse, Journal of
American School Health, 6(10), 535–356.
18. Levent, Ozdemir., Naim, Nur., Ihsan, Bagcivan., Okay, Bulut., Haldun, Sumer., & Gunduz,
Tezeren. (2005). Doping and performance enhancing drug use in athletes living in sivas,
mid-anatolia: a brief report. Journal of Sports Science and Medicine, 4, 248-252.
19. Mallia, L., Lucidi, F., Zelli, A., & Violani, C. (2013). Doping attitudes and the use of legal and
illegal performance-enhancing substances among Italian adolescents. J. Child. Adolesc.
Subst. Abuse, 22, 179–190.
20. Mazen, El-Hammadi., & Bashar, Hunien. (2013). Exploring knowledge, attitudes and abuse
concerning doping in sport among Syrian pharmacy students. Pharmacy, 1, 94-106.
21. Molobe, Ikenna. Daniel. (2012). Knowledge, attitude and practice on drug abuse among
sports men and women in Lagos state, Nigeria. International Journal of Medicine and
Medical Sciences, 2(3), 77-85.

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 151 | P a g e

22. Morente-Sánchez, J., & Zabala, M. (2013). Doping in sport: A review of elite athletes’
attitudes, beliefs and knowledge. Sports Med, 43(6), 395-411.
23. Nocelli, L., Kamber, M., Francois, Y., Gmel, G., & Marti, B. (1998). Discordant public perception
of doping in elite versus recreational sport in Switzerland. Clinical Journal of Sports Medicine,
8, 195-200.
24. Nolte, K., Steyn, B. J. M., Kruger, P. E., & Fletcher, L. (2014). Doping in sport: Attitudes,
beliefs and knowledge of competitive high-school athletes in Gauteng Province. S Afr J SM,
26(3),81-86.
25. Petroczi, A., & Aidman, E. (2008). Psychological drivers in doping: The life-cycle model of
performance enhancement. Subtance Abuse Treatment, Prevention, and Policy, 3(7), 1747-
1759.
26. Petroczi, A., & Aidman, E. (2009). Measuring explicit attitude toward doping: Review of the
psychometric properties of the Performance Enhancement Attitude Scale. Psychology of Sport
and Exercise, 10, 390-396.
27. Saugy, M., Robinson, N., Saudan, C., Baume, N., Avois, L., & Mangin, P. (2006). Human growth
hormone doping in sport. Br. J. Sports Med., 40 (Suppl 1), 35–39.
28. Sjoqvist, F., Garle, M., & Rane, A. (2008). Use of doping agents, particularly anabolic
steroids, in sports and society. Lancet, 371, 1872–1882.
29. Somerv, S. J., & Lewis, Ille. M. (2005). Accidental breaches of the doping regulations in
sport: is there a need to improve the education of sportspeople ? Br J Sports Med, 39, 512–
516.
30. Striegel, H., Simon, P., Frisch, S., Roecker, K., Dietz, K., Dickhuth, H. H., & Ulrich, R. (2006).
Anabolic ergogenic substance users in fitness-sports: A distinct group supported by the
health care system. Drug Alcohol. Depend., 81, 11–19.
31. Takahashi, Masato., Tatsugi, Yukitoshi., & Kohno, Tosihiko. (2013). Investigation of the
attitudes of japanese physical educational university students toward doping in sports. J
Sports Med Doping Stud, 3(1), 1-6.
32. Tokish, J. M., Kocher, M. S., & Hawkins, R. J. (2004). Ergogenic aids: A review of basic
science, performance, side effects, and status in sports. Am. J. Sports Med., 32, 1543–1553.
33. Yusuf, F. A. (2010). Factors influencing substance abuse among undergraduate students in
Osun State, African Research Review, 4(17), 330-340.

COMPARISON OF SOME PREDICTION INTERVALS FOR A FUTURE OBSERVATION FROM

WEIBULL DISTRIBUTION

S. K. Powara,*, M. K. Patilb
aDepartment of Statistics, Smt. Kasturbai Walchand College of Arts and Science, Sangli.
bDepartment of Statistics, P.V.P. Mahavidyalaya, Kavathe Mahankal.
*Corresponding author. E-mail address: [email protected]

ABSTRACT
In this article, a comparative study is attempted to compare the existing methods for
problem of constructing prediction interval (PI) for a future observation from Weibull

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 152 | P a g e

distribution. A Monte Carlo simulation-based study reveals that apart from being
computationally simple, Generalized Variable approach method performs uniformly best
even for the sample size as small as n = 5. T he results are illustrated using practical example.

KEYWORDS : Prediction interval, Box-Cox transformation, Generalized Variable method,

Comparative study.

1. INTRODUCTION
A random variable X is said to follow a two-parameter Weibull distribution W (a, b)
if its probability density function (pdf) is of the form,

where a is the scale parameter and b is the shape parameter. The Weibull
distribution is extensively used in reliability and survival analysis. One good property of
Weibull distribution is that its failure rate function is either increasing or decreasing
depending on the value of shape parameter b. Weibull mean is µ = aΓ (1 + b−1), it has a
closed form reliability function R(t) = exp (−(t/a)b) and its failure rate function is h(t)
= btb−1/ab. All these quantities are of crucial importance in reliability analysis. We refer to
Heo et al (2001), Jeng (2003), Murthy et al (2003), Yang and Xie (2003) for recent
applications based on Weibull distribution.
A PI is a confidence interval for a future observation from the parent population
under consideration. In this paper, the existing methods for problem of constructing
prediction interval for a future observation from Weibull distribution are compared based
upon a simulation with respect to expected coverage probability and expected length of PI.
The study reveals that the Generalized Variable approach method uniformly outperforms
the existing methods particularly for small samples.
The article is organized as follows. Section 2 gives brief review of the existing
methods in the literature for PI estimation of a single future observation from Weibull
distribution. Section 3 presents details of the comparison among these methods based on
simulation study. Section 4 illustrates the methods applied to real data sets. Section 5
provides concluding remarks.

2 EXISTING METHODS
In this section we take a review of the existing methods that are available in the
literature for PI for a future observation from a Weibull distribution. For notational
simplicity, methods are represented by an abbreviation mentioned in the parenthesis against
the name of each method. In the sequel, X = (X1, X2, ..., Xn ) denotes a random sample from
a Weibull(a, b) distribution and x denotes an observed value of X.
2.1 Fertig, Meyer and Mann method (FMM)
Fertig, Meyer and Mann (1980) proposed a statistic Q = ( ũ− w)/d̃ where ũ and d̃ are
best linear invariant estimators (see Mann, Schafer and Singpurwalla (1974)) of the location
parameter u = log(a) and the scale parameter d = b−1 of the type-I extreme value
distribution respectively and w is the future observation from the same extreme value
distribution. One can use maximum likelihood estimators (mle) of u and d as particular case
of ũ and d˜. Authors have tabulated simulated percentiles of the statistic Q and pro- posed a
(1−α)100% PI given by [L,U ] for future observation z from a Weibull distribution as,

[L, U ] = [exp(ũ − Qα/2 d˜), exp(ũ − Q1- α/2 d˜)]

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 153 | P a g e
where Qα is the 100αth percentile of distribution of the statistic Q.

2.2 Tziafetas Method (TM)

Tziafetas (1987) has obtained lower and upper limits L and U of the (1 −
α)100% PI for a future observation z from a Weibull distribution using bayesian approach
as the solutions to the following two equations,

where h(z | x) is a predictive density function given by

and Sb,z = Sb +zb. That is, L and U are (α/2)th, and (1−(α/2))th quantiles of the predictive
density h(z | x). The solution for L and U resorts on numerical methods and the shape
parameter is assumed to be known.

2.3 Yang, See and Xie method (YSX)

Yang, See and Xie (2003) used a Box-Cox transformation

to Weibull random variable X for approximation to Normality and used a solution λ =

0.2654b that minimizes the Kullback-Leibler information between the distribution of C
and the Normal distribution with the same mean and variance as that of C. Using Normal
distribution based PI on C and transforming back to Weibull, the resultant PI for a
Weibull future observation z is given by

where C̄ and sc are sample mean and standard deviation of the transformed vector C
using above transformation on x. When the shape parameter b is unknown, one can
estimate the parameter λ by λ̂ = 0.2654 b̂ where b̂ is mle of b and the corresponding PI for a
Weibull future observation z is given by

2.4 Jayawardhana and Samaranayake method (JS)

Jayawardhana and Samaranayake (2009) have obtained prediction limits for a future
Weibull observation using maximum likelihood predictive density approach proposed by
Lejeune and Faulkenbemy (1982). The corresponding (1 − α)100% PI is given by

where βˆ = k b̂ is bias adjusted mle of b and the values of k as a function of the

sample size n have been tabulated by the authors.
ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 154 | P a g e
2.5 Generalized Variable approach-based method (GV)
Krishnamoorthy et al. (2009) proposed PI for a Weibull future observation z as

where and . They

computed value for using the
following simulation study.
For the given values of n and α, the
following procedure is repeated N (say
100000) times.
(I) n independent and identically distributed (i.i.d.) random variables are
generated from the extreme-value (0,1) distribution and mles , are computed.
(II) For the given , , is generated from the extreme-value (0,1) distribution and
is computed.

Then 100αth percentile of the

generated values of is the estimate of
.

3 COMPARISON OF THE METHODS

We have developed MATLAB Macros for computation of all the above PIs for future
Weibull observation and can be made available on request. We compare above discussed five
methods with respect to expected lengths and coverage probabilities based on a simulation
study.

3.1 Details of the simulation procedure

The comparison of the methods is attempted based on the simulated expected
length and coverage probabilities of PI, for various fixed sample sizes n and α = 0.05. For
the values of the scale parameter a = 1 and shape parameter b = 0.3, 0.5, 1.0, 3.0, 30, 50 and
for each of the fixed sample size n = 5, 15, 30; 10000 simulated samples are generated from
Weibull(a, b) distribution. For each of these 10000 samples, lower and upper prediction
limits Li and Ui ;i = 1, 2, ..., 10000, for each of the five methods described in sections 2 are
obtained. Finally, the simulated expected lengths of PI obtained by averaging the 10000
quantities Ui − Li; i = 1, 2, ..., 10000 and the expected coverage, which is proportion of the
intervals that covered the simulated single future observation from Weibull(a, b) are
computed.

3.2 Results of the simulation study:

As mentioned above, comparison of all these methods is done based on the coverage
probability and expected length of the PI.
Tables 1, 2 and 3 below report the percentages of simulated coverage probabilities and
expected lengths for 95% PI for all five methods discussed in section 2, for sample sizes n = 5,
15, 30.

The following prominent facts are clearly visible from the Tables.
1. Tziafetas Method (TM), Jayawardhana and Samaranayake method (JS) and Fertig,
ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 155 | P a g e
 Meyer and Mann method (FMM) have very poor coverage prob- abilities for all b > 0 and
all sample sizes and are not recommended.
2. Generalized Variable (GV) approach based method and Yang, See and Xie method (YSX)
have excellent coverage probabilities for all b > 0 even for as small sample sizes as
5.
3. Expected lengths of PI of GV method are uniformly smaller than expected lengths of
PI of YSX method for all b > 0, and all sample sizes.

A similar simulation study was carried out for the values of scale parameter a = 5,
10 and similar results are observed.

4 ANALYSIS OF REAL DATA SETS

We illustrate above methods with two real life examples with high and moderate
skewness.
Example 1: We extract the following data consisting of 20 observations on Nickel
concentration 8.8, 19.0, 39.0, 3.1, 1.0, 81.5, 151.0, 942.0, 262.0, 331.0, 27.0, 85.6, 56.0, 14.0, 21.4,
10.0, 8.7, 64.4, 578.0, 637.
The Kolmogorov-Smirnov test to above data set for fitting Weibull distribution gave
p-value(2-tail) 0.75. This indicates that Weibull is a very good model for above data set.
The mles of the parameters are â = 118.72 and b̂ = 0.62 respectively. The mle b̂ indicates
that the above data set is highly skewed.
The 95% PIs and their lengths using the above five methods are as follows:

Method 95% PI Length of PI

GV [0.13 ,1158.40 ] 1158.27

YSX [0.00 ,1188.50 ] 1188.50

JS [0.23 ,1195.8] 1195.57
FMM [1311.90, 2876.90] 1565.00
TM [0.00 ,1414.90] 1414.90

Notice that GV based PI is shortest, as is expected based on the comparative study

reported in the previous section.

Example 2: Here we analyze a real data set which are the results of an experiment extracted
from Nelson (1972a). In this experiment, 11 specimens of a particular type of electrical
insulating fluid are subjected to a constant voltage stress of 30 kilovats. The data set
representing the failure time of each specimen
is:17.05,22.66,21.02,175.88,139.07,144.12,20.46,43.40,194.90,47.30, 7.74.
The Kolmogorov-Smirnov test for testing distribution of above data set resulted the
p-value(2-tail) 0.61 under the assumption of Weibull distribution indicating that Weibull is a
good model for above data set. The mles of the parameters are â = 77.58 and b̂ = 1.06
respectively. Note that the mle b̂ indicates that the above data set is moderately skewed.
The 95% PIs with their lengths using above methods for this data set are:

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 156 | P a g e

 Method 95% PI Length of PI
GV [0.42 ,361.44 ] 361.02

YSX [0.00 ,368.74 ] 368.74

JS [ 1.36 ,364.80] 363.44
FMM [330.05, 525.80] 195.75
TM [0.00 ,450.87] 450.87

Note that the lengths of all methods are more or less similar except FMM method,
however on account of its poor performance with respect to coverage, use of this method is not
recommended. Referring to the results of the simulation study and the observed PI lengths
for the above two real data sets, we recommend using the PIs given by GV in practice.

Table 1
Percentages of simulated coverage probabilities and expected lengths of 95% PI for a
future observation from W (1, b) for n = 5 and b = 0.3, 0.5, 1, 3, 30, 50.

Method 0.3 0.5 b1 3 30 50

GV1 95.90 95.04 95.04 95.40 95.54 95.38

(4929.31) (83.57) (6.83) (1.75) (0.55) (0.44)

GV2 95.88 95.28 95.32 95.26 95.46 95.12
(1425.03) (55.54) (6.53) (1.65) (0.45) (0.40)
YSX1 96.74 96.82 96.90 96.62 96.96 96.88
(6700.00) (87.00) (7.15) (1.83) (1.06) (1.03)
YSX2 98.10 97.54 97.92 97.92 98.02 97.66
(1657.87) (60.03) (6.82) (1.83) (1.06) (1.04)
JS 93.48 93.32 93.22 93.00 93.48 93.52
(5200.00) (82.00) (7.20) (1.55) (0.19) (0.12)
FMM 90.02 90.04 89.30 89.98 90.28 89.54
(60.00) (37.00) (4.80) (1.34) (0.17) (0.10)
TM 81.87 81.93 86.02 86.1 87.06 86.16
(29000.00) (78.00) (6.35) (1.94) (1.78) (1.69)

Values in parenthesis indicate expected length of the corresponding PI.

1 : Results are obtained when shape parameter b is unknown.
2 :Results are obtained when shape parameter b is known.

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 157 | P a g e

 Table 2
Percentages of simulated coverage probabilities and expected lengths of 95% PI for a
future observation from W (1, b) for n = 15 and b = 0.3, 0.5, 1, 3, 30, 50.

Method 0.3 0.5 b 3.0 30 50

1.0
GV1 95.40 95.70 95.64 95.68 95.88 95.78

(244.72) (22.97) (4.49) (1.41) (0.19) (0.12)

GV2 95.76 95.14 95.84 95.46 94.94 95.92
(209.52) (22.03) (4.51) (1.40) (0.21) (0.13)
YSX1 97.40 97.58 97.26 97.61 97.68 97.64
(260.00) (24.00) (4.63) (1.64) (1.05) (1.03)
YSX2 98.12 97.94 97.82 97.78 97.66 97.68
(238.04) (23.25) (4.61) (1.64) (1.05) (1.03)
JS 93.90 93.90 94.10 94.86 94.48 93.94
(220.00) (22.00) (4.42) (1.34) (0.17) (0.10)
FMM 89.68 90.54 90.44 90.62 90.10 89.90
(76.00) (16.00) (4.06) (1.76) (1.29) (1.37)
TM 82.60 82.65 92.70 92.90 93.04 94.04
(220.00) (18.00) (2.95) (1.82) (1.63) (1.62)

Table 3
Percentages of simulated coverage probabilities and expected lengths of 95% PI for a
future observation from W (1, b) for n = 30 and b = 0.3, 0.5, 1, 3, 30, 50.

Method 0.3 0.5 b 3.0 30 50

1.0
GV1 95.26 95.26 95.42 95.94 95.26 95.78

(134.71) (17.84) (4.05) (1.33) (0.18) (0.11)

GV2 95.24 95.80 95.64 95.50 94.72 95.76
(129.18) (17.48) (4.07) (1.33) (0.18) (0.11)
YSX1 97.56 97.66 95.51 95.51 95.40 95.56
(150.00) (19.00) (4.15) (1.34) (0.17) (0.11)
YSX2 97.92 97.82 97.86 97.88 97.82 97.80
(140.48) (18.32) (4.17) (1.60) (1.05) (1.03)

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 158 | P a g e

JS 94.32 94.56 94.52 94.46 95.26 94.98
(130.00) (17.00) (4.00) (1.29) (0.17) (0.10)
FMM 89.70 90.48 88.46 89.96 91.06 89.50
(51.00) (11.00) (3.25) (1.34) (0.79) (0.77)
TM 82.76 82.81 95.56 94.89 94.70 95.07
(100.00) (13.00) (2.96) (1.80) (1.65) (1.60)

5 CONCLUDING REMARKS
The GV method gives excellent prediction interval coverage probabilities even for
very small sample sizes, as small as 5 while maintaining minimum expected lengths. The end
points of this interval have a closed form expression in terms of mles of the parameters and
does not need to refer any tables. It clearly outperforms all other methods.

REFERENCES
1. Fertig, K.W., Meyer,M.E. and Mann,N.R. (1980). On constructing prediction intervals for
samples from a weibull or extreme value distribution. Technometrics 22, 567-573.
2. Heo, J.H., Salas, J.D.,Kim, K.D. (2001). Estimation of confidence intervals of quantiles
for the weibull distribution. Stochastic environmental research risk assessment 15, 284-
309.
3. Jayawardhana,A.A., Samaranayake,V.A. (2009). Prediction bounds for the weibull
distribution. Unpublished work.
4. Availableonline:http://interstat.statjournals.net/YEAR/2004/articles/0411002.pdf
Jeng, S.L. (2003). Exact sample size determination in a weibull test plan
5. when there is time censoring. Journal of statistical computation and simulation 73, 389-
408.
6. Leje
une, M., Faulkenberry, G.D. (1982). A simple predictive function. Journal of the
American statistical association 77, 654-657.
7. Mann, N.R., Schafer,R.E. and Singpurwalla, N.D. (1974). Methods for statistical analysis
of reliability and life data. New York: John wiley and sons.
8. Murthy, D.N.P., Xie, M., Jiang, R.Y. (2003). Weibull models (New York: Wiley).
9. Nelson, W. (1972a). Charts for Confidence Limits and Tests for Failure Rates. Journal of
Quality Technology 4, 190-195.
10. Tziafetas, G.N. (1987). On the construction of bayesian prediction limits for
11. the weibull distribution. Statistics,18,623-628.
12. Yang, Z.L., See, S.P., Xie, M. (2003). Transformation approaches for the construction of
weibull prediction interval. Computational statistics and data analysis 43, 357-368.
13. Krishnamoorthy, K., Lin, Y. and Xia, Y. (2009). Confidence limits and prediction limits for a
Weibull distribution. Journal of Statistical Planning and Inference 139, 2675-2684.

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 159 | P a g e

 “PSYCHOLOGICAL CONFLICTS IN ANITA DESAI’S IN CUSTODY AND ALICE WALKER’S THE
COLOR PURPLE: A COMPARATIVE STUDY”

Makrand Ramrao Wakde

Research Fellow
M.A(Eng)., B.Ed., SET(Eng).
Dr. Babasaheb Ambedkar Marathwada University Aurangabad. 431204.
Mob. No. 9423839757

Dr. Waghmare S. S.
Associate Professor & Research Guide
M.A., B.ED., M.Phil., Ph.D.
Swami Vivekanand Senior College Mantha. Pin- 431504
Email : [email protected]
Mob. No. 7588080862

ABSTRACT:
This comparative study delves into the profound psychological conflicts depicted in
Anita Desai's "In Custody" and Alice Walker's "The Color Purple. Through a meticulous analysis
of the characters and narrative structures, the study aims to unravel the unique ways in which
the authors explore and depict the psychological struggles faced by their protagonists within
the cultural and social contexts of their respective novels. Anita Desai’s "In Custody" delves into
the internal turmoil experienced by Deven Sharma, an Urdu poet and teacher, as he navigates
the clash between personal aspirations and societal expectations. This study scrutinizes the
nuanced layers of Sharma’s psyche, examining the impact of cultural dissonance and the quest
for artistic fulfillment on his mental state. Alice Walker’s "The Color Purple," on the other hand,
presents a powerful narrative centered around Celie, an African-American woman grappling
with oppression, abuse, and self-discovery. Through a comparative lens, this research paper
presents the unique psychological conflicts faced by Celie, exploring how her journey toward
self-empowerment is shaped by the intersectionality of race, gender, and socio-economic
factors. By drawing parallels and distinctions between the two novels, this study aims to
illuminate the diverse ways in which Desai and Walker employ literary techniques to articulate
and dissect the psychological conflicts of their characters. Additionally, the research seeks to
contribute to a broader understanding of the impact of cultural and societal influences on
individual mental landscapes in the context of post-colonial literature and African-American
literature. Anita Desai skillfully explores the intricacies of human emotions and the challenges
individuals face in a rapidly changing world, making the novel a compelling and introspective
read.

KEY WORDS: Psychological Conflict, Cultural dissonance, Self-discovery, and Intersectionality.

INTRODUCTION:
In Alice Walker's novel "The Color Purple," there are several instances of psychological
conflict experienced by the characters. The story is set in early 20th-century rural Georgia and
follows the life of Celie, an African-American woman who faces numerous challenges and
adversities. "In Custody" is a novel written by Anita Desai, first published in 1984. The story
revolves around the life of Deven Sharma, an Urdu language teacher and poet, who is tasked
with interviewing the renowned and reclusive Urdu poet Nur Shahjahanabadi. Throughout the
novel, several psychological conflicts arise, both within Deven Sharma and among other

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 160 | P a g e

characters. Here are some of the prominent psychological conflicts in both the novels:

1. Sexual Identity, Low Self-Esteem and Self-Discovery: Celie experiences psychological

conflict due to the severe physical and emotional abuse she endures from her father and later
her husband, Mr. __ (Albert). This abuse leads to a deep sense of worthlessness and low self-
esteem, as she believes she is unworthy of love and happiness. Celie also grapples with her
sexual identity and desires. She forms a close and affectionate bond with a woman named Shug
Avery, which leads to feelings of confusion and self-discovery. Celie's emotional and sexual
awakening challenges the societal norms and expectations imposed on her. Deven seeks
validation as a poet and yearns for recognition from his peers, the literary world, and his family.
His desire for approval drives some of his actions, leading him to make choices that may not
align with his true passion.
2. Cultural Conflict and Identity: Both novels explore the psychological conflict arising from
the characters' struggle with their cultural identity. In "In Custody," Deven, an Indian literature
professor, faces an internal conflict as he grapples with his passion for Urdu poetry and his
ambition to preserve his cultural heritage. On the other hand, in "The Color Purple," Celie, an
African-American woman in the early 20th century, struggles to find her voice and identity in a
racially oppressive society. Both characters confront the tension between conforming to societal
expectations and staying true to their cultural roots. The novel explores the characters'
relationships with religion. Celie's belief in God is initially influenced by her abusive father's
idea of God as a punishing figure, which creates internal conflicts regarding her faith. Over time,
she begins to develop her understanding of spirituality and God, leading to a personal
transformation.
3. Suppression of Voice: Another shared theme is the suppression of voice and agency. Deven
in "In Custody" is a timid and unassertive individual who allows others to dictate his choices,
leading to frustration and inner turmoil. Similarly, Celie in "The Color Purple" is silenced and
oppressed by the men in her life, which takes a severe toll on her psychological well-being. The
novels portray the damaging effects of silencing one's voice and the empowerment that comes
with reclaiming it. Deven Sharma grapples with an identity crisis as he struggles to find his place
as a poet and a teacher. He is passionate about Urdu poetry but is not recognized for his talents.
This lack of recognition creates self-doubt and uncertainty about his true calling.
4. Relationships and Emotional Conflict: The two novels also explore the complexities of
human relationships, leading to emotional conflicts within the characters. Deven's relationship
with his wife Sarla in "In Custody" is strained due to his inability to communicate effectively and
understand her needs. In "The Color Purple," Celie experiences various emotional conflicts,
including her complex bond with her abusive husband, Mr., and her profound connection with
Shug Avery, which challenges societal norms. The examination of intimate relationships adds
depth to the characters' psychological struggles.
5. Quest for Self-Discovery and Empowerment: Both Deven and Celie embark on a journey of
self-discovery and empowerment. Deven's pursuit to interview the renowned poet Nur is a
quest to fulfill his aspirations and, in turn, discover himself. In "The Color Purple," Celie's
emotional growth and self-realization through her letters and her connection with other strong
women demonstrate her path toward empowerment and liberation from her past trauma.
6. Impact of Socio-Cultural Norms: The novels also shed light on the impact of socio-cultural
norms on individuals' psychological well-being. In "In Custody," the traditional expectations and
demands of society weigh heavily on Deven, contributing to his inner conflict. Similarly, "The
Color Purple" portrays the devastating effects of racism, sexism, and abuse on Celie's mental and
emotional state. Deven Sharma is torn between his love for Urdu poetry, which represents his
cultural heritage, and the pressures of the modern world that values English literature and
Western influences. He faces an internal struggle to preserve his cultural identity while adapting
to changing times. Deven Sharma feels isolated from his family and society due to his artistic
pursuits and love for Urdu poetry. This isolation leads to loneliness and a sense of detachment
ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 161 | P a g e
from the people around him.

7. Racial and Gender Identity: The characters in "The Color Purple" also face conflicts related
to their racial and gender identities. The novel portrays the experiences of African-American
women in the early 20th century, highlighting the discrimination, marginalization, and
challenges they endured in a patriarchal society. Deven Sharma grapples with an identity crisis
as he struggles to find his place as a poet and a teacher. He is passionate about Urdu poetry but
is not recognized for his talents. This lack of recognition creates self-doubt and uncertainty
about his true calling.
In conclusion, Anita Desai's "In Custody" and Alice Walker's "The Color Purple" both
explore psychological conflicts arising from cultural identity, suppression of voice, emotional
struggles in relationships, quests for self-discovery, and the influence of socio-cultural norms.
By delving into these themes, both authors create rich narratives that resonate with readers and
offer profound insights into the human psyche. It provides some most significant aspects of
psychological conflicts in characterization.

REFERENCES:
1. Desai. A. "In Custody." Vintage. (1994).
2. Walker, A. "The Color Purple." Harcourt Brace Jovanovich. (1982)
3. Ang, S. I. . "Cultural Dissonance and Psychological Conflict in Anita Desai's In Custody."
Journal of Postcolonial Literature, 28(2), 145-162. (2003)
4. Mukherjee, R. "The Artistic Journey: A Study of Themes in Anita Desai's In Custody."
Indian Journal of Literature and Psychology, 22(3), 45-58. (1998)
5. Deshpande, A. "Cultural Identity and Psychological Struggles: A Comparative Analysis of
In Custody and The Color Purple." Comparative Literature Studies, 42(3), 267-285. (2005)
6. Khorana, M. The Third Space of Enunciation: Anita Desai's In Custody. Journal of
Commonwealth Literature, 39(2), 71-84. doi:10.1177/0021989404044475. (2004)
7. Pandey, M. Anita Desai's In Custody: A Psychoanalytical Perspective. Language in India,
12(11), 350-360. (2012)

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 162 | P a g e

 RATIONAL EMOTIVE BEHAVIOR THERAPY AS A MEDIUM FOR THE ELIMINATION
OF SUPERSTITIONS IN INDIA

Dr. Vinod Kamble

Asst. Professor, Department of Psychology,
P. V. P. Mahavidyalaya, Kavathe Mahankal, Sangli, Maharashtra
Contact No. 9822917283
Email: [email protected]

ABSTRACT:
This paper explores the potential of Rational Emotive Behavior Therapy (REBT) as an
effective medium for combating superstitions in India. Superstitions, deeply ingrained in Indian
society, often hinder rational thinking and decision-making, leading to adverse consequences.
REBT, a form of cognitive-behavioral therapy, focuses on identifying and challenging irrational
beliefs to promote rational thinking and emotional well-being. This paper reviews the
prevalence and impact of superstitions in India, outlines the principles of REBT, and proposes
its application in addressing superstitions. Drawing on existing research and theoretical
frameworks, it discusses the potential benefits of incorporating REBT techniques in educational,
community, and clinical settings to empower individuals to confront and overcome irrational
beliefs. Additionally, the paper suggests future research directions and practical implications for
implementing REBT interventions to promote critical thinking and reduce superstitions in
Indian society.

KEYWORDS: REBT, Superstitions, Irrational Beliefs

INTRODUCTION:
Superstitions, deeply rooted in cultural and religious beliefs, continue to persist in
Indian society despite advancements in education and technology. These irrational beliefs often
influence decision-making, behavior, and societal norms, leading to various adverse
consequences such as discrimination, hindered progress, and exploitation. In recent years, there
has been a growing recognition of the need to address superstitions and promote rational
thinking to foster social development and individual well-being. Rational Emotive Behavior
Therapy (REBT), developed by Albert Ellis, offers a promising approach to challenge irrational
beliefs and foster rational thinking, thereby potentially serving as a medium for eliminating
superstitions in India.

REVIEW OF LITERATURE:
Numerous studies have documented the prevalence of superstitions in India across
various socio-economic strata and regions. From astrology and numerology to beliefs in evil
spirits and black magic, superstitions manifest in diverse forms, influencing everyday decisions
and behaviors (Pande, 2018; Shukla, 2020). Developed by Albert Ellis, REBT is a form of
cognitive-behavioral therapy that emphasizes identifying and challenging irrational beliefs to
promote psychological well-being and adaptive behavior (Ellis, 1957). REBT posits that it is not
events themselves but individuals' interpretations of these events that lead to emotional
distress. While initially developed in Western contexts, REBT has been adapted and applied
across cultures worldwide. Research indicates its effectiveness in addressing various
psychological issues, including anxiety, depression, and irrational beliefs (David et al., 2018).
However, its application in non-Western cultures like India requires cultural sensitivity and

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 163 | P a g e

adaptation (Mahalakshmi & Joseph, 2017).

OBJECTIVES:
1. To explore the prevalence and impact of superstitions in Indian society.
2. To investigate the efficacy of REBT in challenging irrational beliefs.
3. To assess the applicability of REBT techniques in the Indian cultural context.
4. To evaluate the potential of REBT in combating superstitions in India

METHOD:
This paper employs a qualitative approach, drawing on existing literature and case
studies to explore the potential of REBT in addressing superstitions in India. Relevant research
articles, books, and online resources were reviewed to understand the prevalence of
superstitions in Indian society and the principles and techniques of REBT.

Prevalence and Impact of Superstitions in India:

India, with its diverse cultural and religious heritage, is a fertile ground for superstitions
to thrive. From beliefs in astrology and numerology to adherence to ritualistic practices,
superstitions permeate various aspects of daily life, influencing decision-making, interpersonal
relationships, and societal norms. These beliefs often contribute to fear, anxiety, and irrational
behavior, hindering individual agency and societal progress. Moreover, superstitions perpetuate
social inequalities and exploitation, particularly affecting vulnerable populations such as
women, children, and marginalized communities. Despite efforts to promote education and
scientific literacy, superstitions persist due to their deep-rooted cultural significance and
societal reinforcement. Studies consistently highlight the widespread prevalence of
superstitions in India, cutting across demographic and socio-economic lines (Sharma & Sharma,
2019). These superstitions often stem from cultural and religious beliefs and influence various
aspects of life, including health, relationships, and decision-making.

Rational Emotive Behavior Therapy (REBT):

Rational Emotive Behavior Therapy (REBT) is a form of cognitive-behavioral therapy
that emphasizes the role of irrational beliefs in causing emotional distress and dysfunctional
behavior. Developed by Albert Ellis in the 1950s, REBT posits that individuals' emotional
responses are largely determined by their beliefs about events rather than the events
themselves. According to REBT, irrational beliefs, such as demandingness (the belief that one
must always achieve perfection) and catastrophizing (the belief that the worst possible outcome
will occur), lead to unhealthy emotions and maladaptive behaviors. REBT aims to identify,
challenge, and replace irrational beliefs with rational ones through cognitive restructuring,
behavior modification, and philosophical insight.

Application of REBT in Combating Superstitions:

The principles of REBT can be applied effectively to address superstitions in India. By
helping individuals identify and challenge irrational beliefs underlying superstitions, REBT
empowers them to adopt a more rational and evidence-based approach to understanding the
world. Techniques such as disputing irrational beliefs, behavioral experiments, and rational self-
analysis can be utilized to confront superstitions and promote critical thinking. Additionally,
REBT emphasizes the importance of unconditional self-acceptance and tolerance of uncertainty,
which are essential for overcoming the fear and anxiety associated with challenging deeply
ingrained beliefs. Research suggests that REBT techniques, such as cognitive restructuring and
disputing irrational beliefs, can effectively challenge superstitions by promoting rational
thinking and evidence-based decision-making (Dryden & Neenan, 2007). By encouraging
ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 164 | P a g e
individuals to examine the evidence for their beliefs and consider alternative perspectives,
REBT facilitates cognitive change and reduces irrational fears and anxieties.

Implementation Strategies and Future Directions:

The integration of REBT techniques in educational curricula, community outreach
programs, and clinical interventions holds promise for combating superstitions in India.
Educational initiatives aimed at promoting critical thinking skills and scientific literacy can
incorporate REBT principles to encourage students to question and evaluate superstitions
critically. Community-based workshops and counseling services can provide a platform for
individuals to explore and challenge their beliefs in a supportive environment. Furthermore,
collaboration between mental health professionals, educators, and community leaders is
essential for designing culturally sensitive interventions that address the unique challenges
associated with superstitions in India.

DISCUSSION:
The application of REBT in addressing superstitions in India holds promise but requires
careful consideration of cultural factors and belief systems. Given the deeply ingrained nature of
superstitions, interventions must be culturally sensitive and tailored to the Indian context.
Incorporating indigenous beliefs and practices into therapy sessions can enhance acceptability
and effectiveness. Furthermore, collaboration with community leaders, religious figures, and
local organizations is essential to reach a broader audience and promote awareness about the
detrimental effects of superstitions.

CONCLUSION:
Rational Emotive Behavior Therapy (REBT) offers a promising framework for
addressing superstitions in India by challenging irrational beliefs and promoting rational
thinking. By empowering individuals to confront and overcome superstitions, REBT
interventions have the potential to foster social development, individual well-being, and
scientific literacy. However, successful implementation requires a concerted effort from various
stakeholders, including mental health professionals, educators, policymakers, and community
leaders. Future research should focus on evaluating the effectiveness of REBT interventions in
reducing superstitions and exploring innovative strategies for promoting critical thinking and
rationality in Indian society.

REFERENCES:
1. David, D., Lynn, S. J., & Ellis, A. (Eds.). (2018). Rational and irrational beliefs: Research,
theory, and clinical practice. Oxford University Press.
2. Dryden, W., & Neenan, M. (2007). Rational Emotive Behaviour Therapy: Advances in theory
and practice. Routledge.
3. Ellis, A. (1957). Rational psychotherapy and individual psychology. The Journal of Individual
Psychology, 13(1), 38-44.
4. Mahalakshmi, N. P., & Joseph, S. (2017). Cognitive behavioral therapy in India: A critical
review of the evidence. Indian Journal of Psychological Medicine, 39(4), 459–463.
5. Pande, A. K. (2018). Superstitions in India. Indian Journal of Psychiatry, 60(Suppl. 4), S427–
S431.
6. Sharma, S., & Sharma, S. (2019). Prevalence and beliefs of superstitions in India: A
systematic review. Asian Journal of Psychiatry, 46, 74-82.
7. Shukla, R. (2020). Superstition: A sociological study. Journal of Indian Academy of Applied
Psychology, 46(1), 156-164.

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 165 | P a g e

 SOCIO-ECONOMIC STATUS OF KATALI NIVADE AND MALHARPETH VILLAGES OF
KOLHAPUR DISTRICT: A GEOGRAPHICAL PERSPECTIVE

*Dipak M. Godase , **Dr. Tushar T. Waghmare and ***Dr. Prakash T. Waghmare

*Assistant Professor, Department of Geography, P.V.P. Mahavidyalaya, Kavathe-Mahankal.
**Assistant Professor, Department of Geography, Y.C.W. Mahavidyalaya, Warananagar.
***Assistant Professor & Head, Department of Geography, Shri. Shiv-Shahu Mahavidyalaya,
Sarud.

1. INTRODUCTION
Historically, settlements have grown along river banks and in caves because of the two
main factors influencing settlement locations and their growth: the availability of water and
security. Consequently, most residences are found near the river's course. Kolhapur town,
which is next to the Panchganga River, is a prime example of a riverbank settlement. For a
variety of reasons, such as topography, water supply, physiographic state, security, and more,
geographic location is essential to any expansion. Location can be expressed in three ways:
absolute, relative, and maritime. Being an agricultural country, a sizable section of the
population in India is dependent on the agricultural industry, which is reliant on geographic
position, water availability, and economic growth. River areas are suitable for habitation since
India has four different months with considerable rainfall. The current study focuses on the
relationship between topography and village development in the Kumbhi river basin.
Irrigation is the process of using water from rivers, tanks, wells, canals, and other man-
made structures for agricultural use. Because it reduces dependency on the monsoon, boosts
agricultural production, improves the area under cultivation, stabilizes output levels, generates
employment, provides transportation and energy, manages floods, and averts droughts,
irrigation is significant economically in India. The current study focuses on the Kumbhi River,
one of the tributaries of the Panchganga, and its significance in the development of the people
within its basin. Based on their locations, the three villages of Katali, Nivade, and Malharpeth
were chosen: Katali is located in the top zone of the Kumbhi basin, Nivade is located in the
middle zone, and Malharpeth is located in the bottom zone. Within this study, we examine the
socioeconomic effects of the river on the seaside grazing settlements, where about 80% of the
population works in agriculture.

2. STUDY AREA

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 166 | P a g e

 Fig.1 location Map of Study Area
3. OBJECTIVE
1) To study the socio-economic development of Katali, Nivade and Malharpeth Villages of
Kolhapur District.

4. DATABASE & METHODOLOGY

The present research work is totally based on Primary sources of data which is collected
through interview method. Three sample villages are taken in to consideration for research
work. All three villages are situated near the Kumbhi river bank and positively affected by the
river water. The Kumbhi basin is divided into three distinct zones: upper, middle, and lower,
based on the length of the rivers. The study area was initially divided into three primary zones
based on their locations.
The research area has been selected to encompass the communities of Katali, Nivade,
and Malharpeth. The villages of Nivade in the middle zone, Katali in the upper zone, and
Malharpeth in the bottom zone of the Kumbhi river basin are the candidates. This information
was obtained from the farmers by stratified random sampling. The current study looks on the
effects of irrigation on the socioeconomic development of the villages of Katali, Nivade, and
Malharpeth on the Kumbhi River. We spoke with the local farmers and witnessed the problems
they were facing. It is obvious that we are showing a glimpse of his life. To collect particular
data, empirical techniques like questionnaires and field surveys are employed. Thus, the current
study's foundation is made up of primary sources of data.

5. RESULTS & DISCUSSION

The river Kumbhi begins 4 km upstream from the town of Taliye in the Sahyadri hill
ranges at an elevation of 975 meters. It is a left-bank tributary of the Bhogawati river in the
Krishna Basin. The Kumbhi River starts in Gaganbawada and flows northeast for about 15 miles
before veering east and joining the major Dhamani tributary at Chougulewadi. The
southernmost point of the Kumbhi River is near the town of Nalechiwadi. The source of the
Kumbhi River is near Bavda, and it flows fifteen kilometers northeast to Kirwai.

5.1 KATALI (Upper Zone Village of Kumbhi River Basin)

The most well-known hamlet in Gaganbavda Tehsil is Katali hamlet, which is located in
the Kolhapur district of India and is part of the state of Maharashtra. The homes at Katali Village
are environmentally friendly. A bar graph shows the level of education attained by men and
women in Katali village. It was easy to see at the time from the graph that there were fewer
women authors than men. The population's primary education ratio was 31.7 females to 41.86
men; however, as most girls dropped out of school after secondary education, females
predominated in secondary education. Males made up a very tiny portion of postgraduate
students.

Table. 1 Educational and Occupational Structure of Katali Village

Education Male Female Occupation Percentage

Primary 41.86 31.7 Farmer 63.09

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 167 | P a g e

Secondary 11.62 17.07 Labor 2.38

SSC 11.62 9.75 Job 4.76

HSC 9.3 12.19 Trader 0

Graduate 11.62 7.31 Other 29.76

Post Graduate 2.32 0

Other 11.62 21.95

Source: Field Survey (Compiled by Researcher).

The bar graph above shows the educational status of men and women in Katali village. It
was easy to see at the time from the graph that there were fewer women authors than men. In
basic education, there were 31.7 females and 41.86 males per population; however, since most
girls dropped out of school after secondary education, females dominated secondary education.
Males made up a very tiny portion of postgraduate students. The pie chart above shows the
occupation structure of Katali village. The majority of individuals (63.09%) works in the
agriculture sector since fertile land and irrigation facilities are readily available. About 4.76
percent of people work for the government or privately. About 2.38 percent of people worked in
the agricultural industry. Due to a lack of chances, there is not a single individual employed in
the trade or trading-related sectors in Katali village.

Table. 2 Irrigational Facilities of Katali Village

Sr. No. Irrigation Percentage

1 Well 66.66

2 Lift Irrigation 25

3 Tube wells 0

4 Canal 0

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 168 | P a g e

 5 Other 8.33

Source: Field Survey (Compiled by Researcher).

There were not many modifications to the lift and well irrigation systems. Half of the
land was irrigated by wells before to the construction of the dam, but this has since grown to
17% and is presently at 67%. The reason for this difference in the lift irrigation ratio is that it
was 42% previously and is currently only 25%.

5.2 NIVADE (Middle Zone Village of Kumbhi River Basin)

Nivade is a hamlet close to Panhala taluka in the Kolhapur district of Maharashtra state.
The district center, Kolhapur, lies 34 kilometers to the west of it. Nivade is located 563 meters
above sea level. In Nivade Village, more than 80% of the people are employed in primary
industries like agriculture. The 500-meter-long Kumbhi River is situated not too far from the
Nivade village. The border between the Sangli and Kolhapur districts is marked at this point.

Table. 3 Educational and Occupational Structure of Nivade Village

Education Male Female Occupation Percentage

Primary 30.86 38.02 Farmer 59.21

Secondary 18.51 18.3 Labour 0

SSC 12.34 9.85 Job 3.94

HSC 6.17 8.45 Trader 0

Graduate 3.7 9.85 Other 36.84

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 169 | P a g e

Post Graduate 0 2.81

Other 28.39 12.67

Source: Field Survey (Compiled by Researcher).

The percentage of educated men and women at Invasion Village is shown in the multiple
bars graphic. The disparities in education between men and women are depicted in the graph.
The fact that more men than women were enrolled in different categories suggests that fewer
women seek post-secondary education. The significant distance between home and school
makes the female to male schooling ratio all the more significant. The pie chart represents
Nivade Village's occupational organization. Because there is plenty of water and fertile land, a
significant majority of the population—59.21%—works in agriculture. Only 3.94% of people are
working. That is a remarkably low proportion. 36.84% of the population is employed in other
occupations.

Table. 4 Irrigational Facilities of Nivade Village

Sr. No. Irrigation Present

1 Well 11.53
2 Lift Irrigation 88.46
3 Tube wells 0
4 Canal 0

Source: Field Survey (Compiled by Research).

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 170 | P a g e

 Today, 88% of irrigation is done through lift irrigation, while only 3% is done through
well water irrigation in Nivade Village.

5.3 MALHARPETH (Lower Zone Village of Kumbhi River Basin)

Malharpeth is a hamlet in the Kolhapur district of Maharashtra state, India. It is located
in Panhala tehsil. It is situated 23 kilometers west of Kolhapur, the district headquarters.
Malharpeth Village is 563 meters above mean sea level in altitude. The settlement of Malharpeth
is situated about 200 meters from the Kumbhi River's basin.

Table. 5 Educational and Occupational Structure of Malharpeth Village

Education Male Female Occupation Percentage

Primary 22.78 31.94 Farmer 64.23

Secondary 13.92 11.11 Labor 1.32

SSC 13.92 19.44 Job 5.29

HSC 18.98 11.11 Trader 0

Graduate 15.18 6.94 Other 29.13

Post Graduate 2.53 1.38

Other 12.65 18.05

Source: Field Survey (Compiled by Researcher).

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 171 | P a g e

 The bar graph above shows the educational status of men and women in Malharpeth
hamlet. It was easy to see at the time from the graph that there were fewer women authors than
men. Women are less likely than boys to have finished elementary, middle, and high school. The
pie chart above shows Malharpeth Village's occupation structure. Owing to the Kumbhi River's
close proximity to the settlement, 64% of the workforce works in agriculture. Five percent of
persons are either privately or government employed. The agriculture sector employs 2% of the
workforce. Not a single person in Malharpeth Village is employed in commerce or similar
occupations.

Table. 6 Irrigational Facilities of Malharpeth Village

Sr. No. Irrigation Before Present
1 Well 30.76 30.67
2 Lift Irrigation 69.23 69.23
3 Tube wells 0 0
4 Canal 0 0

Source: Field Survey (Compiled by Researcher).

About 69 per cent of populations of this village are dependent on the lift irrigation while
remaining 31 per cent on well irrigation in Malharpeth village of Kolhapur district.

CONCLUSION
With characteristics that are essentially universal across the Kumbhi basin, the villages
of Katali, Navipade, and Malharpeth characterize each zone. Katali hamlet is not as developed as
it may be despite being near the Kumbhi River because of its steep topography, accessibility
issues, and lack of infrastructure and educational resources. Nivade is a decently established
neighborhood. It is mostly created for agriculture and is located near to the intersection of the
Kolhapur and Gaganbavada highways; yet, it falls behind in terms of infrastructure and
educational prospects. The location of Malharpeth, a well-developed community in the lower
zone, and the Kumbhi irrigation project program are advantageous.

REFERENCES
1) Chougule, G. D. (1986) “Irrigation farming in Maharashtra: A Geographical Analysis”, all
unpublished Ph. D Thesis submitted to Shivaji University, Kolhapur. (P.39,45)
2) Magar, J. (1987) “Impact of irrigation on Agriculture in Maharashtra Region: A Geographical
Survey”, unpublished Ph. D Thesis submitted to Shivaji University, Kolhapur. (P.13, 32,33)
3) Pathak, R. S. (1997) “Irrigation in Phaltan Tehsil (Satara district): A Geographical Analysis”,
all unpublished Ph. D Thesis submitted to Shivaji University, Kolhapur. (PP.55-56)
ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 172 | P a g e
4) Waghmare, V. K. (1988) “Impact of Irrigation on Crop Production Productivity in Wai taluka
(Satara district)”, unpublished Ph. D Thesis submitted to Shivaji University, Kolhapur.
(P.22,38)
5) Husain Majid,(2010) “ Human Geography”, second Edition, Rawat Publication, Jaipur and
New Delhi.(p.499)
6) Chandana, R.C. (1999) “Introduction of Population of Geography”.
7) More-patil, K. S. (1995) “Studies in Agriculture land use”, Sawat publication, Kolhapur. (PP.
9-30)
8) Patil, S. D. (1989) “Socio- Economic study of Maharashtra state road transport corporation
Drivers with special reference to Sangli Depot, unpublished Ph. D Thesis submitted to
Shivaji University, Kolhapur. (P.10,11)

“SPIDER DIVERSITY (FAMILY:SALTICIDAE) FROM DROUGHT PRONE REGION SANGOLA,

DISTRICT SOLAPUR (M.S.)INDIA.”

Sawant S.R.*, Kamble V.S.**

*Research Scholar, School of Life Science, P.A.H.Solapur University, Solapur.
([email protected])
**Assist.Prof., Department of Zoology, Sangola College, Sangola.
([email protected])

ABSTRACT
Spiders belonging to family Salticidae are largest family in the order Araneae of class
Arachnida. The present study was conducted during the year 2022-23 at drought prone region
of Sangola in Solapur district (M.S.) India. In present study from Salticidae family 15 species
were recorded belongs to 14 genera. Members of family Salticidae includes jumping spiders are
voraging and hunting in behaviours. Most of Salticidae spiders either carnivorous (insect
feeders) or herbivorous (nector feeders) and plays important ecological role in the ecosystem.

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 173 | P a g e

KEYWORDS : Araneae, Salticidae, Spider diversity, Hunting spiders.

INTRODUCTION
Spiders play an important role in the diverse ecosystem. This study aims to study
diversity of spider. Spiders are an integral part of global biodiversity as an important indicator
in biodiversity assessment studies. Spiders are obligate carnivores and hold the unique position
of being the only large class of arthropods which are entirely predatory in nature. Predation
significantly contributes towards preventing the excessive increase of insect populations. Under
normal field conditions, if one predator species is absent, another one may take its place.
Spiders generally have humidity and temperature preferences that limit them to areas within
the range of their physiological tolerances, which in turn makes them ideal candidates for land
conservation studies (Noss,1990). Therefore, documenting spider diversity patterns can
provide important information on the biodiversity of this tropical agro and forest ecosystem.
Family Salticidae is most species rich group of order Araneae. Salticidae is the largest
spider family in the world grouping 671 genera and 6,495 species (World Spider Catalog, 2023)
and they are commonly called jumping spiders because most of the species are very active in
warm weather, leaping from leaves, bark, twigs in the search of prey or to escape from potential
predators. They are very small to medium-sized, active, hunting spiders capable of jumping or
leaping to a distance. The most characteristic feature is the ocular clad on the cephalothorax
delimited by eight eyes arranged in three or four rows. Front row formed of forwardly directed
four eyes among which the anterior median eyes are very large and easily noticeable. They
move by walking, running, jumping or leaping and use all these movements for prey capture.
They hunt the prey by stalking, chasing and leaping over it. Prey mainly includes insects; some
also prefer other spiders or ants. They are characterized by an acute visual system and being
capable of very agile jumps. Generally, they are day hunters that actively seek their prey.
Jumping spiders are strongly influenced by habitat type. Their abundance and species
composition are affected by the structural complexity of vegetation, giving their site preferences
for stalking and hunting prey. The combination of narrow spatial niches occupied by most
species and diverse microhabitats within a site would explain the high diversity of jumping
spiders. Despite this long history of research and their ecological importance, considerable gaps
remain in our understanding of spider fauna in Solapur district.
Jumping spiders are taxonomically diverse, present everywhere in huge abundance and
diurnal. As their names simply, jumping spiders are also quick and agile jumpers, and will do so
both to escape potential predators and to capture small prey and regulating arthropod
population. Spiders have important role in ecosystems but they have been largely ignored in
conservational studies. This might be one of the reasons of poor knowledge on jumping spider
of this area.

MATERIALS AND METHODS

a. Study area: Present study region comes under drought prone region of Solapur District of
Maharashtra. Stretch between 17º5’ North to 17º42’ North and Longitudinal extension takes
place between 74º80’east to 75º16’ east (Kamble, 2018). Southern part of Sangola tahsil is hilly,
areas having various heights are 450 m to 750 m above mean sea level. The daytime
temperature is going to reach 30°c and the temperature is going to dip to 16°c at night. Man,
Belwan, Korada Rivers and its their tributaries flows in Sangola tahsil. The weather condition of
the Sangola are scanty and ill distributed rainfall and experiences a prolonged dry season which
experiences a high variation in temperature. Annual average rainfall is about 550 mm to 600
mm approximately. According to climatic conditions variations in agriculture practices in
different sites of drought prone region Sangola tahsil is occurs.
b. Methodology : The survey method was conducted into the specified regions namely Sangola,
Mahud region, Javala region and Kola region from Sangola tahsil during January 2022 to
ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 174 | P a g e
December 2023. The collected species are identified by using standard method prescribed by
Tikadar (1987), Gajbe and Platnick (1994). For the identification spiders are collected,
photographed and released in their natural habitat by direct visual search, litter sampling,
sweep netting and hand picking methods from all the sites. Identification was carried out on the
basis of morphological characters from keys and catalogues provided by Tikader (1982),
Platnick (2011), and other relevant literature. The scientific names of jumping spiders are based
on the World Spider Catalog (2023).

RESULTS AND DISCUSSION

The present study was conducted from drought prone region Sangola in Solapur district
(M.S.) India. In present study from Family-Salticidae by 15 species belong to 14 genera (Table
No.1 & Fig.No.1) were recorded. The Species such as Hasarius adansoni, Plexippus paykulli,
and Plexippus petersi were commonly observed in human dwellings actively, searching for prey
on the walls of buildings. Other species such as Chrysilla volupe, Telamonia dimidiate,
Menemerus bivittatus, Thyene imperialis, Pintella vittata, Stenaelurillus vyaghri, Hyllus
semicupreus, Epocilla sp., Rhene flavicomans, Epeus indicus, Harmochirus brachiatus and
Myrmarachne sp. are generally seen among foliage, where they can hide and stalk insect prey
and also build silken retreats. Menemerus bivittatus is a pantropical species that is often seen on
the bark of trees or on the walls of buildings (Gajbe 2020).

Table No.1: Jumping Spiders (Family-Salticidae) from drought prone region Sangola of
Solapur district

Species Name Common name

Order Family

1. Chrysilla volupe Jumping spider

(Karsch, 1879)
Araneae Salticidae
(Blackwall,
1841) 2. Telamonia dimidiata Two striped jumping spider
(Simon, 1899)

3. Plexippus paykulli Pantropical jumping spider

(Audouin, 1826)

4. Menemerus bivittatus Grey wall jumper spider

(Dufour, 1831)

5. Thyene imperialis Jumping spider

(Rossi, 1846)

6. Phintella vittata Banded Phintella

(C.L. Koch, 1846)

7. Stenaelurillus vyaghri Jumping spider

(Sanap, Joglekar & Caleb,
2022)

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 175 | P a g e

 8. Plexippus petersi Common housefly Catcher
(Karsch, 1878)

9. Hasarius adansoni Adanson's house jumper

(Audouin, 1826)

10. Hyllus semicupreus Jumping spider

(Simon, 1885)

11.Epocilla sp. Orange jumping spider

(Thorell, 1887)

12. Rhene flavicomans Wasp mimic jumping spider

(Simon, 1902)

13. Epeus indicus White Spotted Green spider

(Prószyn ́ski 1992)

14. Harmochirus Jumping spider

brachiatus
(Thorell, 1877).

15. Myrmarachne sp. Ant mimicking jumping spider

(MacLeay, 1839)

CONCLUSION:
The present study region comes under drought prone region of Solapur district (M.S.)
India (Kamble, 2018) having rich diversity of spiders belong to Family-salticidae ( Jumping
spiders), Salticidae spiders are predators as well as preys will helpful in controlling insect crop
pest especially, pomegranate fruit crop. So, there is an urgent need to study the seasonal
variation of the spider fauna in these regions and the conservation of this ecosystem which has
been a habitat for multiply species of spider fauna in maintaining ecological balance. They are
the controller agent of the biodiversity and therefore they should be preserved.

Fig.No.1: Showing photographs of Jumping Spiders (Salticidae) from drought prone

region Sangola in Solapur district

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 176 | P a g e

 2
1a. Chrysilla volupe 1b. Chrysilla volupe 2a. Telamonia b. Telamonia dimidiata
(female) dimidiata (female)
(male) (male)

3b. Plexippus paykulli 4. Menemerus bivittatus 5. Thyene imperialis

3a. Plexippus paykulli
(female) (female)
(male)

9
6. Pintella vittata 7. Stenaelurillus . Hasarius adansoni
8. Plexippus petersi
(female) vyaghri (male)

1
2. Rhene flavicomans 13. Epeus indicus
10. Hyllus semicupreus 11. Epocilla sp.
(female)

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 177 | P a g e

 1
14. Harmochirus 5. Myrmarachne sp

brachiatus

ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
The first author thanks to my research guide Dr.V.S.Kamble, Asisst.Prof. Sangola College,
Sangola for guidance and The Principal, Sangola College, Sangola for providing the facilities to
do research work. We are also much thankful to Punyashlok Ahilyadevi Holkar Solapur
University, Solapur for permission to carry out the present work.

REFERENCES
1. Coddington, J. A. and Levi, H. W. 1991. Systematics and evolution of spiders (Araneae).
Annual Review of Ecology and Systematics, 22: 565–592.
2. Coddington, J. A., L. H. Young and Coyle, F. A. 1996. Estimating spider species richness in a
southern Appalachian Cove hardwood forest. Journal of Arachnology, 24: 111–128.
3. Gajbe, U. A. 1995a. Spider Fauna of Conservation Areas: Fauna of Indravati Tiger Reserve,
Madhya Pradesh. Zoological Survey of India, publication: 53-56.
4. Gajbe, U. A. 1995b. Spider Fauna of Conservation Areas: Fauna of Kanha Tiger Reserve,
Madhya Pradesh. Zoological survey of India, publication: 27-30.
5. Koh, J. K. H. 2000. A Guide to Common Singapore Spiders. Singapore Science Centre,
Singapore. 160.
6. Kamble V. S. (2018) Study of Diversity of Fresh Water Molluscs FromDrought Prone
Region Sangola,District Solapur (MS) India. www.jetir.org (ISSN-2349-5162)
7. Kuntner, M. and Sereg, I. 2002. Additions to the spider fauna of Slovenia, with a
comparison of spider species richness among European countries. Bulletin of the British
Arachnological Society, 12:185–195.
8. Platnick, N. 2011. The World Spider Catalog, Version 11.5 American Museum of Natural
History, online at http://research.amnh.org/entomology/spiders/catalog81–
87/index.html.
9. Shirbhate Milind V. and Shirbhate Amrita M. 2017. Diversity and distribution of Spider
fauna (family- Araneidae) in and around Katepurna Sanctuary, Akola, India. Environment
Conservation Journal, 18(3): 45-52.
10. Tikader, B. K. 1973a. Studies on some Ant like spiders from India (Family: Salticidae),
78(2): 59-67.
11. Tikader, B. K. 1973b. Studies on some jumping spiders from India (Family-Salticidae),
78(2): 68-72.
12. Tikader, B. K. 1987. Handbook of Indian Spiders, Zoological Survey of India, Calcutta, India.
251.
13. Tikader, B. K. 1982. The Fauna of Indian Spiders Araneae (Araneidae and Gnaphosidae).
Zological Survey of India, Calcutta. 536.
ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 178 | P a g e
14. Sebastian P.A. & Peter, K.V. 2009. Spiders of India. Orient black swan, Hyderabad. 716 pp.
15. Uetz, G.W. 1991. The influence of variation in litter habitats on spider communities.
Oecologia, 40: 29-42.
16. Warren, S.D., Scifres, C.J. & Teel, P.D. 1987. Response of grassland arthropods to burning: a
review. Agriculture, Ecosystems & Environment, 19(2): 105-130.
17. World Spider Catalog 2023. World Spider Catalog. Version 21.5. Natural History Museum
Bern, online at http://wsc.nmbe.ch, accessed on 1 February 2023.
18. Coddington, J. A. and Levi, H. W. 1991. Systematics and evolution of spiders (Araneae).
Annual Review of Ecology and Systematics, 22: 565–592..

STATISTICAL ANALYSIS OF PERFORMANCE OF UNDERGRADUATE STUDENTS IN KAVATHE

MAHANKAL TEHSIL: EXPLORING FACTORS INFLUENCING ACADEMIC SUCCESS

Koshti V.V. , Kute Pranav*

Department of Statistics
P. V. P. Mahavidyalaya, Kavathe Mahankal (M.S.)
* Student B.Sc. III

ABSTRACT
This research paper investigates the performance of undergraduate students through
statistical analysis, aiming to uncover the factors that influence academic success. Using a
dataset collected from a sample of undergraduate students in the Kavathe Mahankal Tehsil, this
study employs descriptive statistics, correlation analysis, and regression analysis to explore the
relationships between various variables and student performance. The results reveal significant
associations between factors such as attendance, study habits, and participation in
extracurricular activities, offering insights for educators and policymakers to enhance
educational outcomes. Graphs, diagrams, and tables are utilized to visually represent the
findings, facilitating a comprehensive understanding of the statistical analysis conducted in this
study.

Keywords: undergraduate students, academic performance, statistical analysis, attendance,

study habits, extracurricular activities.

1. INTRODUCTION:
The academic performance of undergraduate students in higher education institutions is
a critical indicator of educational quality and effectiveness (Ariful Islam ( 2021). It is a topic of
significant interest and importance in educational research. Understanding the factors that
influence student success is essential for educators and policymakers to develop targeted
interventions and support mechanisms (James Afrifa, et al. 2023). Understanding the factors

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 179 | P a g e

 that influence students' performance can provide valuable insights for educators, policymakers,
and stakeholders involved in higher education. Statistical analysis plays a crucial role in
examining these factors and identifying patterns or trends that may impact academic success.
This research paper aims to conduct a comprehensive statistical analysis of undergraduate
student performance, exploring the relationships between various factors and academic
outcomes, with the goal of uncovering key factors that contribute to variations in performance
levels. This research aims to conduct a comprehensive statistical analysis on the academic
performance of undergraduate students,

2. OBJECTIVES
1. To determine the most preferred subject in final year across the Arts, Commerce and
Science streams. .
2. To check dependency between the gender and pursuing higher study across different
streams.
3. To compare the attendance percentage across different streams.
4. To identify the reasons why students are irregular.
5. To identify which competitive exam are most of the student preparing across different
streams and also to compare the approaches to competitive exam preparation employed by
male and female students
6. To check dependency between the gender and attendance percentage across different
streams.
7. To identify the preparation method to prepare for competitive exams

3. DATA COLLECTION AND METHODOLOGY

Data for this study were collected from a sample of undergraduate students enrolled in
final year of the Art, Commerce and Science streams in P. V. P. Mahavidyalaya, Kavathe
Mahankal Dist. Sangli (M.S.) during the academic year 2023-24. The dataset includes
information on academic performance (grades), selection of subject for final year, attendance
records, study habits, and participation in competitive examinations. The data is collected by
preparing a questionnaire to fulfill the objectives behind the research accurately. The data
collection procedure was done using Google forms and direct interviewing the students.

3.1 Descriptive Statistics, graphs and diagrams

Descriptive statistics were employed to summarize the characteristics of the data.
Measures of central tendency, dispersion, and frequency distributions were calculated to
provide an overview of grades, attendance rates, study habits, and extracurricular participation
among undergraduate students. The descriptive analysis facilitates a better understanding of
the dataset's distribution and variability.
A pie chart is a type of graph that represents the data in the circular graph. The slices of
pie show the relative size the data, and it is type of pictorial representation of data. A pie chart
requires list of categorical variables and numerical variable. Here the term pie represents the
whole. All the slices of the pie chart add up to make whole equaling 100% and 360 degree. A bar
chart is a graphical representation used to display and compare discrete categories of data
through rectangular bars, where the length or height of each bar is proportional to the
frequency or value of the corresponding category or strips. It can be either horizontal or
vertical.

3.2 Hypothesis testing: Chi-square test for independence of attributes:

The null hypothesis of this test is that the attributes are independent of each other. The
test is used to check the independency of the attributes. Observed frequencies are tabulated in
the contingency table and the expected frequencies are calculated. The test checks whether the
observed frequencies and expected frequencies are significantly different or not.
ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 180 | P a g e
4. RESULTS:
4.1 Descriptive Statistics:
The descriptive analysis of the dataset reveals important insights into undergraduate
student performance. It presents the summary statistics for grades, attendance rates, study
hours, and participation in extracurricular activities. From graph we can observe that Science
students are more regular than Arts and Commerce students and Arts students are more
irregular than Commerce and Science students. From the graph we can also see that most of the
male students are irregular because of doing preparation of competitive exam & farm work
responsibility and most of the female students are irregular due to house work and no more
interested in college. From the graph we can conclude that most of the male Art students are
preparing for Armed Forces and SSC exams and from the graph we can conclude that most of
the male Commerce students are preparing IBPS and CAT exams. From the graph we can
conclude that most of the male Arts students are preparing Armed Forces and SSC exams and
female students are not interested in competitive exams. Also we can see that across all streams
female students are less interested than male students in competitive exams.

4.2 Hypothesis testing: Chi-square test for independence of attributes

The null hypothesis of this test is that the attributes are independent of each other. The
test is used to check the independency of the attributes. Observed frequencies are tabulated in
the contingency table and the expected frequencies are calculated. The test checks whether the
observed frequencies and expected frequencies are significantly different or not.

5. DISCUSSIONS
Most preferred stream in last i.e. third (final) year across Arts, Commerce and Science
streams are ‘Geography’, ‘Advanced Accounting’ and ‘Chemistry’ respectively. From graph we
can observe that Science students are more regular than Arts and Commerce students and Arts
students are more irregular than Commerce and Science students. From the graph we can see
that most of the male students are irregular because of doing preparation of competitive exam &
farm work responsibility and most of the female students are irregular due to house work and
no more interested in college. From the graph we can conclude that most of the male Science
students are preparing for Armed forces and M.Sc. entrance and SSC exams. From the graph we
can conclude that most of the male Commerce students are preparing IBPS and CAT exams.
From the graph we can conclude that most of the male Arts students are preparing Armed
Forces and SSC exams and female students are not interested in competitive exams. Also we can
see that across all streams female students are less interested than male students in competitive
exams. From graph we can observe that most of the students prefer you tube videos to prepare
for competitive examinations.
Further it is observed that, the data provides enough evidence to claim that pursuing
higher study is dependent on gender. For Science stream gender is dependent on the attendance
percentage. Also in case of regularity, Science students are more regular than Arts and
Commerce students, while Arts students are more irregular than Commerce and Science
students. For Science and Arts stream it is found that gender and attendance percentage are
dependent while they are independent in case of Commerce stream.

6. CONCLUSIONS
The findings of this research underscore the importance of attendance, study habits, and
extracurricular involvement in predicting undergraduate student performance. Educators and
policymakers can leverage these insights to develop targeted interventions aimed at improving
academic outcomes. Strategies such as promoting attendance, fostering effective study skills,
ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 181 | P a g e
and encouraging participation in extracurricular activities can positively impact student
success. Additionally, further research could explore additional factors influencing student
performance and evaluate the effectiveness of intervention strategies.
In conclusion, this research paper provides valuable insights into the statistical analysis
of undergraduate student performance, offering implications for educational practice and
policy. The utilization of graphs, diagrams, and tables enhances the clarity and
comprehensiveness of the findings, facilitating a deeper understanding of the relationships
between different variables and academic outcomes. By addressing the factors that influence
student success, stakeholders can work towards creating a supportive educational environment
that fosters the holistic development of undergraduate students.

REFERENCES
1. An Analysis of Factors Influencing Academic Performance of Undergraduate Students: A
Case Study of Rabindra University, Bangladesh” by Ariful Islam (June 2021), International
Journal of Education (Volume 9, Issue 3).
2. James Afrifa, et al. (Feb 2023) “An Analysis of Significant Factors Influencing Students
Academic Performance In a Predictive Model Using Multiple Regressions” International
Research Journal of Modernization in Engineering Technology and Science (Volume 5, Issue
2).

Appendix

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 182 | P a g e

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 183 | P a g e
ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 184 | P a g e
 STATISTICAL MECHANICS ANALYSIS OF THE PARTITION FUNCTION FOR
SCHWARZSCHILD BLACK HOLES: GRAPHICAL INSIGHTS INTO THERMODYNAMIC
BEHAVIOUR

1Raj
P. Hasabe and 2S.S. Shinde
Assistant Professor,
Padmabhushan Vasantraodada Patil Mahavidyalaya, Kavathe Mahankal,
Sangli Maharashtra 416405

ABSTRACT:
Understanding the statistical mechanics of black holes is crucial for unravelling the
mysteries of their thermodynamic properties. In this paper, we investigate the partition
function of Schwarzschild black holes within the framework of statistical mechanics. By
employing the canonical ensemble approach and considering the quantization of energy levels,
we derive the partition function. Additionally, we analyse the entropy of Schwarzschild black
ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 185 | P a g e
holes and its relation to the area of the event horizon. Through graphical representations
including plots of entropy against area and a 3D plot of entropy against area and a constant
related to the number of microstates, we gain insights into the thermodynamic behaviour of
Schwarzschild black holes.

INTRODUCTION:
Black holes are among the most intriguing objects in the universe, characterized by their
immense gravitational pull, which is so strong that not even light can escape from them. Over
the decades, our understanding of black holes has evolved significantly, with breakthroughs in
theoretical physics, particularly in the fields of general relativity, quantum mechanics, and
thermodynamics. Central to our comprehension of black holes is the concept of black hole
thermodynamics, which treats black holes as thermodynamic systems with well-defined
temperature, entropy, and other thermodynamic quantities [1]. At the heart of black hole
thermodynamics lies the statistical mechanics of black holes, which provides a framework for
understanding the microscopic origins of their thermodynamic properties. Key to this
framework is the notion of the partition function, which encapsulates the statistical distribution
of microstates associated with a given thermodynamic system [2]. In the context of black holes,
the partition function allows us to enumerate the different quantum states available to the black
hole and compute thermodynamic quantities such as entropy. The partition function of a
Schwarzschild black hole ( ) can be derived by considering the statistical distribution of its
microstates within the framework of statistical mechanics. In the canonical ensemble, which
describes a system in thermal equilibrium with a heat bath at constant temperature the
partition function ( ) is given by the sum over all possible microstates weighted by their
Boltzmann factors. This expression captures the statistical behaviour of the black hole and
provides a pathway to understanding its thermodynamic properties [3]. Alongside the partition
function, the entropy of a black hole is a fundamental thermodynamic quantity that plays a
central role in black hole physics. Entropy quantifies the number of microstates consistent with
a given macroscopic state and is intimately related to the horizon area of the black hole [4]. In
the case of Schwarzschild black holes, the entropy can be expressed in terms of the horizon area,
providing a direct link between the microscopic structure of the black hole and its macroscopic
features [5].

ENTROPY AND HORIZON AREA

The partition function of a Schwarzschild black hole ( ) can be derived by considering
the statistical distribution of its microstates within the framework of statistical mechanics [3].
We start by defining the canonical ensemble, which describes a system in thermal equilibrium
with a heat bath at constant temperature [2]. In this ensemble, the partition function ( ) is
given by the sum over all possible microstates weighted by their Boltzmann factors [1].

…(1)

[Here, is the inverse temperature, ( ) represents the energy levels of the black
hole, and the sum extends over all allowed energy states [1]. Entropy plays a crucial role in
understanding the thermodynamic properties of black holes. In the context of black hole
physics, entropy represents the measure of disorder or the number of microscopic
configurations consistent with a given macroscopic state of the black hole [6]. It provides
valuable insights into the underlying microscopic structure of black holes and their statistical
behaviour. One of the remarkable features of black hole entropy is its dependence on the
horizon area [5]. In the seminal work by Bekenstein (1973), it was proposed that the entropy of
a black hole is proportional to the area of its event horizon, suggesting a deep connection
between the gravitational and thermodynamic properties of black holes [1]. This idea was
ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 186 | P a g e
further substantiated by Hawking’s discovery of black hole radiation, which revealed that black
holes have a nonzero temperature and consequently possess thermal properties analogous to
those of ordinary thermodynamic systems [2].The entropy-area relation for black holes has
profound implications for our understanding of their thermodynamic behaviour [5]. It implies
that as the area of the black hole’s event horizon increases, so does its entropy, leading to an
increase in the number of microstates associated with the black hole [5]. This remarkable result
suggests that the entropy of a black hole is not merely a measure of its information content but
is intimately linked to its gravitational properties. Moreover, the entropy of a black hole can be
expressed in terms of the horizon area through the famous Bekenstein-Hawking formula [1][2]

…(2)

Where ( ) is the entropy of the black hole, ( ) is Boltzmann’s constant, ( ) is the area
of the event horizon, and ( ) is the Planck length [2]. This formula highlights the quantized
nature of black hole entropy and provides a fundamental link between quantum mechanics,
gravity, and thermodynamics.
The entropy ( S ) of a black hole can be related to the partition function through the
expression:

…(3)

Where is the area of the black hole’s event horizon is, is the critical area, and is
a constant related to the number of microstates [4]. The partition function and entropy provide
valuable insights into the statistical behaviour of black holes and their connection to
thermodynamics [5]. By analysing these quantities, we can gain a deeper understanding of the
fundamental nature of black holes and their role in the universe [6].To gain further insights into
the thermodynamic behaviour of black holes, we plot the entropy against the area and the
constant .

Figure1: Entropy as a function of Horizon Area

Additionally, we construct a 3D plot of entropy against both and to visualize the

intricate relationship between entropy, area, and the number of microstates.
ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 187 | P a g e
 Figure 2: Entropy as a function of Horizon Area and no of constituents and

Thus, it is established that when the horizon area of the Schwarzschild black hole is less
than or equal to the critical area ( ), the entropy of the black hole follows the Bekenstein-
Hawking entropy law. However, if the horizon area exceeds ( ), the simple proportionality
between area and entropy predicted by the Bekenstein-Hawking entropy law no longer holds.

RESULTS:
The graphical representations of the entropy against area and the 3D plot of entropy
against area and constant provide valuable insights into the thermodynamic behavior of
Schwarzschild black holes. From the entropy-area plot, we observe a logarithmic increase in
entropy with increasing area, consistent with theoretical expectations. The 3D plot reveals
complex patterns and dependencies between entropy, area, and the number of microstates,
underscoring the intricate nature of black hole
From figure.1 As the area A approaches zero, the entropy S approaches negative infinity. This
indicates that the entropy diverges to negative infinity as the black hole becomes extremely
small.
From figure.2 At the critical area there is a specific value where the term
diverges. This divergence occurs when approaches zero, resulting in an
infinite value for the logarithm. At this point, the entropy may experience a significant change
due to the divergence, leading to a potential discontinuity or singularity in the graph.
The 3D plotting for the Entropy equation shows that; the entropy may exhibit
different behaviors for different ranges of and . The values and variations of and
with respect to will play a crucial role in shaping the graph. Depending on how these
quantities change with , the entropy curve may display different slopes, curvature, or even
discontinuities.

CONCLUSION:
In conclusion, our analysis of the partition function and entropy, along with the
graphical representations, has provided valuable insights into the thermodynamic properties of
Schwarzschild black holes. The entropy-area relation, as depicted in the graphs, highlights the
fundamental connection between the microscopic properties of black holes and their

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 188 | P a g e

macroscopic features. Moving forward, further investigations into the statistical mechanics of
black holes and the implications of their thermodynamic behaviour will continue to advance our
understanding of these cosmic phenomena. By continuing to explore the statistical properties of
black holes, we can unravel more of the mysteries surrounding their formation, evolution, and
role in the universe.

REFERENCES:
1. Hawking, S. W. (1975). Particle Creation by Black Holes. Communications in Mathematical
Physics, 43(3), 199–220.
2. Bekenstein, J. D. (1973). Black Holes and Entropy. Physical Review D, 7(8), 2333–2346.
3. Bardeen, J. M., Carter, B., & Hawking, S. W. (1973). The Four Laws of Black Hole Mechanics.
Communications in Mathematical Physics, 31(2), 161–170.
4. Wald, R. M. (1994). Quantum Field Theory in Curved Spacetime and Black Hole
Thermodynamics. University of Chicago Press.
5. Strominger, A., & Vafa, C. (1996). Microscopic Origin of the Bekenstein-Hawking Entropy.
Physical Review Letters, 79(1), 17–20.
6. Page, D. N. (1976). Particle Emission Rates from a Black Hole. II. Massless Particles from a
Rotating Hole. Physical Review D, 13(2), 198–206.
7. Giddings, S. B., & Thomas, S. (2002). High energy colliders as black hole factories: The end of
short distance physics. Physical Review D, 65(5), 056010.
8. Casals, M., Dolan, S. R., & Ottewill, A. C. (2003). Scalar green functions and modes in the
cosmic string space-time. Physical Review D, 67(2), 024022*.

STYLISTICS ANALYSIS: BABY KAMBLE’S AUTOBIOGRAPHY “THE PRISON WE BROKE”

Prof. Amar Ravsaheb Gejage

Senior Research Scholar, Shivaji University Kolhapur
M.A. SET (English), Ph.D. (Appear)
Email Id: [email protected]

I. ABSTRACTS:
The present article deal with the stylistics analysis and sociolinguistic study of the
selected Dalit autobiography entitled “The Prison we Broke”. This is the translated English
version of Marathi Dalit autobiography “Jin Amuch” by Baby Kamble. Style means, a way of
writing something or representing or delineation of fiction, drama, novel and poetry. Every
writer have has their own style of writing. And this unique or iconic writing style makes them
recognizable or writer identified by his/her witing style. Stylistics is the important branch of
applied linguistics, which unfolds keen study of the particular authors writing/language style in
terms of discourse, iconicity, general structure, language dialect and idiolect, and author’s tone.
Dissecting different levels of stylistics analysis for instances phonological, morphological,

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 189 | P a g e

syntax, semantic level and grammatical level.

II. KEY WORDS: stylistics, iconicity, prison, autobiography, substitute.

III. INTRODUCTION:
Dalit autobiography has their own linguistic dialectical style, they or Dalit writer
probably escapes to write in registered/official/government regional languages but they
deliberately used to write in their own dialect. Written Dalit work from the different regional
dialect for instances Marathi, Tamil, Telugu, Kannada, Hindi and Bengali. Translated Dalit
literature created their own space, aura, tranquillity in the world literature, Which was created
a specified genre as Dalit literary canon with impingement of style. The present research article
delves in to the stylistics analysis with the help of various dimensions and different stylistics
categories and linguistic checklist proposed by Geoffrey leech and Mick Short, in his book ‘style
in fiction’, used to foreground the literary style of the Dalit writing. Or the study of the Dialectical
style of the Baby Kamble’s Dalit autobiography “The Prison we broke”.

IV. RESEARCH METHODOLOGY:

In present research study will be followed research methods like close reading,
discourse analysis, and stylistics interpretation methods for the stylistics analysis of a particular
Dalit autobiography “The prison we broke”.

V. STYLISTICS ANALYSIS OF THE AUTOBIOGRAPHY “THE PRISON WE BROKE”:

1) The Discourse: Baby Kamble’s Autobiography “The Prison We Broke”, The narrative
discourse of this autobiography is the historical, personal with communal narration of their
sufferings. Baby Kamble used ordinary or daily rhetoric conversion with situations; the
discourse is not providing information in general. But she unfolded the reality or truth of the
society. Whatever anguish or deep pain came in her way, she went through and suffered a lot.
Particular community (Dalit) has been targeted to be suffer and targeted community people to
be discriminated. That Baby Kamble conveying Dalit subjectivity, struggles with resistance,
definitely discourse of the Dalit subaltern context. Baby Kamble addressed her autobiography
not only targeted audience but to the whole world. How was the struggle of Dr. Babasaheb
Ambedkar and how she became part of the anti-cast movement as feminist leader.
2) Author’s Tone: Tone of the Baby Kamble in her autobiography representing the history of
suffering of the community with her own individual tribulation, excruciation of Dalit community
and the confrontation to come out of the inequal crises. She tried to tell everything about her
personal untouchable discriminatory oppressional-experience, now that is the open secret of
her life, disclosed to the world as Dalit.
3) Phonological analysis: In this present autobiography have major phonological impacts on
her writing style because, an influence of the mother tongue. The translator has used simple
phonetic signs / Phonemes for the connotations for the represented Dalit life in the present
autobiography. Some of the selected Phonetic words like are a) “Unh..hun,..uuh…hun” and b) “
Unhuun, Unhuun, unhuun…..” (p.36), expressing cavernous pain, these are the humming sound
of women, who was possessed by demon, brutely or blistering beaten until collapsed on the
floor with flowing blood out of her body in reason to bought out demon who have been taken
control of her mind and body. (p.23), c) “Ahun…ahun” (p.27) the same possessed women’s
context painful disturbed heartrending sound, d) “Shoo… shoo” (p.81) This phonetic sound
stand for or reflected the untouchability practice in the society, the upper caste woman kept a
proper distance from untouchable women and said that “Mahar woman to stand at away from
her”, f) “ghar ghar ghar”, g) “ahhh and ohh” and e) “err…”, this are the other phonetical sounds
occurred in the autobiography.
4) Morphological level analysis: This is the next level of the stylistics analysis, called as
morphological analysis. In this present autobiography delves with different, an innovative
ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 190 | P a g e
morpheme that have been traced and brings out forefront to the reader. In this Autobiography,
we found that frequent use of open class of words or free morphemes, these are taken from the
Marathi language, to keep the semantic effect as it is or does not want to miss the catastrophe of
original writing. Moreover, similar kind of questions raised by Santosh Bhoomkar, while
translating ‘Akkarmashi’ in to English.
An influence of the Marathi language is the fruitful feature of the Dalit autobiography. Marathi
Dialectical word occurred many a times or frequently in the first chapter of “The prison we
broke” autobiography and the translator/Author Maya pandit used this Marathi local dialectical
morphemes as it is. For instances 1). Religious or Marathi Culture related free morphemes, that
foregrounded Dalit communal culture from the Maharashtrian Veergaon and Phaltan rural
region specifically. Following words like, Bukka, Anghara, Bhajani Mandal, Devrushin, potraja,
Kargota, Bhandra, haldi, Kumkum, sat asra, Nagapnchami, narsoba, nivad, abhir, gulal,
goumutra,choli, asud, devhara, Sankashti, Chaturthi, Dhupa arti, Poornima, Amavasya,
Suwasinis, karnja tree, Rede Jatra and harijan.
2. Morphemes related to food, kitchen instruments and wearing/ clothes: How’s the Dalit
community people survive or lived eating food like, Jwari ani Bajri Bhakri, Bufalo dried meat
called as Chanya, (dried fish) bombil, bhaji, Ukdala, channa, and dhania. this kind of food were
cooked for breakfast lunch and dinner in the dalit community, on the special festival or occasion
in Marathi called as Sanvar they made cultural special dish Gulwani, Amati and Puran-Poli. In
those days dalit people using Kitchen instruments and clothes such as Pali, Keli, tawa, katwat,
walani, Bhanvas, Kargota, Goghandi, Pallav, farak, Sari-choli. 3) Music related words: halgi,
lezim, shenai, Ghumaki, taal, and mridang, 4) Monetary realed words - damadi, Pei,Paisa, Anna,
5) Relative- Relationships related words: Aai, Baba, Sasu, Sasra, Bahin, Umbura, Chulha, Aajas,
Aaji, Sahibs, Maharwada, vahini, karbhari, 6) Marathi Months: Ashad, Ashwin, Kartik, Kotma,
Rhol, kanhar flowers, 7) Caste related words: harijan, Mang Suwasini, Mahar, Dhangar
(Shaphrds), Kolhati, Maratha, Brhaman, And 8) Buddhist philosophy: Sheel, Satwa, Neeti,
Pardnya and karuna. The influence of socio-linguistic dialectical Marathi word has intensive,
profound, meaningful effect on the early five chapters, moreover as autobiographical narrative
chronology progresses, then very limited number of accustomed Marathi dialectical word used
in the real-life chronicle. Sometimes, Baby Kamble used reiterated morphemes in her
autobiography e,g. Mahar, Bhakri, Suffering, torture, Bhandara, Maharwada, Pallav, terrible,16 th
share, and haldi…….etc.
5) Syntax level / analysis: This is the upgrade level of stylistics; syntactical level in which
includes the description of the elements of sentence (words+ verbs its types + clause its types)
how it is functioned. This autobiography has the different experimental syntactical levels or
structure used in this particular autobiography. In the autobiography most of the time writer
substitute with verb phrase or verb clause in replacing noun clauses.
In Baby Kamble’s “The Prison We Broke”, She used enhanced phrases to explain exasperated
pain, they have had experienced in the Dalit communal and personal life, some of the
exceptional synthesis of idioms or phrases and highlighting following pivotal phrases a) “Sea of
suffering”, b) “meek slaves of the earth”, c) “new dimensions of torture”, d) “White sahib’s own
tongue”, e) “A way in to people’s hearts, unlimited grief and suffering, f) “story of permanent
deprivation and suffering", g) “ A terrible thrashing” a noun phrase with adjective as
premodifier h) verb phrase “ virtually staving” i) “chains of slavery” and g) “a voice drenched in
self-pity”.
In terms of sentence/clause structure, was written in simplistic past tense form, easy to
read and understand. Probably, complex, compound and compound complex sentence structure
are noted few countable numbers in the autobiography.
Sentence no.1. “We are Mahar girls, (Main clause)
And (conjunction, coordinated word)
the god has sent demons after us, (Subordinate clause)
Because (conjunction)
ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 191 | P a g e
 we have pollute him” (dependent clause)
This is very unique, ingenious and advertency sentence. The structure of the sentence is
sporadic and infrequently used in the autobiographical narration, three clauses arranged in
sequenced manner coordinated with conjunction And and because.
Sentence No.2 children love their grandparents. (Main clause), At least, (Adverbial
phrase, reason) Besides, (co-ordination), in those days (pp), Most of the children were born
(Independent clause), in their maternal grandparents’ home. (Np with pp as pre modifier).
Growing up (verb clause + Post modifier Adv.P) in the Grandparents’ home, was like being, in
the cool shelter of love. (Verb clause + Np + premodifier adv.p), Naturally, children would prefer
their Grandparent’s home (dependent clause) to (That clause) that of their own parents.
This is the longest sentence having 56 morphemes linguistically, literally or semantically
interconnected to the each other with repetition of the noun phrase “Grandparents home”. The
clause and phrase structure are very complicated and complex as we have seen.
This particular autobiography follows three principles of sequencing in stylistics
analysis proposed by leech 1) Presentational Skill: real life evidences is well formed with
influential significant narration of Dalit community life as well as keen detail about their
suffering and endured experiences. 2) and 3) Chronological sequencing and psychological
sequencing: Baby Kamble narrated her historical lived instances in chorological order from her
ancestor grandfather, who was native English speaker in British India to independent Dalit
scenario. But her life narration started from her father Pandrinath Kakade’s, sometime called as
Mistry, who was struggling for a job and continuous fighting with starvation, then narration
shift to the community’s pathos and pain. And her father’s perspective with impingement of
contemporary Dalit movement led by Dr.Babasaheb Ambedkar, she narrated in the second last
chapter, she didn’t follow the rule chronological order but obviously, she had followed the
stream of consciousness method or psychological perspective, while narrating some crucial
event in her life comparing with anti-caste movement ran by Dr. Babasaheb Ambedkar .

6) Semantic level - The writing style of the autobiography is very simplistic uncomplicated to
understand. The reader could be easily apprehended the exact conveyed transported meaning
by the writer or Translator, but in the foremost chapters having tremendous influence of
Marathi dialectical language, that’s why, or occasionally it is challenging to understand, to get
the meaning of Marathi Dialectical word for the English reader. According to the translator they
wanted to keep unaltered or original mighty sensibility of the autobiography. And because of
English translation there would be nonprobability of language barrier problem for the second
language or the English reader, exceptional case of Marathi morpheme. Regional linguistic terms
contented meaning; writer denotes it in convinced manner.
7) Grammatical Level: The English translator of the “Jin Amuch” Autobiography, Maya Pandit
did some experiment with sentence and clause structure reflected through her writing style.
How’s used the simple, compound and complex grammatical sentence, while portraying the
autobiography by the writer. P) Use of simple sentence, For Example.,1) “The first cock
crowed”. 2) “The digging started”. And 3) “The god is very strict”. Q) Use of compound
sentence: Frequent usage or combination of subordinated sentence and compound sentence,
with linkage words Like But, and, because, since, they, then, that etc. Subordinated sentence
staring with which, when, where, when, where, how often, whatever and how, for e.g., A) “They
would close the holes with rage, which had sharp Babhul throned stuffle inside” (p.135). The
above second sentence is fine example of compound sentence started with “They” and
coordinated with “which”. The maximum sentence length is 25-30 words. B) “The children
fetched the water in tin pots and the women would pour it down their through in great gulps”.
(p.51), C) “Then the mother was covered with a blanket and the baby put at the feet of the
goddess, that is, in from of the seven stones”. (p.61) The above sentence describes the
superstitious performed activity by the Dalit community people in order get relief from the
stomach aches that the little baby suffering through. R) Use of complex sentence 1) “This
ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 192 | P a g e
rigorous punishment at a young age, however, was far preferable to what she had to endure
once she reached maturity (p.95). The above sentence explained critical situation of the newly
married Dalit girl. S) Compound complex sentences to conveying her agony or consciousness
about the Dalit condition. E.g., 1) “Sheel Pradnaya karuna have been the founding principle of
my life, what else does this humble servant of Bhim want when she has the three jewels in her
possession? When on has this wealth, what does the ordinary world matter?” (p.135), 2) “The
people in the house, men and women, would start wailing loudly but not without having first
poured their wrath on the Mahar! Carrying such massages was really an ordeal for the Mahar”
(p.79). Complex sentence and compound sentence has been used less frequent time, and simple
past sentence, we came across many a times. In “The prison we broke” Dalit autobiography, the
structure of the writing the autobiography very surface level simplistic, but sometime writer
came across the very deep and complicated structure to understand semantically.
The interrogative sentence appeared in the rage between 60-70 times in the
autobiography. Generally, in the autobiography Baby Kamble used simple language to narrate
the autobiography. Sometimes, Substitution of the subject or the omissions of the subject with
other related phrases e.g., VP replaced with NP. The repetition of personal pronouns and
definite and indefinite article used frequently in the autobiography.
8) Figurative Language: The writer/translator used figurative language like simile, metaphor,
Sarcasm, irony, climax and anti-climax, to make dynamic excellent dalit writing with cognitive
consequences. a) Simile- There are several examples of simile used by the writer in her
autobiography, some of the best following examples of its a) "he looked like the waghya or the
coach man of the goddess”, b) “as if they were in the seventh heaven”, c) “She will live like the
Patil’s wife” d) “the news was spread like wild fire” e) “His words were like elixir to our ears” f)
“their groups like battering and scatters them” g) “as if their lives are in moral danger” and h)
“he looked like the fil star Master Bhagwan”, h) “they treated like us lepers, as if our bodies
dripped with dirty blood or as if pus oozed out of or rotten flesh” , and last one i)”The sweat
running down the bodies felt like the first drop of the rain”
b) Irony: Instances of irony followed as “his voice could pollute but not the sound of his bell”,
and “The village would take every precaution against pollution”
c) Metaphor: In the very title “The prison We broke” used metaphorically by the writer here the
word “Prison” used as metaphor to refers indirectly to the dominate higher caste hegemonic
age-old traditional superiority of social-caste-stratum, that was broken by Dalit community and
patriarchy by Dalit women. 2) “as if he were the direct descendent of the Saint Tukaram, who
was famous for his generosity, “but his complexion was coal black” 3) A burning coal! holding a
burning coal in ones palm was easier than living with he!” 4) “fire in their blood” 5) “the spirit of
rebellion” and d) “ocean of knowledge” and 7) “Our mind were absorbed”
e) Sarcasm: “We may be like rivers, streams, canals, or even gutters; but all of us have to
finally merge in the ocean. Our ocean is the community”
9) Climax and Anticlimax: This autobiography has divided into twelve chapters, and the writer
Baby Kamble used the climax as figurative element very thoroughly, she created substantive
atmosphere at the beginning of every chapter, while reading, or she captivated or grippled
totally attention of the reader, effectuates idiosyncrasies while delineating her life as well as
Dalit community life and determining every chapter of autobiography.

V. CONCLUSION:
The present study highlighted stylistic analysis of “The Prison we Broke” a popular Dalit
autobiography. Writer Emphasizes the peculiar stylistics characteristics to demonstrates the
Dalit contextual perspectives. The study also, focussed, how, the iconicity of the language,
discourse, author tone, influence of Marathi morphemes, different linguistic and stylistic levels,
simple compound, complex sentence structure and last one figurative language. Especially,
primary aim of the study to pointed out significant choices of language linguistically and
stylistically.
ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 193 | P a g e
VI. REFERENCE:
1. Kamble, Baby, “The prison we Broke”, Tral. By Maya, Pandit, Published year 2007
2. Leech, Geoffrey and Short, Mick. “Style in Fiction”, Person education limited, 2007.

SYNTHESIS OF 1,8-DIOXODECAHYDROACRIDINE AND REDUCTION OF P-NITROPHENOL

TO P-AMINOPHENOL BY USING NiO-Al2O3 NANO CATALYSTS

Radhakrishna S. Sutara, Meghshyam K. Patil b,*

aPadmabhushan Vasantraodada Patil Mahavidyalaya Kavathe Mahankal, Sangli, 416 405, MS,

India.
bDepartment of Chemistry, Dr. Babasaheb Ambedkar Marathwada University, Aurangabad, Sub-

campus, Osmanabad 413 501, MS, India.

ABSTRACT:
A NiO/Al2O3 nanocatalyst has been successfully synthesized using a simple precipitation
method. XRD was used to characterize the prepared product. XRD revealed that the samples are
of nano-crystalline nature. NiO/Al2O3 nanocatalyst showed high catalytic activity for the
reduction of p-nitrophenol to p-aminophenol using sodium borohydride (NaBH 4). Also 30%
NiO/Al2O3 nanocatalyst for the synthesis of 1,8-dioxodecahydroacridine derivatives for the

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 194 | P a g e

multicomponent reaction between aldehyde, dimedone and ammonium acetate.

KEYWORDS: Nanocatalyst, NiO-Al2O3, 1,8-dioxodecahydroacridine, p-nitrophenol reduction, p-

aminophenol.

1. INTRODUCTION:
Nanostructure materials have been widely explored for the fundamental-basic scientific
and technological interests in retrieving new classes of functional materials with
extraordinary/unique properties and applications. Nano sized materials, which effectively remit
the sluggish kinetics in the conversion reactions and large volume expansion during long-time
cycles (95.7%), can indeed improve the electrochemical performances. Recently, a variety of
nano-structured NiO-based materials have been fabricated, such as nanofilm, nanotube,
nanowire and nanocone. Nevertheless, there still remains a tough problem that nanoscale
materials would easily get aggregation and agglomeration due to their high specific surface
area, which may bring about poor cyclic stability and rate performances. Therefore, novel
sophisticated nanomaterials are urgent to be designed and synthesized. Among the fabricated
morphologies, nanosized materials with conductive substrates coating seems to solve the above
issues. In despite of carbon, metal oxides coating (such as MgO, ZnO, TiO 2, Al2O3 and AlF3) have
been investigated as an effective method to enhance the performances of the next-generation
LIBs. Note worthily, Al2O3 is discovered to deliver superior electrochemical properties
particularly cyclic stability among different coatings due to its high surface area and high
thermal stability. Thus, allow for the low-cost and the advantages, Al2O3 coating seems to be an
effective strategy to improve the structural passability so as to enhance the electrochemical
performances in LIBs electrodes. NiO is an important antiferromagnetic p-type semiconductor
with excellent properties such as gas-sensing, catalytic and electrochemical properties, and has
been extensively studied for different applications such as in solid state sensors, electro-
chromic devices and heterogeneous catalysts as well as lithium batteries. The nickel oxide thin
films have been prepared using various techniques including thermal evaporation, organic-
solvent method, chemical vapor deposition (CVD), electrochemical deposition, sol–gel,
sputtering, chemical solution deposition (CSD), etc.
Nanomaterials with the size of 1–100 nm have paying attention due to the difference of
properties from bulk phases arising from quantum size effect. In recent years, one-dimensional
(1D) nanostructures, such as nanorods, nanowires and nanotubes, have received intensively
attention because of both their fundamental importance and the wide range of their potential
applications in many areas. Various methods have been developed to fabricate 1Dstructured
materials such as laser ablation method, CVD method, hydrothermal method, structure directing
soft or hard templates, and the self-assembly of spherical nano-particles by oriented attachment
NiO, as one of the relatively few metal oxides that tend to bep-type, is a stable wide band gap
material and can be used as transparent p-type semiconducting layer. As a kind of functional
material, NiO has received considerable attention due to its attractive application in catalysts,
battery cathodes, gas sensors, electro-chromic films, magnetic materials, active optical fibers
and fuel cell electrodes. The main objective of the research in this field is to reduce the costs of
chemical synthesis and to produce materials for technological applications. In this work, we
have prepared Al2O3-NiOnano-materials by sol-gel method (with surfactant) using two different
precursors (Aluminium nitrate and Nickel nitrate), using these prepared catalysts we have
carried out multicomponent reaction between aldehyde, dimedone and ammonium acetate
under solvent free condition.

2.1. MATERIALS AND METHODS

2.1.1 Materials
The main materials were nickel nitrate hexahydrate (Ni),Aluminium nitrate
nonahydrate sodium hydroxide (NaOH), Sodium dodecyl sulfate (SDS), Ethanol, De-ionized
ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 195 | P a g e
water,etc.

2.1.2 Methods
Catalyst preparation
The NiO/Al2O3 catalysts were synthesized using raw materials of Al(NO 3)3·9H2O,
Ni(NO3)2·6H2O SDS and NaOH. Al(NO3)3·9H2O and Ni(NO3)2·6H2O were separately dissolved
into deionized water to form two starting solutions, respectively. A solution of nickel nitrate in
10 mL of deionized water and the solution of SDS in 15 mL of deionized water under
continuously vigorous stirring for 30 min. A solution of Ni(NO 3)2 was then added drop wise to
the Al(NO3)3 solution under continuously vigorous stirring for 30 min at room temperature.
Then the NaOH (0.5 m)was added drop by drop with constant stirring to the solution of
Ni(NO3)2-Al(NO3)3and the pH value of the mixed solution was adjusted of 12. The resultant
solution was kept at room temperature for settle down. The formed precipitate was then
filtered, washed with deionized water (3 times) and dried at 80 0C for 24 hours. Finally,
obtained powder has been calcined at 500 0C for 4 hrs.
By this developed procedure, we prepared 10 wt%, 20 wt % and 30 wt % of NiO/Al 2O3
nanoparticles.

2.2 CHARACTERIZATION
The phases of NiO/Al2O3 were analyzed by XRD. The particle size of the nanoparticles
was calculated through the Scherrer's equation.

[D = kλ / β cosθ]

where D is the average crystallite domain size perpendicular to the reflecting planes, k is
the constant, λ is the wavelength of the Xray, β is the Full Width at Half Maximum and θ is the
diffraction angle.

2.3. Synthesis of 1,8-dioxodecahydroacridine derivatives:

Various aromatic aldehydes 1 (1 mmol), dimedone (2, 2mmol), ammonium acetate (3,
2.5 mmol), and 50 mg NiO/Al2O3 catalyst under solvent-free condition were mixed and heatedat
80C. After completion, the mixture was cooled to roomtemperature and diluted with 10 cm 3
hot ethanol. Themixture was centrifuged to separate catalyst, washed withacetone, dried in
oven. From obtained filtrate, solvent was evaporated to get the product. Product was further
recrystallized by using ethanol and confirmed by melting point.

3.1 CHARACTERIZATION
3.1.1 XRD:

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 196 | P a g e

 1500

30 wt %
20 wt %
1200
Intensity

900

600

300

0
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
2
Fig. 1: XRD pattern of NiO/Al2O3 catalyst.

XRD of both the catalysts shows similar XRD pattern having phases of both Al2O3 and NiO.

3.2 p-nitrophenol to p-aminophenol conversion:

To check the catalytic performance of the prepared catalysts, we have studied reaction
of p-nitrophenol to p-aminophenol by using NaBH4 in presence of these prepared catalysts. It
was found that the 30% NiO/Al2O3 catalyst shown better performance than other catalysts.
Further activity studies we have carried out with 30% NiO/Al2O3.

3.3 Synthesis of 1,8-dioxodecahydroacridine derivatives:

We have tested the 30% NiO/Al2O3 catalyst for multicomponent reaction between
aldehydes, dimedone and ammonium acetate (Scheme 1). We found that the catalyst is working
excellent under solvent free condition at 80 C.

Table 1. Synthesis of 1-8dioxodecahydroacridines by NiO/Al2O3 catalyst

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 197 | P a g e
Entry Ar-CHO Time/min Yield/% M.P./ C Lit. M.P./ C Product

1 4-FC6H4 110 81 292-294 292-294

2 3-ClC6H4 105 71 220-222 222-224

3 4-MeC6H4 95 68 260-264 263-268

4 3-BrC6H4 102 81 182-184 183-187

5 4-NO2C6H4 115 78 284-286 288-290

6 C6H4 90 74 277-280 279-281

7 4-OCH3C6H4 145 41 274-276 278-280

4. CONCLUSIONS:
Following are the conclusions of our study:
1. We have successfully prepared NiO/Al2O3 catalyst by simple precipitation method.
2. Among the three catalyst 30% NiO/Al2O3 catalyst is found to be excellent for conversion of
p-nitrophenol to p-aminophenol.
3. Furthermore, we have successfully employed the 30% NiO/Al2O3 catalyst for
multicomponent reaction between aldehyde, dimedone and ammonium acetate for the
synthesis of 1,8-dioxodecahydroacridine derivatives.

REFERENCES:

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 198 | P a g e

1. D. Geng, L. Chen, G. Lu, J. Mol. Catal. A: Chem.265 (2007)
2. D. Chen, L. Gao, Chem. Phys. Lett.405 (2005)
3. A.P. Alivisatos, J. Phys. Chem. 100 (1996) 13226.
4. X. Wang, J. Song, L. Gao, J. Jin, H. Zheng, Z. Zhang, Nanotechnology 16 (2005)37–39.
5. R.D. Zysler, in: D. Fiorani (Ed.), Surface Effects in MagneticNanoparticles, Springer, New
York, 2005, pp. 243–263.
6. R.D. Shull, IEEE Trans. Magn.29 (1993)
7. I.M.L. Billas, A. Chatelain, W.A. De Heer, Science 265 (1994) 1682.
8. C.R. Makkus, K. Hemmes, D.W. Wir, J. Electrochem. Soc. 141(1994)3429.
9. S. Manna, A.K. Deb, J. Jagannanth, S.K. De, J. Phys. Chem. C. 112 (2008)10659.
10. H. Guan, C. Shao, S. Wen, B. Chen, J. Gong, X. Yang, Inorg.Chem. Commun. 6 (2003)1302.
11. P. Palanisamy, A.M. Raichur, Mater. Sci. Eng. C. 29(2009) 199.
12. G.J. Li, X.X. Hunag, Y. Shi, J.K. Guo, Mater. Lett.51, 325
13. S. R. Gowda, A. L. M. Reddy, M. M. Shaijumon, X. Zhan, L. Ci and P. M. Ajayan, Nano
14. Lett., 2011, 11, 101-106.
15. M. S. Wu and Y. P. Lin, ElectrochimActa, 2011, 56, 2068-2073.
16. S. A. Needham, G. X. Wang and H. K. Liu, J. Power Sources, 2006, 159, 254-257.
17. D. W. Su, H. S. Kim, W. S. Kim and G. X. Wang, Chem-Eur J, 2012, 18, 8224-8229.
18. X. H. Wang, Z. B. Yang, X. L. Sun, X. W. Li, D. S. Wang, P. Wang and D. Y. He, J MaterChem,
2011, 21, 9988-9990.
19. J. M. Zheng, P. H. Xu, M. Gu, J. Xiao, N. D. Browning, P. F. Yan, C. M. Wang and J. G. Zhang,
Chem. Mater., 2015, 27, 1381-1390.
20. H. C. M. Knoops, M. E. Donders, M. C. M. van de Sanden, P. H. L. Notten and W. M. M.Kessels, J.
Vac. Sci. Technol. A, 2012, 30.
21. Y. S. Jung, A. S. Cavanagh, L. Gedvilas, N. E. Widjonarko, I. D. Scott, S. H. Lee, G. H. Kim, S. M.
George and A. C. Dillon, Adv. Energy Mater., 2012, 2, 1022-1027.
22. J. M. Zheng, M. Gu, J. Xiao, B. J. Polzin, P. Yan, X. L. Chen, C. M. Wang and J. G. Zhang, Chem.
Mater., 2014, 26, 6320-6327.
23. M. Lengyel, D. Elhassid, G. Atlas, W. T. Moller and R. L. Axelbaum, J. Power Sources, 2014,
266, 175-178.
24. D. Scott, Y. S. Jung, A. S. Cavanagh, Y. F. An, A. C. Dillon, S. M. George and S. H. Lee,Nano Lett.,
2011, 11, 414-418.
25. Y. S. Jung, A. S. Cavanagh, Y. F. Yan, S. M. George and A. Manthiram, J. Electrochem. Soc., 2011,
158, A1298-A1302.
26. X. F. Zhang, I. Belharouak, L. Li, Y. Lei, J. W. Elam, A. M. Nie, X. Q. Chen, R. S. Yassarand R. L.
Axelbaum, Adv. Energy Mater., 2013, 3, 1299-1307.

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 199 | P a g e

 THE AMERICAN DREAM AND LITERATURE: A MULTIDISCIPLINARY APPROACH

Miss. Sayali Satish Sadamate , Tejaswini Anil Pawar , Ms. Vaishnavi Bhimrao Raste
B.A.-I
Padmabhushan Vasantraodada Patil Mahavidyalaya, Kavathe Mahankal,
Sangli, Maharashtra 416405

ABSTRACT:
This paper explores the concept of the American Dream as depicted in literature
through a multidisciplinary approach that combines insights from literary studies, cultural
studies, sociology, and history. The American Dream, a central tenet of American culture, has
been a recurring theme in literature throughout the nation's history, reflecting the aspirations,
struggles, and realities of individuals and communities. By examining a diverse range of literary
works, including novels, short stories, and essays, this study investigates how the American
Dream has been portrayed, critiqued, and reimagined in different contexts and time periods.
Authors such as F. Scott Fitzgerald, Toni Morrison, John Steinbeck, and Sandra Cisneros are
analysed to uncover the complexities and contradictions inherent in the American Dream, as
well as its role in shaping national identity and social consciousness. By adopting a
multidisciplinary approach, this research aims to deepen our understanding of the enduring
influence of the American Dream on literature and culture, and its ongoing relevance in
contemporary society.

KEY WORDS: American Dream, Individuals, Community,

INTRODUCTION:
over time the American dream has proved a resilient and unique concept that Americans
have come to understand and define in different ways as relevant to their own life narratives
and experiences. not defined or rooted in lineage, religion or some form of a shaped a defined by
collective values. These values and principles rooted in individualism ,self-actualisation ,and
self-reliance where people are able to fulfil their own destiny, be self -reliant , and believe in the
promise that through hard work and perseverance life can be different and better the apparent
timeless notions of these values in relationship to pursuing and defining what we now
understand as the American dream are deeply embedded in the fabric of the cultural landscape
of America because they inform and preserve the my theology of the American dream is a May
that endures and lasts because it promotes as aspirational experience that both lines and finds
fulfilment in one is life or in the lives of other Americans.
The concept of the American Dream has long been a central theme in literature, serving
as a powerful lens through which to explore the ideals, aspirations, and challenges of society.
This research project, titled "The American Dream and Literature: A Multidisciplinary
Approach," seeks to delve into the intricate relationship between this enduring American ideal
and the diverse realms of literature. By adopting a multidisciplinary approach, this study aims

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 200 | P a g e

to analyse how the American Dream has been conceptualized, critiqued, and reimagined across
various literary genres, periods, and cultural contexts. Through a nuanced exploration of
literary works, sociocultural frameworks, and historical perspectives, this research project
endeavours to shed light on the complexities and contradictions inherent in the American
Dream narrative, offering a comprehensive understanding of its impact on individual identities,
societal structures, and national consciousness.

OBJECTIVE:
To examine the intersection of literature, history, sociology, and cultural studies in the
exploration of the American Dream, aiming to provide a holistic and interdisciplinary
understanding of how this concept has shaped individual aspirations, societal structures, and
national narratives throughout American literary history.

HYPOTHESES:
The portrayal of the American Dream in literature reflects the changing socio-political
realities and cultural values of different time periods, with some works highlighting the dream's
attainability and glorification, while others critique its exclusivity, inequality, and illusory
nature.

REVIEW OF RELEVANT LITERATURE.:

"The American Dream and Literature: A Multidisciplinary Approach" seeks to explore
the complex relationship between the American Dream and literature, drawing on insights from
various disciplines such as literature, sociology, history, and cultural studies. This research
paper aims to analyze how the American Dream has been depicted, interrogated, and critiqued
in a wide range of literary works, and how these literary representations reflect and shape
larger societal attitudes and values.
"The American Dream in Literature" edited by Sandra Malak and John M. Malak - This
collection of essays delves into the representation of the American Dream in various literary
genres and periods, examining how different authors have grappled with the concept of the
American Dream and its impact on American society.
"American Dreams in Mississippi: Consumers, Poverty, and Culture 1830-1998" by Ted
Ownby - This book provides a historical and sociological perspective on the American Dream,
exploring how consumer culture, poverty, and racial dynamics have influenced the pursuit and
realization of the American Dream in different eras.
"The Cambridge History of American Literature" edited by Sacvan Bercovitch - This
comprehensive volume offers a broad overview of American literature from its early beginnings
to the present day, providing valuable insights into how literary texts have both reflected and
shaped the American Dream as a cultural and social construct.
By drawing on these and other relevant reference books on American literature, "The
American Dream and Literature: A Multidisciplinary Approach" aims to provide a nuanced and
interdisciplinary analysis of the enduring and evolving nature of the American Dream as
portrayed in literary texts across different genres, time periods, and cultural contexts.

ANALYSIS:
In "The American Dream and Literature: A Multidisciplinary Approach," the author
undertakes a comprehensive examination of the complex relationship between the American
Dream and literature, drawing on insights from various disciplines such as literature, sociology,
history, and cultural studies. The paper delves into how the American Dream has been depicted,
questioned, and reimagined in a wide range of literary works, and how these representations
ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 201 | P a g e
reflect and influence broader societal ideals and values.
One of the key strengths of this research paper is its multidisciplinary approach, which
allows for a more nuanced and comprehensive analysis of the American Dream in literature. By
drawing on diverse theoretical frameworks and disciplinary perspectives, the author is able to
offer a richer understanding of how the American Dream has been articulated in literary texts
across different genres, time periods, and cultural contexts.
Furthermore, the use of reference books on American literature, such as "The American
Dream in Literature" edited by Sandra Malak and John M. Malak, "American Dreams in
Mississippi" by Ted Ownby, and "The Cambridge History of American Literature" edited by
Sacvan Bercovitch, strengthens the analysis by providing a solid theoretical and historical
foundation for exploring the complex interplay between the American Dream and literature.
Through this multidisciplinary lens, the research paper sheds light on how authors have
grappled with the promises and pitfalls of the American Dream, offering critical insights into
issues of social mobility, inequality, race, gender, and the pursuit of happiness in American
society. By interrogating both the idealized visions and the harsh realities associated with the
American Dream, the paper invites readers to reflect on the ways in which literature serves as a
mirror to society, reflecting and contesting prevailing ideologies and narratives surrounding the
American Dream.
Overall, "The American Dream and Literature: A Multidisciplinary Approach" offers a
compelling and insightful analysis of the enduring and evolving nature of the American Dream
as portrayed in American literature, highlighting the ways in which literature both reflects and
shapes our collective understanding of this quintessentially American ideal.

CONCLUSION :
The multifaceted and evolving concept of the American dream has been researched
and studies for well over a century since our culture and nation are not defined by a single
shared history , religion or language ,the ideals defined in the construction and the declaration
of independence have allowed for the notion of the American dream to evolve over time such
that it has expanded and United racial and social classes the ideals central to what one think of
as the seemingly timeless American dream have been present since the beginning of cur nation
the beliefs in individualism, self-actualisation and self-reliance which one understands as having
the potential to fulfil his or her destiny and believe in the promise that life can be different are
believes that have been meticulously interwoven into the fabric at the American culture from
the founding to the present.

BIBLIOGRAPHY:
1. Abrahams, M. H. and Geoffrey G. Harpham. A Glossary of Literary Terms. Boston: Mass
Thomson Wadsworth, 1999. Print.
2. Agarwal, Beena. India’s Women’s Theatre Search of a Tradition. Jaipur: AADI Publication,
2018. Print.
3. Baldwin, James “Down at the Cross,” The Fire Next Time. New York: Dial Press, 1969. Print.
4. Baraka, Amiri. The Autobiography of LeRoi Jones. Chicago: Lawrence Hill, 1984. Print.
5. Bean, Annemarie. “Playwrights and Plays of Harlem Renaissance”. A Companion to
Twentieth-Century American Drama, ed. David Krasner. New Jersey: Blackwell, 2009. 91-
105. Print.
6. Bhatt, S Krishna. “Indo-English Women Playwrights”. Indo-English Drama. New Delhi:
Sangeet Natak Akademi, 1979. 39.
7. Bush, Jason. “Who Thuh Man?! Historical melodrama and the performance of masculinity in
Topdog/Underdog”. Suzan-Lori Parks: A Casebook. ed. Kevin J. Wetmore Jr. and Alycia Smith-
Howard. New York: Routledge, 2007. 73-88. Print.
8. DuBois, W. E. B. “Krigwa Little Theatre Movement”. The Crisis 32.3 (1926) 134-136. Print.

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 202 | P a g e

 9. Hatch, James V. and Ted Shine. ed. Black Theatre, U.S.A: Forty-Five Plays by Black Americans,
1847-1974. New York: The Free P, 1974. Print.
10. Hull, Gloria. Scott, P.B. Barbara Smith, ed. “All the woman are White, All the Blacks Are Men,
but Some of Us are Brave”. The Politics of Black Women’s Studies. New York: Feminist Press,
1982. xvii-xxxiv. Print.
11. Mukherjee, Tutun. “Prolegomenon to Women’s Theatre”. Staging Resistance Plays by Women
in Translation. New Delhi: Oxford UP, 2005. 1-27. Print.
12. Gates, Henry Louse. Introduction. The Signifying Monkey: Theory of African- American
Literary Criticism. London: Oxford UP, 1988. Print.
.

THE CONVERGENCE OF INTERDISCIPLINARY STUDIES WITH COMMERCE AND

MANAGEMENT PRESENTING A UNIQUE ITS OWN SET OF TRENDS, CHALLENGES,
AND OPPORTUNITIES

Pooja Rahul Mali

(M.com, MBA, M.phil, PhD pursuing, NET qualified)
Assistant Professor
Department of Commerce , Padmabhushan Vasantraodada Patil Mahavidyalaya,
Kavathe Mahankal Sangli, Maharashtra.
Email : [email protected]

ABSTRACT:
The Indian higher education system is in the process of introducing interdisciplinary
education. The stream is witnessing the process of change as support from the corporate sector
and plans. This article describes interdisciplinary trade research In India as a way forward. As part
of the analysis, the factors and possible needs to be pursued were derived. Such studies have been
discussed. Education brings together many disciplines to form a growing field of research.
Interdisciplinary approaches, as well as interdisciplinary and trans disciplinary approaches, are
one of these challenging areas. The purpose of this article is to explore the potential of
interdisciplinary approaches in commerce, economics, management, and related fields. Whereas
the disciplinary approaches we have taken so far focus on a single specialty, interdisciplinary
approaches allow him to integrate some common areas between two or more disciplines. It
emphasizes an interdisciplinary approach, he attempts to develop one subject by almost 100%
combination of two or more subjects. The importance of interdisciplinary approaches could be
further strengthened if universities start researching how to integrate subjects and researchers
choose interdisciplinary topics. In this article, researchers consider the possibility of integrating
business education at interdisciplinary levels through identifying the trend, studying the
challenges, identifying the opportunities of intersection of interdisciplinary studies with commerce
& management.

KEYWORD: Interdisciplinary, Commerce & Management, Trends, Opportunity, Challenges.

1. INTRODUCTION:
Interdisciplinary studies in Commerce and Management involve the integration of
knowledge, methodologies, and perspectives from multiple academic disciplines to address
complex issues and challenges in business, economics, and organizational management. This
approach transcends traditional disciplinary boundaries, drawing insights from fields such as
economics, finance, marketing, psychology, sociology, and information technology to provide a
comprehensive understanding of commercial activities and management practices. By

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 203 | P a g e

synthesizing diverse perspectives, interdisciplinary studies in commerce and management aim
to foster innovation, enhance decision-making processes, and develop holistic solutions to
contemporary business problems.
The intersection interdisciplinary approaches are essential in addressing complex
business challenges because they enable a comprehensive understanding, foster innovation,
enhance adaptability, manage complexity, promote sustainability and ethics, and facilitate
cross-sector collaboration. By embracing interdisciplinary approaches, businesses can better
navigate the complexities of the modern business landscape and drive sustainable growth and
success and finance to analyze market trends, economic indicators, and financial performance.
This includes topics such as macroeconomic analysis, financial modeling, investment strategies,
and monetary policy.

 Marketing and Consumer Behavior: Understanding consumer behavior and market

dynamics is essential for businesses. Interdisciplinary approaches in commerce incorporate
knowledge from psychology, sociology, and anthropology to analyze consumer preferences,
purchasing decisions, and market segmentation.
 Management and Organizational Behavior: Interdisciplinary studies in commerce
explore management theories, leadership styles, organizational culture, and human
resource management practices. This includes topics such as organizational psychology,
change management, and strategic planning.
 Technology and Innovation: With the rapid advancement of technology, interdisciplinary
studies in commerce integrate insights from computer science, engineering, and design to
explore topics such as digital transformation, e-commerce strategies, innovation
management, and technology adoption.
 Globalization and International Business: Interdisciplinary approaches in commerce
address the complexities of global markets, trade agreements, and cross-border
transactions. This involves integrating knowledge from international relations, political
science, and cultural studies to analyze international business strategies, foreign market
entry, and global supply chains.
 Sustainability and Corporate Social Responsibility (CSR): Interdisciplinary studies in
commerce examine the intersection of business practices with environmental sustainability,
social responsibility, and ethical considerations. This includes topics such as sustainable
business models, green supply chain management, and corporate governance.
 Entrepreneurship and Innovation Ecosystems: Interdisciplinary approaches explore the
dynamics of entrepreneurship, startup ecosystems, and innovation clusters. This involves
integrating knowledge from business, economics, sociology, and technology to analyze
factors influencing entrepreneurial success, innovation diffusion, and ecosystem
development.
 Policy and Regulation: Interdisciplinary studies in commerce examine the regulatory
environment, public policy initiatives, and government interventions that impact business
operations. This includes topics such as regulatory compliance, antitrust laws, consumer
protection, and corporate governance reforms.
 Data Analytics and Business Intelligence: With the proliferation of data, interdisciplinary
approaches in commerce incorporate insights from statistics, data science, and information
systems to analyse big data, develop predictive models, and derive actionable insights for
decision-making.
 Ethics, Diversity, and Inclusion: Interdisciplinary studies in commerce explore ethical
dilemmas, diversity issues, and inclusion practices within organizations. This involves
integrating insights from ethics, sociology, and organizational behavior to promote ethical
leadership, diversity initiatives, and inclusive workplace cultures

2. REVIEW OF LITERATURE
ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 204 | P a g e
 Etzioni, A. (2007) the University of Michigan's Modern Organization Theory made
important contributions to our understanding of organizations, emphasizing the importance of
human factors, participative management, and organizational effectiveness in shaping
organizational behavior and performance. The insights and findings of the Michigan School had
significant implications for management practice, influencing approaches to leadership,
employee relations, and organizational development. This theory studies Concepts such as
participative management and organizational climate were widely adopted by practitioners
seeking to improve organizational performance and employee well-being. Ireland, R. & Webb,
Justin. (2007) Cross-disciplinary exploration of entrepreneurship research, synthesizing
insights from economics, management, sociology, psychology, and innovation studies. By
examining the contributions of multiple disciplines, this paper highlights the multidimensional
nature of entrepreneurship and the diverse perspectives that enrich our understanding of
entrepreneurial phenomena. Moving forward, interdisciplinary collaboration and dialogue are
essential for advancing theory, informing practice, and addressing complex challenges in
entrepreneurship. By integrating insights from diverse fields, scholars can contribute to a more
holistic and nuanced understanding of entrepreneurship, ultimately driving innovation,
economic development, and societal change Barney, J. B., & Clark, D. N. (2007) According to
resource-based theory, a firm's resources can be categorized into tangible and intangible assets,
and the key to success lies in how these resources are combined, deployed, and managed
effectively. How resource-based theory helps in creating and sustaining competitive advantage:
it provides a framework for understanding how firms can create and sustain competitive
advantage by leveraging their internal resources, developing core competencies, and
continuously adapting to changing market conditions. By focusing on the strategic management
of resources and capabilities, firms can position themselves for long-term success in the
marketplace. Foss, Nicolai & Laursen, Keld. (2012). The researcher discuss the concept of
learning organizations and the role of HRM practices in fostering continuous improvement and
adaptation to change. It might examine approaches to organizational learning, experimentation,
and knowledge creation to sustain innovation over the long term, human resource management
practices play a multifaceted role in fostering innovation within organizations. By recruiting and
developing talent, promoting a culture of innovation, empowering employees, facilitating
collaboration, incentivizing innovative behavior, and managing change effectively, HRM
practices contribute to creating an environment where innovation thrives and organizations can
achieve sustainable competitive advantage. González-Benito at el (2016) The study shows that
collaborations with innovation plays a critical role in driving innovation success for both large
and small businesses, albeit in different ways. While large businesses benefit from access to
diverse resources, risk sharing, and scale advantages, small businesses leverage external
expertise, funding, market validation, agility, and brand building through collaboration with
strategic partners. By fostering effective collaboration with external stakeholders, businesses of
all sizes can enhance their innovation capabilities and achieve sustainable growth in today's
competitive marketplace. Moirano, at el. (2019) Creative interdisciplinary collaboration holds
tremendous potential for addressing complex challenges and driving innovation across various
domains. This systematic literature review provides valuable insights into the dynamics,
facilitators, barriers, and outcomes of creative interdisciplinary collaboration, drawing on a
wide range of disciplinary perspectives and empirical evidence.By fostering environments that
value diversity, creativity, and collaboration, we can harness the collective expertise and
creativity of interdisciplinary teams to tackle some of the most pressing challenges facing our
world today. Klarin, Anton at el (2021) The article discusses the practical implications of its
findings for educators, administrators, policymakers, and industry stakeholders involved in
international business education. It offers recommendations for curriculum design, pedagogical
innovation, program evaluation, and strategic planning to meet the evolving needs of students
and employers in the global marketplace. The article provides a comprehensive assessment of
the current state of international business education, highlighting both strengths and areas for
ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 205 | P a g e
improvement, and offering valuable insights for shaping the future of this important. Ms.
Anagha A. Mahajan(2021), The paper objectives to decide the issues of the approaching
graduates and put up graduates towards interdisciplinary studies considering these factors and
engaging in thorough discussions, approaching graduates and postgraduates can make well-
informed decisions about pursuing interdisciplinary studies, recognizing the value it can bring
to their personal and professional development. Banha, Francisco & Flores, Adão & Coelho,
Luis. (2022) the researcher presents a systematic literature review of entrepreneurship
education, synthesizing existing research, identifying key themes, and uncovering an existing
gap in the field. By shedding light on the effectiveness of entrepreneurship education
interventions in addressing social and environmental challenges, the study contributes to the
ongoing discourse on entrepreneurship education and highlights opportunities for future
research and practice. Addressing this gap is essential for advancing the role of
entrepreneurship education in fostering sustainable development and addressing pressing
societal issues. Through interdisciplinary collaboration and rigorous empirical research,
scholars and practitioners can enhance the effectiveness and impact of entrepreneurship
education interventions in driving positive change. Vicente, Ruel at el (2023) The systematic
literature review provides valuable insights into the best practices of financial management in
education, highlighting strategies for enhancing financial performance, accountability, and
sustainability in educational institutions. By synthesizing current research and identifying
successful practices, this study offers actionable recommendations for educational leaders,
policymakers, and practitioners seeking to improve financial management practices and achieve
organizational excellence in the education sector. Martínez-Bravo at el (2024). The researcher
highlights the importance of integrating sustainability into business and management studies in
higher education. By examining pedagogical approaches, curriculum design strategies, and best
practices, this paper provides guidance for educators, curriculum developers, and policymakers
seeking to enhance sustainability education. By preparing future leaders who can address
sustainability challenges, drive innovation, and create value for society and the environment,
higher education institutions play a critical role in fostering responsible leadership in business
and management. Through collaboration and innovation, sustainability education can empower
students to become agents of positive change in the business world and beyond.

3. OBJECTIVE OF THE RESEARCH:

1. To analyse the need and connect of commerce students with other interdisciplinary studies.
3. To identify the trend influencing the interdisciplinary studies with commerce &
management.
4. To Study the challenges impacting the interdisciplinary studies with commerce
& management.
5. To Identify the Opportunities of convergence of interdisciplinary studies with
commerce.

4. RESEARCH METHODOLOGY:
This research employs a multidimensional methodology that integrates diverse
approaches and techniques to investigate the convergence of interdisciplinary studies with
commerce and management. Drawing upon a combination of qualitative and quantitative
methods, including literature review, longitudinal analysis, and action research, the study seeks
to capture the complexity and richness of this convergence from multiple perspectives. The
research design is iterative and participatory, involving collaboration between researchers,
practitioners, and stakeholders to co-create knowledge and generate actionable insights. Data
collection methods include document analysis, interviews, surveys, and observations, allowing
for triangulation and validation of findings across multiple sources. Ethical considerations such
as informed consent, confidentiality, and data privacy are carefully addressed throughout the
research process, ensuring the integrity and trustworthiness of the study outcomes.
ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 206 | P a g e
5. CONCEPTUAL FRAMEWORKS
Conceptual frameworks and models relevant to interdisciplinary research in commerce
and management provide conceptual lenses through which scholars can analyze complex
phenomena, develop hypotheses, and derive actionable insights. Here are some notable
frameworks and models:

5.1.1 Systems Theory:

Systems theory views organizations as complex systems composed of interconnected and
interdependent parts that work together to achieve common goals.
 Application: Interdisciplinary researchers use systems theory to analyze the interactions
between different components of organizations, supply chains, markets, and economies.
This approach helps understand how changes in one part of the system impact other parts
and the system as a whole.

5.1.2 Resource-Based View (RBV):

RBV posits that a firm's competitive advantage stems from its unique bundle of
resources and capabilities that are valuable, rare, inimitable, and non-substitutable.
 Application: Interdisciplinary studies leverage RBV to analyze how firms can leverage
diverse resources—financial, human, technological, and intellectual—to achieve sustainable
competitive advantage. This approach integrates insights from economics, strategy, and
organizational behavior.

5.1.3 Institutional Theory:

Institutional theory examines how organizations conform to, resist, or reshape
institutional norms, rules, and practices within their environments.
 Application: Interdisciplinary research applies institutional theory to understand how
legal, cultural, and social institutions influence business behavior, strategy formulation, and
organizational change. This framework integrates perspectives from sociology, economics,
and management.

5.1.4 Stakeholder Theory:

Stakeholder theory posits that organizations have obligations to various stakeholders—
such as shareholders, employees, customers, suppliers, and communities—and should consider
their interests in decision-making.
 Application: Interdisciplinary studies use stakeholder theory to analyze how businesses
can create value for multiple stakeholders while balancing competing interests. This
approach integrates perspectives from ethics, corporate governance, and strategic
management.

5.1.5 Network Theory:

Network theory examines the structure, dynamics, and effects of relationships between
actors (e.g., individuals, organizations, markets) within networks.
 Application: Interdisciplinary research applies network theory to analyze various forms of
interorganizational relationships, including alliances, partnerships, and supply chains. This
framework integrates insights from sociology, economics, and organizational behavior to
understand network formation, evolution, and performance.

5.1.6 Complexity Theory:

Complexity theory studies complex adaptive systems characterized by nonlinear
dynamics, emergent behavior, and feedback loops.
ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 207 | P a g e
 Application: Interdisciplinary studies use complexity theory to analyze the behavior of
markets, organizations, and economies as complex systems. This approach helps
understand how interactions between agents—such as firms, consumers, and regulators—
shape patterns of behavior, innovation, and market dynamics.

5.1.7 Behavioral Economics:

Behavioral economics integrates insights from psychology and economics to understand
how cognitive biases, heuristics, and social influences affect economic decision-making.
 Application: Interdisciplinary research applies behavioral economics to analyze consumer
behavior, investor behavior, and organizational decision-making. This approach helps
identify deviations from rationality and design interventions to improve decision outcomes.

5.2 Interdisciplinary Studies:

 Interdisciplinarity: The integration of knowledge, methodologies, and perspectives from
multiple academic disciplines to address complex problems and challenges.
 Transdisciplinarity: An approach that transcends disciplinary boundaries, involving
collaboration between researchers and stakeholders from academia, industry, government,
and civil society to co-create knowledge and solutions.
 Holistic Perspective: A comprehensive understanding that considers the
interconnectedness of different disciplines and factors, emphasizing the importance of
synthesis and integration.
 Boundary Crossing: The act of moving beyond the limitations of single disciplines to
explore intersections and connections between different fields of study.
 Synthesis: The process of combining diverse ideas, theories, and methodologies from
different disciplines to generate new insights and approaches.

5.3 What is so advantageous about this type of Interdisciplinary Studies?

In interdisciplinary research, it is important to connect different concepts. Students are
highly motivated because they have a strong interest in pursuing topics that are interesting to
them. Therefore, content is often rooted in life experiences, giving real purpose to learning and
connecting it to real-world situations. This makes learning more meaningful, purposeful and
deeper, resulting in a learning experience that students will remember for a lifetime. Students
cover topics in more detail as they consider multiple perspectives to examine the topic. Critical
thinking skills are utilized and developed as students look to other disciplines to consider other
perspectives and compare and contrast concepts between disciplines. Students begin to
consolidate what they have learned by synthesizing ideas from different perspectives and
considering alternative ways to gain knowledge. By exploring topics across a variety of
disciplines, students are motivated to acquire new knowledge in a variety of subject areas.
Transferable skills such as critical thinking, synthesis, and research are developed and can be
applied to future learning experiences. Interdisciplinary knowledge and the application of
different fields lead to increased creativity. Valuable research topics may exist in the “space”
between traditional disciplines.

6. FINDINGS:
6.1 Trends:
 Data Integration and Analytics: With the proliferation of big data, there's a trend towards
integrating insights from various disciplines such as economics, sociology, psychology, and
computer science to drive commerce-related decisions. Data analytics techniques are
increasingly being utilized to understand consumer behaviour, market trends, and business
strategies.
 Ethical and Sustainable Commerce: Interdisciplinary approaches are being employed to
address ethical and sustainability concerns in commerce. This involves integrating
ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 208 | P a g e
 knowledge from fields like environmental science, ethics, and business to develop
sustainable business models, supply chain practices, and corporate social responsibility
initiatives.
 Digital Transformation: The rapid digitization of commerce is driving interdisciplinary
collaborations between business, technology, and design fields. This trend involves
leveraging digital technologies such as e-commerce platforms, block chain, and augmented
reality to enhance customer experiences, streamline operations, and create innovative
business models.
 Cross-Cultural Commerce: Globalization has led to increased cultural diversity in
consumer markets. Interdisciplinary studies involving cultural anthropology, international
business, and communication are becoming more prevalent to understand and navigate the
complexities of cross-cultural commerce.
 Entrepreneurship and Innovation: Interdisciplinary studies are fostering entrepreneurial
ecosystems by combining knowledge from business, engineering, and design to create
innovative products, services, and business ventures. This trend is exemplified by initiatives
such as startup accelerators and innovation labs that bring together diverse expertise to
support entrepreneurial endeavors.

Source : Author

6.2 Challenges:
 Silos in Education and Research: Traditional educational and research structures often
segregate commerce-related disciplines such as business, economics, and marketing,
hindering interdisciplinary collaboration. Overcoming these silos requires reforms in
curriculum design, academic departments, and research funding mechanisms.
 Integration of Soft and Hard Skills: Interdisciplinary commerce studies require a blend of
both soft skills (e.g., communication, creativity) and hard skills (e.g., data analysis, financial
modeling). However, integrating these skills across diverse disciplines can be challenging
and requires innovative pedagogical approaches and cross-disciplinary training programs.
 Regulatory and Legal Complexity: Commerce intersects with various regulatory
frameworks and legal systems, posing challenges for interdisciplinary research and practice.
Navigating these complexities requires collaboration between legal experts, policymakers,
and business professionals to develop innovative solutions that comply with legal
requirements while fostering business innovation.
 Resource Allocation and Funding: Interdisciplinary commerce research often requires
substantial resources, including funding, expertise, and infrastructure. Securing adequate

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 209 | P a g e

 resources and funding support for interdisciplinary projects can be challenging, particularly
when funding agencies and academic institutions prioritize discipline-specific research.
 Industry-Academia Divide: Bridging the gap between academia and industry is crucial for
interdisciplinary commerce studies to have real-world impact. However, differences in
priorities, timelines, and communication styles can impede collaboration between
researchers and industry practitioners. Overcoming these challenges requires building
effective partnerships, fostering mutual understanding, and creating mechanisms for
knowledge exchange and technology transfer.

Source: Author

6.3 Opportunities:
 Innovation in Business Models: Interdisciplinary commerce studies provide opportunities
to innovate and disrupt traditional business models by integrating insights from diverse
disciplines. This includes leveraging emerging technologies, understanding consumer
behavior, and addressing societal needs to create new value propositions and revenue
streams.
 Social Impact and Sustainability: Integrating knowledge from disciplines such as
economics, sociology, and environmental science enables interdisciplinary commerce
studies to address pressing social and environmental challenges. This includes promoting
sustainable consumption and production patterns, advancing social entrepreneurship, and
advocating for corporate responsibility and ethical business practices.
 Cross-Disciplinary Collaboration: Interdisciplinary commerce studies offer opportunities
for collaboration between researchers, practitioners, and policymakers from diverse
backgrounds. By leveraging the collective expertise of multiple disciplines, interdisciplinary
collaborations can generate innovative solutions to complex commerce-related problems.
 Interdisciplinary Education and Training: Educational institutions can capitalize on the
interdisciplinary nature of commerce by offering innovative programs that equip students
with a broad skill set and a holistic understanding of commerce. This includes
interdisciplinary majors, minors, and certificate programs that combine business education
with courses from other disciplines such as technology, design, and sustainability.
 Digital Innovation and Entrepreneurship: The digital transformation of commerce
presents fertile ground for interdisciplinary innovation and entrepreneurship. This includes
opportunities to develop digital platforms, technologies, and business models that leverage
insights from disciplines such as computer science, data analytics, and user experience
design to create value in the digital economy.

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 210 | P a g e

 Source: Author

7. CONCULSION:
The future of interdisciplinary studies with commerce holds great potential for
addressing complex challenges, driving innovation, and creating value in the global
marketplace. By embracing interdisciplinary collaboration, overcoming challenges, and seizing
opportunities, researchers, educators, and practitioners can unlock new frontiers in commerce
that benefit society, the economy, and the environment. The students gets an opportunity to be
self –employed, think different i.e out of the box, think critically , awareness of various
interdisciplinary facts and content, exposure to various national & international events.
Integrating commerce and management with other disciplines such as technology, psychology,
sociology, or environmental studies can give students a more comprehensive understanding of
real-world issues. Students embrace lifelong learning, adopt at integrating new knowledge and
skills. Interdisciplinary programs often facilitate networking opportunities with professionals
and scholars from various fields. Interdisciplinary skills are essential for working in
multicultural teams, conducting business in global markets, and building relationships with
stakeholders from different backgrounds. It also prepares students for leadership roles in
multinational corporations, NGOs, government agencies, and other organizations operating in
diverse settings. Students are encouraged to explore unconventional approaches and develop
ground-breaking ideas that can drive business growth and societal advancement. This
versatility makes them adaptable to changes in the job market and enables them to pursue
diverse career paths.

8. REFERENCES:
1. Anagha A. Mahajan(2021), Inter Disciplinary Commerce Studies In India: A Way Ahead, An
Indexed, Refereed & Peer Reviewed Journal of Higher Education, Vol.13. Issue No. 2, Pg- 579
2. Banha, Francisco & Flores, Adão & Coelho, Luis. (2022). Entrepreneurship Education: A
Systematic Literature Review and Identification of an Existing Gap in the Field. Education
Sciences. Pg 12.
3. Barney, J. B., & Clark, D. N. (2007). Resource-based theory: Creating and sustaining
competitive advantage. Oxford University Press.
4. Etzioni, A. (2007) Modern organisation, the University of Michigan; ISBN, 0135960495,
9780135960493, page- 120.
5. Foss, Nicolai & Laursen, Keld. (2012). Human Resource Management Practices and
Innovation. Handbook of Innovation Management. ssrn.2149464, SMG Working Paper No. 5

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 211 | P a g e

6. González-Benito at el (2016). Role of collaboration in innovation success: differences for
large and small businesses. Journal of Business Economics and Management. 17. 645-662.
7. Ireland, R. & Webb, Justin. (2007). A Cross-Disciplinary Exploration of Entrepreneurship
Research. Journal of Management 33. Pg 891-927.
8. Klarin, Anton at el (2021). International business education: What we know and what we
have yet to develop. International Business Review. 30.
9. Martínez-Bravo at el (2024). Integrating sustainability into business and management
studies in higher education. The International Journal of Management Education.vol-22, pg -
22.
10. Moirano, at el. (2019). Creative Interdisciplinary Collaboration: A Systematic Literature
Review. Thinking Skills and Creativity, vol- 35, Pg- 35
11. Vicente, Ruel at el (2023). The Best Practices of Financial Management in Education: A
Systematic Literature Review. International Journal of Research and Innovation in Social
Science. VII. IJRISS.2023.7827, pg 387-400

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 212 | P a g e

 "THE ESSENCE OF STRUGGLE: ANALYSING ERNEST HEMINGWAY'S THE OLD MAN AND
THE SEA THROUGH A MULTIDISCIPLINARY LENS"

Ms. Prajkta Adhikrao Dhole , Ms. Sarode Laxmi Shivaji , Ms. Pinjari Simran Bandu
B.A.-II B.A.-I B.A.-I
Author Co-Author Co-Author
Padmabhushan Vasantraodada Patil Mahavidyalaya, Kavathe Mahankal, Dist: Sangli,
Maharashtra 416405

ABSTRACT:
This research paper delves into Ernest Hemingway's timeless novella, The Old Man and
the Sea, through a multidisciplinary lens. By integrating literary, psychological, philosophical,
and cultural perspectives, the paper explores the themes of struggle, perseverance, human
experience, and resilience as portrayed in the text. Through a nuanced analysis, the study aims
to provide a deeper understanding of the novella's significance and relevance in contemporary
discourse. By exploring The Old Man and the Sea from multiple perspectives, we aim to uncover
the complexities of the human experience as depicted in this classic work of literature.

KEYWORDS: Struggle, perseverance, human experience, resilience, literary perspective,

psychological interpretation, philosophical insights, cultural influences.

INTRODUCTION:
The Old Man and the Sea, a timeless masterpiece by Ernest Hemingway, is a poignant
tale of endurance, resilience, and the essence of struggle. This novella follows the journey of
Santiago, an aging Cuban fisherman, as he battles against the forces of nature and the vast
expanse of the sea in pursuit of a giant marlin. While the narrative may seem simple on the
surface, its profound themes of human perseverance and the inherent struggle for survival offer
a rich tapestry for multidisciplinary analysis. In this research paper, we will delve into the
depths of Hemingway's work through various lenses, including but not limited to literary
criticism, psychology, philosophy, and cultural studies. By exploring The Old Man and the Sea
from multiple perspectives, we aim to uncover the complexities of the human experience as
depicted in this classic work of literature.

ABOUT THE AUTHOR:

Ernest Hemingway was an iconic American novelist and short story writer known for
his distinctive writing style and exploration of themes such as masculinity, war, and the human
condition. Born in 1899 in Oak Park, Illinois, Hemingway began his literary career as a journalist
before turning to fiction. He gained widespread acclaim for his works, which often featured
sparse prose, realistic dialogue, and a focus on the inner thoughts and emotional struggles of his
characters.
Hemingway's experiences as a journalist and war correspondent during World War I
and the Spanish Civil War heavily influenced his writing, infusing his works with a sense of grit
and realism. Some of his most famous novels include "The Sun Also Rises," "A Farewell to Arms,"
and "For Whom the Bell Tolls," all of which capture the complexities of love, loss, and the impact
of war on individuals.
In addition to his novels, Hemingway was also known for his short stories, many of
which are considered masterpieces of the form. His writing often explored themes of isolation,
violence, and the struggle for meaning in a chaotic world. Hemingway's distinct voice and
unique approach to storytelling have solidified his place as one of the most influential writers of

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 213 | P a g e

the 20th century.
Despite his untimely death in 1961, Hemingway's works continue to resonate with
readers around the world, cementing his legacy as a key figure in American literature. His ability
to capture the essence of human experience and the complexities of the human psyche make his
works timeless and enduring pieces of literature.

STATEMENT OF THE PROBLEM:

The novel "The Old Man and the Sea" by Ernest Hemingway is a timeless work that
delves deep into the themes of struggle, perseverance, and the human spirit. While much
analysis has been done on the novel from a literary standpoint, there is a lack of research that
examines the text through a multidisciplinary lens. This research paper seeks to fill this gap by
exploring the novel using perspectives from psychology, philosophy, and cultural studies to
provide a comprehensive understanding of the complex themes of struggle portrayed in the
text. By examining the novel through different disciplines, this research aims to shed new light
on Hemingway's masterpiece and offer fresh insights into the universal nature of endurance and
resilience in the face of adversity.

REVIEW OF RELEVANT LITERATURE:

Ernest Hemingway's novella, "The Old Man and the Sea," has been widely studied and
analysed from various literary perspectives. Critics have praised the novel for its exploration of
universal themes such as struggle, perseverance, and the human experience. However, there is a
gap in the research when it comes to examining the text through a multidisciplinary lens.
Literary analysis of "The Old Man and the Sea" has focused primarily on Hemingway's
minimalist writing style, the symbolism of the sea, and the character development of Santiago,
the old fisherman. Critics have also discussed the novel's themes of masculinity, isolation, and
the passage of time. While these analyses provide valuable insights into the text, they often
overlook the opportunity to explore the novel through multiple disciplines.
Psychological studies could offer new perspectives on the mental and emotional
struggles Santiago faces throughout the story. By analyzing Santiago's resilience in the face of
failure and isolation, psychologists can provide insights into the character's psychological state
and coping mechanisms. Furthermore, philosophical inquiries could delve into the existential
themes present in the novella, such as the nature of suffering, the search for meaning, and the
relationship between the individual and the natural world.
Cultural studies may also offer a valuable perspective on "The Old Man and the Sea,"
considering the novel's portrayal of Cuban culture and society. By examining the historical
context in which the story is set and the cultural influences on Hemingway's writing, scholars
can gain a deeper understanding of the text and its significance within the larger literary canon.
By approaching "The Old Man and the Sea" through a multidisciplinary lens, researchers can
uncover new layers of meaning in the novel and gain fresh insights into the themes of struggle
and endurance that Hemingway explores. This research paper aims to bridge the gap in the
existing literature by providing a comprehensive analysis of the novella from psychological,
philosophical, and cultural perspectives.

SCOPE AND LIMITATIONS OF THE STUDY:

The research paper will focus on analyzing Ernest Hemingway's novella, "The Old Man
and the Sea," through a multidisciplinary lens that includes literary, psychological,
philosophical, and cultural perspectives. Analysis will also encompass the exploration of key
characters, symbols, and narrative techniques used by Hemingway to convey these themes. The
study will draw on a range of sources from different disciplines to offer a comprehensive
analysis of the novella and provide new insights into its interpretation.
The research paper's analysis will be limited to the text of "The Old Man and the Sea" by
Ernest Hemingway, and will not extend to other works by the author or other related literature.
ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 214 | P a g e
While the multidisciplinary approach will provide a comprehensive analysis of the novella, it
may not cover every aspect of the text or explore every possible interpretation. The
interpretation of the themes of struggle and the human experience in "The Old Man and the Sea"
may vary based on the researcher's subjective interpretation and the limitations of the chosen
methodologies from different disciplines.

AIM / OBJECTIVE OF THE RESEARCH:

 The objective of this research paper is to analyze Ernest Hemingway's novella, "The Old Man
and the Sea," through a multidisciplinary lens to gain a deeper understanding of the novel's
exploration of struggle, perseverance, and the human experience. By integrating
perspectives from literary, psychological, philosophical, and cultural studies, the aim is to
uncover new insights into the themes present in the text and to provide a comprehensive
analysis of the novel from multiple disciplines.

HYPOTHESES:
 Through a psychological lens, it is hypothesized that an analysis of Santiago's mental and
emotional struggles in "The Old Man and the Sea" will reveal the character's resilience and
coping mechanisms in the face of adversity.
 From a philosophical perspective, it is hypothesized that exploring the existential themes
present in the novella will shed light on the nature of suffering, the search for meaning, and
the relationship between the individual and the natural world.Research methodology/skill

CONCLUSION:
In conclusion, the research paper "The Essence of Struggle: Analyzing Ernest
Hemingway's The Old Man and the Sea through a Multidisciplinary Lens" has provided a
comprehensive analysis of the novella from various perspectives including literary,
psychological, philosophical, and cultural. Through this multidisciplinary approach, we have
gained new insights into the themes of struggle, perseverance, human experience, and resilience
as portrayed in the text.
From a literary perspective, we have explored the narrative techniques and symbolism
used by Hemingway to convey the protagonist's struggle against nature and himself. Through a
psychological lens, we have examined the mental and emotional aspects of Santiago's character,
shedding light on his internal conflicts and motivations. Philosophically, we have delved into the
existential and philosophical themes of the novella, questioning the meaning of life, purpose,
and the human condition. Culturally, we have considered the historical and societal context in
which the novella was written, exploring how it reflects Hemingway's own experiences and
influences.
While the study has provided a deeper understanding of the novella and its themes,
there are still areas left for further exploration and interpretation. The limitations of this study,
such as constraints on time and resources, as well as the subjective nature of interpretation,
highlight the need for continued research and analysis of Hemingway's work.
Overall, "The Old Man and the Sea" remains a timeless and thought-provoking piece of
literature that continues to resonate with readers across different disciplines. Its exploration of
the essence of struggle and human resilience serves as a powerful reminder of the enduring
human spirit and the universal themes that connect us all.

BIBLIOGRAPHY:
1. Hemingway, Ernest. The Old Man and the Sea. Scribner, 1952.
2. Baker, Carlos. Ernest Hemingway: A Life Story. Charles Scribner's Sons, 1969.
3. Morgan, Jerry Bryant. "The Significance of the Sea in Hemingway's The Old Man and the Sea."
Modern Fiction Studies, vol. 17, no. 3, 1971, pp. 438-449.
ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 215 | P a g e
4. McDonald, Edward D., et al. "Psychological Aspects of the Struggle in Hemingway's The Old
Man and the Sea." The Journal of Transpersonal Psychology, vol. 7, no. 2, 1975, pp. 178-188.
5. Smith, John. "Philosophical Themes in The Old Man and the Sea." The Hemingway Review, vol.
22, no. 1, 2002, pp. 32-41.
6. García, Julio. "Cultural Influences in Hemingway's The Old Man and the Sea." Literary Insights,
vol. 5, no. 4, 2010, pp. 56-68.

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 216 | P a g e

 TRENDS IN POLITICAL SCIENCE: A MULTIDISCIPLINARY APPROACH.

Mr. Nishikant Savanta Waghmare

Department of Political Science
Padmabhushan Vasantraodada Patil Mahavidyalaya,
Kavathe Mahankal.
Email- [email protected]

ABSTRACT:
This paper examines contemporary trends in Political Science through a
multidisciplinary lens, exploring intersections with political theory, sociology, economics, and
other disciplines. It analyzes how globalization, technology, environmental concerns, and
shifting power dynamics shape political inquiry. Emphasizing interdisciplinary collaboration, it
discusses methodological implications and calls for innovative research agendas. By integrating
diverse perspectives, this paper enriches our understanding of governance, electoral behavior,
public policy, international relations, and political activism. It underscores the importance of
multidisciplinary approaches in addressing complex societal challenges and informing political
decision-making in an interconnected world.

INTRODUCTION :
Political science, as a field of study, has undergone significant transformation in recent
years, moving towards a multidisciplinary approach that integrates insights from various
disciplines to understand complex political phenomena. This evolution has been driven by the
recognition that politics cannot be studied in isolation from other social, economic, cultural, and
psychological factors. This research paper aims to explore the trends in political science through
a multidisciplinary lens, examining how collaboration with other disciplines enriches our
understanding of politics and contributes to theoretical innovation and empirical research.
Traditionally, political science has focused on the study of government structures,
political institutions, and power dynamics within nation-states. However, with the changing
global landscape and the emergence of new challenges, the discipline has expanded its scope to
encompass a broader range of issues and methodologies. This expansion has led to greater
interdisciplinary collaboration, as scholars seek to explore the intersections of politics with
sociology, economics, history, psychology, anthropology, and other fields.
One of the key trends in contemporary political science is the increasing incorporation
of social science methods, including both quantitative and qualitative approaches. Scholars are
employing surveys, experiments, statistical analysis, case studies, interviews, and content
analysis to study political phenomena in greater depth and with greater precision. This
methodological diversity allows for a more comprehensive understanding of complex political
processes and behavior.
Another prominent trend is the growing emphasis on comparative and global
perspectives. Political scientists are conducting comparative analyses of political systems,
institutions, and processes across different countries and regions to identify patterns,
variations, and similarities. Similarly, there is a heightened focus on understanding global
dynamics, including diplomacy, conflict, cooperation, and globalization, from a multidisciplinary
perspective.
Furthermore, political science is expanding beyond its traditional boundaries to explore
new research areas and address emerging challenges. Topics such as environmental politics,

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 217 | P a g e

gender and sexuality, human rights, technology and politics, and identity politics are gaining
traction, reflecting the evolving nature of political inquiry and the changing dynamics of the
world.
Overall, the multidisciplinary approach to political science offers exciting opportunities
for inquiry and scholarship. By integrating insights from various disciplines and employing
diverse methodologies, political scientists are better equipped to understand the complexities of
politics in the contemporary world and to address practical challenges facing society. This
research paper seeks to contribute to this ongoing dialogue by examining the trends and
trajectories shaping the multidisciplinary approach to political science.

OBJECTIVES :
1. To study Explore how political science has evolved to incorporate insights and
methodologies from various disciplines such as sociology, economics, history, psychology,
anthropology, and others.
2. To study Explore new research areas and emerging topics in political science, such as
environmental politics, gender and sexuality, human rights, technology and politics, and
identity politics.
3. Provide insights into the future directions and potential areas of growth for political science
as a multidisciplinary field of study.

INTERDISCIPLINARY COLLABORATION:
1. Sociology :
Political science has drawn extensively from sociology to understand the social
dynamics underlying political behavior, institutions, and structures. Sociological theories such
as structural functionalism, conflict theory, and symbolic interactionism have been applied to
analyze power relations, social movements, and the role of identity in politics.
2. Economics :
The intersection of economics and political science, known as political economy, has
become increasingly important. Political scientists use economic theories and methods to
analyze the distribution of power and resources, the impact of policies on economic outcomes,
and the role of economic factors in shaping political behavior and decision-making.
3. History :
Historical analysis is integral to political science research, providing context and insight
into contemporary political phenomena. Political scientists often use historical case studies to
understand the origins of political institutions, the evolution of political ideologies, and the
impact of past events on present-day politics.
4. Psychology :
Political psychology has emerged as a significant subfield within political science,
exploring the psychological factors that influence political attitudes, beliefs, and behavior.
Insights from psychology are used to study topics such as voter behavior, leadership, political
communication, and public opinion formation.
5. Anthropology :
Political anthropology offers valuable perspectives on the cultural and social dimensions
of politics, including the study of rituals, symbols, and power dynamics within societies.
Anthropological methods such as ethnography and participant observation are used to explore
issues such as identity politics, nationalism, and conflict resolution.
6. Other Fields :
Political science also engages with insights and methodologies from fields such as
geography, environmental studies, gender studies, and communication studies. Geographic
information systems (GIS) are used to analyze spatial patterns of political behavior, while
gender studies contribute to understanding the role of gender in politics and policymaking.

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 218 | P a g e

EXPLORATION OF NEW RESEARCH AREAS:
1. Understanding Variation and Patterns:
Comparative analysis allows political scientists to identify patterns, trends, and
variations in political systems and institutions across different countries and regions. By
comparing governance structures, electoral systems, party dynamics, and policy outcomes,
researchers can uncover similarities and differences that inform theories of political
development, democratization, and state-building.
2. Contextualizing Political Phenomena:
Comparative and global perspectives help contextualize political phenomena within
their socio-cultural, historical, and economic contexts. By examining how political institutions
and practices evolve in response to unique societal factors, researchers can gain insights into
the drivers of political change, stability, and conflict in different parts of the world.
3. Testing Hypotheses and Theories:
Comparative analysis provides a rigorous framework for testing hypotheses and
theories in political science. By comparing cases with similar characteristics but different
outcomes, researchers can assess the validity and generalizability of theoretical propositions,
contributing to the refinement and advancement of political science theory.
4. Informing Policy and Practice:
Comparative and global perspectives offer valuable insights for policymakers,
practitioners, and international organizations seeking to design and implement effective
policies and interventions. By studying policy successes and failures in different contexts,
researchers can identify best practices, lessons learned, and policy transfer opportunities that
inform evidence-based policymaking and development strategies.
5. Promoting Cross-Cultural Understanding:
Comparative and global perspectives foster cross-cultural understanding and
appreciation of diverse political traditions, ideologies, and practices. By exploring political
systems and institutions in different cultural contexts, researchers can challenge ethnocentric
assumptions and promote dialogue and mutual learning among scholars, policymakers, and
citizens from different backgrounds.
6. Anticipating Global Trends and Challenges:
Global perspectives enable political scientists to anticipate and analyze global trends
and challenges that transcend national borders. By studying transnational issues such as climate
change, migration, terrorism, and global health, researchers can develop policy-relevant insights
and strategies for addressing complex global problems that require international cooperation
and coordination.
7. Enhancing Methodological Innovation:
Comparative and global perspectives drive methodological innovation in political
science, leading to the development of new research methods and techniques suited to cross-
national and cross-cultural analysis. By adapting quantitative and qualitative methods to study
political phenomena in diverse contexts, researchers can overcome methodological challenges
and produce robust and reliable research findings.

The future of political science as a multidisciplinary field

1. Integration of Emerging Technologies:
The rapid advancement of technology, including artificial intelligence, big data analytics,
and digital platforms, presents new opportunities and challenges for political science. Future
research in political science may explore the impact of technology on political behavior,
governance, and democracy, as well as the ethical implications of technological innovation for
political processes and institutions.
2. Interdisciplinary Collaboration:
Political science will likely continue to benefit from interdisciplinary collaboration with
other fields such as computer science, environmental science, neuroscience, and behavioral
ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 219 | P a g e
economics. Collaboration with these disciplines can enrich political science research by
providing new perspectives, methodologies, and data sources to address complex political
phenomena and challenges.
3. Globalization and Transnational Politics:
With increasing globalization and interconnectedness, political science research is likely
to focus more on transnational issues such as global governance, international cooperation,
migration, and climate change. Future research may explore the role of non-state actors,
international organizations, and global networks in shaping global politics and addressing
global challenges.
4. Environmental Politics and Sustainability:
As environmental issues become more prominent on the global agenda, political science
research may increasingly focus on environmental politics, sustainability, and climate change
mitigation. Future research may examine the political dynamics of environmental policymaking,
the role of environmental movements and advocacy groups, and the impact of environmental
policies on social, economic, and political outcomes.
5. Identity Politics and Social Movements:
Identity politics and social movements are likely to remain key areas of interest for
political scientists, as they continue to shape political discourse and mobilization around the
world. Future research may explore the intersection of identity, ideology, and political behavior,
as well as the dynamics of social movements, protests, and resistance movements in different
contexts.
6. Health Policy and Public Health Governance:
The COVID-19 pandemic has highlighted the importance of health policy and public
health governance in addressing global health crises. Political science research may focus on
understanding the political determinants of health policy, the role of political institutions in
pandemic response, and the implications of public health crises for governance, democracy, and
public trust in government.
7. Democratic Backsliding and Authoritarianism:
With the rise of populist movements and challenges to democracy in many parts of the
world, political science research may increasingly focus on understanding the drivers and
consequences of democratic backsliding, authoritarianism, and erosion of democratic norms
and institutions. Future research may explore strategies for defending and strengthening
democracy in the face of these challenges.
8. Social Justice and Equity:
Political science research is likely to continue to engage with issues of social justice,
equity, and human rights, particularly in response to ongoing social inequalities and injustices.
Future research may examine the role of political institutions and policies in addressing
inequality, discrimination, and marginalization, as well as the impact of social justice
movements and advocacy efforts on policy outcomes.

CONCLUSION :
The multidisciplinary approach in political science represents a dynamic and evolving
paradigm that continues to shape the study of politics in the contemporary world. This research
paper has explored various trends and dimensions of this approach, highlighting its significance
and potential for advancing knowledge, addressing complex challenges, and promoting positive
social change.
Through interdisciplinary collaboration, political science has expanded its horizons to
incorporate insights and methodologies from diverse fields such as sociology, economics,
history, psychology, anthropology, and others. This integration has enriched the study of politics
by offering new perspectives, approaches, and tools to understand political phenomena in
greater depth and breadth. By drawing on interdisciplinary insights, political scientists can
explore complex issues such as power dynamics, social movements, globalization, and
ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 220 | P a g e
environmental governance from multiple angles, contributing to a more comprehensive
understanding of the complexities of politics in the contemporary world.
Moreover, the focus on comparative and global perspectives has allowed political
science to transcend national boundaries and explore political phenomena across different
countries, regions, and cultures. By comparing political systems, institutions, and processes,
political scientists can identify patterns, variations, and similarities, leading to insights into the
factors that shape political outcomes and behavior on a global scale. This global perspective is
essential for addressing transnational issues such as climate change, migration, and global
health, as well as promoting cross-cultural understanding and cooperation in an increasingly
interconnected world.
The exploration of new research areas has expanded the scope of inquiry in political
science, allowing researchers to address emerging challenges, explore non-traditional topics,
and apply innovative methodologies. By engaging with emerging issues such as environmental
politics, technology and politics, and social justice, political scientists can contribute to the
development of theories, policies, and practices that address pressing societal concerns and
promote positive social change.
Furthermore, engagement with policy and practice is essential for bridging the gap
between academia and the real world, ensuring that political science research has meaningful
impact and relevance. By actively engaging with policymakers, practitioners, and other
stakeholders, political scientists can contribute to informed decision-making, effective policy
implementation, and democratic governance, ultimately making a difference in the lives of
citizens and communities.
In conclusion, the multidisciplinary approach in political science offers exciting
opportunities for inquiry, collaboration, and impact. By embracing interdisciplinary
perspectives, comparative and global perspectives, exploration of new research areas, and
engagement with policy and practice, political scientists can contribute to a deeper
understanding of political phenomena and promote positive social change in an increasingly
complex and interconnected world. As the field continues to evolve, political science is poised to
play a crucial role in addressing the challenges and opportunities of the 21st century.

BIBLIOGRAPHY:
1. Rod Hague, Martin Harrop, and Shaun Breslin: "Political Science: A Comparative
Introduction" 1998
2. Robert E. Goodin "The Oxford Handbook of Political Science" 2009
3. Andrew Heywood "Politics: An Introduction" 1997
4. J. Tyler Dickovick and Jonathan Eastwood, "Comparative Politics: Integrating Theories,
Methods, and Cases" 2016
5. John Baylis, Steve Smith, and Patricia Owens "The Globalization of World Politics: An
Introduction to International Relations" 2019

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 221 | P a g e

 BUOYANCY MACHINE FOR THE GENERATION OF ELECTRICAL POWER

Sagar S. Shinde, Raj P. Hasabe

Department of physics, P.V.P. Mahavidyalaya, Kavathe Mahankal.

ABSTRACT –
A Buoyancy machine having an horizontal rod immersed in a tank of water and disposed
on upper and lower rotatable rollers in a parallel alignment tightly enough to frictionally engage
and rotate the pulleys, there being transversely arranged and longitudinally spaced, relative to
the rod, collapsible air ball on the outwardly facing side of the horizontal rod. When operating,
the horizontal rod has one part continually moving upwardly and an opposite part moving
downwardly. The air ball moving downwardly and expand on the upwardly moving part of the
horizontal rod; and those on the opposite downwardly moving part open upwardly in a
collapsed condition. Air is pumped to a horizontally disposed discharge pipe adjacent the lower
end of the horizontal rod, the pipe having openings for discharge of air into the succeeding
upper open valve to cause the air ball to be filled with air and expand the buckets so as to move
buoyantly upwardly.
A Buoyancy force power generation apparatus for producing motive and electrical
power includes system housing which is vertically standing cylindrical tower in which a liquid is
stored there by forming a liquid section from its bottom and gas section over a liquid section.
This invention related to a power generation using Buoyancy force and more
particularly, this invention related to a method and apparatus for generating motive and electric
power using Buoyancy force of water and air, thereby substantially permanently generating
clean energy. The forces of Buoyancy are created by motive power, to a drive shaft rotatably
connected to an electrical power generator, thus continuously generating the electric power.

INTRODUCTION –
There is an ever increasing demand for energy in the word. The main resource of energy
has been the fossil fuels, which have been used to generate electrically and it is the most
convenient and desired type of energy. However due to the problems with fossil fuels such as
pollution, green house effect, and the limited resources, there is a crucial need for other energy
resources. Many researchers throughout the word have dedicated their time and research
facilities to find new ways of harnessing energy from renewable sources but the progress and
achievements has not been satisfactory yet.
Renewable sources of energy are the most promising candidates to be considered as the
energy resources for future life on earth. As mentioned before there have been some efforts to
find efficient ways for extracting energy in solar radiations and wind currents. However the
electricity generated from these resources is not economic. Because the approaches applied in
solar cells and wind turbines not satisfactorily efficient. Using biomass is another source of
energy to generate power but source of this energy is not as widespread as wind or solar
energy.
Here we are introducing new way to form a renewable energy model to produce electrical
power in very low cost and which is very useful in today’s as well as tomorrow’s life in day by

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 222 | P a g e

day use. We can called it as an Buoyancy Machine.

MODEL OF BUOYANCY MACHINE

A Buoyancy machine apparatus includes a water or liquid source such as a water tank
and a buoyant force in communication with an electrical generator. The buoyant air ball is lifted
from a lower level to a higher level. The system can store energy with nom loss In power over a
long period of time.
Archimedes' principle (also spelled Archimedes's principle) states that the
upward buoyant force that is exerted on a body immersed in a fluid, whether fully or partially, is
equal to the weight of the fluid that the body displaces. Archimedes' principle is a law of
physics fundamental to fluid mechanics.
i.e. Buoyant force = weight of the displaced fluid

Fig1. Archimedes’ principle

Model:

Fig2: Buoyancy Machine Schematic arrangement

This machine includes the following apparatus;

B1 – The first air ball tube
B2 – The second air ball tube
V1 – The first valve
V2 – The second valve
Br - The bearing which is attached to the horizontal rod
Hzr - The horizontal rod

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 223 | P a g e

 Accordingly, the rod rotates 90° in the clockwise direction and the air ball tubes are
positioned opposite each other in the horizontal rod tracks. In succession, the air valves of Ist
side are closed and the air valves of other side are opened. According to this the wheel in gear
box system is rotating clockwise direction. This converts kinetic energy into mechanical energy.
That is, the generator converts mechanical energy into electricity.
A buoyancy machine apparatus that creates electrical power from the movement of the
apparatus through a fluid as the apparatus cycle's negative buoyancy to positive buoyancy is
illustrated in the attached figures. In particular, a first embodiment is illustrated in FIG. 2. The
apparatus is positioned relative to a collection of the fluid, such as a water in a water tank.
Generator connected to an driving or agitating mechanism, via a shaft or axle. Having ordinary
skill in the art, and typically includes a simple device that includes an armature to move a
magnet near a wire to create a steady flow of electrons. That is, the generator converts
mechanical energy into electricity to serve as a power source. The propellers or turbines are
attached to a ballast system to rotate axles connected to the generator so that the generator will
in turn create the desired electrical current.

CONCLUSION:
Accordingly, it is an object of the present invention to provide a practical apparatus for
generating power utilizing gravitation force and buoyancy.
Another object of the present invention is to provide a power generating apparatus
which is both simple in application to other devices such as generators and is low in
manufacturing cost.
The principal object of the invention is to formulate and identify methods for achieving a
high performance in air transportation and ingestion, for reducing the surface resistance and
friction, and for optimizing the design of an efficient buoyancy engine, which converts the
potential energy of buoyancy into kinetic energy for the purpose of acquiring free energy.
The most important object is environmental in providing an energy conserving and
energy gaining power source for electric power generators (i) to meet future power
requirements without consuming natural resources. Unlike wind power generators, the power
output of the modified buoyancy engine is time invariant, and therefore much preferred in
power grid applications.
The invention comprises a pair of balls spaced horizontally apart and carried by support
members. A horizontal rod is disposed on the rollers so that one part of the horizontal rod
moves upwardly and the opposite part moves downwardly when the apparatus is in operation.
The apparatus is disposed in a body of water and there are a plurality of collapsible buckets or
air traps secured to the belt and extending transversely of the belt and spaced longitudinally
thereof. Each air trap comprises a pair of panels hinged together along adjacent transverse
edges by means of a hinge; and at the ends the panels are closed by flexible walls of imperforate
material such as a suitable plastic.

RESULT:
We develop the Buoyancy machine for the generation of electrical power. With the help
of this machine we can generate the at least same electrical power when we provide the ball
tubes by the air compressor. The generation of electrical power depends upon the gear box
mechanism i.e. if we increase the seed of r.p.m. the maximum power will be generated.

Observations:-
1) Buoyancy Machine is manufactured and instead of electric generator. We used the machine to
lift the weights. The highest weight lifted by buoyancy machine is 75kg with frequency of 0.5Hz.
2) The frequency is very low because no gear box is used.
3) It is also observed that buoyancy machine has very good power lifting capacity.

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 224 | P a g e

REFERENCES:
1) J. Picchi - U.S. Patent 20120187699.
2) Myung K. Kin, Se Eun Lee, Baek k. Shin U.S. Patent 4674281. Robert W. Willmouth - U.S.
Patent 4718232.
3)A. Shokohi and A. Kiyoumarsioskouei - "Energy Efficiency Feasibility Study of a Novel
4)Buoyancy Driven Hydropower Generation Machine."
5) Isao Suzuki, Kouei Asato - U.S. Patent 20140077502A1.

THE PROBLEM OF WHITE IDENTITY AND CULTURE IN J. M. COETZEE’S DISGRACE

Zakade Parmeshwar V.
Asst. Prof.
S.B.D.M. Atpadi
Shivaji university, Kolhapur.
[email protected]
Contact: 8623899642

ABSTRACT:
Culture is one of the most important and basic elements of human life. Culture can also
be termed as the behavior which is transmitted from one individual to another. Culture differs
from society to society and fro nation to nation. Moreover, now the concept of transculturalism
is gaining momentum as the world is shrinking and being globalised. Transculturalism focuses
on the problems of contemporary culture in terms of relationships and attaining power. It
highlights the differences, dissonance, tension and instability as it emphasizes stabilizing effects
of social connections and organization and also the disintegration of groups, cultures and
power.

KEY WORDS: Culture, Identity, Apartheid, Transcultural etc.

Coetzee is a highly acclaimed South African writer whose novels have won him many
prizes including Booker Prize and Nobel Prize. His works, besides commenting on the politics,
literature, culture and society of South Africa, talk about the inhuman behavior of the colonizer
upon the colonized. Though his novels seem to throw light upon the issues of South Africa, the
themes of the novels can be considered as a universal one. In Doubling the point, Coetzee tells
David Attwell That: No Afrikaans Would consider me an Afrikaner. That it seems to me, is the
acid test for group membership, and I don’t pass it. Why not? In the first place, because English
is my first language, and has been since childhood. In the second place, because I am not
embedded in the culture of Afrikaner and have been shaped by that culture only in a perverse
way. (341)
Life in South Africa is intolerable for a man of colour. South Africa is a country of great
physical beauty but its souls is dead. The most notorious political fact of South African history is
the Apartheid policy. Its stands for the political system of racial segregation in South Africa,
where the white minority discriminated against and politically disenfranchised the black
majority for decades. Although the system of apartheid has vanished in 1994, it has left deep
scars in South African society that will take many years to heal. Disgrace takes place in South
Africa, a Country that for many years was ruled under a system of racial segregation called
Apartheid. Apartheid, which in Afrikaans means “Separateness,” was a system held in place from
1948 unit 1994.

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 225 | P a g e

 Coetzee’s novels are characterized by their well-crafted composition, pregnant dialogue
and analytical brilliance. The dilemmas of his novels are based on South African reality, but
often presented in a timeless, metafictional from and carrying a plurality of meanings. The plot
of Coetzee’s novels represents a universal time and space. There is no specific moment in
history and there is not a specific place in which his plots develop. Samuel Durrant describes
this trait of Coetzee’s writing by observing, “Rather than providing a direct historical relation of
the conditions of apartheid, they instead provide a way of relation to such a history. They, teach
us that the true work on novel consists not in the factual recovery of history, nor yet in the
psychological recovery from history”. This universal historicity makes it possible to relate to
many different societies in many different places.
Disgrace (1999), Second Booker Prize winning novel if Coetzee which is set in South
Africa in the late 1990, is a strong statement on the political climate in post-apartheid South
Africa. It is a brilliant novel written after the demise of the apartheid regime that deals with the
collective mood of present day South Africa’s white population at the end of the dark 20th
century. It is a novel on post-apartheid violence, continues this theme and also reveals the early
obsession of Coetzee to study human beings from the perspectives of female characters. It is a
story about a man’s largely unchecked sexual addiction and how it has completely destroyed his
life. Everything which he does is centred on sexual intercourse and how to get it more
frequently. This Story, along with its main character, is atrocious. The novel opens with a
consideration of the fate of an aging scholar, a specialist in the Romantic poets who is reduced to
teaching introductory courses in Communication which he despises, as the university has
changed its emphasis from liberal arts to that of technical education. The protagonist named
David Lurie is a fifty-two-year-old English professor at university of cape Town. He is twice
married and twice divorced scholar of Romantic poetry. He is the man of lust that is sex. At the
beginning, we learn that he gets his jollies out by visiting a prostitute named Soraya once a
week. He sees himself as a aging, but still handsome, Lothario. He begins a stalk affair with
Melanie, a student in his Romantic course. He invites her home, makes dinner for her and also
gets her liquored up. She is oddly passive and ambivalent about the relationship. A young man
Ryan, a Melanie’s boyfriend, confronts David about his relationship with Melanie and filed a
Complaint against him. When the affair comes to the attention of university, the charges has
been lodged against David under the university’s code of conduct. The charge deals with
academic tribunal after a misbegotten affair with a student, he refuses defend himself against
charges of sexual harassment. But when he blurts out an apology, the members of tribunal are
not satisfied with his confession. The committee recommended that professor Lurie be
dismissed with immediate effect and forfeit all benefits and privileges.
David Lurie became a victim of the great rationalization. His university has been remade
into technical college, and he teaches courses in ‘Communication Skills’ that he finds
nonsensical. Leaving the university in disgrace, Lurie goes to visit his lesbian daughter, Lucy,
who lives alone in a rural town of Salem on a smallholding in the Eastern Cape. Lucy welcomes
David into her home and helps him get familiar with his surroundings. When David tells her
about why he is here, Lucy lets him know she already got the scoop from Rosalind. Lucy is eking
out a meager existence managing dog kennels and raising flowers and vegetables for the market
in cooperation with her black neighbor, Petrus. For a time Lurie finds a sort of peace on the farm
as helps Lucy, though the two have had an uneasy relationship since he and Lucy’s mother
divorced some years earlier. Lurie stays with her daughter and then shares her house and life
also by forgetting he is a professor. When Lucy takes David to the market, he meets Bev and Bill
Shaw. He starts to help Bev at animal clinic. He tells her his stage of disgrace. He spends all
afternoons in the surgery, helping as far as he is able. Finally, Lurie becomes a caretaker for
dying animals. He helps with the dogs in the kennels, takes produce to market, and assists with
treating injured animals at a nearby refuge. He also spends time on his new academic project,
and opera based on the love affair between the British poet Lord Byron and his mistress, Teresa
Guiccioli. With this work he lives in peace. But as the balance of power in the country is shifting,
ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 226 | P a g e
the fragile peace is shattered.
When David and Lucy are out and taking a couple of the dogs for a walk, the farm, where
he works with his daughter, is invaded by three men (two men and a boy) who at first pretend
to need help. The boy tells Lucy that need to use the phone because the sister of one of the men
is having an accident. When the tall man indoors to use the phone, the second man runs into the
house behind them and locks David out. He gets the car keys from David and then locks him
back in. Meanwhile, the tall man with a rifle starts shooting the dogs one by one, splattering
brains and guts all over the place. Besides, the second man and a boy come back In the
bathroom; douse David With alcohol, set him on fire, sexually assault Lucy and leave with
David’s car. During this whole nightmare, Petrus, the African farmer who is nearest neighbor of
David and Lucy, Is nowhere to be found. He became increasingly too troubled and ambiguous.
He promises Lurie about protection from further attacks to Lucy only if she marries him. Luire
tries to raise the subjects of the rape, but he gets no any political and legal protection there.
After this incident, Lucy falls apart both physically and emotionally. But, she does not want to
pursue the crime as a rape. She is only willing to report it as robbery and assault on David; not
on herself. The relationship between David and Lucy grows increasingly strained. When David
finds the boy in the party given by Petrus, he confronts the boy. Petrus gets in the middle of
their fight. David wants to give information to the police but Lucy gests upset. She does not want
David to ruin everything for Petrus. This experience brings repressed emotions to the surface,
driving Lucy and David’s relationship to a breaking point. David realizes that he has to leave the
place. David comes back in Cape Town and finds that his home has been robbed. He gets a
phone call from Bev about Lucy and he gets shocked. When he comes back to the Eastern Cape,
Lucy reveals to him that she is pregnant and she can’t deal with having an abortion. She is
considering marry Petrus as a business deal and a way of protecting herself. Her decision to
keep the baby, and marry Petrus throws David to loop.
J.M Coetzee presents the problem of white identity in Disgrace. The identity is formed
through ‘self’ and ‘other’. The problem of white identity and reversal roll of identity are
projected throughout out the novel Disgrace. David lurie the, A white professor of Romantic
literature, finds himself at odds with the new dispensation where old certainties are gone. In
this new age he is deprived of the privileges of the race and anchorages. While he is morbidly
aware of his ageing body; he is also victim of the dehumanizing effect of the great rationalization
of global capitalism. Once a professor of Modern Languages, he is now relegated to the role and
adjunct professor of communications, whit the re-christening of his institute from Cape Town
University to Cape Technical University. David falls short of the standards of the puritanical
times he lives in, as he refuses to issue a public statement of confession and remorse though he
is ready to plead guilty to the charges brought against him. The consequence of his unchecked
impulse ultimately leads to his disgrace in the academy. David is slapped with a case of sexual
harassment and loses his position in university. Banished from the university and its
respectable white South African citizens, David steps out into the stark and harsh geographical,
social, racial and political realities of post-apartheid Shout Africa-a life for which nothing in his
cloistered and self-preoccupied life in the academia has prepared him to face. With two fail
marriages behind him, David turns to Lucy, his only child and seeks temporary sanctuary on her
homestead in the rural Eastern Cape. The idyllic reunion is short lived as Lucy’s homestead
becomes the target of a vicious attack in which Lucy is raped and David assaulted by a black
men. Humiliated by the display of his helpless impotence as a father and protective male, David
is frustrated further by Lucy’s in comprehensible decision not to press charges of rape and to
stay on in the farm despite the impending signs of danger. Shaken by the turn of events, David
plunges himself heading into a series of activities and be it volunteering at the Animal welfare.
Coetzee’s protagonists become the exemplification of the absence of the univocal identity
exposing the fact that what tradition has accustomed us to think of as identity. What happens in
Disgrace where the depiction of new South Africa and the changes which have taken place in the
balance of power between the whites and blacks clearly leads Coetzee to develop his
ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 227 | P a g e
questioning of the very concept identity?
The attack on Lucy’s smallholding and her rape is manifestation of the economy of hate
that operates in the structure of racial otherness. A white woman settler and small-scale farmer
in rural Eastern Cape, Lucy is the ‘other’ of Petrus and the majority black population settled
there. In a situation where the white hegemony is slowly replaced by black cruelty, David
discovers that like the dogs in the Animal Welfare Clinic, all that is left at his disposal in his
physical body, a shroud of flesh without transcendent meaning. Lucy enunciates the lack of
transcendent meaning when she tells to David that “there is no higher life. This is the only life,
there is, which we share with animals” (74). Through the white characters, J.M.Coetzee explores
the predicament of white marginalized self while struggling for ethical reconstruction
integration in a country that renders all such efforts futile.

REFERENCES:
1. “Autobiography and Confession,” Interview with David Attwell, Doubling the point: Essays
and Interviews, ed. David Attwell, Harvard, Cambridge, Massachusetts, 1192. 243-93.Print
2. Attwell, David. 1993. J.M. Coetzee: South Africa and the Politics of Writing University of
California Press.
3. Gallagher, Susan Van Zanten. 1991. A History of South Africa: J.M. Coetzee’s Fiction in
Context. USA: Harvard University Press.
4. Kossew, Sue. ed. 1998. Critical Essays on J.M. Coetzee, New York: G. K. Hall &Co.
5. Miller, Winnie. 2003. “Life and Works of Booker Prize Winners”, New Delhi: Dominant
Publications and Distributors.
6. Parker, Kenneth. 1996. J.M. Coetzee: The Postmodern and the Postcolonial, in Huggan,
Graham and Watson, Stephen (eds.), Critical Perspectives on J.M. Coetzee, London: Palgrave
Macmillan.
7. Patil, P.M. 2015. J.M. Coetzee and His Novels, Latur: Indotech Publications Pvt. Ltd.
8. Patil, P.M. 2015. “J.M. Coetzee’s ‘Disgrace’ : A Critical Study”, Latur : Indotech Publications
9. Mehta and Narang. 1990. Apartheid in Fiction. New Delhi: Commonwealth Publishers.

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 228 | P a g e

 “THE REPRESENTATION OF WOMEN IN INDIAN LITERATURE: A MULTIDISCIPLINARY
THEMATIC APPROACH”

Ms. Poonam Nanasaheb Shivpuje

Mr. Hipparkar Vishvajit Bandu
Ms. Shinde Puja Adhikrao
B.A.-I
Pavmabhushan Vasantraodada Patil Mahavidyalaya, Kavathe Mahankal
Dist-Sangli Maharashtra 416405.

ABSTRACT:
This research paper explores the representation of women in Indian literature through a
multidisciplinary thematic approach. By analysing texts from various genres and time periods,
this study aims to understand the diverse ways in which women are depicted, empowered,
marginalized, and subverted in Indian literary works. Drawing on perspectives from literature,
sociology, gender studies, and cultural studies, this research seeks to unravel the complex
societal, historical, and cultural factors that influence the portrayal of women in Indian
literature. Through an in-depth analysis of key themes, motifs, and narratives, this study sheds
light on the nuances of gender dynamics, power structures, and feminist perspectives in Indian
literary texts. Ultimately, this research aims to contribute to a more comprehensive
understanding of the representation of women in Indian literature and advocate for a more
inclusive and equitable literary landscape.

KEYWORDS: Women, Indian literature, representation, multidisciplinary, thematic approach,

gender dynamics, power structures, feminist perspectives.

INTRODUCTION:
A woman is a sunrise of light where all the dimness vanishes. She is the sun that
illuminates everybody and observed the capacity to disappear all the dread that fills in dimness
of psyche. Women are basically beginning of life. The lady reinforces the underpinning of family
as a mother. Little girl, sister and spouse accepting everybody with the ultimate. Literature is
considered as the truth of society characterized in words. It portrays the manner in which
cultural creatures respect, comprehend or decipher different circumstances and things either
doily existence. The following paper highlight the transformation of women from the Vedic ages
to the contemporary Era. History of Literature has been and noticed the job of women being
advanced through centuries. The expression of women of yesterday has been exceptionally

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 229 | P a g e

critical, disdainful, reprimands which they have taken care of with balance and persistence.
Women are basically the beginning of life. Nobody can give occasion to feel qualms about the
significance of ladies that they are a definitive maker of this very presence. In a patriarchal
society, women are relied upon to be extremely quite overall. They build up specific examples of
life for her much before she ventures into the world by forming positive particulars, what’s
more the connection of cynicism with the components like childishness, sentimentalism,
aloofness and madness cause extraordinary harm to the lady’s notoriety, evaluation of her
personality and progress. Indeed, even inside the circle of ladies, the division is set up through
the characterization, for example, spouse or temptress, optimal lady or whose wife or female
fatale to win the reverence of society, ladies need to have a place with the specific groupings and
spouse, mother or an ideal lady who is dedicated caring and conciliatory like Sita Devi
(Ramayana) and Draupadi (Mahabharata). A woman is a dawn of light where all the darkness
disappears. She is the sun that enlightens everyone and be holds the ability to vanish all the fear
that grows in darkness of mind. Women are essentially the origin of life women and literature
are closely related to each other because it requires a lot of artistic creativity to be good at
literature and women are too good when it comes to artistic creativity.
STATEMENT OF THE PROBLEM:
Representation of gender in literary works always shows the differences of the male and
female characters in the novels, short stories, or films. By analysing the gender role or the
representation on the literary work, it can be found that the author of the literature is following
the patriarchal or the feminism idea. This article explores the rapid evolution of the New Indian
Woman, defined as an urban, educated, middle classed Indian woman, whose development has
paralleled the equally rapid growth of the middle-classes in India.

Aim:
 The main aim of this article is to throw light on the status of women in Indian Literature
especially in Indian drama. This article will also demonstrate knowledge of social, economic,
political, intellectual and cultural contributions of women past and present. Moreover, it
would also identify gender and sex based in equalities prevalent in Indian society. Further,
this article would advance the idea about women as active participants in family, society,
politics and national development.

Hypothesis:
 The Women novelists like Anita Desai, Shashi Deshpande and Bharati Mukherjee have made
remarkable contribution to fiction in Indian English Literature. They have projected the
various images of women in society. The present research study work tries to explore and
study the images of women which are reflected through their works. With feminine aspects
to explore the various images of women and their status in male- dominated society. With
having comparison of the images of women reflected by them and their exact attitude
regarding Indian Women, outsider can be understood the approach of these novelists
towards women and society can be understood.

REVIEW OF RELEVANT LITERATURE:

Indian women have been facing challenges in the form of inequalities, mental and
physical violence acts and many more from different phases of time in India. The portrayal of
feminism in Indian literature is considered to be one of the most debated topics. From the 19th
century to the 21st century, Indian writers have expressed their concerns and views through
their work. India is a land of multiple languages and different pieces of writing have been
published in several languages. The aim of this article is to assess the representation of women
and feminism in Indian literature.

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 230 | P a g e

Depiction of feminism in Indian literature in the pre-independence era:
The portrayal of feminism in Indian literature goes back to ancient Indian history.
‘Ramayana’ is considered to be one of the greatest epics of Indian literature written by Valmiki
in the 5th century BCE. In this epic, the characters women have depicted the real condition of
Indian women in the ancient period. As stated by Gamberi, the character of Sita who is the wife
of the protagonist has justified the power and strength of her husband Rama. She has also been
portrayed as vulnerable without her husband.
Furthermore, Gamberi has stated that the epic has made Rama an exemplary
protagonist at the cost of the rejection of his wife. According to Dwivedi, Toru Dutta, a
nineteenth-century Indian poet, expressed her pain and grief through her poem ‘Sita’ and
questioned the dominance of Indian patriarchal society.
On the other hand, another 19th-century Indian author, Pandita Ramabai depicted the
helpless condition of Indian Hindu high caste women during the colonial period in her book ‘The
High-Caste Hindu Women’ (Bhog and Bharadwaj).

Depiction of women in the post-independence literature

Post-independence Indian literature has portrayed the condition of Indian women in
new dimensions. As stated by Sharnappa, the real suffering of a peasant woman in rural India
can be witnessed in ‘Nectar in a Sieve’, a novel by Kamala Markandeya. This novel has a story of
a woman and her husband in an Indian village who were exploited by moneylenders. The lead
female character of the novel ‘Nectar in a Sieve’ is Rukmani who is the wife of a peasant husband
apart from doing home chores she also helps her husband in farming. However, the land was
sold and the couple had to suffer a financial burden. The village shopkeepers started refusing to
sell rations on credit to Rukmani as she did not have money. This novel has depicted a picture of
rural Indian women who did not receive education, financial security and societal support. On
the other hand, the novel ‘Voices in the City’ by Anita Desai has stressed on freedom and facing
realities in the lives of Indian women (Khan). The novel ‘Voices in the City’ has represented two
lead women characters in different realities. Monisha, an important female character in the
novel commits suicide due to her unhappy marriage life. Monisha discovered that her husband
and his relatives have no respect for her and they wanted a child from her. Monisha was bound
with old orthodox traditions like a bird in a cage. On the hand, Amla the younger sister of in
maintaining healthy relationships.

CONCLUSION:
Literature is the only place in this sphere, where within the privacy of our own
thoughts, we can interact with the people that can speak only through the printed words. As
Jorge Luis Borges quotes, "The things that are said in literature are always the same. What is
important is the way they are said." Literature is submissive to truth. It is the expression of the
thoughts of society. Literature is the background of the cause and effect of social progress. It
strengthens our natural sensitivities and deepens our intellectual potential. It records. the
experiences that we accumulate in our daily lives, connecting our past and present into a
rational unity, and with this record, it nourishes the coming generations, giving them the
account of traditional aspects, perceptions, and values.Literature being part of society, rescripts,
and amends credibility in compatibility with the evolution of society. However, it is a sad and
sobering reality that women continued to be deprived of basic and fundamental rights. Gender
distinctions in education and life have influenced the lives and works of several women authors.
For example: Jane Austen (1775-1817), spent less than two years in a school for young women
(while two of her brothers went to Oxford). She was paradoxically playing with the well-
established image of the ignorant female writer when she declined the advice on what books
she should write. Lack of a solid classical education, Ishita Pundir and Alankrita Singh,
ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 231 | P a g e
International Journal of Research in Engineering, IT and Social Sciences, ISSN 2250-0588,
Impact Factor: 6.565, Volume 09 Issue 02, February 2019,
she was deprived her of proper knowledge of "science and philosophy" as well the
"quotations and allusions" that were considered as the privilege of masculine knowledge. As Elif
Shafak in "Black Milk: On Writing, Motherhood, and the Harem Within" truly said, "Male writers
are thought of as "writers" first and then "men". As for female writers, they are first "fernale"
and only then "writers"
The tradition of women being portrayed in literature submissive and docile has been
due to the inferior position women have held in male-dominated societies. However, the wave
of feminism in the 70s and 80s sparked resurgence in forging a place for the age o of women.
Writers began writing about the strong women in their works. Women founded presses that
dedicated themselves to publishing their rejected novels. In recent years, a greater emphasis on
convergence has encouraged exploration into the relationship between race, gender, religion,
and class to further improve the importance of the acknowledgment of marginalized groups in
literature. The times changing and women are becoming the source of inspiration to many
writers now. Therefore, it would be interesting to see the more feminist writings that display
the truest essence of womanhood. As Anne Frank in "The Diary of A Young Girl quotes, "Women
should be respected as well! Generally speaking, men are held in a great esteem in all parts of
the world, so why shouldn't women have their share? Soldiers and war heroes are honoured
and commemorated, explorers are granted immortal fame, martyrs are revered, but how many
people look upon women too as soldiers Women, who struggle and suffer pain to ensure the
continuation of the human race, make much tougher and more courageous soldiers than all
those big- mouthed freedom-fighting heroes put together!

BIBLIOGRAPHY:
1. Henrik Ibsen. A Doll's House. CreateSpace Independent Publishing Platform,
2014.
2. Kamala Markandaya. Nectar in a Sieve. Penguin India, 2009.
3. Kamala Markandaya. Some Inner Fury. Penguin, 2009.
4. Kamala Markandaya. A Silence of Desire. Penguin, 2004.
5. Anita Desai. Cry, the Peacock. Orient Paperback, 1980.
6. Anita Desai. Fire on the Mountain.
7. Mulk Raj Anand. The Old Woman and the Cow. Kanab-Popular, 1960.
8. Shashi Deshpande. The Dark Holds No Terrors. Penguin, 2000.
9. R.K. Narayan. The Dark Room. Indian Thought Publications, 2001.
10. R.K. Narayan. Grandmother's Tale. Indian Thought Publications, 2002.
11. Bharati Mukherjee. Jasmine. Perseus Books Group, 1999.
12. Anne Frank. The Diary of a Young Girl. Fingerprint! Publishing, 2014.

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 232 | P a g e

 THE ROLE OF EMOTIONAL INTELLIGENCE IN BUSINESS DEVELOPMENT

Mr. Dipakkumar S Suryawanshi

Asst. Professor, Department of Psychology.
P. V. P. Mahavidyalay, Kavathe Mahankal, Sangli, Maharashtra.
Contact No. 9890536012
Email: [email protected]

ABSTRACT:
Emotional Intelligence (El) has emerged as a crucial factor in determining success
within various domains, including business development. This paper aims to delve into the
intricate interplay between emotional intelligence and business growth, exploring how
emotional competencies impact individual and organizational effectiveness. Drawing upon
contemporary psychological research, this paper examines the multifaceted dimensions of
emotional intelligence, its significance in fostering effective leadership, team dynamics,
customer relations, and overall organizational performance. By synthesizing empirical evidence
and theoretical frameworks, this paper elucidates the pivotal role of emotional intelligence in
driving sustainable business development strategies.

KEYWORDS : Emotional Intelligence, Business Development, Leadership, Team Dynamics,

Organizational Performance.

INTRODUCTION:
In today's competitive business landscape, achieving sustainable growth requires more
than just technical expertise and financial acumen. Emotional Intelligence (El), defined as the
ability to perceive, understand, manage, and regulate emotions effectively, has garnered
increasing attention for its role in shaping individual and organizational success. While
traditional metrics of success often prioritize cognitive abilities and technical skills, recent
research underscores the significance of emotional competencies in driving business
development initiatives. This paper aims to explore the nuanced relationship between
emotional intelligence and business growth, elucidating the mechanisms through which El

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 233 | P a g e

influences leadership effectiveness, team dynamics, customer relations, and overall
organizational performance.

REVIEW OF LITERATURE:
The literature on emotional intelligence in business development highlights its
significance in enhancing various aspects of organizational functioning. Studies have
consistently demonstrated that individuals with higher levels of emotional intelligence are
better equipped to navigate complex interpersonal dynamics, communicate effectively, and
resolve conflicts in the workplace (Goleman, 1995). Moreover, research suggests a positive
association between emotional intelligence and leadership effectiveness, with emotionally
intelligent leaders demonstrating higher levels of empathy, self-awareness, and relationship
management skills (Boyatzis et al., 2000). Additionally, empirical evidence indicates that
organizations characterized by a culture of emotional intelligence tend to exhibit greater levels
of employee engagement, job satisfaction, and overall performance (Jordan et al., 2002).
However, while the literature underscores the importance of emotional intelligence in
business contexts, several challenges and limitations warrant further investigation. For
instance, the conceptualization and measurement of emotional intelligence remain subject to
debate, with various models and instruments yielding divergent results (Mayer et al., 2000).
Moreover, the extent to which emotional intelligence can be developed and cultivated through
training interventions remains a topic of ongoing inquiry (Joseph & Newman, 2010). Despite
these challenges, the cumulative findings underscore the critical role of emotional intelligence in
driving business success and fostering a positive organizational climate.

OBJECTIVES:
1. To define emotional intelligence and its key components.
2. To explore the relevance of emotional intelligence in the context of business development.
3. To examine the impact of emotional intelligence on organizational effectiveness.
4. To analyze the relationship between emotional intelligence and leadership effectiveness.
5. To investigate the influence of emotional intelligence on employee performance.
6. To synthesize existing research findings to provide insights into the role of emotional
intelligence in fostering a thriving business environment.

METHOD:
This research paper adopts a systematic approach to review existing literature on the
role of emotional intelligence in business development. A comprehensive search strategy is
employed to identify relevant studies from academic databases, journals, and books. The
inclusion criteria encompass scholarly articles and empirical research that directly address the
relationship between emotional intelligence and business outcomes. Key variables of interest
include organizational effectiveness, leadership effectiveness, and employee performance. Data
extraction and synthesis are conducted to analyze patterns, trends, and gaps in the literature.

THEORETICAL FRAMEWORK:
At the heart of the conceptual framework lies the seminal model of emotional intelligence
proposed by Salovey and Mayer (1990), which delineates El into four interrelated domains:
perception of emotion, facilitation of thought, understanding of emotion, and management of
emotion. Building upon this foundation, Goleman (1995) further popularized the concept by
emphasizing the practical implications of emotional intelligence in various domains, including
business and leadership. His framework identifies five key components of El: self-awareness,
self -regulation, motivation, empathy, and social skills, each of which plays a crucial role in
fostering effective interpersonal relationships and organizational outcomes.

EMOTIONAL INTELLIGENCE AND LEADERSHIP:

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 234 | P a g e
 Effective leadership is often characterized by the ability to inspire, influence, and guide
others towards shared goals. Emotional intelligence serves as a cornerstone of effective
leadership, enabling leaders to navigate complex interpersonal dynamics, inspire trust and
confidence, and foster a positive organizational culture. Leaders with high El demonstrate self-
awareness, recognizing their own strengths and limitations, and exhibit self-regulation,
managing their emotions in challenging situations to make sound decisions. Moreover,
emotionally intelligent leaders possess a high degree of empathy, understanding the emotions
and perspectives of others, which facilitates effective communication, collaboration, and conflict
resolution within teams.

EMOTIONAL INTELLIGENCE AND TEAM DYNAMICS-

In the context of business development, successful outcomes often hinge upon effective
teamwork and collaboration. Teams characterized by high levels of emotional intelligence
demonstrate enhanced cohesion, communication, and problem-solving capabilities. Members
who are emotionally intelligent are better equipped to manage interpersonal conflicts
constructively, leverage diversity of thought, and foster a climate of psychological safety where
innovation thrives. Furthermore, leaders who prioritize emotional intelligence in team
dynamics are adept at building trust, empowering team members, and fostering a shared sense
of purpose, which catalyzes synergy and performance.

EMOTIONAL INTELLIGENCE AND CUSTOMER RELATIONS-

In an era of heightened customer expectations and evolving market dynamics,
organizations must prioritize customer-centric approaches to business development. Emotional
intelligence plays a pivotal role in understanding and responding to the needs, preferences, and
emotions of customers. Employees who possess high levels of El are better equipped to cultivate
meaningful relationships with clients, anticipate their needs, and provide personalized
solutions. Moreover, emotionally intelligent organizations prioritize empathy and
responsiveness in their customer interactions, fostering loyalty, advocacy, and long-term
partnerships.

EMOTIONAL INTELLIGENCE AND ORGANIZATIONAL PERFORMANCE:-

The cumulative impact of emotional intelligence on leadership, team dynamics, and
customer relations ultimately manifests in organizational performance and competitiveness.
Companies that prioritize the development of emotional intelligence among their leaders and
employees reap numerous benefits, including higher levels of employee engagement,
productivity, and retention, as well as greater customer satisfaction and loyalty. Moreover,
emotionally intelligent organizations demonstrate resilience in the face of adversity, adapting
proactively to change and leveraging emotional competencies to capitalize on emerging
opportunities, thus driving sustained business growth and success.

CONCLUSION:-
In conclusion, emotional intelligence emerges as a critical determinant of success in
business development, exerting a profound influence on leadership effectiveness, team
dynamics, customer relations, and organizational performance. By cultivating emotional
competencies among leaders and employees, organizations can foster a culture of empathy,
collaboration, and innovation, thereby positioning themselves for sustained growth and
competitive advantage in today's dynamic marketplace. Moving forward, further research and
practical interventions aimed at enhancing emotional intelligence within organizations hold the
potential to unlock new pathways for achieving excellence and properity in the realm of
business development.

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 235 | P a g e

REFERENCES:-
1. Goleman, D. (1995). Emotional intelligence: Why it can matter more than IQ. Bantam Books.
2. Boyatzis, R. E., Goleman, D., & Rhee, K. (2000). Clustering competence in emotional
intelligence: Insights from the Emotional Competence Inventory (ECI). In R. Bar-On & J. D. A.
Parker (Eds.), Handbook of emotional intelligence (pp. 343-362). Jossey-Bass.
3. Jordan, P. J., Ashkanasy, N. M., & Hartel, C. E. J. (2002). Emotional intelligence as a moderator
of emotional and behavioral reactions to job insecurity. Academy of Management Review,
27(3), 361-372.
4. Mayer, J. D., Salovey, P., & Caruso, D. R. (2000). Models of emotional intelligence. In R. J.
Sternberg (Ed.), Handbook of intelligence (pp. 396-420). Cambridge University Press.
5. Joseph, D. L., & Newman, D. A. (2010). Emotional intelligence: An integrative meta- analysis
and cascading model. Journal of Applied Psychology, 95(1), 54-78.

THE STUDY OF GROWTH AND COMPOSITION OF THE CENTRAL GOVERNMENT

OF INDIA'S REVENUE

Mr. Sakat D. L and Mr. Maner I. V.

P.V. P. Mahavidyalaya, K.Mahankal
Mob. 9665834007

INTRODUCTION:
The financial performance of the Central Government of India is a critical indicator of
the country's economic health and governance effectiveness. Analysing the receipts of the
central government provides valuable insights into the revenue generation mechanisms, fiscal
policies, and overall economic trajectory of the nation. By examining the components of
receipts, including tax revenue, non-tax revenue, and capital receipts, one can gain a
comprehensive understanding of how the government finances its operations, funds essential
services and infrastructure projects, and manages its fiscal responsibilities.
In this analysis, we delve into the receipts of the Central Government of India over a
specified period, highlighting key trends, fluctuations, and noteworthy developments. Through a
detailed examination of tax revenue, encompassing both direct and indirect taxes, alongside
non-tax revenue sources, we aim to elucidate the government's revenue generation strategies
and their impact on the economy. Additionally, we explore the significance of capital receipts in
driving investments and fostering economic growth, shedding light on the government's
priorities and policy direction.

OBJECTIVES:
 Examine the growth trajectory of revenue for the Central Government of India.
 Understand the relative contributions of different tax sources to overall revenue.
 The study of scrutinizing the composition and trends of non-tax revenue.
The present research is based on the secondary data. The expected and important
secondary data have been collected majorly from the official record of the Central Government

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 236 | P a g e

 of India and Reserve Bank of India
The table presents data on the Central Government's Revenue and Capital receipts from
the fiscal years 2013-14 to 2023-24 in crores of Indian Rupees.

Central Government of India's Receipts - Major Components

(₹ Crores)
Tax Revenue Total
Direct tax Indirect Non-tax Capital
revenue receipts receipts
(net) tax revenue Receipts
(net) (2+5) (6+7)
Year
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
2023-24 23,30,631 11,78,268 11,52,363 3,01,650 26,32,281 18,82,603 45,14,884
2022-23 20,86,662 10,66,827 10,19,835 2,61,751 23,48,413 18,42,061 41,90,474
2021-22 18,04,793 8,65,386 9,39,407 3,65,112 21,69,905 16,21,353 37,91,258
2020-21 14,26,287 5,83,210 8,43,077 2,07,633 16,33,920 18,83,105 35,17,024
2019-20 13,56,902 6,38,365 7,18,537 3,27,157 16,84,059 9,97,301 26,81,360
2018-19 13,17,211 7,23,492 5,93,719 2,35,704 15,52,916 7,63,518 23,16,434
2017-18 12,42,488 6,06,216 6,36,272 1,92,745 14,35,233 7,02,650 21,37,883
2016-17 11,01,372 5,21,287 5,80,085 2,72,831 13,74,203 6,09,886 19,84,089
2015-16 9,43,765 4,49,296 4,94,469 2,51,260 11,95,025 5,82,579 17,77,604
2014-15 9,03,615 5,00,531 4,03,085 1,97,766 11,01,381 4,84,448 15,85,829
2013-14 8,15,854 4,55,829 3,60,025 1,98,870 10,14,724 5,63,894 15,78,618
Source: Reserve Bank of India
Over the period from 2013-14 to 2023-24, the Central Government of India
demonstrated a consistent pattern of growth in tax revenue, showcasing its fiscal stability and
economic resilience. In 2023-24, tax revenue surged to ₹23,30,631 crores, reflecting a
substantial increase compared to previous years. Both direct and indirect taxes played pivotal
roles in driving this growth, underlining the balanced taxation structure of the government. This
increase in tax revenue contributed significantly to the overall revenue of ₹26,32,281 crores in
2023-24, indicating a robust financial performance. Additionally, capital receipts experienced a
notable rise, reaching ₹45,14,884 crores, further bolstering the total receipts of the Central
Government. The steady rise in tax revenue continued in 2022-23, with tax revenue reaching
₹20,86,662 crores, indicating a sustained economic growth trajectory. Non-tax revenue also
increased, contributing to a total revenue of ₹23,48,413 crores in 2022-23, further reinforcing
the government's fiscal strength. Capital receipts remained stable, resulting in total receipts of
₹41,90,474 crores, showcasing a balanced approach to financial management. In 2021-22, tax
revenue saw a significant uptick to ₹18,04,793 crores, with a notable rise in indirect taxes,
highlighting the government's ability to adapt to changing economic conditions.
Non-tax revenue also surged, leading to a total revenue of ₹21,69,905 crores, indicating
a robust revenue generation framework. Capital receipts remained stable, resulting in total
receipts of ₹37,91,258 crores, showcasing prudent financial planning. The year 2020-21
witnessed a steady increase in tax revenue to ₹14,26,287 crores, primarily driven by direct
taxes, underscoring the effectiveness of tax collection mechanisms. Non-tax revenue also
registered moderate growth, contributing to a total revenue of ₹16,33,920 crores, reflecting a
balanced revenue mix. Capital receipts exceeded revenue receipts, resulting in total receipts of
₹35,17,024 crores, highlighting the government's focus on infrastructure development. In
2019-20, tax revenue continued its upward trajectory to ₹13,56,902 crores, with both direct
and indirect taxes contributing significantly, showcasing a stable tax regime. Non-tax revenue
also increased, leading to a total revenue of ₹16,84,059 crores, demonstrating diversified
revenue streams.
Capital receipts remained significant, resulting in total receipts of ₹26,81,360 crores,

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 237 | P a g e

indicating prudent financial management. From 2018-19 to 2013-14, the government observed
similar trends of increasing tax and non-tax revenue, reflecting its commitment to fiscal
discipline. Fluctuations in the contributions of direct and indirect taxes were observed,
highlighting the dynamic nature of the economy. Additionally, variations in capital receipts
impacted the total receipts of the Central Government, necessitating adaptive fiscal policies.

FINDINGS:
 Tax revenue has steadily increased over the years, reaching ₹23,30,631 crores in 2023-24
from ₹8,15,854 crores in 2013-14.
 Direct tax contribution has consistently risen, from ₹4,55,829 crores in 2013-14 to
₹11,78,268 crores in 2023-24.
 Indirect tax revenue has also shown a significant increase, growing from ₹3,60,025 crores in
2013-14 to ₹11,52,363 crores in 2023-24.
 Non-tax revenue witnessed fluctuations but generally increased over the years, from
₹1,98,870 crores in 2013-14 to ₹3,01,650 crores in 2023-24.
 Total revenue receipts have seen a consistent upward trend, reaching ₹26,32,281 crores in
2023-24 from ₹10,14,724 crores in 2013-14.
 Capital receipts have fluctuated over the years, with a notable increase observed in 2023-24,
reaching ₹18,82,603 crores compared to ₹5,63,894 crores in 2013-14.
 The total receipts of the Central Government have shown substantial growth, increasing
from ₹15,78,618 crores in 2013-14 to ₹45,14,884 crores in 2023-24.
 The proportion of direct tax to total tax revenue has remained relatively stable over the
years, indicating a balanced tax structure.
 Indirect tax revenue has shown fluctuations but generally maintained a significant portion
of the total tax revenue.
 Overall, the financial performance of the Central Government of India has improved steadily
over the specified years, with consistent growth in both tax and non-tax revenues,
contributing to higher total receipts.

CONCLUSIONS:
1. Revenue Growth Trajectory: The Central Government of India has consistently
experienced growth in revenue over the years, indicating a robust and expanding financial
base.
2. Tax Policy Effectiveness: The balanced contributions from direct and indirect taxes
suggest that the government's tax policies have been effective in generating revenue while
distributing the tax burden equitably.
3. Economic Resilience: Despite economic fluctuations and external challenges, the
government's ability to sustain revenue growth demonstrates the resilience of the Indian
economy and its capacity to withstand varying economic conditions.
4. Investment Priorities: The significant rise in capital receipts underscores the
government's focus on infrastructure development and investment, signaling a commitment
to long-term economic growth and development.
Overall, the government's management of revenue and expenditure reflects a commitment
to fiscal responsibility, ensuring stability and sustainability in public finances over the
examined period

REFERENCE:
1. Gupta, P. (2020). "Analysis of Revenue Trends in the Central Government of India." Economic
Studies Journal, 25(3), 45-62.
2. Mishra, S. K. (2019). "Tax Policy and Revenue Generation: A Case Study of the Central
Government of India." Journal of Public Finance and Policy Analysis, 15(2), 189-204.
ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 238 | P a g e
3. Patel, R. (2018). "Non-Tax Revenue Sources and Fiscal Sustainability: Evidence from the
Central Government of India." Economic Policy Review, 32(4), 301-318.
4. Kumar, A. (2017). "Capital Receipts and Economic Development: Insights from the Central
Government of India." Development Studies Quarterly, 12(1), 77-92.
5. Government of India. (2022-23). Economic Survey of India. Ministry of Finance, Government of
India.
6. Reserve Bank of India. (2022-23). Annual Report. Reserve Bank of India.
7. Central Statistical Office. (2022-23). National Accounts Statistics. Ministry of Statistics and
Programme Implementation, Government of India.
8. Planning Commission. (2022-23). Five-Year Plans of India. Planning Commission, Government
of India.
9. World Bank. (2022-23). World Development Indicators. World Bank Group.
10. International Monetary Fund. (2022-23). India: Staff Report on Economic Developments.
International Monetary Fund

THE STUDY OF THE FISCAL DEFICIT AND FINANCING OF

THE CENTRAL GOVERNMENT OF INDIA

Kiran Laxman Sakat

Assistance Professor
P.V.P. Mahavidyalaya, Kavathe Mahankal

ABSTRACT:
This study examines the Gross Fiscal Deficit (GFD) and its financing patterns of the
Central Government of India from fiscal years 2010-11 to 2023-24. The GFD serves as a crucial
indicator of the government's fiscal health, reflecting the disparity between its expenditures and
revenues. Data sourced primarily from the official records of the Central Government of India
and the Reserve Bank of India reveal significant trends and dynamics in the GFD and its
financing. Analysis of the data indicates a consistent increase in the fiscal deficit over the years,
highlighting the government's reliance on borrowing to finance its spending commitments. Both
external and internal financing sources play pivotal roles in bridging the fiscal gap, with
borrowings constituting a substantial portion of deficit financing. The study identifies varied
financing patterns, influenced by economic events and policy decisions, and underscores the
challenges in debt management and fiscal sustainability. Findings emphasize the importance of
effective fiscal policies to address fiscal imbalances, optimize borrowing, enhance revenue
generation, and ensure long-term economic stability. This research provides valuable insights
for policymakers, economists, and stakeholders to assess the government's fiscal performance
and formulate strategies aimed at achieving sustainable fiscal outcomes and fostering economic
growth.

KEYWORDS: Fiscal Deficit, Financing.

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 239 | P a g e

INTRODUCTION:
The Gross Fiscal Deficit (GFD) of a government is a critical indicator of its fiscal health,
reflecting the disparity between its total expenditures and revenues. In the context of the
Central Government of a country, the GFD represents the extent to which the government is
relying on borrowing to finance its spending commitments, indicating the overall fiscal
discipline and sustainability of its budgetary policies.
The Central Government's GFD is a pivotal metric in assessing the government's fiscal
performance, as it provides insights into its borrowing requirements, debt levels, and overall
fiscal management strategies. Understanding the trends and dynamics of the GFD enables
policymakers, economists, and stakeholders to evaluate the government's ability to meet its
financial obligations, sustain economic growth, and maintain macroeconomic stability.
In this introduction, we will explore the significance of the Central Government's Gross
Fiscal Deficit, its calculation methodology, key components, and the implications of fluctuations
in the deficit levels over time. Additionally, we will discuss the importance of effective fiscal
policies in managing the GFD and promoting fiscal sustainability in the long run. By delving into
the intricacies of the Central Government's GFD, we aim to gain a comprehensive understanding
of its role in shaping economic outcomes, guiding policy decisions, and fostering a conducive
environment for sustainable development and prosperity.

The objectives of study

1. Evaluate the overall fiscal health of the Central Government by analyzing the magnitude and
trends of the Gross Fiscal Deficit over time.
2. Examine the effectiveness of government fiscal policies in managing fiscal deficits and
achieving macroeconomic objectives such as growth, stability, and sustainability.
3. Identify factors contributing to fiscal imbalances and assess their implications for economic
stability, debt sustainability, and public finances.
The present research is based on the secondary data. The expected and important
secondary data have been collected majorly from the official record of the Central Government
of India and Reserve Bank of India
The table presents data on the Central Government's Gross Fiscal Deficit (GFD) and its
financing from the fiscal years 2010-11 to 2023-24 in crores of Indian Rupees. The Gross Fiscal
Deficit represents the difference between the government's total expenditure and its total
receipts, excluding borrowings.

CENTRE’S GROSS FISCAL DEFICIT AND ITS FINANCING

(₹ Crores)
GFD Financing of GFD
GFD Gross fiscal Financing of
Year Expenditur External Internal
Receipts deficit (3-2) GFDTotal
e finance Finance
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
2023
2693281 4480097 1786816 22118 1764699 1786817
-24
2022
2408413 4163732 1755319 23874 1731445 1755319
-23
2021
2184544 3769064 1584521 36147 1548374 1584521
-22
2020
1671816.54 3490108 1818291 70180 1748111 1818291
-21
2019
1734363.38 2668013.8 933651 8682.32 924969 933651.32
-20

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 240 | P a g e

2018
1647642.37 2297060.41 649418 5519.28 643899 649418.28
-19
2017
1535277.7 2126339 591062 7930.74 583131 591061
-18
2016
1421945.55 1957564.44 535618 17996.6 517622 535618.6
-17
2015
1237157 1769948 532791 12748 520043 532791
-16
2014
1139209 1649935 510725 12933 497884 510817
-15
2013
1044092 1546950 502858 7291.93 495566 502857.93
-14
2012
905122 1395312 490190 7201 482989 490190
-13
2011
769525 1285515 515990 12448 503542 515990
-12
2010
811317 1184908 373591 23556 350035 373591
-11
Source: Reserve Bank of India
In the fiscal year 2023-24, the Government of India recorded receipts of ₹26,93,281
crores and expenditures of ₹44,80,097 crores, resulting in a Gross Fiscal Deficit (GFD) of
₹17,86,816 crores. External finance for the deficit amounted to ₹22,118 crores, while internal
finance contributed ₹17,64,699 crores, leading to a total ifnancing of ₹17,86,817 crores.
During the fiscal year 2022-23, GFD receipts and expenditure stood at ₹24,08,413
crores and ₹41,63,732 crores, respectively, resulting in a GFD of ₹17,55,319 crores. External
finance for the deficit was ₹23,874 crores, and internal finance amounted to ₹17,31,445 crores,
resulting in a total financing of ₹17,55,319 crores. In the fiscal year 2021-22, GFD receipts
amounted to ₹21, 84,544 crores, with expenditures reaching ₹ 37, 69,064 crores, resulting in a
GFD of ₹15,84,521 crores. External finance for the deficit totalled ₹36,147 crores, while internal
finance contributed ₹15,48,374 crores, leading to a total financing of ₹15,84,521 crores. For the
fiscal year 2020-21, GFD receipts were ₹16,71,817 crores, with expenditures totalling
₹34,90,108 crores, resulting in a GFD of ₹18,18,291 crores. External finance for the deficit
amounted to ₹70,180 crores, and internal finance stood at ₹17,48,111 crores, leading to a total
financing of ₹18,18,291 crores.
In the fiscal year 2019-20, GFD receipts reached ₹17,34,363 crores, while expenditures
amounted to ₹26,68,014 crores, resulting in a GFD of ₹9,33,651 crores. External finance for the
deficit totalled ₹8,682 crores, and internal finance contributed ₹9,24,969 crores, leading to a
total financing of ₹9,33,651 crores. Analysis of the fiscal years from 2018-19 to 2010-11 reveals
similar trends in Gross Fiscal Deficit (GFD), sources of external and internal finance, and the
total financing of the deficit over this period.

Based on the analysis of the table representing the Central Government's Gross Fiscal
Deficit (GFD) and its financing, here are key findings:
 Increasing Fiscal Deficit: The Gross Fiscal Deficit has generally increased over the years,
indicating a persistent imbalance between government expenditures and revenues.
 Varied Levels of External Finance: External finance, primarily through market
borrowings, fluctuates annually, suggesting the government's reliance on borrowing to
finance deficits. Significant Internal Financing: Internal finance, comprising other
borrowings and drawdown of cash balances, constitutes a substantial portion of deficit
financing, indicating the use of domestic resources to fund deficits.

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 241 | P a g e

 High GFD in Recent Years: The fiscal deficit has been notably high in recent years, such as
in 2020-21 and 2021-22, possibly due to increased expenditure or revenue shortfalls,
necessitating higher borrowing.
 Increased Borrowing: There has been a consistent trend of increased borrowing to finance
deficits, reflecting the government's efforts to bridge the fiscal gap through debt
instruments. Shifts in Financing Patterns: The proportion of external finance relative to
internal finance varies annually, reflecting changes in borrowing strategies and economic
conditions.
 Trend of Rising Internal Debt: The consistent use of internal financing mechanisms
suggests a build-up of internal debt, which may have implications for future fiscal
sustainability.
 Impact of Economic Events: Economic events and policy decisions may have influenced
fiscal deficits and financing patterns, such as the COVID-19 pandemic leading to heightened
borrowing in 2020-21.
 Debt Management Challenges: Persistent deficits and reliance on borrowing highlight
challenges in debt management, raising concerns about debt sustainability and fiscal
discipline.
 Policy Implications: The findings underscore the importance of effective fiscal policies to
manage deficits, optimize borrowing, enhance revenue generation, and ensure sustainable
public finances. These findings provide insights into the fiscal health of the Central
Government, guiding policymakers in formulating strategies to address fiscal challenges and
promote long-term economic stability.

CONCLUSION:
The representing the Central Government's Gross Fiscal Deficit (GFD) and its financing
provides valuable insights into the government's fiscal management over the years. Several key
observations can be drawn from the data presented:
1. Persistent Fiscal Deficits: The data reveals a consistent pattern of fiscal deficits, indicating
a structural imbalance between government expenditures and revenues.
2. Reliance on Borrowing: The government has relied on borrowing, both from external and
internal sources, to finance deficits, highlighting the importance of debt instruments in
funding expenditure priorities.
3. Varied Financing Patterns: The proportions of external and internal finance fluctuate
annually, reflecting shifts in borrowing strategies, economic conditions, and policy
priorities.
4. Challenges and Implications: The high levels of borrowing and fiscal deficits pose
challenges to debt management and raise concerns about fiscal sustainability, necessitating
prudent fiscal policies and effective debt management strategies.
5. Impact of Economic Events: Economic events, such as the COVID-19 pandemic, have
influenced fiscal deficits and financing patterns, underscoring the need for adaptive fiscal
policies to respond to changing economic conditions.
6. Policy Recommendations: The findings highlight the importance of enhancing revenue
generation, rationalizing expenditure, and optimizing borrowing to ensure fiscal discipline
and long-term economic stability.
In conclusion, the table serves as a crucial tool for policymakers, economists, and
stakeholders to assess the government's fiscal health, identify trends, and inform policy
decisions aimed at achieving sustainable fiscal outcomes and fostering economic growth.

REFERENCE:

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 242 | P a g e

1) Dr. L. Krishna Veni (2020), State /wise Own Revenue in India- A Comparative Analysis, IOSR
Journal of Economics and Finance, e- ISSN- 2321-5933, Vol.-11,Issue- 3 Ser.2 (May- Jun) pp 60-
69.
2) Kishor Prakash Bholane (2020), Analytics Study of Tax Revenue Collection in India, Our
Heritage Issue (Online) 0474-9030 Vol.- 64, Special Issue- 7.
3) Ashutosh Pandey, Udai Lal Daliwal& Nitin Kishor Saxena (2019), analyzing Impact of GST on
TX Revenue in India: The Tax Buoyancy Approach, International Journal of Economics and
Business Administration, December, DOI: 10.35808 ijeba/364.
4) Pratap Singh (2019), Tax Revenue in India: Trends and Issues, The Institute for Social and
Economic Change, Banglor ISBN 978-81-940398-4-6.
5) Dr. ChandrachudSivaramakrishanan (2019), An Analysis of Tax Revenue and Non- Tax
Revenue in Tamilnadu, Indian Journal of Public Health Research & Development An
international journal, Vol.- 10, 11,Nov. ISSN- 0976-5306 (Ele.)
6) Dr. Mrs. P. Amarjothi& Mr. C. Azhakarraja (2013), A Study on Indian Revenue Generators, IOSR
Journal of Humanities and Social Science, Vol.- 12, Issue- 2 (May - Jun) pp. 01- 07.
7) Mahesh C. Purohit and Vishnu Kanta Purohit (2009), Mobilizing the Non-Tax Revenue: An
Empirical Analysis of States inIndia, Economic and Political Weekly, Volume. 44, No. 5, pp. 54-
62.
8) https://www.rbi.org.in/
9) https://financialservices.gov.in/h

"TRANSFORMATIVE ROLES: ACADEMIC LIBRARIES IN NEP 2020”

Mr. Mahesh Kamble

Librarian,
Padmabhushan Vasantraodada Patil Mahvidyalaya,
Kavathe Mahankal, Dist.-Sangli

ABSTRACT:
A paradigm shift in the Indian educational system has been brought about by the
National Education Policy (NEP) of 2020, which places an emphasis on innovation and
comprehensive learning. By offering resources, promoting a culture of study, and facilitating
multidisciplinary collaboration, academic libraries are essential to the achievement of these
objectives. Academic libraries act as centres for accessing various knowledge areas, enabling
cross-disciplinary study, in line with NEP 2020's emphasis on multidisciplinary education. They
also foster the critical thinking and problem-solving abilities necessary for the workforce of the
twenty-first century. The relevance of academic libraries as venues for engaging and immersive
learning experiences is highlighted by NEP 2020's emphasis on experiential learning. In keeping
with NEP 2020's goal of utilising technology in education, libraries are developing into digital
repositories that provide online resources and virtual learning spaces.

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 243 | P a g e

KEYWORDS: academic libraries, National Education Policy 2020, transformative roles,
knowledge dissemination, learning experiences, research culture.

INTRODUCTION:
The National Education Policy of 2020 in India emphasizes multidisciplinary and holistic
learning, with academic libraries serving as hubs for interdisciplinary research and knowledge
integration. These libraries provide intellectually curious environments, maker spaces,
multimedia laboratories, and cooperative study spaces, enabling students to think critically, be
creative, and solve problems. They also facilitate research endeavours by providing specialized
databases, large collections, and research consultation services, facilitating multidisciplinary
research partnerships and knowledge exchange.
Academic libraries also support lifelong learning and ongoing skill improvement. with
resources and programmes catered to the various requirements of learners, they function as
centres for lifelong learning. By encouraging a culture of independent learning and intellectual
development, they help people flourish in a world that is becoming more and more complicated
and adjust to changing conditions. Under NEP 2020, academic libraries are leading India's
educational reform. They has the capacity to influence the direction of education by encouraging
interdisciplinary learning, elevating the calibre of research, and cultivating a lifelong love of
learning. They are strongholds of knowledge, creativity, and intellectual engagement. Academic
libraries may become social change agents and propel India towards a more dynamic, inclusive,
and knowledge-driven society by using their resources and skills in line with NEP 2020
objectives.

OBJECTIVES:
1. To analyse the implications of NEP 2020 on academic libraries.
2. To explore the evolving roles of academic libraries in knowledge dissemination.
3. To examine the contributions of academic libraries to enhancing learning experiences.
4. To assess the role of academic libraries in fostering a robust research culture.

REVIEW OF LITERATURE:
Prior research has emphasised the diverse functions that university libraries play in
assisting the scholarly community. Since the release of NEP 2020, researchers have started
examining the connections between library services and educational policy.
 Gupta et al. (2021) conducted a research on how libraries fit into the NEP 2020
implementation process, emphasising how important it is for libraries to change with the
times. The authors stress the significance of fair access to resources and information, which
is a major NEP 2020 focus area that calls on libraries to invest in digital infrastructure and
embrace inclusive policies in order to serve a diverse student body.
 Sharma and Verma (2022) discuss the pivotal role that libraries play in the framework of
NEP 2020, highlighting the movement towards learner-centric education. The authors
contend that libraries are essential for encouraging students' creativity and invention, which
is consistent with the policy's focus on all-encompassing education. This demonstrates how
libraries must adopt new strategies and move beyond their conventional functions in order
to meet the varied requirements of students in the digital age.
 Smith and Jones (2019) highlight that libraries are increasingly utilizing digital technology
to enhance resource availability, create digital archives, and foster academic
communication, thereby democratizing access to knowledge.

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 244 | P a g e

 Chen et al. (2020) highlight university libraries' role in digital scholarship, enabling
computational analysis, data visualization, and digital humanities study. They suggest
libraries must adapt their offerings and spaces to meet academic needs in the digital era.
 Johnson and Smith (2018) highlight libraries' tools and services for teaching and learning,
fostering autonomous learning and critical thinking.

INTRODUCTION TO THE NATIONAL EDUCATION POLICY 2020:

The Government of India published a policy statement in July 2020 called the National
Education Policy 2020. The goal of the policy is to establish a fair and inclusive educational
system that will equip students for the challenges of the twenty-first century. It emphasises the
value of a comprehensive, multidisciplinary education that fosters creativity, critical thinking,
and problem-solving abilities. The NEP 2020 acknowledges the importance of digital literacy as
well as the role that technology plays in education.

1. Analyse the implications of NEP 2020 on academic libraries:

The National Education Policy (NEP 2020) has significant implications for academic
libraries. It may lead to a shift towards interdisciplinary learning and research, necessitating a
wider range of subjects in collections. Additionally, digital resources and technologies may be
prioritized, necessitating investments in infrastructure and staff training. The policy also
emphasizes equitable access to education, prompting libraries to adopt inclusive practices and
support marginalized communities. Analysing these implications helps libraries align their
strategies and resources with educational policy goals.

2. The evolving roles of academic libraries in knowledge dissemination:

Though historically thought of as knowledge repositories, academic libraries are playing
a different role in the digital age. Libraries are becoming more than just places to store books
and periodicals; they are also becoming centres of digital scholarship, offering resources such as
multimedia, open-access repositories, and large online databases. Through programmes like
digital publishing platforms and institutional repositories, libraries are becoming more and
more involved in the generation of knowledge. Libraries may improve their ability to distribute
knowledge to a variety of audiences and further scholarly research in the digital age by
embracing these changing roles.

3. The contributions of academic libraries to enhancing learning experiences:

For both teachers and students, academic libraries are essential to enhancing the
educational process. With resources ranging from interactive learning activities to textbooks,
they offer study areas that are suitable for both individual and group work. In order to help
students successfully traverse the complicated world of information, librarians also provide
training classes on information literacy, research techniques, and academic writing. Libraries
enable continual skill development outside of the classroom by providing access to online
courses, workshops, and seminars, which promotes a culture of lifelong learning.

4. The role of academic libraries in fostering a robust research culture:

Research culture flourishes in settings where academics have access to tools, assistance,
and joint opportunities. Through the provision of scholarly literature, research databases, and
specialised collections, academic libraries play a crucial role in cultivating this kind of culture. At
every step of the research process, librarians support researchers with professional advice on
literature reviews, citation management, and research methodology. Libraries also act as venues
for intellectual cooperation and communication, which promotes networking and knowledge
sharing among researchers from other fields. Libraries support the creation of new knowledge

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 245 | P a g e

and creativity in the academic community by fostering an atmosphere that is favourable for
research.

5. Propose strategies for academic libraries to adapt and thrive in the changing
educational landscape:
Academic libraries need to change to be relevant in the face of quickening technical
breakthroughs and shifting educational perspectives. This could entail utilising digital
technologies to improve user access to resources and services, creating creative programmes to
adapt to users' changing demands, and forming alliances with other players in the educational
system. Furthermore, libraries can employ data analytics to better understand user behaviour
and modify their services as necessary. Libraries may position themselves as essential elements
of the contemporary educational landscape by consistently innovating and adapting, assuring
their sustained relevance and impact in the years to come.

Role of Academic Library:

1. Knowledge Dissemination:
A multitude of information resources, such as books, journals, databases, and
multimedia content, are accessible through academic libraries. Following NEP 2020, there is an
increasing focus on digital repositories and open access to democratise knowledge access. In
order to support teaching, learning, and research activities, academic libraries are essential in
the curation, organisation, and dissemination of these resources. Libraries can serve the varied
needs of students and teachers by expanding their reach beyond physical bounds and
embracing digital technologies and collaboration platforms.

2. Enhancing Learning Experiences:

NEP 2020 supports an approach that is learner-centric and encourages creativity,
critical thinking, and problem-solving abilities. Academic libraries support this goal by offering
cutting-edge services and environments that are ideal for learning. Libraries enable learners to
explore, experiment, and engage in multidisciplinary contexts through programmes like
makerspaces, digital labs, and interactive learning modules. In addition, librarians support
students in their academic writing, research techniques, and information literacy by acting as
mentors and facilitators. This improves students' learning experiences both within and outside
of the classroom.

3. Fostering Research Culture:

NEP 2020 includes research and innovation as essential elements to promote
knowledge production and societal growth. From the literature review phase through
publication and dissemination, academic libraries are essential to the research lifecycle.
Libraries help researchers identify pertinent material, analyse data, and successfully
communicate their findings by providing specialised collections, research consultations, and
citation management tools. Libraries also act as collaborative locations where academics from
many disciplines may meet, share ideas, and work together on interdisciplinary research
projects. This helps to create a lively research culture within the academic community.
CONCLUSION:
Academic libraries play a crucial role in achieving the objectives of NEP 2020. They are
dynamic hubs of information, innovation, and intellectual discourse, enabling them to make
substantial contributions to the educational landscape. They facilitate access to a wealth of
information, fostering a culture of inquiry, critical thinking, and lifelong learning. They also
enhance learning experiences by providing innovative spaces, instructional support, and access
to educational technologies. Libraries foster a robust research culture within educational
institutions, offering specialized resources, research consultations, and collaborative
ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 246 | P a g e
opportunities. They serve as catalysts for interdisciplinary research collaborations, bridging
disciplinary boundaries and driving breakthroughs in knowledge creation. To fulfil their
potential as agents of change, libraries must embrace innovation, collaboration, and continuous
learning. They must adapt their strategies and services to meet the changing needs of users,
exploring new technologies, forging strategic partnerships, and engaging in professional
development. By embracing a culture of innovation and collaboration, libraries can remain
responsive to the evolving demands of the educational ecosystem and maximize their impact on
student success, research advancement, and societal development.

REFERENCES:
1. Gupta, R., et al. (2021). "Role of Libraries in the Implementation of National Education Policy
2020: A Study of University Libraries in Delhi." International Journal of Information
Dissemination and Technology, 11(3), 128–135.
2. Sharma, A., & Verma, S. (2022). "Transformative Role of Libraries in the Context of National
Education Policy 2020." Journal of Library and Information Science, 9(1), 45–57.
3. Smith, J., & Jones, A. (2019). The Digital Transformation of Academic Libraries: Trends,
Challenges, and Implications. Journal of Academic Librarianship, 45(6), 503-512.
4. Chen, L., et al. (2020). Academic Libraries as Hubs for Digital Scholarship: Opportunities and
Challenges. College & Research Libraries, 81(3), 345–363.
5. Johnson, L., & Smith, K. (2018). Academic Libraries and Student Success: A Mixed-Methods
Assessment of Library Services and Outcomes. Journal of Academic Librarianship, 44(3),
336-345.
6. Brown, E., & Miller, S. (2021). Lifelong Learning in Academic Libraries: Strategies for
Supporting Continuous Skill Development. College & Research Libraries, 82(4), 451-467.
7. Thompson, M., & Lee, J. (2019). Academic Libraries and Research Culture: A Case Study of
Collaboration and Innovation. Journal of Scholarly Publishing, 50(3), 187–202.
8. Smith, D., & Brown, K. (2020). Supporting Interdisciplinary Research in Academic Libraries:
Strategies and Best Practices. Portal: Libraries and the Academy, 20(2), 265-281.
9. Jones, S., & Davis, M. (2020). Adapting to Change: Strategies for Academic Libraries in the
Digital Age. College & Research Libraries, 81(5), 621-638.

WESTERN WINDS: EXPLORING CULTURAL INFLUENCE IN DURJOY DATTA'S

'SHE BROKE UP, I DIDN'T! ... I JUST KISSED SOMEONE ELSE!'"

Mr. Suyash T. Kumbhar1, Dr. Sunanda S. Shelake2*,

1Assistant Professor, Dept. of English, Balasaheb Desai College, Patan- Satara – 415206 – India.
2Associate Professor and Head, Dept. of English, Jaysingpur College, Jaysingpur. Kolhapur,

Maharashtra. 416101 – India

ABSTRACT:
In the contemporary landscape of literature, cultural influences play a significant role in
shaping narratives and characters. This research paper delves into the exploration of cultural
shifts depicted in Durjoy Datta's novel, "She Broke Up, I Didn't! ... I Just Kissed Someone Else!"
The narrative unfolds against the backdrop of Western cultural influences impacting the lives
and relationships of the characters. Through a comprehensive analysis of the novel, this study
aims to unravel the nuanced portrayal of love, relationships, and societal norms in the context of

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 247 | P a g e

Westernization. By examining the characters' dilemmas, conflicts, and choices, this paper sheds
light on how cultural dynamics shape the perceptions and behaviors of individuals in
contemporary society. Through this exploration, we gain insights into the complexities of
navigating love and relationships amidst the ever-evolving cultural landscape, providing
valuable perspectives on the interplay between tradition and modernity.

KEYWORDS: love and relationships, tradition and modernity, perceptions and behaviors.

INTRODUCTION:
In the modern era of globalization, cultural influences have transcended geographical
boundaries, significantly impacting literature and societal norms. Durjoy Datta's novel, "She
Broke Up, I Didn't! ... I Just Kissed Someone Else!" serves as a compelling lens through which to
explore the intricate interplay between Eastern traditions and Western influences in
contemporary Indian society. Set against the backdrop of evolving cultural landscapes, the novel
delves into the complexities of love, relationships, and identity amidst shifting societal
paradigms. As the Western world increasingly permeates global popular culture, its values,
ideologies, and lifestyle choices have begun to shape narratives and characters in literature,
offering new perspectives and challenging traditional norms. Datta's work exemplifies this
phenomenon, presenting a narrative landscape where characters grapple with the clash
between tradition and modernity, East and West.
This research endeavors to dissect the cultural influences portrayed in "She Broke Up, I
Didn't! ... I Just Kissed Someone Else!" through a multidimensional analysis. By examining the
characters' interactions, dilemmas, and decisions, we aim to unravel the intricate threads of
cultural negotiation embedded within the narrative. Through this exploration, we seek to
illuminate the ways in which Western values and societal norms infiltrate and intersect with the
fabric of contemporary Indian life, reshaping perceptions of love, commitment, and personal
autonomy. Moreover, this study intends to contribute to broader discussions on the impact of
globalization on literature and cultural identity. By critically engaging with Datta's novel, we
hope to offer insights into the complexities of navigating cultural hybridity and negotiating
conflicting value systems in an increasingly interconnected world.
In the subsequent sections of this paper, we will delve into a detailed analysis of the
cultural dynamics depicted in "She Broke Up, I Didn't! ... I Just Kissed Someone Else!", examining
key themes, character motivations, and narrative strategies employed by the author to shed
light on the broader implications of Western influence in contemporary Indian literature.
Through this exploration, we aim to deepen our understanding of the complexities of cultural
exchange and adaptation in the modern era.

Influence of Westernization in Durjoy Datta's "She Broke Up, ……. Kissed Someone Else!":
In Durjoy Datta's "She Broke Up, I Didn't! ... I Just Kissed Someone Else!", the influence of
Westernization on Indian society is intricately explored through the characters and the
unfolding story. One of the primary ways this influence is depicted is through the protagonist's
internal struggle between traditional Indian values and modern Western ideals. A perfect
example is Aisha, who represents the embodiment of modernity and Western influence. She
challenges conventional norms by asserting her independence and pursuing her desires
unabashedly, contrasting sharply with the protagonist's adherence to traditional values and
societal expectations.
The character of Deb, the protagonist, serves as a lens through which the readers
witness the clash between tradition and modernity. His conflict between his feelings for Aisha
and his sense of duty towards his family and cultural heritage epitomizes the struggle faced by
many individuals in contemporary India. His reluctance to fully embrace Westernized notions of
love and commitment reflects the tensions inherent in navigating cultural identity in a rapidly
changing society. Furthermore, the novel delves into the portrayal of Westernized lifestyle
ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 248 | P a g e
choices embraced by the characters. From their fashion preferences to their language usage and
social behaviors, the characters' adoption of Western norms illustrates the pervasive influence
of Westernization on cultural identity and societal norms. This is evident in Deb's interactions
with Aisha, where he finds himself drawn to her modernity and liberated lifestyle, yet
simultaneously feels conflicted due to his ingrained cultural values.
Additionally, the empowerment of female characters in the novel reflects the influence
of Western ideals of gender equality and autonomy. Aisha's assertiveness in pursuing her
desires and challenging traditional gender roles stands in stark contrast to the more passive
female characters in Deb's life, such as Avantika. Through their interactions, the novel highlights
the shifting dynamics of gender relations in contemporary India, influenced by Western notions
of empowerment and self-determination. The overarching narrative of "She Broke Up, I Didn't!
... I Just Kissed Someone Else!" serves as a poignant commentary on the complexities of cultural
globalization and its impact on love, relationships, and identity in modern India. By
interweaving the characters' struggles with broader societal shifts, Durjoy Datta crafts a
compelling story that invites readers to reflect on the nuances of cultural adaptation and the
ongoing tension between tradition and modernity.
Deb embodies the conflict between these two sets of values. He adheres to traditional
Indian values of duty, loyalty, and familial expectations, which dictate his commitment to his
relationship with Avantika and his reluctance to embrace Westernized notions of love and
romance. However, when he meets Aisha, a representation of modern Western influence, his
worldview is challenged. Aisha's character embodies modernity and Westernization. She is
independent, assertive, and unapologetically pursues her desires, embodying the ideals of
individualism and personal freedom often associated with Western culture. Her introduction
into Deb's life disrupts his adherence to traditional values, leading to an internal conflict
between his sense of duty and his desire for personal fulfillment. The plot unfolds as Deb
navigates this internal struggle, torn between his feelings for Avantika and his attraction to
Aisha. His interactions with both women serve as a microcosm of the broader societal clash
between tradition and modernity. Avantika represents the traditional Indian woman,
characterized by her adherence to societal expectations and her commitment to familial duties.
In contrast, Aisha challenges these norms, encouraging Deb to question his preconceived
notions of love and relationships.
Throughout the novel, Deb grapples with the conflicting expectations placed upon him
by his family, society, and his own desires. His journey is marked by moments of introspection
and self-discovery as he attempts to reconcile his traditional upbringing with the allure of
Western ideals of individualism and romantic freedom. Ultimately, the resolution of the novel
does not neatly align with either traditional Indian values or modern Western ideals. Instead,
Deb's character undergoes a process of growth and self-realization, acknowledging the
complexity of his identity and the fluidity of cultural influences in shaping his perceptions of
love and relationships. Through Deb's journey, Durjoy Datta offers a nuanced exploration of the
struggle between tradition and modernity in contemporary Indian society, highlighting the
complexities of cultural adaptation and the ongoing negotiation of identity in a rapidly changing
world.
Deb, the central character in Durjoy Datta's "She Broke Up, I Didn't! ... I Just Kissed
Someone Else!", undergoes a significant transformation influenced by Westernization, which
impacts the trajectory of the novel in profound ways. Initially depicted as someone rooted in
traditional Indian values and societal expectations, Deb's encounters with Westernized ideals
challenge his beliefs, relationships, and ultimately, his identity. The influence of Westernization
on Deb is primarily embodied through his relationship with Aisha, a character symbolizing
modernity and Western culture. Aisha's introduction into Deb's life disrupts his conventional
worldview and triggers a series of internal conflicts. Her assertiveness, independence, and non-
conformist attitude contrast sharply with Deb's adherence to traditional values, leading him to
question his own desires and aspirations. Deb's interactions with Aisha expose him to
ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 249 | P a g e
Westernized lifestyle choices, including fashion, language, and social behaviors, which gradually
erode his adherence to traditional norms. He finds himself drawn to Aisha's liberated lifestyle
and the sense of freedom it represents, prompting him to reassess his own beliefs and
aspirations. This internal struggle between tradition and modernity becomes a central theme in
the novel, driving Deb's character development and influencing the decisions he makes
throughout the story.
Furthermore, Deb's relationship with Aisha serves as a catalyst for his journey of self-
discovery and personal growth. As he navigates the complexities of love and relationships, Deb
confronts the conflicting expectations placed upon him by his family, society, and his own
desires. His experiences with Aisha force him to confront his own insecurities and
vulnerabilities, ultimately leading him towards a greater understanding of himself and his place
in the world. The impact of Westernization on Deb is not confined to his personal life but also
extends to the broader narrative of the novel. His internal struggles and conflicts mirror the
broader societal shifts occurring in contemporary India, where traditional values collide with
modern Western ideals. Through Deb's character arc, Durjoy Datta explores the complexities of
cultural adaptation and the ongoing negotiation of identity in a rapidly changing world.

CONCLUSION :
The exploration of the influence of Westernization on Deb in Durjoy Datta's "She Broke
Up, I Didn't! ... I Just Kissed Someone Else!" reveals the nuanced complexities of cultural
adaptation and identity negotiation in contemporary India. Through Deb's character arc, the
novel illustrates the profound impact of Western ideals on traditional Indian values,
relationships, and societal norms. Deb's journey from a character entrenched in traditional
Indian values to one grappling with the allure of Westernized ideals serves as a microcosm of
broader societal shifts occurring in modern India. His interactions with Aisha, a symbol of
Westernization, prompt him to question his beliefs, desires, and aspirations, ultimately leading
to a process of self-discovery and personal growth. Deb's internal struggles highlight the
ongoing negotiation of identity in a rapidly changing world, where individuals are confronted
with conflicting cultural influences and societal expectations. His experiences reflect the
complexities of navigating tradition and modernity, as well as the enduring tension between
preserving cultural heritage and embracing the forces of change. Deb's transformation
underscores the transformative power of Westernization on individual identity and the fluidity
of cultural adaptation in contemporary India. Through his character arc, Durjoy Datta offers a
compelling exploration of the complexities of cultural globalization and the ongoing negotiation
of identity in an increasingly interconnected world. The examination of Deb's journey in "She
Broke Up, I Didn't! ... I Just Kissed Someone Else!" provides valuable insights into the impact of
Westernization on Indian society, highlighting the complexities of navigating tradition and
modernity in a rapidly changing cultural landscape.

REFERENCES
1. Datta, Durjoy. "She Broke Up, I Didn't! ... I Just Kissed Someone Else!" Penguin Random
House India, 2011.
2. Sharma, Arvind, and Katherine K. Young. "The Anthropology of Globalization: Cultural
Anthropology Enters the 21st Century." Berg, 2009.
3. Appadurai, Arjun. "Modernity at Large: Cultural Dimensions of Globalization." University of
Minnesota Press, 1996.
4. Nayar, Pramod K. "The Penguin 21st Century Handbook of Contemporary Indian Literature."
Penguin UK, 2010.
5. Mishra, Vijay. "The Literature of the Indian Diaspora: Theorizing the Diasporic Imaginary."
Routledge, 2007.
6. Chakrabarty, Dipesh. "Provincializing Europe: Postcolonial Thought and Historical
Difference." Princeton University Press, 2000.
ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 250 | P a g e
7. Sen, Sreemati. "Negotiating Feminism, Islam, and Modernity: The Political and Literary
Discourses of Three Bangladeshi Women Writers." Lexington Books, 2012.
8. Ghosh, Amitav. "The Great Derangement: Climate Change and the Unthinkable." University
of Chicago Press, 2016.

INDIAN CONSTITUTION AND BASIC STRUCTURE DOCTRINE

Mr. Shrikant Namdev Phakade

M.A. ( Political Science) NET, P.V.P. College Kavathe Mahankal,
Dist. Sangli. Email- [email protected], Mob. 9763873900)

ABSTRACT:
Indian constitution is protector of fundamental rights of one out of five people in the
world. Evolution of doctrine have various judgments of Supreme Court in its way And they each
have different characteristics. Legislature and Judiciary are interconnected. It is orderly that

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 251 | P a g e

both should respect each other and perform their roles within the framework laid down by the
constitution.
To make rules and laws is authority of Sansad. Supreme Courts duty is to check those
laws made by Sansad are not violating the framework of constitution. And with help of this
process strengthens our constitution. Basic structure doctrine of the Indian constitution
celebrated its golden anniversary on 24 April 2023. The case of Kesavananda Bharati started
discussion on the basic structure doctrine and its progress continues till date with various
Supreme Court judgments.

INTRODUCTION:
A law made by Parliament or a state legislature goes against the Constitution; the
Supreme Court can declare it invalid. Although the Constitution allows for amendments by
Parliament to keep it relevant, the Supreme Court acts as a check on Parliament's power. It has
ruled that while Parliament can amend the Constitution, it can't change its fundamental
principles. This concept, known as the "basic structure," was first recognized by the Supreme
Court in 1973. This doctrine was propounded by Justice Hans Raj Khanna, in Kesavananda
Bharti Case that the Constitution of India has certain basic features that can't be altered or
destroyed through amendments by the parliament. Since then, the Court has been responsible
for interpreting the Constitution and ensuring that any amendments made by Parliament don't
undermine its core principles. The primary purpose of this doctrine is to preserve the soul idea
and philosophy of the original constitution.

INDIAN LEGISLATURE & INDIAN JUDICIARY:

The Indian Constitution establishes a clear separation of powers among the three
branches of government: the Legislature, the Executive, and the Judiciary. This means that each
branch has its own distinct powers and responsibilities. The Legislature, consisting of the Lok
Sabha and the Rajya Sabha, is responsible for making laws. Members of Parliament propose,
debate, and vote on bills that, once passed, become laws. However, these laws must comply with
the Constitution, and if there's a question about their constitutionality, it's the Judiciary's role to
interpret the Constitution. The Judiciary interprets laws passed by the Legislature to resolve
disputes and ensure uniformity in their application. This interpretation often shapes how laws
are implemented and affects the rights and responsibilities of citizens. The Judiciary is meant to
be independent of the Legislature and the Executive to ensure impartiality and fairness in its
decisions. This independence is crucial for upholding the rule of law and protecting the rights of
citizens. Overall, the relationship between the Indian Legislature and the Indian Judiciary is one
of mutual respect and interdependence, with each branch playing a vital role in upholding
democracy, ensuring accountability, and safeguarding the rights of the people.

TRANSITIONS OF BASIC STRUCTURE DOCTRINE:

Shankari Prasad Case (1951)
In the Shankari Prasad Case of 1951, the Nehru government utilized Article 368, the
amendment power of the constitution, to facilitate land acquisition. This action led to the
insertion of Articles 31A, 31B, and the 9th schedule into the constitution, constituting the first
amendment act of 1951. Subsequently, this amendment faced a challenge in the Supreme Court
of India, where the court ruled in favor of the amendment, asserting that Article 368 held
precedence over Article 13, granting Parliament the authority to amend any part of the
constitution.

Sajjan Singh Case (1965)

Similarly, in the Sajjan Singh Case of 1965, the Parliament, through the 17th amendment
act of 1964, added 44 new acts to the 9th schedule. This amendment, too, faced legal scrutiny,
this time in the Sajjan Singh vs State of Rajasthan case. Despite the challenge, the Supreme Court
ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 252 | P a g e
reiterated its previous judgment from the Shankari Prasad case. However, Justice Mudholkar
presented a dissenting opinion, contending that every constitution possesses certain
fundamental features that are immutable and cannot be altered.

Golaknath Case (1967)

The Golaknath vs. State of Punjab case (1967) was a landmark constitutional case in
India. Title refers to I.C.Golaknath, a landowner who challenged the First, Fourth and
Seventeenth Constitutional Amendments to limit property rights. The importance of the case
lies in its impact on the debate on fundamental rights, particularly regarding property rights. 44
new laws were inserted in the 9th Schedule by the 17th Amendment. The Supreme Court in this
judgment held that Parliament cannot make any constitutional amendment to any other
fundamental right, including property rights, through constitutional amendment. This decision
upheld the right of judicial review.

Kesavananda Bharati Case (1973)

The 1971 midterm elections to Parliament took place. In this Indira Gandhi got a huge
majority. During this period, her government passed The Banking Companies (acquisition and
transfer of undertakings) Act in 1970 and the Institutional Salary Freeze Act. Both these laws
were struck down by the court on the grounds that they violated fundamental rights. However,
Indira Gandhi overturned the Golkanath decision by passing the 24th and 25th constitutional
amendments in Parliament in 1971. And great curtailed the right of judicial review.
As seen in the judgments in the Shankari Prasad case (1951) and the Sajjan Singh case
(1965), the Supreme Court gave full power to Parliament to amend the Constitution. However,
in the Golaknath case (1967), the Supreme Court held that Parliament cannot amend the
Fundamental Rights and only the Constituent Assembly has the right to amend the Constitution.
Kesavananda Bharati was the abbot of Ednir Math. The Kerala Land Reforms Act, 1963 raised
the issue of property belonging to religious institutions. So Kesavananda bharati challenged this
land reform act.
While deciding this case, the Supreme Court accepted that the Parliament can amend
any part of the Constitution as a fundamental right of the Parliament; but Parliament has no
power to change the basic structure of the Constitution. By this means the court kept its right of
judicial review intact. The Supreme Court has repeatedly upheld the doctrine of basic structure.
It has also been elaborated in many case decisions.
Parliament again touched upon the basic structure of the Constitution by passing the
42nd Amendment in 1976. This act amended Article 368 and declared that there is no limit to
parliament about constituent power. Also, no question can be raised to the justice system on any
constitutional amendment issue. However, the Supreme Court invalidated this provision in the
Minerva Mill vs Union of India case. From the various judgements, lots of elements or
components have emerged as 'basic structure' of the constitution.

Indira Gandhi vs Raj Narain Case (1975)

The Indira Gandhi vs. Raj Narain case in 1975 is famous for declaring the election of then
PM Indira Gandhi as void on grounds of electoral malpractices. It reinforced the Independence
of the judiciary in safeguarding democratic principles.

Minerva Mills Case (1980)

In the Minerva Mills case of 1980, the Supreme Court rendered a significant decision by
striking down the 42nd amendment act. The Court ruled that this amendment, which excluded
'Judicial Review', a vital component of the basic structure of the constitution, was invalid. This
ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 253 | P a g e
verdict underscored the Court's commitment to upholding the fundamental principles
embedded within the Constitution.

Waman Rao Case (1981)

Similarly, in the Waman Rao Case of 1981, the Supreme Court reaffirmed the 'basic
structure doctrine'. It clarified that this doctrine would be applicable to constitutional
amendments enacted subsequent to the Kesavananda Bharti case, which occurred after April
24, 1973. This reiterated the Court's stance on the enduring importance of safeguarding the
fundamental framework of the Constitution.

Indra Sawhney and Union of India (1992)

In the case of Indra Sawhney and Union of India in 1992, the Supreme Court delved into
the scope and implications of Article 16(4). It upheld the constitutional validity of the 27%
reservation for Other Backward Classes (OBCs) under certain conditions, such as ensuring that
the total reservation does not exceed 50%, excluding the 'creamy layer', and prohibiting
reservation in promotions. Additionally, this case marked a significant development as the 'Rule
of Law' was incorporated into the basic features of the constitution, further solidifying the
foundational principles of governance and justice within the Indian legal framework.

S.R. Bommai Case (1994)

In this particular case, the Supreme Court emphasized that the proclamation of Article
356, which entails the imposition of President's rule, is open to judicial review. Despite the case
not being directly related to the constitutional amendment, the concept of the basic structure of
the Constitution was invoked and applied. The court's ruling established that if the policies of a
state government are deemed to contravene the fundamental framework of the constitution,
Article 356 can be legitimately invoked. This decision highlighted the significance of
safeguarding the fundamental principles embedded within the Constitution, even in contexts
beyond direct constitutional amendments.

I.R. Coelho v. State of Tamil Nadu Case (2007)

The 2007 I.R. Coelho v. State of Tamil Nadu case is a landmark judgement in Indian
constitutional law that reinforced and confirmed the fundamental structure doctrine of the
Indian Constitution. The case dealt with a challenge to the Ninth Schedule of the Constitution,
which exempted laws from judicial review. The petitioner contended that this violated the
Constitution's fundamental structure. The Supreme Court, by a vote of 7-2, upheld the validity of
the Ninth Schedule but ruled that laws included in it could still be reviewed by the courts.
The I R Coelho case has further strengthened the hold of the basic structure doctrine in
the constitutional setup of the country by emphasising that all amendments, depending on its
impact and consequences if violative of the doctrine of the basic structure, need to be struck
down.

Justice K. S. Puttaswamy (Retd.) & Anr. vs Union Of India & Ors. (2017):
The case began with the question of whether the right to privacy was a fundamental
right, which was raised in 2015 in the arguments concerning the legal validity of the Aadhaar
database. In its decision, the Supreme Court upheld the basic structure doctrine and declared
the right to privacy as a fundamental right protected under the Constitution. The Court also
stated that any law that infringes upon the right to privacy would be unconstitutional and
violate the basic structure of the Constitution. Furthermore, the Supreme Court determined that
the Aadhaar Act violated the right to privacy and invalidated several provisions of the Act. The
Court also prohibited the mandatory use of Aadhaar for government services or subsidies, as it
would breach the right to privacy. In summary, the Puttaswamy case highlights the importance
of the basic structure doctrine in protecting fundamental rights and upholding the
ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 254 | P a g e
constitutional principles of the Indian Constitution.

Components of Doctrine Based on Basic Structure

The basic structure doctrine serves as a safeguard to protect the fundamental principles
and values enshrined in the Constitution. It ensures the integrity and stability of the
constitutional framework. The specific elements of the basic structure may be subject to
interpretation and evolve over time; they generally encompass principles such as:
 Separation of powers
 The supremacy of the Constitution
 Federalism
 Secularism
 The rule of law
 Democratic principles
 Protection of fundamental rights etc.
These elements of Basic structure form the foundation of our Constitution. The vision of
the framers of the Indian Constitution and the aspirations of the Indian people are reflected by
these features.

CONCLUSION:
The basic structure rule in the Indian Constitution is very important. It helps the
Constitution to change and adapt to the needs of society. Courts use this rule to protect the main
parts of the Constitution and make sure it stays relevant. They use it to cancel laws that go
against the main ideas of the Constitution. Some main ideas are that the Constitution is the most
important, everyone must follow the law, and the country is democratic and fair to all religions.
Also, it says that the government's power is divided into different parts, like the executive,
legislature, and judiciary and they must work separately. These ideas cannot be changed or
removed. The basic structure rule also stops changes to the Constitution that try to weaken
these main ideas. The courts can reject changes that they think are bad for the Constitution. This
has happened in cases like Kesavananda Bharati and Minerva Mills.
In conclusion, the basic structure doctrine is an indispensable tool in the growth and
interpretation of the Indian Constitution. It safeguards the Constitution's crucial features,
ensuring that it remains an ever-evolving, living document. By striking down laws and
constitutional amendments that undermine the Constitution's basic structure, the basic
structure doctrine has played a pivotal role in preserving the Constitution's importance and
upholding its values, thereby being the cornerstone of Indian democracy. Mr. K. R. Narayanan
(the former President of India) once said, “We have destroyed the Constitution, and Constitution
has not destroyed us” appears true as the Parliament has on many occasions proved this in
order to show their power.

REFERENCES:
1. Vijay Kumar (2023) The Theory of Basic Structure: Saviour of the Constitution
and Democracy.
2. Granville Austine (2007) The Indian Constitution: Cornerstone of a Nation. New Delhi:
Oxford University Press
3. M. Laxmikanth (INDIAN POLITY). McGraw Hill Education (India) Private Limited
4. ecourts.gov.in
5. https://privacylibrary.ccgnlud.org
6. https://papers.ssrn.com
7. https://indiankanoon.org/doc/322504/
8. https://indiankanoon.org/doc/1706770/
9. https://indiankanoon.org/doc/120358/
ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 255 | P a g e
10. https://indiankanoon.org/doc/257876/
11. www.wikipedia.org
12. www.sci.gov.in
13. www.livemint.com
14. www.doj.gov.in
15. www.livelaw.in
16. www.ndtv.com
17. www.abplive.com
18. www.tandfonline.com

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 256 | P a g e

ECOLOGICAL EXPLORATIONS: INTERDISCIPLINARY PERSPECTIVES ON GRAHAM SWIFT'S
“WATERLAND”

Dr. Sujata P. Solage

Assistant Professor in English
Deptt.Of English,
Padmabhushan Vasantraodada
Patil Mahavidyalaya, Vidyanagar, Kavathe-Mahankal (Sangli)-416405 Maharashtra. INDIA
*[email protected]

ABSTRACT:
This research paper delves into Graham Swift's novel "Waterland," exploring the
intersection of environmental elements with multidisciplinary approaches in the humanities.
Set in the low-lying region of eastern England known as the Fens, "Waterland" provides a rich
narrative backdrop that intertwines themes of history, storytelling, mystery, and tragedy.
Through a multidisciplinary lens encompassing fields such as literature, history, environmental
studies, and sociology, this paper aims to analyze the novel's portrayal of landscape, ecology,
and regionalism, thereby illuminating its broader socio-cultural and environmental
implications.

KEYWORDS: multidisciplinary research, humanities, environmental elements, Graham Swift,

"Waterland," regionalism.

1. INTRODUCTION:
Graham Swift, a distinguished luminary in the realm of contemporary English literature,
entered the world on May 4th, 1949, amidst the cultural tapestry of London, England. His
intellectual journey traversed through the hallowed halls of academic institutions such as
Dulwich College in London, Queen's College at Cambridge, and the venerable University of York.
Swift's ascent to literary eminence culminated when he ascended to the ranks of the esteemed
"Best of Young British Novelists," a distinguished accolade conferred upon him by the Book
Marketing Council in 1983. The formative years of Swift's upbringing were deeply influenced by
his father, a valiant civil servant who once navigated the perilous skies as a naval pilot during
the tumultuous era of World War II.
Swift's journey to becoming a highly esteemed writer began while he was working as an
educator, where he initially delved into the art of storytelling. From that point onward, Swift's
body of work has expanded significantly, comprising a diverse collection of novels, short stories,
and non-fiction works. Demonstrating his remarkable productivity, Swift has authored around
ten novels, with nine already making their mark in the literary world, and another eagerly
awaited for its release in April 2016.Among his magnum opuses are revered titles such as "The
Sweet-Shop-Owner" (1980), "Shuttlecock" (1981), "Waterland" (1983), "Out of this World" (1988),
"Ever After" (1992), "Last Orders" (1996), "The Light of Day" (2003), "Tomorrow" (2007), and
"Wish You Were Here" (2011). Swift's latest opus, "Mothering Sunday: A Romance," emerged into
the literary firmament in April 2016, further cementing his stature as a luminary in the literary
pantheon. Complementing his novels, Swift has curated three collections of short stories,
namely "Learning to Swim" (1982), "Chemistry" (2008), and "England and other Stories" (2014),
alongside a seminal non-fiction work entitled "Making an Elephant: Writing from Within" (2009).
Graham Swift's "Waterland," published in 1983, immerses readers in a captivating
exploration of history, human lives, family, and the haunting landscapes of the Fens in eastern
England. A unique environmental setting characterized by its low-lying terrain and waterlogged
expanses. This article seeks to bridge disciplinary boundaries by employing a multidisciplinary

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 257 | P a g e

approach to analyze the novel's portrayal of environmental elements and their impact on
characters, plot, and thematic development. Drawing from diverse fields within the humanities,
including literature, history, environmental studies, and sociology, we aim to uncover the
omplex interplay between human experiences and the natural world in "Waterland," thereby
offering new insights into the novel's socio-cultural and environmental significance.

2. ENVIRONMENTAL ELEMENTS IN "WATERLAND":

The Fens, or "Waterland," serves as the primary setting of Graham Swift's novel, shaping
the lives and experiences of its characters in profound ways. The unique ecological
characteristics of the Fens, characterized by its marshy terrain and intricate network of
waterways, play a central role in the narrative, serving as a metaphorical backdrop for the
complexities of human existence. Through vivid descriptions and evocative imagery, Swift
paints a portrait of a landscape both beautiful and unforgiving, reflecting the precarious balance
between human civilization and the natural world.
The Fens, with its watery landscape, symbolize both life and death in "Waterland." The
presence of water is not merely a backdrop but an active force shaping the lives and destinies of
the characters. For example, the drowning of Freddie Parr and the subsequent discovery of his
body in the water serve as catalysts for the unfolding of the novel's events. The ebb and flow of
the tides mirror the fluctuating fortunes and emotions of the characters, highlighting the
interconnectedness of human lives with the natural world. Hence the difference between the
Fenlands in Crick’s memories and the real Fenlands becomes more apparent. Crick, himself,
brings the difference to the fore by saying “[a]nd since a fairy-tale must have a setting, a setting
which, like the settings of all good fairy-tales, must be both palpable and unreal, let me tell
you” (Swift 15).

3. REGIONALISM AND SENSE OF PLACE:

"Waterland" embodies a strong sense of regionalism, rooted in the specific geographical
and cultural context of the Fens. The novel's title itself evokes the significance of place,
highlighting the inseparable connection between land and identity. Through the lens of regional
studies and cultural geography, we can explore how the landscape of the Fens shapes the
characters' sense of belonging and identity, influencing their perceptions, values, and
interactions with the world around them.
The Fens, with their distinctive topography and rich history, become more than just a
backdrop in "Waterland"; they become a character in their own right. The characters'
attachment to the land and their deep-rooted connection to its history and traditions
underscore the importance of place in shaping individual and collective identities. In the novel,
Tom says,
“My ancestors were water people. They speared fish and netted ducks” (18).
Moreover, the portrayal of the Fens as a liminal space, neither fully land nor water,
reflects the characters' own sense of ambiguity and uncertainty in navigating the complexities of
life.

4. ECOCRITICAL PERSPECTIVES:
An ecocritical analysis of "Waterland" offers valuable insights into the novel's portrayal
of environmental themes and their broader ecological implications. By examining the ways in
which human actions impact the natural environment, we can uncover the underlying ecological
concerns embedded within the narrative. From the draining of the Fens for agricultural
purposes to the degradation of the ecosystem due to industrialization, "Waterland" invites
readers to reflect on the complex relationship between human society and the natural world.
Graham Swift sets novel at such beautiful place Fenland as he in his introductory says,
“the Fens as an emblem of planetary fragility, planetary conservation”. (Swift, IX)
He extends further.
ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 258 | P a g e
 “…but I‟m not sure if this isn‟t taken, care of anyway”. (IX)
The novel presents a stark depiction of environmental degradation and its consequences on
both the ecosystem and human communities. The draining of the Fens, a monumental feat of
engineering, transforms the landscape and disrupts the delicate balance of nature, leading to
unforeseen ecological consequences. Through the character of Tom Crick, Swift highlights the
environmental cost of human progress and the ethical dilemmas inherent in the manipulation of
the natural world for economic gain.

5. PSYCHOLOGICAL COMPLEXITY AND TRAUMA:

Beyond the historical and ecological dimensions, "Waterland" delves into the
psychological complexities of its characters, particularly Mary's descent into instability and
depression. Because of their relation to loss that has never been recompensed the fetus ripped
out of Mary's womb and dumped by Crick into the river Ouse they cannot be simply separated.
As Crick elsewhere broods.
[I]t is an [...] illusion that what you throw (or push) into a river will be carried away,
swallowed for ever, and never return. Because it will return. And that remark [...] that we cannot
step twice into the same river, is not to be trusted. Because we are always stepping into the
same river. (146)
Her traumatic experiences, including an abortion that leaves her sterile, culminate in her
desperate act of kidnapping a baby. This exploration of trauma and mental illness adds another
layer of depth to the novel, highlighting the profound impact of personal and historical legacies
on individual psyches.

6. HISTORICAL CONTEXT AND ENVIRONMENTAL CHANGE:

Historical perspectives provide crucial context for understanding the environmental
changes depicted in "Waterland." The novel's narrative unfolds against the backdrop of
significant historical events, including the draining of the Fens and the transformation of the
landscape for agricultural purposes. Through a historical analysis, we can trace the socio-
economic and environmental factors that have shaped the Fens over time, shedding light on the
novel's exploration of human intervention in the natural environment. Pamela Cooper suggests
that
"The numerous references in Waterland to both the Old and New Testaments give the
novel an operative Biblical typology as well as a subtext of religious anxiety and longing," and
proposes that "these allusions and the thematic charge they carry are worthy of an extended
study [....]" (393).
The historical context of "Waterland" illuminates the novel's themes of environmental
change and ecological resilience. The draining of the Fens represents a pivotal moment in the
region's history, marking a profound transformation of the landscape and the communities that
inhabit it. By examining the socio-economic forces driving this process, we can gain a deeper
understanding of the novel's portrayal of environmental exploitation and its long-term
consequences for both human and non-human life.

7. CONCLUSION:
Graham Swift's "Waterland" offers a compelling exploration of environmental elements
within the context of human experience and regional identity. By employing a multidisciplinary
approach that integrates insights from literature, history, environmental studies, and sociology,
we can gain a deeper understanding of the novel's thematic concerns and their broader socio-
cultural and environmental implications. Graham Swift intricately weaves together events,
circumstances, mysticism, and metaphor to forge connections between characters across time.
He employs subtle yet powerful methods to explore how present-day existence is imbued not
only with personal history but also with the collective experiences of others. Swift's storytelling

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 259 | P a g e

is imbued with a timeless humanist sensibility, delving into the depths of buried emotions and
the profound repercussions of their revelation.Through further research and interdisciplinary
dialogue, we can continue to bridge boundaries and uncover new perspectives on the intricate
relationship between humanity and the natural world as depicted in "Waterland."

7. REFERENCES:
1. Abrams, M.H. A Glossary of Literary Terms. (8th ed.) Delhi (India): Thomson &
Wardsworth, 2005.
2. Barry, Peter. Beginning Theory. Manchester Uni. Press: Daryaganj New Delhi, 2011.
3. Buell, Lawrence. The Environmental Imagination: Thoreau, Nature Writing, and the
Formation of American Culture. Belknap Press of Harvard University Press, 1995.
4. Drabble, M. The Oxford Companion to English Literature, 6th ed. article Postmodernism.
Oxford University Press, 2000.
5. During, Simon, Ed., The Cultural Studies Reader, London and New York: Routledge, 229
1993.
6. Finney, Brian. English Fiction since 1984: Narrating a Nation. New York: Palgrave
Macmillian, 2006.
7. Garrard, Greg. Ecocriticism. Routledge, 2011.
8. Glotfelty, Cheryll, and Harold Fromm, editors. The Ecocriticism Reader: Landmarks in
Literary Ecology. University of Georgia Press, 1996.
9. Haraway, Donna J. "Situated Knowledges: The Science Question in Feminism and the
Privilege of Partial Perspective." Feminist Studies, vol. 14, no. 3, 1988, pp. 575-599.
10. Lane, Richard J., Rod Mengham, and Philip Tew. Contemporary British Fiction. Cambridge:
Polity Press, 2007.
11. Lea, D. Graham Swift. Manchester, England: Manchester University Press 2005.
12. Malcolm, David. Understanding Graham Swift. South Carolina: University of South Carolina
Press, 2003.
13. Marx, Leo. The Machine in the Garden: Technology and the Pastoral Ideal in America. Oxford
University Press, 1964.
14. Nicol, B. The Cambridge Introduction to Postmodern Fiction. Cambridge: Cambridge
University Press, 2009.
15. Nixon, Rob. Slow Violence and the Environmentalism of the Poor. Harvard University Press,
2013.
16. Swift, Graham. Waterland. Picador, 1983.
17. Veeser, H. Aram. The New Historicism. New York: Routledge, 1989.
18. Wells, Lynn. Allegories of Telling: Self-referential Narrative in Contemporary British. New
York: Costerus New Series, 2003.
19. White, Hayden. Metahistory. Baltimore: Johns Hopkins UP, 1973.
20. Williams, Rayamond. Marxism and Literature. Oxford. OUP, 1977.

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 260 | P a g e

 THE FUTURE OF INTERDISCIPLINARY STUDIES: TRENDS, CHALLENGES
AND OPPORTUNITIES

Mr. Hanmant Shivaji Narale

Department of Political Science
Padmabhushan Vasantraodada Patil Mahavidyalaya,
Kavathe Mahankal.
Email- [email protected]

ABSTRACT:
This research paper explores the future trajectory of interdisciplinary studies, focusing
on emerging trends, challenges, and opportunities. It investigates the increasing collaboration
across disciplines driven by the need to address complex global challenges such as climate
change and public health. Technological integration and the rise of interdisciplinary education
programs are identified as key drivers of this trend. However, communication barriers,
academic silos, and evaluation metrics present significant challenges. The paper emphasizes the
potential for interdisciplinary research to drive innovation, inform policy decisions, and engage
with communities. It concludes by advocating for continued efforts to overcome challenges and
leverage opportunities for interdisciplinary collaboration in addressing pressing societal issues.

INTRODUCTION :
Interdisciplinary studies have emerged as a vital approach to addressing the complex
challenges of the 21st century by integrating insights from multiple disciplines to develop
holistic solutions. As we stand on the cusp of a new era characterized by rapid technological
advancements, globalization, and unprecedented societal changes, the future of
interdisciplinary studies holds both promise and uncertainty.
This research paper aims to explore the future trajectory of interdisciplinary studies by
examining the key trends, challenges, and opportunities shaping its evolution. By delving into
these dimensions, we seek to provide insights into how interdisciplinary research can continue
to thrive and make meaningful contributions to academia, policy, and society.
In this introduction, we will set the stage by defining interdisciplinary studies and
outlining the significance of this approach in the context of contemporary challenges. We will
then provide an overview of the structure and objectives of this research paper, guiding readers
through the topics that will be explored in-depth in the subsequent sections.
Interdisciplinary studies involve the integration of knowledge, methodologies, and
perspectives from multiple disciplines to address complex problems that transcend traditional
boundaries. This approach acknowledges the interconnectedness of issues and the limitations of
disciplinary silos in providing comprehensive solutions. By bridging disciplinary divides,
interdisciplinary research seeks to foster collaboration, innovation, and holistic understanding.
In today's rapidly changing world, characterized by interconnected global challenges such as
climate change, public health crises, and socio-economic inequalities, interdisciplinary studies
play a crucial role in advancing knowledge and finding sustainable solutions. These complex
problems require interdisciplinary approaches that draw on diverse expertise to develop
nuanced insights and actionable strategies.

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 261 | P a g e

 Against this backdrop, this research paper will explore the future of interdisciplinary
studies by examining three key dimensions: trends, challenges, and opportunities. We will
identify emerging trends shaping interdisciplinary research, ranging from technological
advancements to shifting paradigms in academia. We will also discuss the challenges that
interdisciplinary scholars face, including institutional barriers, communication issues, and
evaluation metrics. Additionally, we will highlight the opportunities for growth, innovation, and
impact within interdisciplinary studies, from addressing global challenges to fostering diversity
and inclusion.
By providing a comprehensive analysis of these dimensions, this research paper aims to
contribute to our understanding of the future trajectory of interdisciplinary studies and provide
insights that can inform policy, practice, and scholarship in this field. Through a nuanced
exploration of trends, challenges, and opportunities, we hope to inspire dialogue, collaboration,
and action to harness the full potential of interdisciplinary research in addressing the complex
problems of our time.

OBJECTIVES :
4. Identify and analyze the prevailing trends in interdisciplinary studies, including the
emergence of new interdisciplinary fields, methodologies, and collaborative models.
5. To study Investigate the challenges inherent in interdisciplinary research, such as
epistemological tensions, methodological divergences, institutional barriers, and funding
constraints.

 Trends
1. Convergence of Technologies and Disciplines:
With rapid advancements in fields like artificial intelligence, biotechnology, and
nanotechnology, there's a growing convergence of technologies and disciplines. This
convergence fuels interdisciplinary research as scholars explore the intersections between
previously distinct fields to innovate and solve complex problems.

2. Systems Thinking and Complexity Science:

Interdisciplinary studies are increasingly embracing systems thinking and complexity
science. Scholars recognize that many real-world phenomena are interconnected and nonlinear,
requiring holistic approaches to understanding and addressing them. This trend emphasizes the
importance of interdisciplinary collaboration to tackle complex systems and emergent behavior.

3. Data Integration and Analysis:

The proliferation of data from diverse sources presents both challenges and
opportunities for interdisciplinary research. Advances in data science and analytics enable
scholars to integrate and analyze large and heterogeneous datasets, unlocking insights that
transcend disciplinary boundaries. Interdisciplinary teams leverage these tools to uncover
hidden patterns, inform decision-making, and address pressing societal issues.

4. Global Challenges and Sustainability:

Interdisciplinary studies are playing a crucial role in addressing global challenges such
as climate change, biodiversity loss, and public health crises. These complex problems demand
interdisciplinary approaches that draw on insights from multiple disciplines, including
environmental science, economics, sociology, and public policy. The future of interdisciplinary
studies will see a continued emphasis on sustainability and resilience, with scholars working
collaboratively to develop innovative solutions.

5. Interdisciplinary Education and Training:

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 262 | P a g e

 There's a growing recognition of the need to integrate interdisciplinary approaches into
educational curricula and professional training programs. Universities and institutions are
developing interdisciplinary courses, programs, and workshops to equip students and
professionals with the skills and mindset necessary for interdisciplinary collaboration. This
trend reflects the evolving nature of academia and the increasing demand for interdisciplinary
expertise in various sectors.

6. Cross-Cultural and Global Collaboration:

Interdisciplinary studies are breaking down geographical barriers and fostering cross-
cultural collaboration. Scholars from different regions and cultural backgrounds are coming
together to tackle common challenges and share diverse perspectives. Global networks and
partnerships facilitate knowledge exchange, capacity building, and collective action, driving
interdisciplinary research forward on a global scale.

7. Interdisciplinary Funding and Support:

Funding agencies and institutions are recognizing the value of interdisciplinary research
and providing increased support and resources for interdisciplinary projects. Initiatives such as
interdisciplinary research centers, grants, and fellowships enable scholars to pursue ambitious
interdisciplinary research agendas and collaborations. This trend signals a shift toward more
inclusive and collaborative approaches to funding research and innovation.

 Challalenges
1. Institutional Resistance and Siloed Structures:
Traditional academic institutions often operate within disciplinary silos, with
departments and funding structures that prioritize individual disciplines. Overcoming
institutional resistance to interdisciplinary approaches requires changes in organizational
culture, promotion and tenure criteria, and resource allocation mechanisms.

2. Communication and Collaboration Barriers:

Effective interdisciplinary collaboration requires clear communication and mutual
understanding among researchers from different disciplines. However, communication barriers
such as jargon, terminology differences, and disciplinary biases can impede collaboration.
Overcoming these barriers requires interdisciplinary training programs, communication skills
development, and creating spaces for meaningful dialogue and exchange.

3. Integration of Methods and Theories:

Integrating diverse methodologies, theories, and epistemologies from different
disciplines can be challenging. Interdisciplinary researchers must navigate methodological
pluralism and theoretical integration to develop robust interdisciplinary frameworks and
approaches. This requires interdisciplinary training, methodological innovation, and
interdisciplinary research methods courses.

4. Evaluation and Recognition:

Traditional academic evaluation metrics may not adequately capture the value and
impact of interdisciplinary research. Interdisciplinary scholars may face challenges in securing
funding, publishing in disciplinary journals, and receiving recognition for their work.
Addressing these challenges requires reforming evaluation criteria, developing interdisciplinary
publication outlets, and advocating for the recognition of interdisciplinary contributions.

5. Resource Allocation and Funding Priorities:

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 263 | P a g e

 Interdisciplinary research often requires substantial resources, including funding, time,
and expertise. However, funding agencies and institutions may prioritize disciplinary research
over interdisciplinary projects, making it difficult for interdisciplinary scholars to secure
support. Addressing resource allocation challenges requires advocating for interdisciplinary
funding mechanisms, promoting interdisciplinary research centers and initiatives, and
demonstrating the value of interdisciplinary approaches to funders and policymakers.

6. Ethical and Social Implications:

Interdisciplinary research raises complex ethical and social implications that may not be
adequately addressed within traditional disciplinary frameworks. Issues such as research
ethics, power dynamics, and community engagement require interdisciplinary collaboration
and dialogue to ensure responsible and equitable research practices. This necessitates
interdisciplinary training in ethics and social responsibility, interdisciplinary research ethics
committees, and community-engaged research approaches.
7. Maintaining Interdisciplinary Identity:
As interdisciplinary research becomes increasingly mainstream, there's a risk of diluting
its distinctive identity and approaches. Maintaining the integrity of interdisciplinary research
requires vigilance against reductionism, disciplinary colonization, and superficial
interdisciplinary collaborations. This requires fostering interdisciplinary communities of
practice, promoting interdisciplinary theory-building, and cultivating interdisciplinary
leadership and mentorship.

 Opportunites
1. Addressing Complex Global Challenges: Interdisciplinary studies offer a unique
opportunity to address complex global challenges such as climate change, public health
crises, and inequality. By bringing together insights from diverse disciplines, researchers
can develop holistic solutions that consider the interconnected nature of these issues.
2. Innovation and Discovery: Interdisciplinary collaboration fosters innovation and
discovery by encouraging the exchange of ideas and perspectives from different fields. By
combining expertise from multiple disciplines, researchers can identify novel approaches,
technologies, and solutions to longstanding problems.
3. Enhanced Problem-Solving: Interdisciplinary approaches enable more effective
problem-solving by drawing on a wide range of knowledge, methods, and perspectives. By
breaking down disciplinary boundaries, researchers can tackle complex problems from
multiple angles and develop comprehensive solutions that address diverse aspects of the
issue.
4. Translational Research and Application: Interdisciplinary studies facilitate
translational research that translates scientific discoveries into real-world applications and
solutions. By bridging the gap between academia, industry, and society, interdisciplinary
researchers can accelerate the translation of research findings into practical innovations
that benefit communities and economies.
5. Promoting Diversity and Inclusion: Interdisciplinary collaboration provides
opportunities to promote diversity and inclusion in research and academia. By actively
involving researchers from underrepresented backgrounds and disciplines,
interdisciplinary studies can enrich perspectives, foster collaboration across diverse
communities, and address societal inequities.
6. Interdisciplinary Education and Training: There's an opportunity to enhance
interdisciplinary education and training programs to prepare students for the challenges of
the future. By integrating interdisciplinary approaches into curricula, universities can equip
students with the skills, knowledge, and mindset needed to thrive in an interconnected
world.

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 264 | P a g e

7. Cross-Sector Partnerships: Interdisciplinary studies facilitate cross-sector
partnerships between academia, industry, government, and civil society. By collaborating
across sectors, researchers can leverage complementary expertise and resources to address
shared challenges, drive innovation, and maximize impact.
8. Promoting Systems Thinking: Interdisciplinary studies promote systems thinking,
which is essential for understanding and addressing complex, interconnected problems. By
adopting a systems perspective, researchers can identify feedback loops, unintended
consequences, and leverage points for intervention to create lasting change.
9. Advancing Methodological Innovation: Interdisciplinary collaboration drives
methodological innovation by encouraging the development of new approaches and
techniques that transcend disciplinary boundaries. By integrating diverse methodologies,
researchers can overcome limitations of traditional disciplinary approaches and address
complex problems more effectively.

CONCLUSION:
The future of interdisciplinary studies is characterized by a dynamic interplay of trends,
challenges, and opportunities that shape its trajectory in academia and beyond. As highlighted
throughout this research paper, several key themes emerge, offering insights into the evolving
landscape of interdisciplinary research.
Trends such as the convergence of technologies and disciplines, systems thinking, and
global collaboration underscore the growing importance of interdisciplinary approaches in
addressing complex societal challenges. These trends signal a shift towards more integrative
and holistic ways of understanding and tackling multifaceted problems.
However, alongside these promising trends, interdisciplinary studies face a host of
challenges that must be addressed to unlock their full potential. Institutional resistance,
communication barriers, evaluation metrics, and resource allocation issues pose significant
hurdles that require concerted efforts from stakeholders across academia, funding agencies, and
policymakers.
Despite these challenges, interdisciplinary studies offer numerous opportunities for
growth, innovation, and impact. By addressing global challenges, fostering innovation,
promoting diversity and inclusion, and advancing cross-sector partnerships, interdisciplinary
researchers can create positive change and contribute to a more sustainable and equitable
future.

BIBLIOGRAPHY:
1. Klein, J. T., John Wiley & Sons. “Creating interdisciplinary campus cultures: A model for
strength and sustainability”. 2010
2. Repko, A. F., Szostak, R., & Buchberger, M. P. “Introduction to interdisciplinary studies. SAGE
Publications”. 2017.
3. Frodeman, R., Klein, J. T., & Mitcham, C. (Eds.). “The Oxford handbook of interdisciplinarity”.
2010
4. Rhoten, D., & Pfirman, S. “Women in interdisciplinary science: Exploring preferences and
consequences.” Research Policy, 36(1), 56-75. 2007.
5. Klein, J. T. “Interdisciplinarity: History, theory, and practice.” 2014

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 265 | P a g e

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 266 | P a g e
“THE ROLE OF INTERDISCIPLINARY COMMUNICATION & COLLABORATION IN ACADEMIA
AND TECHNIQUES TO FOSTER IT.”

Mr. Shivbhushan V. Jadhav

(Research Student)
Department of English, Shivaji University, Kolhapur, 416004, Maharashtra.

ABSTRACT:
The ability to effectively communicate and collaborate across disciplines is crucial for
advancing research and fostering innovation in academia. As the complexities of modern
problems continue to grow, Interdisciplinary approaches have become increasingly important
for finding holistic solutions. Present paper will explore the ways in which promoting
interdisciplinary communication and collaboration can enhance academic research and
contribute to the advancement of knowledge. By breaking down the silos between different
fields of study, researchers can leverage diverse perspectives and expertise to tackle complex
challenges from multiple angles. This not only leads to more comprehensive insights but also
encourages creativity and innovation by fostering a culture of open-mindedness and
collaboration. Through an examination of best practices, challenges, and potential solutions, this
paper seeks to provide a roadmap for enhancing Interdisciplinary collaboration in academia.

KEYWORDS: Interdisciplinary, Foster, silos between different fields of study, holistic solutions

INTRODUCTION:
In the rapidly evolving landscape of academia, interdisciplinary communication and
collaboration have become essential components for driving innovation, addressing complex
challenges, and advancing knowledge across various fields of study. The ability to bridge
disciplinary boundaries, exchange ideas, and work together towards common goals has
emerged as a key determinant of success in academic research and scholarship. This research
paper delves into the crucial role of interdisciplinary communication and collaboration in
academia and explores effective techniques to foster and enhance these processes.
As traditional academic disciplines continue to intersect and overlap, the need for
interdisciplinary approaches has never been more pressing. Interdisciplinary communication
involves the exchange of ideas, perspectives, and methodologies between scholars from
different disciplines, leading to the creation of novel insights and solutions that would not have
been possible within the confines of a single discipline. Collaboration, on the other hand,
involves working collectively towards a shared objective, pooling expertise and resources to
address complex problems that require diverse perspectives and skills.
The benefits of interdisciplinary communication and collaboration are manifold. They
include the ability to tackle multifaceted issues from multiple angles, the potential for
innovation and creativity that arises from combining diverse perspectives, and the opportunity
to achieve breakthroughs that transcend traditional disciplinary boundaries. However, the
process of fostering effective interdisciplinary communication and collaboration presents its
own set of challenges, including the need to bridge linguistic and methodological differences,
navigate power dynamics, and create a conducive environment for fruitful interaction.
This research paper aims to provide a comprehensive overview of the role of
interdisciplinary communication and collaboration in academia, highlighting the benefits,
challenges, and best practices for fostering effective interdisciplinary partnerships. Drawing on
theoretical frameworks, empirical studies, and case examples, the paper will explore various
techniques and strategies that can be employed to promote interdisciplinary communication
and collaboration in academic settings. By shedding light on the importance of interdisciplinary

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 267 | P a g e

approaches and offering practical guidance on how to enhance interdisciplinary interactions,
this paper seeks to contribute to the ongoing discourse on the future of academia and the
pursuit of knowledge in an increasingly interconnected world.
AIMS AND OBJECTIVES OF THE STUDY-
 Strategies for Promoting Interdisciplinary Communication and Collaboration
 Impact of Interdisciplinary Communication and Collaboration on Academic Research

HYPOTHESES:
 Effective interdisciplinary communication and collaboration in academia positively impact
research innovation and knowledge advancement.

STATEMENT OF THE PROBLEM:

The lack of effective interdisciplinary communication and collaboration in academia
limits research innovation and knowledge advancement, hindering the potential for
groundbreaking discoveries and interdisciplinary approaches to solving complex problems.

SCOPE AND LIMITATIONS OF THE STUDY:

This research paper will focus on the importance of interdisciplinary communication
and collaboration in academia and examine various techniques and strategies that can be
implemented to foster effective interdisciplinary partnerships. The study will explore the
benefits of interdisciplinary approaches, challenges faced in promoting collaboration across
different disciplines, and best practices for facilitating communication among researchers from
diverse fields.
The study will primarily focus on the academic setting and may not fully explore the role
of interdisciplinary communication and collaboration in other sectors, such as industry or
government. Additionally, the research will be limited in scope to English-language literature
and resources, potentially excluding valuable insights from non-English publications. The study
may also be constrained by the availability of data and information on specific interdisciplinary
projects and initiatives.

REVIEW OF RELEVANT LITERATURE:

Interdisciplinary communication and collaboration have been increasingly recognized
as essential components of academic research and innovation. Scholars and researchers have
highlighted the benefits of integrating knowledge and expertise from multiple disciplines to
address complex challenges and drive scientific progress.
One key study by Jones et al. (2019) explored the impact of interdisciplinary
collaborations on research outcomes in academia. The researchers found that interdisciplinary
teams tend to produce more innovative and impactful research compared to single-discipline
teams. This underscores the importance of fostering communication and collaboration across
disciplines to drive meaningful advances in academic scholarship.
In a similar vein, Smith (2018) emphasized the role of effective communication
strategies in promoting interdisciplinary partnerships. The study highlighted the importance of
clear communication channels, shared goals, and mutual respect among researchers from
different disciplines. By creating a collaborative and inclusive environment, academic
institutions can facilitate interdisciplinary engagement and foster innovative research projects.
Furthermore, Brown and Wilson (2017) conducted a meta-analysis of interdisciplinary
collaboration in academia and identified common barriers and challenges faced by researchers.
These include differences in disciplinary norms and practices, competing priorities, and limited
resources for interdisciplinary projects. The study suggested that implementing structured
communication processes, facilitating cross-disciplinary training programs, and providing
institutional support can help overcome these obstacles and promote successful

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 268 | P a g e

interdisciplinary collaborations.
Overall, the literature underscores the critical role of interdisciplinary communication
and collaboration in academia. By promoting knowledge sharing, fostering collaborative
relationships, and implementing effective communication strategies, academic institutions can
harness the full potential of interdisciplinary research to drive innovation and address complex
societal challenges.

Importance of Interdisciplinary Communication in Academia

Interdisciplinary communication in academia plays a vital role in fostering innovative
research and addressing complex global challenges. By integrating diverse perspectives and
methodologies from various disciplines, researchers can develop comprehensive solutions that
transcend traditional academic boundaries. Effective interdisciplinary communication enhances
creativity, promotes critical thinking and encourages collaboration among scholars with
different expertise resulting in a more holistic understanding of complex problems. This
collaborative approach allows for the exploration of new research avenues and the
development of innovative approaches to tackle pressing societal issues. Additionally,
Interdisciplinary communication facilitates the dissemination of knowledge across disciplines
leading to the creation of new knowledge paradigms and advancements in various fields.
Ultimately embracing Interdisciplinary communication in academia can propel research
towards greater heights of excellence and impact transcending disciplinary limitations.

Barriers to Interdisciplinary Communication and Collaboration

Barriers to interdisciplinary communication and collaboration are multifaceted and can
impede the effectiveness of academic research endeavors. One key hindrance is the lack of a
shared language or vocabulary among researchers from different disciplines, making it
challenging to convey complex ideas across domains. Additionally, disciplinary silos and the
tradition of specialization can create resistance to interdisciplinary efforts, as scholars may
prioritize their specific field's norms and practices over cross-disciplinary engagement. This
fragmented approach can lead to knowledge gaps and missed opportunities for innovation that
could arise from integrating diverse perspectives. To overcome these barriers, it is essential to
foster a culture that values and promotes interdisciplinary dialogue, encourages mutual respect
for diverse expertise, and provides adequate support for interdisciplinary initiatives within
academic institutions. Through these efforts, the potential for impactful interdisciplinary
research can be realized, leading to advancements in knowledge production and problem-
solving.

Strategies for Promoting Interdisciplinary Communication and Collaboration

Effective strategies for promoting interdisciplinary communication and collaboration
within academia are essential in fostering innovation and addressing complex societal
challenges. One key strategy is the establishment of interdisciplinary research centers or
institutes that bring together experts from diverse fields to work on common research goals.
These centers provide a physical space for scholars to engage in cross-disciplinary dialogue,
fostering a culture of collaboration and mutual learning. Additionally, incentivizing
interdisciplinary research through funding opportunities and recognition of interdisciplinary
work in promotion and tenure processes can further encourage scholars to engage in
collaborative endeavors. Establishing interdisciplinary seminars, workshops, and conferences
can also provide platforms for researchers to share their work, exchange ideas, and build
networks across disciplines. By implementing these strategies, academic institutions can create
conducive environment for interdisciplinary communication and collaboration, ultimately
leading to impactful research outcomes.

Impact of Interdisciplinary Communication and Collaboration on Academic Research

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 269 | P a g e
 Interdisciplinary communication and collaboration play a vital role in advancing
academic research. By bringing together experts from diverse fields such as science, technology,
engineering, mathematics, social sciences, and humanities, interdisciplinary teams can tackle
complex research questions that require a multifaceted approach. The impact of such
collaboration is profound, leading to innovative solutions, novel insights, and a broader
perspective on pressing societal challenges. Through effective communication, experts can
share their unique expertise, methods, and perspectives, facilitating a more comprehensive
understanding of the research problem at hand. This not only enhances the quality of research
outcomes but also fosters creativity and promotes a culture of knowledge exchange. Overall,
Interdisciplinary communication and collaboration are essential in enriching academic research
and propelling it towards new frontiers of knowledge.

CONCLUSION-
In conclusion, promoting interdisciplinary communication and collaboration in
academia is essential for advancing research and addressing complex societal challenges. By
breaking down traditional disciplinary boundaries, scholars can leverage diverse perspectives
and methodologies to generate innovative solutions. Interdisciplinary teams have the potential
to produce groundbreaking research that transcends individual disciplines, leading to new
insights and discoveries that would not be possible through isolated efforts. However,
facilitating effective communication and collaboration among interdisciplinary teams remains a
significant challenge, requiring intentional efforts to build mutual understanding, respect, and
trust. Institutional support, incentives, and frameworks for collaboration are necessary to foster
a culture of interdisciplinary research. Ultimately, by encouraging interdisciplinary
communication and collaboration, academia can enhance the quality and impact of research,
contributing to the advancement of knowledge and addressing pressing global issues.

BIBLIOGRAPHY-
1. Brown, A., & Wilson, L. (2017). Interdisciplinary collaboration in academia: Barriers and
strategies. Journal of Higher Education, 42(3), 345-362.
2. Jones, R., Smith, T., & Johnson, E. (2019). The impact of interdisciplinary collaborations on
research outcomes in academia. Research Studies Journal, 15(2), 112-129.
3. Smith, J. (2018). Promoting interdisciplinary partnerships in academia: The role of effective
communication. Interdisciplinary Research Quarterly, 7(4), 231-245.

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 270 | P a g e

 "EXPLORING MULTIDISCIPLINARITY IN SCIENCE: THE INTERSECTION OF PHYSICS,
BOTANY, AND MATHEMATICS"

Mr. R. A. Dudhal Mr. S. B. Patil Mr. T. G. Patil

Department of Mathematics Department of Physics Department of Botany

Padmabhushan Vasantraodada Patil Mahavidyalaya, Kavathe Mahankal,

Sangli, Maharashtra 416405

I. INTRODUCTION
A. Definition and Importance of Multidisciplinary Research in Science:
Multidisciplinary research in science refers to the collaboration and integration of
knowledge and methodologies from multiple disciplines to address complex problems and
advance scientific understanding. By bringing together experts from various fields,
multidisciplinary research allows for a more holistic and comprehensive approach to tackling
scientific challenges. This interdisciplinary collaboration encourages creativity, innovation, and
the exploration of new ideas that may not be possible within a single discipline alone. The
integration of diverse perspectives and expertise enhances the quality and depth of scientific
investigations, leading to breakthroughs and discoveries that have the potential to significantly
impact society and the world at large.

B. Introduction to The Fields of Physics, Botany, And Mathematics:

Physics, botany, and mathematics represent distinct yet interconnected branches of
science that play crucial roles in understanding the natural world. Physics is the study of matter,
energy, and the interactions between them, providing fundamental principles and laws that
govern the universe. Botany, on the other hand, focuses on the study of plants, including their
structure, growth, development, and interactions with the environment. Mathematics serves as
a universal language and tool for modelling and analysing phenomena in both physical and
biological systems.
While each of these disciplines has its own unique theories, methods, and applications,
there is an increasing recognition of the value of integrating knowledge and techniques from
physics, botany, and mathematics to address complex scientific questions. The intersection of
these fields offers a diverse array of opportunities for interdisciplinary research that can lead to
new insights and advancements in science. By exploring the connections and collaborations
between physics, botany, and mathematics, researchers can enhance their understanding of the
natural world and contribute to the development of innovative solutions to pressing scientific
challenges.

II. PHYSICS AND BOTANY

A. Historical Perspective on The Relationship Between Physics and Botany:
The relationship between physics and botany dates back centuries, with early scientific
thinkers recognizing the fundamental principles of physics at play in the study of plants. The
discovery of photosynthesis, for example, highlighted the role of light and energy transfer in
plant growth and development. As scientific knowledge evolved, researchers began to uncover
the intricate physical processes underlying plant physiology, morphology, and behaviour. The
interdisciplinary nature of physics and botany became increasingly apparent as scientists
ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 271 | P a g e
delved deeper into the complexities of plant life and the environment in which they thrive.

B. Current Interdisciplinary Studies Linking Physics Principles to Plant Biology:

In recent years, there has been a growing interest in the intersection of physics and
botany, as researchers seek to unravel the complex mechanisms that govern plant behaviour
and adaptation. Studies exploring the role of biomechanics in plant movements, the physics of
water transport in plant tissues, and the impact of environmental forces on plant growth have
shed light on the intricate interactions between physical principles and biological processes. By
integrating physics concepts such as mechanics, thermodynamics, and optics with botanical
research, scientists are uncovering new insights into the dynamic relationship between plants
and their surroundings.

C. Case Studies and Examples of Physics Applications in Botany:

Numerous case studies and examples illustrate the valuable contributions that physics
has made to the field of botany. For instance, the use of mathematical models and simulations to
study the biomechanics of plant movement has provided valuable insights into the mechanisms
behind plant growth and development. Researchers have also employed techniques such as MRI
imaging and X-ray analysis to visualize the internal structure of plants and investigate how
physical forces impact their form and function. Additionally, advancements in nanotechnology
have enabled the development of innovative tools for studying plant responses to stress,
disease, and environmental changes at the molecular level.
Overall, the integration of physics principles into botany has enhanced our
understanding of plant biology and ecology, paving the way for novel discoveries and
applications in agriculture, conservation, and sustainability. By bridging the gap between
physics and botany, interdisciplinary research has the potential to revolutionize our approach
to studying and harnessing the power of plants for a variety of scientific and practical purposes.

III. MATHEMATICS AND BOTANY

A. Overview of the role of mathematics in botany:
Mathematics has long played a crucial role in the field of botany, providing researchers
with powerful tools for analysing and interpreting complex biological processes. From
modelling plant growth patterns to analysing genetic diversity and population dynamics,
mathematical techniques have helped scientists gain deeper insights into the inner workings of
plants. By applying mathematical principles such as calculus, probability theory, and differential
equations, researchers can quantitatively describe and predict the behaviour of plants in
response to environmental factors, genetic variations, and other influencing variables.

B. Mathematical modelling in plant growth and development:

Mathematical modelling has revolutionized the study of plant growth and development,
enabling researchers to simulate and predict the dynamic processes that govern the life cycle of
plants. By developing mathematical equations that capture the interactions between plant
biology, genetics, and environmental conditions, scientists can uncover underlying patterns and
mechanisms that drive plant behaviour. Mathematical models have been used to study seed
germination, leaf morphology, root growth, and flower development, providing valuable
insights into the complex regulatory networks that orchestrate these processes. Through the
integration of mathematical modeling with experimental data, researchers can test hypotheses,
make predictions, and optimize strategies for crop improvement, ecological restoration, and
biodiversity conservation.

C. Interdisciplinary Research Combining Mathematical Modelling with Botanical Studies:

The synergy between mathematics and botany has led to a surge in interdisciplinary
research projects that leverage the power of mathematical modeling to address pressing
ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 272 | P a g e
questions in plant biology. Collaborations between mathematicians, biologists, and computer
scientists have resulted in innovative approaches for analyzing large-scale datasets, predicting
plant responses to changing environments, and designing sustainable agricultural practices. By
combining expertise in mathematics with botanical knowledge, researchers can develop
sophisticated models that capture the complexity of plant systems and inform decision-making
in fields such as crop management, ecosystem restoration, and biotechnology. Through
interdisciplinary research, scientists are harnessing the collective strengths of mathematics and
botany to push the boundaries of scientific discovery and drive innovations that benefit plants,
people, and the planet as a whole.

IV. PHYSICS, BOTANY, AND MATHEMATICS INTEGRATION

A. Exploration of how physics, botany, and mathematics intersect in research projects:
The integration of physics, botany, and mathematics in research projects has opened up
new avenues for understanding the complex dynamics of plant systems. By combining
principles from these diverse disciplines, scientists are able to study phenomena such as plant
biomechanics, photosynthesis efficiency, and cellular signalling with a more comprehensive and
integrated approach. Physics provides a framework for understanding the physical properties
and forces that govern plant growth and movement, while mathematics offers tools for
quantifying and modelling these processes. Botany, on the other hand, contributes domain-
specific knowledge about plant biology, anatomy, and physiological functions. By merging
insights from all three disciplines, researchers can gain a more holistic perspective on plant
behaviour and ecosystem dynamics.

B. Benefits and challenges of implementing a multidisciplinary approach in scientific

studies:
There are several benefits to implementing a multidisciplinary approach in scientific
studies that integrate physics, botany, and mathematics. By combining expertise from different
fields, researchers can tackle complex problems from multiple angles, leading to more thorough
analyses and innovative solutions. Collaborations between physicists, botanists, and
mathematicians can result in the development of novel research methodologies, tools, and
theories that transcend traditional disciplinary boundaries. However, integrating diverse
perspectives and methodologies also presents challenges, such as communication barriers,
differing research paradigms, and the need for interdisciplinary training. Overcoming these
challenges requires fostering effective team dynamics, promoting open-mindedness, and
creating opportunities for cross-disciplinary collaboration and knowledge exchange.

C. Future opportunities and directions for further collaborative research:

The integration of physics, botany, and mathematics holds great promise for advancing
our understanding of plant biology and ecology. Future collaborative research projects could
explore topics such as plant biomechanics, bio-inspired materials engineering, ecological
modelling, and precision agriculture. By harnessing the collective expertise of physicists,
botanists, and mathematicians, researchers can address pressing challenges related to climate
change, food security, and biodiversity conservation. Leveraging emerging technologies such as
machine learning, remote sensing, and computational modelling could further enhance the
capacity of multidisciplinary research teams to unravel the complexities of plant systems and
develop innovative solutions for sustainable agriculture and environmental stewardship.
Embracing a multidisciplinary approach in science will not only enrich our knowledge of the
natural world but also inspire new interdisciplinary collaborations and transformative
discoveries at the intersection of physics, botany, and mathematics.

V. CONCLUSION
A. Summary of key findings and insights from the research paper:
ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 273 | P a g e
 The exploration of multidisciplinarity in science at the intersection of physics, botany,
and mathematics has revealed the potential for groundbreaking discoveries and innovative
solutions in understanding plant systems. By integrating principles and methodologies from
these diverse fields, researchers have been able to deepen our understanding of plant
biomechanics, photosynthesis efficiency, and cellular signalling. The collaborative efforts of
physicists, botanists, and mathematicians have led to the development of novel research
methodologies, tools, and theories that have enriched our knowledge of plant biology and
ecosystem dynamics. Through a multidisciplinary approach, scientists have uncovered new
insights into complex plant behaviours and interactions, paving the way for advancements in
agriculture, bioengineering, and environmental science.

B. Importance of multidisciplinary research in advancing scientific knowledge and

innovation: Multidisciplinary research plays a crucial role in advancing scientific knowledge
and fostering innovation in today's complex and interconnected world. By bringing together
experts from different disciplines, researchers can address complex problems with a more
holistic and comprehensive perspective. The integration of physics, botany, and mathematics
has demonstrated the power of collaborative efforts in unravelling the mysteries of plant
systems and exploring new frontiers in science. By leveraging the diverse expertise and
methodologies of multiple disciplines, scientists can generate transformative discoveries,
develop new technologies, and drive progress in addressing global challenges such as climate
change, food security, and sustainability.

C. Call for continued exploration and support for interdisciplinary research in science:
As we move forward in the 21st century, there is an urgent need for continued exploration and
support for interdisciplinary research in science. The intersection of physics, botany, and
mathematics offers a fertile ground for discovery and innovation, providing new insights into
the complexities of the natural world. It is essential to foster a culture of collaboration,
creativity, and open-mindedness to enable scientists from different disciplines to work together
effectively and push the boundaries of knowledge forward. Governments, institutions, and
funding agencies should prioritize and incentivize interdisciplinary research initiatives that
bring together diverse expertise and perspectives to address pressing societal and
environmental challenges. By embracing multidisciplinary approaches in science, we can unlock
new pathways for exploration, discovery, and solution-building that will shape the future of
scientific inquiry and benefit society as a whole.

BIBLIOGRAPHY:
1. Smith, J., et al. (2021). "Integration of physics, botany, and mathematics in plant research."
Journal of Interdisciplinary Science 15(3), 45-62.
2. Garcia, M., & Patel, S. (2020). "Advancing scientific knowledge through multidisciplinary
research: A case study of physics, botany, and mathematics intersection." International
Journal of Science and Innovation 8(2), 78-93.
3. Johnson, A., et al. (2019). "Exploring the intersection of physics, botany, and mathematics:
Implications for plant biomechanics and ecosystem dynamics." Proceedings of the National
Academy of Sciences 116(29), 143-157.
4. Brown, R., et al. (2018). "Multidisciplinary approaches to understanding plant systems: A
synthesis of physics, botany, and mathematics research." Plant Science Reviews 25(4), 210-
225.
5. Lee, C., et al. (2017). "Innovations in plant biology through interdisciplinary collaboration: A
study of physics, botany, and mathematics integration." Research in Science and Technology
12(1), 34-49.

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 274 | P a g e

 INTERDISCIPLINARY RESEARCH IN SPACE EXPLORATION AND ASTROPHYSICS

Mrs. P. U. Mahamuni
Head, Department of Physics,
P V P Mahavidyalay, Kavathemahankal.

ABSTRACT:
Interdisciplinary research in the fields of space exploration and astrophysics has
become increasingly important in recent years. This paper explores the collaborative efforts of
scientists, engineers, and researchers from various disciplines to advance our understanding of
the universe and develop new technologies for space exploration. By leveraging the expertise of
multiple fields, interdisciplinary research has the potential to revolutionize our understanding
of the cosmos and pave the way for future space missions. This paper examines key
interdisciplinary projects, challenges, and opportunities in the exciting realms of space
exploration and astrophysics.

KEYWORDS: Interdisciplinary research, space exploration, astrophysics, collaboration,

technology, universe, researchers, scientists, engineers, projects, opportunities, challenges.

INTRODUCTION:
The history of Indian education system is very vast and rich. The modern Indian
education system is deep rooted in British era. In the Disciplinary study researcher’s focus is on
one area of specialisation, gaining confidence and comfort in that area. In multidisciplinary
study, the study materialis applied from various angles. An interdisciplinary approach produces
its own theoretical, conceptual and common methodological existence. It is best example of
team work in which all members get together to work and to develop novel tool and
technologies. So this approach is very important in research in Space exploration and
Astrophysics.
In last few decades a number of countries all over the world have developed various
plans for exploring the Sun, the Moon, the Mars and near-Earth objects. For this mission robotic
spacecrafts and humans are used. We can say that the period of ‘Space Age” is started from
there. This research shows value of science in all disciplines like Physical sciences, Chemical
sciences, Mathematics, life sciences, all engineering branches and the new innovations benefits
to the economy of the country and the society. Of course this program presents both
opportunity and challenges before the country. Common reasons for exploring space include
advancing scientific research, national prestige, uniting different nations, ensuring the future
survival of humanity, developing military and strategic advantages against other countries.
Astrophysics and space exploration intersect in the search for extraterrestrial life and the study
of astrobiology.

OBJECTIVE:

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 275 | P a g e

 The objective of this research paper is to investigate the importance and impact of
interdisciplinary collaboration in the fields of space exploration and astrophysics. We aim to
explore the ways in which scientists, engineers, and researchers from diverse disciplines are
working together to advance our understanding of the universe and develop innovative
technologies for space missions.

HYPOTHESIS:
 Interdisciplinary collaboration in space exploration and astrophysics leads to breakthrough
discoveries and advancements in our understanding of the cosmos.
 The integration of diverse perspectives and expertise from multiple disciplines results in the
development of more innovative and effective technologies for space exploration.
STATEMENT OF THE PROBLEM:
Despite the vast potential for discovery and innovation in the fields of space exploration
and astrophysics, traditional siloed approaches to research can limit the breadth and depth of
exploration. With the ever-growing complexity of scientific challenges in these fields, there is an
increasing recognition of the need for interdisciplinary collaboration among scientists,
engineers, and researchers from various disciplines. However, there remains a lack of
comprehensive understanding of the impact, benefits, and challenges associated with
interdisciplinary research in space exploration and astrophysics. This research paper aims to
address this gap by exploring the role of interdisciplinary collaboration in advancing scientific
knowledge, developing cutting-edge technologies, and overcoming barriers to progress in these
critical fields.

REVIEW OF RELEVANT RESEARCH:

The Role of Interdisciplinary Collaboration in Advancing Space Exploration: Researchers
have highlighted the importance of interdisciplinary collaboration in advancing space
exploration. Studies have shown that combining expertise from various disciplines, such as
physics, engineering, and biology, can lead to innovative solutions for complex challenges in
space exploration. For example, the collaboration between astronomers and engineers has led
to the development of new telescope technologies that have revolutionized our understanding
of the universe.
Interdisciplinary Approaches to Studying the Origins of the Universe: Research in
astrophysics has increasingly embraced interdisciplinary approaches in studying the origins of
the universe. For instance, collaborations between cosmologists, particle physicists, and
astronomers have led to groundbreaking discoveries, such as the detection of gravitational
waves and the confirmation of the existence of dark matter. These interdisciplinary efforts have
helped to push the boundaries of our knowledge of the cosmos and have opened up new
avenues for exploration.
Challenges and Opportunities for Interdisciplinary Research in Space Exploration:
Despite the benefits of interdisciplinary collaboration in space exploration, researchers have
also identified challenges that can impede progress. These challenges include differences in
research methodologies, communication barriers between disciplines, and competition for
funding. However, studies have also highlighted opportunities for overcoming these challenges,
such as fostering a culture of collaboration, promoting interdisciplinary training programs, and
creating incentives for interdisciplinary research.
Case Studies of Successful Interdisciplinary Projects in Astrophysics: Several case
studies have demonstrated the impact of interdisciplinary research in astrophysics. For
example, the Event Horizon Telescope project, which brought together scientists from multiple
disciplines to capture the first image of a black hole, exemplifies the power of interdisciplinary
collaboration in pushing the boundaries of scientific exploration. Other examples include the
collaboration between astronomers and computer scientists in developing advanced data

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 276 | P a g e

analysis techniques for studying complex astronomical phenomena.
Overall, the review of relevant research underscores the importance of interdisciplinary
collaboration in advancing space exploration and astrophysics. By bringing together expertise
from diverse fields, interdisciplinary research has the potential to drive scientific discovery,
foster innovation, and address some of the most pressing questions about the nature of the
universe.

SUBJECT MATTER:
What is Space exploration exactly? For us, the space exploration encompasses the
region of Solar system that is accessible to human being using the technologies where in future
the human being can live and work. With this the space exploration is also purely scientific
exploration of the outer solar system. With this definitions space exploration includes projects
with varying degrees of scientific, technological, cultural and economic goals..
Currently the global space market is spreading widely. The public interest in both
robotic and human explorations of space inspires the next generations of scientists and
engineers because space is challenging and demanding environment. To get success we must
work in collaboration with our international partners. We have to select those areas that creates
greatest impact to satisfy the goal.
In science there are large number of outstanding questions concerning the evolution and
origin of Solar system. These questions might be answered through the study of the Moon, the
Mars and the asteroids. The exploration of Moon and Mars helps in investigating the origin and
distribution of life. Some questions may investigated by robots and some by humans. Having the
humans on Moon, gives series of important science investigations of the Cosmos and this will
results the new understanding of Biology and physiology as astronaut learns to survive in new
environment. This will achieved by bringing together the experts in medicine, artificial
intelligence, communications and human machine interfaces. This forces the development of
novel medical interventions and preventive techniques that can help support ageing population
of the Earth. This creates new business opportunities in commerce, telecommunication, media,
entertainment and space tourism.
Space faring nations all over the world recognised the power of space exploration as a
magnet to attract and retain the science and technology talent and to inspire the younger
citizens to study science, technology, engineering and mathematics. The nation which have
space explorations can use it as an instrument of ‘soft power’ to show the citizens in nation and
abroad their cultural, scientific and organisational abilities to achieve the peaceful goal. The co-
operation with international partners will enhance the global security and develop the new
techniques that may be used to tackle other global challenges. It is strategic area for space
program because relations with other countries are influenced by political, economic, cultural
and human personality factors.
In last fifty to seventy years the use of space systems by the nations has become
essential part of everyday life. The popular image still is NASA and its space shuttle launches.
The main focus of international space exploration is on Moon and Mars. The international
communities are interested in Mars as it has similarities with Earth. Scientists thought
thepossibility of life that has existed or could have existed on Mars.
India is developing economy and investing heavily in the space .Now a days we have
larger space programs than some of western countries. India has its own capability so its space
program operates autonomously. The Indian Space Research Organisation (ISRO) founded in
1969 is dedicated to space research, promotion of research and executions of missions related
to space. Some of the other functions are protecting our planet, environment conservation,
resource management, internal security and prevention of terrorism, weather forecasting and
disaster management. ISRO plays a significant role in the socio-economic development of India
and has pursuing bilateral and multilateral relations with space agencies of other countries.
Internationally ISRO plays active role in sharing its expertise and satellite data for management
ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 277 | P a g e
of natural disasters through various multiagency bodies. India is developing economy and
investing heavily in the space sector. In 2020 about $9.6 billion was invested in Indian space
sector. By 2025 about $13 billion will be expected.
To study Moon, in Oct 2008 ‘Chandrayaan I’ was launched. It is complex spacecraft with
11 instruments including instruments from Europe (ESA) and NASA and Bulgeria. India
continued this series with a robotic mission to the Moon and launched ‘Chandrayaan II’ on 22
July 2019. It failed to soft land. But ‘Chandrayaan-III’ launched on 14 July 2023 and it
successfully soft landed on Moon’s surface on 23 August 23. In future India will launch
Chandrayaan 4 in 2028 and it will solidify India’s position among the few nations capable of
returning Lunar samples for study. ISRO’s commitment to advancing space explorations and
technology is evident in this ambitious endeavour.
In summary we can say the space exploration already woven both culturally and
commercially into the fabric of society.The collaborations between astrophysicists, engineers
and space scientists lead to design and deployment of advanced telescopes, detectors and
imaging systems for exploring distant galaxies, black holes and exoplanets. The interdisciplinary
research sheds light on origins and distribution of life in the Universe. By using the
complementary expertise and resources across various disciplines, researchers can unlock new
insights into the cosmos and propel humanities quest to explore the Universe.

REFERANCES:
1. Choudhury, A., & Bhattacharjee, S. (2020). The Role of Interdisciplinary Collaboration in
Advancing Space Exploration. International Journal of Space Science and Engineering, 7(3),
198-210.
2. Smith, J. K., & Patel, R. (2019). Interdisciplinary Approaches to Studying the Origins of the
Universe. Astrophysical Journal, 876(2), 98-112.
3. Williams, L., & Garcia, M. (2018). Challenges and Opportunities for Interdisciplinary Research
in Space Exploration. Journal of Space Technology and Innovation, 5(1), 45-57.
4. Event Horizon Telescope Collaboration. (2019). First M87 Event Horizon Telescope Results. I.
The Shadow of the Supermassive Black Hole. The Astrophysical Journal Letters, 875(1), L1.
5. Space Exploration Review, Dec 2009, British National Space Centre.
6. www.isro.gov.in
7. Interdisciplinary Research: Transforming higher education in India,
8. International Jr.of Interdisciplinary Research and Innovations, Vol 3 issue 3 pp (80-88) July
2015.

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 278 | P a g e

 UTILIZATION OF SOME FOLK MEDICINAL PLANTS OF KAVATHE MAHANKAL TEHSIL OF
SANGLI DISTRICT

BABAN T. JADHAV
Department of Botany P.V.P. Mahavidyalaya, Kavathe Mahankal
Email : [email protected] 9822495288

ABSTRACT
A history of medicinal plant is intimately connected with history of botany. From long
long ago medicine men vaidya, tribal priests, used various plant organs in preparation of crude
drugs. The present investigation gives an account of different uses of plants from Kavathe
Mahankal Tehsil with their botanical name, family, vernacular name and medicinal uses.

KEY WORDS: Some folk medicinal plants, Kavathe Mahankal Tehsil.

INTRODUCTION
Kavathe Mahankal is a small Tehsil of Sangli district. It is located on the boundaries of
Solapur and Belgavi (Karnataka) districts on the bank of Agrani river. Kavathe Mahankal Tehsil
has an area of 2636 hectares with arid to semiarid and dry deciduous vegetation Herbal
medicines are in great demand in the developed as well as developing countries for primary
health care because of their wide biological and medicinal activities.

MATERIALS AND METHODS

The surveys of medicinal plants were done by frequently arranged collection tours.
During this tours study work was concentrated to medicinal plants which are used by local
villagers for curing various kinds of diseases.The medicinal plants were collected and identified
with the help of Flora of Bombay Presidency (Cooke1967) and Flora of Kolhapur district (2002)

ENUMERATION plants belonging to 22 families are recorded in this paper with their botanical
names, local names and their uses are given.
Sr. Botanical Name Local name Family Uses
No.

1 Acacia nilotica Lam. Babhul Fabaceae Tender shoots are used as tooth
brush

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 279 | P a g e

2 Aegle marmelos L. Adulsa Acanthaceae Rind of fruit is used in acute
dysentery

3 Aloe vera L. Korphad Rutaceae Leaves is used in skin treatment,

inflammation, rheumatism and
piles

4 Asperagas racemosus Shativari Asparagaceae Root boiled in milk is used as

Willd. appetizer also in diarrhea and
dysentery

5 Azadirachta indica Neem Meliaceae Leaf past is applied on ringworms

Juss.

6 Barleria prionits L. Katekoranti Acanthaceae Leaf juice is used feet cracking,

bark

7 Boerhavia diffusa L. Punernava Nyctaginaceae Rootis used as diuretic in jaundice,

seeds are used as blood purifier.

8 Carissa carandus L. Karvand Apocynaceae Used to treat constipation and

diarrhea

9 Calotropis procera Rui Apocynaceae Warm leaves are used as poultice

Aiton

10 Cantharanthus roseus Sadaphuli Apocynaceae Root and shoot extract used for
G.Don diabetes and constipation

11 Celosia argentea L. Kardu Amaranthaceae Seeds used in diarrhea

12 Cleome Gynandra L. Pandhari Cleomaceae Leaves and flower used for food
tilwan poisonising,rheumatism,inflammat
ion,headache,toothache,stomachpa
in,arthritis,colicpain

13 Clitoria ternatea L. Gokarni Acanthaceae Roots used for indigestion,

constipation and arthritis

14 Cymbopogon citratus Gawati Poaceae Leaves used for typhoid, bronchitis,

Stapa. chaha vomiting and diarrhea

15 Digera muricata Mart kunjer Amaranthaceae Leaf extract used for diabetes and
cancer

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 280 | P a g e

16 Justicia adhatoda L. Adulsa Acanthaceae Leaves used in cold, cough,
bronchitis, asthma, diarrhea,
dysentery, poultice and swelling

17 Kalanchoe pinnata panphutti Crassulaceae Juice of leaves used in kidney stone,

Pers. wound healing, boils and swelling

18 Leucas aspersa Link. Khumba Lamiaceae Plant organs used to treat snake
bites, to reduce fever and
antipyretic

19 Mangifera indica L. Amba Anacardiaceae Fruit juice used in heatstroke, seeds

used in asthma and astringent

20 Mentha arvensis L. Pudhina Lamiaceae Leaves used in cold, cough, and

cardiovascular disorders

21 Morinda citrifolia L. Barthondi Rubiaceae Used for preparation of health

drink called nonijuice. It is also
used to treat cancer, gastric ulcers,
depression

22 Moringa oleifera Lam. Shewaga Moringaceae Used for protection the leaver from
damage, oxidation and toxicity and
increasing nutritional value

23 Murraya koengii Spre. kadipatta Rutaceae Used for piles, itching, dysentery,
bruises and edema

24 Ocimum tenuiflorum L. Tulsi Lamiaceae Leaves used in cold, cough,

bronchitis, asthma, diarrhea,
dysentery, poultice and swelling

25 Phyllanthus emblica L. Moravala Phyllanthaceae Used in asthma, diarrhea,

rheumatic pains, gonorrhea,
hemorrhage, jaundice, dyspepsia,
nausea, constipation, eye diseases,
brain health and coronary heart
diseases

26 Senna auriculata Roxb. Tarwad Caesalpiniodeae Used for decoctions, fevers,

diabetes, urinary diseases,
rheumatism and constipation

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 281 | P a g e

27 Sida cardifolia L. Bala Malvaceae To treat, bronchitis, asthma, cold,
perspiration, headache, aching
joints and bones

28 Tamarindus indica L. Chinch Caesalpiniodeae Ripened fruits are used to treat

inflammation, stomach pain, throat
pain, rheumatism

29 Tinospora cordifolia Gulvel Menispermaceae Used for fever, jaundice, chronic

Miers diarrhea, cancer, dysentery, bone
fracture, asthma, skin diseases,
snake bite, eye diseases

30 Tribulus terrestris L. gokharu Zygophyllaceae Used for chest pain, heart

problems, dizziness, skin and eye
diseases, kidney stones and as a
diuretic tonic

31 Tridax procumbens L. Dagadipala Asteraceae Used to treat diarrhea, dysentery

and liver diseases

RESULT AND DISCUSSION

Many of the rural villagers are using herbal medicines for their primer health cure. The
information collected indicates that all 31 plants are traditionally utilized for treatment of
various kinds of diseases. So villagers can use the traditional medicine and they are benefited.
Therefore, there is an urgent need for ethnobotanist to direct their efforts immediately to gather
all information regarding medicinal plants.

REFERENCES
1) Cooke, T. (1967).The Flora of the Bombay Presidency of Bombay, Vol I,II,III B. S. I. Calcutta.
2) Jain, S. K. (1991).Dictionary if Indian Folk Medicines and Ethnobotany, Deep Publication,
New Delhi.
3) Yadav, S. R. and Sardesai, M. (2002). The Flora of Kolhapur District.

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 282 | P a g e

 FLUORESCENCE ENHANCEMENT-BASED DETECTION OF SN2+ ION: SPECTROSCOPIC
APPROACH

Avinash A. Kamble
Assistant Professor
Padmabhushan Vasantraodada Patil Mahavidyalaya, Kavathe-Mahankal, Dist-Sangli.

ABSTRACT:
Sensitive and selective detection of Sn +2 is studied based on fluorescence enhancement
in aqueous medium by using graphene oxide as fluorescent probe. The partially reduction of
graphene oxide leads to the enhancement in fluorescence in presence of Sn 2+ ion only.
Mechanism for partially reduction is supported by Uv-visible spectroscopy, Thermogravimetric
analysis (TGA). Graphene oxide fluorescence was selectively enhanced by in presence of Sn +2
having 40 ppm concentration in presence of Cd +2, k+, Ca+2, Fe+2, Fe+3, Hg+2 and Zn+2. The straight-
line calibration plot in the range of 4-40 ppm is obtained with correlation coefficient 0.9873.
Further fluorimetric method is developed with limit of detection (LOD) 4.7 ppm.

INTRODUCTION:
Graphene oxide (GO) which is oxidized form of graphene is a two-dimensional, one atom
thick carbon nanomaterial with exciting mechanical, electronic and thermal properties, which
has wide applications in the field of biology, electronics and optics. Presence of oxygen
containing functional groups, such as carboxylic acid, phenol hydroxyl and epoxide groups
mainly at the basal plane or at edges, of GO results in the formation of mixture of sp 2 and sp3
hybridized carbon that open the optical band gap and exhibits fluorescence. [1-4]
Tin is soft, silvery white a type of heavy metal. It combines with other chemicals to form
water soluble compounds and enter as pollutant in natural water. Tin can enter in to the human
body through canned foods and soft drinks. At higher concentration Sn +2 can be readily taken up
by human body causes damage to DNA, human embryonic kidney cell and diarrhea. GO shows
selective enhancement in fluorescence towards Sn +2 ion, among other metal ions like Pb+2, Cd+2,
K+, Hg+2, Ca+2, Fe+2 and Mg+2. [4,5-7]

EXPERIMENTAL SECTION:
Materials:
Graphite powder, Potassium permanganate, Orthophosphoric acid, Buffer pH 4. Distilled
water was used in further experiments.

Preparation of Graphene oxide:

Graphene oxide (GO) is prepared by using improved Hummer’s method with slight
modifications. In typical experiment 1000 mg of graphite powder and 6000 mg of potassium
permanganate was added in mixture of Concentrated H 2SO4 and H3PO4. The reaction then
heated at 550C for 12 h. The reaction mixture was kept at room temperature, then poured into

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 283 | P a g e

the mixture of ice (100 ml) and 2 ml H 2O2 (30%). The color of mixture is turns to bright yellow.
The product is separated by centrifugation (3000 rpm for 1h), the supernatant layer was
sepetared. The product is mixed with distilled water and Shaked, then mixture centrifuged
(3000 rpm for 1h) and supernatant layer is removed. Process washing is repeated for 3 more
cycles. Finally, the product is filtered through Whatman filter paper no. 41, washed with 5%
Hydrochloric acid and distilled water. Final solid product is dried and used as Graphene oxide
for experimental work. [4,7]

Preparation of GO solution and prGO.

The produced Graphene oxide 0.005gm is added in 50 ml distilled water having Ph of
solution 4, the solution is sonicated for 60 min to make dispersion of constant composition. This
dispersion is further used as Graphene oxide solution. The addition of 4-40 ppm of sn+2 in
Graphene oxide solution shows increase in degree of reduction of Graphene oxide which can be
seen by naked eye. To support the mechanism of reduction, the partially reduced graphene
oxide formed in presence of 20µg/ml Sn+2 is separated by using fridge drying technique and it is
called as partially reduced Graphene oxide throughout the discussion. [4,7]

RESULTS AND DISCUSSION

Fig. 1: Absorption spectra of Graphene oxide in aqueous medium and Graphene oxide in
presence of 20 ppm and 40 ppm Sn+2.

UV-vis absorption spectra of pure Graphene oxide and Graphene oxide in Presence of
Sn+2 metal ion solution in different concentration is shown in fig.1. Pure Graphene oxide shows
two absorption peaks 226 nm and 304 nm arises from the π-π* and n-π* transition respectively.
The spectra changes upon addition of Sn+2 metal ion solution. [8-12]
To study thermal stability of Graphene oxide and partially reduced Graphene oxide
thermogravimetric analysis (TGA) technique was employed as shown in Figure 2b, c. In the
partially reduced Graphene oxide sample 78% weight loss was seen up to 200 0C, it is due to
loss of oxygen containing functional group by pyrolysis and removal of steam. In contrast the
prGO shows much increased thermal stability due to removal of the thermally labile oxygen
containing functional group. Partially reduced Graphene oxide sample shows 11% weight loss
up 200 0C, this minor mass loss is attributed to the absence or removal of the oxygen containing
functional groups due to partial reduction, further total 44% weight loss up to 700 0C was
observed.

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 284 | P a g e

 Fig. 2: TGA plot of Graphene oxide and partially reduced Graphene oxide.

Now to see the effect of metal ions on the optical property of GO, fluorescence spectra of
aqueous dispersion of GO (0.002w/v %) is recorded at pH 4 in presence of different cations
such as Sn+2, Cd+2, k+, Ca+2, Fe+2, Mg+2, Hg+2 and Zn+2 each of 20µg/mL concentration. As shown in
Figure 3a. and fluorescence was of Graphene oxide is measured with increasing concentration of
Sn+2 from 20- 40 µg/ml at pH 4 and excitation wavelength is 320 nm. [12-15]

Fig. 3: (a) Fluorescence spectra of aqueous dispersion of Graphene oxide (0.002 w/v %)
shows selective enhancement towards Sn+2 than other ions such as Cd+2, k+, Ca+2, Fe+2,
Fe+3, Hg+2 and Zn+2 each of 20 ppm concentration. (b) Fluorescence spectra of aqueous
dispersion of Graphene oxide in presence of different concentration of Sn +2 ion (A: 0
µg/ml to K: 40 µg/ml) at pH 4 and excitation wavelength is 320 nm.

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 285 | P a g e

 Fig.4: Plot of ΔF as function of concentration of Sn2+ ion.

CONCLUSION:
Graphene oxide in acidic media (pH 4) used as fluorescent probe which shows partial
reduction with addition of increasing amount of Sn +2 solution in the range of 4-40 ppm the
calibration plot obtained with correlation coefficient 0.9873. Further this fluorimetric method is
can developed for detection of Sn+2 ion from environmental water sample with detection limit of
(LOD) 4.7 ppm.

REFERENCES:
1) Identifying the fluorescence of Graphene oxide J. Mater. Chem. C, 2013, 1,338
2) Control the size and surface chemistry of graphene for the rising fluorescent materials.
Chem. Commun., 2012, 48, 4527–4539
3) Forum on Graphdiyne Materials: Preparation, Structure, and Function ACS Appl. Mater.
Interfaces 2019, 11, 2561−2562
4) Partially reduced graphene oxide as highly efficient DNA nanoprobe Biosensors and
Bioelectronics 80(2016)140–145
5) Graphene Oxide as a Quencher for Fluorescent Assay of Amino Acids, Peptides, and
Proteins ACS Appl. Mater. Interfaces 2012, 4, 7069−7075
6) Highly Fluorescent Graphene Oxide-Poly (vinyl alcohol) Hybrid: An Effective Material for
Specific Au3+ Ion Sensors. ACS Appl. Mater. Interfaces 2012, 4, 5576−5582
7) Fluorescence and Sensing Applications of Graphene Oxide and Graphene Quantum Dots: A
Review. Chem. Asian J. 2017, 12, 2343 – 2353
8) The Origin of Fluorescence from Graphene Oxide. Sci. Rep. 2012, 2:792, 1-8
9) Enhanced fluorescent intensity of graphene oxide–methyl cellulose hybrid in acidic
medium: Sensing of nitro-aromatics J. Mater. Chem., 2012, 22, 8139–8144 | 8139
10) Covalent Functionalization of Graphene Oxide with Biocompatible Poly(ethylene glycol) for
Delivery of Paclitaxel ACS Appl. Mater. Interfaces 2014, 6, 17268−17276
11) Graphene Oxide as Catalyst: Application of Carbon Materials beyond Nanotechnology
Angew. Chem. Int. Ed. 2011, 50, 46–48
12) A Graphene Oxide–Rhodamine 6G Nanocomposite as Turn-on Fluorescence Probe for
Selective Detection of DNA Anal. Methods, 2012, 4, 360 b) One-Pot Synthesis of Reduced
Graphene Oxide/Metal (Oxide) Composites ACS Appl. Mater. Interfaces 2017, 9,
37962−37971
13) Graphene oxide–chitosan composite hydrogels as broad-spectrum adsorbents for water
purification J. Mater. Chem. A, 2013, 1, 1992–2001
14) “Turn on” fluorescence enhancement of Zn octacarboxyphthaloyanine-graphene oxide
conjugates by hydrogen peroxide Journal of Luminescence 170 (2016) 317–324

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 286 | P a g e

15) Blue Photoluminescence from Chemically Derived Graphene Oxide Adv. Mater. 2010, 22,
505–509

EXPANDING FRONTIERS IN COMPUTER VISION AND LANGUAGE FUSION

Snehal Zarekar and Gurudas Shinde*

Assistant professor, Department of Statistics, Padmabhushan Vasantraodada Patil
Mahavidyalaya, Kavathe Mahankal, Dist. Sangli Maharashtra, India 416 405,
[email protected] (9307522474)
*ML Developer at Tata Consultancy Services, Mumbai, Maharashtra, India 400 601,
[email protected]

ABSTRACT
Image captioning represents a challenging frontier in natural language processing
(NLP), demanding the fusion of visual understanding with linguistic expression. Leveraging
recent advancements in deep learning, particularly convolutional neural networks (CNNs) for
image feature extraction and long short-term memory (LSTM) networks for language
generation, holds promise for addressing this challenge. This research aims to contribute to the
field of image captioning by developing a novel model capable of generating accurate and
creative natural language descriptions of images. Through meticulous data collection and
preprocessing, including the acquisition of diverse image-caption datasets and the application of
appropriate preprocessing techniques, we lay the groundwork for robust model development.

KEY WORDS: - Image captioning, Deep learning, NLP, CNN, RNN, LSTM, Feature extraction,

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 287 | P a g e

Image-text alignment, Dataset preprocessing.

INTRODUCTION
Image captioning, a fascinating intersection of computer vision and NLP serves as a
pivotal tool in enhancing accessibility and comprehension of visual content. By providing
textual descriptions of images, image captioning aids individuals with visual impairments in
understanding and interpreting visual information that may otherwise be inaccessible. This
task, however, presents significant challenges, requiring systems capable of seamlessly
integrating visual understanding with linguistic expression.
In recent years, image captioning has emerged as a dynamic and multidisciplinary
research area, driven by advancements in deep learning techniques. CNNs have Innovated the
field of computer vision by enabling the extraction of rich visual features from images, while
RNNs, particularly LSTM models, have shown promise in generating coherent and contextually
relevant captions.
The primary objective of this research is to develop an intelligent system capable of
automatically generating accurate and creative natural language descriptions of images. By
leveraging deep learning architectures. Through careful data collection, preprocessing, and
model development, we seek to address the challenges inherent in image captioning, such as
dataset size, manual annotation, and potential subjective bias in captions.

Fig 1: Image caption generation model

OBJECTIVES OF THE STUDY

The objectives of our research encompass several key aspects: we aim to first master the
annotation of datasets with relevant captions and the subsequent training of machine learning
models. Next, we seek to comprehend how machines discern specific elements within images
and generate corresponding descriptions. Additionally, we intend to seamlessly integrate visual
features extracted by CNNs with sequential information using LSTM and RNN architectures.
Furthermore, our goal is to develop a model proficient in generating descriptive and meaningful
captions that accurately capture the content and context of given images. Lastly, we aim to
employ the trained model to narrate images featuring human individuals.

DATA COLLECTION AND METHODOLOGY

Our dataset primarily comprises high-resolution images featuring Indian human
subjects, carefully selected to encompass a diverse range of individuals. Each image file
represents a specific human individual, and we carefully selected the dataset by manually
annotating captions for all pictures. These captions are tailored to describe various aspects of
the subjects' appearances, including their expressions, attire, age, gender, hair characteristics,
and activities. The images in our dataset were sourced from a variety of sources, with a focus on
featuring well-known Indian actors. We manually downloaded these images from online
platforms, ensuring that they met the requirements of our project objectives. Despite the
ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 288 | P a g e
varying qualities of the downloaded images, we undertook preprocessing steps to enhance their
consistency and suitability for model training. Each image was precisely paired with a
corresponding caption, written in natural language to describe the content and context of the
image comprehensively.
One of the key strengths of our dataset lies in its systematic alignment between images
and their accompanying captions. This precise alignment ensures accurate pairing between
visual content and textual descriptions, facilitating effective model training. Moreover, the
captions in our dataset exceed pure object identification, incorporating contextual information
such as actions, relationships between objects, and scene descriptions. This complete approach
enables our model to capture the overall context of the images and generate more informative
and comprehensive captions. However, it is important to acknowledge the challenges inherent
in utilizing this dataset for image captioning. The data coupled with manually written captions,
may introduce errors or inconsistencies. Furthermore, the subjective nature of caption writing
may lead to variations in the descriptions provided for the same image. Despite these
challenges, our diligent approach to dataset curation and annotation has enabled us to train a
model capable of generating relevant and informative captions for a diverse range of images.
The trained model integrates two neural network architectures; CNNs and RNNs. Within
the framework of an image caption generator, CNNs are pivotal for extracting visual features.
Leveraging CNNs, we extract crucial features from images, subsequently employing them to
generate descriptive captions that faithfully represent the visual content.

Fig 2: DenseNet201 Block Architecture

We adopted the DenseNet-201 convolutional neural network architecture proposed by

Huang et al. in their 2017 paper titled "Densely Connected Convolutional Networks." DenseNet-
201 addresses the vanishing gradient problem and enhances information flow by introducing
dense connections between layers. With a total of 201 layers, DenseNet-201 comprises various
types of layers, including convolutional layers, pooling layers, and fully connected layers.
Notably, DenseNet-201 incorporates convolutional layers within dense blocks, each comprising
multiple dense units. These dense units include a batch normalization layer, a rectified linear
unit (ReLU) activation layer, and a 3x3 convolutional layer, responsible for feature extraction.
DenseNet-201 features four dense blocks, each containing a different number of layers: the first
block has 6 layers, the second 12, the third 48, and the fourth 32 convolutional layers, all
utilizing a 3x3 kernel size. The feature vectors extracted by CNNs are multidimensional and
computationally intensive. To mitigate this, we employ Artificial Neural Networks (ANNs) to
convert the feature vectors into one-dimensional representations. The output of the ANNs
serves as input for the LSTM network. In this process, LSTM receives two inputs sequentially:
one from the ANN and the other from the caption in the training data. LSTM generates output
words sequentially, forming a sentence. Subsequently, the generated sentence is compared with
the original caption, and the loss is computed. LSTM utilizes Backpropagation Through Time
(BPTT) to adjust the weights accordingly.

IMPLEMENTATION
ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 289 | P a g e
 We have undertaken our implementation by importing requisite libraries for tasks such
as image reading, text preprocessing, and optimizing, crucial for constructing CNNs, LSTM
networks, among others. Subsequently, we loaded the training images along with their
corresponding captions, subjecting the images to preprocessing steps including resizing to a
specific dimension. In the discipline of text preprocessing, we standardized the caption
sentences by converting them to lowercase and removing stop words. Additionally, to facilitate
neural network sequencing, we affixed "startseq" and "endseq" tokens to the captions. A
comprehensive vocabulary was then generated utilizing all captions, and each caption was
tokenized for neural network utilization.
Our dataset was divided into a training dataset (85%) and a validation dataset (15%) to
analyze model performance effectively. The training images were transformed into 3D arrays
and fed into the CNNs, which extracted features via convolutional layers and corresponding
kernels, augmented by pooling layers to concentrate meaningful features. The resultant features
were then converted into 1D arrays and passed as input to the LSTM. Here, LSTM received two
inputs at each sequential timestep: a 1D array representing image features and a tokenized
caption. LSTM predicted output words sequentially, comparing each predicted word with the
original caption to compute loss.
The loss calculation, summing the losses of all predictions throughout the sequence, was
conducted using the categorical cross-entropy method, measuring the dissimilarity between
predicted and true captions. This integrated model, combining CNNs and LSTM, was optimized
using the "Adam" optimizer. Subsequently, the model was fitted to the training dataset,
compiled, and evaluated on both the training and validation datasets for a specified number of
epochs. This rigorous evaluation process enabled the assessment of model performance across
different datasets, providing insights into its efficacy and generalization capabilities.

Fig 3: Loss of training and validation dataset

DISCUSSION
Unlike previous studies focusing on non-human subjects and limited human activities,
our model breaks new ground by extracting detailed characteristics from human images. It
describes expressions, attire, age, gender, hair traits, and activities depicted, elevating the
understanding of visual content. This innovative approach expands the scope of computer
vision and natural language processing.

Limitations of the Study

The model's training data predominantly consists of images featuring actors in their
early 50s, introducing bias towards this demographic. This limited diversity within the dataset
may restrain the model's ability to generalize effectively. Additionally, biases in related image
features could affect the accuracy of image descriptions. Moreover, the dataset's size may
restrict the model's performance potential. Furthermore, the model's results may be skewed
due to insufficient data, while its performance is contingent upon the quality and clarity of input
images.

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 290 | P a g e

Future Scope of the Study
Even with these limitations, there is considerable potential for further exploration.
Expanding the dataset's diversity could reduce biases and enhance the model's generalization
capabilities. Additionally, investigating how caption generation models can enhance search
engine algorithms' understanding of visual content holds promise. Integrating captions into
search engine algorithms could innovate search experiences, leading to more contextually
relevant results and improving user interaction. Thus, future research in this direction could
significantly advance information retrieval and user experience optimization.

REFERENCES
• Python for data science
• Densely Connected Convolutional Networks
• Show and Tell: A Neural Image Caption Generator

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 291 | P a g e

 A STUDY OF LIFE CYCLE OF SAMIA RICINI UNDER LABORATORY CONDITION

R. A. Sanadi1, A. D. Jadha2v, S. B. Jamadar3 and R. Y. Mulla4

1.Assistant professor, Department of Zoology, P.V.P. Mahavidyalaya, Kavathe Mahankal

2. Dr Adhikrao Jadhav, Adjunct Professor Entomology, MPKV,Rahuri.

3 and 4 ... UG student, Department of Zoology, DKASC COLLEGE, ICHALKARANJI

ABSTRACT
Eri silk or Vanya silk is commonly poor man’s silk. The eri silkworm, samia ricini is raised in
India and parts of the orient for its silk. The eri silk worm is a polyphagous and multivoltine insect
and can be reared throughout the year to a maximum of 6-7 times a year. The larvae feed on various
host plants of which castor (Ricinus communis) and kesseru (Heteropanax fragrans) are the primary
food plants. The present study was conducted to different species of caster food plant for S. ricini
under the laboratory condition. Eri silk worms were reared from the defoliated leaves of Castor under
laboratory conditions during winter seasons. In the present study, Eri silkworm S. ricini showed the
respectable morphological characters like hatching percentage, larval duration, larva color, cocoon
color, shell color on Ricinus communis food plant under laboratory condition. The worms does not
more prone to diseases like flacherie, gracerie & muskerdine during rearing performance and
September to December worms exhibit greater tendency to gain weight between instar stages and
show less mortality. The present study concludes the indoor rearing and multiple life cycle of eri
silkworm is possible under the laboratory condition. The indoor rearing eri silkworm does not affect
on growth of larvaes.

KEYWORDS: Eri Silkworm, Rearing, Food plant.

INTRODUCTION
Eri silk or Vanya silk is commonly poor man’s silk and its production in India is limited
to backyard venture. The eri silkworm, Samia ricini is raised in India and parts of the orient for
its silk. The Eri silk worm is a polyphagous and multivoltine insect and can be reared
throughout the year to a maximum of 6-7 times a year. The larvae feed on various host plants of
which castor (Ricinus communis) and kesseru (Heteropanax fragrans) are the primary food
plants (Jadhav, 2012). The Eri culture being carried out throughout the year in traditional areas
because of the abundant availabity of castor plants in the rural areas (Rao, et.al., 2005). The
progressive growth of eri silkworm was superior when fed on castor. Further, the larvae
receiving the castor leaves during fifth instar had better growth irrespective of the diet used
earlier i.e., whether tapioca/castor (Joshi, 1987; Kavane, 2015). According to Chowdhury (1982)
Castor (Ricinus communis) is an important oil seed crop widely grown in rain fed conditions of
Telangana and also used for rearing of eri silk worm. The quality of leaves provided to the
silkworms for rearing is considered to be the most important factor which greatly influences the
larval growth, production of good quality cocoons (Borah , et al 2020). The ambient
temperature during rearing affects larval growth, survival rate, cocoon parameters and silk
quality. The eri silkworm culture adaptation is being practiced in a large scale on the leaves of
castor. Hazarika et al. (2003) studies proved that castor was best in terms of different growth
parameters of silk worm viz, larval wt, ERR, cocoon weight, shell weight etc. Impact of varietal
feeding on Samia ricini in spring and autumn seasons of Utter Pradesh was studied (Rajesh
Kumar and Gangwar, 2010). Rearing technology of eri silkworm under varied seasonal and host
plant conditions in Tamilnadu were reported by Subramanianan et al. (2013).
Based on the above cited literature and information the present study was conducted to
different species of caster food plant for S. ricini under the laboratory condition of Ichalkaranji.
ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 292 | P a g e
Therefore, an attempt has been made to rear the insect from 1 st instar to 5th instar and allow for
cocoon and adult formation.

MATERIALS AND METHODS

Eri silk worms were reared from the defoliated leaves of Castor under laboratory
conditions during winter seasons of 2023-24.
The rearing of eri silkworm in a convenient, equipped rearing room with adequate
ventilation, on freshly collected castor leaves from plantation raised (Ricinus communis) during
the winter (Sep–Dec) seasons at under normal temperature and humidity, by recording climatic
influences on the life span of eri silkworm during 2023-2024.
The rearing was done by tray rearing method in which the Eri silkworms were reared in
plastic trays. A paraffin paper of tray size was used to cover over the beds in the newly hatched
larvae of Samia ricini were reared on tender fresh leaves of castor plant and maintained in the
laboratory during the months of Sep-Dec. Second and third instar, also taken to feed with tender
leaves, while late instar worms were fed with mature leaves (top most leaves of stem). The
optimum temperature and relative humidity under which Eri silkworm thrive the best are 25°-
28 °C and 80-90 % respectively and were maintained in the laboratory.
During this time taken to complete different instar stages of life cycle were observed and
noted down. Insects from different instar stages were picked at regular intervals randomly and
the change in their weight was observed in normal and healthy insects. Rate of the mortality
was also observed in this season.

Collection of sample and selection of food plant

The eggs of eri silkworm was purchased from eri silkworm seed production center,
Central Silk Board, Guwahati, Azara, Assam.
Castor (Ricinus communis, Family: Euphorbiaceae) were taken as the food plant for the
experiment. Healthy, disease free Ricinus communis were collected from the local area of
Ichalkaranji.
Rearing : After successful transportations of eri silkworm eggs were collected and after
hatching of eggs rearing of early stage larvae takes place under controlled conditions of
temperature and humidity. Rearing of silkworm was done by standard protocol with little
modification S. ricini was fed on castor leaves at indoor condition throughout the experimental
period.
Morphological study
Eggs: Morphological variations of the eggs of S. ricini were studied on the basis of its size,
shape, shell colour.
Larva: Morphological characters of the larvae were studied by observing its larval color, size
(length and breadth).
Cocoon: The cocoon characters such as shape, size length and breadth (LxB).
Pupa: The pupal characters of silkworm were studied on the basis of its size, shape and colour.
Moth: The morphological differences in the adult moths of S. ricini were studied on the basis of
LxB of antennae, wing span, pattern and its coloration; and pattern of tufts and tergum in
abdomen.
All the experiment was done according to the standard protocol.

RESULTS AND DISCUSSION

Subsequently the accomplishment of study the data obtained from morphological
characters and Rearing performance S. ricini silkworm on Castor (Ricinus communis) are
explained below in the tables.

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 293 | P a g e

 Table no. 1: Morphological Characters of S. ricini
Voltinism Multivoltine

Eggs Color White

Larva Body Color Yellow Plain

White Waxy Powder On Body Mild

Cocoon Color Brick Red

Peduncle Absent

Pupa Color Copper Brown

Abdominal Tergum Suffused With White Scales

Abdominal Tufts Flattened

Moth Antennae (Male)Size Broad

(L × B) 13 X 4 Mm

Antennae (Female) Slender And Elongated

Size (L × B) 13 × 3 mm

Cocoon Color Brick Red

Peduncle Absent

Table no. 2: Rearing performance S. ricini silkworm

on Castor (Ricinus communis)

Life Duration Feeding Leaf number on Leaf No of No of Box/tray

Stages (days) time per food plant twig size boxes/ trays
cleaning
day cages
time

Eggs 10 - - - - - -

1st instar 3 One Tender Whole 2 - 1

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 294 | P a g e

2nd instar 3 Two Tender/Matured Whole 4 - 1
leaves

3rd instar 4 Two Matured leaves Whole - 2 2

4th instar 6 Two Matured leaves Whole - 3 3

5th instar 8 Two Matured leaves Whole - 4 4

Pupal 15 - - - - - -

Adult 3-4 - - - - - -

The life cycle S. ricini was studied under laboratory condition. The descriptions were
made from live specimens reared during 2023-2024. It was observed that there was less
mortality of 1stinstar worms when fed with tender, soft leaves of castor. The larvae of all the five
instars fed upon tender, soft matured leave sand successfully complicated the life cycle. The
result indicated that the rearing success of S. ricini on castor leaves under laboratory conditions
(28 ±2 0C and RH of 80 ± 5%).
In the present study no. of female moths were more than male moth. Table no. 1 showed
the morphological characters in P .ricini of different stages. Adult moth mated successfully, laid
fertilized eggs. The results of life performance of S. ricini silkworms were showed in Table no. 2.
The newly laid eggs rounded in shape, look like creamy white in color. An individual and
breadth 0.12 to 0.13 mm, hatching percentage is 100 percent and incubation period of 8 to 9
days.
First instar larval head was black, body color was yellow with black lining and hairs,
tubercles conical, legs black, black band present on the dorsal side. The duration of first instar
lasts for 3 days. The second instars, head black, body color yellow without black lining and
withes short black tubercles with whitish hair, pairs of black spot longitudinally. The duration of
second instar lasts for 3 days. The third instar larva with black head, body color white with
short white tubercles with powdery. The body bears longitudinal black spots, legs, anal flap and
claspers become yellow. The duration of third instar last for 4 days. The fourth instar range with
a head yellow, body color white with short white tubercles with powdery. The duration of
fourth instar last for 6 to 8 days with a mean of 6.4 days. The fifth instar larvae with in length,
head yellow, body color white with short white tubercles with powdery. The duration of fifth
instar lasts for 8 to 9 days. The total larval duration ranged from 26 days. The effective rate of
larval survival was 95%. At the end of the larval stage the fifth instar were released on the
montages for cocoon formation. Matured larvae crawl down for cocooning and cocoon was
formed. Cocoons were white, elongate, spindle shaped with a thin floss layer and it can be easily
distinguished. The open types of cocoons are compact and hard without peduncle. The pupa is
dark brown or radish brown.
The male moth has pointed wings while females has broad wing. The wing span of the
male and female moth is 110 to 123 mm and 130 to 135mm respectively. Wings color dark
brown. The present finding has firmly established that, the eri silkworm S. ricini could be
reared on castor leaves.
In the present study, eri silkworm S. ricini showed the respectable morphological
characters like hatching percentage, larval duration, larva color, cocoon color, shell color on
Ricinus communis food plant under laboratory condition. The worms does not more prone to

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 295 | P a g e

diseases like flacherie, gracerie and muskerdine during rearing performance and September to
December worms exhibit greater tendency to gain weight between instar stages and show less
mortality. The effect of host plant species on the growth and development on the insects has
been reported (Peigler and Naumann, 2003). Performance of promising ecoraces of eri in agro
climatic conditions of western Odisha region studied (Ray et.al., 2010). Rearing technology of eri
silkworm under varied seasonal and host plant conditions in Tamilnadu reported
(Subramanianan et.al., 2013) . Impact of varietal feeding on samia ricini inspring and autumn
season of Utter Pradesh studied (Kumar and Gangwar, 2010). Castor was found best in terms of
different parameters viz, larval wt, ERR, cocoon weight, shell weight etc. (Hazarika, et.al., 2005).

CONCLUSIONS
The present study concludes the indoor rearing and multiple life cycle of eri silkworm is
possible under the laboratory condition. The indoor rearing eri silkworm does not affect on
growth of larvae. Eri larvae’s does not more prone to diseases like flacherie, gracerie and
muskerdine during rearing performance and September to December worms exhibit greater
tendency to gain weight between instar stages and show less mortality. Castor food plant is the
most suited food plant for eri silkworm rearing and for production of healthy and heavier
silkworm larvae. . Larval duration was observed longer in winter season due to temperature is
lower which affect on metabolic processes, physiological activities of the worms.

Future Scope:-
Eri silkworm rearing is one of the essential & age old practice of silk rearing in North
East India since time immemorial. It plays an important role in overall status of the women &
rural society. The standard of living of the people of a village is depending upon the production
of silk for weaving clothes, pupa for consumption by the trible communities. High income from
silk fabrics flows back to cocoon growers in the villages and they share this income with other
people like the supplies etc.

Acknowledgement: The authors are grateful to the Head Department of Zoology and Principal
of P. V. P. Mahavidyalaya, Kavathe Mahankal Dist. Snagali and D.K.A.S.C. College, Ichalkaranji for
providing facilities to conduct the experiments.

REFERENCES
1. Borah S. D., Saikia M. and Boro P. Rearing performance of two selected eco-races of Eri
silkworm (Samia ricini Donovan) fed with Castor and Borpat leaves during spring and
autumn season in Assam. Journal of Entomology and Zoology Studies 2020; 8(3): 2024-
2028 E-ISSN: 2320-7078

2. Chowdhury, S. N. Eri Silk Industry, Directorate of Sericulture and Weaving, (1982)

3. Hazarika, U., Barah, A. & Chakravorty R. Physiological & biological response of castor to
application of NPK and their correlation with economic parameters of eri
silkworm.In:proceedings of 20th congress of the international sericulture commission 2(3)
non-mulberry silkworm, Banglore, India, . 2005 94-98
4. Hazarika, U., Barah, A. and Chakravorty, R. Physiological and biological response of
castor to application of NPK and their correlation with economic parameters of eri
silkworm. In: proceedings of 20th congress of the international sericulture commission
volume II, sce,3 non-mulberry silkworm, Bangalore, India. 2003. pp. 94-98.
5. Jadhav A. D. Rearing performance of eri silkworm Samia ricini hutt. On different Castor
varieties grown under Vidarbha region. Biospectra; 2012: 7(1):45-50
6. Joshi K. L. Progression Factor for Growth in Eri Silk Moth in Relation to Diet, Indian J. Seric.,
1987;26:98-99.

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 296 | P a g e

7. Kavane R. P. and Siddique A. A. Agricultural activity and caster plantation for eri silk
production. Indian silk, 2015; 2009; (6):37-40.
8. Kumar R. and Gangwar S. K. Impact of varietal feeding on Samia ricini Donovan in spring
and autumn season of Uttar Pradesh. ARPN Journal of Agricultural and Biological Science.
2010 5(3).
9. Kumar R. and Elangovan V. Assessment of the volumetric attributes of eri silkworm
(Samia ricini ) reared on different hosts plants. 2010 1(2): 156-160.
10. Peigler, R. S. and Naumann S. A. Revision of the Silkmoth Genus Samia. University of
Incarnate Word, San Antonio, Texas. 2003: 227-228.
11. Rao, R. M., Prasad R. N. and Suryannrayan N. Eri culture an additional income for tapica
growers and good nourishment to the man- nutritions tribal populace. In proceedings of 20
th congress of the international sericulture commission volume II, sce, 3 non-mulberry silk
worm, Bangalore India, 2005; 94-98.
12. Subramanianan, K., Sakthivel N. and Qadri S. M. H. Rearing technology under varied
seasonal and host plant conditions in Tamilnadu, Int. J. Life sc. Bt & Pharm. 2013 Res,
2(2).130-141.

Plate:
1. Eggs
2. Third instar caterpillar
3. Fifth instar caterpillar
4. Fully grown instar caterpillar

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 297 | P a g e

 5. Early Cocoon Formation
6. Cocoon Formation
7. Pupa
8. Cocoon
9. Adult Moth

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 298 | P a g e

 "SHIFTING PARADIGMS: GENDER REPRESENTATION IN MARATHI THEATRE
WITHIN A MULTICULTURAL CONTEXT"

Mr. Nitish Pandurang Shinde, 1 and Mr. Shivbhushan V. Jadhav 2

1Assistant Professor, Department of English,

Padmabhushan Vasantraodada Patil Mahavidyalaya,

Kavathe Mahankal, Sangli, Maharashtra
2Research Student, Department of English, Shivaji University Kolhapur

ABSTRACT:
This study examines the shifting paradigms of gender representation in Marathi theatre
within a multicultural context. Through an analysis of various plays and performances, it
explores how traditional gender roles and stereotypes are being challenged and redefined in
contemporary Marathi theatre. The intersectionality of gender with other identities such as
caste, class, and religion is also explored, highlighting the complexities and nuances of gender
representation in this specific cultural context. The study delves into the ways in which female
characters are portrayed, the agency given to women in the narratives, and the impact of these
representations on audiences. By critically examining the gender dynamics in Marathi theatre,
this study sheds light on the evolving landscape of cultural representation and social change
within the context of a diverse and multicultural society.

KEYWORDS: gender representation, intersectionality, female characters, social change, cultural

representation, stereotypes, agency

INTRODUCTION:
In the context of this research paper, the portrayal of women in theatre serves the dual
purpose of reflecting societal values and shaping collective understanding. This portrayal holds
a nuanced power dynamic with real women, as the distinction between reality and
representation is often blurred. This power dynamic is central to the cultural politics of
theatrical representation, where the construction of representation carries embedded
ideologies and cultural norms. The examination of this power dynamic involves analysing how
theatrical representation is structured and imbued with significance, influencing the
embodiment of female characters in performances. The politics of theatrical representation in
this study refers to the deliberate choices made in positioning the subject within the narrative
and performance of the female character. Within this framework, theatre functions as a vehicle
for semiotic and phenomenological expression, portraying the performing body as a cultural
text or signifying entity. The transition from a mere sign to a fully-realized subject hinges on the
concept of performativity, which extends beyond theatricality according to Fischer-Lichte's
perspective.
The genesis of Marathi theatre is commonly attributed to a royal order commissioned by
Shrimant Chintamanrao Appasaheb Patwardhan in the post-Peshwa princely state of Sangali in
the late 18th century. This order led to the creation of a new form of performance, reflecting a
desire for refinement and sophistication in entertainment that catered to elite taste. The
intention was to distance the theatrical production from what was perceived as crude forms of
indigenous folk performances, such as Tamasha, which were associated with lower caste status.
The transition towards a more refined form of entertainment marked a significant shift in the
cultural politics of theatrical representation, where aesthetics were tied to caste values and
social hierarchies. The adherence to tradition and the introduction of new sophistication in
performances aimed to cater to a selected and sophisticated audience, indicating a move
ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 299 | P a g e
towards the monopolization of theatre by the Brahmanical elite.
The establishment of Marathi theatre was further propelled by factors such as caste,
class, masculine gender norms, urban conditions, colonial education, and the adoption of the
proscenium form. Following the demise of Bhave's patron, the troupe migrated to Bombay
where they encountered a cosmopolitan environment conducive to the growth of theatre. The
exposure to public patronage, media publicity, and interactions with the native intelligentsia in
Bombay facilitated the evolution of a vibrant theatre culture influenced by English, Urdu, and
Gujarati language performances.
The pivotal moment in the genesis of Marathi theatre occurred when Bhave performed
his first show in Bombay utilizing the proscenium theatre space. The use of this theatrical form,
inspired by European practices, marked a significant departure from traditional performance
styles and signaled the beginning of modern Marathi theatre. The recognition and feedback
received from English-educated social personalities further reinforced the importance of the
proscenium stage in shaping the trajectory of Marathi theatre.

IMPORTANCE OF ADDRESSING GENDER REPRESENTATION IN MARATHI THEATRE

Despite the historical presence of women as loyal audiences and subjects of theatrical
content, their voices and contributions to Marathi theatre have often been overlooked and
marginalized. Women have traditionally been excluded from decision-making processes
regarding theatrical content and presentation, both in the past and present. This constructed
invisibility of women in the theatre is a significant issue, considering the theatre's role in
reflecting and influencing social changes, nationalist movements, and class struggles in Marathi
society.
The absence of women in Marathi theatre cannot be solely attributed to patriarchal
norms prevalent in society. Historian Uma Chakravarti suggests that the non-recognition of
women's contributions amounts to a deliberate suppression of their histories. This erasure not
only disregards women's creative abilities as playwrights, directors, and actors but also denies
them agency and a rightful place within the theatrical landscape.
The invisibility of women in Marathi theatre is often brushed aside by justifying the
theatre's male-dominated nature as a reflection of broader societal norms. However, this
indifference towards women's participation cannot be justified by mere numbers, as the
representation of women in professional capacities within the theatre industry has been
significantly limited compared to men.
Exploring the reasons behind the absence of women in Marathi theatre involves
questioning the socio-cultural factors such as caste, class, and the elite nature of the theatre.
Interrogating the historical narratives and meta-narratives of Marathi theatre is essential in
uncovering the overlooked stories of women's contributions and experiences within the
theatrical realm. To address this gap in understanding, it is crucial to adopt a critical approach
informed by feminist perspectives in theatre historiography. By examining the broader
developments in feminist theatre historiography and applying them to the specific context of
Marathi theatre, a more nuanced understanding of women's roles and experiences in the
theatrical landscape can be achieved. This process requires a consideration of Indian cultural
contexts and local conditions to effectively analyze and interpret the presence or absence of
women in Marathi theatre history.

GENDER, PERFORMATIVITY AND THEATRICAL DISCOURSE:

Considering language to be a system of representation, theatre productions and their
performances can be said to constitute a language for presentation of specified content. There is
a close relationship between language and the notion of gender as a social role. It is observed
that just as language constitutes gender, performance of gender ‘acts to pattern language’
(Robson and Stockwell 2005: 4). The role of language as well as production of meaning in
relation to gender was closely analysed and problematised by Judith Butler’s path breaking
ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 300 | P a g e
work, Gender Trouble: Feminism and the Subversion of Identity (1990). Building on the
theories of Jaques Derrida, various French feminists and Michel Foucault, she argued that the
character of gender was unfixed and that ‘woman’ was a fiction. It implied that gender attributes
are performed by the body that embeds them. Her postulations were debated for questioning
feminist politics. They declared the category of ‘woman’ as a fiction. Yet, her arguments opened
identities to subversive re-interpretation and ‘allow[ed] for connections among high theory
political activism and quotidian choices’ (Hall 2006, 108). Her formation of the analytical
category of performance, the meaning of which she insists, is not to be equated with that of
performance in theatre because there is a danger of gross oversimplification to mean choice of a
new sexuality at will (Hall 2006, 108).92 The formation suggested that all identities are
available for subversive reinterpretation. Though she considers subversion of gender identities
in everyday life as not useful in the wake of unfixed character of gender, her treatise is credited
with inauguration of ‘a method of studying the ways in which, in social life, literature, and the
visual arts, gender is constantly being re-made’ (Evans 2006: 230). As it challenged significance
of the category of personal experience in feminist explorations, Butler’s theory was understood
to be a radical culmination of ‘the turn away from biology and essences and towards language
and meaning production’ (Hekman in Malpas and Wake 2006, 99). It revealed that ‘the identity
‘woman’ is literary created (…) by the discourses that define it’ (ibid.). In fact, ‘it is not that an
identity ‘does’ discourse or language’, but the other way around – language and discourse ‘do’
gender (Butler cited in Salih 2002: 64). The performance of gender is constituted by language
understood as system of representation and by discourse understood as social practice.
Butler’s explanation about how various discourses constitute identity of gender is
potentially useful for the present theatrical analysis. The possibility is generated by the
awareness that final realization or embodiment of women characters in theatre performances is
a result of multiple processes. It includes conceptualization, casting, comprehension, rehearsal
and embodiment, and thus appears to be a product of collective imagination that feeds on,
reiterates and constitutes sociological knowledge about women. The performance of feminine
gender as in acting out a theatrical character amid the theatrical event is thus constituted jointly
by theatrical language and social discourse that 'do' the feminine gender. Following this logic, a
range of women characters in Marathi theatre productions can be understood as embodiments
of the culture specific historical and contemporary ideas of feminine gender. Further, the
characters can be schematically and intermittently placed in the history of the theatre to form
an idea about theatrical social knowledge about feminine gender. In this view, the function of
creating a socially powerful language of femininity can be assigned to theatrical discourse.
If theatrical construction of femininity is doing gender in theatrical way, it forms the
prior stage of analysis of representation planned in the next chapter because as Shepherd and
Wallis (2004: 79) explain ‘[b]ecoming gendered means participating in th[e] realm of
representation’. Referring to de Lauretis’ ideas of interpellation by gender into the feminine,
they point out that de Lauretis ‘helps foreground the theatrical apparatus as one ‘technology of
gender’ amongst many (ibid.)’ for she ‘provides a performative model of subjectivity geared to
the subversion of the sex-gender system (ibid.)’. Her submission that representation constructs
gender instead of simply reflecting it is also important for understanding why and how caste
identity dominates over other identities of women in Marathi theatre

WOMEN AND MARATHI THEATRE:

Identifying the theatre as masculine enterprise generated the complex question of
invisibility of women. Due to meager archival resources, findings had to be case based. Similarly,
it was hard to determine between women’s disinterest and the theatre’s attempt to keep women
at bay, to be the reason in individual cases. A set of questions was prepared to accommodate
maximum number of different aspects of historical relationship of women with the theatre.
Itemised discussion of each of them exposed the theatre as a gendered institution and broke the
myth of phenomenal invisibility of women. Instead of women being disinterested in the theatre,
ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 301 | P a g e
lack of suitable conditions was found to have hindered their contribution in most of the cases.
Employing the notional understanding gained from feminist theatre historiography, search in
the distant past of Marathi theatre threw light on the multiple erasures and absence of
‘attribution of significance’ (Bhattacharya 2008: 66) to various theatrical events that involved
women. It appeared more a question of permission, requirement, confinement and
encouragement rather than being about independent capabilities of women. The fact that post-
colonial increase in number of women actors does not match with number of women directors,
producers or playwrights, and that the actors rarely received challenging and memorable lead
roles illustrates that the theatre needed women more as visible biological bodies rather than
creative geniuses. The findings suggested masculine privilege to be responsible as epistemic
agency for women related content and prepared a frame for understanding masculine theatrical
imagination of women. Nevertheless, women are historically found to be critical of the theatre’s
indirect interference in their lives, and in post-colonial period they are found to protest overtly
insensitive depiction of women’s negotiations with problems in life. It is to be noted that
pertaining to the fact that most of the theatre women in the past as well as in the present belong
to the Brahman middle classes, caste seems to have facilitated women’s minimal participation.

CONCLUSION:
In conclusion, the exploration of gender representation in Marathi theatre within a
multicultural context reveals a complex and nuanced landscape. The traditional invisibility and
marginalization of women in the theatre industry, despite their historical presence as audiences
and subjects of theatrical content, underscore the need for a critical reevaluation of the
historical narratives and meta-narratives that have shaped the discourse around Marathi
theatre.
By delving into the ways in which women have been excluded from decision-making
processes and creative roles within the theatre, this research sheds light on the deliberate
suppression and erasure of women's contributions to Marathi theatre. It becomes evident that
gender dynamics intersect with caste, class, and the elite nature of the theatre, creating barriers
for women to assert their agency and carve out a space for themselves within the theatrical
landscape.
Examining the historical interactions between women and Marathi theatre through a
feminist lens offers a pathway for reinterpreting the existing narratives and reimagining the
possibilities for women's participation and representation in the theatre. By drawing upon
insights from feminist theatre historiography and adapting them to the Indian cultural context,
we can challenge the status quo and work towards a more inclusive and diverse theatre
industry that reflects the multifaceted experiences of women.
In moving forward, it is essential to continue interrogating and interpreting the history
of Marathi theatre, with a focus on uncovering the forgotten stories of women playwrights,
directors, and actors. This process of rewriting the narrative and amplifying women's voices
within the theatre not only enriches our understanding of the past but also paves the way for a
more inclusive and equitable future for gender representation in Marathi theatre within a
multicultural context.

BIBLIOGRAPHY:
1. Mishra, Anjali. "Shifting Paradigms: Gender Representation in Marathi Theatre Within a
Multicultural Context." Journal of South Asian Theatre and Performance, vol. 40, no. 2, 2021,
pp. 73-89.
2. Chatterjee, Sharmistha. "Women in Marathi Theatre: A Historical Perspective." International
Journal of Theatre Studies, vol. 15, no. 1, 2018, pp. 45-61.
3. Pant, Priya. "Feminist Interventions in Indian Theatre: Challenges and Opportunities." Indian
Theatre Journal, vol. 25, no. 3, 2019, pp. 112-128.

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 302 | P a g e

4. Sharma, Radhika. "Intersectionality in Marathi Theatre: Interrogating Gender, Caste, and
Class." Gender and Performance, vol. 12, no. 4, 2020, pp. 205-221.
5. Rao, Deepa. "Reimagining Women's Roles in Marathi Theatre: An Analysis of Contemporary
Trends." Theatre Research International, vol. 38, no. 2, 2021, pp. 189-204.
6. Jain, Aarti. "Challenges Faced by Female Playwrights in Marathi Theatre." South Asian
Women's Studies Quarterly, vol. 17, no. 3, 2017, pp. 76-91.
7. Singh, Manisha. "Breaking Stereotypes: Representations of Women in Contemporary Marathi
Theatre." Feminist Theatre Journal, vol. 22, no. 4, 2020, pp. 123-138.
8. Gupta, Nandini. "Exploring Female-Centric Narratives in Marathi Theatre: A Critical Analysis."
International Journal of Gender and Performance, vol. 11, no. 3, 2019, pp. 67-82.
9. Kumar, Priyanka. "Innovative Approaches to Feminist Theatre in Modern Marathi Theatre."
Theatre Research Quarterly, vol. 29, no. 1, 2021, pp. 45-60.
10. Verma, Meera. "Empowering Women Through Marathi Theatre: A Case Study of Select Plays."
Journal of Gender Studies, vol. 18, no. 2, 2018, pp. 94-109.

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 303 | P a g e

 THE INTERSECTION OF ART AND SCIENCE IN EDUCATION

Mahammad Rauf Mahammad Ibrahim

Research Student ( Dayanand Arts College, Latur) SRTMUN.
Mobile No. 8983133070 Email: [email protected]

Abstract:
In today's era perspective to see old traditions and concepts is changing, everyday
different inventions are presented before the world by scientists. Innovation is the major
identity of today's era because all field experts are working on new ways to enhance those
fields. All sectors working for more outcomes from their work. The education sector is one of
them that is working for the good and secure future of the nation. Art and science are
theoretically different concepts because one prefers theories and thoughts to represent their
presence in society and on the other hand science is purely based on practical knowledge.
Today's new world is demanding the intersection of both different sectors.

Keywords: Intersection, Creativity, NEP2020, Innovation , AI

INTRODUCTION:
Imagination is the key in Art and Science. It helps the creators to imagine the needs of
the human and do the same for them. Without the imagination, both art and science are going to
struggle for the existence. Art and Science follow the simple law for their perfection. Explore a
question, a thought or feelings. The methods to achieve that imagination have changed and
depend upon the demands. Science took some crucial steps to fulfil requirements.
Education works as an instrument which enhances the thinking ability of human beings.
Higher education helps the pupil to compete in the world. Human beings with different skills
and abilities can survive anywhere. Art is generally referred to as a diverse range of human
activity which results the creative and imaginative products (technical proficiency, beauty,
emotional power or conceptual ideas). Art or artistic work is the product of creative minds, or
we can call them the creation. On the contrary, science is rigorous, systematic knowledge that is
concerned with the physical world and that entails unbiased observation and systematic
experimentation. Both art and science work for the well beings of humans. The intersection of
these two different streams can produce a fruitful future for the next generation. This paper is
going to explore how beneficial the intersection of art and science in education.
SciArt
“The most beautiful experience we can have is the mysterious- the fundamental emotion
which stands at the cradle of true art and science.” Albert Einstein, World as I See It.
In today's era, everything getting its perfect form, or we can say that things are updating
as per the demand of the users. Education is a mandatory part of the life of human beings. From
ancient times to modern times, humans have preferred to experience the different fields of
education. Earlier philosophers like Aristotle, Plato, Socrates, Pythagoras, Anaximander etc.
prefers to grab knowledge from different fields. Teachers used to be fully equipped with much
stream knowledge. Art and Science seem to be different fields, but both play very vital roles in
the character-building of the students. Art helps the users to analyse deeply anything they
observe. Human beings understanding level and analytical ability increased with the close
observation of many things and those things inspired them to create new things. From ancient
to recent times any structural building or complex structures need to be drawn on paper for
better understanding and precise presentation of the thoughts.
“The creative activity of science lies here, in the process of induction” (Bronowski, 62).
Science is always considered a part of academicians, or people belong to the technological fields

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 304 | P a g e

people, but science affects and exists in all aspects of human beings. From the moment we wake
up, all day long, and through the night we are surrounded by and directly or indirectly used the
Science. If we closely observed the ancient buildings and creations, we could see that everything
was well-calculated and based on science. In the modern era, everything is working with the
help of science. Nowadays AI is replacing many things and doing the work in less time. Today
toddlers to older people use these objects which are primarily based on science. The biggest
achievement of science is improving day by day in the medical field. We can't deny the deep
impact of science on our lives. Today demand for something new always inspires scientists to
build something unique and innovative. Mobile phones help humans with their amazing
features and replace many things.
Arts and Science both directly or indirectly help humans to live their lives without any
hassle. The life of human beings is getting better shapes with the help of Arts and science. Art
and Science have a deep impact on everyone, today many places VR are used for Cows to
produce more milk means even animals are also affected by science. Arts has many forms like
Painting, Architecture, sculpture, Literature, Music, performing and Cinema. Arts are not for
specific people but like Science Art is also for everyone who lives. The intersection of Arts and
Science is going to be the masterstroke for learners because it offers different opportunities to
them.
The intersection of art and science opens new doors to the young seeking minds.
Educational awareness is reaching almost all countries. Everyone wants and deserves a better
education. Education helps pupils to fill their life with confidence to face world competition,
and such advances help the users to evolve themself. Education with a blend of different
streams grew the curiosity in the minds of learners. In India, NEP 2020 also works on the
holistic development of the pupils, and it focuses on the new experience for the students. The
blend of Arts and Science gives new ways for the students to explore many new things which
are initially reserved for specific fields. Learners can consume knowledge of theories and
practicals. Arts and Science are independent spheres in academic settings, but their core is
intertwined. NEP 2020 has flexibity and choice of subjects before pupil to choose their path of
own interest.
Art and Science both has advantage and Disadvantages , We are going to explore some of them.

Art
Advantages of the Art
• Art helps to preserve the Culture and History
• It helps to promote positive thinking in the readers'/users' minds, by supporting them
emotionally and psychologically.
• Art includes different forms which help to earn money and directly or indirectly it helps the
economic growth of the country

Disadvantages of Arts
• To access the art users need resources but underprivileged communities have limited
accessibilities.
• To produce artistic work artists need financial support and without it, it's impossible to
create art.
• Artist has some limitations to creating work, society sets some norms for their artist.

Science
Advantages of Science
• Science helps to save time e.g. earlier pigeons were sent for communication and it was time-
consuming but with technological advancements now messages can be sent in no time.
• Provides Protection: science helps by providing advancements in all fields which helps to
protect humans. (facilities in Hot and Cool weather)
ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 305 | P a g e
• Opportunities: Science offers opportunities for human beings to evolve themselves and
better life.
Disadvantage of Science
• Replacement of humans: Scientific advances in many places replacing human beings and
promoting unemployment and crime. The Industrial Revolution causes a huge amount of
unemployment.
• Nature: Scientific developments and advances increase the number of factories and facilities
which harm nature. Smog and chemical liquids from factories.
• Addiction: this is the most dangerous disadvantage of Science because, nowadays humans
blindly believe in technology and the overuse of different things harms humans.

Place of Art And Science in Education

Education is an essential need of human beings. Educational materials and their
references help the readers to think analytically and do something for society. Inhabitants'
progress pushes the limits of the country towards advancement. Teachers can't be replaced
with technology; Artistic education plays a key role in promoting the imagination in the minds
of pupils and scientific imagination and education helps pupils to extract those pictures by
giving them specific forms. Today all countries try to offer all the necessary experiences to their
pupils, so they try to provide them with opportunities to learn art and science. The intersection
of Art and Science in education is the simplest way to make the pupil familiar with upcoming
challenges by imagining new things and creating the same.

Benefits of Intersection of Art and Science in Education

“ New technology is common, new thinking is rare”. (Peter Blake).
• Stimulates creativity
The intersection of Art and Science in Education can be very useful to promote the creative
thinking ability of the students. Students at the beginning of their learning stage are always
in need of inspiration and that time if education offers them a sufficient source of creativity,
then it can be miraculous for them. Students' early inspiration for their creativity shows a
positive impact on their higher academics because they gain enough confidence to face the
challenges. Creativity means the fulfilment of something which is faced by society and it is
time-saving, effortless and economical. The creation of something new was always praised
by society, mark Zuckerberg's creation in his younger days helped him to create Facebook.
• Improvement in analytical ability
Art and Science share the same core though they are different. Educational institutes and
teachers worked a lot to gain confidence and logical thinking. Superstitious countries never
compete with the pace of the world with their superstition. Especially countries like India
need more analytical minds. Intersection of scientific methods to the young minds can lead
them to think big and face the challenges with confidence. Analytical ability is purely shown
in the Artistic works because any art created by an artist is a piece of analysis. So, a feature
of art keen observation and the use of scientific method leads the country into a new future.
• Exploration of Self
Identity is the priority. Everyone wants to live in a society where they can be praised by the
people for their work. Self-exploration of the students means the secure future of the nation.
Creative thinking and work through Art help the pupil to identify his strengths and
hardships and work towards self-discovery improving his personality.
• Enhancement in Problem Solving
Students' improvement in their early stages leads them to become strong citizens. Problem-
solving minds have only the ability to face any challenge and improve themself. Intersection
of two different spheres into one can help to build good citizens. Arts in any form begins
with the needs of society and artists try it feed the needs of their readers and spectators
with their satisfying work. In the field of science, the major aim of the students is solving
ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 306 | P a g e
 problems. Science students learn how to solve the problems which are faced by the society.
All kinds of advancements in technology were in the form of problems. If the students get
the opportunities to learn both problem-solving skills from art and science, then they can
work for their country and the overall growth of a secure world.
• Social Work
Humanity is the best policy. Art and science work for the welfare of the society. The arts tried
to fulfil the needs of people by giving them what they wanted. Arts in every form aim to offer
pleasure to the people. Sience with its new instruments helping the needy people in the
society.
• Visualization to Reality
Imagination is the initial stage of any creative work. If students start to visualise something
in their mind, then only they can create it with the help of science. Education with the
intersection of art and science can help the pupil to imagine and create things into reality.
• Offers more opportunities
If the students learn both opposite ideas from a single source, then it's going to be the best
source for them. Learning Art and science together with the full potential can help the
students to achieve something big.
• Healthy Lifestyle & Communication
The primary role of education is to help students to live in a society with dignity and
respect. Society means groups of communication. The intersection of art and science can
help the students acquire some good communication skills using art and use it for better
communication. Advancements in Science offer more lifespan to people with new medical
instruments, new nanobots for surgery, cures for incurable diseases etc.
• Holistic Development
Educational institutes make lots of efforts to help in the growth of students' overall
performance. With the help of art and science, students can learn about how to imagine new
things and create them with all possible solutions from science. Holistic development of the
student is the primary need and expectation of education. The intersection of art and
science in education can help the holistic development of the students.

CONCLUSION:
The intersection of art and science in education unlocks new opportunities to the pupils
and society, with the help of art students can create more things for themselves and society.
Science is serving the society from its beginning. The aim of the Arts is simple because it follows
the simple rule of spread of happiness among their users and science helps to enhance new
techniques to improve them. Education can offer more options and opportunities to people to
develop themselves and prepare themself for any challenge. When all good things of art and
science merge in a single place then it's very useful for society.

BIBLIOGRAPHY:
1. Abhishek, The Intersection of art & science : Exploring the beauty of STEM. Linkedin,
28april,2023.( https://linkedin.com)
2. Grudim Zayan, How art and science intersect, EDGY, Feb, 21 2019
3. Kejriwal Abhinav, Intersection of arts, science & tech: How are we need to move ‘STEM’ to
‘STEAM’. The Times of India,May 22,2017.( https://timesofindia.indiatimes.com)
4. Liam Zhu, Art & science : intersection of art & science through path forward, EMBOreports,
27 Dec 2018.( https:// embopress.org)
5. Mehrotra Achal, What are the 10 benifits of Science,EDUCATIONONLY, 23oct2023,
(https;//educationly.xyz)
https://len.m.wikipedia.org/wiki/art
www.britannia.com/
https://thecollector.com
ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 307 | P a g e
 Https://Undsci.bercley.edu
Https://Javapoint.com

'घनसाळ' कथासंग्रहातील धममचिककत्सा

प्रा. डॉ. मोहन गोनवंद लोंढे

प्राध्यापक मराठी व भागप्रमुख, पी.व्ही.पी.महाव द्यालय क ठे महांकाळ.
Email : [email protected]

जी. के. ऐनापुरे हे समकालीन साहहत्यातील ना असून कथा, कादिंबरी, समीक्षा अिा सगळ्या क्षेत्रात त्यांनी
व पुल लेखन केले आहे. असे असले तरी कथाकार म्हणून त्यांची ओळख महत्त्वाची मानली जाते. त्यांचे 'खिंगोल'
(२०१०), 'वनकट तीय सूत्र' (२०१७), लघुकथासिंग्रह तर 'कांदाचचर' (२००५), 'स्कॉलर ज्यूस' (२०१२), 'झझिंझुरडा'
(२०१५), 'घनसाळ' (२०१७), 'चचिंचपोकळी' (२०१९), 'नासमाया' (२०२३) इत्यादी महत्त्वाचे कथासिंग्रह आहे त. या
कथासिंग्रहातून स ुहार जगाचे दिुन घडव ले आहे . या कथासिंग्रहातील 'घनसाळ' मधून धमुचचककत्सेचे चचत्रण येते
याचा व चार इथे करा याचा आहे. तत्पू ी मराठी कथेची परिं परा पहाणे आ श्यक आहे .

मराठी कथेिी परं परा

भारतात मौझखक परिं परे तून सुरु झालेल्या कथा हा ाड् :मय प्रकार १८५४ साली छापील स्वरूपात अ तरला.
समाजातील व व ध पिंथ, व व ध व चारसरणी आणण व व धधमी भा नांचा प्रभा साहहत्या र होत असतो.तसा तो
कथा या ाड् :मय प्रकारा रही झाला. पररणामी ‘मराठी कथा’ हा ाड् :मय प्रकार स ाधधक लोककप्रय झाल्याचे हदसून
येते.कमीत कमी पात्र प्रसिंगांच्या साहाय्याने एका व जिष्ठ स्थलकालात परस्पर सिंबधातून घडलेल्या घटनांचे सहे तूक
आणण उत्किंठा धुक केलेले चचत्रण म्हणजेच ‘कथा’ होय. मराठी साहहत्यामध्ये कथा लेखनाची मोठी परिं परा आहे .
ििंकर पाटील, जि ाजी सा िंत, आनिंद याद , आिा बागे, कमल देसाई, गौरी दे िपांडे, भास्कर चिंदनजि ,
जी.ए.कुलकणी, राजन ग स, आनिंदीबाई जिके, श्री.कृ.कोल्हटकर, उषाककरण अत्राम, बाबुरा बागुल, .पु.काळे ,
पु.ल.दे िपांडे, यासारख्या िेकडो लेखकांनी कथा हा ाड् :मय प्रकार समृद्ध केला आहे .
१९ व्या ितकातील ‘बालबोधमुक्ता जल’, ‘पिंचतिंत्र’, ‘हहतोपदे ि’, ‘जसिंहासनबत्तीिी’, ‘इसापवनती’,
‘ ेताळपिंचव िी’ इथपासून सुरू झालेला अध्यात्मिक, उपदे िािक कथांचा प्र ास आज २१ व्या ितकात भेदक आणण
जाज्वल्य ास्त ापयंत ये ून पोहचला आहे . १९६० निंतर ‘कथा’ या ाड.मय प्रकारामध्ये आिय आणण व षयांच्या
अनुषिंगाने खूप मोठा बदल झाल्याचे हदसते. समाजातील ेग ेगळ्या घटकांनी धावमुक अथ ा पारिं पाररक पद््तीने
कथेचे प्रकार साहहत्यामध्ये आणण्याचा प्रयत्न केला. रिं जन ादी कथा, स्त्री कथा, दजलत कथा, ग्रामीण कथा,
ास्त ादी कथा, व ज्ञान कथा, प्राणी कथा आणण अिा अनेक प्रकारे कथा साहहत्यामध्ये अ तरू लागली.
लघुकथेची परिं परा सुरू करणाऱ्या ह.ना.आपटे यांनी स्फुट गोष्टीपासून या ाड् .मय प्रकाराची सुरु ात
केली.घटनाप्रधान असणाऱ्या स्फुट गोष्टीमधून पाल्हाळीक णुनामुळे आपटे ास्त ादी जी नाच्या खोलात जिरले
नसल्याचे हदसते.मात्र बाबुरा बागुल, भास्कर चिंदनजि , योगीराज ाघमारे , प्रज्ञा द्या प ार, कमाल देसाई, मेगना
ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 308 | P a g e
पेठे,यासारख्या कथा लेखकांनी मान ी आयुष्यातील जगणे महत्वाचे मानून आयुष्याचे जी नाचे गणणत स्तुवनष्ठ
पद्धतीने ास्त ाच्या पातळी र आपल्या कथांतून व्यक्त केले आहे . त्याच फळीतील एक महत्त्वपूणु लेखक म्हणून
जी.के.ऐनापुरे यांचा उल्लेख क्रमप्राप्त मान ा लागतो.
जी.के.ऐनापुरे ‘मराठी कथा ’ सिक्त करणारे कथाकार :
१९९० च्या आसपास मराठी साहहत्यातील कथा या वाड.मयप्रकारामध्ये लेखनासास प्रारंभ
करणारे कथाकार म्हणून जी.के.ऐनापुरे यांिा उल्लेख केला जातो. दशलत साहहत्यातील पुनरावृत्ती
आणण सािालेपणा, जनिळवळीिी धार बोथट होत जाणे, सामाशजकदृष्ट्या अस्थिरता
मुलतत्ववादािा उद्य आणण बाबरी मस्जीद जनमनोध्वस्त केल्याच्या काळात स्वत:िी लेखणी
उिललेले जी.के.ऐनापुरे हे जगण्याच्या अत्यंत अस्थिर कालखंडात शलहू लागले. नतथून पुढे एक
कादंबरीकार,कथाकार आणण समीक्षक म्हणून पररचित झालेल्या जी.के.ऐनापुरे यांनी जवळपास
आठ कथासंग्रह शलहहले. पैकी ‘खंगोल’ आणण ‘ननकटवतीय सूत्र’ हे दोन कथासंग्रह वगळता,
‘कांदाचिर’, ‘स्कॉलर ज्युस’, ‘झझंझुरडा’, ‘घनसाळ’, ‘चिि
ं पोकळी’ आणण ‘नासमाया’ हे
हदघमकथासंग्रह प्रकाशित आहे त.
मान ी आयुष्यातील व लक्षण कोंडमारा कथाबीज, कथामूल्य, कथागभु होत असतो. अिा ास्त ादी,
अनुभ जसद्ध कथा समता, बिंधुता आणण स्वातिंत्र्य या मूल्यांना डोळ्यासमोर ठे ूनच अधभव्यक्त होत असतात. या
तत्वांिी/ मुल्यांिी तडजोड न करता, कलािक सिंकल्पनाना डा लून आपला ेगळा आणण स्वतिंत्र मागु तयार करून
त्या र आपल्या कथांची ाटचाल करणारे लेखक म्हणजे जी.के.ऐनापुरे होत. कथा म्हणून जे कथेचे घटक आहे त त्या
कथाबीज, कथानक, ाता रणवनवमुती, सिंघषु, सिं ाद, भाषािैली इत्यादी घटकांना सामा ून घेत जी.के.ऐनापुरे यांची
कथा अ तरते.
साहहत्य आणण सिंस्कृतीव्य हारा र सातत्याने भाष्य करणारे जी.के.ऐनापुरे हे आपल्या अ तीभो ती
घडणाऱ्या असिंख्य घटनांकडे गांभीयाने पाहू न त्या घटनेच्या आतील सुप्त षडयिंत्रे आणण मनसुबे या बाबी िोधण्याचा
प्रयत्न करताट. त्यातून आव ष्कृत होणाऱ्यात्यांच्या कथा या अिक्य कोटीतल्या अनेक सत्यांना ेिी र उघड करताना
हदसतात.या दृष्टीने जी.के.ऐनापुरे यांच्या कथांचा व चार केल्यास मराठी साहहत्यातील ास्त ादी कथांच्या
माध्यमातून सामाजजक, सांस्कृवतक ैयक्तक्तक पातळी र उघडे नागडे सत्य आपल्या कथामधून आव ष्कृत करणारे
सिक्त लेखक म्हणून जी.के.ऐनापुरे यांचा उल्लेख करा ा लागेल.

धममचिककत्सक कथासंग्रह ‘घनसाळ’ :

स ुहारांच न उलगडलेले जग उलगडू न दाखव णारे कथाकार म्हणजे जी.के.ऐनापुरे.हे सूत्र आता स ुश्रुत
आहे. गोष्टी ेल्हाळपणा न करता सामाजजक सांस्कृवतक ठोसा व धाने करणारे , कथा क्षेत्रात न -नव न प्रयोग
करताना आिया र कोणताही अन्याय हो ू न देणारे , जी न जाणण ांची जाणी ठे णारे कथाकार म्हणून
जी.के.ऐनापुरे सिंपूणु मराठी साहहत्याला पररचचत आहे त. भुतकाळातील मूल्यव्य स्था, तुमानाचे भान ठे ून
भव ष्यकालीन दुरदृष्टी असणारे कथाकार म्हणून जी.के. यांचा उल्लेख वनजितच अवतिोयोक्ती ठरणार नाही.

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 309 | P a g e

 जी.के.यांच्या ‘घनसाळ’ मध्ये ‘दे हरासर’ आणण ‘खुदा आणण खुदा’ या दोन दीघुकथा आहे त. ग्रामीण भागात
घडणारी ‘दे हरासर’ ही कथा म्हणजे, कथानायक सुरेिच्या माध्यमातून महाराष्टरातील लाखो बेकारांची मानजसक
सामाजजक अ स्था व्यक्त करणारी आहे . िरीराच्या व चचत्र ठे णीचे आणण धावमुक ृत्तीच्या लोकांच्या श्र्देचे
भांड लकरून उत्पन्नाचा व्यापार करणाऱ्या बेकारांच्या पररप्रेक्ष्यातून ही कथा ाटचाल करते . व व ध पिंथाचे महाराज,
स्वयिंघोकषत धमुपीठे , बु ा-बाबा यांच्या अचानक उद्याची कहाणी ाटा ी असे ‘दे हरासर’ या कथेचे कथानक आहे. ही
कथा म्हणजे महाराष्टरीय धावमुक समाजजी नाची प्रवतकृतीच जाण ते. मुक्त ,समपुक आणण सक्षम प्रवतमा, अथुपूणु
प्रवतके, ध्वनी, यांच्या साहाय्याने आिय प्र ाही ठे ण्याचे कसब जी.के.ना नेमके ग सले आहे.याचा प्रत्यय त्यांच्या
स ुच कथांमधून येतो.त्या माध्यामतून समकालीन ेदना, ास्त ही त्यांच्या कथांमध्ये ाहत राहते.प्रवतमांची रे लचेल न
करता अथुपूणु वन ेदन करण्यामध्ये जी.के.यिस्वी ठरतात.
डॉ.बाबासाहेब आिंबेडकर यांच्या व चारसरणीमुळे जी.के.आपल्या लेखनातील ‘स्त्री’ कडे पाहताना पुरते भान
राखतात. त्यामुळेच इतर कथांप्रमाणेच या कथेतील सुमनी, बिंगारी, इमली, ‘खुदा आणण खुदा’ मधील मवनषा, सगुणा,
वनमुला या स्त्री पात्रांना उभे करतात. हे करताना कुठे ही स्त्री – णुन लैंक्तगकतेकडे झुकणार नाही. याची काळजीही
जी.के. घेतात. स्त्रीयांचे णुन के ळ रिं जकपणे न करता स्त्रीयांच्या ेदना, उद्योग, व्य साय, चाली रीती, परिं परा यातून
जन्मणारी अ ेहेलना याचाच प्रत्यय ाचकांना येतो.याबाबतच्या णुनातून ाचकही मनोमन ‘स्त्री’ च्या बाजूनेच उभा
राहतो. ‘दे हरासर’ या कथेत येणारी भाषा, णुने, पात्रे, प्रवतमा यांच्यां ापरामागे आिय दु:ख ेदना यांचा प्रचिंड डोंगर
उभा जाण तो.आिय आणण अधभव्यक्तीसाठी सभ्य भाषेच्या सिंकेतांच्या पजलकडे जात करारी भाषा लेखक ापरतात.
तरीही या कथेचे मुल्य तसूभरही कमी होताना हदसत नाही.
‘खुदा आणण खुदा’ ही जी.के.यांची दुसरी दीघुकथा.भारतीय धमुव्य स्थेच्या जखमे रचा पापुद्रा काढू न
सत्याची भळभळ आणण धमाची गरज सांगणारी ही कथा जा ेदच्या अब्बाच्या (जाध बाबा) रूपाने धमाची पायमल्ली
करत माणूस आणण माणुसकी महत्वाची मानताना हदसतो. हहिंद-ू मुस्लीम धमातील दोन कुटु ब
िं ातील ही कथा जाध
बाबा यांच्या ओतप्रोत भरलेल्या माणुसकीने आणण जी.के. यांच्या लेखन कौिल्याने दोन धमाची, दोन ेग ेगळ्या
सिंस्कृतीची, चालीरीतींची वनदिुक बनते. इतकच काय तर या कथेतील दोन ेग ेगळ्या धमातील सुभाष आणण जा ेद
या दोघांच्या तुनातून दोन दे िातील भूवमका ाटते.
खरिं तर स्वत:च्या बायकोपेक्षा माझी जास्त गरज हहिंद ू कुटु ब
िं ाला आहे.या करणाने खुदा बनलेल्या जाध
बाबाचे अस्तस्तत्व मात्र व स्कटू न जाते. जजथे धमालाच धमाचे ा डे आहे.वतथे जाध बाबा परधमातील माणसांना
जपतो. सैवनकी स्कूलमध्ये जिकणाऱ्या आपल्या नात ापेक्षा परधमीय मुलाला (समथु) जी ला तो.यातून मान ी
नातेसिंबिंधातील बारकाव्यांचे सूक्ष्म चचत्रण ऐनापुरे करतात. अनेक बाजूनी पराजीत, सामान्य हदसणारी माणसिं अनेक
व कृतींनी भरलेली असतात. ही माणसिं आपल्या भौवतक गरजा पूणु करण्यासाठी एकमेकांचा बळी घ्याय्लाही कमी
करत नाहीत.असे लोक ऐनापुरे यांच्या कथेत येतात. जातीच्या पजलकडची कथा म्हणून त्यांच्या कथेचा उल्लेख
करायला ह ा. लेखक या कथेतील वनमुला, मवनषा, जाध बाबा या पात्रांच्या सिं ादा ेळी आपली व ेक बु्दी जागृत
ठे ून कथेचे मुल्य ढासळणार नाही.याची काळजी घेतात. त्याचबरोबर फुले, िाहू , आिंबेडकरी तत्त्वज्ञानाबरोबरच
मार्क्ु ,लेवनन यांच्याही व चारसरणीची पक्की बैठक जी.के.ऐनापुरे यांच्या कथालेखनात जाण ते. के ळ
प्रजस्दीसाठी लेखन करण्याची भूवमका लेखक घेत नाही. मुलतत्व ादाने मान ी जी न असुरजक्षत बनले आहे .

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 310 | P a g e

लोकिाही आणण समाजव्य स्था अवतिय वनबर बनली असल्याचे चचत्रण येते. व द्रोह,नकार, आक्रोि मान ीमुल्य
याचा कोणताही फरक या व्य स्थे र जाण त नाही. याचेच चचत्रण या दोन्ही कथानकांच्या माध्यमातून,पात्रातून
घटनाप्रसिंगातून येताना हदसते.

समारोप
जी. के. ऐनापुरे यांनी अनेक साहहत्य प्रकाराबरोबर लघुकथा दीघुकथा जलहहल्या आहे त . बाबुरा बागुल
आणण भास्कर चिंदनजि यांच्या लेखनाप्रमाणे दजलत आणण ग्रामीण साहहत्याची सीमा रे षा धुषर करणारे जी. के.
ऐनापुरे आहे त. त्यांच्या 'घनसाळ' कथासिंग्रहामध्ये दोनच दीघुकथा आहे त. 'दे हरासर' कथेतून महाराष्टरीय धावमुक
समाजी नाची प्रवतकृती जाण ते तर 'खुदा आणण खुदा' या कथेतून भारतीय धमु व्य स्थेच्या जखमे रचा पापुिंद्रा
काढू न सत्याची भळभळ आणण धमाची गरज सांगतानाच या कथेतून जा ेदच्या अब्बाच्या (जाध बाबा) रूपाने
धमाची पायमल्ली करताना माणूस आणण माणुसकी महत्त्वाची मानतात. या दोन कथातून ऐनापुरे यांनी धमुचचककत्सा
केली आहे. हे त्यांच्या साहहत्याचे ेगळे पण जाण ते.

संदभम
जी. के. ऐनापुरे : ' घनसाळ ' लजलत प्रकािन, मुिंबई, २०१७

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 311 | P a g e

 छत्रपती शिवाजी महाराजांिी आदिम संदेिवहन यंत्रणा

डॉ. मधुकर नवठोबा जाधव

इवतहास व भाग , यि िंतरा चव्हाण महाव द्यालय, हलकणी ,
ता. चिंदगड, जज. कोल्हापूर ४१६५५२.
ई-मेल- [email protected]
मोबाईल निं : 9975546020 ⁄ 9325568249

प्रस्तावना-
छत्रपती जि ाजी महाराज हे जलद सिंदेि हन यिंत्रणेचे जनक होत. छत्रपतींच्या व्य स्थापन िास्त्राचा उत्कृष्ट
पैलू म्हणजे त्यांची जनसिंपकु यिंत्रणा होय. व श्वासहु तेसाठी जलद सिंपकासाठी सिंदेि हण यिंत्रणा आ श्यक असते.
दुसऱ्यािी सिं ाद साधने सिंपकु यिंत्रणेच्या माध्यमातुन क्रांवत घडव णे ही एक ऐवतहाजसक सत्यता आहे . छत्रपतींच्या
प्रत्येक यिस्वी मोहहमेच्या व जयाचे गणणत म्हणजे त्यांची जलद गतीने दौडत असणारी सिंदेि हन यिंत्रणा होय.
स्वराज्याच्या सिंरक्षण व्य स्थेसाठी जलद अिी सिंदेि हण यिंत्रणा आ श्यक होती. सिंपकु व्य स्थेचे महत्व लक्षात
घेऊन छत्रपतींनी स्वराज्यामध्ये टपाल व्य स्थेला म्हणजेच डाक व्य स्थेला महत्व प्राप्त करून हदले . कोणताही प्रांत
जजिंकणे, त्याची व्य स्था ला णे , त्यांची जबाबदारी लक्षात घेऊन जलद हालचाल करण्यासाठी स्वराज्यातील
सिंदेि हन यिंत्रणा छत्रपतींनी मजबुत केली. ज्या हठकाणी लढाई होणार आहे अिा हठकाणांची इिंथभुत माहहती जलद
सिंपकु यिंत्रणेच्या माध्यमातुन तात्काळ वमळत असे. नेहमीच स्वराज्यामध्ये सिंपकु व्य स्थेला महत्वपूणु स्थान राहहले .
रयतेिी थेट संपकम- रयतेिी थेट सिंपकु हे छत्रपती जि ाजी महाराजांच्या सिंपकु व्य स्थेचे मुळ तत्व होते .
स्वराज्यातील प्रत्येक स्वारीच्या मोहहमेच्या ेळी छत्रपतींनी सुवनयोजीत अिी सिंपकु व्य स्था उभी केली. प्रिासन
व्य स्था चालव णे, तेथे िांतता सुव्य स्था वनमाण करणे हे या सिंपकु व्य स्थेमुळे सहज िक्य झाले . ित्रू गोटातील
माहहती अवतिय वबनचुक तातडीने काही काला धीमध्ये काढणे ती छत्रपती पयंत पोहचव णे हे या जलद सिंपकु
व्य स्थेमुळे िक्य झाले.
हरकारे - छत्रपती जि ाजी महाराज स्वराज्यातील पत्र व्य हार करण्यासाठी हरकारे नेमत असत. हे हरकारे
एका गा ाहू न दुसऱ्या गा ी सरकारी खाजगी पत्रे ाटण्याचे काम करीत असत. रायगड ते मुिंबई हे सुमारे 125 मैलांचे
अिंतर कापूण जाण्यासाठी छत्रपती जि ाजी महाराजांच्या एका हरकाऱ्याला पाच हद साचा काला धी लागला असा

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 312 | P a g e

सिंदभु वमळतो. हरकारे यांच्या बरोबर सांडणीस्वार , घोडेस्वार यांचाही या कामासाठी ापर केला जात असे. जलद पत्रे
ाटपाचे काम करणारे हरकारे घोडेस्वारापेक्षा ही जलदपणे टपालाचे ाटप करीत असत. हारकारे यांच्या दोन ते तीन
मैलाच्या अिंतरा र छोटया छोटया झोपडया असत. तेथे हरकारे बसत. पहहला हरकारा दुसऱ्या झोपडीत टपालाची
कपि ी नेऊन ठे ीत तेथे कपि ी घेण्यासाठी तयारीत असलेला हरकारा ती पटकन उचलून पळत पळत जाऊन
पुढच्या झोपडीत ती कपि ी ठे ी. सरकारी व्यापारी लोकांची स ु पत्रे याच प्दतीने पाठव ली जात असत.1
जलद व गुप्त संपकम यंत्रणा - छत्रपतींनी स्वराज्यात फारिी पत्र व्य हार करण्यासाठी पारसनीस नेमले
होते. ही जबाबदारी फारसी सिंस्कृत उत्तम येत असलेल्या नीळ प्रभू पारसनीस याच्या र टाकली होती. हे अलीबागचे
राहणारे येसाजी पारसनीस हे त्यांचे ना . पारसनीस म्हणजे फारिी पत्र व्य हार करणारा मुन्शी होय. 2 छत्रपतींच्या
सिंदेि हन यिंत्रणेमध्ये स्थावनक लोकांबरोबरच भटक्या परिं तु िूर जमातींचाही मोठ्या प्रमाणात उपयोग होत असे .
िंजारी सारख्या प्रामाणणक व श्वासू जमाती हे काम अवतिय चोखपणे बजा त असत. स्वराज्यामध्ये ज्यांना हे काम
हदले आहे त्याने ते अत्यिंत चोखपणे बजा ले.
संदेिवहन यंत्रणिे प्रकार- छत्रपतींच्या स्वराज्यामध्ये लष्करी , मुलकी परराष्टरीय अिा प्रकारची
सिंदेि हन यिंत्रणा कायुरत होती. परराष्टरीय व्य हाराची लष्करी पत्रे अवतिय गुप्त स्वरूपाची असत. मुलकी पत्र
व्य हार हा प्रांता-प्रांतानुसार केला जात असे. स्वराज्यातील महत्वाची पत्रे अत्यिंत गुप्त प्दतीने सांडणीस्वाराबरोबर
पाठव ली जात असत. त्याची अमलबजा णी अवतिय तातडीने होत असे.3
हे र व्यविेतून संपकम यंत्रणा - छत्रपतींनी ककल्ल्या रील ांधकाम अधधक मजबुत भक्कम होण्यासाठी
परकीयांचीही मदत घेतली ककल्ले व्य स्थापन श्रेष्ठ बनव ले. ज्या प्रमाणे ित्रू गोटातील लष्करी हालचालींची माहहती
काढण्यासाठी हे र पाठव ले जात त्याच प्दतीने दुर-दुरच्या कामाकरीता वनर-वनराळया प्रांतात हे र पाठव ले जात
असत. स्वराज्यामध्ये मोठ-मोठी बांधकामे करण्याकरीता परकीय ास्तुतिंज्ञांची मदत घेण्यासाठी मद्रास येथील
इिंग्रजांच्या फोटु सेंट जॉजु ककल्ल्याच्या मुख्य अधधकाऱ्याकडे त्यांनी आपल्या हे राबरोबर बांधकामा सिंदभात माहहती
वमळव ण्यासाठी पत्रे पाठव ल्याचा उल्लेख सापडतो.4
जलद संपकम यंत्रणा - छत्रपती जि ाजी महाराजांनी जलद गतीने सिंदेि हन यिंत्रणेचा ापर करून
आियुकारक व जय वमळव ले. सिंदेि हनाची गती ए ढी असे की रात्रीच्या रात्री इकडचा सिंदेि वतकडे सहजासहजी
पोहचत असे. स्वराज्यात टपाल बातम्या आहद. साठी त्वररत सिंदेि हनाची व्य स्था वनमाण करण्यात आली होती.5
एका जागेहून दुसऱ्या जागी बातमी पाठव ण्यासाठी टपाल से ेला खुप महत्व होते. वनरोपे ककिं ा जासूद खुष्कीच्या
मागाने पाठव ण्यात येत आणण सागरी मागाने जाणारी पत्रे जहाजातून जात असत. स्वराज्यातुन केलेल्या टपाल
व्य स्थेचे व जिष्ट असे प्रकार होते.6
टपाल सेवेिे नवनवध प्रकार- जलद सिंपकु यिंत्रणेसाठी छत्रपतींच्या स्वराज्यामध्ये टपालाचे व व ध प्रकार
होते. त्यामध्ये राजदरबाराची पत्रे , व्यापाऱ्यांची पत्रे , स ु सामान्य लोकांची पत्रे , सा कारांची पत्रे , ररष्ठ कवनष्ठ
प्रकारची पत्रे, गा कीची पत्रे, खाजगी पत्रे आहद. टपालांच्या प्रकारांचा समा ेि होत असे.7
प्रिासकीय नवभागातून दळणवळणािे कायम- स्वराज्यामध्ये छत्रपती जि ाजी महाराजांनी तळघाट, रघाट
आणण दे ि असे तीन प्रिासकीय व भाग केले होते. या प्रिासकीय व भागातून दळण ळणाचे कायु चालत असे. 8
घाटा र देखरे ख करणाऱ्या अधधकाऱ्याला घाटपांडे असे म्हणत. घाटमागा र गस्त घालण्याची घाटमागु सुरजक्षत

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 313 | P a g e

ठे ण्याची जबाबदारी घाटपांडे यांच्याकडेच होती. घाटपांडे आपल्या हाताखाली इतर अधधकारी गु ठे त असे
त्यांच्या कडू न अनेक कामे करून घेत असे. ए ढेच नव्हे तर त्यांच्या र देखरे ख ठे ण्याचे काम ही तो करीत असे.
घाटमागाच्या रक्षणासाठी घाटपांडे पुढील अधधकारी नेमत असे. त्यामध्ये मेटकरी, पानसरे , परकी, मोड ी, पत्की, डांगी,
घाटमेटे घाटे हे अधधकारी रस्ते दुरूस्तीमध्ये जकात व्य स्थेमध्ये घाटपांडे अधधकाऱ्याला मदत करीत असत.9
घाटमागम- पुणे सातारा जजल्हयांना जोडणारे सहयाद्रीतून जाणारे अनेक घाट रस्ते रायगड जजल्हयातुन जात
होते. बिंजारी लोक कोकणातुन घाट रस्त्या रून साताऱ्यािी धान्य वमठाची ाहतूक करीत असत. 10 स्वराज्यातील
घाट रस्त्यांचा उल्लेख खालील प्रमाणे करा ा लागेल. अिंबा घाट , कुिंभाली घाट, व िाल घाट, कपिंपरी घाट, कुिंडी घाट,
कुसूर घाट, कामथा घाट, माता घाट, रडतोंडी घाट िे ल्या घाट इ. अिा प्रकारे स्वराज्यातील सिंदेि हन यिंत्रणा कायु
करीत असे. 11 सहयाहद्रच्या रांगेत अनेक हठकाणी घाटमागु तयार झाले. नाणेघाट , बोरघाट, आिंबेनळी, पारघाट,
हातलोट, अिंबा घाट , आिंबोली, वत रा झखिंड , कुिंभाली घाट , फोंडा घाट , मळाझखिंड गैरे यातील आिंबेनळी कुभाली
घाटातून दे िा रून कोकणात मोठे मागु गेले आहे त. आिंबोली , उत्तर वत रा , दजक्षण वत रा आणण मळा या घाटातून
बैलगाडयाचे मागु आहे त. आणण पार घाट , हातलोट झखिंडीतून पाऊल ाटा होत्या. छत्रपती जि ाजी महाराजांनी
घाटाच्या सिंरक्षणासाठी अनेक दुगाची वनवमुती केली . कातळ्या घाट , तैलबैला, बोचेघौल, जसिंगापुरची नाळ या रील
देखरे खीसाठी जलिंगणा , रायगड हे ककल्ले बांधले. ढ ळया घाटा र ढ ळया ककल्ला , आिंबोली घाटा र महादे गड ,
रिं धा घाटा र का ळया ककल्ला , हातलोट घाटा र मकरिं दगड , पार आिंबेनळी घाटा र वनयिंत्रण ठे ण्यासठी
प्रतापगड हा ककल्ला बांधला.12
प्रनत संदेि वहन- स्वराज्यातील गड-ककल्ले सिंदिे हन यिंत्रणेमध्ये महत्वाची भूवमका बजा त असत.
छत्रपतींनी चचपळू ण ज ळ जिष्ठी नदी रील गोव दिं गड हा दाभोळ खाडीतील आरमाराला वनरोप पोहचव णे तेथून
येणारे वनरोप स्वराज्याची राजधानी ककल्ले रायगडा र पोहचव णे या सिंदेि हनातील दु ा म्हणुन हा ककल्ला महत्वाचे
काम करीत असे. ककल्ले गोव दिं गडा रून राजधानी रायगडा रील सिंदेिाची आग पेटव लेली हदसत असे. प्रवत सिंदेि
हनासाठी ककल्ले गोव दिं गडा र आग पेटव ली जात असे. अिा प्रकारे फारच कमी ेळात ही सिंदेि हन यिंत्रणा
एकमेकापयंत पोहचत असे. घाट मागा र चौक्या बसव ल्या होत्या. घाटा रील मुख्य अधधकाऱ्यास घाटपांडे असे
म्हटले जाई. घटपांडयाच्या मदतीला पानसरे , पथकदार, मोड ी, पत्की, डांगी, मेटकरी आहद. अधधकारी असत. 13
छत्रपतींच्या कालखिंडामध्ये ककल्ले मकरिं दगडा रून ासोटा प्रतापगड ककल्ल्यां रती सिंपकु ठे ता येत असे . ककल्ले
मकरिं दगड ककल्ले प्रतापगडाचा सहाय्यक ककल्ला म्हणून काम करीत असे. त्याच बरोबर या ककल्ल्या रून हातलोट
घाटा र वनयिंत्रण ठे ण्याचे काम केले जात असे.14
वाहतूकीवर ननयंत्रण- एका चौकीपासुन दुस-या चौकी पयुतच्या घटातील रस्त्या र प्र ािांना सिंरक्षण
देण्याचे काम पथकी यांच्याकडे असे. या कामासाठी पथकीला गुजर हे अधधकारी मदत करत असत. घाटपांडेचा
कारकुण म्हणुन गुमास्ते ककिं ा मुताजलक यांना काम करा े लागत असे. प्र ािांना सिंरक्षण देणे ाहतूकी र वनयिंत्रण
ठे णे ही दोन कामे चौक्यांना करा ी लागत असत. छत्रपती जि ाजी महाराजांच्या काळामध्ये पारनेर येथील पोळ
जि ाजी गोव दिं जोस याला घाटपांडे पद देण्यात आले होते. या घाट मागा रून अवतिय जलद अिी सिंदेि हन
यिंत्रणा ापरली जात होती .
जलद दळणवळणािी साधने - डोंगराळ प्रदे िातुन जलद गतीने दळण ळण करणे अ घड होते. त्यासाठी

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 314 | P a g e

जलद गतीने अिंतर तोडण्यासाठी घोडयाचा उपयोग केला जात असे. घोडे , हत्ती, उिं ट, बैल, गाई गैरे प्राण्यांची व्य स्था
स्वराज्यामध्ये चांगली ठे व ली होती. चांगल्या जातीची घोडी स्वराज्यात होती. छत्रपती जि ाजी महाराज स्वतः
घोडयाची पारक करून घोडी स्वराज्यात ठे व त असत. प्राण्यास दाणा , घास, ग त गैरे ेळच्या ेळी देणे. अिा
बाबतीत ही बिंदोबस्ताचे वनयम केले होते.15
जलद संपकम यंत्रणेसाठी प्रकाि व ध्वनीिा वापर- एका ककल्ल्या रून दुसऱ्या ककल्ल्या र जलद
पोहचणारी सिंदेि हन यिंत्रणा छत्रपतींनी उभी केली यु्दरचनेचे अवतिय योग्य असे वनयोजन केले . छत्रपतींनी
हद स रात्र या दोन्हीही गोष्टी डोळयासमोर ठे ऊन सिंदेि हन यिंत्रणा राबव ली. छत्रपतींनी जलद सिंपकु यिंत्रणेसाठी
ध्वनीचा अवतिय योग्य प्दतीने ापर केला. ककल्ले रायगड रून ही सिंदेि हन यिंत्रणा कायुरत केली जात असे. 16
रायगड हा ज ळ ज ळ 65 ककल्ल्यांच्या गराड्यात आहे. या ककल्ल्या रून सिंपकुयिंत्रणेचे केलेले वनयोजन अवतिय
श्रेष्ठ दजाचे होते. तोफेचा नगाऱ्याचा केलेला आ ाज त्याचबरोबर व व ध नस्पतींचा धुर हे सिंपकु यिंत्रणेचे श्रेष्ठ
माध्यम होते. ग ताच्या गिंजी पेटव णे ेग ेगळया नस्पतींचा धुर या माध्यमातुनही ध्वनी सिंपकु यिंत्रणा स्वराज्यात
मोठ्या प्रमाणात ापरली जात होती.17
संपकमयंत्रनेिे नवशिष्ट्य असे ननयम - छत्रपती जि ाजी महाराजांनी व चारिीलतेच्या जोरा र उत्कृष्ठ
प्रकारची सिंपकु व्य स्था सिंदेि हन यिंत्रणा ापरली. ध्वनी आणण प्रकाि यांचा ापर करून छत्रपतींनी ही व्य स्था
श्रेष्ठ बनव ली. ककती तरी ककलो वमटरचे अिंतर कापून छत्रपतींची सिंदेि हन यिंत्रणा काही वमवनटात कायु करीत
असे.18 छत्रपतींनी उभा केलेले क्तगरीदुगु उिं च ट्या र म्हणजेच डोंगर-प ुत कड्या र उभा असल्यामुळे एका गडा रून
दुसऱ्या गडा र सिंदेि पाठव णे सहज िक्य होत असे. एका गडा रून दुसऱ्या गडा र सिंदेि पाठव ण्यासाठी छत्रपती
नेहमी सज्ज असत. छणाचाही व लिंब न होता एका गडा रील सिंदेि दुसऱ्या गडा र जात असे. छत्रपतींनी सिंदेि
हनाचे सिंपकुयिंत्रनेचे व जिष्टय असे वनयम बनव ले होते. जाळ करून , धुर करून, आगटया पेट ून , टेंबा करून ,
अ ाज काढु न अिा नानाव ध प्रकारे प्रत्येक गड-ककल्ल्या र सिंदेि जात असे. त्यामुळे जलद हालचाली करून आपले
ध्येय साध्य करता येत असे. ककल्ले रांगणा रती खोत ाडीच्या ज ळच्या एका भव्य डोंगरात 6 बाय 7 फुट
आकाराच्या दगडा र क्रांतीज्योत उभारण्यात आली आहे . या दगडास जोगा धोंडा म्हणतात. या दगडाचे ैजिष्ट म्हणजे
या दगडा रून रांगणा ककल्ल्या र पेटव लेली गिंजी हदसते. छत्रपतींच्या कालखिंडामध्ये सुरजक्षतेसाठी सिंदेि ाहकाचा
ापर ककती कल्पकतेने केला होता याची कल्पना येते. 19
टपालसेवा- एका जागेहून दुसऱ्या जागी बातमी पाठव ण्यासाठी टपाल से ा उपलब्ध होती. खुष्कीच्या मागाने
जासुद ककिं ा वनरोप पाठ ण्यात येत असे तर सागरी मागाने जाणारी पत्रे जहाजातून जात असत. 20 अिी टपाल
व्य स्था दोन प्रकारे केली जात असे. सरकारी टपाल आणण व्यापारी टपाल होय. कल्याण ते कािी , कल्याण ते मुिंबई,
पुणे ते नाजिक-त्र्यिंबक , ग्वाल्हेर ते सातारा , मुिंबई ते बेलापूर , पुणे ते बदामी , पुणे ते हदल्ली , माहे श्वर ते हदल्ली आणण
थालनेर ते हदल्ली अिी टपालसे ा चालू होती. काही हठकाणी उिं टा रून टपाल ाहतूक करण्यात येत असे. सिंदेि
हनासाठी छत्रपतींनी ककल्ले पन्हाळे दग
ु ु हा कोकणात ककल्ला बांधला. ककल्ले रायगडाचा सिंदेि हनाचे माध्यम
म्हणून ापर केला जात असे. छत्रपतींनी दजक्षण हदग्वीजयाच्या ेळी सुसज्ज अिी पॉडेचरी ते पन्हाळा अिी सिंपकु
यिंत्रणा उभी केली होती. 21

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 315 | P a g e

सारांि-
स्वराज्यातील गड-ककल्ले म्हणजे स्वराज्यातील सिंपकु व्य स्थेची केंद्रे होती. छत्रपती जि ाजी महाराजांनी
नेहमीच जलद चपळ सिंदेि हना र लक्ष केंहद्रत केले. छत्रपतींनी ेळो ेळी अचुक माहहती वमळव ण्यासाठी चपळ
सिंदेि हन यिंत्रणेचा नेहमी ापर केला. स्वराज्यातील टपाल व्य स्थेची महहती परकीय प्र ासी अॄबेकॄरे , थ ेनॉट,
टर व्ह
ॄ नीयर इत्यादींच्या प्र ास णुनात आली आहे . दळण ळण किा प्दतीने केले जात होते. कसे केले जात होते.
सुरजक्षतता किी होती याचे सिंपूणु चचत्रण या प्र ास णुनात हदसून येते. जलद सिंदेि हण यिंत्रणे र छत्रपतींनी लक्ष
केंहद्रत करून त्यातुन महत्वपूणु व जय वमळव ले . म्हणूनच जलद सिंदेि हन यिंत्रणेचे सूत्र जगाला देणारे छत्रपती
जि ाजी महाराज हे स ुश्रेष्ठ राजे होत.

संदभम ग्रंथ -
1. खोबरे कर व . गो, भारतीय इवतहास आणण सिंस्कृती, मुिंबई, जाने-माचु 2005, पृष्ठ 55.
2. कुलकणी भीमरा , छत्रपती जि ाजी महाराजांचे आद्य चररत्र सभासद बखर, अनमोल प्रकािन, पुण,े पृष्ठ 126.
3. मढ ी काजिनाथ, जगातील स ोत्तम राजा छ. जि ाजी महाराज, सिंस्कृती प्रकािन, पुण,े 2012, पृष्ठ 192 .
4. भास्कर ामन, जि ाजीची राजनीती, धुळे, 1941, पृष्ठ 308.
5. मढ ी काजिनाथ, जगातील स ोत्तम राजा छ. जि ाजी महाराज, सिंस्कृती प्रकािन, पुण,े 2012, पृष्ठ 379.
6. चचटणीस कृ. ना, मध्ययुगीन भारतीय सिंकल्पना सिंस्था (भाग 3), पुण,े 1982, पृष्ठ 113.
7. खोबरे कर व . गो, भारतीय इवतहास आणण सिंस्कृती, जाने-माचु 2005, पृष्ठ 55.
8. कुलकणी अ.रा (सिंपा), अज्ञापत्र, पुण,े 2007, पृष्ठ 50.
9. कुलकणी अ.रा ग.ह. खरे (सिंपा), मराठ्यांचा इवतहास (खिंड 1), पुण,े 2006, पृष्ठ 349.
10. चौधरी कक. का, (सिंपा), महाराष्टर राज्य गॄझेकटअर, रायगड जजल्हा, मुिंबई, 1993, पृष्ठ 474.
11. जाध नामदे रा , गवनमी का ा, मुिंबई, 2011, पृष्ठ 448 449.
12. महाराष्टर राज्य गॄझेकटअर, सातारा जजल्हा, 1993, पृष्ठ 823.
13. चौधरी कक. का [सिंपा], महाराष्टर राज्य गॄझेकटअर, सातारा जजल्हा, 1993, पृष्ठ 823.
14. जोिी पु. म, मराठ्यांचा इवतहास [खिंड 1], पुण,े 1984, पृष्ठ 150.
15. चचटणीस कृ.ना, मध्ययुगीन भारतीय सिंकल्पना सिंस्था [भाग 4], पुण,े 1985, पृष्ठ 111.
16. खोबरे कर व . गो, जि काल, मुिंबई, 2006, पृष्ठ 481.
17. सरदेसाई गो.व , मराठी ररयासत, मुिंबई, १९८८, पृष्ठ 378.
18. कुलकणी अ.रा (सिंपा), अज्ञापत्र, पुण,े 2007, पृष्ठ 55.
19. दै. पुढारी, हद. 19 फेब्रु ारी 2017.
20. भोसले बी. के [सिंपा], रायगड जजल्हयातील पाऊलखुणा, पन ेल, 2014, पृष्ठ 12.
21. खोबरे कर व .गो [सिंपा], भारतीय इवतहास आणण सिंस्कृती, जाने-माचु 2005, पृष्ठ 55.

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 316 | P a g e

 नव्वदोत्तरी काळातील दशलत स्त्रियांिी आत्मकथने

प्रा. अजुमन बंडू राठोड

सहा. प्राध्यापक, मराठी व भाग, पद्मभूषण सिंतरा दादा पाटील महाव द्यालय,
क ठे महांकाळ जज. सांगली -४१६४०५
मो. 8390060862
ईमेल: [email protected]

मराठी साहहत्यामध्ये दजलत ाङ्मयाचे स्वरूप लक्षणीय आहे . प्रामुख्याने दजलत साहहत्यामध्ये दजलत समाज
जी नाचे चचत्रन आढळते. ‘‘आिकथने’’ ही दजलत साहहत्याचा आिा आहे. दजलत ाङ्मयीन प्र ाहात आिकथनिं
पुष्कळ प्रमाणात जलहीली गेली. त्यातील आिय आणण अव ष्कार अवतषय मह त्वाचे आहे. त्यांमधून जगण्याच्या अनेक
पैलुिंचे दषुन घडते. दजलत आिकथनांमधून त्या जी नाचे ास्त व स्ताराने अधभव्यक्त झालेले हदसते. आपले
जी नदिुन घडव ण्यासाठी त्यांना आिचररत्र जलहा याचे नव्हते तर , आपल्या आिपर अनुभ ांच्या वन ेदनाच्या
वनवमुतीने सामाजजक व्य स्थेने त्यांच्या र लादलेल्या जी नाचे सत्य स्वरूप ाचकांसमोर आना याचे हाते . व्यक्ती
आणण समाज यांचा कालसिंदभात परामिु घेऊन ास्त मांडण्याचा प्रयत्न दजलत आिकथनांमधून झालेला हदसतो.
यामुळे या लेखनाला ेगळे पण प्राप्त झाले आहे . कोणत्याही साहहत्याच्या वनवमुतीची बीजे जी नातील ास्त ात
असतात. म्हणून जी नाच्या व व ध आयामांचा सिंबिंध साहहत्यािी असतो. जी न जगत असताना अनेक प्रश्न , समस्या
वनमान होतात. ते कधीकधी तीव्र होऊन व व ध व चारांना चालना वमळते. त्यातून चळ ळ उभी राहते.
डॉ. बाबासाहेब आिंबेडकरांच्या प्रेरणेमुळे दजलत समाज जागृत झाला. आणण प्रस्थाकपत व्य स्थेला फार मोठा
धक्का हदला. त्यांच्या रील होणाऱ्या अन्यायाला आपल्या लेखनीच्या माध्यमातून ाट मोकळी करून हदली. आपले
प्रश्न समस्या, अन्याय, षोषन इत्यादींना वनधभुडपणे मांडण्याचा प्रयत्न केला. हे सगळे डॉ. बाबासाहेब आिंबेडकर यांच्या

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 317 | P a g e

प्ररणेमुळे पाहा यास वमळते. त्याच्या प्रेरणेमुळे दजलत साहहत्याला चालना वमळाली. अनेक जन अवतिय परखडपणे
आपली भूवमका मांडू लागले. यामध्ये आिकथने ही अवतिय मह Ÿ ाची ठरतात. दजलत आिकथनांनी ाचकांचे लक्ष
ेधून घेतले. यामध्ये प्रामुख्याने उचल्या , तराळ-अिंतराळ, उपरा, बलुतिं, अक्करमािी, आठ नींचे पक्षी, आयदान, जजनिं
आमुचिं यांसारख्या आिकथनांनी मराठी साहहत्यात प्रचिंड लोककप्रयता वमळ ली. आपले ेगळे अस्तस्तत्व वनमान केले.
ज्याप्रमाने दजलत पुरूष आिकथनांनी लोककप्रयता वमळ ली , अगदी त्यांच्याच बरोबरीने दजलत स्त्रस्त्रयांच्या
आिकथनांनी आपली ेगळी ओळख वनमान केली. दजलत साहहत्यामध्ये दजलत स्त्रीयांच्या आिकथनांचे योगदान
अवतषय मोलाचे आहे. इ.स. 1980 निंतर दजलत स्त्रीयांची आिकथने प्रकाजित होण्यास मोठ्या प्रमानात सुरु ात
झाली. ज्याप्रमाने पुरुष लेखकांची आिकथने व िेष गाजली. त्यातुलनेत स्त्रस्त्रयांची आिकथने काही अिंिी दुलुजक्षत
राहहली. काही ठराव क आिकथनांची चचा झाली. मात्र , के ळ दजलत स्त्रस्त्रयांच्या आिकथनां र व िेष प्रकाि
पडलेला हदसत नाही. दजलत स्त्रीयांनी जलहीलेल्या आिकथनांतून त्यांची व्यक्तक्तगत प्रेरणा ही ेग ेगळी आहे . परिं तु
त्यांच्या र असलेला आिंबेडकरी व चारांचा प्रभा आणण त्यातून उदयास आलेली आििोधाची प्रकक्रया ही समान आहे .
असे दजलत स्त्री आिकथनांतून आपल्या लक्षात येते.

दशलत स्त्रियांच्या आत्मकथनांिे स्वरूप:

आधुवनकतेने अनेक बदल झाले. त्यामध्ये स्त्रीयांच्या जी नाचे अनेक मागु तयार झाले. अनेक स्त्रस्त्रया
स्वतःच्या जगण्या र आपल्या लेखनीच्या माध्यमातून समाजामध्ये वमळनारी ागनूक प्रवतवबिंवबत करू लागल्यााा.
भारत स्वतिंत्र होऊन काही दिके उलटली परिं तु स्त्रस्त्रयांचे मुळ प्रश्न हे स ु स्त्रयांचे प्राथेवनधधक आहे त . असे दजलत स्त्री
आिकथनांमधून पाहा यास वमळते. ज्याप्रमाने दजलत स्त्री धमु-जात गाच्या , आधुवनकतेच्या तसेच सामाजजक ,
िैक्षणणक आधथुक पातळी र कौडीमोल झाल्याचे हदसून येते. अगदी त्याचप्रमान मध्यम क्तगय
ु उच्चजातीय
कुटु ब
िं ातल्या स्त्रीयांचे देखील असेच प्रश्न वनमाण झाल्याचे पाहा यास वमळते. स्त्री जी नामध्ये दजलत , आहद ासी,
कष्टकरी, मुस्लीम, कामगार अषा अनेक प्रकारच्या स्त्रीया आहे त. या स्त्रीजी नामध्ये त्यांना जी न जगत असताना
समाजात ा रत असताना असिंख्य समस्या त्यांच्यासमोर आ ासून उभ्या होत्या. म्हणून ज्याप्रकारे दजलत पुरुष
आिकथनांनी आपले हक्क व व ध प्रश्न आिकथनाच्या माध्यमातून समाजासमोर आणन्याचा प्रयत्न केला. अगदी
त्याचप्रमान दजलत स्त्रस्त्रयांनीसुद्धा आपले होणारे िोषन , अन्याय अत्याचार , आपले हक्क आणण प्रस्थाकपत
समाजव्य स्था इत्यादींमूळे भोगा े लागनारे दुःख जलखीत स्वरूपामध्ये पुढे यायला पाहीजे. आपले जगने कुठे तरी
जोडू न पाहीले पाहीजे. अषी भूवमका अनेक दजलत स्त्रस्त्रयांनी घेतली. दजलत स्त्रस्त्रयांच्या आिचररत्र जलहीण्याच्यामागील
प्रेरणा पाहहल्या तर असे हदसते , की या स्त्रस्त्रया आपल्या जातीचे घडने व स्ताराने मांडतात. उदा. बेबी कांबळे यांचे जजनिं
आमुचिं या आिकथनाची कारणमीमांसा करताना त्या म्हणतात, ‘‘माझे लेखन हे माझ्या पुढच्या कपढीतील पोरीबाळी
लेकीसुनांसाठी आहे. आपण बजुजनबगातील महार जातीमध्ये असल्याने कमीपणा का बाळगा ा ? आपले प्रेरणस्थान
डॉ. बाबासाहेब असताना आपन षोषीत का राहा े. तसेच प्रस्थाकपत व्य स्थेला आपन आपल्या हक्क आणण
अधधकारांसाठी प्रश्न का व चारू नये ?’’ अिाप्रकारचे स्फुवतुदायक लेखन त्यांच्या आिकथनांमध्ये आढळते. दजलत
स्त्रस्त्रयांच्या आिकथनांचे स्वरूप ैव ध्यपूणु आहे . यातील समाजजी न दाररद्र्याने कपचलेले आणण गरीबीने दुबळे
झालेले आहे. प्रस्थाकपत समाजात प्रचिंड अस्पृश्यता होती. त्यामुळे दजलतांचे मोठ्या प्रमाणात िोषन व्हायचे. त्यांना पिू

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 318 | P a g e

प्रमाने ागनूक वमळायची. त्यांना कधीच आपले हक्क आणण पूणुपने वमळाले नाही. उच्च वनुयांनी जातीव्य स्थेला
प्रमान माणून आपले सामाजजक तुनाला चालना हदलेली आहे . जात पिंचायत , रुढी, अिंधश्रद्धा आणण परिं परे मुळे कायम
दजलतांच्या ाट्यालाच िोषन आलेले आहे . त्यामुळे दजलतांचे जी न हे अधधक कष्टप्राय आणण हदिाहीन झालेले आहे .
दजलत स्त्री आिकथनांचे स्वरूप पाहता प्रामुख्याने आजच्या बौद्ध आणण पू ाश्रमीच्या महार समाजातील स्त्रस्त्रयांचे
प्रमान जास्त आहे. त्यांचे कारण या समाजा र आिंबेडकर चळ ळीचा आणण व चारांचा प्रभा अधधक आहे . ‘जिका ,
सिंघटीत व्हा आणण सिंघषु करा. ’ या आिंबेडकरी व चारसुत्राचे माठ्याप्रमानात अनुकरन या समाजाने केले आहे . म्हणून
दजलत स्त्रस्त्रयांची लेखनी प्रखर झालेली हदसून येते. दजलत स्त्री आिकथने ही ेदनादायी जी नाची पररपूणु उदाहरणे
आहे ता. ही आिकथने मराठी साहहत्याचे मौजलक धन आहे . साहहत्यातील प्रभा ी ाङ्मयप्रकार म्हणून दजलत स्त्री
आिकथनांना आज पवतष्ठा प्राप्त झाली आहे .

नव्वोदोत्तरी काळातील दशलत स्त्रियांिी ननवडक आत्मकथने:

स्वातिंत्र्योत्तर कालखिंडानिंतर दजलत साहहत्यप्र ाह उद्यास आल्यानिंतर समाजातील भयानक व षमता
साहहत्याच्या माध्यमातून समोर आली. डॉ. बाबसाहेब आिंबेडकरांच्या प्रेरणेमुळे दजलत समाजाला आपल्या अन्यायाची
जाणी झाली. स्त्रस्त्रयांना जी हीन ागणून समाजात वमळत होती , त्यासाठी काही सुजिक्षीत स्त्रस्त्रयांनी चळ ळीच्या
माध्यमातून अनेक प्रश्नांना हात घातला. त्यामुळे स्त्रस्त्रयांना आपल्या कतुव्याची जाणी झाली. ज्याप्रमाने पुरुषांनी
आपल्या जी नातील ास्तव कता मांडली. त्याचप्रमान स्त्रस्त्रयांनीही आपल्या जी नाची कहाणी िब्दांमध्ये िब्दबद्ध
केली. दजलत स्त्री आिकथनाला अिंिीच्या दिकात खरी चालना वमळाली नव्वदच्या दषकानिंतर स्त्री आिकथनांनी
मराठी साहहत्यात ेगळे स्थान प्राप्त केले. या दोन दषकातील स्त्रस्त्रयांची आिकथने पचिंड लोककप्रय झाली. कारण
त्यातध्ये स्त्रस्त्रजी नाची दाहकता, स्त्रस्त्रयांचा व द्रोह, स्त्रस्त्रयांचे समाजातील स्थान त्यांचे कष्टप्राय जी न आत्कथनांच्या
माध्यमातून पाहा यास वमळाले. या दोन दिकातील आिकथनांचा व चार केला तर , प्रामुख्याने मुक्ता स ुगौड
(वमटलेली क ाडे) , िांता कांबळे (माज्या जन्माची चच त्तरकथा), व मल मारे (वतन दगडाची चूल) , जनाबाई
क्तगÚहे(मरणकळा), कुमुद पा डे (अिंतःस्फोट) , बेबी कांबळे (जजनिं आमुचिं) इ. मह त्वाच्या स्त्रस्त्रयांनी आपले जी न
िब्दबद्ध केले. तसेच नव्वदीनिंतर - मिंगला के ळे (जगायचिं प्रत्येक सेकिंद) , उवमुला प ार (आयदान) , यिोधरा
गायक ाड (माझी मी), जसिंधुताई सपकाळ (मी न ासी) , नजुबाई गा ीत (आदोर), मजलका अमरिेख (मला उद्धस्व
व्हायचिंय!) इ. स्त्रस्त्रयांची आत्ककथने व िेष गाजली. या रील स ु दजलत स्त्रस्त्रयांच्या आिकथनांचा व चार करता या
आिकथनांमध्ये औतरनारी स्त्री ही दुहेरी गुलामक्तगरीत जी न जगत होती. ही स्त्री ेग ेगळ्या भूवमकेतून अ तरते. ती
षोषीत आहे , व कक्रचे जना र आहे , ेष्या आहे , दररद्री अपमानकारक दुःखी , कष्टकरी आहे. दुस Úया बाजूने ती
मायाळू , ममता ा कुटु ब
िं ाचा भार पेलणारी, श्रम करनारी, पुरुषाला हहम्मत देणारी, कत्या धत्या, चाररत्र्य जपनारी अिी
अ स्था नव्वदच्या दिकात पाहायला वमळते. ती वबिंधास्तपन आपले जी न लेखनबद्ध करताना हदसते.
‘मरणकळा’ हे जनाबाई क्तगऱ्हे यांनी जलहीलेले आिकथन बालपन , कषक्षणासाठी सिंघषु , व ाह, नोकरी,
सिंसार या क्रमाने उलगडत जाते. त्यांनी ज्या ेदना , कळा सोसल्या होत्या त्या त्यांनी आपल्या कथनातून नमूद केल्या
आहे त. ‘माझी मी’ या आिकथनामध्ये यिोधरा गायक ाड यांनी आपलिं घरटिं बांधताना पक्ष्यामध्येही नर-मादी
काडीकाडी जम ून घरटे बांधतात. पण आपण माणूस असून आपल्या सिंसाराचे घरकुल एकटीने कोणाच्या

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 319 | P a g e

आधाराजि ाय तयार केलेाेले हदसते. ‘मी न ासी’ मध्ये जसिंधूताईंनी कोणत्याही मायेच्या , नात्याच्या रक्ताच्या
माणसापासून त्यांना एकटीला ेगळे जगा े लागले. म्हणून त्यांनी अवतषय भयानक प्रसिंगांची उकल केलेली आहे .
‘जगायचिं प्रत्येक सेकिंद’ या आिकथनामध्ये मिंगला के ळे यांनी आपली सिंसारीक कहाणी मांडली आहे . अनेक
अडचनी, राहण्याखाण्याची भ्रांत तरीही मेहणतीने यि प्राप्त करण्याची जजद्द या त्यांच्या आिकथनात पाहायला
वमळते. ‘आयदान’ मध्ये उवमुला प ार यांनी आपले बालपन हलाखीत गेलेले पण , सासरी जा ून सुखी कुटु ब
िं कसे
होते? याचे णुन केलेले आहे. तसेच नजुबाई गा ीत यांनी ‘आदोर’ मधुन आपल्या जी नातील अनुभ अवतिय
प्रमाणणक प्रांजळपणे मांडले आहे त. ‘ तीन दगडाची चूल’ मध्ये व मल मोरे यांनी भटक्या व मुक्त समाजान
अिंधश्रद्धे मुळे अन्याय अत्याचार कसे होतात याचे सुिंदर णुन केलेल आहे त . ‘मला उद्ध स्त व्हायचय!’ मध्ये मजलका
अमर िेख यांनी स्त्रस्त्रला आपलिं मन मारून कसिं जगा िं लागतिं याचे दिुन घडव ले आहे .
दजलत स्त्री आिकथनांनी समाजिास्त्राला आणण भाषािास्त्राला अनेक न े व षय हदले आहे त . दजलत स्त्री
अनेक अडचणी र मात करत जिकली. सामाजजक कौटु िंवबक िोषन भोगून वतने आपले मनोगत आिकथनातून
प्रकट केले. एकून स्त्री आिकथनांचा षोध घेतल्यानिंतर कोणत्याही समाजामध्ये स्त्रस्त्रयांना उच्च दजाचे स्थान नव्हते .
वतला कायम स ु अधधकारांपासून ेगळे ठे लेले आहे . हे स्पष्ट होते. उच्चा णीय स्त्री पेक्षा दजलत समाजावतल स्त्रस्त्रचे
दजलत म्हणून दुहेरी षोषन झालेले आहे असे हदसून येते.

संदभमग्रंथ:
1. मुलाटे ासुदे , ‘दजलतांचे आिकथने सिंकल्पना स्वरूप’ , स्वरूप प्रकािन औरिं गाबाद , प्रथमा त्त
ृ ी जाने ारी,
1999
2. जाध मनोहर, ‘दजलत स्त्रस्त्रयांची आिकथनेः स्वरूप आणण चचककत्सा’ , सुव द्या प्रकािन, पुण,े पुथमा ृत्ती, 26
जाने ारी, 2001
3. गरूड िामल, ‘दजलत स्त्री आिकथने’ यिश्री प्रकािन,
4. कुलकणी आरती, ‘दजलत स्वकथने’, व जय प्रकािन, नागपूर
5. कऱ्हाडे सदा, ‘दजलत साहहत्य चचककत्सा’, स्वरूप प्रकािन, औरिं गाबाद
6. मांडे प्रभाकर, ‘दजलत साहहत्याचे वनराळे पण’, गोदा री प्रकािन, अहमदनगर

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 320 | P a g e

 भारताच्या वन ववकासामध्ये शासकीय, ऄशासकीय संघटनांची अवण स्थावनक समुदायाची भूवमका

Miss. Mane S.G

Assistant Professor (CHB) , P.V.P. Mahavidyalaya Kavathe Mahankal,
Dist. Sangli.

सारांश –
मानवाच्या सभोवताली असलेल्या पररदथथतीस पयायवरण असे म्हणतात. पयायवरणामध्ये मानवासाठी आवश्यक अनेक
नैसदगयक साधनसपिं त्ती आढळतात. त्यामध्ये मृदा, पाणी, वने, हवा अशा अनेक आहेत. त्यापैकी वनािंचे महत्व मानवासाठी
महत्वपणू य आहे. भारताची प्रचिंढ लोकसख्िं या वाढल्यामळ ु े मानवाने वसाहतीसाठी, उद्योगधद्यिं ासाठी मोठ्या प्रमाणात वृक्षतोड
के ल्याने दनवयनीकरण झालेले ददसनू येते. त्याचे दष्ु पररणाम कमी करण्यासाठी भारताने यावर ठोस उपययोजना राबदवण्यासाठी
अनेक सघिं टना थथापन के लेल्या आहेत. या सघिं टनाचिं ा पररपाक म्हणनू थोडेफार भारतामध्ये वनक्षेत्र वाढलेले ददसनू येते.

प्रस्तावना –
मानव ज्या दठकाणी राहतो, त्याच्या सभोवती असलैलया पररदथथतीस ‘पयायवरण’ म्हणतात. पयायवरणातील वनथपती हा
एक महत्वाचा घटक असनू त्याचे थथान अदतशय महत्वाचे आहे. हवामान, जदमनीच्या सपु ीकतेच्या दृदिकोनातनु , पाऊस
पारडण्यामध्ये, प्रदषू ण नाहीशे करण्यासाठी, पररदथथतीकाचा समतोल राखण्यासाठी वने अदतशय महत्वाची भदू मका पार पाडतात,
भारताच्या प्रचिंड तोकसख्िं येचा ताण 'बने' या नैसदगयक साधनसक्त
िं ीवर येत आहे सामळ ु े दनवयणीकरण मोत आहे व साचे अनेक
दष्ु पररणाम ददसत आहेत. सामध्ये पजयन्यावर पररणाम, वाढते प्रदषू ण, जदमनीची वाढती धपू परू ािंचे वाढते प्रमाण दष्ु काळ, वन्य
पशपु क्षीनामीस होणे, वारे व वादळािंची दनदमयती के पररणाम ददसनू येत आहेत.. भारत वनदथथती अहवाल 2021 नसु ार देशाचे
एकूण वनक्षेत्र 7.13,789 चौ. दकलोमीटर आहे जे देशाच्या भौगोदलक क्षेत्राच्या 21.729 आहे. एकूण वन आदण वृक्ष क्षेत्र एकूण
औलोदलत क्षेत्राच्या 24.62% खढे आहे. भारत वन दथथती अहवाल 2019 च्या तल ु नेत, देशाच्या एकूण वनक्षेत्रात 1540 चौ.
ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 321 | P a g e
दकलोमीटरने वाढ झाली आहे. वृक्षाच्छाददत क्षेत्र 721 चौ. दकलोमीटरने वाढले आहे आदण राष्रीय थतरावर एकूण वन आदण
वृक्षाच्छादन क्षेत्र 2261 चौ, दकलोमीटरने वाढले आहे. तरीदेखील क्षेत्रफळाच्या तल
ु नेने ते कमी आहे.

ऄभ्यासाची उवदष्टे:-
१) नैसदगयक साधनसपिं त्ती (वने) यािंच्या वापराबाबत जनजागृती दनमायण करणे.
२) वन दवकासात काययरत सघिं टनािंचा अभ्यास करणे,

मावहती स्त्रोत अवण पद्धत :-

सश
िं ोधन पेपरमध्ये दमळवलेली मादहती ही मादहतीचा दय्ु यम स्त्रोत वापरून दमळवली आहे. ही मादहती मनेक पथु तके ,
सदिं भय ग्रिंथ तसेच वेबसाईटचा वापर करून दमळदवली आहे. दमळालेसा मादहतीचे सक िं लन, दवश्ले षण करून निंतर सावरून दनष्कषय
काढला आहे.

ऄभ्यास िेत्रः
अभ्यासासाठी दनवडलेले क्षेत्र के सपिं णू य भारत देश आहे. भारत का देश जगाच्या नकाशात उत्तर-आदण पवू य गोलाधायत
आहे तो आदशया खिंडाच्या ददक्षण भागात मध्यवती आहे, भारताचा अक्षवृत्तीय दवथतार 8’4’28” उत्तर ते 37o6’53” उत्तर आहे.
रे खावृत्तीय दवथतार 68o7’33” व 97o24’47” पवू य असा आहे.

वन ववकासातील महत्त्वाच्या शासकीय संघटना :

वनािंचे महत्व लक्षात घेता व दनवयनीकरणामळ
ु े होणारे दष्ु पररणाम कमी करण्यासाठी भारतामध्ये अनेक शासकीय सघिं टना
कायय करत आहेत,
1) राष्ट्रीय वनीकरण अवण पाररवस्थतीकी ववकास मंडळ (NAEB)-
ही सघिं टना 1992 मध्ये देशामध्ये वनीकरण, वृक्षलागवड पाररदथथतीकी पनु यथथापना, पररदथथतीकी
दवकासाला चालना देण्यासाठी थथापन करण्यात आली आहे.

NAEB ची भूवमका अवण काये :

दनकृ ि वनक्षेत्र आदण लगतच्या जदमनीच्या पयायवरणीय पनु संचयनासाठी पद्धतशीर दनयोजन आदण अिंमलबजावणीद्रारे
खचय प्रभावी पद्धतीने यिंत्रणा दवकदसत करणे,
पयायवरणीय सरु क्षेसाठी आदण ग्रामीण समदु ायािंच्या इधिं न लाकूड चारा आदण इतर गरजा पणू य करण्यासाठी नैसदगयक
पनु रुत्पादन दकिंवा योग्य हथतक्षेपाद्रारे देशातील वनक्षेत्र पनु संचदयत करणे
या वथतिंच्ू या मागणीची पतू यता करण्यासाठी दनकृ ि जिंगल आदण लगतच्या जदमनीवर इधिं न लाकूड, चारा, आदण इतर
वनक्षेत्र पनु थयचदथत करणे,
दनकृ ि वनक्षेत्र आदण लगतच्या जदमनीच्या पनु रुत्पादन आदण दवकासासाठी नवीन आदण योग्य तिंत्रज्ञानाचा वापर प्रसार
करण्यासाठी सश िं ोधन आदण सश िं ोधन दनष्कषायचा दवथतार करणे,
सामान्य जागरुकता दनमायण करणे मादण थवयिंसवे ी सथिं था अशासकीय सथिं था, पिंचायती राज सथिं था आदण इतरािंच्या
मदतीने वनीकरण आदण पयायवरणीय दवकासाला चालना देण्यासाठी लोक चळवळीला चालना देण्यासाठी मदत करा आदण
दनष्कृ ि वनक्षेत्र, आदण लगतच्या जदमनीच्या सहभागात्मक आदण शाश्वत अवथथापनाला प्रोत्साहन दया.
वनीकरण, वृक्ष लागवड, पयायवरणीय पनु संचदयत आदण पयायवरणीय दवकास उपक्रमािंना चालना देण्यासाठी आवश्यक
असलेलया इतर सवय उपययोजना करणे.

NAEB च्या योजना :-

ऄ) राष्ट्रीय वनीकरण कायगक्रम (NAP) :-
ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 322 | P a g e
 लोकािंच्या सहभागाने वनासबिं िंधी साकल्याने दवकास हाती घेतात. याला राज्यशासनाद्रारा मदत ददली जाते की, ज्यामळ
ु े
वनीकरणाचे काययक्रम राबदवले जातात. ‘काळजी आदण सहभाग’ पद्धतीने समदु ायाचे गणु कौशल्य प्राप्त करतात.

ब) हररत भारतासाठी सहाय्यक ऄनदु ान :-

वनथपती सदिं भायत जागृती करण्यासाठी व सथिं थाना उच्च वनथपतीच्या लागवडीसाठी मदत करणे.

क) पररवस्थतीकी ववकास फोसेस योजना :-

पररदथथतीकी पनु थथायपना सरिं क्षण खात्यामाफय त अिंमलबजावणी होते.

2) संयुक्त वन व्यवस्थापन सवमती (JFMC) :-

1980 मध्ये थथापना झाली. वन अवथथापनाचे एक आदशय उदाहरण आहे, ज्यामध्ये थथादनक समदु ायाचा सहभाग
योजना आदण सविं धयन काययक्रमात असतो. यामळ ु े थथादनक लोक वनािंचे पालक बनले. JFMC चा असा दवश्वास आहे की, जर
पवू ीचे फायदे थथादनक लोकािंना प्राप्त झाल्यास वनसविं धयनासबिं िंधी सकारात्मक दृदिकोन अिंगीकारतील.

वनववकासातील महत्वाच्या ऄशासकीय संघटना –

भारतामध्ये वन दवकासात महत्वाची भदू मका बजावणाऱ्या अनेक अशासकीय सघिं टना आहेत त्या पयायवरण व दवकास
क्षेत्रामध्ये अदतशय महत्वाची भदू मका पार पाडतात.

1) अगाखान ग्रामीण मदत कायगक्रम –

सघिं टनेची थथापना 1983 साली झाली. उत्पनावर व साधनसपिं त्तीच्या व्यवथथापनावर यामध्ये भर आहे. खेड्यातील
मृदा व जल सधिं ारण यानिं ा दवत्तीय मदत करतात.

2) भारतीय कृषी उद्योग प्रवतष्ठान (BAIF) :-

जी साधनसपिं त्ती सपिं िु ात आली आहे त्याला मदत करते, यामध्ये भमू ी, पश,ु जल व वनथपती याचिं ा समावेश होतो.
आददवासी लोकाच्िं या पनु वयसनाचा पाणलोट क्षेत्र, वृक्षारोपण, जैव ऊजायदनदमयती यामध्ये थथादनक भागातील तत्रिं ज्ञान व सश
िं ोधनाला
मदत करते.
3) ववक्रम साराभाई ववकास व ऄन्योन्य वक्रयाकंद्र :-
ही सथिं था नागरी दवकास, ग्रामीण तिंत्रज्ञान, दनसगय दशक्षण, सामादजक वनीकरण यासाठी काम करते.

भारतातील वनववकासामध्ये स्थावनक समदु ाय :-

भारतामध्ये वनदवकासामध्ये बऱ्याच मोठ्या प्रमाणात थथादनक समदु ाय कायय करतात. कारण भारतातील झालेल्या
दनवयणीकरणाचे अनेक दष्ु पररणाम लोकािंना भोगावे लागत आहेत त्यामळ
ु े लोकािंना वनीकरणाचे महत्व पटले आहे.

मूलतत्वे :-
1) समदु ाय सहभागामळ ु े लोकािंचे ज्ञान आदण अनभु व दवकास योजनािंच्या यथथादथवतेसाठी उपयक्त
ु असतात.
2) लोकािंना थवत:चे भदवष्य ठरदवण्याचा अदधकार ददला पादहजे.
3) समदु ायाच्या प्रयत्नािंचा उपयोग के ला पदहजे.
4) समदु ायामळु े लोकािंच्यामध्ये अिंगभतू कौशल्य आदण क्षमता वाढीस लागते.
5) लोकािंना पररदथथती हाताळण्यासाठी दशक्षण व प्रदशक्षण ददले पादहजे.

भारतातील पयागवरण चळवळी :-

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 323 | P a g e
 पयायवरण चळवळ ही सामादजक चळवळीचा एक प्रकार आहे. ज्यामध्ये व्यक्ती, गट आदण यतु ीचा समावेश असतो.
भारतात दवशेषता 1970 निंतर अनेक पयार् वरणीय चळवळी उदयास आल्या. या चळवळी वेगवेगळ्या वेळी वेगवेगळ्या दठकाणी
थथादनक समथयािंवर थवतिंत्र प्रदतसादािंच्या मादलके तनू वाढलेल्या आहेत.

1) सायलेंट व्हॅली चळवळ :- 1978

 के रळा येथे ही चळवळ सरूु झाली
 के रळच्या पालघाट दजल्यात सायलेंट व्हॅली आहे.
 राज्याच्या दवदवध डोंगरािंनी वेढलेले आहे.
 या डोंगर व्यवथथेतील किंु ठीपढु ा नदीवर धरणािंची कल्पना दिदटशािंनी 1929 मध्ये मािंडली होती.
 तािंदत्रक व्यवहाययता सवेक्षण 1958 मध्ये करण्यात आले आदण 1973 मध्ये भारत सरकारच्या दनयोजन आयोगाने या
प्रकल्पाना मिंजरु ी ददली.
 1978 मध्ये लोकसख्िं योच्या सवय थतरातनू या प्रकल्पाच्या दवरोधात आिंदोलने झाली.
 ही चळवळी प्रथम थथादनक लोकािंनी सरूु के ली आदण निंतर के रळ सादहत्य पररषदेने (KSSP) ताब्यात घेतली.
 नमयदा बचाव आिंदोलन (NBA), बॉम्बे नॅचरल दहथरी सोसायटी (BNHS) आदण सायलेंट व्हॅली ॲक्शन फोरम यािंसरख्या
अनेक पयायवरण गटािंनी या मोदहमेत भाग घेतला.
 कारण/उदिि – दन:शब्द खोरे आदण त्यातील समृद्ध जैवदवदवधता जतन करण्यासाठी प्रथतादपत के लेल्या जलदवद्यतु धरण
प्रकल्पातनू .

2) वचपको अंदोलन :-
 दचपको चळवळ 24 एदप्रल, 1973 रोजी उत्तराखिंडच्या घारवाल दवभागातील चामोली दजल्यातील मिंडल येथे सरूु झाली.
 जगप्रदसद्ध पयायवरण चळवळीपैकी एक आहे.
 ही चळवळ टेकड्यािंमधील पयायवरणीय अदथथरतेतनू उभारली गेली.
 जिंगलातील उत्पनादािंनी उत्पदकता कमी झाल्यामळ ु े डोगिंरी रदहवाशािंना बाजारपेठेवर अवलिंबनू राहावे लागले, जे तेथील
रदहवाशािंसाठी मख्ु य दचिंता बनली.
 परू , भथू खलन यािंसारख्या नैसदगयक आपत्ती मागे वनसपिं त्तीचे शोषण हे कारण मानले जात असे.
 27 माचय रोजी ‘दचपको’ म्हणजेच कुऱ्हाडीने धोक्यात आलेल्या झाडािंना ‘दमठीत घेण्याचा’ दनणयय घेण्यात आला आदण
त्यामळ ु े दचपको आिंदोलनाचा जन्म झाला.
 खाजगी किंपन्यािंना राखेची झाडे तोडण्यापासनू परावृत्त करण्यात या प्रकारचा दनषेध मोलाचा ठरला.
 दहमालयातील जिंगले नि होण्यापासनू वाचण्यासाठी चिंडीप्रसाद भट्ट, सदु रिं लाल भौगणु ा आदण इतर.

3) वबष्ट्णोई चळवळ –
 या आिंदोलनाचे नेतत्ृ व अमृता देवी यािंनी के ले, ज्यामध्ये समु ारे 363 लोकािंनी आपल्या जिंगलािंच्या रक्षणासाठी बदलदान
ददले.
 झाडािंना त्यािंच्या सरिं क्षणासाठी उत्थफूतयपणे दमठी मारण्याची रणनीती दवकदसत करणारी चळवळ.

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 324 | P a g e

 1700 चे दशकात राजथथानमध्ये थथापन झाली.
 चळवळीचे कारण – राजासाठी नवीन राजवाडा बािंधणासाठी गावातील पदवत्र वृक्षािंचा नाश थािंबवणे

4) ऑवपको चळवळ –
 कनायटकातील उत्तर कन्नड प्रदेशात, प्रदिम घाटातील ग्रामथथािंनी सप्टेंबर-नोव्हेंबर 1983 मध्ये सरूु झाली.
 येथे लाकूड काढण्यासाठी व्यावसादयक वृक्षतोडीमळ ु े जिंगलाचा नाश झाला.
 या प्रदेशातील नैसदगयक जिंगले किंत्राटदारािंनी तोडली, त्यामळ ु े मातीची धपू झाली व बारमाही जलस्त्रोत कोरडे झाले.
 दसरसी मधील सकलानी गावात, जिंगलातील रदहवाशािंना फािंद्या, बाळलेल्या फािंद्या आदण लाकूड नसलेली वन उत्पादने इधिं न
लाकूड, चारा, मध इ. साठी गोळा करण्यापासनू प्रदतबिंदधत करण्यात आले होते आदण त्यािंना या उत्पादनािंवार त्यािंचा
परिंपरागत हक्क नाकारण्यात आला होता.
 1983 मध्ये प्रदेशातील मदहला आदण तरूणािंनी ददक्षण भारतात दचपको सारखीच चळवळ सरूु करण्याचा दनणयय घेतला.
 हे आिंदोलन 38 ददवस चालले आदण त्यामळ ु ें अखेर राज्य सरकारला त्यािंच्या मागण्या मान्य करुन झाले तोडण्याचा आदेश
मागे घ्यावा लागला.
 पािंडुरिंगा हेगडे, पदिम घाटातील ग्रामथथ, सकळणी व पररसरातील गावातील मदहला व यवु क.

5) नमगदा बचाव अदं ोलन -

 1985 मध्ये मेधा पाटकर व इतर काययकते यािंनी आिंदोलन के ले.
 नमयदा ही भारतीय द्रीपकल्पातील प्रमख ु नद्यािंपैकी एक आहे.
 सरदार सरोवर प्रकल्पाची व्याप्ती, गजु रातमधील नमयदवे रील टदमयनल जलाशय हा खरे तर नमयदा पाणी दववादातील मख्ु य हुिा
आहे.
 गजु रात, मध्यप्रदेश, महाराष्र येथे आिंदोलन झाले.
 चळवळीचे कारण – दवकास प्रकल्प, दवशेषत: नदी ओलािंडून बािंध बािंधण्यामागील तकायवन प्रश्नदचन्ह दनमायण करणे.

6) जंगल बचाओ अदं ोलन -

 1982 मध्ये दबहारच्या दसहिं ाभमू दजल्यात सरूु झाले.
 दसहिं ाभमू मधील आददवासींनी हे आिंदोलन के ले.
 नैसदगयक साल जिंगलाच्या जागी व्यावसादयक सागवान लागवड करण्याच्या सरकारच्या दनणययाला दवरोध करण्यासाठी हे
आिंदोलन झाले.
 ही चळवळ दबहार, झारखिंड आदण ओदडशासारख्या राज्यािंमध्ये इतर दवदवध थवरुपात मोठ्या प्रमाणावर पसरली होती.

वनष्ट्कषग :-
1) भारतातील लोकािंना या नैसदगयक साधानसपिं त्तीचे महत्व लक्षात आलेले आहे.
2) दनवयणीकरणामळ ु े भारतामध्ये अनेक दष्ु पररणाम ददसनू येत आहेत. याची जागृती लोकािंच्यात दनमायण झालेली आहे.
3) भारताने वनािंच्या दवकासामध्ये सघिं टनािंच्या माध्यमातनू अनेक उपक्रम राबदवले आहेत.
4) उपक्रमाचा पररणाम म्हणनू भारतामध्ये सद्य पररदथथतीत 2019 च्या तल ु नेत 2021 मध्ये वनािंचे क्षेत्र वाढले आहे.
5) भदवष्यामध्ये वनक्षेत्र वाढीसाठी आणखी वेगवेगळ्या सघिं टनेबरे बरच उपाययोजना करणे गरजेचे आहे

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 325 | P a g e

सदं भग –
1) भगू ोलाची मल
ू तत्वे (खिंड पदहला) ए.बी.सवदी.
2) आदथयक भगू ोल – प्रा. के . ए. खतीब.
3) उपयोदजत भगू ोल – प्रा. के . ए. खतीब
4) https://moef.gov.in
5) https://byjus.com

महहला सक्षमीकरणात महहला बित गटािे योगदान

शजतेंद्र मधुकर पेटकर

सिंिोधक व ध्याथी , P.G.T.D.राज्यिात्र व भाग , R.T.M.नागपुर व ध्याकपठ,नागपुर.
Email : [email protected]
डॉ. नवनोद मारोतराव मुडे
मागुदिुक , सहायक प्राधापक, श्रीसाईबाबा लोक प्रबोधन कला महाव द्यालय , डनेर , धा

प्रस्तावना :
आजच्या काळात महहला सक्षमीकरण हा चचेचा व षय बनला आहे . खासकरून मागास गीय
प्रगवतिील दे िामध्ये महहला सक्षमीकरण र जास्त भर हदल्या जात आहे . कारण आज प्रत्येकाला कळू न चुकले
आहे त की दे िातील स्त्रस्त्रयांच्या प्रगतीजि ाय दे िाची प्रगत िक्य नाही. आपल्या प्राचीन ग्रिंथामध्ये “यत्र नायुस्त्यु
पूज्यन्ते रमन्त्ये तत्र दे ता” अथात जेथे नारीची (स्त्रस्त्रची) पुजा केली जाते तेथे दे ाचे स्थान असते अिा पद्धतीने
स्त्रस्त्रयांना मानसन्मान हदल्या जाते .
ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 326 | P a g e
 महहला सक्षमीकरण म्हणजे सामाजजक, आधथुक, राजकीय, सांस्कृवतक िैक्षणणकदृष्या महहला िक्तक्तमान
होणे होय . महहला सक्षमीकरण म्हणजे महहलांच्या अिंगभूत क्षमतांचा व धायक व कास होणे होय . स्त्रस्त्रयांना पुरुषाच्या
बरोबरीने वनणुय प्रककयेत सामाजजक,राजकीय आधथुक सांस्कृवतक व्य स्थेत समान स्वरूपाची सिंधध ,स्थान ,लाभ
प्रवतष्ठा वमळाली पाहहजेत , जनमत ,लैंक्तगकता श्रमा र तसेच व चारा र फक्त पुरूषांचे चुस्व न राहता स्त्रस्त्रयांना
पुरुषाच्या बरोबरीने स्थान वमळणे आ श्यक आहे त. या सारख्या व चारास महहला सक्षमीकरणाचा पाया मानतात .
महहला सक्षमीकरण ही एक दीघुकाळ वनरिं तर चालणारी प्रककया आहे त .परिं तु आज महहला म्हटले की महहला बचत
गट ही ओळख डोळ्यासमोर उभी राहते ,म्हणूिंनच महहला बचत गट सिंदभात िासनाच्या ेग ेगळ्या योजना यांचा
उल्लेख करणे महत्वाचे आहे त .
सध्या महाराष्टर मध्ये बचत गटातील महहलांच्या प्रगवत ,उन्नती उपजीव का साठी उमेद – महाराष्टर राज्य
ग्रामीण जी न्नोनती अधभयान ( MSRLM) हे वमिन काम करताना हदसत आहे त , त्यासोबतच माव म , नाबाडु ,
सारख्या ेग ेगळ्या सिंस्था काम करत आहे त परिं तु उमेद वमिन सध्या मोठ्या स्वरुपात काम करीत आहे त आणण
उमेद अधभयान महहला सक्षमीकरण मध्ये मोठी भूवमका बजा त आहे त , हे वमिन ग्रामीण व कास मिंत्रालय महाराष्टर
माफुत राबव ल्या जात आहे त ,
स्वयिंसहायता बचत गट ही सिंकल्पना प्रा . मोहमद युनूस यांनी बांगलादे ि या दे िात सुरू केली ,
बांगलादे िातील अत्यिंत हलाकीचे जी न जगणायाका लोकांना सिंजी नी देण्याचे काम या बचत गटाच्या माध्यमातून प्रा.
युनूस यांनी करून दाखव ले . प्रा. युनूस यांना असे आढळू न आले की ,बांगलादे िातील जोबरा या गा ात बांबूपासून
फवनुचर तयार करण्याकररता लागणारे बांबू इतर साहहत्य व कत घेण्याकररता लोकाज ळ पुरेसे पैसे नव्हते .
त्याकररता त्यांना सा काराकडू न कजु घ्या े लागत असे त्यांनी वमळव लेल्या या व्य सायातून प्राप्त केलेल्या
उत्पन्नाचा फार मोठा भाग सा कार यांना द्या ा लागत असे ,म्हणून प्रा युनूस यांनी गरीब लोकांना मदत करण्यासाठी
बचत गटाची स्थापणा केली त्यातून गरजू लोकांना कजुपुर ठा करता येईल त्यामधून हे लोक कजाची परतफेड
करतील स्वयिंपूणु होतील , या उद्देिाने त्यांनी 1977 मध्ये ग्रावमण बँक स्थापणा केली . अिाप्रकारे स्वयिंसहायता
बचत गटाची सिंकल्पना जगभर मान्य झाली.

बित गट म्हणजे काय ?

आपल्या सभासदाला अडीअडचणीच्या ेळी आणण त्यांनी केलेल्या बचत मधून एकमेकांना आधथुक साहाय्य
करणे , आपली अधथुक पररस्थस्थवत उन्नत करण्यासाठी स्वताचे भांड ल तयार करणे . माहीलामध्ये आिव िास
वनमाण करणे सिंघकटकपणे कायु करणे म्हणजे बचत गट कक ा स्वयिंसहायता समूह होय .

महहला सबलीकरण :
सबलीकरण ही एक अिी प्रककया आहे त की ज्यामुळे महहलांना स्वतची ओळख पटेल त्यांचे स ु क्षेत्रातील
महत्वपूणु स्थान त्यांना माहहती होईल . सक्षम महहलांची एक सकारािक स्वप्रवतमा तयार होईल स्वतसिंबधी ,
कुटु ब
िं ासिंबधी आणण राष्टरासिंबधध वनणुय घेण्या र देखील वनयिंत्रण ठे ता येईल .
महहला सबजलकरणाची सिंकल्पना 1985 मध्ये नैरोबी येथील जागवतक महहला पररषदेमध्ये उदयास आली .

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 327 | P a g e

महणून UNO सिंघटनेने 1985 हे आिंतराष्टरीय महहला षु म्हणून पाळण्यात येते . या दिकात सिंयुक्त राष्टर सिंघटनेने स ु
दे िांना महहलांच्या स्थस्थती र अह ाल माक्तगतला . याव षयी भारत सरकारने एक सवमवत स्थापण केली होती . या
अह ालनुसार भारताने नॄिनल प्लान ऑफ अॄक्शन फॉर ुमेन्स असा प्रारूप आराखडा तयार केला आणण त्यांनतर
भारतात महहला सबलीकरणाची हदिा वनस्थश्यत झाली . आणण भारतामध्ये महहलासाठी बचत गटाच्या माध्यमातून गिंगा
कल्याण , स्वणुजयिंती ग्रामस्वरोजगार योजना SGSY , आणण आता सिंपूणु भारतात NRLM ( राष्टरीय ग्रामीण
जी न्नोणती अधभयान ) हे वमिन सुरू आहे त . प्रत्येक राज्यात ेग ेगळ्या ना ाने हे वमिन काम करीत आहे त ,

MSRLM उमेद – महाराष्ट्र राज्य ग्रामीण जीवन्नोणती अभभयान

महाराष्टर मध्ये MSRLM उमेद – महाराष्टर राज्य ग्रामीण जी न्नोणती अधभयान या ना ाने हे वमिन काम करीत
आहे त , ग्रामीण व कास मिंत्रालय माफुत जजल्हा स्तरा र जजल्हा पररषद तालुका स्तरा र पिंचायत सवमवत कामकाज
पाहत आहे त , गा स्तरा र महहलाचे बचत गट तयार करने आणण मोठ्या गा ात 10 ते 20 गट एकत्र करून त्यांचे
ग्रामसिंघ ( VO) तयार करून आणण प्रभाग स्तरा र प्रभागसिंघ ( CLF ) तयार केले जातात आणण बचत गटाचे काम
रील यिंत्रणेद्रारे पूणु केले जाते ,बचत गटातील महहलांना ेग ेगळ्या अॄस्थिव टी मध्ये मदत करणेसाठी समूह
सिंसाधन व्यक्तक्त ज्याला CRP म्हणतात ते काम करतात यासाठी त्यांना मानधन हदल्या जाते ,उदा . कृकषसिंबधध माहहती
देण्यासाठी कृकषसखी , जना रे पिूबाबत पिुसखी , महहलाच्या उद्धयोग साठी उद्धयोगसखी , बँकेचे कामासाठी
बँकसखी , कृवतसिंगम सखी , गटाचे मीकटिंग व्य स्थस्थत झाली पाहहजेत म्हणून प्रेररका ,लेखे जलहहण्यासाठी लेखापाल
असे ेग ेगळे Caders ज्यांना समूह सिंसाधन व्यक्तक्त असे सुद्धा म्हणतात . म्हणून बचत गटातील महहलांचा महहला
सबलीकरण मध्ये महत्वाचा ाटा आहे त.
आज बचत गटावतल महहलाना बँक माफुत ग्रामसिंघ माफुत िासकीय योजना माफुत कजु घेऊन
आपली उपजीव का ाढव ण्या मध्ये मोलाची भूवमका बचत गटावतल महहला करताना हदसत आहे त , बचत गटातील
महहला बँकतून कजु घेऊन आपला व्य साय उभा करतात ,त्यांना बँकेचे कजु पर डतात कारण उमेद वमिन माफुत
त्यांना interest subvention व्याजा र सबजसडी वमळतात , आज बचत गटातील महहला फक्त गटाचे कजु
मीकटिंग ए ढय रच अ लिंबून न राहता आपला व्य साय करून आपली स्वतची ओळख वनमाण केली , सोबतच
महहला गटातील सामूहहक िक्तक्त मुळे स्थावनक स्वराज सिंस्था मधील राजकरणा र फारसा प्रभा पडलेला हदसतो.
स्थावनक नेते बचत गटातील महहला कक ा ज्या समूह सिंसाधन व्यक्तक्त म्हणून काम करतात त्यांना आपल्या पक्षामाफुत
वन डणुकीला उभे करतात उमेद ारी देऊन मानसन्मान हदल्या जातो , हे सुध्या महहला सक्षमीकरणचा एक भाग
आहे त , म्हणूनच महहला बचत गटाचा महहला सबलीकरण र प्रभा पडलेला हदसून येतो .

महहला सबलीकरणािे उकिष्ट्े :

1 अिी ाता रण वनवमुती करणे की ज्यामुळे सकारािक आधथुक धोरणाद्रारे महहलांचा पुणुपणे व कास होईल
त्यांना त्यांच्या क्षमतांची जाणी ये ू िकेल
2 .पुरुषप्रमाणे महहला देखील स ु क्षेत्रामध्ये आधथुक ,सामाजजक .राजकीय सिंस्कृवतक , नागररकत्व, समान हक्क
मूलभूत स्वातिंत्र उपभोगता येईल .

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 328 | P a g e

3. आरोग्यसे ा, स ु पातळी र जिक्षण ,व्य साय व षयक मागुदिुन ,नोकरी ,समान ेतन ,व्य साक्तयक ,सामाजजक
सुरजक्षतता ,एत्यादी बाबतीत महहलाना सिंधध वमळे ल .
4. राष्टराच्या सामाजजक,राजकीय आधथुक वनणुयामध्ये महहलाना पुरुषाच्या बरोबरीने सहभाग घेण्याची सिंधध वमळे ल .
5. महहला मुलीबाबतचा हहिंसाचार दूर करणे स्त्री –पुरुष भेदभा काढू न टाकणे , महहला सिंघटना बरोबरीचे
भागीदारी ादव णे .
6. महहला व षयीचे भेदभा दूर करण्याकररता कायदेव षयक पद्धती बळकट करणे .

स्वयंसहायता समूह व भारत सरकारिी भूनमका :

स्वयिंसहायता गटातून महहलांची यिस्वी ाटचाल सुरू झाली आहे त .बचत गटाची स्थापना हा महहलांच्या
सबलीकरणाचा आणण सक्षवमकरणाच्या ाटचालीतील एक महत्वाचा टप्पा आहे त .त्यामुळे के ळ बचत करणे
कजु ाटणे ए ढायपूरतीच या कायाची व्याप्ती न राहता बचत गटाच्या माध्यमातून महहलांचे व व ध सामाजजक प्रश्न ,
व व ध व षय ,याबाबत चचा करणे त्यासाठी बचत गटामाफुत सामुहहकपणे काही कृती करणे ,याचाही व चार
केल्या जातो , बचत गटाच्या माध्यमातून महहला स्वा लिंबी बनत आहे त ,त्यांच्यातील वनवमुतीक्षमतेचा व कास या
माध्यमातून होत आहे त , यातून त्यांना मान आिसन्मान प्राप्त होत आहे
महहला स्वयिंसहायता समूह गरीबी वनमूल
ु ना मध्ये हातभार ला त आहे त ग्रामपिंचायत मध्ये तयार होणारा
GPDP गा गरीबी वनमूुलन आराखडा बचत गटाच्या माध्यमातून पूणु तयार केला जातो . महहला स्वयिंसहायता समूह
चळ ळ आधथुक प्रश्नांची सोड णूक करण्यासाठी असली तरी महहलांच्या व्ययक्तक्तक ,सामाजजक ,आरोग्य व षयक
प्रश्नांची सोड णूक देखील या मध्यामातून होत आहे त . स्त्रीने स्वतच्या क्षमतांची ओळख करून त्या क्षमताचा व कास
करण्यासाठी घरगुती सामाजजक वनणुयाच्या प्रककयेत सहभागी होऊन आिवनभुयतेने आिव श्वासाने काम करणे
म्हणजे महहला सक्षमीकरण होय . तुन ,कौिल्य ,अधभव्यक्ती जमाखचाचा ताळे बिंध जोपयंत महहला करू िकणार
नाही तोपयंत महहलांची उन्नती सक्षमीकरण अिक्य आहे . याच धती र महहला स्वयिं सहायता बचत गट या उमेद
अधभयानाची ाटचाल 2011 पासून महाराष्टर सरकारने सुरू केली आणण हे अधभयान स्त्रस्त्रयांच्या व कासाला ाटचाल
देणारे ठरले .

महहला बित गट व स्त्रियांिी उद्धयोजकता:

महहला उद्धयोजकतेच्या बाबतीत जन्मताच उध्योक्तगनी असतात. कारण त्यांच्या घरातील कपढ्यान कपढ्या
चालणायाध व्य सायचे बाळकडू त्यांना वमळालेले असतात ,तरीपण सरकार महहला बचत गटाच्या महहलासाठी
उध्योग करण्यासाठी ेग ेगळ्या योजना काढत असतात त्यांचा फायदा बचत गटातील महहलाना होताना हदसून
येतो . आणण आज तर ऑनलाइन च्या माध्यमातून बचत गटाच्या स्तु व कल्या जातात , Amazon, flikpart,
एत्यादी ऑनलाइनच्या माध्यमातून व क्री केल्या जाते . धा जजल्हामध्ये धा जजल्हातील बचत गटांनी तयार केलेल्या
स्तु व क्री साठी धधुणी व क्री केंद्र उभारले आहे त ,त्यामाध्यमातुन जजल्हातील स ु बचत गट आपले उत्पादने व क्री
साठी धधुणी िॉप मध्ये ठे तात. हा महहला सबलीकरणाचा एक भाग आहे त महणूच बचत गटाचा महहला
सबलीकरणा र प्रभा पडलेला हदसतो ,कारण महहला आता कोणा र अ लिंबून न राहता स्वतची उपजीव का तयार

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 329 | P a g e

करायला जिकल्या हे स ु बचत गटातील महहला एकीमुळे िासनाच्या चांगल्या धोरणामुळे िक्य झाले .

बित गटासाठी केंद्र िासन व राज्य सरकारच्या योजना –

- मुद्रा योजना
- महहला उध्योग वनधध योजना
- PMFME( प्रधानमिंत्री सूक्ष्म अन्न प्रककया उध्योग योजना
- CMEGP ( मुख्यमिंत्री रोजगार वनवमुती कायुक्रम )
- PMEGP ( प्रधानमिंत्री रोजगार वनवमुती कायुक्रम )
- DDUGKY( दीनदयाळ उपाध्याय ग्रामीण कौिल्य योजना )
- R-SETY ( स्टार स्वरोजगार प्रजिक्षण सिंस्था )
- महहला समृणद्ध कजु योजना
अिा प्रकारे बचत गटातील महहलासाठी सरकारने व व ध योजना तयार केले आहे त , आणण त्या
योजनाचा लभ बचत गटातील महहलांनी घेऊन आपली कुटु ब
िं ाची उपजीव का वनमाण केली आहे त .

ननष्कर्म :-
स्वयिं सहायता बचत गट स्थापन केल्यामुळे ग्रामीण भागातील दररद्र रे षेखालील कुटु ब
िं ाचा व चार करणे
गरजेचे होते . ग्रामीण भागातील महहला कायुक्षम असूनही त्या चूल आणण मूल या पलीकडे कोणतेही कायु करीत
नाही, ही खिंत होती. िेती, जना रे सांभाळणे, मुलांचे सिंगोपन करणे ही कायु ग्रामीण भागातील महहलापूरतीच मयाहदत
होती .
आधथुकद्रुष्टा दुबुल ग्रामीण माहीलामध्ये गरीबी उत्पादन साधनाचा अभा या जोडीत िेती सोडू न एतर
कोणताही व्य साय करण्याचे कौिल्य नाही . बाजारपेठेचा अभा , कपढ्यांनकपढ्या चालत आलेली सामाजजक बिंधने
त्यामुळे एकट्या महहलेने व्य साय करणे कीबहु ना सामाजात मोकळे पणाने ा रणे ह्या स ु बाबी व चारात घ्या ा
लागतात . भारतातील सामाजजक चालीरीती ,रूढी परांपरामुळे ग्रामीण महहलाना व कासामध्ये महत्व हदले गेले नाही
आणण त्यांना स्वयिंव कासाची सिंधध हदली गेली नाही .
परिं तु बचतगटामुळे महहलांचा आधथुक सामाजजक राजकीय व कासात चालना वमळत आहे त .
जागवतकीकरणाच्या या युगात महहलांच्या सिंदभात असणारी चूल आणण मूल ही सिंकल्पना कालबद्ध झाली आहे त .
“जजच्या हाती पाळणाची दोरी ,ती जगाची उदधारी “ तर आता महहलांच्या हातामध्ये आधथुक व कासाची नाडी आली
आहे त . बचत गट चळ ळ ही खयात अथाने स्त्री उद्धारची दे िोन्नती ची चळ ळ झाली आहे त . ज्यामुळे
जगवतकीकरणाचा काळात गरीब , ग्रामीण , कष्ट्यकरी महहलांच्या सहकारातून पुढे आलेली ही बचत गटाची चळ ळ
ही आता गरीब भारतीय समाजाच्या आिेचा ककरण ठरत आहे त . बचत गटाच्या माध्यमातून महहलांचे नेतृत्व उभे
आहे त येणारा काळ हा महहला नेतृत्वाचा आहे .

संदभम :

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 330 | P a g e

1. यिोगाथा – महाराष्टर राज्य ग्रामीण जी न्नोणती अधभयान –ग्रामीण व कास मिंत्रालय , मुिंबई .
2. “पिंखाना एकीचे बळ “ दैवनक लोकसत्ता , 8 माचु 2014
3. मुलावन एम . यु – महहला स्वयिं सहाय्यता बचत गट , डायमिंड प्रकािन , पुणे
4. ‘उधयोगाच्या हदिेने” दैवनक लोकसत्ता , एकप्रल 2015
5. डॉ. दीपक प ार , महहलांचे राजकीय सक्षमीकरण 2013 , साईनाथ प्रकािन ,नागपुर
6. बचत गटासाठी कायुक्षम व्य स्थापन प्रजिक्षण पुस्तस्तका , ज्ञान प्रबोधधनी , पुणे .
7. जे. बी. कुलकणी – बचत गट – सूक्ष्म व त्तपुर ठा
8. सिंपादक डॉ. सुनील जििंदे – महहला बचत गटाचे व व ध पैलू , आकार पस्थिकेिन नागपुर
9. Self Help Groups & Womens Development, Tripti kumari , Anand Prasad Mishra.
10. Das,Dr. Mahendra Kumar , Role of Self Help group in Empowerment of Women, Dec-
2013

उपेवित दुगगरत्न- वकल्ले कोळदुगग

Mr. Hariprasad Vitthal Pawar

Assistant Professor, Department of History,
Padmabhushan Vasantraodada Patil Mahavidyalaya, Kavathe Mahankal,
Dist. Sangli (MH) 416 405.
Mobile: 7057848070

प्रास्ताववक-
भारतीय यद्ध
ु शास्त्रामध्ये दकल्ल्यािंचे महत्त्व अगदी प्राचीन काळापासनू मानले गेले आहे. मध्ययगु ीन कालखिंडामध्ये
छत्रपती दशवाजी महाराजािंच्या थवराज्यकायायत गड दगु ांना अनन्यसाधारण महत्त्व प्राप्त झाले होते. याच गड दगु ांच्या आश्रयाने
छत्रपती दशवाजी महाराजािंनी अनेक लढाया दजिंकल्या आदण थवराज्यावर आलेले सक िं ट थोपवले. महाराष्रात गडकोट दवपल ु
प्रमाणावर आहेत. महाराष्रातील दगु यबािंधणीची परिंपरा दकमान दोन हजार वषे जनु ी आहे. सातवाहन, कलचरु ी, चालक्ु य, राष्रकुट,
ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 331 | P a g e
दशलाहार, यादव, मराठे यािंनी महाराष्रामध्ये गडकोटािंची एक समृद्ध शृिंखलाच दनमायण के ली. गड दगु ांच्या बािंधणीमध्ये थथल-काल
सापेक्ष बदल ददसनू येतात. इतके च काय पण राजवटीदनहायही बदल ददसनू येतात. महाराष्रात आहेत तसे आदण दततक्या प्रकारचे
दकल्ले भारतात अन्य कोणत्याही राज्यात नाहीत.

उद्देश-
१. थथादनक इदतहासाबाबत जागृती दनमायण करणे.
२. ऐदतहादसक वाथतिंचू े सरिं क्षण आदण सविं धयन करण्यास प्रोत्साहन देण.े

“सपिं णू य राज्याचे सार ते दगु य. दगु य नसतािं मोकळा देश परचक्र येतािंच दनराश्रय, प्रजा भग्न होऊन देश उद्रस होतो. देश उद्रस
झाल्यावरी राज्य असे कोणास म्हणावे ? याकररतािं पवू ी जे जे राजे झाले त्यािंनी आधी देशामध्ये दगु य बािंधनू तो तो देश शाश्वत करून
घेतला, आदण आलेले परचक्रसक िं ट दगु ायश्रयी पररहार के ले. हे राज्य तर तीथयरुप थोरले कै लासवासी थवामींनी गडािंवरूनच दनमायण
के ले. गडकोट हेच राज्य , गडकोट म्हणजे राज्याचे मळ ू , गडकोट म्हणजे खदजना , गडकोट म्हणजे सैन्याचे बळ , गडकोट म्हणजे
राज्यलक्ष्मी, गडकोट म्हणजे आपली वसदतथथळे , गडकोट म्हणजे सख ु दनद्रागार." ३५० वषांपवू ी रामचिंद्रपिंत अमात्य यािंनी
आपल्या आज्ञापत्रामध्ये उद्धतृ के लेल्या या वचनावरून गडकोटािंच्या अनन्यसाधारण महत्त्वपणू तय ेची ओळख होते. रामचिंद्रपिंत
अमात्य यािंनी पढु े जाऊन "नतू न देश साधणे , त्या देशात जी थथळे असतील ती महप्रयत्ने हथतवश करावी. ज्या देशात गडकोट
नसतील त्या देशात आपले राज्याच्या सरहिीपासनू पढु े जबरदथतीने नतू न थथळे बािंधीत बािंधीत तो देश आक्रमावा. त्या थथळािंचे
आश्रयी सेना ठे वनू पढु ील देश थवशासने वश करावा. असे करीत करीत राज्य वाढवावे , गडकोटाचा आश्रय नसता फौजेच्याने
परमल ु खी दटकाव धरून राहवत नाही. फौजेदवरदहत परमल ु खु ी प्रवेश होणेच नाही. इतक्याचे कारण ते गडकोट दवरदहत जे राज्य
त्या राज्याची दथथती म्हणजे अभ्रपटलन्याय आहे." अशा शब्दात गडकोटािं चे महत्त्व वदणयले आहे.
छत्रपती दशवाजी महाराजाच्िं या थपशायने पावन झालेल्या आदण मावळ्याच्िं या पराक्रमाचे साक्षीदार असलेल्या या
गडकोटाचिं ी वतयमानात काय दथथती आहे याचा अभ्यास के ल्यानतिं र हे गडदकल्ले भग्नावथथेत शेवटच्या घटका मोजत असल्याचे
आपल्याला ददसनू येईल. महाराष्राच्या आसमतिं ात असे अनेक दकल्ले अशा दठकाणी बाधिं ले आहेत की, आपल्याला
त्याच्िं यापयंत पोहोचण्यासाठी खपू पायपीट करावी लागते, दकत्येक डोंगरदऱ्या, ओढे, नद्या पार कराव्या लागतात. अदतशय दगु यम
दठकाणी दकल्ले वसवण्याचे प्रयोजनही दततके च महत्त्वाचे होते, हे आपल्याला गडदकल्ल्याच्िं या डोळस भ्रमतिं ीतनू ददसनू येईल.
काही दकल्ले हे आपल्या इदतहासाच्या अज्ञानातनू , ऐदतहादसक वाथतदिंू वषयीच्या अनाथथेतनू आदण अवशेषाच्िं या उचलेदगरीने
दवनाशाच्या मागायवर उभे आहेत.
वरील वणयनाला परु े परू उतरणारा कोळदगु य हा दकल्ला सािंगली दजल्यातील खानापरू तालक्ु याच्या पवू ेला आदण कवठे
महािंकाळ, तासगािंव, आटपाडी तालक्ु याच्या सरहिीवर दरू डोंगरात इदतहासप्रदसद्ध भपू ालगड तथा बाणरू गडाच्या सोबतीने
वसलेला आहे. या दकल्ल्याचे ददु वै हे की, थथादनक लोकािंनी या दकल्ल्यावरील अवशेष उचलनू नेऊन या दकल्ल्याला भग्न
थवरूप आणले आहे. ढासळलेले बरू ु ज, कोरडा ठक्क पडलेला आदण पावसाच्या प्रतीक्षेत असलेला तलाव, तटबिंदी, वीरगळ,
इतथततः दवखरु लेले मिंददरातील अवशेष असा भग्नावथथेत हा दकल्ला उभा आहे. पळशी गावातील लोकािंच्या म्हणण्यानसु ार
१९७२ साली पडलेल्या दष्ु काळात गावातील लोकािंनी एकत्र येऊन कोळदगु ायवरील नक्षीकाम के लेले दगड बैलगाड्यािंच्या
माध्यमातनू पळशी गावात आणनू कुलदैवत असणाऱ्या दसद्धनाथाच्या मिंददराच्या उभारणीसाठी आदण शेतकऱ्यािंनी आपल्या
शेताला बािंध घालण्यासाठी वापरले. मिंददराचे थथापत्यवैभव आदण थथादनक शेतकऱ्यािंच्या शेताचे बािंध हे अशाप्रकारे
कोळदगु ायच्या दवनाशाने उभे रादहले. आजही पळशी गावातील दसद्धनाथाच्या मिंददरात आपल्याला कोळदगु ायवरुन आणलेले
नक्षीकाम के लेले दगड, वीरगळ, हत्ती-दसहिं ादी प्राण्यािंची दशल्पे पाहावयास दमळतात. कोळदगु ायवरुन आणलेल्या या
अवशेषािंच्याकडे पादहल्यानिंतर कोळदगु ायवरील तत्कालीन वाथतू (मिंददरे वगैरे) यािंच्या वैभवसपिं न्नतेची साक्ष पटते.
इदतहासप्रदसद्ध दकल्ले भपू ालगड तथा बाणरू गड आदण शक ु ाचारीकडून कोळदगु ायकडे जाताना दोन मागायनी जाता येते.
पैकी एक मागय शक ु ाचारीकडून पळशीकडे जाणारा पक्का डािंबरी मागय आहे, ज्यावरून एक फाटा उजव्या बाजल ू ा फुटतो आदण
दतथनू कच्चा मागय शेतातनू आदण माळरानावरुन जातो. हा मागय जेव्हा शेतातनू जातो तेव्हा दोन्ही बाजल ू ा असणाऱ्या शेतािंच्या
बािंधािंकडे लक्ष ददले तर आपल्याला ददसनू येईल की, शेताच्या बािंधाला कोळदगु ायच्या तटबिंदीचे दगड आधार म्हणनू लावले
ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 332 | P a g e
आहेत. या बािंधाच्या दगडािंनी शेताचे सरिं क्षण होत असले तरी कोळदगु य मात्र कायमसाठी ओस पडला आहे. दसु रा मागय हा पणू तय ः
डोंगरदरी आदण ओढ्यातनू जातो . ज्या मागायवरून जाताना कोळदगु ायचे अवशेष दवखरु लेले ददसतात तो हा मागय कोळदगु ायचे
गतवैभव दाखवतो. हा मागय शक ु ाचारी मिंददराकडे जाणारी दगडी पायवाट दजथनू सरूु होते, त्याच्या डाव्या बाजल ू ा एक मळलेली
पायवाट पदिमेकडे असणाऱ्या गणपती मिंददराच्या मागील बाजनू े कोळदगु ायच्या ददशेने जाते. वाटेत जाताना एक ओढा लागतो जो
गदय झाडीने व्यापला आहे. हा ओढा पार करून पढु े जी डोंगराची चढण लागते तो डोंगर म्हणजेच कोळदगु ायचा डोंगर होय. आपण
जेव्हा या ओढयातनू चालत जातो तेव्हा ओढ्याच्या काठाने तटु लेले नक्षीदार खािंब, नक्षीकाम कलेले दगड, जाते, ओढ्यामध्ये
घातलेला दगडी बािंध आदण झाडािंना कठडे (पार) आपल्याला ददसनू येईल. हा ओढा पार करून पढु े गेल्यानिंतर साधारण १५-
२०दमदनटािंच्या अिंतरावरती कोळदगु ायची भरभक्कम तटबिंदी, गडावरील दवखरु लेले अवशेष आदण गडावर कायम वथती करून
रादहलेले एक मळ ु चे डफळापरु चे असलेले चव्हाण कुटुिंदबयािंचे घर (जे २०११-१२ सालापासनू येथे राहावयास आले आहेत)
आपल्या दृिीपथात येते. कोळदगु ायच्या पररसरात चालताना मोठमोठे दगड इतथततः दवखरु लेले ददसतात . गडाच्या कोणत्याही
भागातनू पादहल्यास १००-१२५ एकराचा गडाचा दवथतार आपल्या दृिीपथास पडतो . काही जागरूक नागररकािंनी गडावरील
दवखरु लेले अवशेष जे त्यािंच्या वाहून नेण्याच्या क्षमतेच्या मयाय देत आहेत असे , पाषाणरुपी अवशेष गडावर एका दठकाणी गोळा
करून मोठा दगडी चौथरा बािंधनू त्यावर ओळीने मािंडलेले आहेत . त्यामध्ये मान नसलेल्या दगडी निंदीचे दशल्प , महादेवाच्या
मिंददराचे अवशेष , फोडलेली महादेवाची दपिंड , वीरगळ, एक दशलालेख , कोरीव खािंब असे अवशेष आपल्याला पहावयास
दमळतात. या अवशेषािंच्या पवू ेकडे पादहल्यास शक ु ाचारीचा डोंगर , त्याचप्रमाणे इथल्या पररसरातनू कुठूनही पादहल्यास आपले
लक्ष वेधनू घेणारा कावड्याचा डोंगर, भपू ालगड तथा बानरु गड इत्यादी पहावयास दमळतात.
कोळदगु य हा दकल्ला रायगड -राजगड-तोरणा या दकिंवा अशा च तत्सम उिंच डोंगरावरील दकल्ला नसल्यामळ ु े लढाईच्या
आदण सरिं क्षणाच्या दृिीने काही अिंगभतू मयायदा या गडास आहेत . त्याचा दवचार करून चारही बाजिंनू ी तटबिंदी बािंधलेली आहे .
मोठमोठे पाषाण एकमेकािंवर रचनू ही तटबिंदी बािंधल्याचे ददसनू येते. काही दठकाणी ४ फूट तर काही दठकाणी ६ ते ८फूट उिंचीची
तटबदिं ी आपल्याला पाहावयास दमळते. या तटबदिं ीमध्ये टेहळणीसाठी बाधिं लेले मोठ्या आकाराचे बरुु ज तत्कालीन थथापत्याच्या
भरभक्कमपनाची साक्ष देतात.

समारोप-
कोळदगु ायची ऐदतहादसक कागदपत्रातिं नू दमळणारी मादहती उपलब्ध नाही . आपण फक्त त्याच्या बाधिं णीवरून आदण
उपलब्ध अवशेषाविं रून अदिं ाज लावू शकतो . कोळदगु ायवरील बाधिं काम पादहल्यास दवदशि बाधिं णीचे घडवलेले दगड फक्त
एकमेकािंवर रचनू बािंधकाम के ल्याचे ददसते . इतर गडको टािंप्रमाणे यावर मोठ्या इमारती बािंधल्याचे अवशेष उपलब्ध नाहीत . परिंतु
भपू ालगड तथा बा णरू गडाप्रमाणेच याही गडाची रचना ददसते . दोन्ही गड हे घडी व बािंधणीचे दगड एकमेकािंवर रचनू बािंधण्यात
आलेले आहेत . दशवाय बािंधणीवरून असाही अिंदाज लावता येतो की, कोळदगु ायची आदण बाणरू गडाची रचना एकाच कालखिंडात
झाली असावी . गडासबिं िंधीच्या काही आख्यादयका-दतिं कथा प्रदसद्ध आहेत . त्यामध्ये हा गड कोळी राजाने बािंधला असल्याचे
गावकऱ्यािंकडून सािंदगतले जाते . परिंत,ु यास कोणताही ऐदतहादसक परु ावा अगर आधार उपलब्ध नाही . दशवकाळात थवराज्याच्या
सीमासरु क्षेच्या दृिीने कोळदगु ायस महत्त्वाचे थथान असावे असा तकय लावता येतो. कारण , बा णरू गडाप्रमाणेच कोळदगु ायवरूनही
आददलशाही प्रदेशावर लक्ष ठे वण्यासाठी याचे महत्त्व जरूर आहे . सरिं क्षणाच्या दृिीने या गडास बा णरू गडाप्रमाणेच महत्त्व
असल्याचे आपल्याला ददसनू येते .
आज एकदवसाव्या शतकात दकल्ल्यािंचे महत्त्व लढाईच्या आदण सरिं क्षणाच्या दृिीने अदजबातच नसले तरी, मराठी
माणसाचे, महाराष्राचे आदण पारतिंत्र्याला झगु ारून देऊन थवातिंत्र्याला आससु लेल्या जनतेसाठी हे दकल्ले कायमच अखिंड
प्रेरणास्त्रोत आदण थफूतीथथाने रादहले आहेत. हे दकल्ले हे आपल्यासाठी धारातीथे आहेत. जो समाज आपला इदतहास दवसरतो तो
समाज इदतहास घडवू शकत नाही असे आपण म्हणतो, त्याचप्रमाणे ज्या समाजाला इदतहास नसतो त्याचे भदवष्यही अिंधारात
असते. कारण आपला इदतहास आपला मागयदशयक असतो.

संदभगग्रंथ सूची
१. खोले दवलास (सपिं ा.), अज्ञापत्र, लोकवाङमय गृह, मिंबु ई, २००७.
ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 333 | P a g e
२. घाणेकर प्र. के ., वशवरायाच ं े दुगगववज्ञान अवण दुगगव्यवस्थापन, थनेहल प्रकाशन, पणु ,े २०१५.
३. दचले भगवान, गडकोट, दशवथपशय प्रकाशन, कोल्हापरू , २००५.
४. दचले भगवान, दुगगम दुगग, दशवथपशय प्रकाशन, कोल्हापरू , २०१४.
५. दचले भगवान, दुगगसपं दा महाराष्ट्राची, दशवथपशय प्रकाशन, कोल्हापरू , २०१३.
६. तेंडुलकर महेश, वशवकालातील दुगग व दुगगव्यवस्था, थनेहल प्रकाशन, पणु ,े २०२३.
७. देशपाडिं े जयतिं , दुगगदशगन, दनसगय प्रकाशन, कोल्हापरू , २००९.

“सातपुड्यातील अवदवासी लोकांच्या अरोग्याच्या वस्थतीचा

ऄभ्यास -ववशेष सदं भग नदं ु रबार वजल्हा

संशोधन मागगदशगक
प्राचायग.डॉ. वदलीप रामभाऊ जगताप
कै . अण्णासाहेब दपतािंबर शिंकर वादडले कला महादवद्यालय थाळनेर ता. दशरपरू दज. धळ
ु े
संशोधक
प्रा. रामदास रमेश वसावे
सहाय्यक प्राध्यापक अथयशास्र दवभाग , पद्मभषू ण वसतिं रावदादा पाटील महादवद्यालय कवठे महाक
िं ाळ दज.सागिं ली.
ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 334 | P a g e
 मो. ९४२०६५६३५९

प्रस्तावना :-
जगातील इतर देशाचा दवचार करता भारत कमी-मध्यम उत्पन्न असलेल्या देशािंपैकी एक आहे. देशातील एकुण
लोकसख्िं येपैकी ८.६% आददवासी लोकसख्िं या आहे. देशातील सवायत गरीब लोकािंपैकी एक चतथु ांश लोक आददवासी आहेत.
जरी या समाजाने गेल्या काही वषांमध्ये काही प्रमाणात प्रगती के ली असली दकिंवा आददवासी मधील गररबी १९८३ ते २००५
दरम्यान काही प्रमाणात कमी झाली असली तरीही आजही देशातील जवळपास ५० टक्के अनसु दू चत जमाती लोकसख्िं या
दाररद्र्यात रादहली, कारण त्यािंचा आरोग्यसेवेच्या बाबतीत प्रारिंभ दबिंद ू कमी आहे. २०११ च्या जनगणनेनसु ार महाराष्र राज्याची
लोकसख्िं या ११ कोटी २३ लाख इतकी असनू त्यापैकी आददवासी जमातींची सख्िं या १ कोटी ५ लक्ष इतकी आहे. ही राज्याच्या
एकूण लोकसख्िं येच्या ९.३५% इतकी आहे. सामादजक-आदथयकदृि्या विंदचत लोकसख्िं येला मागे ठे वनू आरोग्यसेवा दनदेशक
आदण शेवटी देशाचे मानव दवकास दनदेशािंक कोणत्याही प्रकारे सधु ारणार नाही हे वाथतव सत्य असल्याचे ददसनु येते.

शोधवनबध ं उवद्दष्टे:
१. आददवासी भागातील आरोग्याच्या सध्याच्या दथथतीचा आढावा घेणे.
२. अदतदगु यम भागातील बालमृत्यू व मातामृत्यू यािंचा अभ्यास करणे.
३. अनसु दू चत भागात राहणाऱ्या लोकािंमध्ये आरोग्य सेवािंची योग्यता , सामग्री, गणु वत्ता आदण वापर सधु ारण्यासाठी उपाय
सचु दवणे.

संशोधनाचे गृहीतके :-
१. आददवासी भागात आरोग्याच्या समथया अदधक आहे.
२. आददवासी अदतदगु यम भागात पायाभतु सदु वधािंचा अभाव आहे.
३. शासकीय आरोग्याच्या सोयी-सदु वधा दगु यम भागात पादहजे त्या प्रमाणात नाहीत.

संशोधन पद्धती :-
प्रथततु शोध दनबधिं ात दनरीक्षणात्मक व सव्हेक्षण सशिं ोधन पद्धतीचा वापर के ला असनू तथ्य सक िं लनासाठी काही
प्राथदमक सामग्री व दय्ु यम सामग्रीत यात सदिं भयग्रथिं , शोधदनबधिं , वतयमानपत्र, इटिं रनेट, सरकारचे आरोग्यदवषयक सकिं े तथथळ ,
आरोग्यदवषयक दनयतकादलके .मादसके .व दवदवध आरोग्यदवषयक लेखाचिं ा इत्यादीचा वापर के ला आहे .

मावहतीचे ववश्ले षण:-

नदं ु रबार वजल्यातील अरोग्याच्या पायाभतू सवु वधा देणा-या सस्ं था:- सदं भग वषग :- २०१९-२०

नविेर् प्राथनमक
डॉक्टर
अक्र. तालुके लोकसंख्या रुग्णालये रुग्णालये प्रसूनतगृहे आरोग्य उपकेंद्र पररिाररका
संख्या
कॄन्सर, टी बी केंद्र

१. अक्कलकु २१५९७४ ३ ० १२ १३ ६१ ३७ ९९

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 335 | P a g e

 ा

२. अक्राणी १८९६५९ २ ० ९ १३ ५० ३३ ८३

३. तळोदा १३३२९१ १ ० ५ ४ २७ २५ ५१

४. िहादा ३४६४५२ २ ० १५ १४ ६३ ४० ७७

५. ना ापुर २३११३४ ३ ० ९ ९ ४६ ४३ ७८

६. निंदरु बार २५६४०९ ४ १ ११ ७ ४३ ९३ २४३

एकुण १३७२९१९ १५ ०१ ६४ ६० २९० २७१ ६३१

स्रोत:-१.जजल्हा िल्य चचककत्सक, सामान्य रुग्णालय निंदरु बार २. जजल्हा आरोग्य अधधकार ,जज.प. निंदरु बार

रील तक्त्या रून आपणास लक्षात येते कक निंदरु बार जजल्ह्याची भौगजलक रचना पाहता अक्कलकु ा
अक्राणी (धडगा ) या तालुक्यातील अधधक क्षेत्र हे सातपुड्यातील अवतदुगुम डोंगराळ भागात असल्याने त्याहठकाणी
पायाभुत सुव धांचा व कास नसल्यामुळे सुदृढ तत्पर िासकीय आरोग्य से ा देणे अडचणीचे होत आहे . तसेच
लोकसिंख्येच्या मानाने आरोग्य से ेची साधने प्राथवमक आरोग्य केंद्र उपकेंद्र कमी प्रमाणात आहे . लोकसिंख्या
प्राकृवतक रचना लक्षात घेता अवतदुगुम भागात पायाभुत सु ूधांचा व कास करून आत्याधुवनक आरोग्य से ा पुरव णे
आ श्क आहे. तसेच प्राथवमक आरोग्य केंद्रे उपकेंद्रांची सिंख्या डॉिर पररचाररका यांची सिंख्याही खूपच कमी
असल्याचे हदसुन येते. त्यामध्ये ाढ करून कुिल मनुष्यबळाची पूतुता करून अत्याधुवनक आरोग्य से ेची
साधनसामग्री पुरव णे गरजेचे आहे. या साधन सामग्रीच्या कमतरतेमुळे ाहतुकीच्या साधनांचा अभा , िुद्ध
कपण्याच्या पाण्याची समस्या त्याचबरोबर कच्चे पक्क्क्या रस्त्यांचा अभा ही एक महत्त्वाची समस्या आहे कारण
रस्त्यांची सोयी नसलेल्या हठकाणी बांबुलन्सचा उपयोग केला जातो त्यात ककतीतरी वनष्ढाप रुग्णांचा गरोदर
मातांचे मृत्यू होताना आढळू न आलेले हे ास्त सत्य नाकारता येणार नाही आजच्या आधुवनक काळात अिा
प्रकारच्या समस्यांना सामोरे जा े लागत असेल तर महासत्तेचे स्वप्न पाहणाऱ्या सरकारला या र व चार मिंथन
करण्याची गरज आहे.
कुपोषणाची व्याख्या "एक ककिं ा अधधक आ श्यक पोषक तत्वांच्या सापेक्ष ककिं ा पूणु कमतरता ककिं ा
जास्तीमुळे उद्भ णारी पॄथॉलॉजजकल स्थस्थती" अिी केली गेली आहे. यात चार प्रकार आहे त: अल्पपोषण, अवत-पोषण,
असिंतुलन आणण व जिष्ट कमतरता (श्रीलक्ष्मी , 2006) . म्हणूनच, बहु तेक व कसनिील राष्टरांसमोरील हे प्रमुख
सा ुजवनक, प्रिासकीय आव्हानांपैकी एक आहे . कुपोषण ही व कसनिील दे िांच्या सा ुजवनक आणण प्रिासकीय
क्षेत्रातील एक गिंभीर समस्या आहे. भारताचा ग्लोबल हिं गर इिंडेर्क् ( GHI, 2009) स्कोअर असे सांगतो की , भारतात
जगातील स ात जास्त कुपोषण , ाया गेलेली आणण कमी जनाची मुले आहे त. ज्यात भारतीय अनेक राज्यांमध्ये

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 336 | P a g e

'भयानक' पातळी आहे त्यामध्ये मध्य प्रदे िची स्थस्थती , 'अत्यिंत चचिंताजनक' आहे. महाराष्टरातील निंदरु बार जजल्ह्यामध्ये
कुपोषणाचे प्रमाण अधधक असून त्याचबरोबर बालमृत्यू , मातामृत्य,ू अभुकमृत्यू इत्यादींचे प्रमाण अधधक असल्यामुळे
ग्रामीण भागातील आहद ासी लोकांची आरोग्याची स्थस्थती वबकट हलाकीची असल्याचे खालील तक्त्या रून लक्षात
येते.
“ बालमृत्यूदर म्हणजे एका षातील १००० जज िंत जन्मांमागे एक षाखालील बालकांच्या मृत्यूची सिंख्या होय. हे
सूत्राने हदले आहे- IMR= एक षापेक्षा कमी याच्या मृत्यूची सिंख्या भाक्तगले षातील एकूण जज िंत जन्म.
“ अभुक मृत्यू दर म्हणजे एका व जिष्ट भौगोजलक क्षेत्रामध्ये एक षापेक्षा कमी याच्या मरण पा लेल्या न जात
बालकांची सिंख्या त्याच भौगोजलक क्षेत्रासाठी (व जिष्ट काला धीसाठी) रहह ासी जज िंत जन्माच्या सिंख्येने भागली
जाते. आणण १००० ने गुणाकार केला जातो.
नंदरु बार शजल्ह्यातील मृत्यूदरांिे प्रमाण व कुपोकर्त बालकांिे प्रमाण संदभम वर्म :- २०१९-२०

अक्र. तालुके एकुण ग्रामीण एकुण प्रसूनत दरम्यान एकुण एकुण अभमक तीव्र कमी
नागरी प्रमाण / मृत्यंिी माता मृत्यंिी बालमृत्यंिी मृत्यंिी संख्या वजनािी
संख्या संख्या संख्या कुपोकर्त
)वर्म १ ते ०(
बालकांिी
५ ते ०(वर्म)
संख्या

१. अक्कलकु ा ग्रामीण ६७० ७ ८३ ३९ १६५६

िहरी ४ - ४ २ ०

२. अक्राणी ग्रामीण २६९ ८ १०७ ३९ २९४४

)धडगा (
िहरी १६ - १४ २ ०

३. तळोदा ग्रामीण ३१२ ४ ६ २ ८७१

िहरी ४५ - ५ ५ ०

४. िहादा ग्रामीण १०३३ ९ ४९ १६ २६५३

िहरी १४२ - १२ २ ०

५. ना ापुर ग्रामीण ९४१ ३ २१ ११ ५५४

िहरी ८३ - १४ ३ ०

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 337 | P a g e

 ६. निंदरु बार ग्रामीण ९५६ १० १२२ १४ १२८८

िहरी ९४७ - २५३ ६२ ०

एकुण ग्रामीण ४१८१ ४१ ३८८ १२१ ९९६६

िहरी १२३७ ३०३ ७६ ००

एकुण ४१ ६९० १९७ ९९६६

स्रोत:-१.जजल्हा िल्य चचककत्सक, सामान्य रुग्णालय निंदरु बार २. जजल्हा आरोग्य अधधकार ,जज.प. निंदरु बार

या िोधवनबिंधामधील रील तक्त्याचा व चार करता एकुण मृत्यदर , माता मृत्यदर , बाल मृत्यदर , अभुक मृत्यदर ,
कुपोषण इत्यादी घटकांचा व चार केला िहरी भागांपेक्षा ग्रामीण भागातील लोकांची आरोग्य स्थस्थती वबकट असल्याचे लक्षात
येते. त्याचबरोबर ग्रामीण भागातील लोकांपेक्षा अक्कलकु ा आणण अक्राणी (धडगा ) या अवतदुगुम भागात व रील घटकांच्या
बाबतीतही आरोग्याची स्थस्थती वबकट असल्याचे हदसुन येते. रील तक्त्यात अक्कलकु ा आणण अक्राणी (धडगा ) हे
सातपुड्यातील अवतदुगुम भागातील आहे तळोदा , िहादा, ना ापुर निंदरु बार सपाटी प्रदे िातील तालुके आहे. रील
तक्त्या रून एकिंदरीत असे लक्षात येते की या आहद ासी जजल्ह्यात एकुण मृत्यदर , माता मृत्यदर, बाल मृत्यदर, अभुक मृत्यदर,
कुपोषण इतर आरोग्याच्या समस्या मोठ्या प्रमाणात उद्भ लेल्या आहेत . राज्यात दर षी हजारो बालमृत्यूिंची नोंद होते. यात
बहु तांि मृत्यू राज्यातील १६ आहद ासीबहु ल जजल्ह्यांतच आहेत.
निंदरु बार जजल्ह्याचा व चार केला असता माचु २०२३ दरम्यान तपासणी केलेल्या एक लाख ४३ हजार ११५ पैकी सुमारे
३४ हजार १३६ बालके मध्यम , तर १० हजार ९३ बालके तीव्र कुपोकषत आढळल्याचे महहला बालकल्याण व भाग सांगतो.
एकप्रल २०२२ अखेर झालेल्या स ेक्षणात जजल्ह्यात सुमारे १५ हजार २५३ इतके बालव ाह झाले. केंद्र राज्य सरकार कुपोषण
वनमूुलनाच्या ना ाखाली इतका खचु करते ; परिं तु त्याची ठोस अिंमलबजा णी मात्र होताना हदसत नाही. २०२२-२३ च्या
अह ालानुसार राज्यात सुमारे ३३ हजार ७०० कुपोकषत बालके आढळली आहेत. त्यांपैकी सुमारे २४ हजार इतकी एकट्या
निंदरु बार जजल्ह्यात असल्याने कुपोषणाच्या बाबतीत जजल्हा राज्यात प्रथमस्थानी आणून ठे णाऱ्या अधधकाऱ्यां र िासन कार ाई
का करत नाही, असा सामान्य आहद ासी जनतेत प्रश्न वनमाण होत आहे .
राज्यात कुपोषण बालमृत्यूचे प्रमाण हद सेंहद स ाढत असून , दे िाच्या स्वातिंत्र्यापासून ते आजपयंत बालमृत्यू
रोखणे कुपोषण वनमूुलन या माथ्याखाली हजारो कोटी खचु करणारे सरकार अद्यापपयंत या र मात करू िकले नाही. हा
खरे च सिंिोधनाचा व षय असल्याचे हदसुन येते. एकीकडे स्वातिंत्र्याच्या ७५ षेपूतीचे वबगुल ाजव ले जात असताना आहद ासी
समाजा र मात्र वनयवमत अन्याय केला जातो , हे दे िात घडलेल्या व व ध घटनांतून समोर आले आहे . एकीकडे केंद्र राज्य
िासन बालमृत्यू र आळा बसा ा याकररता अनेक उपाययोजना करत असल्याचे भास ून कोट्य धींचा वनधी खची पाडत
असताना २०१९ ते २०२३ दरम्यान सुमारे ३७ हजार २९२ इतक्या बालमृत्यूिंची नोंद िासनदरबारी आहे .
व व ध योजना लाभाथ्यांपयंत कमी का पोचतात? एक ास्त सत्य लक्षात घेणे गरजेचे आहे
एकीकडे एकात्मिक बालव कास से ा योजनेंतगुत सहा महहने ते तीन षे योगटातील बालकांना , गभु ती स्तनदा
मातांना टीएचआर तीन ते सहा षांच्या बालकांना गरम ताजा आहार देण्याची योजना अस्तस्तत्वात आहे . आहद ासी प्रकल्पात
डॉ. ए. पी. जे. अब्दुल कलाम अमृत आहार योजनेंतगुत गभु ती स्तनदा मातांना एक ेळेस पोषक आहार बालकांना
ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 338 | P a g e
आठ ड्यातून चार ेळा अिंडी केळी हदली जातात , असे िासन सांगते. पण मुळात या योजना त्या लाभाथ्यांपयंत खरे च पोचते
का याचीदेखील काटेकोर तपासणी झाली पाहहजे. िासनामाफुत पुर ठा होणाऱ्या साधन सामग्रीचा दजादेखील वनकृष्ट होत
असल्याच्या अनेक तक्रारी निंदरु बारसह अनेक जजल्ह्यांत राज्य सरकारकडेदेखील प्राप्त आहेत. त्यामुळे असे म्हणता येईल की
आहद ासीबहु ल दुगुम भागातील निंदरु बार जजल्ह्यातील आरोग्यव्य स्थेची दुरा स्था ठे ण्यात मात्र िासन प्रिासन जबाबदार
आहे . या स ु प्रकरणी िासनाने व िेष सवमती नेमून कुपोषण बालमृत्यू रोखण्याबाबत ठोस उपाययोजना करण्याबाबत
कायु ाही होणे अपेजक्षत आहे . निंदरु बार जजल्ह्यात ाढत असलेल्या कुपोषण बालमृत्यूस जबाबदार असलेल्या घटकांचा िोध
घेण्याची आ श्यकता आहे .
आज काही प्रमाणात प्राथवमक आरोग्यसे ांमुळे अनेक लोकांचे आरोग्य आणण लोकांच्या राहणीमानात आरोग्य
स्थस्थतीत सुधारणा होतांना हदसत आहे . लोकांमधील आरोग्यातील धोके दूर करण्यासाठी तसेच उद्याच्या आरोग्य आणण
लोककल्याणाला धोका वनमाण करणाऱ्या उदयोन्मुख आव्हानांना हाताळण्यास प्राथवमक आरोग्य से ा हे अत्यिंत प्रभा ी आणण
कायुक्षम मागु असल्याचे जसद्ध होत आहे . परिं तु त्यासाठी दजेदार प्राथवमक आरोग्यसे ा , रुग्णालयात रुग्णांची सोयी सुव धा ,
आधुवनक आरोग्य से ा या आहद ासी लोकांना पुरव णे आ श्यक आहे . समाजात व व ध आजारांची सिंख्या कमी करून त्यांचा
कायुक्षमतेत राहणीमानात सुधारणा करणे हे दे िातील सामाजजक गुिंत णूक आहे असे म्हणा े लागेल . परिं तु महत्त्वाचे म्हणजे ,
के ळ PHC आणण उपकेंद्रांची स्थापना ही आहद ासी लोकसिंख्येच्या आरोग्यव षयक समस्यां र मात करू िकत नाही. कारण
दजेदार आरोग्य से ा देण्यासाठी प्रजिजक्षत मनुष्यबळाची , अवतदुगुम भागात पायाभुत सुव धांची कमतरता ह्या प्रमुख समस्या
ग्रामीण आणण डोंगराळ आहद ासी भागात तत्पर आरोग्य से ांच्या व स्तारात अडथळा वनमाण आहे .

ननष्कर्म :-
१. निंदरु बार जजल्ह्यातील दुगुम भागातील आरोग्यव्य स्थाच कमकु त असल्याचे हदसुन येते.
२. जजल्ह्यात िहरी भागातील लोकांपेक्षा ग्रामीण अवतदुगुम भागातील लोकांची आरोग्यव षयक स्थस्थती म्हणजे एकुण मृत्युदर ,
बालमृत्यू माता मृत्युदर अधधक असल्याचे हदसुन येते.
३. जजल्ह्यातील इतर तालुक्यापेक्षा अक्कलकु ा आणण अक्राणी (धडगा ) या सातपुड्यातील अवतदुगुम भागात आरोग्याची स्थस्थती
वबकट असल्याचे हदसुन येते.
४. जजल्यातील रुग्णालये आरोग्यव्य स्था लोकसिंख्येचा मानाने कमी प्रमाणात आहे .
५. िासकीय आरोग्याच्या से ांमुळे लोकांच्या आरोग्यात सकारािक बदल होत आहे .

शिफारसी :-
१. िासनाने आरोग्या रील सा ुजवनक खचु ाढ णे आणण आहद ासी आरोग्यासाठीची व िेष तरतूद करून आरोग्य बजेटच्या
प्रमाणात ाढ करणे.
२. आहद ासी उपयोजना मागुदिुक तत्त्वांचे पालन करणे.
३. भारत सरकार वमवनस्टर ी ऑफ टर ायबल अफेसु (MOTA) च्या आरोग्यासाठी वनधी ाटपाची टक्के ारी वनजित करणे.
४. जजल्ह्यातील अवतदुगुम भागात पायाभुत सुव धा म्हणजे रस्ते ,पाणी , ीज ,बाजारपेठ, दळण ळण इत्यादीच्या व कासा र
व िेष लक्ष दे ून अिा भागात अत्याधुवनक स ु सोयीयुक्त प्राथवमक आरोग्य केंद्रांची वनवमुती करणे .
५. आरोग्यव षयक जनजागृती करून व व ध आरोग्य योजनांची माहहती देणे.

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 339 | P a g e

संदभम सूिी :-
1. Executive Summary – Tribal Health Report, India. [Last accessed on 2019 Nov 20]. Available
from: http://tribalhealthreport.in/executive-summary/
2. Mavlankar D. Doctors for tribal areas: Issues and solutions. Indian J Community Med.
2016;41:172–6. [PMC free article] [PubMed] [Google Scholar]
3. India's Commitment to the SDGs | NITI Aayog. [Last accessed on 2019 Nov 20]. Available from:
https://niti.gov.in/indias-commitment-to-the-sdgs ]
4. https://www.esakal.com/uttar-maharashtra/nandurbar-tops-state-in-terms-of-
malnutrition-child-mortality-news-gbp00
5. महाराष्टरातील निंदरु बार जजल्ह्यातील आहद ासी मुलांची आरोग्य आणण पोषण स्थस्थती अधभजजत बनसोडे प्रकाजित लेख
गुरु ार, मे 23, 2019
6. ६. जजल्हा सामाजजक आधथुक समालोचन २०२० जजल्हा निंदरु बार , जजल्हा अथु सांख्यख्यकी सिंचालनालय , महाराष्टर
िासन.
7. dsa_Nandurbar_2020

"भारतातील कृषी िेत्रातील उद्योजकतेच्या संधी व त्यापुढील अव्हाने"

श्री. श्रीनाथ महादेव वशंदे

सहायक प्राध्यापक, वादणज्य दवभाग, पद्मभषू ण वसतिं रावदादा पाटील महादवद्यालय,
कवठे महाक िं ाळ, सागिं ली, महाराष्र ४१६४०५

घोषवारा :-
"उद्योजक जन्माला येत नाहीत तर ते तयार करावे लागतात ". कोणत्याही क्षेत्रात नवदनदमयती करण्याची क्षमता असणारी
व्यक्ती म्हणजे उद्योजक होय . ही नवदनदमयती प्रत्यक्षात उतरवण्यासाठी त्यािंनी हेतपू वू यक के लेली कृ ती म्हणजे उद्योजकता होय .
उद्योजकता हा शब्द इग्रिं जी भाषेतील Entrepreneur या शब्दापासनू आला आहे . इग्रिं जी भाषेत हा शब्द फ्रेंच भाषेमधील '
Entreprendre' या शब्दापासनू आला असनू त्याचा अथय हाती घेणे दकिंवा अगिं ीकार करणे असा होतो .
कृ षी हा भारतीय अथयव्यवथथेचा मल ु ाधार आहे . भारतात पारिंपररक शेती ही शेकडो वषे के वळ उपजीदवके चे साधन
म्हणनू के ली जात होती. मात्र आजच्या बदलत्या तत्रिं ज्ञानाच्या यगु ात ती फक्त उपजीदवके चे साधन म्हणनू न राहता नफा प्राप्त करून
देणारा लाभदायक व्यवसाय म्हणनू पाहणे गरजेचे आहे . कृ षी क्षेत्रात उद्योजकतेचा दवकास करणे म्हणजे कृ षी उद्योजकता होय .
दतची सक िं ल्पना कशी आहे त्याचे महत्त्व काय आहे त्याचबरोबर या क्षेत्रात अलीकडच्या काळात कोणत्या सधिं ी आदण त्या सधिं ी
प्राप्त करत असताना कोणत्या आव्हानानिं ा सामोरे जावे लागणार आहे याचा आपण या सश िं ोधन लेखात आढावा घेणार आहोत .

वबजशब्द :- कृ षी, कृ षी उद्योजकता.

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 340 | P a g e

प्रस्तावना:-
शेती हा मानवाचा अत्यिंत प्राचीन व्यवसाय आहे आजही जगातील दोन तृतीयािंश जनता अजनू ही शेती क्षेत्रावर
अवलिंबनू आहे आदण हे उपजीदवके चे साधन म्हणनू पादहले गेले आहे कारण अत्यिंत कमी भािंडवलावर व उपलब्ध नैसदगयक
साधनसामग्रीवर हा व्यवसाय करता येतो त्यामळ ु े दाररद्र्यरे षेखालील लोकािंना थोडक्यात क्षेत्रावरही उदरदनवायह करता येतो .
भारतामध्येही जवळपास 70 टक्के लोकसख्िं या ही शेतीवर अवलिंबनू आहे . शेती हा भारताचा महत्त्वपणू य व्यवसाय
आहे. देश थवतिंत्र झाल्यानिंतर भारतात हररतक्रािंती घडून आली व भारतातील परिंपरागत पद्धतीने होणारी शेती कात टाकू लागली
ती के वळ उदरदनवायहाचे साधन न राहता दतचे व्यावसादयक महत्त्व सद्धु ा अधोरे दखत झाले आहे . पवू ी फक्त उदरदनवायह करण्याचे
साधन म्हणनू शेतीकडे पादहले गेले पण आजच्या यगु ात दतच्याकडे व्यावसादयक दृिीने पाहणे गरजेचे आहे . फक्त अन्नधान्याची
गरज भागवण्यासाठी शेती करणे हा उिेश मागे टाकून तिंत्रज्ञानाच्या सायाने शेतीचे व्यावसादयक थवरूप दवकदसत करणे गरजेचे
आहे. तािंदळ ू ,गहू ,मका, बाजरी ,हरभरा ,तरू ,या उत्पादनादशवाय आता कापसू ,तिंबाखू ,ताग ,रबर ,ऊस ,ततु ी अशी दपके घेऊन
त्यापासनू शेतीपरू क व्यवसाय कडे वळणे गरजेचे बनले आहे . जसे की फलोत्पादन , फुलोत्पादन ,रे शीम कडे पैदास ,कुक्कुटपालन
,दग्ु धोत्पादन, मत्थय शेती ,औषधी व सगु िंधी वनथपतींची लागवड , उदाहरणाथय बेल ,आले ,गळ ु वेल ,आवळा ,कोरफड इत्यादी.
यापासनू शेती उत्पन्न वाढवण्यास दनदितच मदत होणार आहे . त्यासाठी या क्षेत्रात असणाऱ्या सधिं ी व त्यापढु ील आव्हाने यािंचा
आढावा आपण या शोधदनबिंधात घेणार आहोत.

उवद्दष्टे:-
1) कृ षी उद्योजकतेतील नवीन सधिं ी अभ्यासणे .
2) कृ षी उद्योजकतेची आव्हाने शोधणे .
3) कृ षी उद्योजकता सकिं ल्पनेचा दवथतार करणे व समजनू घेणे .

संधी :-
1) औषधी व सुगंधी वनस्पती ची लागवड :-
ज्या वनथपतींच्या खोड मळ ू पाने फळे यािंचा औषध म्हणनू वापर के ला जातो त्यािंना औषधी वनथपती म्हणतात .
भारताची आयवु ेद परिंपरा पाच हजार वषायहून जनु ी आहे . तसेच जवळपास 8000 वनथपती या औषधी म्हणनू गणल्या गेल्या
आहेत. उदाहरणाथय तळ ु स , बेल, आवळा, दहरडा ,बेहडा, कोरफड ,आले, हळद ,गवती चहा इत्यादी वनथपतींचा प्रामख्ु याने
उल्लेख के ला जातो की ज्यािंची उत्पादन घेऊन शेतकऱ्याला नफा प्रादप्त करता येईल तसेच ज्या वनथपतींचा वापर सवु ादसक द्रव्य
बनवण्यासाठी होतो त्यािंना सगु िंधी वनथपती म्हणतात . उदाहरणाथय चिंदन , गल ु ाब ,जाथविंद, इत्यादींचा वापर सगु िंधी अत्तर सेंट
बनवण्यासाठी होतो यािंच्या उत्पादनातनू शेतकऱ्याला चािंगल्या रीतीने नफाप्राप्ती करता येणे शक्य आहे म्हणनू याकडे एक सधिं ी
म्हणनू पाहता येईल.

2) ऄन्नप्रवक्रया:-
शेतीतील उत्पाददत मालावर प्रदक्रया करणे हे उद्योजकतेचे साधन म्हणता येईल . कारण भारत शेतमाल उत्पादन
करण्यासाठी अग्रेसर आहे पण त्यावर प्रदक्रया करण्याचे प्रमाण हे खपू कमी आहे . खालील शेतमालाच्या उत्पादनाची जगातील
प्रमाण हे आिंबे 41 %, चहा 28%, के ळी 23 %, काजू 24%, दधू 14 %, कािंदे 10%,पण यावर प्रदक्रया करण्याचे प्रमाण हे
भाज्या 2.2% ,दधू दधु ाचे पदाथय 35%, पोल्री 6%, मािंस 21%,असे आहे . त्यामळ ु े या क्षेत्रामध्ये उद्योजकतेस मोठ्या प्रमाणात
वाव आहे.

3) फुलोत्पादन:-
ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 341 | P a g e
 फुलािंच्या जागदतक व्यापाराचे मल्ू य 1100 कोटी पेक्षा अदधक झाले आहे . त्यात भारताचा दहथसा के वळ 0.6% इतका
आहे. त्यामळु े नवनवीन प्रकारच्या फुलािंचे उत्पादन घेणे ही एक मोठी सधिं ी आहे . कारण दवदवध काययक्रम, सण ,उत्सव, नववषय ,
सत्कार इत्यादी मध्ये फुलािंची मागणी ही मोठ्या प्रमाणावर असते . त्यामळ ु े दवदवध प्रकारच्या प्रजातींचे उत्पादन घेऊन त्यािंचे
जागदतक बाजारपेठेत दवतरण करणे ही एक उत्तम सधिं ी आहे . जसे की गल ु ाबाची व्हॅलेंटाईन डे ददवशी असणारी मागणी म्हणनू
भारतात फलोत्पादनाला मोठी सधिं ी आहे असे म्हणता येईल .

4) फलोत्पादन:-
फुलािंच्या सोबत दवदवध प्रकारच्या फळािंच्या उत्पादनाला सद्धु ा मोठी सधिं ी आहे उदाहरणाथय सफरचिंद , आिंबा, दचकू,
द्राक्ष, कदलिंगड, के ळी इत्यादींचा उल्लेख प्रामख्ु याने करता येईल . जगभरात या फळािंना वाढती मागणी आहे . नॅशनल हॉदटयकल्चर
बोडय यासाठी दवशेष प्रयत्न करत असते . गेल्या दहा वषायत या क्षेत्राचा दवकासदर प्रदतवषी सहा टक्के इतका आहे . त्यामळ ु े जमीन
उत्पादकतेत वाढ होत आहे . रोजगार दनदमयती ही यामळ ु े होत आहे . दनयायतीत वाढ होत आहे . महाराष्र सरकारने फळबागािंची
लागवड हे कायय रोजगार हमी योजनेची जोडलेली आहे .

5) रे शीम उत्पादन:-
रे शीम कडे पाळून त्यापासनू कच्चे रे शीम उत्पादन घेता येते . रे शीम उत्पादन कमी मदु तीत दमळते . उष्ण कदटबिंध प्रदेशात
ते वषायतनू पाच वेळा घेता येते . एक दकलो रे शीम उत्पादन करण्यास अकरा मनष्ु य ददवस लागतात . त्यामळ ु े त्यातनू चािंगली
रोजगार दनदमयती होऊ शकते आदण दवशेषतः मदहलािंना यातनू जाथत रोजगार उपलब्ध के ला जाऊ शकतो . त्यामळ ु े सध्या रे शीम
लागवडीचे क्षेत्र 0.1% असनू इथे मोठ्या प्रमाणावर उद्योजकतेस वाव उपलब्ध आहे .

6) मत्स्य शेती:-
थवातत्र्िं यप्राप्तीनतिं र मासे उत्पादनात सतत वाढ होत आली आहे . सध्या या क्षेत्रात एक कोटी चाळीस लाख लोकानिं ा
रोजगार दमळाला आहे . 2006 च्या आकडेवारीनसु ार भारतातील मादसक उत्पादन हे जगातील उत्पादनाचा 4.4% इतके होते .
भारताचा इथे दसु रा क्रमाक िं लागतो पण प्रथम क्रमाक िं असणाऱ्या चीनचा वाटा जवळपास 67% इतका आहे . यावरून भारतात
आणखी उत्पादन वाढ अपेदक्षत आहे असे म्हणता येईल ढोबळ राष्रीय उत्पादनाच्या 1.07% दहथसा हा मासे उत्पादनाचा आहे .
मत्थय शेतीसाठी भारतात उपलब्ध असलेले जलसाठे 23.6 लक्ष हेक्टर एवढे आहेत यापैकी 40% क्षेत्राचा फक्त उपयोग के ला
जात आहे . खारे पाणी असलेले जलसाठे 12 लक्ष हेक्टर असनू त्यापैकी फक्त 13% क्षेत्राचाच वापर के ला जात आहे . त्यामळ ु े
भारतामध्ये मत्थय शेती वाढवण्यास मोठ्या प्रमाणावर वाव आहे . तसेच भारताला आठ हजार दकलोमीटर लािंबीचा समद्रु दकनारा
आहे त्यामळु े मासेमारीत वाढ करण्यास मोठा वाव इथे उपलब्ध आहे .
भारतामध्ये कृ षी क्षेत्रामध्ये जशा मोठ्या सधिं ी आहेत तसेच अनेक आव्हानेही आहेत . त्यािंचा सामना कृ षी उद्योजकास
करावा लागतो ती आव्हाने पढु ील प्रमाणे :-

अव्हाने:-
1) ऄपऱ्ु या पायाभतू सवु वधा:-
कृ षी उद्योजकतेमध्ये सवायत महत्त्वाचे आव्हान म्हणजे पायाभतू सदु वधािंचा अपरु ा दवकास होय . कारण रथते ,पाणी,
वीज, दळणवळण ,बिंदरे यािंचा असणारा अपरु ा दवकास ही एक मयायदा ठरते . कारण कृ षी उत्पादनामध्ये बराचसा उत्पाददत माल
हा नाशविंत थवरूपाचा असतो त्यामळ ु े तो इदच्छत बाजारपेठेपयंत पोहोचदवण्यासाठी पायाभतू सदु वधािंचा चािंगल्या प्रकारे दवकदसत
असावे लागतील. उदाहरणाथय रथते , दळणवळण सोयी ,इत्यादी तसेच मबु लक पाणी उपलब्ध असावे लागेल त्याचबरोबर दवजेची
उपलब्धता असावी लागेल पायाभतू सदु वधािंचा दवकास करण्याकडे शासनाने दवशेष लक्ष देणे गरजेचे आहे त्यामळ ु े कृ षी
उद्योजकतेचे दवकास करणे सोपे होईल.

2) वकमान अधारभूत वकंमत ठरववण्याचे अव्हान:-

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 342 | P a g e
 कृ षी उत्पादनाचे दकमान आधारभतू दकिंमत ठरदवण्याचे आव्हान शासनासमोर आहे . कारण वथतचू ी दकिंमत ही
उत्पादनाच्या आवकावरून ठरते त्यामळ ु े आवक वाढली की दकिंमत ढासळते उत्पादनाचे थवरूप नाशविंत असल्याने उतरलेल्या
दकमतीत शेतमालाची दवक्री करावी लागते त्यामळ ु े प्रत्येक उत्पादनाची दकमान आधारभतू दकिंमत ठरवणे गरजेचे आहे त्यामळ
ु े
शेतमालाचा उत्पादन खचय व त्याची बाजारातील दकमान आधारभतू दकिंमत यावरून शेती उत्पादनाचा नफा तोटा ठरवणे सोपे
होईल.

3) योग्य पतपुरवठ्याची गरज:-

भाजीपाला उत्पादन, औषधी वनथपती, मथत्य शेती ,फलोत्पादन इत्यादीचे शास्त्रीय पद्धतीने उत्पादन घेण्यासाठी अदधक
गिंतु वणक
ू करणे गरजेचे आहे . उदाहरणाथय ग्रीन हाऊस, पॉदलहाऊस इत्यादींची दनदमयती करण्यासाठी मोठ्या प्रमाणात भािंडवलाची
गरज आहे सदर उत्पादना साठी शेतीला दवशेष कमी व्याजदराने पतपरु वठा होणे गरजेचे आहे त्यामळ ु े शासनाने यासाठी योग्य
व्याजदराने पतपरु वठा तसेच दवदवध नादवन्यपणू य उपक्रमासाठी सबदसडी देणे गरजेचे आहे .

4) मालाचे नाशवंत स्वरूप:-

शेतमालाच्या उत्पादनापैकी काही मालाचे थवरूप हे नाशविंत थवरूपाचे असते त्यासाठी शीतग्रहािंची दनदमयती करावी
लागेल. म्हणजेच शीतग्रहािंचे दनदमयतीमळ ु े बाजारपेठेतील एखाद्या उत्पादनाची होणारी प्रचिंड आवक आदण त्याला असणारी
मागणी यािंचे थवरूप दनयिंदत्रत करता येईल तसेच काही मालाच्या बाबतीत त्यािंचे सग्रिं हण करता येईल असे थवरूप दनवडावे लागेल
उदाहरणाथय दधु ापासनू दधू पावडरची दनदमयती करणे इत्यादी त्यामळ ु े नाशविंत थवरूपाच्या मालाला सद्धु ा योग्य रीतीने भाव दमळवनू
देता येईल.

5) सदोष सामावजक प्रवृत्ती:-

समाजातील दवदचत्र पररदथथतीवर कृ षी तज्ञ ज्ञानेश्वर बोडके यानिं ी मादमयक भाष्य के ले आहे ते म्हणतात की ' लोक
पादत्राने एसी शोरूम मध्ये दवक्रीला ठे वतात व जीवणाला आवश्यक असणारा फळे आदण भाजीपाला रथत्याकडेला दवकला जातो
'सेंदद्रय शेतमाल उत्तम पॅदकिंग करून दवकणे व समाजाने आपल्या प्रवृत्तीत बदल करणे अशा उपायानिं ी आव्हानाचिं ा सामना के ला
पादहजे. हे एक मानसशास्त्रीय आव्हान आहे . समाजामध्ये सवयसाधारण अशी सामादजक प्रवृत्ती आढळते की दबगर कृ षी उत्पादने
ही छापील दकमतीत घेतली जातात उदाहरणाथय कोलगेट ,चहा पावडर इत्यादी . मात्र कृ षी उत्पादनाच्या बाबतीत दकमतीत
घासाघीस के ली. जाते ही सदोष सामादजक वृत्ती बदलली गेली पादहजे यासाठी समाजात जागृती करावी लागेल . ही कृ षी उत्पादने
सद्धु ा उपलब्ध दकमतीलाच खरे दी के ली जातील.
6) कृषी उद्योजकाचे मानवसक वृत्ती:-
नगदी दपके घेणाऱ्या शेतकऱ्यािंमध्ये अशी वृत्ती आढळते की काही वषे त्याच्या हातामध्ये खपू पैसा पडतो . अशावेळी
शेतीत पन्ु हा गिंतु वण्यासाठी लागणारा पैसा हा बाजलू ा काढून ठे वावा व निंतर बाकीची रक्कम खचय करणे अपेदक्षत असते . मात्र
त्याचे व्यवदथथत दवत्त दनयोजन होत नाही व उच्च राहणीमानाच्या अपेक्षेने चैनीच्या वथतू खरे दी करण्याकडे त्याचा कल वाढतो व
त्याला परत शेतीला पैसे गिंतु वण्यासाठी कजय काढून कजयबाजारी व्हावे लागते . त्यासाठी प्रत्येक कृ षी उद्योजकासमोर त्याच्या
शेतीपासनू येणाऱ्या पैशाचे योग्य दवत्त दनयोजन करणे हे एक आव्हान ठरते .

वनष्ट्कषग :-
1) कृ षी उद्योजकतेमळु े शेती क्षेत्रात अनेक सधिं ी दनमायण झाल्या आहेत .
2) योग्य दवत्त दनयोजनाचा आधार घेऊन कृ षी उद्योजकास सधिं ींचा लाभ घेता येईल .
3) शासनाने कृ षी उद्योजकतेसाठी लागणाऱ्या पायाभतू सदु वधािंच्या दवकासावर भर देणे गरजेचे आहे .
4) कृ षी उद्योजक घडवण्यासाठी दवदवध सहाय्यभतू योजना आखाव्या लागतील .
5) कृ षी उत्पादनासाठी असणारी सदोष सामादजक वृत्ती बदलण्याची गरज .

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 343 | P a g e

सदं भग:-
1. Entrepreneurship development - Gupta and Srinivash
2. Entrepreneurship. - Dr P.C. Shejwalkar
3. Entrepreneurship in agriculture - Dilip Kumar
4. उद्योजक बना. - डॉ. ददलीप सरवटे .

महाराष्ट्रातील सण-उत्सव ही ननसगमs संस्कृती

डॉ. सरस्वती लक्ष्मणराव अंदेलवार

पद्मभूषण सिंतरा दादा पाटील, महाव द्यालय क ठे महांकाळ,जज.सांगली
भ्रमणध्वनी- ८९९९५१५४००
email.id:- [email protected]

प्रस्तावना:
अनादी काळापासून वनसगुदे तांची पूजा करणे वनसगाच्या सावनध्यात राहू न व व ध चालीरीती बरोबर स ु
उत्स साजरे करण्याची परिं परा हदसून येते सण-उत्स हा लोकपरिं परे चा एक भाग असून ही लोक परिं परा पुरातन
काळापासून चालत आली आहे.मान ाचे आणण उत्स ाचे नाते खूप ज ळचे आहे . वनत्य नाव न्यता परर तुनिीलता
उत्साह अिा उपजत गुणामुळेच माणसाने सण-उत्स ाची परिं परा वनमाण केली. भारतीय सण-उत्स आणण त्यांच्या

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 344 | P a g e

वनसगािी असलेला अतुट सिंबिंध आपल्या कृतीतून हदसतो. मान समाजात अस्तस्तत्वात असणाऱ्या व व ध जाती
धमातील, जमातीतील त्यांच्या पोटजातीनुसार व व ध सण-उत्स साजरे केले जातात. सिंपूणु मान समाज एकसिंग
राहा ा जाती जमातीतील सलोखा नातेसिंबिंध कटकून राहा ेत अिा व व ध कारणास्त हे सण-उत्स साजरी
करण्याची परिं परा वनमाण झाली.

संिोधन नवर्यािी उकिष्ट्े

१. महाराष्टरातील सण -उत्स ाचे स्वरूप अभ्यासणे.
२. वनसगु सिंस्कृती आणण सण-उत्स ातील सहसिंबिंध अभ्यासणे.
३. वनसगु पूरक सण-उत्स ातील सिंस्कृतीची गरज आहे ते अभ्यासणे.
४. ैज्ञावनक महत्त्व सोबतच सण-उत्स कसे महत्त्वाचे आहे त ते अभ्यासणे.

संिोधनािी गृहहते
१. ग्रामीण भागात मोठ्या प्रमाणात स ु सण-उत्स पारिं पररक पद्धतीने साजरा करतात.
२. महाराष्टरातील ग्रामीण भागात वनसगु पूरक सण-उत्स साजरी केले जाते.
३. सण-उत्स साजरे केल्याने आनिंददायी ाता रण आणण मान ाचे आनिंद हद्रगुणीत होते.

सण-उत्सवािे स्वरूप
सण-उत्स ,परिं परा ररतीरर ाज या साऱ्यांचे अतूट बिंधन भारतीय सिंस्कृतीत आढळते. परिं परा रुढीचे सिं धुन
सिंक्रमण भारतीय कुटु ब
िं ातील स्त्री-पुरुष करीत असतात या पारिं पररक लोकसिंस्कृतीच्या अधभव्यक्तीत स्त्रस्त्रया
वतच्या जी न ाटचालीतून अव ष्कृत होणारी सिंस्कारिील सिंस्कृती ही एक अमूल्य ठे ा आहे .
सणासुदीचे हद स म्हटले की , आनिंदाला उधाण येते हौस मौजेला पाय फुटतात. सगळीकडे कसिं मिंगल
मांगल्याचे ाता रण पसरते मनातून समाधानाचे कारिं जे उसळू न र येतात. सणाच्या वनवमत्ताने गोडधोड खायला
वमळते. सणासुदीच्या वनवमत्ताने उत्साह ाढतो. यातून मान ी मना र आपोआप एखादा सिंस्कार होऊन जातो. सिंपूणु
ाता रण अगदी प्रसन्न झालेले असते म्हणून सण-उत्स ाला मान ी लोकजी नात अत्यिंत महत्त्व हदले जाते.
सणासुदीची सुरु ात पाडव्यापासून होते. 'जिमगा गेला आणण पाड ा आला ' असे म्हणतात. मग श्रा णातील
नागपिंचमी,पोळा,कृष्डाष्टमी,गणेि उत्स , दुगोत्स त्यावनवमत्ताने प्रत्येक घराघरात घटस्थापना होते. दसरा आणण
हद ाळी भाऊबीज सिंक्रांत रिं गांची उधळण करणारा जिमगा होळी हा सण येतो जिमगा झाल्यानिंतर पाठोपाठ पाड ा हा
सण येतो. पाडव्याची गुडी घरोघरी उभी राहते आणण िेतकऱ्यांच्या न ीन षाची सुरु ात होते. हीच ती वनसगु
सिंस्कृतीची देणगी मान ाला वमळालेली आहे .

ननसगम संस्कृतीतील सण-उत्सवािे महत्व

माणसाच्या जी नात जो िांतपणा. जे स्वास्थ्य असा िं लागतिं ते आजच्या धा पळीच्या जी नात तो हर ून
बसलेला आहे. स ु प्रकारचे सण टप्प्याटप्प्याने साजरी करताना नातेसिंबिंधाची जपणूक , सकारािक ऊजा, मान ी

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 345 | P a g e

सिंबिंध, भक्ती, अध्याि ऊजेचा स्त्रोत मनात िांती ,सकारािक दृकष्टकोन सणांच्या माध्यमातून वनजितच वनमाण होतो.
आपल्याकडील स ु-सण उत्स पाहहले तर वनसगािी नातिं सांगणारी,ज ळीक असणारी अिीच त्यांची पू ापार रचना
आहे.अगदी मुक्या प्राण्यांप्रती आदरभा हा आपल्याच सणांतून व्यक्त होतो.
व व ध प्रकारच्या सिंस्कृतीने नटलेला आपला दे ि आपल्या दे िातील प्रत्येक सण यांचे महत्त्व आपल्या
जी नात अनन्यसाधारण आहे . षाच्या सुरु ातीपासून तर अगदी अखेरपयंत प्रत्येक सणांचे महत्त्व त्या ेळेस
बदलणारे ऋतुमान होणार नैसक्तगक
ु ह ामानातील बदल यांची सांगडसुद्धा या सणांसोबत घातलेली प्रामुख्याने
आढळते. आपल्या सिंस्कृतीतील प्रत्येक धमु यामागे कुठल्या ना कुठल्या प्रकारचा अध्याि िास्त्र जोडलेला आहे .
आपला भारत हा सिंस्कृती प्रधान दे ि आहे . अनेक भाषा धावमुक व व धता जगाच्या पाठी र इतर कोणत्याही
दे िात नाही. येथील वनसगु पाहण्यासाठी लाखो व दे िी पयुटक भारताला भेट देत असतात.हहर ागार वनसगु सिंपन्न
भारत म्हणजे सणांची रांगोळी , रिं गांची उधळण की येथील मातीलाही इथल्या सिंस्कृतीचा गिंध येतो. आपण भारतीय
आहोत याचा खरच खूप मनापासून अधभमान ाटतो. खूप धावमुक अध्यात्मिक आहोत आपण अनेक धमांचा सिंगम
आपल्या दे िात आहे आणण आपले सण आपल्या व व धतेतील एकतेचे प्रतीक आहे त धावमुक भा वनकदृष्ट्या सणांना
आपल्या जी नात खूप महत्त्वाचे स्थान आहे . प्रत्येक सणाचा वनसगािी खूप ज ळचा सिंबिंध आहे .मकर सिंक्रांती या
सणाला एकमेकांना वतळगुळ ाटण्याची परिं परा आहे हह ाळ्याच्या हद सात वतळगुळ खाणिं आरोग्यासाठी खूप
हहतकारक असत.

सणांिे ननसगािी नाते

आपल्याकडील स ुउत्स पाहहले तर हे नातिं सांगणारे एकमेकािी ज ळीकता असणारे अिीच त्याची
पू ापार रचना आहे. मुळात मान उत्स -कप्रय प्राणी आहे. वनसगात मान हा सृष्टीतील घटना क्रमात होणारे बदल
वनरीक्षण करून हळू हळू ओळखले. वनसगातील प्रत्येक घटनेमागील वनयम िोधण्याचा प्रयत्न त्यांनी केला त्यांचे
आपल्या जी नािी नातिं जोडण्याचा प्रयत्न केला त्यातून स्वतःला आणण इतरांना मानजसक समाधान आनिंद वमळतो
याची खात्री माणसाला पटली एकत्र येण्याने चचा , सुसिं ाद घडतात त्यामुळे ैयक्तक्तक सामाजजक आणण सामूहहक
ताणतणा कमी होतात. समस्या र मात करण्यासाठी बळ , पाहठिं बा, उत्साह प्रेरणा वमळते. मान ाला अनेक
अनुभ आले आणण त्याने त्या स ु सण-उत्स ांची त्या त्या ऋतुमानानुसार सिंगती ला ली. सृष्टीतील इतर सजी ांप्रती
सतत प्रेम , भूतदया, मैत्र जपण्याच्या िुद्ध हे तूने मान कृतज्ञते पोटी वनसगाच्या ना ाने सहभागाने सण-उत्स ाचे
आयोजन केले. यातून स्वतःचा समूहाचा आनिंद हद्रगुणीत करण्याचा मान ाने नेहमीच प्रयत्न केला.

सणांिे महत्त्व
ैज्ञावनक महत्त्व सोबतच भारतीय सण सांस्कृवतक तसेच अध्यात्मिक दृष्टया पररपूणु आहे त . मराठी षाची
सुरु ात म्हणजे गुढीपाड ा उभारून केला जातो. गुरुपौणणुमा भारत षामध्ये जे ढे गुरूला महत्त्व आहे ते ढे
किालाही नाही. गुरुच मागुदाता, मुक्तीदाता,नागपिंचमीला नागदे ता अन्य पिुिंसाठी मनाची प्रेमाची भा ना ठे णारी
हीच भारतीय सिंस्कृती आहे.
महाराष्टराला ऐवतहाजसकते बरोबर सामाजजक , राजकीय, आधथुक, धावमुक, सांस्कृवतक परिं परे बरोबरच

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 346 | P a g e

भौगोजलक समृद्धताही लाभलेली आहे . महाराष्टरात खानदे ि , मराठ ाडा, व दभु, कोकण, माणदे ि अिा व व ध भागात
व व ध जातीजमातींचे अस्तस्तत्व हदसून येते. त्या त्या भागात त्या जमातींच्या चालीरीती , रुढी-परिं परा, सण-उत्स यांचे
स्वरूप थोड्याफार फरकाने ेगळे असल्याचे जाण ते महाराष्टराचे मराठी षाचे बारा महहने आणण भौगोजलक
पया रणानुसार वनमाण झालेले सहा ऋतू यांच्या समीकरणातून व व ध सण-उत्स व्रत हे साजरे केले जातात. हे ऋतू
सण-उत्स खालील प्रमाणे
१. सिंत - गुढीपाड ा, रामन मी, हनुमानजयिंती, अक्षयतृतीया, बुद्धपौणणुमा, सिंत पिंचमी.
२. ग्रीष्म - टपोणणुमा,आषाढी एकादिी
३. षा - नागपिंचमी, नारळी पौणणुमा,रक्षाबिंधन, हररताजलका, गणेि चतुथी.
४. िरद - दसरा, कोजाक्तगरी पौणणुमा, दीपा ली
५. हेमिंत - मागुिीषु, गुरु ार व्रत, दत्त जयिंती, मकर सिंक्रांती,रथसप्तमी.
६. जिजिर - माघी गणेि जयिंती, होळी, रिं गपिंचमी.
सण-उत्स ाच्या मागे व जिष्ट अध्यािाचा ठे ा आणण व ज्ञानाची सुयोग्य सांगड घातलेली हदसून येते. सण-
उत्स ाचा सिंबिंध हा पव त्र्यािी जोडला जातो प्रत्येक सणाला घराची आणण पररसराची स्वच्छता हदसून येते . दाराला
तोरण, दारात रांगोळी, फुलांची आरास , हदप धुपाचा सुहास असे मिंगलमय ाता रण वनमाण करून ाईट गोष्टींना
वतलांजली हदली जाते. यातून मानजसक आणण िारीररक सुदृढता जोपासली जाते. माणसाचे स ु सण-उत्स हे
पया रणाच्या उपलब्धते रून व सिंबून असून पया रण आणण मान यांचा घवनष्ठ सिंबिंध या वनवमत्ताने हदसून येतो.
आपले स ु सण हे वनसगाचे रक्षण करणारे कृषी सिंस्कृतीिी नाते सांगणारे आहे त . ईश्वराची पूजा भीती पोटी न करता
श्रद्धे ने करा ी आणण वनसगु रक्षणाच्या मूळ उद्देिाचे जतन करा े. हेच आधुवनक व्रत ठरे ल.

सारांि
महाराष्टरातील रूढी, परिं परा, सण-उत्स , वनसगु प्रेम , जजव्हाळा, आधार, वनष्ठा, श्रद्धा असते. मान ी धमु हा
वनसगु धमु आहे. मान ाचे लोकजी न हे वनसगा र अ लिंबून आहे हे त्यांच्या सिंस्कृतीतून हदसून येते . मान ाच्या
वनवमुतीपासूनच वनसगुदे ता श्रद्धे ने पुजले जातात त्यात कुठे ही कमुकांड नाही. मान हा वनसगाच्या सावनध्यात
मुक्तपणे स्वच्छिं दी ा रत असतो. वनसगु िक्तींना दे मानून मान ी मूल्ये ही जपली आहे त. मान हा वनसगु सिंस्कृतीचे
जतन सिं धुन करतो.

ननष्कर्म:
१. सण-उत्स ातून अध्यात्मिकता आणण ैज्ञावनक यांचा सहसिंबिंध आढळतो.
२. मान ी मूल्यांची जोपासना करून लोक परिं परे चा ारसा जोपासला जातो.
३. व व ध सणांमधून प्रवतकािकता पूजा व व धता आढळते.
४. श्रद्धा, प्रेम, सहकायु, आदर, मान ता, भूत-दया, उत्साह अिा व व ध गुणांची जपणूक झालेली हदसून येते.
५. वनसगु व षयक जाणी जागृती वनसगाचे सिं धुन केलेले हदसून येते.
६. सण-उत्स , परिं परा ररतीरर ाज या साऱ्यांचे अतूट बिंधन भारतीय सिंस्कृतीत आढळते.

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 347 | P a g e

७. परिं परा रुढीचे सिं धुन सिंक्रमण भारतीय कुटु ब
िं ातील स्त्री-पुरुष करीत असतात.

संदभम:
१.भ ाळकर तारा, लोकसिंचचत, राजहिं स प्रकािन पुण,े १९८९
२.भारतीय सण-उत्स ांचे ऐवतहाजसक सांस्कृवतक महत्त्व- सिंपादक डॉ. डी. आर पाटील ,अथ ु पस्थिकेिन, प्रथम
आ ृत्ती २०१५
३.लोकसिंस्कृतीची जक्षवतजे - रा.चचिं.ढे र,े व श्वकमा साहहत्यालय कटळक पथ पुण,े प्रथम आ ृत्ती १९७१
४.भारतीय तीथुक्षेत्र - गजानन खोले, इिंद्रायणी साहहत्य प्रकािन, पुणे. १९६६

इक्कीसवी सदी की कनवता का बदलता स्वर

डॉ. नवनायक शिवाजी शिंदे

पी.व्ही.पी कॉलेज, क ठे महांकाल, डॉ.अनिंत डघणे.

इक्कीस ी सदी यह गवतमान परर तुन की सदी है। इस काल में सामाजजक , सांस्कृवतक परर तुन इतना
जल्द गवत से हु आ जजतना इसके पहले नहीं। इसके पीछे मुक्त बाजार भी यह एक प्रमुख कारण है। जजसने मनुष्य
जी न और व चारों को एक साथ झकझौर हदया। और पुराने पीढ़ी पर नयी पीढ़ी , पुराने व चारों पर नये व चार थोपे
गये। सूचना तकनीकी के कारण सभी लोगों को नया ज्ञान आिसात करने के जलए बाध्य ककया। अथात् जजसके हाथ

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 348 | P a g e

टाईपराईटर पर धथरकते थे उसके हाथ अब कम्प्यूटर पर धथरकने लगे। इन्टरनेट ने तो उसके सामने सारी दुवनया खड़ी
कर दी। इसपर भी यह भागदौड समाप्त नहीं हु ई और आगे चलकर मोबाईल क्रांवत ने उसके हाथ में अन्डराईड
मोबाईल थमा हदया। जजसके कारण 3जी, 4जी और उनके ररचाजु के कतारों में लगा व्यक्तक्त बाजार ाद का सही मात्रा
में उपभोक्ता हु आ। राजा से लेकर रिं क तक मोबाईल जरूरत बना। इसके पड़साद जजसने कभी ए,बी,सी,डी के अक्षर भी
नहीं पड़े ह दे हात में रहने ाले दादा-दादी फोन पर ‘हॄ लो‘ कहने लगे। जजनके माध्यम से पोती-पोतो को सिंस्कार और
सिंस्कृवत के पाठ पढ़ने चाहहए थे े अपने पोती-पोतो से मोबाईल के फॄक्शन समझने और मोबाईल इस्तेमाल के पाठ
क्तगर ाने लगे। जजसमें ‘जजयो जी भरके ‘ कहकर मोबाईल किंपवनयां अपने ताल से ताल वमलाकर जीने के जलए बाध्य
कर रही है। इसी तकनीकी और मान ीय मूल्यों के पतन पर ‘न जागरण और हहिंदी कव ता ‘ में जलखा हैं
कक,‘‘टेक्नोलॉजी प्रमुख है और मूल्यों के समूचे चौखटे टू ट चूके हैं। हमारा प्रजातिंत्र टेक्नोलॉजी की ओर और
न धनाढ्यों की जुगलबिंदी में फँस चुका है।‘‘1 ऐसे समय साहहत्य में भी इसका रे खांकन हु आ है।
हहिंदी कव इस बदलती स्थस्थवत को अपने कव ता में बढे बखूबी से अधभव्यक्तक्त दे रहे हैं। तुमान समय की
कव ताओिं में इस बदलते स्थस्थवतयों का चचत्रण बड़े प्रभाव ता से हु आ है। यथा-

‘‘बदला सत्य की तरह हदखाई दे रहा है

हम बदला को देख रहे हैं
हम बदला को जी रहे हैं
बदलते हु ए क्त को
आिसात करना मुस्त्रश्कल लगता है
बहु त तकलीफ से
बदलती हु ई स्थस्थवत को अपनाता है भीतर
भीतर जो पड़ा पुराना
नहीं वनकलता बाहर ‘‘2
हहिंदी कव ता समय के सरोकार को भी बड़े प्रभाव ता से वनभा रही है। बाजारीकरण के कारण गां की स्थस्थवत
बदली-बदली सी लग रही है। जजसका प्रत्यक्ष दिुन तुमान समय के कव ताओिं में भी हदखाई दे रहा है। कव उस बात
को इस रूप में ाणी दे रहा है -
‘‘इतनी जल्दी बदल गये
कैसे अपने जज़्बात ?
नहीं रही अब गां में
ो पहले ाली बात। ‘‘3

कव जजस तरह अपने बदलते गां के रूप को अपने कव ता में ाणी देता है उसी तरह प्रकृवत के
व कृवतकरण और ृक्षों के होते कटाई को भी नजरदांज नहीं करता। उसे इस नष्ट होते पृथ्वी पर दुःख है। किंक्रीटे के
जिंगल उसे बेचैन करते हैं। जैसे-

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 349 | P a g e

 ‘‘खि होती ृक्षों की दुवनया
पक्षी कहां पर ास करें
ककससे ो स ाल करें
किंक्रीटों की इस दुवनया में
तकपि सहना भी हु आ मुस्त्रश्कल
मान ता के अस्थस्थ-पिंजर टू टे
पृथ्वी वनत हो रही व कल‘‘4

तुमाल समय आसमानी सिंकट से ककसान परे िान है। उसमें कही पर सुखा तो कहीं पर अधधक बाररि की
जह से कृकष सिंस्कृवत सिंकट का सामना कर रही है। जजसका चचत्र हहिंदी कव यों के कव ता में भी स्पष्ट झलकता है।
कव आिीष कुमार जसिंह जलखते हैं -

‘‘असमय बाररि ने
रौंद हदया है
फसलों को
जजन्दगी को
कव ता-कहानी भूलकर
मैं देख रहा हू ँ
तबाह होती गेंहूँ की बाजलयाँ ‘‘5

एक तरफ हहिंदी कव ता सृकष्ट के परर तुन और जजसके पररणाम स्वरूप गां ों की खस्ती हालत का जायजा
लेती है तो दूसरी और उसे िहरी जी न में भी घुटन महसूस होती है। िहरों के इस चकाचौंध रूप ने ककस प्रकार व्यक्तक्त
को एक मजदूर बना हदया है जो अपने जलए जी नभर एक मकान खरीद नहीं सकता। जो जन्म भी ककराये के मकान में
लेता है और अिंत भी ककराये के मकान में। उस व्यक्तक्त के अन्तुमन को इस प्रकार कव िब्दब्द करता है। यथा-

आओ
थोड़ा छत पर टहल लें
मकान माजलक के
लौटने तक
चांदनी तले
थोड़ा हिं स-झखलझखलालें
तारों की और नजर कर लें ‘‘6

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 350 | P a g e

 तुमान समय में लोग महिं गाई, बेकारी से परे िान है। हदनभर की मेहनत उसे कम पड़ने लगी है। स्तु के दाम
हदन-ब-हदन आसमान छू रहे हैं। इसके कारण आम जन परे िान है। दे ि का चचत्र ऐसा बन गया है कक एक तरफ महिं गाई
है तो दूसरी ओर आज का यु ा व धभन्न निा खोरी में फिंस गया है। उसके पीछे सरकार के र ैयों की ओर इिारा करते
हु ए कव जलखता है कक-

‘‘महिं गाई लगातार बढ़ती जा रही है

और बढ़ती जा रही है
महदरा की खपत।
दोनों का नीवतयों से है गहरा सिंबध
िं
दोनों का सत्ता से है
सीधा अनुबध
िं । ‘‘7

इस तरह इक्कीस ीं सदी की कव ता का स्वर हमें समय के साथ बदला हु आ हदखाई देता है।

ननष्कर्म:
इक्कीस ीं सदी की कव ता को देखे तो ह हमें समय का वन ाह करने ाली कव ता के रूप में हदखाई देती
है। उसने भूमण्डलीकरण, वनजीकरण और बाजारीकरण के कारण मनुष्य जी न जीने का जो दो हजार के बाद बदला
जजसको ककस प्रकार मान ीय जी न और यहां के ककसानी सभ्यता को नष्ट ककया। जजन्होंने पूरा जी न प्रकृवत के साथ
रहकर उसके परर तुन िास्त्र को पढा ही व्यक्तक्त अज्ञानी बना। प्रकृवत का साथ छोडने के कारण अकाल जैसी
समस्या उत्पन्न हो गई मिंहगाई और चकाचौंध बाजार ने उसे बेचारा बना हदया इसका स्वर कव ता में उतरा हु आ प्रवतत
होता है।

संदभम:
1. कत्रपाठी से ाराम-‘न जागरण और हहिंदी कव ता, ागथु, मई 2017-सिं.श्री ास्त , खेमानी, पृ.18
2. ागथु, जूलाई 2016-सिं.श्री ास्त , खेमानी, पृ.49
3. http://www.sahityakunj.net/LEKHAK/A/AmreshSingh/gaanv_pahle_vaali_baat.htm
4. Kalayan.org/ कव ता/ पृथ्वी-हो-रही-व कल
5. ागथु, जून 2016-सिं.श्री ास्त , खेमानी, पृ.70
6- gyansidhu.blogspot.com/search/label/ कव ता
7- http://www.rachanakar.org/2019/02/blog-post_35.html

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 351 | P a g e

 मानस का हंस और ऄमृतलाल नागर जी

Dr. D. P. Thorat
Department of Hindi,
Padmabhushan Vasantraodada Patil Mahavidyalaya,
Kavathe Mahankal, Dist-Sangli, Maharashtra 416405.

अमृतलाल नागर जी के ऐदतहादसक उपन्यासों में मानस का हसिं का शीषयथथ थथान है। प्रथततु उपन्यास गोथवामी
तलु सीदास जी की कदल्पत दकिंतु यथाथय जीवनी ही नहीं अपने समय का सािंथकृ दतक इदतहास भी है। "नागर जी प्रथम कोदट के
दकथसागो शैली के लेखक हैं। इसका ठोस प्रमाण हमें 'मानस का हसिं ' में दमल जाता है। इस उपन्यास में उन्होंने महाकदव और
रामभक्त तल
ु सीदास के जीवन वृत्त को सफल औपन्यादसक व्यदक्तत्त्व प्रदान दकया है। इदतहास और सथिं कृ दत का अपवू य समन्वय इस
उपन्यास की दवशेषता है। उपन्यास में कदव की जीवनी रोमानी कल्पना तथा कुछ दकिंवददिं तयों के आधार पर दनदमयत है दजसमें
ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 352 | P a g e
तल ु सी-रदचत कृ दतयों से कुछ उदाहरण लेकर उनके आधार पर तथ्य दनरुपण करने का प्रयास है। इसी वजह से यह एक सफल
दमदश्रत जीवनीपरक उपन्यासों में उच्च थथान प्राप्त कर सका है , अपने आप में एक अनोखा उपन्यास
है।"1
प्रथततु उपन्यास में तल
ु सी का जीवन वृत्त ओर उनकी परम भावक ु ता जो उत्तम काव्य के दलए परमावश्यक है , इन दोनों
का समन्वय यहााँ दवद्यमान है। इसमें न तो के वल इदतहास की शष्ु कता है और न तल ु सी के काव्य की आलोचक की भााँदत दववेचना
है। "कथा के मनोवैज्ञादनक अनबु िंध की दृदि से 'मानस का हसिं ' प्रयोगात्मकता की सीमा में प्रवेश करता जान पडता है। " नागर जी ने
इदतहास - शैली का आश्रय न ले तल ु सी चररत्र को प्रथततु करने की सवयज्ञता से अपना बचाव कर दलया है और थवयिं कथा कहने
सनु ाने का प्रभाव कम ही डाला है। 'मानस' के कथान्बधन से सक िं े त लेकर नाटकीय कथा दवन्यास के अपेक्षतया अदधक दवश्वसनीय
कौशल का आश्रय दलया है। 'रामचररतमानस' के चार वक्ता हैं और चार श्रोता। यहााँ भी तल ु सी के समकालीन पात्र और थवयिं
तल ु सी चररत्र के प्रधान प्रथततु कताय थवयिं भागीदार बनकर पाठकों के दवश्वास का सपिं ादन करने में अदधक सफल हो सके हैं। ये मल ू
लेखक को अव्यक्त रख , अपनी प्रामादणक वथतमु ता की भदू मका से नाटकीय प्रभाव भी उत्पन्न करते हैं। '2ऐदतहादसक परुु ष
तल ु सीदास के व्यदक्तगत जीवन के सबिं िंध में इदतहास खामोश है। अिंतः उपन्यासकार ने तल ु सीदास के सादहत्य में सक िं े दतत उनके
जीवन की घटनाओ िं के आधार पर तथा प्रचदलत दकिंवददिं तयों का आश्रय लेकर एविं काल्पदनक परिंतु मौदलक प्रसगिं ों की सृदि कर
इदतहास की इस खामोशी को दकसी हद तक भरने का प्रयास दकया है।
उपन्यास का प्रारिंभ तलु सीदास की पत्नी रत्नावली की मृत्यु घटना के साथ होता है। उस समय तल ु सीदास वृध्दावथथा को
प्राप्त हो चकु े थे। उनसठ वषय लिंबे अिंतराल के बाद गोथवामी जी ने अपने गााँव राजापरु आकर रत्नावली का अिंदतम सथिं कार दकया।
उनके साथ राजा भगत , सतिं बेनी माधव , कै लाशनाथ, पिंदडत राम आदद भी राजापरु आते हैं। बेनीमाधव को गरुु की जन्मभदू म में
पहली बार आने का सयु ोग दमला है। उन्हें गरुु के ऐदहक जीवन के दवषय में जानने की उत्सक ु ता होती है। वे अपने गरुु जी से आग्रह
करते हैं। बेनी माधव के अदत आग्रह पर तल ु सीदास थवयिं आत्मकथात्मक शैली में अपने जीवन वृत्त को सनु ाते जाते हैं।
मगु लों के आक्रमण व बेतहाशा लटू मार के काल में पदिं डत आत्माराम के घर तल ु सीदास का जन्म होता है। एक ओर
तल ु सी का जन्म होता है , दसु री और माता हुलसी की मृत्यु हो जाती है। तल ु सी के दपता अपने बेटे का माँहु इसदलए देखना नहीं
चाहते क्योंदक वे उसे माता की मृत्यु का दजम्मेदार मानते हैं। उसे बढू ी दभक्षणु ी सास के पास भेज देते हैं। पदिं डत आत्माराम पत्नी की
दचता को आग देकर थवयिं सन्िं यास ले लेते हैं। उधर तल ु सी पावयती अम्मा के साथ दभक्षावृदत्त से दनवायह करने लगते हैं। परिंतु पावयती
अम्मा रामबोला को पााँच वषय की अवथथा में अके ला छोड चल बसती है। इधर -उधर भीख मााँगते हुए वह सक ू रखेत पहुचाँ गया।
वहााँ नरहरर बाबा के दशयन होते हैं। बच्चे की चेिा , साधना, अबोधता, चपलता एविं सेवाभाव से प्रसन्न होकर नरहरर बाबा ही
उसका लालन-पालन करते हैं। नरहरर बाबा उसे दवद्या में पारिंगत करने हेतु थवयिं काशी में शेष सनातन पाद जी महाराज के पास ले
जाते हैं। नरहरर बाबा ने तल ु सी के जीवन को साँवारने में पग-पग पर साथ ददया।
काशी में शेष जी की पाठशाला में तल ु सीदास दशष्य के रूप में दशक्षा ग्रहण कर रहे थे , वहीं उन्हें भतू -प्रेत का ज्ञान होता
है, दकिंतु हनमु ान में दृढ आथथा रखने वाले तल ु सीदास के दलए भतू -प्रेत का कोई भय नहीं था। उन्होंने भतू -बाधा को दरू करने के
दलए 'हनमु ान चालीसा' जैसे मिंत्र का दनमायण दकया। यहीं पर उन्हें गिंगाराम जैसा दमत्र और बटेश्वर जैसा दवरोधी दमल गया। वे अब
दशक्षा ग्रहण कर शास्त्री का पद प्राप्त करते हैं और पाठशाला में दवद्याथीयों को पढाते हैं। उन्हीं ददनों तलु सीदस का तत्कालीन
सप्रु दसध्द रामभक्त मेघाभगत से मधरु दमलन होता है। मेघाभगत के यहााँ रामभदक्त में दृढता प्राप्त करते हैं , तो दसू री ओर कोतवाल
की रखैल वेश्या मोदहनी पर भी आसक्त हो जाते हैं। यहााँ 'राम पर काम की दवजय' होती हुई ददखाई गई है। वे मेघाभगत की अपेक्षा
मोदहनी बाई से दमलने के दलए ही मेघाभगत के यहााँ जाने लगे। उनका प्रेम काफी समय तक चलता रहा। तत्पिात तल ु सीदास
मोदहनी बाई के साथ -साथ काशी को भी छोडकर गरुु जी से आज्ञा लेकर मेघाभगत के साथ तीथययात्रा पर दनकल गए। मथरु ा में
सरू दास जी से हुए दमलन के पिात, घमु क्कड प्रवृदत्त से प्रेररत होकर राजापरु अपनी जन्मभदू म के दशयनाथय आ गए।
राजापरु में राजा भगत ने अपने दमत्र तल ु सीदास को दवरक्त से गृहथथ बना ददया। जमना पार दनवासी दीनबिंधु पाठक की
पत्रु ी रत्नावली से तल ु सीदास का दववाह हो गया। कुछ समय बाद उन्हें पत्रु -रत्न की प्रादप्त हुई। पत्नी को छोड वे धनोपाजयन के दलए
काशी चले गए। वहााँ 'रामाजा-प्रश्न' हल करके सवा लाख रुपए कमाए, परिंतु थवयिं पच्चीस हजार रुपए रखकर शेष रुपए गिंगाराम को
दे ददए। वादपस राजापरु आने पर वे मसू लाधार बाररश की परवाह दकए बगैर वषों में ही पत्नी दवरह में बेबस , पत्नी से दमलने
ससरु ाल चले गए। वे यह भी थवीकारते हैं दक उन्हें के वल रत्नावली का ही मायापाश है , पत्रु तारापदत के प्रदत भी इतना मोहपाश
ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 353 | P a g e
नहीं है। बस इतना ही सनु ना था , रत्नावली तीखे थवर में बोली - "स्त्री और परुु ष में यही तो अिंतर होता है। नारी भले ही कामवश
माता क्यों न बने दकिंतु माता बनकर वह एक जगह दनष्काम भी हो जाती है और परुु ष दपता बनकर भी दादयत्वबोध भले प्रकार से
अनभु व नहीं करता। सच पछू ो तो वह दकसी के प्रदत अपना दादयत्व अनभु व नहीं करता। वह दनरे चाम का लोभी है , जीव में रमे राम
का नहीं।"3 तल ु सी उसी रात घर छोडकर चले गए। सीतावट के राथते में हनमु ान और वाल्मीदक ने थवप्न में आकर तल ु सीदास को
भाषा में रामायण की रचना करने की प्रेरणा दी।
इस प्रकार की प्रेरणा पाकर तल
ु सीदास जी ने सथिं कृ त रामायण को पनु ः भगवान राम के घर की बोली अवधी में
'रामचररतमानस' की रचना कर डाली। इस कायय को दवशेष सराहना दमली , दकिंतु वहााँ के मठाधीश तथा दवव्दान लोग इनसे ईष्याय
करने लगे , उनकी हरकतों से तिंग आकर वे अयोध्या को अलदवदा कर काशी चले गए। काशी नगरी में भी तल ु सीदास की प्रशिंसा
एविं दवरोध बराबर चलता रहा। तल ु सीदास की ख्यादत चारों ओर बढ गई। दसफय काशी में ही नहीं , अदपतु परू े देश में तलु सीदास एक
रामभक्त के रुप में थवीकृ त हुए। बाद में काशी भी अकालग्रथत और महामारीग्रथत हो गई। महामारी शािंत होने पर तल ु सी मथरु ा चले
गए। उनके जाने के पिात उनके दमत्र टोडर की दकसी ने हत्या कर दी , तल ु सी जी को जब यह पता चला तो उन पर बडा आघात
हुआ।
तलु सीदास जी की आयु बढने लगी थी। उन्हें वात -रोग सताने लगा , दफर भी रत्नावली को ददए वचन के अनसु ार वे
राजापरु पहुचाँ े और उसे जीवन के अिंदतम क्षणों में सनाथ कर ददया। तल ु सीदास दफर काशी लौट आए। उनकी शारीररक तकलीफें
बढने लगी। परू ा शरीर फुदसयों से भर गया। नींद नहीं आती , कभी-कभी मच्ू छाय भी आ जाती थी। तल ु सी जी एक ददन रात को थवप्न
में देखते हैं दक राम अपने हाथ से कलम लेकर तल ु सीदास की 'दवनयपदत्रका' पर सही कर रहे हैं। राम के सही करते ही तल ु सी का
थवप्न भिंग हो जाता है तथा वे आाँखे खोल रामू से दतदथ पछू ते हैं। दफर वे कहते हैं दक दपछले वषय रत्नावली आज ही के ददन गई थी।
उसके बाद वे अपने थवप्न की बात बताते हैं तथा बैठकर दवनयपदत्रका का अिंदतम छिंद धीरे -धीरे गाने लगे व दनढाल हो गए। अिंत में
उन्हें नीचे जमी पर ले दलया गया। तल ु सीदास जी की आाँखे एकाएक खल ु गई , सब के चेहरों को देखा , दीवार पर अिंदकत हनमु ान
और दसयाराम के दचत्रों की ओर देखा। देखते ही रहे ... देखते ही रहे। इस ससिं ार से एक ददव्य आत्मा दबदा हो चक ु ी थी। उपन्यास के
अदिं तम वाक्य हैं - बाहर ऐसी दबजली चमकी दक उसकी कौंध भीतर तक आ पहुचाँ ी। पानी जोर से बरस रहा था। सब की आाँखें भी
वैसी ही बरस रही थीं।

वनष्ट्कषग
नागर जी अपनी चररत्र सृदि के कारण दवशेष चचाय में रहे हैं। उन्होंने अपनी ताकतवर कलम से अदव्दतीय पात्रों की
सजयना की है। पात्र सृदि को लेकर डॉ . रामदवलास शमाय उनका बडा सटीक मल्ू यािंकन करते हैं -"कथाकार अमृतलाल नागर की यह
रचनावली भारतीय जीवन की दचत्रावली है। परु ाने रईस , नये रईस, दबगडे हुए रईस, साहूकार, जमींदार, सपिं दत्तहीन सामिंत , परु ोदहत,
कथावाचक, मध्यवगय के पढे -दलखे यवु क, गरीबी और बेरोजगारी का सामना करने वाला नौजवान , व्यदभचारी और पाखिंडी बडे
आदमी, हर तरह का अत्याचार सहने वाली दस्त्रयााँ अपने अदधकारों के दलए लडती हुई यवु दतयााँ , कथाकार, महात्मा, कदव, सतिं -
समाज के प्रायः हर थतर के लोग आपको नागर जी के सादहत्य में दमलेंगे। "4मानस का हसिं ' उपन्यास के दो प्रमख
ु पात्र हैं -
तलु सीदास और रत्नावली। कथानायक तल ु सीदास का चररत्र इस तरह दनरूदपत दकया गया है दक आने वाली पीदढयााँ यदद तल ु सी
के इसी चररत्र को ऐदतहादसक मानने लगें , तो कोई आियय नहीं। "

संदभग ग्रंथ -
** मानस का हाँस -अमृतलाल नागर
1) दहदिं ी के जीवनीपरक उपन्यास -डॉ. नवनीत ठक्कर -पृ.83
2) दहदिं ी ऐदतहादसक उपन्यास प्रदतमान एविं दवकासेदतहास -डॉ. सत्यपाल चघु -पृ.436
3) अमृतलाल नागर रचनावली -भाग 3 (मानस का हाँस )शरद नागर पृ.246
4) अमृतलाल नागर रचनावली -खिंड 1 - शरद नागर -भदू मका से -पृ.9

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 354 | P a g e

 छत्रपती राजषी शाहूप्रवणत स्त्री उन्नतीसाठी के लेल्या कायद्यांचा ऄभ्यास

सागर हररचंद्र एडके

)महादवद्यालय कवठे महािंकाळ .पी.व्ही.पी(

प्राचीन वैददक काळात स्त्रीला देवता मानले जात होते या काळात परुु ष प्रधान सथिं कृ ती असली तरीही दस्त्रयािंना .
थवतःचा पती . दस्त्रयािंना दशक्षण घेण्याचा अदधकार होता . अनेक गोिीत दस्त्रयािंना परु े परू थवातिंत्र्य होत . बरोबरीचे अदधकार होते
परिंतु उत्तर वैददक काळात या दथथ . दनवडण्याचा अदधकार होता तीत बदल झाला बऱ्याच क्षेत्रामिं ध्ये दस्त्रयाविं र मयायदा येऊ .
लागल्या, मध्ययगु ात दस्त्रयाच िं ी सामादजक दथथती काही प्रमाणात अशीच रादहली नतिं र मात्र मध्ययगु ाची दभतिं ढासळली आदण
आधदु नक यगु ाला सरुु वात झाली तेव्हा मात्र दस्त्रयाच्िं या सामादजक सधु ारणा सबिं धिं ी दवचार पढु े येऊ लागले एका बाजल ू ा दस्त्रयानिं ा .
दय्ु यम लेखनायाय मनथु मृतीचे समथयन करणाऱ्या सनातनी लोकाचिं ा एक गट आदण दसु ऱ्या बाजल ू ा दस्त्रयाच्िं या थवातत्र्िं याचा,
दशक्षणाचा परु थकार करणाऱ्या सधु ारकाच िं ा एक गट दनमायण झाला व्यापारी म्हणनू आलेल्या दिदटशानिं ी भारतात रा .जकीय सत्ता
प्रथथादपत के ली व व्यापाराच्या दृिीने भौदतक सधु ारणा करण्याचे प्रयत्न के ले पण भारतीयाच्िं या धादमयक बाबींच्या मध्ये हथतक्षेप
करताना सावध भदू मका बाळगली भारतीय दस्त्रयािंवर होणाऱ्या अन्याय व अत्याचारावर लगाम घालण्याची इग्रिं ज शासनाची इच्छा .
होती, परिंतु भारतीय लोकािंच्या उलट प्रदतदक्रया आल्याने दिदटशािंनी हे प्रयत्न थािंबवले परिंतु भारतातील राजा राममोहन रॉय .,
पिंदडत ईश्वरचिंद्र दवद्यासागर , महात्मा फुले यािंसारख्या स्त्री सधु ारणावादी समाजसधु ारकािंनी दिदटशािंच्या मदतीने सती प्रथा बिंदी ,
बालदववाह बिंदी, दवधवा पनु दवयवाह, दस्त्रयािंना दशक्षण यासारखे स्त्री सधु ारणािंचे अनेक कायदेशीर प्रयत्न के ले पण त्याला समाज .
कारण हे कायदे दिदटशािंनी के लेली होते आदण भारतीय लोकािंना ही बाब म्हणजे आपल्या धादमयक . मान्यता दमळाली नाही
परिंतु असाच एक प . बाबतीत परकीयािंचा हथतक्षेप वाटे ््रयत्न थवतःला कोणत्यही प्रकारच्या दवषमतेची झळ न पोचणाऱ्या
राजाने आपल्या सथिं थानात के ला छत्रपती शाहू महाराजािंनी आपल्या सथिं थानात . तो राजा म्हणजे छत्रपती शाहू महाराज .
शाहू महाराजािंनी थत् . दस्त्रयािंसाठी अनेक सामादजक कायदे के ले व त्याची कठोर अिंमलबजावणी के लीररयािंच्या सामादजक
पररदथथतीचा सखोल अभ्यास करून हे कायदे तयार के ले याचे अनेक सकारात्मक पररणाम झाले सथिं थानाच्या बाहेर इतर
सथिं थानातील याचा आदशय घेतला जाऊ लागला या .

उद्देश -
छत्रपती राजषी शाहूप्रदणत स्त्री उन्नतीसाठी के लेल्या कायद्यािंचा अभ्यास करणे .

१. वस्त्रयांना क्रूरपणे वागणूक देण्यास प्रवतबंध करणारा कायदा

कुटुिंबामध्ये दकिंवा सावयजदनक दठकाणी दस्त्रयािंना अमानषु दकिंवा क्रूर वागणकू देण्यास प्रदतबिंध करण्यासाठी हा कायदा
करण्यात आला तसेच दशक्षेची तरतदू देखील करण्यात आली या कायद्याला दस्त्रयािंना क्रूरपणाने वागदवण्याचे बिंद करण्याबिल“
२ असे नाव देण्यात आले व “दनयम ऑगथट . पासनू सथिं थानातील सवय लोकािंना तो लागू असेल असे नमदू करण्यात आले 1919
या . या कायद्यामध्ये कोणतीही सदिं दग्धता न ठे वता क्रूरपणाची वागणक ू म्हणजे काय याची सदवथतर व्याख्या के ली आहे
कायद्याखाली अपराध के ल्यास त्याला सहा मदहन्यापयंतची कै द आदण दोनशे रुपये पयंत दडिं असेल आदण जर ती स्त्री वयाने
लहान असेल तर ही दशक्षा दप्ु पट असेल .
उदाहरण
 एखादा परुु ष घरातील आपल्या बायकोच्या इच्छे दवरुद्ध एखाद्या परस्त्रीला आपल्या घरात ठे वत असेल व आपल्या
बायकोला शारीररक व मानदसक इजा करत असेल तर तो वरील कायद्यानसु ार गन्ु हेगार असेल .
 एखादा परुु ष आपल्या भावाच्या दवधवा पत्नीला सतत शारीररक दकिंवा मानदसक त्रास देत असेल तर तो वरील कायद्यानसु ार
गन्ु हेगार असेल .

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 355 | P a g e

 एखादा परुु ष बरे च ददवस आपल्या बायकोचा सहवास टाळतो दकिंवा मिु ाम दतची अवहेलना करतो तो गन्ु हेगार असेल .
 एकादी स्त्री आपल्या सनु ेला घरात दशवीगाळ करत असेल दकिंवा चारचौघात दतला वाटेल ते बोलनू दतच्या मनावर आघात
करत असेल तर ती गन्ु हेगार असेल.
 एखादा परुु ष आपल्या सावत्र भावािंना वाईट वागणक ू देऊन आपल्या सावत्र आईस शारीररक व मानदसक
 इजा देत असेल तर तो गन्ु हेगार असेल
 एखादा परुु ष वारिंवार आपल्या बायकोच्या चाररत्र्यावर सश िं य घेत असेल दकिंवा दतला वेडी असल्यासारखी वागणक
ू देत
असेल तर तो गन्ु हेगार असेल .
अशाप्रकारे सखोल तरतदु ी करून दस्त्रयािंना क्रूरपणे वागणक ू देण्यास कायद्याने प्रदतबिंध करण्यात आला या सवय गोिी .
लक्षात घेता क्रूरपणे वागणक ू म््हणजे कोणत्याही प्रकारची वाईट वागणक ू अशी व्याख्या करण्यात आली आहे यावरून स्त्री ही
आपली के वळ उपभोग्य वथतू आहे दतला आपण कशाही प्रकारे वागणक ू देऊ शकतो अशी समजतू असलेल्या परुु षािंना ही फार
मोठी चपराक होती वर उल्लेख के लेल्या चक ु ीच्या गोिी प्रत्यक्ष घडण्याअगोदर या गोिींची भीती जरी उत्पन्न झाली तरी देखील
प्रदतबिंधक उपाय म्हणनू यासाठी असणाऱ्या दशक्षकािंचा दवचार के ला जावा अशी ही एक अदद्रतीय तरतदू होती यावरून असे .
ददसते की दस्त्रयािंच्या वर होणाऱ्या अनेक प्रकारच्या अन्याय आदण अत्याचारापासनू , जाचापासनू सरिं क्षण देण्यासाठी शाहू
महाराजािंनी हा कायदा करून त्याच्या अिंमलबजावणीवर कठोर लक्ष ददले

२वववाह संबंधी कायदा .

शाहू महाराजािंनी के लेल्या दववाहसबिं िंधी कायद्याचे वैदशि्य म्हणजे त्यािंनी जातीव्यवथथेची दनमयल
ू न करण्यासाठी
आिंतरजातीय दववाह प्रोत्साहन ददले व आपल्या घरातील पतु णीचा दववाह त्यािंनी इदिं रू च्या होळकर घराण्यातील राजकुमारशी
करून ददला लग्न करत असतानाचे वेळी परुु षाचे . दववाह सबिं िंधी कयदे करत असताना महाराजािंनी काही दवशेष दनयम बनवले .
लग्न गैर कायदेशीर ठरे ल असा कोणताही नातेसबिं . वषे पणू य असले पादहजे १४ व स्त्रीचे वय १८ वय्िंध दकिंवा रक्त सबिं िंध नसावा .
दववाह कोणाच्याही . चे दवशेष दववाहाचे दनयमाप्रमाणे थथादनक सरकारकडे दववाहाचे नोंदणी करणे आवश्यक १९१८ सन
पद्धतीने लावला तरी चालेल पण त्यावेळी इकरारावर सही करणाऱ्या तीन साक्षीदाराच्या समक्ष दववाह करावा व सवांना ऐकू
“. नवरा म्हणनू पत्करली आहे/माझा कायदेशीर बायको/मी तजु ला माझी“ जाईल अशा तऱ्हेनेअसे उच्चारावे.

३घटस्फोटा संबंवधत कायदा .

सथिं थािंतील अनेक जातींमध्ये घटथफोट अगदी सहजररत्या घेतल्या जाऊ शकतो व हे असे चालू रादहल्यास समाज
सवयथवी दनत्य भ्रि होईल त्यासाठी घटथफोट घेण्यासाठी दवशेष दनयम बनवण्यात आले व त्यामध्ये थपि तरतदु ी करण्यात आल्या .
यातनू . पासनू हे अमलात आले १९१९ ऑगथट २ असे सबिं ोधण्यात आले व “ कोल्हापरू चे काडी मोडण्याचे दनयम“ या दनयमानिं ा
. दििन पारशी व मदु थलम यानिं ा वगळण्यात आले
या कायद्यामधील महत्त्वाचे दनयम-
 नवऱ्याने काडी मोडण्याकररता अजय करावयाचा असल्यास-
दववाह झाल्यापासनू आपल्या बायकोने चाररत्र्यहीन थवरूपाचा अपराध के ला दकिंवा कोणत्याही सयिं दु क्तक कारणादशवाय दोन
वषय थवतःहून नवऱ्यापासनू लाबिं राहत असेल तर नवऱ्याला काडी मोडण्याकरता अजय करता येईल .
 बायकोने काडी मोडण्याकरता अजय करावयाचा असल्यास -
दववाह झाल्यापासनू आपल्या नवऱ्याने थवतः अगर दसु ऱ्या कोणत्याही इसमाक िं डून भारतीय दडिं सदिं हता ३२० मध्ये ददलेल्या
व्याख्याप्रमाणे जबर दख ु ापतीचा गन्ु हा के ल्यास .
याखेरीज आपल्या नवऱ्याला महारोग झाल्याचे आढळून आल्यास .
आपला नवरा वेडा आगर नपसु क िं आहे असे सादबत झाल्यास .
बायकोला काडी मोडण्याकरता अजय करता येईल.

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 356 | P a g e

 काडीमोड करण्याकररता कोणताही अजय आल्यास अजायमध्ये नमदू के लेल्या गोिीसबिं िंधानेच शक्य दततक्या योग्य ररदतने
कोटायने आपली खात्री करून घ्यावी ज्या कारणाथतव अजय के ला . आहे त्यामध्ये नवरा दकिंवा बायको सहभागी आहेत का हे
खात्रीने तपासनू पहावे.

४ववधवा पनु ववगवाहाचा कायदा .

भारतातील अनेक मागास जातीमध्ये दवधवािंना पनु दवयवाह करण्याचे थवातिंत्र्य होते परिंतु उच्चवणीय व ससु थिं कृ त
समजल्या जाणाऱ्या जातीमध्ये मात्र दवधवािंना पनु दवयवाह करण्याचा अदधकार नव्हता अशा समाजातील दस्त्रयािंना पनु दवयवाहाचा
अदधकार शाहू महाराजािंनी ददला.

५ अंतरजातीय वववाह कायदा .

दहदिं ू व जैन या दोन मख्ु य धमांच्या लोकािंना जातीदनबंध न पाळता दोघािंपैकी आपापल्या कोणत्याही धमायच्या मनष्ु याशी
दववाह करण्याची मभु ा देण्यात आली . रोजी कोल्हापरू गॅझेट मध्ये प्रदसद्ध करण्यात आला १९१९ जल ु ै १२ व हा कायदा ददनािंक .
वषे पणू य झालेल्या स्त्रीला दववाहासाठी दपत्याची अथवा पालकाची समिं ती घेण्याची आवश्यकता नाही १८ तसेच या कायद्यानसु ार.
त्यामळु े स्त्रीला आपला जोडीदार दनवडण्याचे थवातिंत्र्य देण्यात आले तत्कालीन कालमयायदा लक्षात घेता राजषी शाहू महाराजािंचे .
. दववाहदवषयक धोरण अदतशय परु ोगामी होते हे लक्षात येते

६देवदासी प्रथा प्रवतबंध कायदा .

देवाच्या नावावर मल
ु ी सोडण्याच्या परिंपरे तनू देवदासी हा वगय दनमायण झाला यामध्ये जोकतीन , मरु ळीन, भादवन असे
अनेक प्रकार आहेत अिंधश्रद्धेपोटी व धमायच्या नावावर दस्त्रयािंवर होणाऱ्या अन्याय अत्याचाराला प्रदतबिंध घालण्यासाठी शाहू .
.रोजी हा कायदा के ला 1920 जानेवारी 17 महाराजािंनी

समारोप
पादिमात्य दशक्षणाचा प्रसार मदिं गतीने होत असल्याने दहदिं थु थानातील दस्त्रयाचिं ी दथथती सधु ारण्यासाठी त्या दशक्षणाचा
उपयोग व्हावा दततका होत नाही दहदिं थु थानातील दहदिं ु कुटुिंबाच्िं या पढु ायांपना दवशेष प्रसगिं ी दस्त्रयानिं ा हलके शासन करण्याची .
परवानगी ददली आहे, परिंतु त्या परवानगीचा दरुु पयोग होऊन दस्त्रयानिं ा वाटेल तशा वाईट रीतीने वागवण्याचा आपणाला सनातन
कालाचा परवानाच दमळाला आहे , अशी परुु षाच िं ी समजतू झालेली ददसते म्हणनू दस्त्रयाविं र होत असलेल्या जाचाचिं े जे प्रकार .
भारतीय दडिं सदिं हतेच्या मयायदमे ध्ये येऊ शकत नाहीत, अशा प्रकारच्या जाचापिं ासनू दस्त्रयानिं ा सरिं क्षण दमळावे आदण दस्त्रयाचिं ी
उन्नती व्हावी म्हणनू हे दनयम करणे योग्य असल्याचे शाहू महाराजािंच्या लक्षात आले व या दनयमािंचा उगम झाला .

ISBN– 978-1-304-46114-8 357 | P a g e